The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutContract 42808 CITY SECRBARY CONTRACT W. FORTWORTH SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION - MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS CITY PROJECT No. 01623 JANUARY 2012 Betsy Price Tom Higgins Mayor O Interim City Manager v S. Frank Crumb, P.E. — �I Director, Water Department Charly Angadicheril Assistant Director, Water Production Department Andrew T. Cronberg, P.E. Assistant Director, Engineering and Fiscal Services Department — PREPARED FOR: The City of Fort Worth CP&Y,Inc. TBPE REG No. F-1741 OFFICIAL RECORD CITY SECRETARY FT. WORTH, TX M&C Review Page 1 of 2 COUNCIL FORT IVc) LITY AGENDA COUNCIL ACTION: Approved on 1/10/2012 DATE: 1/10/2012 REFERENCE C-25403 LOG NAME: 60SOUTH HOLLY MOTOR NO.: AND SWITCHGEAR REPL CODE: C TYPE: NOW PUBLIC NO CONSENT HEARING: SUBJECT: Authorize Execution of a Contract with Archer Western Contractors, LTD., in the Amount of $3,783,000.00 for the South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvement Project, Located at 1500 Eleventh Avenue (COUNCIL DISTRICT 9) RECOMMENDATION: It is recommended that the City Council authorize execution of a contract with Archer Western Contractors, LTD., in the amount of$3,783,000.00 for the South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station motor and switchgear replacement and electrical improvement project, located at 1500 Eleventh Avenue. DISCUSSION: The South Holly High Service Pump Station was constructed in 1957. The pump station consists of four 30 million gallon per day pumps driven by 1,750 HP electric motors and one 15 million gallon per day pump driven by a 900 HP motor. The electrical switchgear and motors have been in service for over 50 years. On June 19, 2007, (M&C C-22199) City Council authorized the North and South Holly Condition Assessment. This assessment recommended replacement of the South Holly High Service Pump Station pump motors and switchgear due to the criticality of the station to the operation of the water system, coupled with the historically high corrective maintenance costs and safety concerns. On December 14, 2010, (M&C C-24653) City Council authorized an Engineering Agreement for the design of the South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station motor and switchgear replacement and electrical improvement project. The project was advertised for bid in the Fort Worth Star-Telegram on September 29, 2011 and October 6, 2011. On November 17, 2011, the following four bids were received: BIDDER 11TOTAL BID 11CONTRACT TIME Archer Western Contractors $3,783,000.00 IF485 Calendar Days AUI Contractors $3,933,000.00 Ark Contracting Services $3,981,000.00 Reynolds, Inc. $4,000,000.00 This project will replace the medium voltage switchgear for the South Holly Water Treatment Plant and High Service Pump Station, the five existing pump motors, medium and low voltage motor control centers, lighting and ventilation equipment at the South Holly High Service Pump Station, the medium voltage switch and low voltage motor control center at the South Holly Water Plant Chemical Building, and the medium voltage switch and low voltage panel boards at the North Holly Water Treatment Plant Filter and Administration Buildings. In addition to the contract cost, $100,000.00 is provided for project contingencies. http://apps.cfwnet.org/council_packet/mc_review.asp?ID=16333&councildate=l/10/2012 1/11/2012 M&C Review Page 2 of 2 Archer Western Contractors, LTD., is in compliance with the City's M/WBE Ordinance by committing to 24 percent M/WBE participation. The City's goal on this project is 18 percent. This project is located in COUNCIL DISTRICT 9. FISCAL INFORMATION/CERTIFICATION: The Financial Management Services Director certifies that funds are available in the current capital budget, as appropriated, of the Water Capital Projects Fund. TO Fund/Account/Centers FROM Fund/Account/Centers P265 541200 601530163280 $3,783,000.00 ......................... ......... Submitted for City Manager's Office by: Fernando Costa (6122) Originating Department Head: S. Frank Crumb (8207) Additional Information Contact: Chris Harder(8293) ATTACHMENTS 60SOUTH HOLLY MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPL map.pdf http://apps.cfwnet.org/council_packet/mc review.asp?ID=16333&councildate=1/10/2012 1/11/2012 ADDENDUM NO. 4 TO .. SPECIFICATIONS AND BID DOCUMENTSFOR CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS CITY PROJECT NO.01632 .. TO: PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS AND PLAN HOLDERS The Plans, Specifications,and Contract Documents shall be modified as required by the following items: Item 4-1 Specifications, PART D—SPECIAL CONDITIONS: .. In paragraph D-15 TIME OF COMPLETION: Add the following to the end of the paragraph: "Liquidated damages associated with the fourteen day shutdown will be assessed at $5,000 per calendar day, as outlined in Section 01310." .. Item 4-2 Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section 16010: Electrical General Provision: In paragraph 2.01.1-1: Replace the entire paragraph with the following sentence"All electrical equipment to be designed in accordance with/IBC-2009 &ASCE 7-05 code for Seismic Design" .. Item 4-3 Plans, Sheet E-SH-7 Note by symbol 2, add a second sentence "Manhole to be supplied by the owner and to be installed under this contract." Item 4-4 Plans, Sheet E-SH-21. Note by symbol 2, add a second sentence "Exact location of J-Boxes to be determined per field conditions, J-Boxes to be located inside the basement, J-Boxes .. shall be installed per NEC requirement with enough clearance surrounding the boxes, longer run of wire and conduits may be required in order to properly located the J-Boxes inside the basement." ADDENDUM 4- PAGE 1 i Item 4-5 +� Plans. Sheet E-NH-6: Insert Note 5, as follows: "5. Remove panel boards W2-A, W2-113, and W2-C and replace with three new panel boards" i THIS ADDENDUM IS MADE PART OF THE SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, AND SHALL BE ACKNOWLEDGED ON THE PROPOSAL AND ON THE BID ENVELOPE. .. CP&Y, INC. Timothy E. Campbell, P.E. i +* November 14, 2011 0"' ....""" T1MQIHY E. CAMPBELL Telephone: 214-640-1711 l� �NAt i i i r ADDENDUM 4- PAGE 2 ADDENDUM NO. 3 TO SPECIFICATIONS AND BID DOCUMENTSFOR CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS CITY PROJECT NO.01632 TO: PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS AND PLAN HOLDERS The Plans, Specifications,and Contract Documents shall be modified as required by the following items: Item 3-1 The bid opening date shall be revised from November 10, 2011 to November 17, 2011. Item 3-2 Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section 16151: Medium Voltage Pump Electric Motor: In paragraph 1.01.E: Replace in the second sentence "motor is suitable for an across the line starting application" with "motor is suitable for both an across the line starting application and reduced Voltage Autotransformer (RVAT) starting application at the 65 percent and 80 percent taps". In paragraph 1.04.A: Add the following to the end of the paragraph: "19. Provide motor speed -torque curve and motor speed -current curves showing that the motor will successfully start and accelerate the load and operate using a Reduced Voltage Autotransformer (RVAT) starter at the 65 percent and 80 percent taps." 1b In paragraph 1.04.B.2: Add the following to the end of the paragraph: "w. Provide motor speed - torque curve and motor speed - current curves showing that the motor will successfully start and accelerate the load and operate using a Reduced Voltage Autotransformer (RVAT) starter at the 65 percent and 80 percent taps." E h ADDENDUM 3-PAGE 1 In paragraph 2.01.E Replace "Applicable motors shall be suitable for operation on an across-the-line starter"with "Applicable motors shall be suitable for operation on a Reduced Voltage Autotransformer (RVAT) starter set at 65 percent and 80 percent taps and also an across-the-line starter." In paragraph 2.03.E.2: Replace "Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor starter supply terminals dipping to 80 percent of motor rated voltage"to "Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor starter supply terminals dipping to 65 percent of motor rated voltage." In paragraph 2.03.G: Replace the paragraph with: "G. Starting at reduced voltage: Each motor shall be capable of producing the required starting torque as required at 65 percent voltage as required by the pump. All motor driven equipment shall be capable of starting the pump against a closed control valve." In paragraph 2.09.A_10(Table): Replace "3#1/0 (5kV), #6G. (600V), 3" conduit— PFCC cables" with "3 #3/0 (5W), #4G. (600V), 3"conduit—PFCC cables" In paragraph 2.12.13.1 Replace "Coupling shall be KOP-FLEX 2257980 Special per KOPFLEX SER# 583425" with "Coupling shall be KOP-FLEX 2275980 Special per KOPFLEX SER# 583425." Add the following to the end of the paragraph: "Contractor/Motor supplier shall field verify the type of coupling required and coordinate with the Owner for exact requirements." Item 3-3 Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section 16280: Power Factor Correction Capacitors: In paragraph 2.02.E Delete the words"Dry type"from the first sentence. In paragraph 2.02.1 Modify the paragraph as follows: "I. A red blown fuse pop-up indicator shall be provided on each capacitor fuse." ADDENDUM 3-PAGE 2 Add paragraph 2.021: "Reduced voltage non-reversing autotransformer closed transition starters shall be provided with: -(1)three pole contractor used as a run contractor - (1) auxiliary enclosure with a three pole vacuum neutral contractor and one autotransformer with 50, 65, and 80 percent taps. -(1)definite time transfer relay" In paragraph 2.03.E Replace in the paragraph the words"terminal box"with "enclosure". a In paragraph 2.03.F Replace in the paragraph the words"terminal box"with"enclosure". In paragraph 2.03.F.1 Modify the paragraph to read: "1. 3#3/0 (5kV) conductors with stress cones and a#4 (600V) ground conductor in a 3" conduit for the capacitors associated with the 2000 HP motors." In paragraph 3.03.13.2 Delete the word "automatic"from the first sentence. Delete the second sentence in its entirety. In paragraph 3.05.A Delete the word"automatic"from the sentence. Item 3-4 Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section, 16345: Medium Voltage Switchgear In paragraph 2.03.B.8, Delete this sentence. Item 3-5 Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section 16380: Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Switchgear: In paragraph 2.01.A: Add "General Electric"to the list of acceptable manufacturers ADDENDUM 3- PAGE 3 Item 3-6 Plans, Sheet G-02: Add sheet 22 A, S-SH-4 Switchgear Foundation Details I and sheet 22 B, S-5H-5 Switchgear Foundation Details II to the Index Item 3-7 Plans, Sheet E-SH-7: Replace this sheet with this new sheet. Item 3-8 Plans, sheet E-SH-13 Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with the attached sheet E-SH-13. Item 3-9 Plans, sheet E-SH-14 Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with the attached sheet E-SH-14. Item 3-10 Plans,Sheet E-SH-17: Replace the wire size to the PFCC for the 2000hp motors from "341/0, 146G"to"3- #3/0,1 44G". Item 3-11 Plans, Sheet E-SH-22: Replace "CR2" by "CRY on the normally close contact to the ER Close No Hold Closed solenoid valve on detail 1. Replace M and MX motor contact relays by appropriate relays as required by the Reduce Voltage Auto Transformer manufacturer. Item 3-12 Plans, sheet M-SH-1 Change"hot water"to"steam"on all notes. Change "Drain" piping to"steam condensate" on all notes. On General Notes number 1, replace the note with the following: 1. Demolition of mechanical equipment and piping shall include the removal of hangers and all support brackets. All wall and floor penetrations shall be filled and patched to match existing. ADDENDUM 3-PAGE 4 On "Note by Symbol" number 3, replace note in its entirety with the following: "I Demolish all boiler flue from horizontal position in the basement level. Vertical boiler flue in chase shall be abandoned in place. Cap flue in basement where it exits the chase." Item 3-13 Plans, sheet M-SH-2 Change"hot water'to"steam"on all notes. Change"Drain"piping to"steam condensate" on all notes. On General Notes number 1, replace the note with the following: "1. Demolition of mechanical equipment and piping shall include the removal of _ hangers and all support brackets. All wall and floor penetrations shall be filled and patched to match existing. Item 3-14 Plans, sheet M-SH-4 On "Note by Symbol" number 2, replace 3"HW with 3"STEAM. On "Note by Symbol" number 3, the sentence shall be revised to read as follows: "I Remove existing shrubs in way of new duct openings. Drill pilot holes for duct openings and confirm duct penetrations are not in conflict with interior structural beams and other work inside the basement before proceeding with shrub removal and pad/equipment layout. On "Note by Symbol", ADD new note number 4 to read as follows: "4. Replace exhaust grille in restroom with new type eg-1, 10"x10"exhaust grille." Item 3-15 Plans, sheet M-SH-5 On General Notes, add note number 2 to read as follows: "2. Aim deflector on unit heaters down so heat is directed to operator level." On General Notes, add note number 3 to read as follows: "3. Aim re-circulation fans down so airflow is directed to operators and pump motors." ADDENDUM 3- PAGE 5 On General Notes, add note number 4 to read as follows: "4. Terminate flue vents at least 4 feet from operable windows. On "Note by Symbol" number 1, ADD the following sentence after "SEE SECTION"A" ON M-SH-8": "Drill pilot holes for duct openings and confirm duct penetrations are not in conflict with interior structural beams and other work inside the basement before proceeding with shrub removal and pad/equipment layout." Item 3-16 Plans, sheet M-SH-7 On"Note by Symbol' number 2, revise to read as follows: "Remove boiler flue hood and cap roof curb with aluminum plate, gauge 16. Seal all edge gaps air and water tight. Mechanically secure plate to curb." Item 3-17 Plans, Sheet S-SH-4. Add this sheet to the Package Item 3-18 Plans, Sheet S-SH-5. Add this sheet to the Package Item 3-19 Plans, Sheet E-SH-29: Replace "FRONT ELEVATION" by "REAR ELEVATION". Remove the note "4" concrete housekeeping pad". k THIS ADDENDUM IS MADE PART OF THE SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, AND SHALL BE ACKNOWLEDGED ON THE PROPOSAL AND ON THE BID ENVELOPE. CP&Y, INC. Ivy, /1 OF Timothy E. Campbell, P.E. f. November 4, 2011 ...... ...................CAMPBELL Telephone: 214-640-1711 .. ..81011 ,SCE. � �PiAL ADDENDUM 3- PAGE 6 6 LE9L0 l4LL-d i 03tl ws un �^ louem:�°N P-1-11 nano T'N101 xo N�xixo si "�3iv s �iaan NVId N3MOd (3UVA e n 'ON 103fOtld tl31VM Iw�e axiM -ddEdWtlJ 1�analna ' :w u—uaa oanvo i NOIIVIS dvynd 30IAd3S HOIH 1 V OIl110313 a oaw :=a=•o N N HIHOM 1tlOd AO AM OM�tA �11 moisia w_p=�s's=c o HIMUIO IWM ua1LLVMM UM ATM N11106 NpJQwZwC9 �o¢"�jcZLomF7>S oo>3a�x��<°aaz_3In�„¢�>zp_iwOWm-i'w�zWp�ocia SwowmHw�CSoo o��Wa,i�UovoHzrc a¢wmmor�dmj wmiZyodo�x ow"S�laOo,.�oo�daQQ8� °bmmsoi mQo�4awiZp S�pdJpwi Z�rc<swwrNSz�o.o�-F�S rcEOOz oa�Fzs oaE�m 4o N0m oO4aoOoCco0EoO c�i �CF oIoz��owHro~n<O�$$m poppoi wWW�coO zJoo�xr WoBFoo�wya��oQQF=m's_o0� zou<xoo~U—x$<ffmfz l] mIOA] wBz�>zS��w`��"zFat''<oSza` owm -{oazmo m�oo lWw FmcmO3 Gzs Z -4 Orp Y— .- ozmc0wzZ�a4aS wo05&ocndwm�'o � o�� s wwxUeo� 28 HUI 9FZpo-5momo .mowboaWS zw oF W do �NQ :oo 2" z�Eg? ol� .�ZHZ aO� lZW - a EoZq@ � �FxgNJWz o � 0WN�2 � zKmo wf�fl z waS z � LHQ98d oz 4 ff zo 'fi JH 1G,wp 90 U G < z 1Wi aoo� w oo zv Pug Z "o_ >$wwazrc> �i 0mo Po z Z �� d00 oKmJOor��i.++ OM-2FQ w $ 0 oNmof�mNwco�a w� z MF3 i o Ho tz qFx Z w< x F w .O 2o69 O wmZ z " Fi o o o 0 w M@ maa o � z 23m 3 �zzw mhamniai z Q � op mo z<ow uvwo aNO SF 9 oS � pavW'l .0 rc< J �G U \ V\ 0 ® ;If O / N s f ; I If r !f If U r a ff r i If r �p 8 If r y9 s� O O op � mm UU f m�^ O �G O m S� 00 00 NVId ON11HO1l HOOIA dwnd 'ON NOUVIS dwnd 301AH38 HOIN IVOIU10313 HIUOM lHO:l.40 A113 4 95�h q vnz-:1-03H SIOHMN9015 as3aud go 0 o II a z Z:� wNo z 0 a- zpz M) sow0 a- LLJ 0 T L u V) l 0 r > I L� c� li 4 li ri 4 �l 16 1� LLJ V)Ld Lj d: < =mom x5f x>> >,> I. > Tl- 3 1 0 iLl V) 30 < D Ld e 38 00 .1 CL 30 El �rr m ej a- HE— 534 'ON ZSO O3 H £ H�aans r<n<ra.�1x N °Nnnpr>�3 � LOLHMALaI,sotNt3 HF aaro:ipda mAaRl,�da�y � 'It� Nvia 1nOvi aOloW 103POHd H31VM CAM) NO1tl1S dWld 30IAa3S HJIH wtsvw'd �Mwa w S o lYOltl10313 H1HOM 1HOd dO A113 ---•""�`�— ^-••'+AID' SSON'�:peu6lsaa 1I1-dOMM0,� jf� •� '^'' �� Holswe lNdid 1N3wttl31ll N31tlM A'1lOH HUI05 L l(6t/60:a}op �j" 03H TIMM' 353311d 3 0 � maMAIN a sww w�E o o� 'oo?w�oa=m¢ _ WHO R M P aoNOW� �N� owos �i4 o.ow�aNca�J or-a1 Man 34 Komw Cm. WE (.aWOZ ¢j�3 UOOQ UgOQw OpOOpOz nla ?mom ,�?> 3z- oaf¢ o z,zow moa �o¢ s z�k Oo�N w�F_.w Q�-oz Sjj Z W16 tt'ma o 0 O x ¢ �Y W8 O m - ova p �o�a o ¢ -3 zow m a wKUJ s ora Kjo � �o��o ¢U C'-r'ww �aF o¢w z_oi w _! ca5 p .�rii w 0 w w o w o -"Nw Fga zoow boo �N'o c�'^w�oo�z o m goon IVA wd41s za w � ¢ its. &Go1owzzo 0 00 MY � � oaoz �NwNNWo�_F e¢. } o4oz QT>i a>owo� g �ozYnz > i U � � 02 zg< waw o9 o�oOz _ m < gO 'm - Vh wVH ¢_¢ u, zOp > �Wa ww zW O w� a Lzio�z x Vw,- __ r O U� ns ma p w W TO"' x�n r;wgH Eom0E ¢ Sva=i wa a4M.2 ~ Sig! wamS0 .otV.>1wU E�zFa Vn.GUV¢Ut a as ¢e¢i UII-3x w¢ x N N d n a in w .: N n ui � J 0 -71 o W N. � w W I w �a U 1 ~ it MR a o 7 + 0 0 V .- I1� I Z o o l Doss o - I w� > z � �! kip�Cn III,WZ O -i p o L—e--- -- \la Ij T-7 it 1 b 1 i aNM {o cNi � 4 i � m ❑ 1� , i -I N a 0 0 n z o V � I U U N iJ L ____ ___ a f— N 1 L }} 60 i 0 i g ll o wz � a a ! II �I�I r g F. w� 1-1 'ON 103road H31vm Tz AW) NOIlVONno:j 51v3oHolims 1 lvun.Lonu i Is cn cn Himom 100A AO Allo H,L-dOtAJ.SOJ ANrW WKWAL UM ATW KM o 016 op., _8 ano z 7. -Who --- ----- -i NI O� It Fl�,pi E> 11 1 — 71 —4ml 7-11 zo MR d-6-8a z—z/, Lill- Lj 71N 1 0 -------� 3ov89 NT.4 -0 ZO —IE°xomz Z. w 6 ra;8< 26- ----------- zl u 0 co uj 3dO-IS Z/1 o 30v8D Nij n IRMA zemo tva",a __-111. "7 .o�.-L a,, �, , ".."_�,11-11 11.��,v .1 11 sliv.L3a tnm : �Ii.31 O en y N 103POild N31VM �,Ay N0IIVGNn03 mv3oHoiims wunionmis HIHOM IuO:f:10 AiM u-som tH0 3 1 3 ypppUpXP wM5;�R I I I I I III 8 II II II Il III I IF _ff ___I I II II z il z 11- 11 —JI o I z I ADDENDUM NO. 2 TO AL SPECIFICATIONS AND BID DOCUMENTS FOR CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS ,W CITY PROJECT NO. 01632 TO: PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS AND PLAN HOLDERS The Plans, Specifications,and Contract Documents shall be modified as required by the following items: Item 2-1 Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section 01310: Construction Schedule: Delete paragraph 1.04.8.3 and replace it by the following: "3.South Holly Plant Shutdown: A. Sequence the demolition for South Holly such that at any time two pumps are available and that power to the administration building is not interrupted. One electrical service shall be available at all times. B. Anticipated sequence: 1. Installation of South Holly Switchgear 2. Middle Holly Electrical Service modification, including connection to South Holly Swithgear 3. Demolition of one set of conductors from South Holly High Service Pump Station to .. Administration Building 4. Provide one set of conductors from South Holly Switchgear to Administration Building 5. Demolition of partial electrical gear at South Holly High Service Pump Station ' 6. Installation of first new Motor Control Center 7. Replacement of three pump motors including testing of pumps 8. Modifications to South Holly Electrical Service to provide power to South Holly Switchgear .. 9. Demolition of remaining conductors from South Holly High Service Pump Station to Administration Building 10. Provide remaining conductors from South Holly Switchgear to Administration Building 11. Demolition of remaining electrical gear at South Holly High Service Pump Station 12. Installation of second motor control center at South Holly High Service Pump Station 13. Demolition of remaining pump motors 14. Installation of remaining pump motors including startup. a. South Holly Plant will undergo a 2 weeks shutdown (14 consecutive days) for the needs of the project between October 1gt and January 30th. b. The earliest the contractor can take the South Holly Plant off-line will be October 15t. c. Working hours: week-end work will be allowed during the two weeks plant t, shutdown. d. Work to be completed during the two weeks plant shutdown: ADDENDUM 2- PAGE 1 ry (i) Chemical Building: (a) Replacement of the chemical building low voltage MCC, (b) Connection of the chemical building MCC to transformers T5 and T6 located outside of the chemical building, (c) Connection of the chlorine building MCC to transformer T6. e. Liquidated damages for the two weeks plant shutdown are based on the following: (i) Inability to pump out of South Holly HSPS, resulting in higher risk to Fort Worth Water District, (ii) Inability to utilize the South Holly WTP, resulting in higher risk to Fort Worth Water District, (iii) Inconvenience to staff located at South Holly HSPS building. f. Motor delivery: Motors shall be delivered on site prior to switchgear .. replacement and two weeks shutdown." Item 2-2 Specifications,PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section 16020: Utilities: .. In paragraph 3.01.1-1. Replace reference to"Section 01110"with "Section 01310" In paragraph 3.01.1. Replace reference to"Section 01110"with "Section 01310" In paragraph 3.01..J. Replace paragraph 3.01.J.1 with the following: "Disconnect of the feeders to be performed by the utility. Contractor to follow •• construction sequencing in Section 01310." Delete paragraph 3.01.J.2 in its entirety Delete paragraph 3.01.J.3 in its entirety .. Item 2-3 Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section 16345: Medium Voltage Switchgear: Insert paragraph 2.03 after paragraph "2.02 Equipment". Paragraph 2.03 shall read: "2.03 WEATHERPROOF Enclosure .. A. Weatherproofing of the gear: The medium voltage outdoor gear shall be weatherproofed. End covers and rear covers shall be gasketed and sealed. Filters shall be added to ventilation louvers. Roof of the gear section shall be provided with a slope to prevent water accumulation on top of the gear. .. Equipment shall be painted and undercoated for outdoor service. The switchgear shall be of NEMA 3R construction. B. Protected Aisle Walk-in Construction: A 75" deep weatherproof aisle of 14 .. gauge steel should be added to the front of the weatherproofed gear. Doors with padlocks and panic latches shall be provided at the end of each aisle. Space ADDENDUM 2- PAGE 2 qr (min 36") shall be provided at the left end of the lineup to allow for device door swing. Inlet ventilation openings for aisle shall be louvered, equipped with filters and located on the aisle doors. Exhaust fan shall be through screened openings designed into the roof perimeter overhang. A grounding type receptacle shall be provided at each end of the aisle. A 120V grounding, duplex convenience outlet and three way switching for ceiling lights shall be provided at each end of aisle. .. Ceiling mounted light sockets for 120 volt, 100W, incandescent bulbs shall be furnished (one per vertical section). Enclosure shall be provided with a fused block to feed the ventilation fan, lights and receptacles and power to those shall .. be through CPT coming from the switchgear." Renumber paragraphs after paragraph 2.03 accordingly. Item 2-4 Specifications,PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section 16482: Medium Voltage Motor Control Center(MCC): In paragraph 2.03.A.5: "Replace content of the paragraph with: "Motor starter types shall be: Reduced Voltage Non Reversing Autotransformer(RVNR-AT)"." Add paragraph 2.021: "Reduced voltage non-reversing autotransformer closed transition starters shall be "� provided with: -(1)three pole contactor used as a run contactor - (1) auxiliary enclosure with a three pole vacuum neutral contactor and one autotransformer with 50, 65, and 80 percent taps. -(1)definite time transfer relay" aw Item 2-5 Specifications, PART E —TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section 16055: Power System Studies: Insert paragraph 10 after paragraph 1.02.13.9, Paragraph 10 shall read: "Motor starting curve showing compliance with utility requirement." Insert paragraph D after paragraph 2.01.C, Paragraph D shall read: "Contractor shall be responsible for gathering the existing pump curves, motors and starters required data to perform the motor starting study." •• Insert paragraph 2.06, Motor Starting Study after paragraph 2.05 "Back-to back switching study and analysis' paragraph 2.06 shall read: "A. Contractor shall provide a motor starting study showing selection of all equipment including protection will perform and will meet the utility requirement for voltage dip less than Oncor motor start guidelines are 5% maximum at the primary of the service transformer and 2% maximum at the substation bus. The study shall show the dynamic model of the following with selected starter, ADDENDUM 2- PAGE 3 capacitor and protective device." .� 1. Bus voltage 2. Motor voltage 3. Motor rotor current 4. Load torque .. 5. Motor speed 6. Motor stator current 7. Motor torque 8. Accelerating torque 9. Motor slip 10. Reactive power(WAR) 11. Power factor 12. Real power(kW) 13. Total power(WA)" Item 2-6 Plans, Sheet M-SH-5: Electrical equipment layout for equipment shown in the electrical room shall be deleted and replaced with the layout shown on sheet E-SH-9. Item 2-7 Plans, Sheet E-SH-1: r Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-SH-1. .. Item 2-8 Plans, Sheet E-SH-3: .. Note by symbol#1 Delete the last two sentences. Item 2-9 Plans, Sheet E-SH-7: .. Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-SH-7. Item 2-10 Plans, Sheet E-SH-8: .. Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-SH-8. Item 2-11 Plans, Sheet E-SH-9: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-SH-9. Item 2-12 .. Plans, Sheet E-SH-12: ADDENDUM 2 - PAGE 4 .. Electrical equipment layout for equipment shown in the electrical room shall be deleted and replaced with the layout shown on sheet E-SH-9. r Item 2-13 Plans, Sheet E-SH-13: Electrical equipment layout for equipment shown in the electrical room shall be deleted and replaced with the layout shown on sheet E-SH-9. r Item 2-14 Plans, Sheet E-SH-17: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-SH-17. Item 2-15 Plans, Sheet E-SH-27: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-SH-27. r Item 2-16 Plans, Sheet E-SH-29: r Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-SH-29. F, THIS ADDENDUM IS MADE PART OF THE SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, AND F--r SHALL BE ACKNOWLEDGED ON THE PROPOSAL AND ON THE BID ENVELOPE. _ CP&Y, INC. .. Timothy E. Campbell, P.E. t. ............................... ��l;J/�/ TIMOTHY E. CAMPBELL October 31, 2011 Telephone: 214-640-1711 81011 � TONAL ADDENDUM 2 - PAGE 5 Z99LO WIVA 103a ms ss s "o �^ lol�Hmu'ON�oarwa nAd� '�ao'"o"Na'iwsu%3,vas dla3n NVId NOIlIIOW3O OaVA p „a 'ON 103fONd tl31tlM I fffd, ,._ _Lwla� a" --d',iaedrvYo —/"/.j NOIIVIS dyvnd 33IAa3S HOIH 1SidflJ 3 AWOIU Aab3l0�W'3:ux.wC w J♦` �( Lr? I dOIa1O313 H1tlOM ltlOd d0 AlIO HibOla0 M `P Moisia ro:oaa5�sao i qua va��a'�ATdI allgG :a:oa W F > w o r ¢ f?zo 3s �-" ioLi Ecoi o�ai of ofgqo �� w x r z ay zip z o� w< o wz� o> x FU o d �oF ui aN oF-U oJUn'o-~i 3U� ur� �iw zx> > i>ziio-og _ of «oaw ox -izoz cm'oo, o'. u� 4�i ln�p cgs �0 9�onrc Ms <o aooz'a o0o F'az z o Z`owz zo zoo "ga pai oLLoim �"� ��wo z � rc obi".-woa Wiz Fi'a u� o< zoo ooio w <oo F�=6 scot K-' i'J` 00 <�� zoa�� w�Y S,s 2P�<F a�� b�<3952 g,owo� n� o F-pzd wo> O oz`�o a` o�oi '�rc8ia �'o yzzo Oc'a Nw _ aN� �w `20 owwz� J gmza wxo �f<� JRwzm ai = o pia rc� -- - f%) o�» No� 3o0 oow zaaw mcc<i¢g you o0o iopa�oo� x�zwo oy _--- -- .. oro�_.aQ,E- zo . UNoiw uzI :o m" o "'czoimrc�5oi 5o�- az oz oodM>o 0 0� m ZZ WW ZZ�irc Y agozg W rc 66 Zix ow O1aO1y�Oo00 YJf 6 U �O Z2 F• FaWU ¢UC m V1 O 3 Q3Q01A �fm >z'Q7 W�O W ZZj�2aC� Q ZZZ< rc� N C=w2 N 3 x6UJx_JIw xK<ZOO�O� w�pz�z jOF S�O�OOW U O> �¢ Dp�w2 �OrdUFwa Oa/<I�1 9 oocA y3 i i oo� i z o x �c�s zvoio awffoti6 N KwwwwO act off H I O o _ O o.v��da3x 1 mri�� rc amaooVlsg $!n vox o y Z L7 I ' °--- ! J rya Z xa L - _-_.-- J f � I�Al I W IZ � �II U Wo !n o �\ _.W z 'O ffiso a>F Sod O=N i � zea�o �ru i a oatl W �� ,ouemu an,»ro„Ameo tld tl31 VM � , uo�e _ vx°�ix3�oieo No a.%a-roos�1tl3n NVId H3MOd UMVA 'ON 103fO wsncro� 'ad'naedwvo_i: e aN3Nos z oN N�oN3oa.aid m"�s�3a NOIIVIS dWf1d 30IAH3S H�JIH � m l[i61K3 3 NLLCI4 31 .,av3,�°w"3 umo, _...._......._...._._ IVOI!l103I3 � rn N1tlOM ltlOd i0 AlIO H180� S fa l Mouia ro�o>ua�:>° W ¢ F2 riorsrsuitl 0" iff"Jmouvam Him ATMN NIfl06 Fq 2 p LtlU A9 40 O _ NKp U2 U2 .O oCOW E- Si�vZ§�'aw E. No €^ r o<�� z � CSpo6 N zcrc<F Fo-off Ex Z,i6r 5 mOKp O] UN� O o Zp Z�1�2 K� U 0 FR, 5802R Z 0 o zd'.B k'� � i.zy �" zz zaV W SNP zow�zo o-e o wz 4s-Qz Pm, 3 at.� Him", h \ S 'w�oote-oi w"a�iodiz"" F� aoroi, z„o bi �� -ro2.65 uom 12o < zoZpa � a u�izws$ oo \. zi pr'o Herz cvi w? rcc"a o�� i '8 �}i Fz _ w�3ra LS `nou �pF;o om ` a K�`p o��N$ crcUf L'zi �ocoi�¢ z�" o�i Si000 �zp i>22 M 6a � otz �' oms �� T W3 Zw��Zm W = wpO ¢� <m oo-W-2 jFO N Mg Zy K� HVWwO 3a ?r 2 �riozi5��f3�rcp v{ omJ `��„`^3orc�r miga.- o iag �i i'n k'rn� a m5co3 i� p,nx prc� � ov 9� --- --- ---- yo� w H v� �"�cx.3�o �woW zwmiog>aNy uo - ��ao� izdo�8 p6 in po w°a&��wnz3LL< 3��gam� �a oQ €�oF� g��N�x`�`o r> gg � o��¢zzaor � o z ozai �o ��m ,y$ m i zvgzd 3wa a aP., 3 o a o no <�c3x N o w tzo3� o� l$ a� ZZ�yxjO€�� 7 o�oF�O oz o0 �� mow Z?5 RH�,z Z m ZzwiFm rz <w �dF Q �j<< 41Nom U oO � ZQ. 0 Zp-w" F3 OoSdwo� Nmw VUmO ZUONF2 wU In mWU i83w N K~ 5 0. Vp�24 8,P a p�Z z F m y�Ep'M �z�wF'3mz o 4�zrco rczpr o b g3� pzw� �ti=� 11Z fir^ -aao9 oioowg o`" �dzx'Y""o" orco' o $�voa`avo oow »<zE3 O zzq o u3zoo,. �a'i c.3a 5aom in i>m o<n pZSo� oZSixf-"a am��aoa �n vosam Z -oaaF m coiao. 3 30�o rccoi'm a � d I I, J IF wCL �� =a _ T Al r �/% o O ' x� xx ma f. m 0 / / m U U / / 'uf / / / o� �m �i If FLI-�j�3tl xY l5n lOIIHML'cN yafo�c A3'dJ zesty F�� NVId "10HIN03 0NV 'ON 103POtld tl31tlM F 1 N 3 03 Adla3n 3'd'�139ewYo'1 Pa.a;naa 018 oancrol�au OD H3MOd 1N3W3SV9 1 m __ aiy y�°`�''�" NOIIVIS dwnd 3'JIA83S HDIH saNave'N a N V) x1aoM itlo�ao qua x>nob 33 j3,+ IV0IH103I3 Molsla e:Pa„fi,sao w !D imm lN3R VM IM M AT EN HUMI.oz/lc/o I'.aloe a > �G =U� �¢sm ppVyffOyx I�� oaU t1 G�0 pF3o oW " 8' p y O ¢ ` 6 ~W EKG :O O d aon o O1pm��,♦c4=Z� G�WaKwC� rcrcfsj7S 3d15 Oa�tyvxi ZapK WVOZ y 0 W mO 8 �026J -SUBQyd \w Zp mr �Z0 FaZ Gi3pK�� C�i/a i¢poF m. Oyagmz x mz�rci_' �U W�w p��I,,uxji 2x i�F,y_i1QFWRWF �o2 Mo .rc p m p o pa uaawKWr o U OW 7 ¢ OrE Or rc�p H, ZW Z g ER o aazdy z 'ate oUr ®II III o III l h III II y � _ x ; o -(I x I y Mi I�az a dx. a o - II�,I O ~— U o i c H I uj U IL 1 ' 1 III I _ I I 1 c o _ a uai I�L��J v � noo Yi p I o — UN ym — oqq a p�M. g, o I Lu F5 K r_.T._�_T__T_ _T__1 1 i 1 o y .� m ,q __ p¢] \ dp l �o y i mew as Nad II yl Z EOp 3I � U m¢d. I W - iuc�i 11 l I I I rv(r i o3H l 3 S n �� OLIHM 'oN iaafod AAd� zsaro v3 ns, Ntlld lOH1N00 ONtl 'oN I33rOHd N31" wnu,, r �l i�3iv�s Adia3n '3'd'-ilEEcwV�'i.Paaa;naa ' m e, vua�alloxo No,nN a Pzn io 3. ox" maw as as w ,H H3MOd NOO 13 dWfld imw�a a.. wvwnve'r -M=�a -----... • • -r: NOIltl1S dWfld 30IAa3S H`JIH N N Halom Ldod AID ALIO —4 �� ,� ItlOI11103�3 Mou�a v�Pa�e�sao H180 1M0 !o 1 nw .e arlk 11MWELL MM ATO"1111106 lloz/lC/ol:aroc W wo Z? H �Gp omo ` 7w mo �z3Io U iYw gal," Ba fo o m �z° zU 30� ¢ m° 'o Iie� o On °moo moz Zm�- o m m a poi �° iz5� o z°ac��^ ord �rc �wwmw1""°ci to w F`Z . . _n �.U mg • ad Zo i i '>;i>>> > } coo o 3i s o" �4� °o o�S °zinoom i >?>).)y)y LLa33 oao: k'a z° m >om�i 30<_ Ezo �zzozz ->> > i> m o W td zlnwwm ��1:� c�iama 1°0� N °� r c°i� >.i)>�).y'))>>)>iy>>>i>>>i> �z m� �' rcd - 9No.W WH 6, wl °05� >>>>>%>°°>yi>i>>>i>>i?;>N39 zi)Z oz Sow g p rc �o° oo rcok'x — wwaQQ rc¢¢° rc¢q ° a �OWO >> o )>i>>>,> _ ¢3 3 m L`3 fn r N U O ri U Z K N ')�>?)>) I I)y?>)>)y>))y);)) I O S 1VL_0 iI i � V a J m N Z _U U uj I I 1 ° a uj t Q m 3 — ° ® o O 1 ACL 0 " I a H o I I Na I I I ~ O Q NR _ CL N W I V o j 1 w 1 w ---------- a z —. f11 III 'ol x x III fillc°i m n - --- o �w II H .K �1 1, L I zc9L0 L4Ll-3 I O3H 31rn un �� tot tHx,�'ol+loaro,z�ma� sll3y� � x� � .o s� Wtlli`JtlIO 3NI1-3N0 r` 'ON 103fOtld H31VM � , oce ee 311NDS 1183A ,a ��3edwvo i:caxa,aaa ,aaainu auuonu an�io� NOIltl1S dWfld 30IA!!3S H9IH � I _�` S 7S a/Icrol 1 V OIH10313 N—v3 r:uMo a 2 HLHOM lHOd d0 A1I0 H1H0M LH03 y Moisa v:vaub�aa� LA n !0 amm UMVJL HALM ATKM V11I106 ,toz/tE/ol'a1Da W a B No6N3x I > t j o 7 y� U M t!� I M II-- W =UW U x Ia L 4 0 M I I m IW NH Z _ a . 0 � s I JU n=l $ _`� o wog o o N�� o - j I a t N I alum � N I l o o ms Q 6 W I I I U J� n _ D Y Ix O z i o_ a z g D N � �Ox i 1 � I I 80 ZM K az w nxa J En�0 I g o.a n I I Nn>eer I n I =aloe I n I ri`� I o o > I 000 i y n I o aZ I I O I = G OOZ I t9 I I I 1�1Nti . i I R V i wri sa rc rc Z. i a9c�i'io 'you oizo o�n. I i �04 x� 4a �zN� a>� rc�ayl� �'zt'r in Urn o�lxl wok ao Erozo i�l"n v"3^z4�I_�N'-� I a u � oW= m � x zo9lyoF�3� I NC % N�W OQm¢U O� gad Saw aa'Poo?czNw olp� a o =ig wua rc �z JNixs"zw, :- $ N �ZHM a I a� g a 0 3 w rn �o g oeaw wo�� g a��w S iota z�0-=�cit=rcz �_ J Z ... L"n�13 rc4n3��'?to �� o� ri t _to ` 093H -- .^ ©� d� -, m�_dm_ > . , _ wa s�l�A�, N° _,._ mm-oow ,� s+400w ... ___. �mD ` ,3a��, In m�m ` _____ \. ~ w: \ 7)![ ;);f 0 )))5 , k Yg §/ }¥{§\ § wr'z ©��r 4 \\\\ zCdA.5 : ` - ! 9\\ Iz %\d e § §§E®e 7§ \. © \ } 6 @ _ > \ J § E \ \F!> J r c � } § ` �k\( ®� dm— � � » ~� .o��, _,mo2«sm_ All }___.e m3mO : \ \� 7 /( � (( i ° ^ 4 } ! ---_ FFa §§§[s r q �§ ` (/ � § F3 j / ( 2 6 2 } § / ( °k N)( t=§ = Q I ] ADDENDUM NO.1 TO SPECIFICATIONS AND BID DOCUMENTS FOR CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS CITY PROJECT NO.01632 4 TO: PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS AND PLAN HOLDERS The Plans, Specifications,and Contract Documents shall be modified as required by the following items: Item 1-1 F Specifications, PART A—NOTICE TO BIDDERS, Section: Notice to Bidders: Date of bid opening shown in the document shall be changed from "October 27, 2011" to "November 10, 2011" due to unforeseen issue with starting kVA limitations imposed by Oncor Electric. Updated plans will be provided in future addendums. Item 1-2 Specifications, PART B—PROPOSAL, Section: Proposal: On 0 page of the proposal section, item 1.11, replace Qty "100 LF" with Qty"LS". Item 1-3 Specifications, PART D —SPECIAL CONDITIONS, 2008 Prevailing Wage Rates: Delete this section in its entirety and replace with the attached section 2010 Prevailing Wage Rates. Item 1-4 Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section 15500: HVAC-General Provisions: In paragraph 1.10.A, replace "Warranty shall include parts & labor for a period of 1 year from date of final acceptance by Owner' with 'Warranty shall include parts & labor for a period of 2 years from date of final acceptance by Owner'. ADDENDUM 1 - PAGE 1 Item 1-5 Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section 16020: Utilities Insert the attached "Tariff for Retail Delivery Service" as Appendix No.1 to section 16020. Add paragraph L: "Refer to attached appendix No.1. City of Fort Worth is responsible for payment to Oncor the amount of Article I. Responsibilities described in Article V paragraph (ii) shall be contractor's responsibilities and all costs associated with those shall be included into contractor's pricing." Item 1-6 Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section 16151: Medium Voltage Pump Electric Motor: In paragraph 1.03.6: Replace "Manufacturer warrants equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 2 years from the date of substantial completion"with"Manufacturer warrants equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 2 years from the date of final completion" In paragraph 1.05.A1.a: ir Replace "The motor technician shall be an employee of the motor manufacturer unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER." With "The motor technician shall be an employee of the motor manufacturer or an employee of Smith Pump Company unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER." Add the following sentence at the end of the paragraph: "For motor technician not employed by the motor manufacturer or Smith Pump Company, contractor shall submit qualifications of the employee minimum 7 calendar days before bid date for review by Engineer." .. Item 1-7 F Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS,Section 16380: Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Switchgear: In paragraph 1.01.A: Replace"assemblies of with"the". In 1.03.E.13: MW paragraph Remove entire paragraph. In paragraph 1.04.A: Remove lines 1, 4, 6, and 8. F In paragraph 1.06.C: ADDENDUM 1 -PAGE 2 w Remove the two sentences beginning with "Indoor"and"Breakers". In paragraph 2.02.A: Remove the 15 KV"column. On line 3, change"As shown"to"600A". In paragraph 2.02.6: Remove the entire paragraph. In paragraph 2.03.A: On sub paragraph 1: Remove"or non-fused"and "or in a lineup". On sub paragraphs 3.b&c, 4—8: Remove entire paragraph. In paragraph 2.03.6: On subparagraph 1- Remove entire line. On sub paragraph 2.a: Keep last sentence beginning "Cable". Remove others. On sub paragraph 2.b: Remove sentence beginning"Apply". On sub paragraph 2.c: Remove "with a continuous drip edge channel on the front." Remove sentence beginning with "Apply". On sub paragraphs 2.f: Remove entire paragraph. On sub paragraph 2.g: Keep last sentence beginning "All". Remove others. In paragraph 2.03.0 On sub paragraph 1: Remove"lineup"and "from a main switch section". Add line 3: "Furnish distribution class surge arrestors with ratings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations." In paragraph 2.03.D Remove the entire paragraph. In paragraph 2.03.G On sub paragraph 3 and 4: Remove entire lines. In paragraph 2.03.1-11 Remove the entire paragraph. In paragraph 2.03.1. Remove entire sub paragraphs 3 and 4. ADDENDUM 1 - PAGE 3 In paragraph 2.03.J.1 Revise to read "Power Fuses: Provide current limiting fuses." In paragraph 2.04.6. On sub paragraph 3: Remove"or refills for each switch". On sub paragraph 4—6: Remove entire lines. In paragraph 3.01.A. Remove'for a period of not less than 2 working days". In paragraph 3.06.13. Remove entire line. In paragraph 3.07. F On sub paragraph B: Remove sentence beginning with "Disconnect". In paragraph 3.07.F. WM Remove entire line. lF Item 1-8 Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section: 16481: Low Voltage Motor Control Center: In paragraph 1.01.C, replace"acceptable manufacturers listed in 2.14"with "acceptable manufacturers listed in 2.01.K. *� Item 1-9 Specifications, PART E—TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, Section: 17300: Programmable Logic Controllers(PLC) Requirements: Remove paragraph 2.02.C.3 "Provide one (1) Vijeo Designer Single .. License OIT development software and cable". Item 1-10 F .. Plans, sheet M-SH-1: Change"hot water"to"steam"on all notes. ■. Change "Drain" piping to"steam condensate" on all notes. .. On General Notes number 1, replace the note with the following: 1. Demolition of mechanical equipment and piping shall include the removal of .. hangers and all support brackets. All wall and floor penetrations shall be filled and patched to match existing. ADDENDUM 1 - PAGE 4 0 " i t On Note by Symbol number 3, replace note in its entirety with the ' following: 3. Demolish all boiler flue from horizontal position in the basement level. Vertical boiler flue in chase shall be abandoned in place. Cap flue in basement where it exits the chase. Item 1-11 r. Plans, sheet M-SH-2: Change"hot water'to"steam" on all notes. Change"Drain" piping to"steam condensate"on all notes. .. Replace General Notes number 1 with the following: 1. Demolition of mechanical equipment and piping shall include the removal of r.. hangers and all support brackets. All wall and floor penetrations shall be filled and patched to match existing." Item 1-12 Plans, sheet M-SH-4 F .. On Note by Symbol number 2, replace 3"HW with 3"STEAM. On Note by Symbol number 3, the sentence shall be revised to read as follows: Rpm "I Remove existing shrubs in way of new duct openings. Drill pilot holes for duct .. openings and confirm duct penetrations are not in conflict with interior structural beams and other work inside the basement before proceeding with shrub removal and pad/equipment layout." .. On Note by Symbol, ADD new note number 4 to read as follows: "4. Replace exhaust grille in restroom with new type EG-1, 10"x10"exhaust grille." Item 1-13 .. Plans, sheet M-SH-5 On General Notes, add note number 2 to read as follows: MW F "2.Aim deflector on unit heaters down so heat is directed to operator level." aw On General Notes, add note number 3 to read as follows: EMI "I Aim re-circulation fans down so airflow is directed to operators and pump motors." aw On General Notes, add note number 4 to read as follows: "4. Terminate flue vents at least 4 feet from operable windows." ADDENDUM 1 -PAGE 5 On Note by Symbol number 1, ADD the following sentence after "SEE SECTION "A"ON M-SH-8": "1. Drill pilot holes for duct openings and confirm duct penetrations are not in conflict with interior structural beams and other work inside the basement before proceeding with shrub removal and pad/equipment layout." Item 1-14 Plans, sheet M-SH-7 On Note by Symbol number 2, revise to read as follows: "6. Remove boiler flue hood and cap roof curb with aluminum plate, gauge 16. Seal all edge gaps air and water tight. Mechanically secure plate to curb." Item 1-15 �. Plans, Sheet E-SH-3: Modify General Note No.2, as follows: "2. Owner shall retain salvage rights to all material and equipment other than the F medium voltage pump electric motors. Motors will become the property of the contractor. Coordinate other items to be salvaged by owner. Remove and relocate on site as directed." Item 1-16 F Plans, Sheet E-SH-8: .. Add note by symbol No. 9. Show note by symbol No.9 hexagon by XFMR- HSA, XFMR-HSB, Panel HSA and Panel HSB callouts. Note by symbol No. 9 shall read: .. 7. Second vacuum pump will be installed by plant personnel before the beginning of the contract. Contractor might need to relocate panels and transformers to a different location within the basement in order for NEC required clearances to be met. Coordinate with Owner and Engineer before installation in new location." F Item 1-17 Plans, Sheet E-SH-17: Add note by symbol No.7. Show note by symbol No.7 hexagon by medium voltage starter feeding XFMR-HSP. Note by symbol No.7 shall read: 7. Contractor may choose to provide medium voltage breaker in lieu of medium voltage fused contactor if footprint reduction opportunity is available." Item 1-18 Plans, Sheet E-SH-21: MCC-CHEM-001 shall be of the main-main configuration with Kirk Key interlock. Show Kirk Key symbol next to both main breakers. ADDENDUM 1 -PAGE 6 r Item 1-19 Plans, Sheet E-SH-22: At the bottom of individual drawing No.1 "High Service Pump Control Schematic", under contact "IRV, replace "To Primer Pump Control Panel' with "To Vacuum Pump Control Panel' Item 1-20 Plans, Sheet E-SH-24: Change title of individual drawing from "Primer Pump Control Schematic" to"Vacuum Pump Control Schematic" On control schematic, after contact M1 and before red "Run" light, replace "Primer Pump No.1"with "Vacuum Pump No.1". On control schematic, after contact M2 and before red "Run" light, replace "Primer Pump No.2"with "Vacuum Pump No.2". Item 1-21 Plans, Sheet E-SH-26: Remove note by symbol No.3 hexagon by circuit 36 of panelboard HSA. Panel HSA, change circuit No.36 description from Spare to"OWQM Panel'. Show 1000VA load on phase C for this circuit. Item 1-22 Plans, Sheet E-SH-31: .. Replace "Prime Pump Control Panel' with "Vacuum Pump Control Panel' for loop 101. Item 1-23 F Plans, Sheet E-NH-5: Remove HVAC table. Remove circle notes from drawing. Item 1-24 Plans, Sheet I-SH-2: Replace"Prime Pumps"callout with "Vacuum Pumps". ADDENDUM 1 -PAGE 7 Item 1-25 Plans, Sheet I-SH-3: Replace "Prime Pump Control Panel' with "Vacuum Pump Control Panel' for loop No.101 (2 instances). Item 1-26 Plans, Sheet E-NH-3: Revise drawing as per the attached figure E-NH-3A as follows: Remove existing disconnect and J-box. Item 1-27 Plans, Sheet E-NH-7: Revise drawing as per the attached figure E-NH-7A as follows: Add word "Panel'at LD. Add Panel Pretreatment. Item 1-28 Plans, Sheet E-NH-8: Revise drawing as per the attached figure E-NH-8A as follows: Add disconnect identifications 1 &2. Item 1-29 Plans, Sheet E-NH-9: Revise drawing as per the attached figure E-NH-9A as follows: Add word "Panel"at FH-1 &2 and other cleanup items to be more readable. Item 1-30 Plans, Sheet E-NH-11: F Revise drawing as per the attached figure E-NH-11A as follows: Add word "Panel" at FH-1 &2 Item 1-31 M " Plans, Sheet E-NH-1: 6 Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-NH-1. MW ADDENDUM 1 - PAGE 8 Item 1-32 Plans, Sheet E-NH-2: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-NH-2. Item 1-33 Plans, Sheet E-NH-4: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-NH-4. Item 1-34 Plans, Sheet E-NH-5: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-NH-5. ow Item 1-35 Plans, Sheet E-NH-6: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-NH-6. Item 1-36 Plans, Sheet E-NH-10: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-NH-10. r� Item 1-37 Plans, Sheet E-NH-12: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-NH-12. Item 1-38 Plans, Sheet E-NH-13: .. Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-NH-13. Item 1-39 Plans, Sheet E-NH-14: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-NH-14. Item 1-40 Plans, Sheet E-NH-15: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-NH-15. ADDENDUM 1 -PAGE 9 Item 1-41 Plans, Sheet E-NH-16: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-NH-16. Item 1-42 Plans, Sheet E-NH-17: Delete this sheet in its entirety and replace with attached sheet E-NH-17. THIS ADDENDUM IS MADE PART OF THE SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, AND SHALL BE ACKNOWLEDGED ON THE PROPOSAL AND ON THE BID ENVELOPE. CP&Y, INC. OF Timothy E. Campbell, P.E. * :+ October 19, 2011 """""E.CAMP ELL TIMOTHY E. CAMPBELL Telephone: 214-640-1711 "'"""'81 of i"""''"' •_410ENSf�. AL r ADDENDUM 1 - PAGE 10 aeo �°,eele�eoee"�N�3e°sla.e 33v�s uia3 n NVId V3HV 'ON l33PONd H31VM fi11vd:) " g 4N/ JNIUIf9 ll VH3A0 °<<" o3°r na='=9ro„rAe-au° _ x IVOIH10313 °"` " ° Z N1tlOM lHO3 30 AlIO liJ N1NOM 1NO3 4tiF'io3: 1M�W umltv3lu IGLYM A1wN xulDs <<az/rod/oi:=��a essz-�'°N u°sens�fiaa '�r fiuuaaw6ue 6ui�lnsuos f`�I --j`53JE!—,V'2g mdno a w p Of p � w rz z h wa Qz z o �z3V0 < O �N O ZO5 QO Ow� >Z7 2 J wm Two Q�p p aZ ZK ZO w OoT Q24�= -Lz � r �E aO� Q C 710 16 m OF O Apo �Qr3 - w a4~Op>U w j >Z W �U in cow ism ma -m mil ��w'^J F z> _ 3oJ a Fa �oo } W 3 p xw 0 0 oz I ? a� Ln oom� Qin¢m �oaJ w� p�p ~�`�tnw� a. _ >� >� pp _ p _ zQ¢� wJap J z� - iOo wo_ zOzj� 2oQ�oo _ C7 6 a a O 0 Z � 3 w om w ffi w > N F om • Z n = a S2 w O V) x U) CDW z(1) O r WN Y� - O OW II O>U L•a ��a Og m a o> O F as 1> 0 I \* I a�o�o I \ 3z \ as \�I g¢ NI >m I m VINI \ I oxX \�I — z \\I z 4 = g z I p o Q Ni Q a� I I — a z z �I ¢ Z- IX I / - as �z w / wzow ww \\\\\\\� �i ww o _ - -- _ p � J, o > - zoz _ Ewa i IoN oNla�lne a3nlA o Ww 9Nldllfl9 NOI1VN151NIWOV as ' zc9LO LVLL-j N 03tl y ,,a is �� o��nmu'ory�aaro.d a do •.s.�y �� oxwa�a,ex��do rvo w��3uo s�a N 0 '�9 11 5 —0S A NDA 3Nfll'p:Paxalnaa 'ON 103rOHe a31VM CA, 98989 <<o�i..io�Wf1 NOIIIIOW34 3NI1-3NO =m 1VOIHI3313 Z N�3llW"1:Pau6sap H1tlOM 1tl01 10 AlIO H1N-�.LHO 0 - " 11 W fH .� yip eo�'�'.L- 1MM 1N31 YM H33YM ATMH HUMS lloZ/>L/ol.aloo f65Z-6'oN......lsi,fiay buuee . 0 > z J N z 20 d Q m Q O $ x x x 0 _ E O m OrN 61 1.1 wl �po �I 3a w0 Z yOjO OZ �2 Of0 WCj� O O w� < ¢ O w Z O�i �i aV OVal OwII ONw of �O -O OK wQaW¢ wp O a a a M Z W0 O -ia Z 00 O \\\ \ 0 a F \\\\\\ J \ Z CD q ao� O U)o l� O� a 4 O O \Qo F�z d w0N Q 0 a a 4 4 O .. 6 x 2 O , ' IiO TRANSFORMER VAULT INTERIOR PLAN 3 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 1' 0 1' 2' 3' SCALE: 3/4 = 1'-0" CAS Gupta&Associates,Inc. consulting engineering Registration No.F-2593 CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS CWyj Date Sheet No Addendum No Figure No OCTOBER 14, 2011 E—NH-3 Al E—NH-3A LVLL-.A N O3tl �^ ,o„xmu ory,=aro�d+xe� aeeLo s4, „,„�„ ,,,do xo„,„„xo s,a NVId NOI IOW30 1N3W3svG �, III-I.—A 3Nnl'9:paMalnay aiv snrav uses si�u uo xoxi 3xo io ry �� v ON 103rOHd tl3lVM , w9898.9• v i,ni�>,in,w�i .nry wnnx3na.die a3nssl3a CTL `JNI0lIno u311Id ox, :�».o.a w =o IVOI2110313 N Z HIHOM ltlOi d0 AlLO e �l� f ' N�3nw'1:paufi�caQ HiHoM1No,� hii� �' 1NIW IKMVM SIMA A710H 111/106 „oz/a,/o,=,oa W £6SL-...uolleysl6aa fiuueswfiue fiuq�nsuw ooI'saxecoossy zg wing N a w o X'. Yw vl �=o� ooz w \ N as z N . Nil N: " 3otiw _i` om \ X o a \ N zo. \ N, w� m r = \(D 1 n d d Of .. W LLJ II n LU N g w \ N w w M 1. 'N N M U \ a Z-i �� A Z I Z 0 N p� J N.:' -II \. \ \: \ m\ H< J< LL_ N.. N N M 0o I o \ N N \ N wgg \' X. �..—..-0�..—..�.\�. �.._..—..—..� \ N aeelo tlM l4LL-A F 99H Nd id N011OW3a HOOId 1SLIdto w3N '9:p iy oN 103fOtld tl31CAM:) Miming N0I1tl81SINIWav � =m yw••'77'' ltlOIt110313 oHr:Mo.a tlAHOM i d ao ao AAxo -�'j'� "Ols.,1. f � pauBisaa x LaoN lao3 l 1\do'3 d iwld Jt[MYAiL a3WM Alwx Nlnos oz/>/ol awa 4J ° E611-1'IN IIII-116e1J wo 6uyaeulBua BUllMauoa ��I'salepossy�g e�dn� o O o o di u w3 � Now m =`' w 3 w ¢=m aY : Z _=n- - m yaw �� I w 33= omo f/1 oow "�� a Q Z�m odwWRX $ 3 W =z 3¢3 a. 3- a0 M� zLU � a a a d C o m ED L� �C VU I II z - _ J 1 - - Z a0, o IRE g Niwov I z <- db s rQ J l L NlAav - Lau-3 x 03a Ze9Lo ;ss'y rn SNVId llOOl3 1S21I3 >'' eore 31bJ5 Aila3A 3Nfll"�:pamaina 'ON 193POtld a31VM �nu, F�99i89^��, ,o�i>�io� VZI ONIa-lina d31lId a N18oM 180=1 i0 A-LID v,�•1'a„`Y,A � Na3�w i:pa�s;sao H1NOM 1801 ��41,•jo• , IN IWW INNWfAL HIM ATM Hulas lal essz-d"ora uanensieaa mamema eanmaao� aai'saaeoossV�g eadnz Ja o LL � a o Aga a h 3 m � d wiz o � wuwuww� 0 LLoa E O Z z o x r 3 Z Z (L a o U) N M Z_i p p c J J i J u 0 mm Of w w I LL t' j IV pp' 3 Gm G. i s"� 0ao 0 d i II II LL ✓ ., y A IV V'� DP1-4 PANEL PRETREATMENT �1 r i s ADMINISTRATION BUILDING SECOND FLOOR PLAN 0 SCALE: 3/16" = 1'-0" CAS Gupta&Associates,Inc. consulting engineering Registration No.F-2593 CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS cr&T--Y Date Sheet No Addendum No Fguro No OCTOBER 14, 2011 E-NH-7 01 E-NH-7A j 2 ELECTRICAL ROOM ELEVATION SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" GAS Gupta Associates,Inc. a consulting engineering Registration No.F-2593 CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS CNyj Date Sheet No Addendum No Figure No OCTOBER 14, 2011 E—NH-8 Al E—NH-8A 0 3 3n. 0A © 1 H FILTER BUILDING 2 BASEMENT FLOOR PHOTO PLAN SCALE: 3/16" = 1'-0" GA' Gupta&Associates,Inc. a consulting engineering Registration No.F-2593 CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS CWyj Date Sheet No Addendum No Figure No OCTOBER 14, 2011 E—NH-9 Al E—NH-9A ZE9L0 LVLL-i M 03a miunvna,vNioiaP xa New 3Ha si n !o!lH�,w oH�=arwd aaa� p /��py�+■ '~S`§�� "re 3�vDs ula3n 3Nmo:Pa.xalnay off lo3roaa tl31vm C�, � 9 ww�k£ o „o,�ry ,o„„1—ate d„P,P4 d iinVA HOlIMS i13WH03SNVH-L =I o � IVDIU10313 �I� „ +: NJ3nn'1:Paufilaad Z H1tlOM ltlOi i0 AlIO H1U0 µ Ihito�o'i' orb lN3RLV31LL MM ATIM Hine !!oz/a!/a!:aioa LJ E611-1 IN uoi�egsiBay '�� fiuueau5ue Buglnsuw .col`.I....v ag z dnq Vl 3 < o m ~ o la�� w3 J- roM to ao¢ o 3 u o w Gg z — a ¢ EFo a z 0( 3.b/£"J(1LN 0 BZ Z a v w I III i �o a 9-lHi I I DAe Z S-LHj Q w a Z � J Ld J II a w W wo Zw-__ M-- N,. M Z xLL N l �Iz m� oo�Z j xl_ \o dam¢~ w I O l Z � Z � � g LLI a X Ld o. J oE: Z MN Z.. FU 0 Qj DPI-7 FILTER BUILDING 2 BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 3/16" = 1'-0" GAS Gupta&Associates,Inc. consulting engineering Registration No.F-2593 CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS C Wyj Date Sheet No Addendum No Figure No OCTOBER 14, 2011 E—NH-11 Al E—NH-11A z8910 Iru-i a 03H � =°IM�a,.�I=Ido=o�=HI N'3 O ON NVId SWOOa IVOIU10313 a3IdIa0W s =°Io=d xAeo w F1� o 4 vas Lsn ioHx 3nd�s—A 3Nm�:paMa�ay i m ON 103rodd H31VM CM5 1 ..:�.b8.9..� DNIOlIf19 NOI1tla1SINIWOV Li QI+ �(o ___ lV0Ial0313 oHr:�Mo,a W = 141HOM 1H03 j0 AlIO HINOMIN03 h • �= ume aan ym A110H XHI06 <<oz/oL/oL:aLoo W cssz°�e,H�e!ieus�a oa 1 Y� m —i'smp-V 29 mdng O - --_- O X as x O 0 Us �a a0 a o. _b I az i II to 3 _ OF �Ll� \� " w zX J om zN o s ro U3 N >O� mtn Z o0U z �• O�n ham o�J z� I -Ld0 O M 0 W gao N I I s-Ldo O e O a I rvn I o..z'oo/s# 'o/e#£ s-Lda O a W N z 0,.z"DOM 'o/Oe a-Lau O W z I O � J� d $ W� Qa z I d l a o I o„z'oo/s#'o/e#£ a l Im z-Lda z¢ ' L-Lda wl Z o al I W d og MZ 0 w al I — ,,, I s I ww ---� I � I � QW II w� W U �.._.._.._..� L.._..—J 33 MI O N Z O a -W J Q lo¢ ~Om ?99L0 LOLL-d f 03tl / Iot MN IN 4--f—— M N 31s�.sn r' 'ON 103f Otld tl31tlM CAM:) 1_b°ygleAye�11, ` axlmriw rxlalao xo NON 3uo s,me 31VOS u1a3 3Nm 9:pamalna8 �oznvm w�i I - S31na3HOS 13NVd _ 5 oNr:xmma w = s:, l��.qp 1V�IlIla313 T Z H1a0M ltl OH 30 AlIOON--�' — c tiiY � NO3�rv'l:pau6leap mrw iMVUV38L MM AnoN xuas Iloz/a Vol:aioa W F69—.:N uollaASI�N Buueaudue Buylnauaa 'JOI'saaznOssy v Wdn� Q E K C , O O 30 Z so a W it d �� W N fO a a ¢N m U U Q3 <? 3 Zp O U Z �Z Z Z Z K Z N U6U QO jw w LL O Um O wlg N KZ d UU UU f'i� S ¢m w p JO O N R QU m K 4 a� Z Z Z. M m w i 4 z ao zS w w iYS Y4 m o� a m p� UU UU z 3 n m w Z YN n0'1 MIN ZJ>>Z Cy 6 W O 4 U U U H N O 0 0 0 O N O N N a.N Z %o Wy N N N N U 9� N N N N N N N N N I N N O N N N N w w N N N N N N N N N 9 3y j J O Z_Z_N 6 F U 3 u a J a o m < a j w cwi < \ ut o N v Y G 0� z o z �a c� oo win aaY 0 z w -o — 3 [5 vi Q N ¢ /�1 N O tt z¢ =m 0 z m rza- a w p Ci 3 G OGa'�w w w¢¢w w fKG _= a=0 3>>~ Z E/1 U U a U X S a J J a a a= ¢a J U U rx U Y F U(>2 z w 3 3 0 w uai J w n op O U 0 w C 8 d 0 3 maw NO cp 5 rn to o a N = 0 0 0 o y o U Q QQ QQ a O �/1 4 x y J J�/1 QQ QQ QQ QQ w<J SR Vi U W U v 0 m m z 0 Q R K K F F OF J Q LL C v 3 3 Z >3 3 'R wwOKW www Z Ww mY a ZIi 222ZUZZ z O a a w W =a a a U O laic tdi� z a E o U¢ Y lz 7 23 Z K 0 `! w a a _N ¢N 0 w U;N N 4 U 3N N ¢y H O ffzr 0 0 o m aw w N J N U n n UI3� � MMN hY LLNf� MNnm MNr U U ZE9L0 LVLL-:1 i SM ixs �1 WL LHM '-N 1aafaid AWO N l� / i awx. mlaixo xo xaxi 3 o xre "J�panalroy •oH 133road aalvM s =88= 31Vn5 M123A o� i Ila�nlial wp.3 II - S3If143HOS I3Ntld 3Nf11 xxWo � =I LL �.�.� y,�=b• IVOI810313 H1tlOM 1tl0d�O AlIO H1NO 1a0 f'iy+••�a5=' No3nwi:paaelnu M-w�■ yi:�0�2<' 1 AB I N iHvla uaruvanL auv1x Ana lunos Iloz/al/ol:awa W essz-d nn,xn!i-nalnaa I�Y awaaaieaa a.!naaaoa noI`sa�xP—V V wdnq 0 �o �S �N ¢z = O m pN —T. rc o w of y �I w z o to ILL awl oo h capg �� F^¢ goo N'G a= U U N __ YN - H xOj l l l zo mm 2 WN N N N N N N N I wN I _ 3N 3� 3 I G_G m GG Oa0 TT 0 0 1 f m pQ O o W Q J ti w 2 z_z U_ WO z Q rc 0 0 tail I ----W rc m fn I V U I w aJ rc ao �iloZ� o�a 9 UN� z`J'- � o a O U z m wi z z W W aV n az =1 F wo 0oo i wd q¢q o w o a 3 o mo �z w f¢U J o z��G — �z o o o acoi w Jc~ai�i 6a u�a0 zs W mo Q �U 3 N1Wn �U 3fN _ O WN a N p N m f a N m ^O 3tn f O 3m J U Z my N W F ¢N o U z Kw N O I >> z 0 >> 6 W 0 6 w 0 H Z W O mm Ux UHF N a m my N - ^ ^z N K N m ^ �N N N N KN O O a m m W Gl� oa z cF�i o z 'rn'inn s amp N "o 0 z `o z� z z a NOW rn zc "" z o m UaNa f J D O N N W -U z N z0 z w Q w Q w o w Uo Ca a U O m F w w z t t z Z O 3 3 O N G rc O zU - O G a aal O wj O a pp S o M 2 f/1 j j w w 3 n a0rn N O W N N N "'rl W G 1 mmo O 3ga m a'N N G ry KN N N N N N " KN O O WO 3N a6 ^ o F z 3N N 3tn YN m ..-Kw_ _ _ m w F YN� �U r Y K W w 0 m w 0 amEUx amsU,�� ZE9L0 L4[L-�d1Qf�93tl TMi'ssw„vxo mmioino xo xoxi 3xo si LOLLHxwox�aerwa Amd� ��yly1 � ,'�s 31YJ5 AfIiJ3A 3Nfll'9�Pamalnay off loaroad tlalvM „�YY+ 9�89 „„z/„/o,„, III S31f143HOS 13Nt/d I �T�{ t IV�Ial�3l3 OHr:„„,a w = Z o H1tlOM 1110:1:10 AlIO N ll JBIUML UUM ATIOH KUM LIOZ/bL/O 1.:ala0 W MIZ-1*NI uollmlxlOaa 1v� IGn�eeulfiae WnlMxxn �vI`saLemoss��g eidn� a � z o U � z o J O 3U Z oz g a Nx n N m 0 1 n N n N N I I I n U O O m O O —z U o U N cUi 3 � ¢O N N If ~f~L x O z m 0 W ri O ¢¢ rc 3 a¢ O z w W Q z O w Et o o o c� g 3 m 3 0 0 0 o x U U O U E O w vv W ao z z aaa a a3 i1. Y �Sn a � � N a 3 U z m z m qa 'm LL z_ 'o 0 0 0 mo w xIN a�& oz m O _ SS U 4 Q ¢ m w O m F - 3 o z - z 3 a z z z -= J U o w¢ �ro O �m � zo zo o � w N ww o n N it rcN m U 3m m Q U 3m YN N o Y� Z4S l l l l l l l �x N a m m gym,N a m m m N a m m x� mw o m m l l l � m y I I m N N N N N N N N N N N N I _ _ _N N 3m itn N N N N QOQ m O z w M m N p m p 0 0 U �K� MWW WUwU 11 UUw UwU UUw m 2 O O m_ U U U Ua¢¢a¢6 w a ¢w ~ O U w W U¢rc rc w m 3 ga H U 3 3 0 �rco!rc� w mw� m J vi—o o w o zzr-Wiz zzrczzm� j a U? s m a o s z rc z rc¢ o a mmh�NZNGzZa� � Q O U Sil U z o o o o o o o o o o o o o < - j f 2 3 Z E Z Z f U 3 a � w o a a o w w w o a a o a o__o 0o mF� s www Jwwwwl�ly a w 'm 4a w a a g rc C��E�6E�w jw U U U U U n Q FF p Z d a z zr z z z z Z z z z O m O z a E E g F E Z z a aw G��GG E E3 Fm z z z z z z z g zo z g z Q 3 d w a ¢o T2 a ¢ f f f 5� o o g 3 N A N 1 1 I iv rcH I n rc I ww '� 3✓L 3rn N a ti 3y fO �2�!P i Fz ml_i I I N O N m s o mN O O S j m y N o N o 0 m E U x KKm a Km E a U Z¢9L0 t4LL'j I 03a "J LULHM 'ON P-ld MdO Ai1213/� (p I� �+�.ill 'uxixma imioieo rm x ni nos x<a 31V�5 3N nl :paMelnay 'ON 103POUd U31tlM � , 7 99 41 � a=, =rodr,33xs nI - S31na3HOS 13NVd w ltl�I211�313 oHr:sw,wa N Z o HISOM LHO3 30 AllO � — v '� `P.�'r:/ NJ3nw'1:p==x!s=o 180M1 0� � •, ufnd IMKLYoa HUM A71a1 Huns L m/tL =l=a W NoNimu ON 965E-1'IN ua,LegslLiaH '�� ew�as�uau=evlu=sum —I's—possy�q gdno 0 a G om 0 O �~ z O] o 0 uOf iE w Z 3o m a so J ZZ N ww C a W z0 Z IiY Q w K yam°N N N N N N M M ram]xbI M Y Y U�N �W N N N N ry — YN TN o N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 3ut � 3w w G w O N < ....o a c....... ��a a a z z z z �g---------------m��a $ ww E o...c�oNNcaNubcnw000r,boc> �J z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 i 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 z z 3 3 3 3 _ o 0 0 w w w 0 0 0 0 w 0 0 w w 0 0 w 0 w 0 < a� K O W W 0 0 0-o'o'o o 0-o 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 p t r W Q g E E E E f Z f`i S.f f f K Q (f UQ V6 a o W g g g g g a j K3 ¢3 " oa p�wEL�igEriE'igE'igE'igGit�t�Git�� Boa z L G G ri G ri ri G G G GG m a4�9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9Nww o UUj >>>? o z� z z 3 0^ o^ O^ z U U U U U U U u U U U U U U U U U U 6z z �b 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 aOd 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0. 0 0 0 0 0 0'o 0 0 w s s o E m s-o o o o o o s E E U. b oa a wa LL D o G O o o ry rc3 orc3 rc3 . ry wW N N N N N N N N N 3N N N wW I ad tj 3tN—n ^ < m co .. U i a d z w 0 Pi N N o 0 o mN a o a vW s N N M WN I !, 3 Z7i � � but O 2 O N F u p z O3 OEo Q OOW W>wO K mm OU U rc .oa z I�= 2Fp i W O o p Z Q —oF w y y \a a a ¢¢ ¢= � �¢a u m m 3 w U i Q 5 a ^a z d4o �n & o 'm�� - 0, ss i y y m .0. o9b O xf N m m Wk O O K w z f a m t ¢4 W m z z o N OQ. ? -O U U U 888888 aw o_ w3� x: �ciuuu oG a a xaa �aaayy o 3N IJ z K w Cw O z — ^ z m— n l I w ¢� n N N N N N N N N M w C_ w N N N N N RE O m Q N U7G^ rn N N b h M p Q N E Uik^ b h m 11 INC a o__ � } / . \ t „ n - S�mgos2�d § " ,2£�, _/ § I; __ nfNt \m_ V k § . ■ ® 22� KK ! zt §; z =j § / R CCN 9 / E . ) k . 6w k � . } / E § 2 |E (§E) E § 7 \} \ \ } \ / §|\) ( ( ff !{ «at» = 77is 7 /a$l ,,,, / ! §($�� ^ )]§§N :: , = ;; ¥ )§\|N : : -:,_ !�;§ � ��:,,, §„ :R! § , 1. o _ ( ( ( § ( ( ( & ! 2§ _ N ; ° 0��` §\!; - z §§ \\\\§§ k ( .I } \ \ } \ j } !`t m @§� e }� | § § 0< | G : y N a a _ \ i\K// »,{ \\ z(\} \\\\\\\\\\ § }\(j\ ! ,�=:e= 00 45 26-1 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW Page 1 of 1 1 SECTION 00 45 26 2 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW 3 4 Pursuant to Texas Labor Code Section 406.096(a),as amended,Contractor certifies that it 5 provides worker's compensation insurance coverage for all of its employees employed on City 6 Project No.01623.Contractor further certifies that,pursuant to Texas Labor Code, Section 7 406.096(b),as amended, it will provide to City its subcontractor's certificates of compliance with 8 worker's compensation coverage. 9 10 CONTRACTOR: 11 12 Archer Western Contractors,LTD. By: 13 Company (Please Print) 14 15 2121 Avenue J, Suite 103 Signature: 16 Address 17 18 Arlington,Texas 76006 Title: 19 City/State/Zip (Please Print) 20 21 22 THE STATE OF TEXAS § 23 _ 24 COUNTY OF TARRANT § 25 26 BEFORE ME,the undersigned authority,on this day personally appeared 27 ,known to me to be the person whose name is 28 subscribed to the foregoing instrument,and acknowledged to me that he/she executed the same as 29 the act and deed of for the purposes and 30 consideration therein expressed and in the capacity therein stated. 31 32 GIVEN UNDER MY HAND AND SEAL OF OFFICE this day of 33 ,20 . 34 35 36 37 Notary Public in and for the State of Texas 38 39 END OF SECTION 40 FTWH1101 00 45 26-1 JANUARY 2012 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH MOTOR AND SWIICHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW 00 52 43-1 Agreement Page 1 of 4 1 SECTION 0400 2 AGREEMENT 3 4 THIS AGREEMENT, authorized on is made by and between the City of Forth 5 Worth, a Texas home rule municipality, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager, ,.� 6 ("City"), and Archer Western Contractors, LTD., authorized to do business in Texas, acting by 7 and through its duly authorized representative,("Contractor"). 8 City and Contractor, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as .. 9 follows: 10 Article 1. WORK ,.. 11 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the 12 Project identified herein. 13 Article 2.PROJECT 14 The project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is 15 generally described as follows: 16 South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station—Motor and Switchgear 17 Replacement and Electrical Improvements 18 Project Number 01623 19 Article 3. CONTRACT TIME 20 3.1 Time is of the essence. .. 21 All time limits for Milestones, if any, and Final Acceptance as stated in the Contract 22 Documents are of the essence to this Contract. 23 3.2 Final Acceptance. 24 The Work will be complete for Final Acceptance within 485 days after the date when the 25 Contract Time commences to run as provided in Paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions. .. 26 3.3 Liquidated damages 27 Contractor recognizes that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that City will 28 suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 29 3.2 above, plus any extension thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the 30 General Conditions. The Contractor also recognizes the delays, expense and difficulties 31 involved in proving in a legal proceeding the actual loss suffered by the City if the Work 32 is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Contractor 33 agrees that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shall pay 34 City Six - Hundred Thirty Dollars ($630.00) for each day that expires after the time .. 35 specified in Paragraph 3.2 for Final Acceptance until the City issues the Final Letter of 36 Acceptance. F FWH1101 0400-1 JANUARY 2012 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- AGREEMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 00 52 43-2 Agreement Page 2 of 4 37 Article 4.CONTRACT PRICE 38 City a es to pay Contractor for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract 39 Documetnts an amount in current funds of Three Million Seven Hundred Eighty Three Thousand 40 Dollars($3.783.000.00). 41 Article 5.CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 42 5.1 CONTENTS: 43 A. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire agreement between City and 44 Contractor concerning the Work consist of the following: 45 1. This Agreement. 46 2. Attachments to this Agreement: 47 a. Bid Form 48 1) Proposal Form 49 2) Vendor Compliance to State Law Non-Resident Bidder 50 3) Prequalification Statement 51 4) State and Federal documents(project specific) 52 b. Current Prevailing Wage Rate Table 53 c. Insurance ACORD Form(s) — 54 d. Payment Bond 55 e. Performance Bond 56 f. Maintenance Bond — 57 g. Power of Attorney for the Bonds 58 h. Worker's Compensation Affidavit 59 i. MWBE Commitment Form 60 3. General Conditions. 61 4. Supplementary Conditions. 62 5. Specifications specifically made a part of the Contract Documents by attachment — 63 or, if not attached, as incorporated by reference and described in the Table of 64 Contents of the Project's Contract Documents. 65 6. Drawings. 66 7. Addenda. 67 8. Documentation submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. 68 9. The following which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the 69 Agreement and,if issued,become an incorporated part of the Contract Documents: 70 a. Notice to Proceed. 71 b. Field Orders. 72 c. Change Orders. 73 d. Letter of Final Acceptance. 74 a 75 FTWH1101 0400-2 JANUARY 2012 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- AGREEMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 005243-3 Agreement Page 3 of 4 76 Article 6. INDEMNIFICATION 77 6.1 Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend, at its own 78 expense, the city, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all 79 claims arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be performed 80 by the contractor, its officers, agents, employees, subcontractors, licenses or invitees .. 81 under this contract. This indemnification provision is specifically intended to operate 82 and be effective even if it is alleged or proven that all or some of the damages being 83 sought were caused, in whole or in part, by any act,omission or negligence of the city. _ 84 This indemnity provision is intended to include, without limitation, indemnity for 85 costs,expenses and legal fees incurred by the city in defending against such claims and 86 causes of actions. 87 0 88 6.2 Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless, at its own expense, 89 the city,its officers,servants and employees,from and against any and all loss,damage .. 90 or destruction of property of the city,arising out of,or alleged to arise out of,the work 91 and services to be performed by the contractor, its officers, agents, employees, 92 subcontractors, licensees or invitees under this contract. This indemnification 93 provision is specifically intended to operate and be effective even if it is alleged or 94 proven that all or some of the damages being sought were caused, in whole or in part, 95 by any act,omission or negligence of the city. 96 97 Article 7.MISCELLANEOUS 98 7.1 Terms. 99 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions will 100 have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 101 7.2 Assignment of Contract. 102 This Agreement, including all of the Contract Documents may not be assigned by the 103 Contractor without the advanced express written consent of the City. .. 104 7.3 Successors and Assigns. 105 City and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal 106 representatives to the other party hereto, in respect to all covenants, agreements and .. 107 obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 108 7.4 Severability. 109 Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be unconstitutional, void or 110 unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction shall be deemed stricken, and all III remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon CITY and .. 112 CONTRACTOR. 113 7.5 Governing Law and Venue. .. 114 This Agreement, including all of the Contract Documents is performable in the State of 115 Texas. Venue shall be Tarrant County, Texas, or the United States District Court for the 116 Northern District of Texas,Fort Worth Division. FTWH1101 0400-3 JANUARY 2012 .� SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- AGREEMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 00 52 43-4 Agreement Page 4 of 4 117 7.6 Other Provisions. 118 The Contractor agrees to pay at least minimum wage per hour for all labor as the same is 119 classified, promulgated and set out by the City, a copy of which is attached hereto and 120 made a part hereof the same as if it were copied verbatim herein. 121 7.7 Authority to Sign. 122 Contractor shall attach evidence of authority to sign Agreement, if other than duly 123 authorized signatory of the Contractor. 124 125 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, City and Contractor have executed this Agreement in multiple 126 counterparts. 127 128 This Agreement is effective as of the last date signed by the Parties("Effective Date"). 129 Contractor: City of Fort Worth Archer Western Contractors,LTD. By: Fernando Costa By: Assistant City Manager (Signature) Date Attest: (Printed Name) City Secretary (Seal) Title: Address: M&C Date: City/State/Zip: Approved as to Form and Legality: Date Douglas W.Black — Assistant City Attorney 130 131 _ 132 APPROVAL RECOMMENDED: 133 134 135 136 S.Frank Crumb,P.E. 137 DIRECTOR, 138 Water Department 139 FIWH11 1 0400-4 JANUARY 2012 SOUTH LLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- AGREEMENT MOTOR ND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 006113-1 PERFORMANCE BOND Page 1 of 2 1 SECTION 0401 2 PERFORMANCE BOND 3 4 THE STATE OF TEXAS § 5 § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: 6 COUNTY OF TARRANT § 7 8 That we, ,known as 9 "Principal"herein and ,a corporate 10 surety(sureties,if more than one)duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas,known as 11 "Surety"herein(whether one or more),are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a 12 municipal corporation created pursuant to the laws of Texas,known as"City"herein,in the penal 13 sum of, Dollars 14 ($ ),lawful money of the United States,to be paid in Fort Worth, 15 Tarrant County,Texas for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made,we bind 16 ourselves,our heirs,executors,administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, 17 firmly by these presents. 18 WHEREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the City 19 awarded the day of ,20___,which Contract is hereby referred to and •• 20 made a part hereof for all purposes as if fully set forth herein,to furnish all materials,equipment 21 labor and other accessories defined by law,in the prosecution of the Work,including any Change 22 Orders,as provided for in said Contract designated as South Holly Water Treatment Plant High 23 Service Pump Station—Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements,Project 24 Number 01623. 25 NOW,THEREFORE,the condition of this obligation is such that if the said Principal 26 shall faithfully perform it obligations under the Contract and shall in all respects duly and 27 faithfully perform the Work, including Change Orders,under the Contract,according to the plans, _ 28 specifications,and contract documents therein referred to,and as well during any period of 29 extension of the Contract that may be granted on the part of the City,then this obligation shall be 30 and become null and void,otherwise to remain in full force and effect. r r FTWH1101 0401-1 JANUARY 2012 r SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PERFORMANCE BOND MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS i 0061 13-2 PERFORMANCE BOND Page 2 of 2 1 PROVIDED FURTHER,that if any legal action be filed on this Bond,venue shall lie in 2 Tarrant County,Texas or the United States District Court for the Northern District of Texas, Fort 3 Worth rivision. 4 This bond is made and executed in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the 5 Texas Government Code,as amended,and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in 6 accordance with the provisions of said statue. 7 IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Principal and the Surety have SIGNED and SEALED 8 this ins ment by duly authorized agents and officers on this the day of 9 .20 10 PRINCIPAL: _ 11 12 13 14 BY: 15 Signature 16 ATTEST: 17 18 19 (Principal)Secretary Name and Title 20 21 Address: 22 23 24 25 Witness as to Principal 26 SURETY: 27 28 29 30 BY: 31 Signature 32 33 34 Name and Title 35 36 Address: 37 38 39 40 Witness as to Surety Telephone Number: 41 42 43 *Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract 44 from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If 45 Surety's physical address is different from its mailing address, both must be provided. 46 The date of the bond shall not be prior to the date the Contract is awarded. FTWH1101 0401-2 JANUARY 2012 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PERFORMANCE BOND MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 0061 14-1 PAYMENTBOND Page 1 of 2 1 SECTION 00 6114 2 PAYMENT BOND 3 4 THE STATE OF TEXAS § 5 § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: 6 COUNTY OF TARRANT § 7 8 That we, known as 9 "Principal' herein, and , a 10 corporate surety (sureties), duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, known as _ 11 "Surety" herein(whether one or more), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a 12 municipal corporation created pursuant to the laws of the State of Texas, known as"City"herein, 13 in the penal sum of Dollars 14 ($ ), lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Fort Worth, 15 Tarrant County, Texas, for the payment of which sum well and truly be made, we bind ourselves, 16 our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these 17 presents: 18 WHEREAS,Principal has entered into a certain written Contract with City, awarded the 19 day of , 20 , which Contract is hereby referred to and 20 made a part hereof for all purposes as if fully set forth herein, to furnish all materials, equipment, 21 labor and other accessories as defined by law, in the prosecution of the Work as provided for in 22 said Contract and designated as South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station— 23 Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements, Project Number 01623. 24 NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if 25 Principal shall pay all monies owing to any (and all) payment bond beneficiary (as defined in 26 Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code, as amended) in the prosecution of the Work under 27 the Contract, then this obligation shall be and become null and void; otherwise to remain in full 28 force and effect. 29 This bond is made and executed in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the 30 Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in 31 accordance with the provisions of said statute. 32 F FWH1101 0402-1 JANUARY 2012 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAYMENT BOND MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 0061 14-2 PAYMENT BOND Page 2 of 2 1 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have each SIGNED and SEALED 2 this instrument by duly authorized agents and officers on this the day of 3 , 20 4 — PRINCIPAL: ATTEST: BY: Signature (Principal)Secretary Name and Title �. Address: Witness as to Principal SURETY: ATTEST: BY: Signature (Surety)Secretary Name and Title Address: Witnes�as to Surety Telephone Number: 5 6 Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety, there must be on file a certified extract from the 7 bylaws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If Surety's physical 8 address is different from its mailing address,both must be provided. 9 10 The date of the bond shall not be prior to the date the Contract is awarded. 11 END OF SECTION 12 F WH1101 0402-2 JANUARY 2012 SOUTH HOLLY WfP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAYMENT BOND MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 0061 19-1 MAINTENANCE BOND Page 1 of 3 1 SECTION 0403 2 MAINTENANCE BOND 3 4 THE STATE OF TEXAS § 5 § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: 6 COUNTY OF TARRANT § 7 8 That we ,known as 9 "Principal"herein and a corporate surety 10 (sureties, if more than one)duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas,known as 11 "Surety"herein(whether one or more),are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a 12 municipal corporation created pursuant to the laws of the State of Texas,known as"City"herein, 13 in the sum of Dollars 14 ($ ),lawful money of the United States,to be paid in Fort Worth, 15 Tarrant County, Texas, for payment of which sum well and truly be made unto the City and its 16 successors,we bind ourselves,our heirs, executors,administrators,successors and assigns,jointly 17 and severally, firmly by these presents. 18 _ 19 WHEREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the City awarded 20 the day of 9 20 ,which Contract is hereby _ 21 referred to and a made part hereof for all purposes as if fully set forth herein,to furnish all 22 materials,equipment labor and other accessories as defined by law,in the prosecution of the 23 Work,including any Work resulting from a duly authorized Change Order(collectively herein, 24 the"Work")as provided for in said contract and designated as South Holly Water Treatment 25 Plant High Service Pump Station—Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical 26 Improvements,Project Number 01623;and 27 28 WHEREAS,Principal binds itself to use such materials and to so construct the Work in 29 accordance with the plans,specifications and Contract Documents that the Work is and will 30 remain free from defects in materials or workmanship for and during the period of two(2)years 31 after the date of Final Acceptance of the Work by the City("Maintenance Period");and 32 FTWH1101 0403-1 JANUARY 2012 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MAINTENANCE BOND MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 0061 19-2 MAINTENANCE BOND Page 2 of 3 1 =notice AS,Principal binds itself to repair or reconstruct the Work in whole or in part 2 upon from the City of the need therefor at any time within the Maintenance 3 Period. 4 5 NOW THEREFORE,the condition of this obligation is such that if Principal shall 6 remedy any defective Work,for which timely notice was provided by City,to a completion 7 satisfactory to the City,then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise to remain in 8 full force and effect. 9 10 PROVIDED,HOWEVER, if Principal shall fail so to repair or reconstruct any timely 11 noticed defective Work, it is agreed that the City may cause any and all such defective Work to 12 be repaired and/or reconstructed with all associated costs thereof being borne by the Principal and 13 the Surety under this Maintenance bond; and 14 15 PROVIDED FURTHER,that if any legal action be filed on this Bond,venue shall lie in 16 Tarrant County,Texas or the United States District Court for the Northern District of Texas,Fort 17 Worth Division;and 18 19 PROVIDED FURTHER,that this obligation shall be continuous in nature and 20 successive recoveries may be had hereon for successive breaches. 21 22 23 FTWH1101 0403-2 JANUARY 2012 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MAINTENANCE BOND MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 006119-3 MAINTENANCE BOND Page 3 of 3 1 IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Principal and the Surety have each SIGNED and SEALED this _ 2 instrument by duly authorized agents and officers on this the day of 3 20 .� 4 5 PRINCIPAL: 6 �. 7 8 9 BY: 10 Signature 11 ATTEST: 12 13 14 (Principal)Secretary Name and Title 15 16 Address: 17 ,.. 18 19 20 Witness as to Principal 21 SURETY: `■ 22 23 24 25 BY: 26 Signature 27 28 .� 29 ATTEST: Name and Title 30 31 Address: 32 (Surety)Secretary 33 34 35 Witness as to Surety Telephone Number: .. 36 37 *Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company,there must be on file a certified extract 38 from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If 39 Surety's physical address is different from its mailing address, both must be provided. 40 The date of the bond shall not be prior to the date the Contract is awarded. 41 FTWH1101 0403-3 JANUARY 2012 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MAINTENANCE BOND MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF FORT WORTH SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION - MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS SEPTEMBER 2011 C/?. Ir . . nMOTHY E. CAMPBELL r. .. ....i..8Y,.... ..� 1C?t i S�70tVAt,.. ,j TIMOTHY E. CAMPBELL, P.E. P.E. NO.81011 CP&Y, Inc. TBPE REGISTRATION#F-1741 DIVISION 1, DIVISION 3, DIVISION 5, DIVISION 14, DIVISION 16 (EXCEPT 16161, 16280, 16380, 16600), DIVISION 17 CITY OF FORT WORTH SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION - MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS SEPTEMBER 2011 DO Aw nr �b ;0 i t EXP. JUN 30, 2012 H.G. Doyle,Jr.,R.A. R.A. NO. 5140 CP&Y, Inc. TBPE REGISTRATION#F-1741 DIVISION 4, DIVISION 9 — CITY OF FORT WORTH SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS SEPTEMBER 2011 / TII�C3TNY .......... � ECK � 8(# R�% A! ! TIMOTHY J. MUECK, P.E. P.E. NO. 68486 GUPTA&ASSOCIATES, Inc. TBPE REGISTRATION#F-2593 SECTION 13280, SECTION 16380 CITY OF FORT WORTH SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS SEPTEMBER 2011 ,Ice.OF r`°°° � gee e etson aaaa •aa .�' .: JEFFREY N. HENSLEY, P.E. P.E. NO.84677 T' FREESE AND NICHOLS, Inc. TBPE REGISTRATION#F-2144 SECTION 16151, 16280, 16600 r Contract No.01632 CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT TABLE OF CONTENTS ' PART A NOTICE TO BIDDERS Notice to Bidders Special Instructions to Bidders Part B PROPOSAL Proposal MWBE Special Instructions Conflict of Interest Questionnaire Good Faith Effort Form Joint Venture Eligibility Form Prime Contractor Waiver Form Sub contractors/Suppliers Utilization Form Part C GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Section C1 Definitions Section C2 Interpretation and Preparation of Proposal Section C3 Award and Execution of Documents Section C4 Scope of Work Section C5 Control of Work and Material Section C6 Legal Relations and Public Responsibility Section C7 Prosecution and Progress Section C8 Measurement and Payment Part C1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Supplementary Conditions Part D SPECIAL CONDITIONS Special Conditions 2008 Prevailing Wage Rates Compliance with and Enforcement of Prevailing Wage Laws FTWH1101 I SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- TABLE OF CONTENTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 CITY OF FORT WORTH,TEXAS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) _ PART E TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS _ DIVISION 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 01010 Summary of Work 01039 Internet- Based Construction Management 01040 Coordination 01092 Abbreviations 01200 Project Meetings 01300 Submittals 01310 Construction Schedule 01350 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 01370 Schedule of Values 01430 Operation and Maintenance Data 01500 Construction Temporary Facilities and Controls 01600 General Material and Equipment Stipulations 01640 Manufacturers'Services 01650 Testing, Adjusting, Balancing, Demonstration, and Startup of Systems 01700 Contract Closeout 01710 Cleaning 01720 Project Record Documents 01740 Warranties and Bonds DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK - NOT USED DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03251 Concrete Joints 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03600 Grout 03740 Modification and Repair to Concrete 03900 Concrete Crack Repair DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry FTWH1101 II SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY�VrP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- TABLE OF CONTENTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 CITY OF FORT WORTH,TEXAS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) DIVISION 5 - METALS 05210 Steel Joist Framing 05500 Metal Fabrications 05501 Anchor Bolts, Expansion Anchors and Concrete Inserts DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS - NOT USED DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION - NOT USED DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS - NOT USED DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09900 Painting DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES - NOT USED DMSION 11 - EQUIPMENT- NOT USED DMSION 12 - FURNISHING - NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13280 PCB Containing Equipment Removal and Disposal DMSION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14630 Bridge Cranes Rehabilitation DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15190 Mechanical Identification Systems 15400 Plumbing General Provisions 15405 Plumbing - Demolition 15410 Plumbing - Piping Systems 15500 HVAC - General Provisions 15503 HVAC- Demolition 15550 HVAC - Heating Equipment 15860 HVAC- Fans 15862 HVAC -Air Filters 15890 HVAC - Ductwork and Accessories FTWH1101 III SEPTEMBER 2011 v SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- TABLE OF CONTENTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) _ 15950 HVAC - Controls 15990 HVAC -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 Electrical General Provisions 16012 Identifications 16020 Utilities 16040 Electrical Motor 150HP and Less 16055 Power System Studies 16060 Acceptance Testing and Calibration 16073 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16110 Raceways 16111 Cable Trays 16120 Conductors - 600V and Below 16121 Medium Voltage Cables 16130 Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16151 Medium Voltage Pump Electric Motor 16191 Miscellaneous Equipment 16280 Power Factor Correction Capacitors 16289 Surge Protective Devices ,. 16345 Medium Voltage Switchgear 16360 Underground Duct Banks 16362 Electrical Manholes 16380 Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Switchgear 16445 Panelboards - Distribution and Branch Circuit 16450 Grounding 16460 Energy Efficient Lighting and Distribution Transformers, Medium Voltage Primary 16481 Low Voltage Motor Control Centers (MCC) 16482 Medium Voltage Motor Control Centers (MCC) 16600 Lighting 16700 Common Control Panel Requirements for Equipment FTWH1101 IV SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- TABLE OF CONTENTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) DIVISION 17 - INSTRUMENTATION 17000 Instrumentation General Provisions 17300 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) Requirements 17520 Instruments 17910 Input/Output List 17920 Control Narrative PART F BONDS AND INSURANCE Performance Bond Payment Bond Maintenance Bond Certificate of Insurance Worker's Compensation Affidavit PART G CONTRACT FTWH1101 V SEPTEMBER 2011 .� SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- TABLE OF CONTENTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PART A am NOTICE TO BIDDERS Sealed bids for the following: FOR: South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear replacement and Electrical Improvements City Project No. 01632 Addressed to: CITY OF FORT WORTH PURCHASING DIVISION 1000 THROCKMORTON ST FORT WORTH TX 76102-6311 A will be received at the Purchasing Office until 1:30 p.m.,October 27,2011 and then publicly opened and read aloud at 2:00 p.m. in the Council Chambers. Contract documents, including plans and specifications for this project may be obtained on-line by visiting the City of Fort Worth's Purchasing Div website at hiip://www.fortworthgov.org[purchasine/ and clicking on the project link This link will take you to the advertised project folders on the City's Buzzsaw site,where the plans and contract documents may be downloaded,viewed,and printed by interested contractors and/or suppliers. A hard copy set of plans and documents for this project may be purchased for a non-refundable cost of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) per set at the offices of CP&Y Inc., 1820 Regal Row, Suite 200, Dallas Texas 75235. These documents contain additional information for prospective bidders. The major work will consist of the following(All Approximate): Replacement of the plant incoming medium voltage switchgear for the South Holly WTP located within the High Service Pump Station Building.Replacement of the medium and low voltage motor control centers,low voltage panelboards,unit heaters and lighting in the pump room,plumbing fixtures,supply and exhaust fans at the South Holly WTP High Service Pump Station.Upgrade of the bridge crane controls and live electrical bus are also included.Installation of utility pad mounted metering units in the high service pump station yard. Replacement of the low voltage motor control center located within the South Holly Chemical Building. Replacement of medium voltage switch in manhole and several low voltage panelboards at North Holly WTP Filter/Administration Building. All bidders submitting bids are required to be pre-qualified in accordance with the requirements of the Special Instructions to Bidders. For additional information, please contact Christopher Harder, Project Manager, City of Fort Worth — Water Department at Telephone Number:(817)392-8293 or by email:christopher.harder(a),fortworth og v^org,and/or Timothy Campbell,P.E.,Project Manager,CP&Y Inc. at(214)640-1711,email:tampbell 01 ,cpyi.com. A pre-bid conference will be held on October 6,at 1:30 PM,at the North Holly Water Treatment Plant Classroom,920 Fournier Street,Fort Worth Texas 76102.Bidders are encouraged to review the plans and specifications prior to the pre-bid conference. Advertising Dates: - September 29,2011 October 6,2011 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SPECIAL PREOUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. All contractors submitting bids are required to meet the Fort Worth Water Department special pre-qualification requirements for this project prior to submitting bids. Previous pregualification by the Fort Worth Water Department will not be considered as meeting this requirement. This one-time special project-specific process will prequalify potential bidders whose bids will be considered for award based upon technical evaluation, historical schedule compliance evaluation, evaluation of proposed manager and project superintendent. It is the bidder's responsibility to submit documentation for those items listed below, to the Director of the Water Department or his designated representative, at least fourteen (14) calendar days prior to the date of bid opening. The Water Department may request any other documents it may deem necessary. Any additional documents so requested shall be submitted to the Director of the Water Department or his designated representative at least seven(7)calendar days prior to the date of the opening bids. a) COVER LETTER The cover letter provided by the prospective bidder with the prequalification information must include the name of a contact individual that the City may contact for additional information if needed. b) FINANCIAL STATEMENT. The financial statement required shall have been prepared by an independent certified public accountant or independent public accountant holding a valid permit issued by an appropriate State licensing agency and shall have been so prepared as to reflect the financial status of the submitting company. This statement must be current and not more than one (1) year old. In the case that a bidding date falls within the time a new statement is being prepared,the previous statement shall be updated by proper verification. c) EXPERIENCE RECORD. For an experience record to be considered to be acceptable for a given project, it must reflect the experience of the firm seeking qualification in the work of both the same nature and technical level as that of the project for which bids are to be received. Experience must be on projects that were completed no more than 5 years prior to the date on which bids will be received. A minimum of three references must be included. References must include a contact person name, telephone number, project name and total cost,and type of work done. d) EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE. The prospective bidder shall list the equipment that the Contractor has available for the project and list the equipment that Contractor will rent as may be required to complete the project on which the Contractor submits a bid. e) PERSONNEL AND SCHEDULE COMPLIANCE RECORD. The prospective bidder shall submit the names and resumes for the proposed project manager and project superintendent. Y This information shall include a list of all projects that the proposed project manager and project superintendent completed within the last five (5) years to demonstrate ability to coordinate complex plant rehabilitation work and to perform work while maintaining critical shutdown schedules, regardless of by whom they were employed. Provide list of contact persons for all projects (preferably field inspectors or resident engineers) with names and phone numbers for the last five years'project. Part A—special—instructions—CP&Y—Notice to Bidders A-1 9/26/11-Draft In the event the Bidder on this contract is a Joint Venture, financial statements from each joint venturer shall be si4bmitted for prequalification,as well as the experience record and list of equipment of each joint venturer. The financial statements required shall have been prepared by an independent certified public accountan or independent public accountant holding a valid license issued by an appropriate State licensing agency and shall have been so prepared as to reflect the financial status of the each joint venturer. i lie statements must be current and not more than one (1) year old. In the case that a bidding — date falls within the time a new statement is being prepared, the previous statement shall be updated by proper verification. It is not required that each joint venturer shall have the necessary experience and equipment, rather that combined, the joint venture has the required experience and equipment. Upon request,the joint venture agreement shall be submitted for review. The Water Department will review each pre-qualification submittal.The following conditions will apply: a) The Director of the Water Department shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability for financial, experience and other qualifications to bid on any Fort Worth Water Department project. b) The City, in its sole discretion, may reject a bid for failure to demonstrate acceptable performance,experience and/or expertise. c,l Any proposals submitted by a non pre-qualified bidder shall be returned unopened, and if inadvertently opened, shall not be considered. d) The City will attempt to notify prospective bidders whose qualifications (financial or - experience)are not deemed to be appropriate to the nature and/or magnitude of the project on which bids are to be received. Failure to notify shall be a waiver of any necessary pre- qualifications. For additiTnal information contact Chris Harder, Fort Worth Water Department at (817) 392-8293 (FAX 817-392-8410). Pre-qualification submittal should be sent to: Mr. Chris Harder,P.E. Fort Worth Water Department Water Production—Holly Water Plant 1511 1 lte Avenue Fort Worth,TX 76102-6212 2. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE: 2.1 Before submitting his Bid,each Bidder must(a)examine the Contract Documents thoroughly,(b) visit the site to familiarize himself with local conditions that may in any manner affect performance of the work, (c) familiarize himself with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations affecting performance of the work, and (d) carefully correlate his observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2.2 Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those surveys and investigation reports of subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting performance of the work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparing the Drawings and Specifications. The data is furnished for information only and neither the Owner nor Engineer guarantees the accuracy of the data. Before submitting his Bid each Bidder will, at his own expense,make such additional surveys and investigations as he may deem necessary to determine his bid price for performance of the work within the terms of the Contract Documents. Part A—special,instructions CMY—Notice to Bidders A-2 9/26/11-Draft The Bidder acknowledges by the submission of his bid that he is solely responsible for trench excavation safety as prescribed by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and HB662 and HB665as amended by the 7Td Session of the Texas legislature and amended by the 73`d Session of the Texas Legislature with HB1569. 2.3 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that he has complied with every requirement of this Article. 3. BID FORM(PROPOSAL) 3.1 Bidders shall use the Bid (Proposal) forms included in the documents for each contract Bid. Supplemental data to be furnished shall be included in same sealed envelope with Proposal. 3.2 Bid(Proposal)Forms must be completed in ink. The Bid price of each item on the form must be stated in words, if specifically requested, and/or numerals; in case of a conflict, words will take precedence. 3.3 Bids by corporation must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature. 3.4 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, his title must appear under his signature and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. 3.5 All names must be printed below the signature. 3.6 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda(the number of which shall be filled in on the Bid Form). 4. SUBMISSION OF BIDS. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation for Bids and shall be included in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with the Project title and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid Security and other required documents. Bidders shall not separate,detach or remove any portion,segment or sheets from the contract document at any time. Bidders must complete the proposal section(s)and submit the complete specifications book or face rejection of the bid as non-responsive. Revised bid forms issued by addenda shall be stapled to the original bid form in the specifications book prior to submission. It is recommended that the bidder make a copy of the forms included in the Minority and Women Business Enterprise section for submittal within the time-line stated below or the bidder may request a copy of said forms from the City Project Manager named in this solicitation. 5. MODIFICATIONS AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. Bids may not be withdrawn after opening of Bids for the period set forth in the Notice to Bidders. 6. OPENING OF BIDS. Bids will be opened as indicated in the Invitation for Bids. Bids received after •. such time will not be considered,and will be returned unopened. 7. BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN. All Bids shall remain open for the period of time set forth in the Invitation for Bids,but Owner may,in his sole discretion,release any Bid and return the Bid Security " prior to that date. Part A_special_instuctions_CMY—Notice to Bidders A-3 9/26/11-Draft 8. AWARD OF CONTRACT. 8.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids and waive any and all formalities,and the right — to disregard all nonconforming or conditional Bids or counter proposals. 8.2 In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidders,whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and alternates and unit prices if requested in the Bid l forms. He may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and other persons and organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal items of material or equipment) proposed for those portions of the work as to which the identity of Subcontractors and other persons and organizations must be submitted as specified in the Supplementary Conditions or Specifications. He may conduct such investigations as he deems necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of the Bidders, proposed Subcontractors and other persons and organizations to do the work in accordance with the Contract Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time. Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder who does not meet any such evaluation to Owner's satisfaction. 8.3 If a contract is to be awarded, it will awarded to the lowest responsible Bidder whose evaluation by Owner indicates to the Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the Project. 8.4 It is expected that the Owner's evaluation of bids and award of contract will be made as set forth in the Invitation for Bids. The successful bidder will be notified by a Notice of Award which may be a letter or telegram. Time of completion is very important and failure to meet completion schedule will subject the Contractor to liquidated damages as provided in the Supplementary Conditions section of the Contract. 9. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT. 9.1 The accepted Bidder, within ten (10) days after formal notice of award, shall execute the formal Cntract Agreement and required Bonds on the forms prepared and submitted by the Owner. 9.2 The Owner will issue a Notice to Proceed authorizing the Contractor to commence work. 10. BID SECURITY. A cashier's check, or an acceptable bidder's bond, payable to the City of Fort Worth, in the amount of not less than five (5%) percent of the largest possible total of the bid submitted must accompany the bid,and is subject to forfeiture in the event the successful bidder fails to execute the Contract Documents within ten (10) days after the contract has been awarded. To be an acceptable surety on the bond, (1)the name of the surety company shall be included on the current U.S. Treasury list of acceptable sureties, or (2) the surety company must have capital and surplus equal to ten times the limit on the bond. The surety must be licensed to do business in the State of Texas. The amount of the bond shall not exceed the amount shown on the U.S.Treasury list or one- tenth(1/10)the total capital and surplus. 11. BONDS. A performance bond, a payment bond, and a maintenance bond each for one hundred (100%)percent of the contract price will be required. Reference C3-3.7. 12. WAGE RATES. Not less that the prevailing wage rates established by the City of Fort Worth,Texas, and as set forth in the Contract Documents,must be paid on this project. 13. AMBIGUITY: In the case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating prices in the Proposal,the City reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous construction thereof to the City or to reject the Proposal. 14. BIDDER LICENSE: Prior to the award of contract to an out-of-state bidder, the bidder shall be licensed to do business in the State of Texas. For licensing procedures,contact the Texas Secretary of State Offices(Telephone Number 1-512-463-5555 or 1-900-263-0060) 15. NONRESIDENT BIDDERS: Pursuant to Article 601g, Texas Revised Civil Statues, the City of Fort Worth will not award this contract to a nonresident bidder unless the nonresident's bid is lower than Part A_special—instructions—CP&Y—Notice to Bidders A-4 9/26/11-Draft ' the lowest bid submitted by a Texas resident bidder by the same amount that a Texas resident would be required to underbid a nonresident bidder to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident principal place of business is located. "Nonresident bidder" means a bidder whose principal place of business is not in this state, but excludes a contract whose ultimate parent company or majority owner has a place of business in the State of Texas. This provision does not apply if this contract involves federal funds. The appropriate blanks of the Proposal must be filled out by all nonresident bidders in order for the bid to meet specifications. The failure of a nonresident contractor to do so will automatically disqualify that bidder. 16. AGE: In accordance with the policy of the Executive Branch of the Federal Government, Contractor covenants that neither it nor any of its officer, members, agents, employees, program participants or subcontractors, while engaged in performing this contract, shall, in connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with the terms, conditions or privileges of their employment,discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification,retirement plan or statutory requirement. Contractor further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members, agents, employees, subcontractors,program participants,or persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitation to advertisement for employees to work on this contract, a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirements. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against the City arising out of the Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure to comply wit the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of the contract. 17. DISABILITY: In accordance with provision of the American with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA), Contractor warrants that it and any and all of its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on; the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public, nor in the availability, terms and/or conditions of employment for applicants for employment with, or employees of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Contract warrants it will fully comply with RDA's provision and any other applicable Federal, State, and local laws concerning disability and will defend, indemnify and hold harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against the City arising out of the Contractor's and/or its subcontractor's alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this contract. 18. MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES: In accord with City of Fort Worth Ordinance No. 15530, the City of Fort Worth has goals for the participation of minority business enterprises and women business enterprises in City contracts. A copy of the Ordnance can be obtained from the Office of the City Secretary. The bidder shall submit the MBE/WBE UTILIZATION FORM, SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER UTILIZATION FORM, PRIME CONTRACTOR WAVER FORM, and/or the GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM ("with Documentation") and/or the JOINT VENTURE FORM as appropriate. The Documentation must be received by the managing department no later than 5:00 p.m., five(5) City business days after the bid opening date. The.MfWBE goal'is 18%. The bidder shall obtain a receipt from the appropriate employee of the managing department to whom delivery was made. Such receipt shall be evidence that the documentation was received by the City. Failure to comply shall render the bid non- responsive. Part A special_instructions—CP&Y—Notice to Bidders A-5 9/26/11-Draft Upon request, Contractor agrees to provide the Owner complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by a Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and/or Women Business Enterprise (WBF) on a contract and payment thereof. Contractor further agrees to permit any audit and/or examination of any books, records or files in its possession that will substantiate the actual work perfo ed by an MBE and/or WBE. The misrepresentation of facts (other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or the commission of fraud by the Contractor will be grounds for termination of the contract and/or initiating action under appropriate federal, state or local laws or ordinances relating to false statements. Further, any such misrepresentation (other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or commission of fraud will result in the Contractor being determined to be irresponsible and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than three(3) years. 19. ADDFNDA: Bidders wanting further information, interpretation or clarification of the contract documents must make their request in writing to the Fort Worth Water Department Engineering Services,at least 96 hours prior to bid opening. Answers to all such requests will be bound and made a part of the Contract Documents, or should the bidder be in doubt as to their meaning, the bidder should at once notify the fort Worth Water Department Engineering Services,in order that a written addendum may be sent to all bidders. Any addenda issued will be mailed or be delivered to each prospective bidder. The bid proposal as submitted by the bidder must be so constructed as to include any addenda issued by the Fort Worth Water Department, prior to 24 hours of the opening of bids with appropriate recognition of addenda so noted in the bid proposal. Bidders are responsible for obtaining all addenda to the contract documents and acknowledging receipt of the addenda by initialing the appropriate spaces on the proposal form. Bids that do not acknowledge receipt of all addenda may be rejected as being non-responsive. Information regarding the status of addenda may be obtained by contacting the Water Department or Design Engineer. 20. PRE-BID CONFERENCE: The pre-bid conference for bidding Contractors will be held by representatives of the Fort Worth Water Department and the Consulting Engineers in the North Holly r Classroom at the Holly Water Treatment Complex, 920 Fournier Street.,Fort Worth,Texas 76102 on October 6, 2011 at 1:30 P.M. This conference is for the purpose of interpretation for bidding Contractors of Contract Documents, including plans and specifications, for construction of the Project. Only comments addressed in subsequent Addenda will be binding. END OF SECTION Part A_special_instructions_CP&Y—Notice to Bidders A-6 9/26/11-Draft PARS B PROPOSAL TO: The Purchasing Department Fort Worth,Texas City of Fort Worth,Texas FOR: South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements City Project No.: 01632 UNITS/SECTIONS: Purchase of 2000 Hp motors,Each,Quantity 4. Purchase of 900 Hp motors,Each,Quantity 1. Purchase of Medium Voltage Switchgear,Each, Quantity 1. Purchase of Medium Voltage Motor Control Center, Each,Quantity 1. Bridge Crane Modifications,Lump Sum. Installation of Medium Voltage Switchgear,Motor Control Center and Motors,Lump Sum. Electrical Modifications in North Holly WTP Admninistration Building, Lump Sum. .. HVAC Work in South Holly WTP High Service Pump Station,Lump Sum. Power System Studies as detailed in specification section 16055,Lump Sum. Trench Safety, 100 LF. South Holly Chemical Building Modifications,Lump Sum. All miscellaneous work required for the completion of the project that is not specifically identified in the above items,Lump Sum. Pursuant to the foregoing"Notice to Bidders,"the undersigned has examined the plans, specifications and the site,understands the amount of work to be done,and hereby proposes to do all the work and furnish all labor,equipment,and materials necessary to — fully complete all the work as provided in the plans and specifications,and subject to the inspection and approval of the Director, Water Department of the City of Fort Worth. If required by this project, Contractor must be pre-qualified in accordance with — the projects sponsoring Departments of the City of Fort Worth requirements. Upon acceptance of this Proposal by the City Council and required by this project, the bidder is bound to execute a contract and furnish Performance,Maintenance Bond for the water replacement contract only,and Payment Bond approved by the City of Fort Worth for performing and completing said work within the time stated for the following sums, to wit: Total quantities given in the bid proposal may not reflect actual quantities,by represent the best accuracy based on a reasonable effort of investigation; however,they are given for the purpose of bidding on and awarding the contract. Special Note: All contractors are advised that one contract will be awarded to the lowest combined bid for all Units/Sections. PAY YFE L APPROX. DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS WITH AMOUNT BID QUANTITY BID PRICES WRITTEN IN WORDS SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP 1 STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 4 EA Purchase of 2000 Hp motors: Payment for purchase of 2000 Hp motors shall include full compensation for furnishing,factory testing and shipping 2000 Hp motors. 4 t v�i 1nw�r�d kker►�ou��Doilars $ �, 0.o � -� and No Cents/EA. 1.2 1 EA Purchase of 900 HRmotors. Payment for purchase of 900 Hp motors shall include full compensation for furnishing,factory testing and shipping 200 Hp motors. tt.. -• or"fly trp tmjft Dollars �� and mo Cents/EA. 112, 1.� 1 EA Purchase of Medium Voltage Switchgear: Payment for purchase of Medium Voltage Switchgear shall include full compensation for furnishing,factory testing and shipping Medium'Voltage Switchgear for South Holly High -- Service Pump Station. Ln^ -auY lnwvlj,ea si)L+q AY[N0uj Dollars $ r i S 00 and V1 o Cents/EA. -T _ 1- 2 EA Purchase of Medium Voltage Motor Control Center: Payment for purchase of Medium Voltage Motor Control Center shall include full compensation for furnishing,factory testing and .. shipping Medium Voltage Motor Control Center for South Holly High Service Pump Station. k� 0()?-WkpjA StX �'hf'e('('1` Dollars $_2 71. 0001*15 and Mo Cents/EA. �-{ B-1 1.5 LS Bridge Crane Modifications: Payment for Bridge Crane ` Modifications shall include full compensation for furnishing and installing of materials,testing and commissioning for conduit,wiring, connections,panels and equipment. Provide all work complete and in place. Irfi�4W'A.WA j Dollars and Flo Cents/L.S. 1.6 LS Installation of Medium Voltage Switchgear.Motor Control Center and Motors: i Payment for installation of Medium Voltage Switchgear,Motor Control Center and Motors shall include full compensation for installing equipment and all associated wiring and conduits, testing and commissioning for . , conduit,wiring,connections and equipment. Provide all work complete and in place. EtqkL"In ��f� �ollars S a� and 1 l7 Cents/L.S. 1.7 LS Electrical Modifications in North Holly WTP Administration Building: Payment for North Holly Improvements shall include full compensation for furnishing and installing of materials,testing and commissioning for conduit,wiring, connections,panels and equipment at North Holly WTP.Provide all work complete and in place.SegwN A-1r%wUn4 Dollars and pj0 Cents/L.S. 1.8 LS HVAC Work in South Holly WTP ` High Service Pump Station: Payment for HVAC Work in South Holly WTP High Service Pump Station shall include full compensation for furnishing and installing of materials,testing and .• commissioning for duct,piping, B-2 conduit,wiring,connections,panels and equipment associated with the new HVAC components. Provide all work com fete and in place. One In=rc d St �ollars $ � OW� and too Cents/L.S. - .9 LS Power System Studies as detailed in specification section 16055: Payment for Power System Studies shall include full compensation for short circuit study,protective device _ evaluation study,protective device coordination study, Arc Flash Hazard study,and capacitor back to back switching study for the electrical .. system described in specification section 16055.Work shall also include collection of field data and utility information and field verification of equipment,cable and conduits characteristics.Provide all work .. complete and in place. T:J k* n J(h o.0 4N� Dollars and R4Z Cents/L.S. 1. 0 100 LF Trench safety: Payment for trench safety.Furnish and install trench safety system.Provide all work complete and in place. -TK -gN Dollars and 161D Cents/100 $ NI (�C7 L.F. 1.11 100 LF South Holly Chemical Building _ i[S modifications: Azo Payment for work at South Holly Chemical Building. Shall include full compensation for demolition of old MCC and switch,civil work, famishing and installing of materials, testing and commissioning for any equipment,panels, connections, conduit,wiring,piping associated with the modifications to be done at the chemical building. Provide all work complete and in place. .� F Dollars `(rv.r0 hv�n B-3'X j1�Q114S A L and Cents/L.S. ` 1.12 LS Miscellaneous work: Payment for miscellaneous work shall include full compensation for furnishing and installing of materials, testing and commissioning for any equipment,panels, connections, conduit,wiring,piping,etc.associated with work not specifically identified in Bid items 1.1 to 1.11.Provide all work comp) to d in lace. •F�1Jpced nN��( ''`So` Dollars $ and WVO Cents/L.S. BID SUMMARY FOR SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS � J BASE BID TOTAL Bid Items 1.1 to 1.12 Total) s s s B--4 FINAL BID SUMMARY BASE WDS .� Purchase of 2000 Hp motors,Each,Quantity 4. Purchase of 900 Hp motors,Each,Quantity 1. Purchase of Medium Voltage Switchgear,Each,Quantity 1. Purchase of Medium Voltage Motor Control Center, Each,Quantity 1. Bridge Crane Modifications,Lump Sum. Installation of Medium Voltage Switchgear,Motor Control Center and Motors, Lump Sum. Electrical Modifications in North Holly WTP Admninistration Building,Lump Sum. HVAq Work in South Holly WTP High Service Pump Station,Lump Sum. Power System Studies as detailed in specification section 16055,Lump Sum. Trench Safety, 100 LF. South Holly Chemical Building Modifications,Lump Sum. " All miscellaneous work required for the completion of the project that is not specifically identified in the above items, Lump Sum. TOTAL BASE BID $0.00 51 9 93,vc TOTAL BID $0.00 �� f$7J 1 o�'o .� Within ten(10)days after notification by the City of Fort Worth,the undersigned will execute the formal contract and will deliver an approved Surety Bond and such other bonds as required by the Contract Documents,for the faithful performance of the Contract. The attached bid security in the amount of 5%is to become the property of the City of Fort Worth,Texas,in the event the contract and bond or bonds are not executed and delivered within the time above set forth,as liquidated damages for the delay and additional work caused thereby. If as a requirement of this project,the undersigned bidder certifies that they have been furnished at least one set of the General Contract Documents and General or Special Specifications for Projects,and that they have thoroughly read and completely understand all the requirements and conditions of those General Documents and the specific Contract Documents and appurtenant plans. The undersigned assured that its employees and applicants for employment and those of any labor organization,subcontractors,or employment agency in either famishing or referring employee applicants to the undersigned are not discriminated against as prohibited by the terms of City Ordinance No.7278 as amended by City Ordinance No.7400. i The Bidder agrees to begin construction with ten(10)calendar days after issue of the work order and to complete the contract within days after beginning construction as set forth in the written work order to be furnished by the Owner. f (Check One Box and complete,as applicable) [L�The principal place of business of our company is in the State of a. Nonresident bidders in the State of ,our principal place of business,are required to be percent lower than resident bidders by state law. A copy of .. the statute is attached. yob. Nonresident bidders in the State of IL ,our principal place of business,are not required to underbid resident bidders. ❑ The principal place of business of our company or our parent company or majority owner is in the State of Texas. Receipt is acknowledged of the following Respectfully su addenda: Addendum No. 1:'� By.p ( "4- Addendum No.2: Title: Addendum No.3: ✓ Addendum No.4: ✓ Company: &'IVP- '-MRr'iM Addendum No.5:- Addendum No.6: Address: 2121 Me-A., 5 103 AwkksrnlS, W I&Dp Date: j J �O1 j1 VENDOR COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW The 1985 Session of the Texas Legislature passed House Bill 620 relative to the - award of contracts to nonresident bidders. This law provides that, in order to be awarded a contract as low bidder, nonresident bidders (out-of-state contractors whose corporate offices or principal place of business are outside of the State of Texas) bid projects for construction, improvements, supplies or services in Texas at an amount lower than the lowest Texas resident bidder by the same amount that a Texas resident bidder would be required too underbid a nonresident bidder in order to obtain a comparable contract in the State in which the nonresident's principal place of business is located. The appropriate blanks in Section A must be filled out by all out-of-state or nonresident bidders in order for your bid to meet specifications. The failure of out-of-state or nonresident contractors to do so will automatically disqualify that bidder. Resident bidders must check the box in Section B. (Check One Box and complete,as applicable) E3"'�'The principal place of business of our company is in the State of +� a. Nonresident bidders in the State of ,our principal place of business,are required to be percent lower than resident bidders by state law. A copy of the statute is attached. Jr'o" Nonresident bidders in the State of JL. ,our principal place of business,are not required to underbid resident bidders. �) The principal place of business of our company or our parent company or majority owner is in the State of Texas. BlDD7 By: ' Title,.- ptaSt oolk— r Company: A410-99- %4-6zetLt Co4'1F-&-CID#5,LTh• Address: ZIZ( A�� -! , STY'- loB Date: THIS FORM MUST BE RETURNED WITH YOUR QUOTATION .... ..+ . ..— . .r I aU.'tJ Jl tJ44 ly-ZV F.UUI ?011•Nov-17 10:47 AM Odessa pumps and Equipment 9725221296 1/10 _ 0 ' IC V MP S AAA TRANSMISSION 2430 W. Main St. Grand Prairie,TX 75050 PH#972-522-1296 FX#972-522-1492 Attn: Archer Western Contractors— Joe Lindeman (817) 640-8734 Date: �NOV11 From: Walter Wilkinson walt@odessapumps.com Pages: /0 including cover Re: South Holly WTP Switchgear/ Pump Motor Replacement DATA, SHEETS .,,, ....— I ....- . .r $if 4WI I IU.'to a/cALc IZZO N.UUZ ZOii-Nov-17 10:47 AM Odessa Pumps and Equipment 9725221296 2110 ' ELECTRIC MIMI&QUESTIONNAIRE Mtor Dots Contract No.01632 Manufacturer: Hyundai Ideal Electric Motor HP: 2000 - Frame: 560 Enclosure: WP-I Type: KRP3 565-10 RPM: 720 Voltage:_.,4p88�gg,� Phases: 3 Hertz: 60 Starting Method; Auto TR 65W _ Shaft: Size: 18 Omm (7") Cont:inuous Insulation Class: F' Duty: Full Load AMPS: 275.9 No Load AMPS:. Locked Rotor AMPS: Locked Rotor Time: Locked RotorTorque: 7 %Breakdown Torque:_2 Q.L Locked Rotor KVA/HP: TBD Rotor WK2(lb-ft;2): Tgn NEMA Design: standard Service Factor: 1.].5 inrush Current(%of Full Load): TBD Max Safe Stalled Time(Semds),. TBD Number of Safe Starts Per Day: TBD Number of Consecutive Starts: 2 cold, 1 hot: *Full Load Temp Rise,degrees Cover 50°C Ambient(at 1.0 S.F.), 20 deg C *Service Factor Temp Rise,degrees C over 50'C Ambient(at 1.15 S.F.): TBD *limiting Temperature Rise: TBD Resistance(at 250C): Bearings: Type/Size Anti Fxicti fe I''10 Lubrication: grease Exhaust Air(CFM): TBD Exhaust Air Temp Rise(OF):TBD EMCIFNCY: POWER FAMR: CURRENT Y 1.15 S.F.Load 4/4 Load: 95.2% 82% 275.9 A 3/4 Load: 94•9y 78-V -- In Load: 94.2t 70W 1/4 Load: RTD Types and Mounting; Winding tea/phase Bearing lea/bearing RTD Alarm and Trip Setpoint: 100 ohm _ Manor Sound Power Level: 8S c1BA at 1 meter Motor Recommended Power Factor: TBD - - SpaceHeaterVoltage: 120V Wattage: TBD *Temperature rise measured by embedded detectors and by resistance, All Data E c&To Be Completed By The Motor Manufacturer END OF SECTION FYI Iln 16151-18 SEP7 EMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WrP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE E' cnuCAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR r%A va%.cr i I III,- I II 11I Cu I I I U;40 `.!I LJLL I LJ0 P.003 2011-Nov-17 10:47 AM Odessa Pumps and Equipment 9725221296 3/10 ELFC!'111C tjCTOEJOUESTIONNAIRF Moto b■t■ Corbi et No.01632 Manufacturer: H;n1nd;gi TALOAI R1 Pc-i-ri c Motor HP: 90o Frame, 400 s Enclosure: P- Type: HRP3 409-8 RPM: 887 V6ita9e2 3 n o 14 0 Q Qy , Phases: 3 Hertz; 60 Starting Method: Auto TR 65% Shaft: Skr.: 1-0ynm t5-1/811) Insulatlon Class: F Duty: coast 4 rnuous _ Full Load AMPS: 123.2A No Load AMPS:, Locked Rotor AMPS: 5 8 0 t Locked Rotor Time: Locked RotorTarque: 7 ts %Breakdown Torque: 210Jk Locked Rotor KVA/HP: D Rotor WKZ(lb-R2): Tyr NEMA Destgn: standard Service Factor: 1.15 Inrush Current(°�a of Fult Load): Trtn Max Safe Stalled Time(Seconds): TBD Number of Safe Starts Per Day: TBD Number of Consecutive Starts: 2 cold, 1 hot *Full Load Temp Rise,degrees C over 50°C Ambient(at 1.0 S.F.): 20 deg C ' *Service Factor Temp Rise,degrees Cover 50'C Ambient(at 1.15 S.F.): TSD *Limiting Temperature Me: TBD Resistance(at ZVQ: Bearings: Type/Size ba Life L-10 Lubrtcatlon; Grease Exhaust Air(CFM): TIM Exhaust Air Temp Rise CF):_�gD EFRCIENCY' Powers FACTOR M2C 1.15 S.F. Load 4/4 Load: 94.8V 834- 123.2A 3/4 Load: 94.5$ 81ir 1/2 Load; 93.81E 744; 1/4 Load: RID Types and Mounting: Winding tea/phase Bearing lea/bearing RTD Alarm and Trip Setpolnt: 100 Ohm Motor Sound Power Level: 85 dBA average at 1 meter Motor Recommended Power Factor: TBD Space Heater Voltage: 120V Wattage: TBD *Temperature rise measured by embedded detectors and by resistance. All Data aids To Be Completed By The Motor Manufacturer END OF SECTION FTWH1101 16151-16 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH}FOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP SrATION MIU M VOLTAGE ELECTRIrAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR i•n va wr nc r r+ r+/LV r l V:YJ 31 LJGL 1 LSO F,UU4 2011•Naw-17 10:47 AM Odessa Pumps and Equipment 9725221296 4I10 Customer Project Name ; South Holly Water Treatment Plant Reference No. Date issued MGMT.SYS1 DACON, �: &�06Gd1➢I�Q:V.�1tlt{t6y9�ilildL Technical Specification for Induction Motor t b �, • 0 9011.11.16 For Bidding J,Y.Park B.G.K1m O.K,Lee Rov. Tate I:quad camoets Prgmrad By Choaktd By Approved By A HHI(Hyundal Heavy Industries Co., Ltd.) Electro Electric Systems http:/lwww.hW.co.kr KA udt:e�t lfrle 111111201 10:45 9725221296 P,005 2011 Nav•17 10,47 AM Odessa Pumps and Equipment 9725221296 5110 Its A&HYUNLJJA AC INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET HEAVY INVUSTAIES Ca.,L7D Model No.or RFO No. 1111087-01 1 A01 JRay.No ( 0 ) Project Name South Rally Water Treatment PtaJea No. Quantity 4 seta Plant Frame Size 560 Rated Output 2000 HP Typo HRP3 585-10 Nrrmtxro stet 10 tinatoaura(Proetootlon) WP-I ( IPW28 ) Rotor Type Squirrel Cage Method of Cooling 1001 Starirng Method• Auto TR 85% Rated FraqunW 50 Hz Rated Voltage 4000 V Number of Phases 3 Full Load 276.2A thermal Class F CurrantLocked-Rater• 580% Temp.Rho at fun load(by reslatanea mat hod) Emcienay at 1.0:3.F 70 deg.O 60%Lead 94.2% Motor Looatian Outdoor 75%Load JlKs% Altitude Less than 1,000 meter 100%Laad 95.2% Refattve Hum" Less than 80 Power Factor(p.u) Ambient Tamp. 50 dog,o (Max,) r7':46NE%%L*sd oad D.7 DutyType 31 0.78 Sarvtce Factor 1.15 00%Load 10.82 Mounting B3 Speed at Full Load 1712 rpm YPa A g-fricun Torque _ Bearing I DEIN-DE Rollar+Ball I Roller Fug Load 12041.0 k 'm Lubricant Grease Lacked-ra(er^170.0% External Thnut Rater to Remark#1 araakdown•• 1200% Coupling Method Direct Moment of inertia(J) SnortExttrWcn Single ILead I-kg-W Main Steel Motor -kg,W Terminal Sax Aux. Yes Bound Pressure Le al(No4oad 6 mean value at 1m from motor) Location Rafar to Ouribe Dravdno 82 dBLN Na-Load Applloatlan Pump Vibration 2.5MM(6(rm6) Areaclaesificalton Non-Hazardous Permissible number at Cold 2 times Type of Ex-Protectlon N/A consecutive starts Hot 1 times Applicable Standard NEMA Paint IMunsell No. 7.5 8Q 511.5 1 (I)Wlnding Tamp Detector(Pt 100 Ohm):TEA I Phase Outfirts 01menslan Drawing%Motor Weight(Approx.) (2)Bearing Tamp Deleater(Pt 100 Ohm):I15A I Bearing 33 1111037.GIADI 9350 kq (3)Space Hasler External Tnroat(Nor) I NIA Exiemai Thrust(Max) I NfA External Thrust(Up) NIA FOR BIDDING J Dual Voltage(4000 123003 Dots DSND CHKD CHKD APPQ ar 2011.11.16 J.Y.Park B.G.Klm D.ICLee Note:OOtthers not mentioned in this We heat V11 be In ecoordanoe with maker standard. p w InepB=andd peftm ncei eati"atl he 9inaniid with lour nce of ppi cab�e standertl�� n HH1 W230481.1•In oast or Inverter or V.V.V.F Motor:Performence date is boo ad an aina wave test. A4(210mm X 287mm) a. ra• V.UU0 .2011-Mav-17 10:47 AM Odessa Pumps and Equipment 9725221296 wr 6110 C`3 - Z o m w iE o y J s gig s J m o Z M Q 3 r m LL 4 Im C L t id LU a �. , $ r W n C N 0 _ Q r z �� aaio a(s�o°saopaes� aw�wae '{r��n�"iww�"ri�w eu�'iaeM°0�xnuool'"'`u 4 nn Wo l.or I I u1C. I If III CV 11 I U 7 4J W LJ1L I4J0 P.007 s •2011-Nov-17 10:47 AM Odessa Pumps and Equipment 9725221296 7110 AHYU DAI SPEED-TORQUE & CURRENT CURVE STUR CVE111087-01 AOi HEAVY INDUSTRIES CO.LZD. MOTOR TYPE HRP3 566-10 2000 HP 10 P 60 Hz RATED TORQUE 2041.0 Kg.m RATED SPEED: 712 RPM GO=OF MOTOR -Kg.w VOLTAGE 4000 V GDP OF LOAD -Kg.e RATED CURRENT 276.9 A - 240 600 B 220 350 2Q0 500 180 450 ., 160 400 0: W_ 140 350 : I20 300 z M Q IM 250 oe g0 A 200 $p 150 40 100 20 SO L DD 00 10 20 30 40 90 da 70 80 OIL ;•S`PEf•O�lIV�P�f�C�l�!1T~ NOTE A:SPEED TORQUE CURVE:AT RATED VOLTAGE B:SPEED-CURRENT CURVE AT RATED VOLTAGE C:SPEED-TORQUE CURVE AT 65%RATED VOLTAGE D:SPEED-CURRENT CURVE AT 65%RATED VOLTAGE L:LOAD SPEED•TORQUE CURVE REMARK REV. CONTENTS DATE DSN CHK CHK APPO _. 2 1 _. O For 9iading 2011.11.1a J.Y.Perk B.G.Klm B.G.KIm DA.Lee RM-W230-091-1 A4(21 Omm x 297mm) 4 „n —,+ f , ruu. r rr 1r1 cu r 1 rv.•tJ ,1LJLL 1L110 V 1.110 •2011-Nov-17 10:47 AM Odessa Pumps and Equipment 9725221296 8/10 AHYUNDAIJ AC INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET HXAVY INQUSTR1ES CO.,LTD. Model No.or RFD No. 111108741 1 Item No. 1801 Ray.No [ 0 1 Project Name south Holly Water Treatment prD(eat No. Quantity 4 sets Plant Frame Size 400 Rated Output 1900 HP Type HRP3 409.8 Number of Pales 18 Enoloaurs(proafeatian) WPd ( IPW23 ) Rotor Type SqulnatCepa Method of Cooling ICO1 Stating Moused' Auto TR 55% Rated Frequncy 50Ift: Rated V0118ge 4000 V Number of Phases 30 Current Full Load 12a.2A Tharmel Claea F Locked-Rotor' 980% Temp.Also at full load y rooistanco melhod) EtOcleney rat a FF 70 daa.0 60%Load� 93.8% Motor Location Outdoor 75%Load 194.6% Altitude Lose then 1,000 molar I I 100yo Load 194.8% Relative Humidly Lose then 9 % Power Factor(p u Amblont Temp, 50 dag.c (Max.) 5076 Load 0.74 Duty Type 31 7996 Losd 0AI Sarvtce Factor 1.16 1004i load 0.8S Mounting 83 Speed at FuN E cad 887 r.p.m type Anti-lifetion Torque Soaring FJo-DE Bad I Sad Full Load 1731.3 kg•m Lubricant Graeae Lacked-rator”170.0% FAemel Thrust Refer to Remark#1 Breakdown" 210% — Coupling Method DIMM Momant of Inertia(J) Shaft tans on $tng18 jLcad -kg•m• atn steel I Motor -kg•mz Terminal Aux. Yee sound Pressure Levat(No4oad&mean value at tm from motor) Box Locallon Refer to Outline Drawing 82 dStA)No-toad Appleation Pump Vtbmtlon 2,8mtnls(mts) Area classlRptlan Non-Heiardcus Permissible number of Cold 2 limas Type of Ex•Protaetion NIA consecutive starle Hot t fimee Applicable Standard NEMA I Paint I Munsell No. 17.5 SQ 611.5 C (1)Winding Tamp Daleater(PI 100 Ohm):2EA 1 Phase Outline Dimension Drawing t Motor Weight(Approx.) (2)Searing Temp Detector(Pt 100 Chun):1 EA I Bearing 63 1111087.Ot•801 4t80 kg (3)Space Heater External Thrust(Nor) NIA 6ctemsl Throat(Max) W Exlemal Thrust(up) NIA FOR BIDDING +tee a Dual Voltage (4000/23001 Date DBND CHKD CHKO APPO 2011.11,16 J.Y.Park S.t3,Klm - O.K.LDs y Note,Others not mentioned in thle data shoat shall be In accordenee with maker standard. Above tteellnl 1 data are only d,_qn values and mall be guerantoad War tolerance of applcable standard. Inapectlon ano performence teat shall be gur8nleed with t0femnae of applicable standard. HH1 W230A31.1'to Daze of Inverter or V.V.V,F Motor:ParformanCa date to based on elne wave test. A4 210mm X 297mm) r%^ vO kGr I i nic i I. I I I Lu I I lu:4J 01 ZJ44 I LJo .. •2011-Nov-17 10:47 AM Odessa Pumps and Equipment 9725221296 r,uua 9/10 z � m w c 0 'o LL do o In € g C9 Fl j m LL Z > . • . j_ a m . n. m � p Q 7 90p t♦MHf117p.NYBIf pk �Y e tlrk ki1Cl0 H rso al■�`aaonas>ita eNowaa1Y°irSp � o' dn"9"u'w'oOwaanu°'�wu°oin'u M^ VGICf 11IIIC I If Iff[UII IU:43 `.N1JILIL`.Jb F'.UIU -2011-Nov•17 10:47 AM Odessa Pumps and Equipment 9725221295 10/10 AkHYUNbA[ SPEED-TORQUE & CURRENT CURVE STCVE111087.01 801 HEAVY)HWB RIES c04LTC. MOTOR TYPE HRP3 409-8 900 HP 8 P 60 Hz RATED TORQUE : 737.3 Kg.m RATED SPEED: 887 RPM GD2 OF MOTOR -Kp.m' VOLTAGE 4000 V 0 OF LOAD -Kg.tn' RATED CURRENT 123.2 A 240 600 220 B 330 200 500 180 450 160 400 W 140 350 z :? 120 300 z M. 104 230 M. - .�: M 80 ,M0 ; 60 130 4a 100 c 10 30 L 00 10 20 30 40 30 60 70 80 90 1i - NOTE A:SPEED TORQUE CURVE AT RATED VOLTAGE 3,SPEED-CURRENT CURVE AT RATED VOLTAGE C:SPEED TORQUE CURVE AT 65%RATED VOLTAGE 0:SPEED-CURRENT CURVE AT 65%RATED VOLTAGE L:LOAD SPEED TORQUE CURVE REMARK REV. CONTENTS DATE OSN CHK CHK APPO 2 1 O For Bidding 2011.11,16 J.Y.Perk B.G.lft B.G.Krn O.K.Lee RM-W230-091-1 A4(210mm x 297mm) VENDOR COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW The 1985 Session of the Texas Legislature passed House Bill 620 relative to the award of contracts to nonresident bidders. This law provides that, in order to be awarded a contract as low bidder, nonresident bidders (out-of-state contractors whose corporate offices or principal place of business are outside of the State of Texas) bid projects for construction, improvements, supplies or services in Texas at an amount lower than the lowest Texas resident bidder by the same amount that a Texas resident bidder would be required too underbid a nonresident bidder in order to obtain a comparable contract in the State in which the nonresident's principal place of business is located. The appropriate blanks in Section A must be filled out by all out-of-state or nonresident bidders in order for your bid to meet specifications. The failure of out-of-state or nonresident contractors to do so will automatically disqualify that bidder. Resident bidders must check the box in Section B. (Check One Box and complete, as applicable) ❑ The principal place of business of our company is in the State of a. Nonresident bidders in the State of , our principal place of business, are required to be percent lower than resident bidders by state law. A copy of the statute is attached. b. Nonresident bidders in the State of , our principal place of business, are not required to underbid resident bidders. ❑ The principal place of business of our company or our parent company or majority owner is in the State of Texas. BIDDER: By: Title: Company: Address: Date: THIS FORM MUST BE RETURNED WITH YOUR QUOTATION FORT WORTH City of Fort Worth Minority and Women Business Enterprise Specifications SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR BIDDERS APPLICATION OF POLICY If the total dollar value of the contract is$25,000 or more,the M/WBE goal is applicable. If the total dollar value of the contract is less than$25,000,the M/WBE goal is not applicable. POLICY STATEMENT It is the policy of the City of Fort Worth to ensure the full and equitable participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises (M/WBE) in the procurement of all goods and services to the City on a contractual basis. All requirements and regulations stated in the City's current Minority and Women Business Enterprise Ordinance apply to this bid. M/WBE PROJECT GOALS The City's M/WBE goal on this project is 18 %of the total bid(Base bid applies to Parks and Community Services). COMPLIANCE TO BID SPECIFICATIONS On City contracts of$25,000 or more, bidders are required to comply with the intent of the City's M/WBE Ordinance by either of the following: 1. Meet or exceed the above stated M/WBE goal, or 2. Good Faith Effort documentation,or; 3. Waiver documentation, or; 4. Joint Venture. SUBMITTAL OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION The applicable documents must be received by the Managing Department,within the foliowinq times allocated, in order for the entire bid to be considered responsive to the specifications. Tne Offerer shall deliver the M BE do-cL;mentation in person la [fie appropriate amployae of the manogin.0 dBpa�tnient and ablain a dataltime receipt_ Such receipt shall be evi6ence That the City received iha documentation in lb time allcxatetl. A faxed copy w111 not be arc epted. 1. Subcontractor Utilization Form, if goal is received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid met or exceeded: o ening date, exclusive of the bid opening date. 2. Good Faith Effort and Subcontractor received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid Utilization Form, if participation is less than opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date. statedgoal: 3. Good Faith Effort and Subcontractor received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid Utilization Form, if no M/WBE participation: opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date. 4. Prime Contractor Waiver Form, if you will received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid -perform all subcontracting/supplier work: opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date. 5. Joint Venture Form, if utilize a joint venture received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid to met or exceed goal. opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE CITY'S M/WBE ORDINANCE,WILL RESULT IN THE BID BEING CONSIDERED NON-RESPONSIVE TO SPECIFICATIONS Any questions, please contact the M/WBE Office at(817)392-6104. Rev. 11/1/05 CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE FORM CIQ For vendor or other person doing business with local governmental entity This questionnaire is being filed in accordance with chapter 176 of the Local OFFICE USE ONLY Government Code by a person doing business with the governmental entity. Date Received By law this questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the local government not later than the 7th business day after the date the person becomes aware of facts that require the statement to be filed. See Section 176.006, Local Government Code. A person commits an offense if the person violates Section 176.006, Local Government Code.An offense under this section is a Class C misdemeanor. Name of person doing business with local governmental entity. 2 Check this box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire. (The law requires that you file an updated completed questionnaire with the appropriate filing authority not later than September 1 of the year for which an activity described in Section 176.006(a),Local Government Code,is pending and not later than the 7th business day after the date the originally filed questionnaire becomes incomplete or inaccurate.) 3 Describe each affiliation or business relationship with an employee or contractor of the local governmental entity who makes recommendations to a local government officer of the local governmental entity with respect to expenditure of money. 4 Describe each affiliation or business relationshipwith a person who is a local government officer and who p g appoints or employs a local government officer of the local governmental entity that is the subject of this questionnaire. Amended 01113/2006 CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE FORM CIQ For vendor or other person doing business with local governmental entity Page 2 5 Name of local government officer with whom filer has affilitation or business relationship. (Complete this section only if the T answer to A,B,or C is YES.) This section, item 5 including subparts A, B, C & D, must be completed for each officer with whom the filer has affiliation or business relationship. Attach additional pages to this Form CIQ as necessary. A. Is the local government officer named in this section receiving or likely to receive taxable income from the filer of the questionnaire? F1 Yes F7 No B. Is the filer of the questionnaire receiving or likely to receive taxable income from or at the direction of the local government _ officer named in this section AND the taxable income is not from the local governmental entity? F7 Yes F7 No C. Is the filer of this questionnaire affiliated with a corporation or other business entity that the local government officer serves as an officer or director, or holds an ownership of 10 percent or more? F] Yes F7 No D. Describe each affiliation or business relationship. 6 Describe any other affiliation or business relationship that might cause a conflict of interest. 7 Signature of person doing business with the governmental entity Date Amended 0111312006 ATTACHMENT 1C Page 1 of 3 FORT WORTH City of Fort Worth Good Faith Effort Form PRIME COMPANY NAME: Check applicable block to describe rime PROJECT NAME: MM//DBE NON-MM//DBE South Holly WTP High Service Pump Station - Motor and BID DATE Switch ear Replacement and Electrical Improvements 11/17/2011 City's MIWBE Project Goal: PROJECT NUMBER 18 % 01632 If you have failed to secure M/WBE participation and you have subcontracting and/or supplier opportunities or if your DBE participation is less than the City's project goal,you must complete this form. If the bidder's method of compliance with the M/WBE goal is based upon demonstration of a "good faith effort", the bidder will have the burden of correctly and accurately preparing and submitting the documentation required by the City. Compliance with each item, 1 thru 6 below, shall satisfy the Good Faith Effort requirement absent proof of fraud, intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation the facts or intentional discrimination by the bidder. Failure to complete this form, in its entirety with supporting documentation, and received by the Managing Department on or before 5:00 p.m. five (5) City business days after bid opening, exclusive of bid opening date,will result in the bid being considered non-responsive to bid specifications. 1.) Please list each and every subcontracting and/or supplier opportunity) for the completion of this project, regardless of whether it is to be provided by a M/WBE or non-M/WBE. (DO NOT LIST NAMES OF FIRMS) On Combined Projects, list each subcontracting and or supplier opportunity through the 2" tier. (Use additional sheets, if necessary) List of Subcontracting Opportunities List of Supplier Opportunities 4 Rev.05/30/03 ATTACHMENT 1C Page 2 of 3 2.) Obtain a current(not more than three(3)months old from the bid open date)list of M/WBE subcontractors and/or suppliers from the City's M/WBE Office. Yes Date of Listing No -- 3.) Did you solicit bids from M/WBE firms,within the subcontracting and/or supplier areas previously listed,at least ten calendar days prior to bid opening by mail,exclusive of the day the bids are opened? Yes (It yes,attach MIWBE mail listing to include name of firm and address and a dated copy of letter mailed.) No 4.) Did you solicit bids from M/WBE firms,within the subcontracting and/or supplier areas previously listed, at least ten calendar days prior to bid opening by telephone, exclusive of the day the bids are opened? Yes (If yes,attach list to include name of M/WBE firm,person contacted,phone number and date and time of contact.) No NOTE: A facsimile may be used to comply with either 3 or 4, but may not be used for both. If a facsimile is used, attach the fax confirmation, which is to provide M/WBE name, date, time, fax number and - documentation faxed. NOTE: If the list of M/WBEs for a particular subcontracting/supplier opportunity is ten (10) or less, the bidder must contact the entire list to be in compliance with questions 3 and 4. If the list of M/WBEs for a particular subcontractingisupplier opportunity is ten (10) or more, the bidder must contact at least two- thirds (W) of the list within such area of opportunity, but not less than ten to be in compliance with questions 3 and 4. 5.) Did you provide plans and specifications to potential M/WBEs or information regarding the location of plans and specifications in order to assist the M/WBEs? Yes No 6.) Submit documentation if M/WBE quotes were rejected. The documentation submitted should be in the forrn5 of an affidavit, include a detailed explanation of why the M/WBE was rejected and any supporting documentation the bidder wishes to be considered by the City. In the event of a bona fide dispute concerning quotes, the bidder will provide for confidential in-camera access to and _ inspection of any relevant documentation by City personnel. Please use additional sheets,if necessary,and attach. Company Name Telephone Contact Person Scope of Work Reason for Rejection y Rev.05/30/03 ATTACHMENT1C Page 3 of 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Please provide additional information you feel will further explain your good and honest efforts to obtain MIWBE participation on this project. The bidder further agrees to provide, directly to the City upon request, complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed on this contract, the payment thereof and any proposed changes to the original arrangements submitted with this bid. The bidder also agrees to allow an audit and/or examination of any books, records and files held by their company that will substantiate the actual work performed on this contract, by an authorized officer or employee of the City. Any intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts will be grounds for terminating the contract or debarment from City work for a period of not less than three (3) years and for initiating action under Federal, State or Local laws concerning false statements. Any failure to comply with this ordinance and creates a material breach of contract may result in a determination of an irresponsible offeror and barred from participating in City work for a period of time not less than one (1) year. The undersigned certifies that the information provided and the M/WBE(s) listed was/were contacted in good faith. It is understood that any M/WBE(s) listed in Attachment 1C will be contacted and the reasons for not using them will be verified by the City's M/WBE Office. Authorized Signature Printed Signature Title Contact Name and Title (if different) Company Name Phone Number Fax Number Address Email Address City/State/Zip Date Rev.06/30103 Joint Venture Page 1 of 3 FORT WORTH CITY OF FORT WORTH Joint Venture Eligibility Form All questions must be answered;use"NA"if applicable. Name of City project: . A joint venture form must be completed on wA project RFPBid/Purchasing Number: 1.Joint venture information: Joint Venture Name: Joint Venture Address: (If applicable) Telephone: Facsimile: E-mail address: Cellular: Identify the firms that comprise the joint venture: Please attach extra sheets if additional space is required to provide detailed explanations of work to be performed by each firm comprising the joint venture _7__ M/WBE firm Non-M/WBE —name: firm name: Business Address: Business Address: City,State,Zip: City,State,Zip: Telephone Facsimile E-mail Telephone Facsimile Cellular Cellular Certification Status: E-mail address Name of Certifying Agency: 2.Scope of work performed by the Joint Venture: Describe the scope of work of the M/WBE: Describe the scope of work of the non-M/WBE: Rev.5/30/03 Joint Venture Page 2 of 3 3.What is the percentage of M/WBE participation on this joint venture that you wish to be counted toward meeting the project goal? 4.Attach a copy of the joint venture agreement. ! 5.List components of ownership of joint venture: (Do not complete if this information is described in joint venture agreement) Profit and loss sharing: Capital contributions,including equipment: Other applicable ownership interests: 6.Identify by name,race,sex and firm those individuals(with titles)who are responsible for the day-to-day management and decision making of the joint venture: Financial decisions (to include Account Payable and Receivable): { Management decisions: a. Estimating b. Marketing and Sales c. Hiring and Firing of management Y personnel d. Purchasing of major equipment and/or supplies Y Supervision of field operations The City's Minority and Women Business Enterprise Office will review your joint venture submission and will have final approval of the M/WBE percentage applied toward the goal for the project listed on this form. NOTE: n From and after the date of project award, if any of the participants, the individually defined scopes of work or the dollar amounts/percentages change from the originally approved information, then the participants must inform the City's M/WBE Office immediately for approval. Any unjustified change or deletion shall be a material breach of contract and may result in debarment in accord with the procedures outlined in the City's M/WBE Ordinance. _ Rev.5/30/03 Joint Venture Page 3 of 3 AFFIDAVIT - The undersigned affirms that the foregoing statements are true and correct and include all material information necessary to identify and explain the terms and operation of the joint venture. Furthermore,the undersigned shall agree to provide to the joint venture the stated scope of work, decision-making responsibilities and payments herein. The City also reserves the right to request any additional information deemed necessary to determine if the joint venture is eligible. Failure to cooperate and/or provide requested information within the time specified is grounds for termination of the eligibility process. The undersigned agree to permit audits,interviews with owners and examination of the books,records and files of the joint venture by any authorized representatives of the City of Fort Worth. Failure to comply with this provision shall result in the termination of any contract, which may be awarded under the provisions of this joint venture's eligibility and may initiate action under Federal, State and/or Local laws/ordinances concerning false statements or willful misrepresentation of facts. -------------------------------------------------------- Name of M/WBE firm Name of non-M/WBE firm Printed Name of Owner Printed Name of Owner Signature of Owner Signature of Owner Printed Name of Owner Printed Name of Owner Signature of Owner Signature of Owner Title Title Date Date Notarization State of County of - On this day of ,20 ,before me appeared and to me personally known and who,being duly sworn,did execute the foregoing affidavit and did state that they were properly authorized to execute this affidavit and did so as their free act and deed. Notary Public Print Name Notary Public Signature Commission Expires (sear) Rev.5/30/03 ATTACHMENT 1B FORT WORTH Page 1 of 1 City of Fort Worth Prime Contractor Waiver Form PRIME COMPANY NAME: Check applicable block to describe rime PROJECT NAME: MNV/DBE NON-MNV/DBE South Holly WTP High Service Pump Station - Motor and BID DATE Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements 11/17/2011 City's M/WBE Project Goal: PROJECT NUMBER 18 % 01632 If both answers to this form are YES, do not complete ATTACHMENT 1C(Good Faith Effort Form). All questions on `D this form must be completed and a detailed explanation provided, if applicable. If the answer to either question is NO, then you must complete ATTACHMENT 1C. This form is only applicable if both answers are yes. Failure to complete this form in its entirety and be received by the Managing Department on or before 5:00 p.m.,five(5)City business days after bid opening,exclusive of the bid opening date,will result in the bid being considered non-responsive to bid specifications. Will you perform this entire contract without subcontractors? YES If yes, please provide a detailed explanation that proves based on the size and scope of this NO project, this is your normal business practice and provide an operational profile of your business. Will you perform this entire contract without suppliers? YES If yes, please provide a detailed explanation that proves based on the size and scope of this project, this is your normal business practice and provide an inventory profile of your business. NO The bidder further agrees to provide, directly to the City upon request, complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by all subcontractors, including M/WBE(s) on this contract, the payment therefore and any proposed changes to the original M/WBE(s) arrangements submitted with this bid. The bidder also agrees to allow an audit and/or examination of any books, records and files held by their company that will substantiate the actual work performed by the M/WBEs on this contract, by an authorized officer or employee of the City. Any intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts will be grounds for terminating the contract or debarment from City work for a period of not less than three(3)years and for initiating action under Federal, State or Local laws concerning false statements. Any failure to comply with this ordinance creates a material breach of contract may result in a determination of an irresponsible offeror and barred from participating in City work for a period of time not less than one(1)year. Authorized Signature Printed Signature Title Contact Name(if different) Company Name Phone Number Fax Number Address Email Address City/State/Zip Date Rev.5130/03 ATTACHMENT 1 B Page 2 of 1 Rev.5130103 i ATTACHMENT 1A Page 1 of 4 FORT WORTH City of Fort Worth Subcontractors/Suppliers Utilization Form PRIME COMPANY NAME: Check applicable block to describe prime PROJECT NAME: MWDBE NON-MWDBE South Holly WTP High Service Pump Station - Motor and BID DATE Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements 11/17/2011 City's M/WBE Project Goal: r ime's M/WBE Project Utilization: PROJECT NUMBER 18% % 01632 Identify all subcontractors/suppliers you will use on this project Failure to complete this form, in its entirety with requested documentation, and received by the Managing Department on or before 5:00 p.m. five (5) City business days after bid opening, exclusive of bid opening date, will result in the bid being considered non-responsive to bid specifications. The undersigned Offeror agrees to enter into a formal agreement with the MMBE firm(s) listed in this utilization schedule, conditioned upon execution of a contract with the City of Fort Worth. The intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts is grounds for consideration of disqualification and will result in the bid being considered non-responsive to'bid specifications M/WBEs listed toward meeting the project goal must be located in the nine (9) county marketplace or currently doing business in the marketplace at the time of bid. Marketplace is the geographic area of Tarrant, Parker, Johnson, Collin, Dallas, Denton, Ellis, Kaufman and Rockwall counties. Identify each Tier level. Tier is the level of subcontracting below the prime contractor, i.e., a direct payment from the prime contractor to a subcontractor is considered 15t tier, a payment by a subcontractor to its supplier is considered 2"d tier ALL MfWBEs MUST BE CERTIFIED BEFORE CONTRACT AWARD. Certification means those firms, located or doing business at the time of bid opening within the Marketplace, that have been determined to be bonafide minority or women businesses by the North Central Texas Regional Certification Agency (NCTRCA), or the Texas Department of Transportation (TX DOT), highway division. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise(DBE) is synonymous with Minority/Women Business Enterprise(M/WBE). s If hauling services are utilized, the prime will be given credit as long as the M/WBE listed owns and operates at least one fully licensed and operational truck to be used on the contract. The MM/BE may lease trucks from another M/WBE firm, including M/WBE owner-operators, and receive full M/WBE credit. The MM/BE may lease trucks from non-M/WBEs, including owner-operators, but will only receive credit for the fees and commissions earned by the M/WBE as outlined in the lease agreement. Rev.5130/03 i ATTACHMENT 1A — FORT WORTH Page 2 of 4 Primes are required to identify ALL subcontractors/suppliers, regardless of status; i.e., Minority,Women and non-M/WBEs. ! Please list M/WBE firms first, use additional sheets if necessary. Certification N = (check one) SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER T n Company Name i N T Detail Detail Address I M yy C X M Subcontracting Work Supplies Purchased Dollar Amount Telephone/Fax T D B r E E R O B C T E A Rev.5/30/03 i w ATTACHMENT 1A FORT WORTH Page 3 of 4 i Primes are required to identify ALL subcontractors/suppliers, regardless of status; i.e., Minority,Women and non-M/WBEs. Please list M/WBE firms first, use additional sheets if necessary. Certification N (check one) SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER T n Company Name i N T Detail Detail _ Address M yy C x M Subcontracting Work Supplies Purchased Dollar Amount Telephone/Fax r B B R O E E C T �E A Y r w w Rev.5/30/03 i ATTACHMENT IA FORT WORTH Page 4 of 4 Total Dollar Amount of M/WBE Subcontractors/Suppliers $ Total Dollar Amount of Non-M/WBE Subcontractors/Suppliers $ TOTAL DOLLAR AMOUNT OF ALL SUBCONTRACTORS/SUPPLIERS $ The Contractor will not make additions, deletions, or substitutions to this certified list without the prior approval of the Minority and Women Business Enterprise Office Manager or designee through the submittal of a Request for Approval of Change/Addition. Any unjustified change or deletion shall be a material breach of contract and may result in debarment in accord with the procedures outlined in the ordinance. The contractor shall submit a detailed explanation of how the requested change/addition or deletion will affect the committed M/WBE goal. If the detail explanation is not submitted, it will affect the final compliance determination. By affixing a signature to this form, the Offeror further agrees to provide, directly to the City upon request, _ complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by all subcontractors, including M/W/DBE(s) arrangements submitted with the bid. The Offeror also agrees to allow an audit and/or examination of any books, records and files held by their company. The bidder agrees to allow the transmission of interviews with owners, principals, officers, employees and applicable subcontractors/suppliers/contractors participating on the contract that will substantiate the actual work performed by the M/W/DBE(s) on this contract, by an authorized officer or employee of the City. Any intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts will be grounds for terminating the contract or debarment from City work for a period of not less than three (3) years and for initiating action under Federal, State or Local laws concerning false statements. Any failure to comply with this ordinance and create a material breach of contract may result in a determination of an irresponsible Offeror and barred from participating in City work for a period of time not less than one (1)year. Authorized Signature Printed Signature Title Contact Namelrltle(if different) Company Name Telephone and/or Fax Address E-mail Address City/State/Zip Date Rev.5/30/03 PART PART C-GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS MAY 5, 2011 TABLE OF CONTENTS C1-1 DEFINITIONS C1-1 (1) C1-1.1 Definition of Terms C1-1 (1) C1-1.2 Contract Documents C1-1 (2) C 1-1.3 Notice to Bidders Cl-1 (2) C1-1.4 Proposal C1-1 (2) C1-1.5 Bidder C1-1 (2) C1-1.6 General Conditions C1-1 (2) C1-1.7 Special Conditions C1-1 (2) C1-1.8 Specifications C1-1 (2) C1-1.9 Bonds C1-1 (2) aw C1-1.10 Contract C1-1 (3) C1-1.11 Plans C1-1 (3) C1-1.12 City C1-1 (3) C1-1.13 City Council C1-1 (3) C1-1.14 Mayor C1-1 (3) C1-1.15 City Manager C1-1 (3) C1-1.16 City Attorney C1-1 (3) C1-1.17 Director of Public Works C1-1 (3) C1-1.18 Director, City Water Department C1-1 (3) C1-1.19 Engineer Cl-1 (3) C1-1.20 Contractor C1-1 (3) C1-1.21 Sureties C1-1 (4) C1-1.22 The Work or Project C1-1 (4) C1-1.23 Working Day C1-1 (4) _ C1-1.24 Calendar Days C1-1 (4) C1-1.25 Legal Holidays C1-1 (4) C1-1.26 Abbreviations C1-1 (4) C1-1.27 Change Order C1-1 (5) C1-1.28 Paved Streets and Alleys C1-1 (5) C 1-1.29 Unpaved Streets or Alleys Cl-1 (6) _ C1-1.30 City Street C1-1 (6) C1-1.31 Roadway C1-1 (6) C1-1.32 Gravel Street C1-1 (6) C2-2 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION .. OF PROPOSAL C2-2.1 Proposal Form C2-2 (1) C2-2.2 Interpretation of Quantities C2-2 (1) .. C2-2.3 Examination of Contract Documents and Site of Project C2-2 (2) C2-2.4 Submitting of Proposal C2-2 (2) (1) C2-2 5 Rejection of Proposals C2-2 (3) C2-2 6 Bid Security C2-2 (3) C2-2 7 Delivery of Proposal C2-2 (3) C2-2 8 Withdrawing Proposals C2-2 (3) C2-2 9 Telegraphic Modifications of Proposals C2-2 (3) C2-2.10 Public Opening of Proposal C2-2 (4) C2-2.11 Irregular Proposals C2-2 (4) C2-2.12 Disqualification of Bidders C2-2 (4) .. C3-3 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS: C3-3.1 Consideration of Proposals C3-3 (1) C3-3.2 Minority Business Enterprise/Women Business C3-3 (1) Enterprise Compliance C3-3.3 Equal Employment Provisions C3-3 (1) C3-3.4 Withdrawal of Proposals C3-3 (1) C3-3.5 Award of Contract C3-3 (2) C3-3.6 Return of Proposal Securities C3-3 (2) C3-3.7 Bonds C3-3 (2) C3-3.8 Execution of Contract C3-3 (3) C3-3.9 Failure to Execute Contract C3-3 (3) C-3-3.10 Beginning Work C3-3 (4) C3-3.11 Insurance C3-3 (4) C3-3.12 Contractor's Obligations C3-3 (6) C3-3.13 Weekly Payrolls C3-3 (6) �. C3-3.14 Contractor's Contract Administration C3-3 (6) C3-3.15 Venue C3-3 (7) C4-4 SCOPE OF WORK C4-4.1 Intent of Contract Documents C4-4 (1) t C4-4.2 Special Provisions C4-4 (1) C4-4.3 Increased or Decreased Quantities C4-4 (1) C4-4.4 Alteration of Contract Documents C4-4 (2) C4-4.5 Extra Work C4-4 (2) C4-4.6 Construction Schedule C4-4 (3) C4-4.7 Schedule Tiers Special Instructions C4-4 (6) C5-5 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS C5-5.1 Authority of Engineer C5-5 (1) C5-5.2 Conformity with Plans C5-5 (1) C5-5.3 Coordination of Contract Documents C5-5 (1) C5-5.4 Cooperation of Contractor C5-5 (2) C5-5.5 Emergency and/or Rectification Work C5-5 (2) C5-5.6 Field Office C5-5 (3) C5-5.7 Construction Stakes C5-5 (3) (2) C5-5.8 Authority and Duties of City Inspector C5-5 (3) C5-5.9 Inspection' C5-5 (4) C5-5.10 Removal of Defective and Unauthorized Work C5-5 (4) C5-5.11 Substitute Materials or Equipment C5-5 (4) C5-5.12 Samples and Tests of Materials C5-5 (5) C5-5.13 Storage of Materials C5-5 (5) C5-5.14 Existing Structures and Utilities C5-5 (5) C5-5.15 Interruption of Service C5-5 (6) C5-5.16 Mutual Responsibility of Contractors C5-5 (7) C5-5.17 Clean-Up C5-5 (7) .. C5-5.18 Final Inspection C5-5 (8) C6-6 LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY C6-6.1 Laws to be Observed C6-6 (1) _ C6-6.2 Permits and Licenses C6-6 (1) C6-6.3 Patented Devices,Materials, and Processes C6-6 (1) C6-6.4 Sanitary Provisions C6-6 (1) C6-6.5 Public Safety and Convenience C6-6 (2) C6-6.6 Privileges f Contractor in Streets, Alleys, C6-6 (3) and Right-of-Way C6-6.7 Railway Crossings C6-6 (3) C6-6.8 Barricades, Warnings and Flagmen C6-6 (3) C6-6.9 Use of Explosives,Drop Weight, Etc. C6-6 (4) C6-6.10 Work Within Easements C6-6 (5) C6.6.11 Independent Contractor C6-6 (6) C6-6.12 Contractor's Responsibility for Damage Claims C6-6 (6) ,�. C6-6.13 Contractor's Claim for Damages C6-6 (8) C6-6.14 Adjustment or Relocation of Public Utilities,Etc. C6-6 (8) C6-6.15 Temporary Sewer and Drain Connections C6-6 (8) C6-6.16 Arrangement and Charges for Water Furnished by the City C6-6 (9) C6-6.17 Use of a Section or Portion of the Work C6-6 (9) C6-6.18 Contractor's Responsibility for the Work C6-6 (9) C6-6.19 No Waiver of Legal Rights C6-6 (9) C6-6.20 Personal Liability of Public Officials C6-6 (10) C6-6.21 State Sales Tax C6-6 (10) C7-7 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS C7-7.1 Subletting C7-7 (1) C7-7.2 Assignment of Contract C7-7 (1) C7-7.3 Prosecution of The Work C7-7 (1) C7-7.4 Limitation of Operations C7-7 (2) C7-7.5 Character of Workmen and Equipment C7-7 (2) C7-7.6 Work Schedule C7-7 (3) C7-7.7 Time of Commencement and Completion C7-7 (3) C7-7.8 Extension of Time Completion C7-7 (3) (3) C7-7 9 Delays C7-7 (4) C7-7 10 Time of Completion C7-7 (4) C7-7 11 Suspension by Court Order C7-7 (5) C7-7 12 Temporary Suspension C7-7 (5) C7-7 13 Termination of Contract due to National Emergency C7-7 (6) C7-7 14 Suspension or Abandonment of the Work C7-7 (6) and Annulment of the Contract: C7-7 15 Fulfillment of Contract C7-7 (8) C7-7 16 Termination for Convenience of the Owner C7-7 (8) C7-7.17 Safety Methods and Practices C7-7 (11) C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT C8-8.1 Measurement Of Quantities C8-8 (1) C8-8. Unit Prices C8-8 (1) C8-8. Lump Sum C8-8 (1) C8-8.4 Scope of Payment C8-8 (1) C8-8.5 Partial Estimates and Retainage C8-8 (2) C8-8.6 Withholding Payment C8-8 (3) C8-8.7 Final Acceptance C8-8 (3) C8-8.8 Final Payment C8-8 (3) C8-8.9 Adequacy of Design C8-8 (4) C8-8.10 General Guaranty C8-8 (4) C8-8.11 Subsidiary Work C8-8 (4) C8-8.12 Miscellaneous Placement of Material C8-8 (4) C8-8.13 Record Documents C8-8 (4) (4) Vr PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS C1-1 DEFINITIONS SECTION C 1-1 DEFINITIONS C1-1.1 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS: Whenever in these Contract Documents the following terms or pronouns in place of them are used, the intent and meaning shall be understood and interpreted as follows: F ' C1-1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents are in all of the written and drawn documents, such as specifications, bonds, addenda, plans, etc., which govern the terms and performance of the contract. These are contained on the General Contract Documents and the Special Contract Documents. a. GENERAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The General Contract Documents govern all Water Department Projects and Include the following Items PART A- NOTICE TO BIDDERS (Sample) White PART B -PROPOSAL (Sample) White PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS (CITY) Canary Yellow (Developer) Brown PART D- SPECIAL CONDITIONS Green PART E- SPECIFICATIONS El-White E2-Golden Rod E2A-White PERMITS/EASEMENTS Blue PART F-BONDS (Sample) White PART G- CONTRACT (Sample) White b. SPECIAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Special Contract Documents are prepared for each specific project as a supplement to the General Contract Documents and include the following items: PART A-NOTICE TO BIDDERS (Advertisement) same as above PART B - PROPOSAL (Bid) PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS PART D- SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART E- SPECIFICATIONS PERMITS/EASEMENTS PART F- BONDS PART G- CONTRACT PART H-PLANS (Usually bound separately) C1-1 (1) C1-1.3 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: All of the legal publications either actually published in public advertising mediums or furnished direct to interested parties pertaining to the work contemplated under the Contract Documents constitutes the notice to bidders. C1-1.4 PROPOSAL: The completed written and signed offer or tender of a bidder to perform the work which the Owner desires to have done, together with the bid security, constitutes the Proposal, which becomes binding upon the Bidder when it is officially received by the Owner, has been publicly opened and read and not rejected by the Owner. C1-1.5 BIDDER: Any person, persons, firm, partnership, company, association, corporation, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative, submitting a proposal for performing the work contemplated under the Contract Documents, constitutes a bidder. C1-1.6 GENERAL CONDITIONS: The General Conditions are the usual construction _ and contract requirements which govern the performance of the work so that it will be carried on in accordance with the customary procedure, the local statutes, and requirements of the City of Fort Worth's charter and promulgated ordinances. _ Whenever there may be a conflict between the General Conditions and the Special Conditions, the latter shall take precedence. . _ C1-1.7 SPECIAL CONDITIONS: Special conditions are the specific requirements which are necessary for the particular project covered by the Contract Documents and not specifically covered in the General Conditions. When considered with the General Conditions and other elements of the Contract Documents they provide the information which the Contractor and Owner should have in order to gain a thorough knowledge of the project. C1-1.8 SPECIFICATIONS: The Specifications is that section or part of the Contract Documents which set forth in detail the requirements which must be met by all materials, construction, workmanship, equipment and services in order to render a completed an useful project. Whenever reference is made to standard specifications, regulations, �- requirements, statutes, etc., such referred to documents shall become a part of the Contract Documents just as though they were embodied therein. C1-1.9 BONDS: The bond or bonds are the written guarantee or security furnished by the Contractor for prompt and faithful performance of the contract and include the following: a. Performance Bond(see paragraph C3-3.7) b. Payment Bond(see paragraph C3-3.7) C. Maintenance Bond (see paragraph C3-3.7) d. Proposal or Bid Security (see Special Instructions to Bidders, Part A and C2-2.6) ' C1-1 (2) C1-1.10 CONTRACT: The Contract is a formal signed agreement between the owner and the Contractor covering the mutual understanding of the two contracting parties about the project to be completed under the Contract Documents. C1-1.11 PLANS: The plans are the drawings or reproductions therefrom made by the Owner's representative showing in detail the location, dimension and position of the various elements of the project, including such profiles, typical cross-sections, layout diagrams, working drawings, preliminary drawings and such supplemental drawings as the Owner may issue to clarify other drawings or for the purpose of showing changes in the work hereinafter authorized by the Owner. The plans are usually bound separately from the other parts of the Contract Documents, but they are part of the Contract Documents just as though they were bound therein. 160 C 1-1.12 CITY: The City of Fort Worth, Texas, a municipal corporation, authorized and chartered under the Texas State Statutes, acting by and through its governing body or its �. City Manager, each of which is required by charter to perform specific duties. Responsibility for final enforcement of the Contracts involving the City of Fort Worth is by Charter vested in the City Manager. The terms City and Owner are synonymous. C1-1.13 CITY COUNCIL: The duly elected and qualified governing body of the City of Fort Worth, Texas. C1-1.14 MAYOR: The officially elected Mayor, or in his absence, the Mayor Pro tem of the City of Fort Worth, Texas. C1-1.15 CITY MANAGER: The officially appointed and authorized City Manager of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, or his duly authorized representative. C1-1.16 CITY ATTORNEY: The officially appointed City Attorney of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, or his duly authorized representative. C1-1.17 DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC WORKS: The officially appointed official of the City n of Fort Worth, Texas, referred to in the charter as the City Engineer, or his duly authorized representative. C1-1.18 DIRECTOR, CITY WATER DEPARTMENT: The officially appointed Director of the City Water Department of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, or his duly authorized representative, assistant, or agents. C1-1.19 ENGINEER: The Director of Public Works, the Director of the Fort Worth City Water Department, or their duly authorized assistants, agents, engineers, inspectors, or superintendents, acting within the scope of the particular duties entrusted to them. C1-1.20 CONTRACTOR: The person, person's, partnership, company, firm, association, or corporation, entering into a contract with the Owner for the execution of work, acting C1-1 (3) directly or through a duly authorized representative. A sub-contractor is a person, firm, corporation, supplying labor and materials or only labor, for the work at the site of the project. C1-1.21 SURETIES: The Corporate bodies which are bound by such bonds as are required with and for the Contractor. The sureties engaged are to be fully responsible for the entire and satisfactory fulfillment of the Contract and for any and all requirements as set forth in the Contract Documents and approved changes therein. C1-1.22 THE WORK OR PROJECT: The completed work contemplated in and �. covered by the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to produce a completed and serviceable project. C1-1.23 WORKING DAY: A working day is defined as a calendar day, not including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, in which weather or other conditions not under the control of the Contractor permit the performance of the principal unit of work for a period of not less than seven (7) hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m., with exceptions as permitted in paragraph C7-7.6 C 1-1.24 CALENDAR DAYS: A calendar day is any day of the week or month, no days 4 being excepted. CI-1.25: LEGAL HOLIDAYS: Legal holidays shall be observed as prescribed by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth for observance by City employees as follows: 1. New Year's day January 1 2. M.L. King,Jr. Birthday Third Monday in January 3. Memorial Day Last Monday in May 4. Independence Day July 4 5. Labor Day First Monday in September 6. Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November 7. Thanksgiving Friday Forth Friday in November — 9. Christmas Day December 25 9. Such other days in lieu of holidays as the City Council may determine — When one of the above named holidays or a special holiday is declared by the City Council, falls on a Saturday,the holiday shall be observed on the preceding Friday, or if it — falls on Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday, by those employees working on working day operations. Employees working calendar day operations will consider the calendar as the holiday. C1-1.26 ABBREVIATIONS: Whenever the abbreviations defined herein appear in the Contract Documents, the intent and meaning shall be as follows: C1-1 (4) AASHTO - American Association of State MGD - Million Gallons Highway Transportation Officials per Day ASCE - American Society of Civil CFS - Cubic Foot per Engineers Second IAW - In Accordance With Min. - Minimum ASTM - American Society of Testing Mono. - Monolithic Materials % - Percentum AWWA - American Water Works R - Radius Association I.D. - Inside Diameter ASA - American Standards Association O.D. - Outside Diameter HI - Hydraulic Institute Elev. - Elevation Asph. - Asphalt F - Fahrenheit Ave. - Avenue C - Centigrade Blvd. - Boulevard In. - Inch CI - Cast Iron Ft. - Foot CL - Center Line St. - Street GI - Galvanized Iron CY - Cubic Yard Lin. - Linear or Lineal Yd. - Yard lb. - Pound SY - Square yard MH - Manhole L.F. - Linear Foot Max. - Maximum D.I. - Ductile Iron C1-1.27 CHANGE ORDER: A "Change Order" is a written supplemental agreement between the Owner and the Contractor covering some added or deducted item or feature which may be found necessary and which was not specifically included in the scope of the project on which bids were submitted. Increase in unit quantities stated in the proposal are not the subject matter of a Change Order unless the increase or decrease is more than 25% of the amount of the particular item or items in the original proposal. All "Change Orders" shall be prepared by the City from information as necessary furnished by the Contractor. C1-1.28 PAVED STREETS AND ALLEYS: A paved street or alley shall be defined as a street or alley having one of the following types of wearing surfaces applied over the natural unimproved surface: 1. Any type of asphaltic concrete with or without separate base material. 2. Any type of asphalt surface treatment, not including an oiled surface,with or without separate base material. 3. Brick, with or without separate base material. 4. Concrete, with or without separate base material. 5. Any combination of the above. C1-1 (5) C1-1.29 UNPAVED STREETS OR ALLEYS: An unpaved street, alley, roadway or other surface is any area except those defined for"Paved Streets and Alleys." C1-1.30 CITY STREET: A city street is defined as that area between the right-of-way lines as the street is dedicated. C1-1.31 ROADWAY: The roadway is defined as the area between parallel lines two (2') back of the curb lines or four (`4) feet back of the average edge of pavement where no curb exists. C1-1.32 GRAVEL STREET: A gravel street is an unimproved street to which has been added one or more applications of gravel or similar material other than the natural material found on the street surface before any improvement was made. C1-1 (6) SECTION C - GENERAL CONDITIONS C2-2 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL SECTION C2-2 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL C2-2.1 PROPOSAL FORM: The Owner will furnish bidders with Proposal form, which will contain an itemized list of the items of work to be done or materials to be furnished r and upon which bid prices are requested. The Proposal form will state the Bidder's general understanding of the project to be completed, provide a space for furnishing the amount of bid security, and state the basis for entering into a formal contract. The Owner will furnish forms for the Bidder's "Experience Record," "Equipment Schedule," and "Financial Statement," all of which must be properly executed and filed with the Director of the City Water Department one week prior to the hour for openingof bids. The financial statement required shall have been prepared by an independent certified public accountant or an independent public accountant holding a valid permit issued by an appropriate state licensing agency, and shall have been so prepared as to reflect the current financial status. This statement must be current and no more than one (1)year old. In the case that bidding date falls within the time a new statement is being prepared, the previous statement shall be updated by proper verification. Liquid assets in the amount of ten (10)percent of the estimated project cost will be required. For an experience record to be considered to be acceptable for a given project, it must reflect the experience of the firm seeking qualification in work of both the same nature and magnitude as that of the project for which bids are to be received, and such experience must have been completed not more than five (5) years prior to the date on which Bids are to be received. The Director of the Water Department shall be sole judge as to the acceptability of experience for qualification to bid on any Fort Worth Water Department project. _ The prospective bidder shall schedule the equipment he has available for the project and state that he will rent such additional equipment as may be required to complete the project on which he submits a bid. C2-2.2 INTERPRETATION OF QUANTITIES: The quantities of work and materials to be furnished as may be listed in the proposal forms or other parts of the Contract Documents will be considered as approximate only and will be used for the purpose of comparing bids on a uniform basis. Payment will be made to the Contractor for only the actual quantities of work performed or materials furnished in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and Plans. The quantities of work to be performed and materials to be furnished may be increased or decreased as hereinafter provided, without in any way invalidating the unit prices bid or any other requirements of the Contract Documents. C2-2 (1) C2-2.3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE OF PROJECT: — Bidders are advised that the Contract Documents on file with the Owner shall constitute all of the information which the Owner will furnish. All additional information and data which the Owner will supply after promulgation of the formal contract documents shall be issued in the form of written addenda and shall become part of the Contract Documents just as though such addenda were actually written into the original Contract Documents. Bidders are required, prior to filing of proposal, to read and become familiar with the Contract Documents, to visit the site of the project and examine carefully all local conditions, to inform themselves by their own independent research and investigations, tests, boring, and by such other means as may be necessary to gain a complete knowledge of the conditions which will be encountered during construction of the project. They must . judge for themselves the difficulties of the work and all attending circumstances affecting the cost of doing the work or the time required for its completion, and obtain all information required to make an intelligent proposal. No information given by the Owner or any representative of the Owner other than that contained in the Contract Documents and officially promulgated addenda thereto, shall be binding upon the Owner. Bidders shall rely exclusively and solely upon their own estimates, investigation, research, tests, explorations, and other data which are necessary for full and complete information upon which the proposal is to be based. It is mutually agreed that the submission of a proposal is prima-facie evidence that the bidder has made the investigation, examinations and tests herein required. Claims for additional compensation due to variations between conditions actually encountered in construction and as indicated in the Contract Documents will not be allowed. The logs of Soil Borings, if any, on the plans are for general information only and may not be correct. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer guarantee that the data shown is representative of conditions which actually exist. C2-2.4 SUBMITTING OF PROPOSAL: The Bidder shall submit his Proposal on the form furnished by the Owner. All blank spaces applicable to the project contained in the form shall be correctly filled in and the Bidder shall state the prices, written in ink in both words and numerals, for which he proposes to do work contemplated or furnish the materials required. All such prices shall be written legibly. In case of discrepancy between price written in words and the price written in numerals, the price most -- advantageous to the City shall govern. If a proposal is submitted by an individual, his or her name must be signed by him (her) — or his (her) duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member of the firm, association, or partnership, or by person duly authorized. If a proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporation name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. The corporate seal must be affixed. Power C2-2 (2) r of Attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposal must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. C2-2.5 REJECTION OF PROPOSALS: Proposals may be rejected if they show any alteration of words or figures, additions not called for, conditional or uncalled for alternate bids, erasures, or irregularities of any kind, or contain unbalanced value of any items. Proposal tendered or delivered after the official time designated for receipt of proposal shall be returned to the Bidder unopened. C2-2.6 BID SECURITY: No proposal will be considered unless it is accompanied by a "Proposal Security" of the character and the amount indicated in the "Notice to Bidders" and the "Proposal." The Bid Security is required by the Owner as evidence of good faith on the part of the Bidder, and by way of a guaranty that if awarded the contract, the Bidder will within the required time execute a formal contract and furnish the required performance and other bonds. The bid security of the three lowest bidders will be retained .. until the contract is awarded or other disposition is made thereof. The bid security of all other bidders may be returned promptly after the canvass of bids. C2-2.7 DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL: No proposal will be considered unless it is delivered, accompanied by its proper Bid Security, to the City Manager or his representative in the official place of business as set forth in the "Notice to Bidders." It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to deliver the proposal at the proper time to the proper place. The mere fact that a proposal was dispatched will not be considered. The Bidder must have the proposal actually delivered. Each proposal shall be in a sealed envelope plainly marker with the word "PROPOSAL," and the name or description of the project as designated in the "Notice to Bidders." The envelope shall be addressed to the City v Manager, City Hall, Fort Worth, Texas. C2-2.8 WITHDRAWING PROPOSALS: Proposals actually filed with the City Manager cannot be withdrawn prior to the time set for opening proposals. A request for non-consideration must be made in writing, addressed to the City Manager, and filed with him prior to the time set for opening of proposals. After all proposals not requested for ,. non-consideration are opened and publicly read aloud, the proposals for which non- consideration requests have been properly filed May, at the option of the Owner, be returned unopened. C2-2.9 TELEGRAHIC MODIFICATIONS OF PROPOSALS: Any Bidder may modify his proposal by telegraphic communication at any time prior to the time set for opening proposals, provided such telegraphic communication is received by the City Manager prior to the said proposal opening time, and provided further, that the City Manager is satisfied that a written and duly authenticated confirmation of such telegraphic communication over the signature of the bidder was mailed prior to the proposal opening time. If such confirmation is not received within forty-eight (48) hours after the proposal opening time, no further consideration will be given to the proposal. C2-2 (3) C2-2.10 PUBLIC OPENING OF PROPOSAL: Proposals which have been properly filed and for which no "Non-consideration Request" has been received will be publicly opened and read aloud by the City Manager or his authorized representative at the time and place indicated in the"Notice to Bidders."All proposals which have been opened and read will remain on file with the Owner until the contract has been awarded. Bidders or their authorized representatives are invited to be present for the opening of bids. C2-2.11 IRREGULAR PROPOSALS: Proposals shall be considered as "Irregular" if they show any omissions, alterations of form, additions, or conditions not called for, unauthorized alternate bids, or irregularities of any kind. However, the Owner reserves the right to waive any all irregularities and to make the award of the contract to the best interest of the City. Tendering a proposal after the closing hour is an irregularity which can not be waived. C2-2.12 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS: Bidders may be disqualified and their proposals not considered for any of,but not limited to,the following reasons: a) Reasons for believing that collusion exists among bidders. b) Reasonable grounds for believing that any bidder is interested in more than one proposal for work contemplated. c) The bidder being interested in any litigation against the Owner or where the Owner may have a claim against or be engaged in litigation against the bidder. d) The bidder being in arrears on any existing contract or having defaulted on a previous contract. _ e) The bidder having performed a prior contract in an unsatisfactory manner. f) Lack of competency as revealed by financial statement, experience statement, equipment schedule, and such inquiries as the Owner may see fit to make. g) Uncompleted work which, in the judgment of the Owner, will prevent or hinder the prompt completion of additional work if awarded. -� h) The bidder not filing with the Owner, one week in advance of the hour of the opening of proposals the following: 1. Financial Statement showing the financial condition of the bidder as specified in Part "A" - Special Instructions 2. A current experience record showing especially the projects of a — nature similar to the one under consideration, which have been successfully completed by the Bidder. 3. An equipment schedule showing the equipment the bidder has available for use on the project. The Bid Proposal of the bidder who, in the judgment of the Engineer, is disqualified under the requirements stated herein, shall be set aside and not opened. C2-2(4) PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS C3-3 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS SECTION C3-3 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS: C3-3.1 CONSIDERATION OF PROPOSALS: After proposals have been opened and read aloud,the proposals will be tabulated on the basis of the quoted prices, the quantities shown in the proposal, and the application of such formulas or other methods of bringing items to a common basis as may be established in the Contract Documents. ' The total obtained by taking the sum of the products of the unit prices quoted and the estimated quantities plus any lump sum items and such other quoted amounts as may enter into the cost of the completed project will be considered as the amount of the bid. Until the ward of the contract is made by the Owner, the right will be reserved to reject any or all proposals and waive technicalities, to re-advertise for new proposals, or to proceed with the work in any manner as may be considered for the best interest of the Owner. C3-3.2 MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE/WOMEN-OWNED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE COMPLIANCE: Contractor agrees to provide to Owner, upon request, complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by a Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and/or a Woman-owned Business Enterprise (WBE) on the contract and the payment therefor. Contractor further agrees, upon request by the Owner, to allow and audit and/or an examination of any books, records, or files in the possession of the Contractor that will substantiate the actual work performed by an MWE or WBE. Any material misrepresentation of any nature will be grounds for termination of the contract and for initiating any action under appropriate federal, state or local laws and ordinances relating to false statements; further, any such misrepresentation may be grounds for disqualification of Contractor at Owner's discretion for bidding on future Contracts with the Owner for a period of time of not less than six(6)months. C3-3.3 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT PROVISIONS: The Contractor shall comply with Current City Ordinances prohibiting discrimination in employment practices. The Contractor shall post the required notice to that effect on the project site, and at his request, will be provided assistance by the City of Fort Worth's Equal Employment Officer who will refer any qualified applicant he may have on file in his office to the Contractor. Appropriate notices may be acquired from the Equal Employment Officer. C3-3.4 WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSALS: After a proposal has been read by the Owner, it cannot be withdrawn by the Bidder within forty-five (45) days after the date on which the proposals were opened. C3-3 (1) C 3-3.5 AWARD OF CONTRACT: The Owner reserves the right to withhold final action on the proposals for a reasonable time, not to exceed forty-five (45) days after the date of opening proposals, and in no event will an award be made until after investigations have been made as to the responsibility of the proposed awardee. _ The award of the contract, if award is made, will be to the lowest and best responsive bidder. The award of the contract shall not become effective until the Owner has notified the Contractor in writing of such award. "+ C3-3.6 RETURN OF PROPOSAL SECURITIES: As soon as proposed price totals _ have been determined for comparison of bids, the Owner may, at its discretion, return the proposal security which accompanied the proposals which, in its judgment, would not be considered for the award. All other proposal securities, usually those of the three lowest bidders, will be retained by the Owner until the required contract has been executed and bond furnished or the Owner has otherwise disposed of the bids, after which they will be returned by the City Secretary. _ C3-3.7 BONDS: With the execution and delivery of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish to, and file with the owner in the amounts herein required, the following bonds: a. PERFORMANCE BOND: A good and sufficient performance bond in _ the amount of not less than 100 percent of the amount of the contract, as evidenced by the proposal tabulation or otherwise, guaranteeing the full and faithful execution of the work and performance of the contract, and for the protection of the Owner and all other persons against damage by reason of negligence of the Contractor, or improper execution of the work or use of inferior materials. This performance bond shall guarantee the payment for all labor, materials, equipment, supplies, and services used in the construction of the work, and shall remain in full force and effect until provisions as above stipulated are accomplished and final payment is made on the project by the City. b. MAINTENANCE BOND: A good and sufficient maintenance bond, in the amount of not less than 100 percent of the amount of the contract, as evidenced by the proposal tabulation or otherwise, guaranteeing the prompt, full and faithful performance of the general guaranty which is set forth in paragraph C8-8.10. C. PAYMENT BOND: A good and sufficient payment bond, in the amount of not less than 100 percent of the amount of the contract, as evidenced by the proposal tabulation or otherwise, guaranteeing the prompt, full and faithful payment of all claimants as defined in Article C3-3 (2) 5160, Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, 1925, as amended by House Bill 344, Acts 56`h Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, effective April 27, 1959, and/or the latest version thereof, supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract being constructed under these specifications. Payment Bond shall remain in force until all payments as above stipulated are made. d. OTHER BONDS: Such other bonds as may be required by these Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Contractor. No sureties will be accepted by the Owner which are at the time in default or delinquent on any bonds or which are interested in any litigation against the Owner. All bonds shall be made on the forms furnished by the Owner and shall be executed by an approved surety company doing business in the City of Fort Worth, Texas, and which is acceptable to the Owner. In order to be acceptable, the name of the surety shall be included on the current U.S. Treasury list of acceptable sureties, and the amount of bond written by any one acceptable company shall not exceed the amount shown on the Treasury list for that company. Each bond shall be properly executed by both the Contractor and Surety Company. .. Should any surety on the contract be determined unsatisfactory at any time by the Owner, notice will be given the Contractor to that effect and the Contractor shall immediately provide a new surety satisfactory to the Owner. No payment will be made under the contract until the new surety or sureties, as required, have qualified and have been accepted by the Owner. The contract shall not be operative nor will any payments be due or paid until approval of the bonds by the Owner. C3-3.8 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT: Within ten (10) days after the Owner has appropriate resolution, or otherwise, awarded the contract, the Contractor shall execute and file with the Owner, the Contract and such bonds as may be required in the Contract Documents. No Contract shall be binding upon the Owner until it has been attested by the City Secretary, approved as to form and legality by the City Attorney, and executed for the Owner by either the Mayor or City Manager. C3-3.9 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT: The failure of the Awardee to execute the required bond or bonds or to sign the required contract within ten (10) days after the contract is awarded shall be considered by the owner as an abandonment of his proposal, and the owner may annual the Award. By reason of the uncertainty of the market prices of material and labor, and it being impracticable and difficult to accurately determine the amount of damages occurring to the owner by reason of said awardee's failure to execute said bonds and contract within ten (10) days, the proposal security accompanying the proposal shall be the agreed amount of damages which the Owner will C3-3 (3) suffer by reason of such failure on the part of the Awardee and shall thereupon immediately by forfeited to the Owner. The filing of a proposal will be considered as acceptance of this provision by the Bidder. C-3-3.10 BEGINNING WORK: The Contractor shall not commence work until authorized in writing to do so by the Owner. Should the Contractor fail to commence work at the site of the project within the time stipulated in the written authorization usually termed "Work Order" or "Proceed Order", it is agreed that the Surety Company will, within ten (10) days after the commencement date set forth in such written authorization, commence the physical execution of the contract. C3-3.11INSURANCE: The Contractor shall not commence work under this 4 contract until he has obtained all insurance required under the Contract Documents, and such insurance has been approved by the Owner. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for delivering to the Owner the sub-contractor's certificate of insurance for approval. The prime Contractor shall indicate on the certificate of insurance included in the documents for execution whether or not his insurance covers sub-contractors. It is the intention of the Owner that the insurance coverage required herein shall include the coverage of all sub-contractors. a. COMPENSATION INSURANCE: The Contractor shall maintain, during the life of this contract,Worker's Compensation Insurance on all of his employees to be engaged in work on the project under this contract, and for all sub-contractors. In case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work on the project under this contract is not protected under the Worker's Compensation Statute, the Contractor shall provide adequate employer's general liability insurance for the protection of such of his employees not so protected. b. COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: The Contractor Shall procure and shall maintain during the life of this contract, Comprehensive General Liability Insurance (Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance) in the amount not less than $500,000 covering each occurrence on account of bodily injury, including death, and in an amount not less than $500,000 covering each occurrence on account of property damage with$2,000,000 umbrella policy coverage. C. ADDITIONAL LIABILITY: The Contractor shall furnish insurance as a separate policies or by additional endorsement to one of the above-mentioned policies, and in the amount as set forth for public liability and property damage, the following insurance: 1. Contingent Liability (covers General Contractor's Liability for acts of sub-contractors). ' w C3-3 (4) 2. Blasting,prior to any blasting being done. 3. Collapse of buildings or structures adjacent to excavation (if excavation are performed adjacent to same). 4. Damage to underground utilities for$500,000. 5. Builder's risk(where above-ground structures are involved). 6. Contractual Liability (covers all indemnification requirements of Contract). d. AUTOMOBILE INSURANCE - BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE: The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the life of this Contract, Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance in an amount not less than $250,000 for injuries including accidental death to any one person and subject to the same limit for each person an amount not less than $500,000 on account of one accident, and automobile property damage insurance in an amount not less than $100,000. e. SCOPE OF INSURANCE AND SPECIAL HAZARD: The insurance required under the above paragraphs shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and his sub-contractors, respectively, against damage claims which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by him, and also against any of the following special hazards which may be encountered in the performance of the Contract. f. PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE: The Contractor shall furnish the owner with satisfactory proof of coverage by insurance required in these Contract Documents in the amounts and by carriers satisfactory to the Owner. (Sample attached.) All insurance requirements made upon the Contractor shall apply to the sub-contractors, should the Prime Contractor's insurance not cover the sub-contractor's work operations. g. LOCAL AGENT FOR INSURANCE AND BONDING: The insurance and bonding companies with whom the Contractor's insurance and C3-3 (5) performance, payment, maintenance and all such other bonds are written, shall be represented by an agent or agents having an office located within the city limits of the City of Fort Worth. Tarrant County,Texas. Each such agent shall be a duly qualified, one upon whom authority and power to act on behalf of the insurance and/or bonding company to negotiate and settle with the City of Fort Worth, or any other claimant, and claims that the City of Fort Worth or other claimant or any property owner who has been damaged, may have against the Contractor, insurance, and/or bonding company. If the local insurance representative is not so empowered by the insurance or bonding companies, then such authority must be vested in a local agent or claims officer residing in the Metroplex, the Fort Worth- Dallas area. The name of the agent, or agents shall be set forth on all such bonds and certificates of insurance. C3-3.12 CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS: Under the Contract, the Contractor shall pay for all materials,labor and services when due. C3-3.13 WEEKLY PAYROLLS: A certified copy of each payroll covering payment of wages to all persons engaged in work on the project at the site of the project shall be furnished to the Owner's representative within seven (7) days after the close of each payroll period. A copy or copies of the applicable minimum wage rates as set forth in the Contract Documents shall be kept posted in a conspicuous place at the site of the project at all times during the course of the Contract. Copies of the wage rates will be furnished the Contractor, by the Owner; however, posting and protection of the wage rates shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. C3-3.14 CONTRACTOR'S CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION: Any Contractor, whether a person, persons, partnership, company, firm, association, corporation or other who is approved to do business with and enters into a contract with the City for construction of water and/or sanitary sewer facilities, will have or shall establish a fully operational business office within the Fort Worth-Dallas metropolitan area. The Contractor shall charge, delegate, or assign this office (or he may delegate his Project Superintendent) with full authority to transact all business actions required in the -- performance of the Contract. This local authority shall be made responsible to act for the Contractor in all matters made responsible to act for the Contractor in all matters pertaining to the work governed by the Contract whether it be administrative or other wise and as such shall be empowered, thus delegated and directed, to settle all material, labor or other expenditure, all claims against work or any other mater associated such as maintaining adequate and appropriate insurance or security coverage for the project. Such local authority for the administration of the work under the Contract shall be maintained until all business transactions executed as part of the Contract are complete. Should the Contractor's principal base of operations be other than in the Fort Worth- Dallas metropolitan area, notification of the Contractor's assignment of local authority shall be made in writing to the Engineer in advance of any work on the project, all C3-3 (6) r appropriately signed and sealed, as applicable, by the Contractor's responsible offices with the understanding that this written assignment of authority to the local representative shall become part of the project Contract as though bound directly into the project documents. The intent of these requirements is that all matters associated with the Contractor's administration, whether it be oriented in furthering the work, or other, be governed direct by local authority. This same requirement is imposed on insurance and surety coverage. Should the Contractor's local representative fail to perform to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Engineer, at his sole discretion, may demand that such local representative be replaced and the Engineer may, at his sole discretion, stop all work until a new local authority satisfactory to the Engineer is assigned. No credit of working time will be allowed for periods in which work stoppages are in effect for this reason. C3-3.15 VENUE: Venue of any action hereinunder shall be exclusively in Tarrant County, Texas. C3-3 (7) PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS C44 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION C4-4 SCOPE OF WORK C44.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: It is the definite intention of these Contract Documents to provide for a complete, useful project which the Contractor undertakes to construct or furnish, all in full compliance with the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents. It is definitely understood that the Contractor shall do all work as provided for in the Contract Documents, shall do all extra or special work as may be considered by the Owner as necessary to complete the project in a satisfactory and acceptable manner. The Contractor shall, unless otherwise specifically stated in these Contract Documents, furnish all labor, tools, materials, machinery, equipment, special services, and incidentals necessary to the prosecution and completion of the project. C4-4.2 SPECIAL PROVISIONS: Should any work or conditions which are not thoroughly and satisfactorily stipulated or covered by General or Special Conditions of these Contract Documents be anticipated, or should there be any additional proposed work which is not covered by these Contract Documents, the "Special Provisions" covering all such work will be prepared by the Owner previous to the time of receiving bids or proposals for any such work and furnished to the Bidder in the form of Addenda. All such "Special Provisions" shall be considered to be part of the Contract Documents just as though they were originally written therein. C44.3 INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES: The Owner reserves the right to alter the quantities of the work to be performed or to extend or shorten the improvements at any time when and as found to be necessary, and the Contractor shall perform the work as altered, increased or decreased at the unit prices. Such increased or decreased quantity shall not be more than twenty-five (25) percent of the contemplated quantity of such item or items. When such changes increase or decrease the original quantity of any item or items of work to be done or materials to be furnished by the 25 percent or more, then either party to the contract shall upon written request to the other party be entitled to a revised consideration upon that portion of the work above or below the 25 percent of the original quantity stated in the proposal; such revised consideration to be determined by special agreement or as hereinafter provided for "Extra Work." No allowance will be made for any changes in anticipated profits not shall such changes be considered as waiving or invalidating any conditions or provisions of the Contract Documents. Variations in quantities of sanitary sewer pipes in depth categories, shall be interpreted herein as applying to overall quantities of sanitary sewer pipe in each pipe size, but not to the various depth categories. C4-4 (1) C4-4.4 ALTERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: By Change order, the owner reserves the right to make such changes in the Contract Documents and in the character or quantities of the work as may be necessary or desirable to insure completion in the most satisfactory manner,provided such changes do not materially alter the original Contract Documents or change the general nature of the project as a whole. Such changes shall not be considered as waiving or invalidating any condition or provision of the Contract Documents. C4-4.5 EXTRA WORK: Additional work made necessary by changes and alterations _ of the Contract Documents or of quantities or for other reasons for which no prices are provided in the Contract Documents, shall be defined as "Extra Work" and shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with these Contract Documents or approved additions thereto; provided however, that before any extra work is begun a "Change order" shall be executed or written order issued by the Owner to do the work for payments or credits as shall be determined by one or more combination of the following methods: a. Unit bid price previously approved. b. An agreed lump sum. C. The actual reasonable cost of(1) labor, (2)rental of equipment used on the extra work for the time so used at Associated General Contractors of America current equipment rental rates, (3)materials entering permanently into the project, and (4) actual cost of insurance, bonds, and social security as determined by the Owner, plus a fixed fee to be agreed upon but not to exceed 10 percent of the actual cost of such extra work. The fixed fee is not to include any additional profit to the Contractor for rental of equipment owner by him and used for extra work. The fee shall be full and complete compensation to cover the cost of superintendence, overhead, other profit, general and all other expense not included in (1), (2), (3), and (4) above. The Contractor shall keep accurate cost records on the form and in the method suggested by the Owner and shall give the Owner access to all accounts,bills, vouchers, and records relating to the Extra Work. No "Change Order" shall become effective until it has been approved and signed by each of the Contracting Parties. No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by the Owner. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the Contractor to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation, he shall make written request to the Engineer for written orders authorizing such Extra Work,prior to beginning ' such work. C4-4 (2) Should a difference arise as to what does or dose not constitute Extra Work, or as to the payment thereof, and the Engineer insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written orders and shall keep accurate account of the actual reasonable cost thereof as provided under method (Item Q. Claims for extra work will not be paid unless the Contractor shall file his claim with the Owner within five (5)days before the time for making the first estimate after such work is done and unless the claim is supported by satisfactory vouchers and certified payrolls covering all labor and materials expended upon said Extra Work. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner such installation records of all deviations from the original Contract Documents as may be necessary to enable the Owner to prepare for permanent record a corrected set of plans showing the actual installation. The compensation agreed upon for "Extra Work" whether or not initiated by a "Change Order" shall be a full, complete and final payment for all costs Contractor incurs as a result or relating to the change or extra work, whether said costs are known, unknown, foreseen or unforeseen at that time, including without limitation, any costs for delay, extended overhead, ripple or impact cost, or any other effect on changed or unchanged work as a result of the change or extra work. C4-4.6 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE: Before commencing any work under this contract, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER a draft detailed baseline construction schedule that meets the requirements described in this specification, showing by Critical Path Method (CPM) the planned sequence and timing of the Work associated with the Contract. All submittals shall be submitted in PDF format, and schedule files shall also be submitted in native file format (i.e. file formats associated with the scheduling software). The approved scheduling software systems are indicated in the Schedule Guidance Doucument. The Schedule Guidance Document is located on Buzzsaw and is hereby made a part of this contract document by reference for all purposes, the same as if copies verbatim herein. It is suggested that the CONTRACTOR employ or retain the services of a qualified Project Scheduler to develop the required schedules. A qualified Project Scheduler would have the following minimum capabilities and experience. a. Experience preparing and maintaining detailed schedules, as well as 1 year of experience using approved scheduling software systems as defined in this specification. b. Knowledge of Critical Path Method of scheduling and the ability to analyze schedules to determine duration,resource allocation, and logic issues. C4-4 (3) c. Understanding of construction work processes to the extent that a logical critical path method schedule can be developed, maintained, and progressed that accurately represents the scope of work performed. C4-4.6(a) BASELINE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE: The CONTRACTOR shall develop, submit and review the draft detailed baseline construction schedule with the OWNER to demonstrate the CONTRACTOR's understanding of the contract requirements and approach for performing the work. The CONTRACTOR will prepare the final detailed baseline construction schedule based on OWNER comments, if any. The CONTRACTOR's first (Ist) payment application will only be processed after the - detailed baseline construction schedule has been submitted by the CONTRACTOR and accepted by the OWNER. The following guidelines shall be adhered to in preparing the baseline construction schedule. a. Milestone dates and final project completion dates shall be developed to conform to the time constraints, sequencing requirements, and completion time. b. The construction progress shall be divided into activities with time durations no - greater than 20 work days. Fabrication, delivery and submittal activities are exceptions to this guideline. c. Activity durations shall be in work days and normal holidays and weather conditions over the duration of the contract shall be accounted for within the duration of each activity. .� d. The critical path shall be clearly shown on the construction schedule. e. Float time is defined as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the late start date using CPM. Float time is a shared and expiring resource and is not for the exclusive use or benefit of the CONTRACTOR or OWNER. f. Thirty days shall be used for submittal review unless otherwise specified. The construction schedule shall be divided into general activities as indicated in the Schedule Guidance Document and each general activity shall be broken down into sub- activities in enough detail to achieve sub-activities of no greater than 20 days duration. The Schedule Guidance Document is located on Buzzsaw and is hereby made a part of this contract document by reference for all purposes, the same as if copies verbatim herein. For each general activity, the construction schedule shall identify all trades or subcontracts applicable to the project whose work is represented by activities that follow the guidelines of this section. For each of the trades or subcontracts applicable to the project, the construction schedule shall indicate the following: procurement, construction, pre-acceptance activities, and C4-4 (4) events in their logical sequence for equipment and materials. Include applicable activities and milestones such as: 1. Milestone for formal Notice to Proceed 2. Milestone for Final Completion or other completion dates specified in the contract documents 3. Preparation and transmittal of submittals 4. Submittal review periods 5. Shop fabrication and delivery 6. Erection and installation 7. Transmittal of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions 8. Installed equipment and material testing 9. Owner's operator instructions (if applicable) 10. Final inspection 11. Operational testing C446(b) PROGRESS CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE: The CONTRACTOR shall •� prepare and submit monthly, no later than the last day of every month, to the OWNER for approval the updated schedule in accordance with C446 and C447 and the OWNER's Schedule Guidance Document inclusive. As the Work progresses, the CONTRACTOR shall enter into the schedule and record actual progress as described in the Schedule Guidance Document. The updated schedule submittal shall also include a concise narrative report that highlights the following, if appropriate and applicable: • Changes in the critical path, • Expected schedule changes, • Potential delays, • Opportunities to expedite the schedule, • Coordination issues the OWNER should be aware of or can assist with, • Other schedule-related issues that the CONTRACTOR wishes to communicate to r the OWNER. a. The CONTRACTOR's monthly progress payment applications will not be accepted and processed for payment without monthly schedule updates, submitted in the time and manner required by this specification and the Schedule Guidance Document, and which accurately reflects the allowable costs due under the Contract Documents and R is accepted by the OWNER. b. Only one schedule update will be required per month in accordance with the Schedule - Guidance Document and this specification. c. Failure to maintain the Schedule in an accepted status may result in the OWNER withholding payment to the CONTRACTOR until the schedule is accepted. C4-4 (5) C-4-4.6(c) PERFORMANCE AND CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE: If, in the opinion of the OWNER, work accomplished falls behind that scheduled, the CONTRACTOR shall take such action as necessary to improve his progress. In addition, the OWNER may require the CONTRACTOR to submit a revised schedule demonstrating his program ! and proposed plan to make up lag in schedule progress and to ensure completion of the Work within the allotted Contract time. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with these requirements shall be considered grounds for determination by the OWNER that the CONTRACTOR is failing to execute the Work with due diligence as will ensure completion within the time specified in the Contract. C4-4.7 SCHEDULE TIERS SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: } The requirements for the schedule are determined based on the nature and needs of the project. The schedule for all projects shall be Tier 3 unless otherwise stated in the contract documents. The requirements for each Tier are described below. ` CONTRACTOR shall submit each schedule relying on the Schedule Guidance Document provided in the Contract Documents. TIER 3 COST LOADING SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: 1. At a minimum, each Activity Breakdown Structure (ABS)in the scheduling software shall be cost-loaded with the total contract dollars associated with the respective ABS elements. TIER 4 COST LOADING SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Adhere to all Tier 3 requirements, and additionally the following: 2. Work (Schedule of Values Pay Items using the OWNER's standard items) shall be loaded into the scheduling software using the"NON- LABOR"resource type showing the quantity of work to be done along with the corresponding value of the work measured in dollars. It is intended that Earned Value will be calculated as the schedule resources are progressed. TIER 5 COST LOADING SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Adhere to all Tier 4 requirements, and additionally the following: • Labor resources (Man-Hours) shall be loaded into the scheduling software using the"LABOR"resource type with man-hours and without cost. C4-4(6) PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS C5-5 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS SECTION C5-5 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS C5-5.1 AUTHORITY OF ENGINEER: The work shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and in strict compliance with the Contract Documents. The Engineer shall decide all questions which arise as to the quality and acceptability of the materials furnished, work performed, rate of progress of the work, overall sequence of the �. construction, interpretation of the Contract Documents, acceptable fulfillment of the Contract, compensation, mutual rights between Contractor and Owner under these Contract Documents, supervision of the work, resumption of operations, and all other questions or disputes which may arise. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequence or procedures of construction, or the safety precaution and programs incident thereto, and he will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the contract documents. The Engineer shall determine the amount and quality of the work completed and materials furnished, and his decisions and estimates shall be final. His estimates in such event shall be a condition to the right of the Contractor to receive money due him under the Contract. The Owner shall have executive authority to enforce and make effective such necessary decisions and orders as the Contractor fails to carry out promptly. In the event of any dispute between the Engineer and Contractor over the decision of the Engineer on any such matters, the Engineer must, within a reasonable time, upon written request of the Contractor, render and deliver to both the owner and Contractor, a written decision on the matter in controversy. C5-5.2 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS: The finished project in all cases shall conform with lines, grades, cross-sections, finish, and dimensions shown on the plans or any other requirements other wise described in the Contract Documents. Any deviation from the approved Contract Documents required by the Engineer during construction will in all cases be determined by the Engineer and authorized by the Owner by Change Order. C5-5.3 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents are made up of several sections, which, taken together, are intended to describe and provide for a complete and useful project, and any requirements appearing in one of the sections is as binding as though it occurred in all sections. In case of discrepancies, figured dimension shall govern over scaled dimensions, plans shall govern over specifications, special conditions shall govern over general conditions and standard specification, and quantities shown on the plans shall govern over those shown in the proposal. The Contractor shall not take advantage of any apparent error or omission in the C5-5 (1) Contract Documents, and the owner shall be permitted to make such corrections or interpretations as may be deemed necessary for fulfillment of the intent of the Contract Documents. In the event the Contractor discovers an apparent error or discrepancy, he shall immediately call this condition to the attention of the Engineer. In the event of a conflict in drawings, specifications, or other portions of the Contract Documents which were not reported prior to the award of Contract, the Contractor shall be deemed to have quoted the most expensive resolution of the conflict. C5-5.4 COOPERATION OF CONTRACTOR: The Contractor will be furnished with three sets of Contract Documents and shall have available on the site of the project at all times, one set of such Contract Documents. The Contractor shall give to the work the constant attention necessary to facilitate the progress thereof and shall cooperate with the Engineer, his inspector, and other Contractors in every possible way. The Contractor shall at all times have competent personnel available to the project site for proper performance of the work. The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times at _ the site of the project a competent, English-speaking superintendent and an assistant who are fully authorized to act as the Contractor's agent on the work. Such superintendent and his assistant shall be capable of reading and understanding the Contract Documents and _ shall receive and fulfill instructions from the Owner, the Engineer, or his authorized representatives. Pursuant to this responsibility of the Contractor, the Contractor shall designate in writing to the project superintendent, to act as the Contractor's agent on the work. Such assistant project superintendent shall be a resident of Tarrant County, Texas, and shall be subject to call, as is the project superintendent, at any time of the day or night on any day of the week on which the Engineer determines that circumstances require the presence on the project site of a representative of the Contractor to adequately provide for the safety or convenience of the traveling public or the owners of property across which the project extends or the safety of the property contiguous to the project routing. The Contractor shall provide all facilities to enable the Engineer and his inspector to examine and inspect the workmanship and materials entering into the work. C5-5.5 EMERGENCY AND/OR RECTIFICATION WORK: When, in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer, a condition of emergency exists related to any part of the work, the Contractor, or the Contractor through his designated representative, shall respond with dispatch to a verbal request made by the Owner or Engineer to alleviate the emergency condition. Such a response shall occur day or night, whether the project is scheduled on a calendar-day or a working-day basis. Should the Contractor fail to respond to a request from the Engineer to rectify any — discrepancies, omissions, or correction necessary to conform with the requirements of the project specifications or plans, the Engineer shall give the Contractor written notice that such work or changes are to be performed. The written notice shall direct attention to the C5-5 (2) discrepant condition and request the Contractor to take remedial action to correct the condition. In the event the Contractor does not take positive steps to fulfill this written request, or does not shoe just cause for not taking the proper action, within 24 hours, the City may take such remedial action with City forces or by contract. The City shall deduct an amount equal to the entire costs for such remedial action, plus 25%, from any funds due the Contractor on the project. C5-5.6 FIELD OFFICE: The Contractor shall provide, at no extra compensation, an adequate field office for use of the Engineer, if specifically called for. The field office shall be not less than 10 x 14 feet in floor area, substantially constructed, well heated, air conditioned, lighted, and weather proof, so that documents will not be damaged by the elements. C5-5.7 CONTRUCTION STAKES: The City, through its Engineer, will furnish the Contractor with all lines, grades, and measurements necessary to the proper s prosecution and control of the work contracted under these Contract Documents, and lines, grades and measurements will be established by means of stakes or other customary method of marking as may be found consistent with good practice. These stakes or markings shall be set sufficiently in advance of construction operations to avoid delay. Such stakes or markings as may be established for Contractor's use or guidance shall be preserved by the Contractor until he is authorized by the Engineer to remove them. Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, any stakes or markings have been carelessly or willfully destroyed, disturbed, or removed by the Contractor or any of his employees, the full cost of replacing such stakes or marks plus 25% will be charged against the Contractor, and the full amount will be deducted from payment due the Contractor. C5-5.8 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF CITY INSPECTOR: City Inspectors will be authorized to inspect all work done and to be done and all materials furnished. Such inspection may extend to all or any part of the work, and the preparation or manufacturing of the materials to be used or equipment to be installed. A City Inspector may be stationed on the work to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being performed, to report any evidence that the materials being furnished or the work being performed by the Contractor fails to fulfill the requirements of the Contract Documents, and to call the attention of the Contractor to any such failure or other infringements. Such inspection or lack of inspection will not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. In case of any dispute arising between the Contractor and the City Inspector as to the materials or equipment furnished or the manner of performing the work, the City Inspector will have the authority to reject materials or equipment, and/or to suspend work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. The City Inspector will not, however, be authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, or release any requirement of these Contract Documents, nor to approve or accept any portion or section of the work, nor to issue any instructions contrary tot he requirement s of the C5-5 (3) Y Contract Documents. The City Inspector will in no case act as superintendent or foreman or perform any other duties for the Contractor, or interfere with the management or operation of the work. He will not accept from the Contractor any compensation in any form for performing any duties. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of the City Inspector or Engineer when the same are consistent with the obligations of the Contract Documents of the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders or instructions or the City Inspector, the Contractor may within six days make written appeal to the Engineer for his decision on the matter in Controversy. C5-5.9 INSPECTION: The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with every reasonable facility for ascertaining whether or not the work as performed is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If the Engineer so requests, the Contractor shall, at any time before acceptance of the work, remove or uncover such portion of the finished work as may be directed. After examination, the Contractor shall restore said portions of the work to the standard required by the Contract Documents. Should the work exposed or examined prove acceptable, the uncovering or removing and _ replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed shall be paid for as extra work, but should Work so exposed or examined prove to be unacceptable, the uncovering or removing and replacing of all adjacent defective or damaged parts shall be at the Contractor's expense. No work shall be done or materials used without suitable supervision or inspection. C5-5.10 REMOVAL OF EDEFCTIVE AND UNAUTHORIZED WORK:All work, materials, or equipment which has been rejected shall be remedied or removed and replaced in an acceptable manner by the Contractor at this expense. Work done beyond _ the lines and grades given or as shown on the plans, except as herein specially provided, or any Extra Work done without written authority, will be considered as unauthorized and done at the expense of the Contractor and will not be paid for by the Owner. Work so done may be ordered removed at the Contractor's expense. Upon the failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with any order of the Engineer made under the provisions of this paragraph, the Engineer will have the authority to cause defective work to be — remedied or removed and replaced and unauthorized work to be removed, and the cost thereof may be deducted from any money due or to become due tot he Contractor. Failure to require the removal of any defective or unauthorized work shall not constitute �- acceptance of such work. C5-5.11 SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT: If the Specifications, law, ordinance, codes or regulations permit Contractor to furnish or use a substitute that is equal to any material or equipment specified, and if Contractor wishes to furnish or use a proposed substitute, he shall, prior to the preconstruction conference, make written application to ENGINEER for approval of such substitute certifying in writing that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the function called for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance to that specified and be suited to the same use and C5-5 (4) capable of performing the same function as that specified ; and identifying all variations of the proposed substitute from that specified and indicating available maintenance service. No substitute shall be ordered or installed without written approval of Engineer who will be the judge of the equality and may require Contractor to furnish such other data about the proposed substitute as he considers pertinent. No substitute shall be ordered or installed without such performance guarantee and bonds as Owner may require which shall be furnished at Contractor's expense. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer and anyone directly or indirectly employees by either of them from and against the claims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorneys fees) arising out of the use of substituted materials or equipment. C5-5.12 SAMPLES AND TESTS OF MATERIALS: Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, or as called for in the Contract Documents, tests of materials or equipment are necessary, such tests will be made at the expense of and paid for direct to the testing agency by the Owner unless other wise specifically provided. The failure of the Owner to make any tests of materials shall in no way relieve the contractor of his responsibility of furnishing materials and equipment fully conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Tests and sampling of materials, unless otherwise specified, will be made in accordance with the latest methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing Materials or specific requirements of the Owner. The Contractor shall provide such facilities as the Engineer may require for collecting and forwarding samples and shall not, without specific written permission of the Engineer, use materials represented by the samples until tests have been made and the materials approved for use. The Contractor will furnish adequate samples without charge to the Owner. In case of concrete, the aggregates, design minimum, and the mixing and transporting equipment shall be approved by the Engineer before any concrete is placed, and the Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any concrete which does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Tests shall be made at least 9 days prior to the placing of.concrete, using samples from the same aggregate, cement, and mortar which are to be used later in the concrete. Should the source of supply change, new tests shall be made prior to the use of new materials. C5-5.13 STORAGE OF MATERIALS: All materials which are to be used in the construction contract shall be stored so as to insure the preservation of quality and fitness of the work. When directed by the Engineer, they shall be placed on wooden platforms or other hard, clean durable surfaces and not on the ground, and shall be placed under cover when directed. Stored materials shall be placed and located so as to facilitate prompt inspection. C5-5.14 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES: The location and dimensions shown on the plans relative to the existing utilities are based on the best information available. Omission from, the inclusion of utility locations on the Plans is not to be considered as nonexistence of, or a definite location of, existing underground utilities. The location of many gas mains, water mains, conduits, sewer lines and service lines for C5-5 (5) all utilities, etc., is unknown to the Owner, and the Owner assumes no responsibility for failure to show any or all such structures and utilities on the plans or to show them in their exact location. It is mutually agreed that such failure will not be considered sufficient basis for claims for additional compensation for Extra Work or for increasing the pay quantities in any manner whatsoever, unless an obstruction encountered is such as to necessitate changes in the lines and grades of considerable magnitude or requires the building of special works, provision of which is not made in these Contract Documents, in which case the provision in these Contract Documents for Extra Work shall apply. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify locations of the adjacent and/or conflicting utilities sufficiently in advance of construction in order that he may negotiate such local adjustments as necessary in the construction process to provide adequate clearances. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions in order to protect all existing utilities, structures, and service lines. Verification of existing utilities, structures, and service lines shall include notification of all utility companies at least forty-eight (48) .. hours in advance of construction including exploratory excavation if necessary. All verification of utilities and their adjustment shall be considered subsidiary work. C5-5.15 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE: a. Normal Prosecution: In the normal prosecution of work where the interruption of service is necessary, the Contractor, at least 24 hours in advance, shall be required to: 'Y 1. Notify the Water Department's Distribution Division as to location,time, and schedule of service interruption. 2. Notify each customer personally through responsible personnel as to the time and schedule of the interruption of their service, or 3. In the event that personal notification of a customer cannot be made, a prepared tag form shall be attached to the customer's door knob. The tag shall be durable in composition, and in large bold letters shall say: C5-5 (6) "NOTICE" Due to Utility Improvement in your neighborhood, your (water) (sewer) service will be interrupted on between the hours of and This inconvenience will be as short as possible. Thank You, Contractor Address Phone b. Emergency In the event that an unforeseen service interruption occurs, notice shall be as above, but immediate. C5-5.16 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS: If, through act or neglect on the part of the Contractor, or any other Contractor or any sub-contractor shall suffer loss or damage of the work, the Contractor agrees to settle with such other Contractor or sub-contractor by agreement or arbitration. If such other Contractor or sub- contractor shall assert any claim against the owner on account of damage alleged to have been sustained, the owner will notify the Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the owner against any such claim. C5-5.17 CLEAN-UP: Clean-up of surplus and/or waste materials accumulated on the job site during the prosecution of the work under these Contract Documents shall be accomplished in keeping with a daily routine established to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Twenty-four (24) hours after written notice is given the Contractor that the clean-up on the job site is proceeding in a manner unsatisfactory to the Engineer, if the Contractor fails to correct the unsatisfactory procedure, the City may take such direct action as the Engineer deems appropriate to correct the clean-up deficiencies cited to the Contractor in the written notice, and the costs of such direct action, plus 25 % of such costs, shall be deducted from the monies due or to become due to the Contractor. Upon the completion of the project as a whole as covered by these Contract Documents, and before final acceptance and final payment will be made, the Contractor shall clean and remove from the site of the project all surplus and discarded materials, temporary structures, and debris of every kind. He shall leave the site of all work in a neat and orderly condition equal to that which originally existed. Surplus and waste materials removed from the site of the work shall be disposed of at locations satisfactory to the Engineer. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed by him and shall deliver over such materials and equipment in a bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition. No extra compensation will be made to the Contractor for any clean-up required on the project. C5-5 (7) C5-5.1 8 FINAL INSPECTION: Whenever the work provided for in and contemplated under the Contract Documents has been satisfactorily completed and final clean-up performed, the Engineer will notify the proper officials of the Owner and request that a Final Inspection be made. Such inspection will be made within 10 days after such notification. After such final inspection, if the work and materials and equipment are found satisfactory, the Contractor will be notified in writing of the acceptance of the same after the proper resolution has been passed by the City Council. No time charge will be made against the Contractor between said date of notification of the Engineer and the date of final inspection of the work. C5-5 (8) PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS C6-6 LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY SECTION C6-6 LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY C6-6.1 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED:The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all Federal and State Laws and City ordinances and regulations which in any way affect the conduct of the work or his operations, and shall observe and comply with all orders, laws, ordinances and regulations which exist or which may be enacted later by bodies having jurisdiction or authority for such enactment. No plea or misunderstanding or ignorance thereof will be considered. The Contractor and his Sureties shall indemnify and save harmless the City and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any and all claims or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such law, ordinance, regulation, or order, whether it be by himself or his employees. C6-6.2 PERMITS AND LICENSES: The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges, costs and fees, and give all notices necessary and incident to the due and lawful prosecution of the work. C6-6.3 PATENTED DEVICES, MATERIALS, AND PROCESSES: If the Contractor is required or desires to use any design, device, material, or process covered by letter, patent, or copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner of such patent, letter, or copyrighted design. It is mutually agreed and understood that without exception the contract price shall include all royalties or cost arising from patents, trademarks, and copyrights in any way involved in the work. The _ Contractor and his sureties shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use of any such trade-mark or copyright in connection with the work agreed to be performed under these Contract Documents, and shall indemnify the Owner for any cost, expense, or damage which it may be obliged to pay by reason of such infringement at any time during the prosecution of the work or after completion of the work, provided, however, that the Owner will assume the responsibility .. to defend any and all suits brought for the infringement of any patent claimed to be infringed upon the design, type of construction or material or equipment specified in the Contract Documents furnished the Contractor by the Owner, and to hold the Contractor harmless on account of such suits. C6-6.4 SANITARY PROVISIONS: The Contractor shall establish and enforce among his employees such regulations in regard to cleanliness and disposal of garbage and waste as will tend to prevent the inception and spread of infectious or contagious diseases and to effectively prevent the creation of a nuisance about the work on any property either public or private, and such regulations as are required by Law shall be put into immediate force and effect by the Contractor. The necessary sanitary conveniences for use of laborers on the work, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor and their use shall be strictly enforced by uW C6-6(1) the Contractor. All such facilities shall be kept in a clean and sanitary condition,free from objectionable odors so as not to cause a nuisance. All sanitary laws and regulations of the State of Texas and the City shall be strictly complied with. C6-6.5 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE: Materials or equipment stored about the work shall be placed and used, and the work shall at all times be so _ conducted, as to cause no greater obstruction or inconvenience to the public than is considered to be absolutely necessary by the Engineer. The Contractor is required to maintain at all times all phases of his work in such a manner as not to impair the safety or _ convenience of the public, including, but not limited to, safe and convenient ingress and egress to the property contiguous tot he work area. The Contractor shall make adequate provisions to render reasonable ingress and egress for normal vehicular traffic, except _ during actual trenching or pipe installation operations, at all driveway crossings. Such provisions may include bridging, placement or crushed stone or gravel or such other means of providing proper ingress and egress for the property served by the driveway as the Engineer may approve as appropriate. Such other means may include the diversion of driveway traffic, with specific approval by the Engineer, If diversion of traffic is approved by the Engineer at any location, the Contractor may make arrangements satisfactory to the Engineer for the diversion of traffic, and shall, at his expense, provide all materials and perform all work necessary for the construction and maintenance of roadways and bridges for such diversion of traffic. Sidewalks must not be obstructed except by special permission of the Engineer. The materials excavated and the construction materials such as pipe used in construction of the work shall be placed so as not to endanger the work or prevent free access to all fire hydrants, fire alarm boxes, police call boxes, water valves, gas valves, or manholes in the vicinity. The Owner reserves the right to remedy any neglect on the part of the Contractor as regards to public convenience and safety which may come to its attention, after twenty-four hours notice in writing to the Contractor, save in cases of emergency when it shall have the right to remedy any neglect without notice, and in either case, the cost of such work or materials furnished by the Owner or by the City shall be deducted from the monies due or to become due to the Contractor. The Contractor, after approval of the Engineer, shall notify the Fire Department Headquarters, Traffic Engineer, and Police Department, when any street or alley is requested to be closed or obstructed or any fire hydrant is to be made inaccessible, and — when so directed by the Engineer, shall keep any street, streets, or highways in condition for unobstructed use by fire apparatus. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Fire Department Headquarters when all such obstructed streets, alleys, or hydrants are placed back in service. Where the Contractor is required to construct temporary bridges or make other arrangements for crossing over ditches or streams, his responsibility for accidents in connection with such crossings shall include the roadway approaches as well as the structures of such crossings. C6-6(2) The Contractor shall at all times conduct his operation and use of construction machinery so as not to damage or destroy trees and scrubs located in close proximity to or on the site of the work. Wherever any such damage may be done, the Contractor shall immediately satisfy all claims of property owners, and no payment will be made by the Owner in settlement of such claims. The Contractor shall file with the Engineer a written statement showing all such claims adjusted. C6-6.6 PRIVILEGES OF CONTRACTOR IN STREETS, ALLEYS, AND RIGHT-OF-WAY: For the performance of the contract, the Contractor will be permitted to use and occupy such portions of the public streets and alleys, or other public places or other rights-of-way as provided for in the ordinances of the City, as shown in the Contract Documents, or as may be specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer. A reasonable amount of tools, materials, and equipment for construction purposes may be stored in such space, but no more than is necessary to avoid delay in the construction operations. Excavated and waste materials shall be piled or staked in such a way as not to interfere with the use of spaces that may be designated to be left free and unobstructed _ and so as not to inconvenience occupants of adjacent property. If the street is occupied by railroad tracks, the work shall be carried on in such manner as not to interfere with the operation of trains, loading or unloading of cars, etc. Other contractors of the Owner may, for all purposes required by the contract, enter upon the work and premises used by the Contractor and shall be provided all reasonable facilities and assistance for the completion of adjoining work. Any additional grounds desired by the Contractor for his use shall be provided by him at his own cost and expense. C6-6.7 RAILWAY CROSSINGS: When the work encroaches upon any right-of-way of any railroad, the City will secure the necessary easement for the work. Where the railroad tracks are to be crossed, the Contractor shall observe all the regulations and instructions of the railroad company as to the methods of performing the work and take all precautions for the safety of property and the public. Negotiations with the railway companies for the permits shall be done by and through the City. The Contractor shall give the City Notice not less than five days prior to the time of his intentions to begin work on that portion of the project which is related to the railway properties. The Contractor will not be given extra compensation for such railway crossings unless specifically set forth in the Contract Documents. C6-6.8 BARRICADES,WARNINGS AND WATCHMEN: Where the work is carried on in or adjacent to any street, alley, or public place, the Contractor shall at his own expense furnish, erect, and maintain such barricades, fences, lights, and danger signals, shall provide such watchman, and shall take all such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and of the work as are necessary. Barricades and fences shall be painted in a color that will be visible at night. From sunset to sunrise the Contractor shall furnish and maintain at least one easily visible burning light at each barricade. A sufficient number of barricades shall be erected and maintained to keep pedestrians away from, and vehicles from being driven on or into, any work under C6-6(3) construction or being maintained. The Contractor shall furnish watchmen and keep them at their respective assignments in sufficient numbers to protect the work and prevent accident or damage. All installations and procedures shall be consistent with provisions set forth in the "1980 Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" issued under the authority of the "State of Texas Uniform Act Regulating Traffic on Highways", — codified as Article 6701d Veron's Civil Statues, pertinent section being Section Nos. 27, 29, 30 and 31. The Contractor will not remove any regulatory sign, instructional sign, street name sign, or other sign which has been erected by the City. If it is determined that a sign must be removed to permit required construction, the Contractor shall contact the Transportation and Public Works Department, Signs and Markings Division (phone number 871-8075), to remove the sign. In case of regulatory signs, the Contractor must replace the permanent sign with a temporary sign meeting the requirements of the above referred manual and such temporary sign must be installed prior to the removal of the permanent sign. If the temporary sign is not installed correctly or if it does not meet the required specifications, the permanent sign shall be left in place until the temporary sign requirements are met. When construction work is completed to the extent that the permanent sign can be re- installed, the Contractor shall again contact the Signs and Markings Division to re-install the permanent sign and shall leave his temporary sign in place until such re-installation is completed. The Contractor will be held responsible foe all damage to the work or the public due to failure of barricades, signs, fences, lights, or watchmen to protect them. Whenever evidence is found of such damage to the work the Engineer may order the damaged portion immediately removed and replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense. The Contractor's responsibility for the maintenance of barricades, signs, fences and lights, and for providing watchmen shall not cease until the project shall have been completed and accepted by the Owner. No compensation, except as specifically provided in these Contract Documents, will be — paid to the Contractor for the Work and materials involved in the constructing,providing, and maintaining of barricades, signs, fences, and lights or salaries of watchmen, for the subsequent removal and disposal of such barricades, signs, or for any other incidentals -- necessary for the proper protection, safety, and convenience of the public during the contract period, as this work is considered to be subsidiary to the several items for which unit or lump sum prices are requested in the Proposal. C6-6.9 USE OF EXPLOSIVES, DROP WEIGHT, ETC.: Should the Contractor elect to use explosives, drop weight, etc., in the prosecution of the work, the utmost care shall be — exercised at all times so as not to endanger life or property. The Contractor shall notify the proper representative of any public service corporation, any company, individual, or utility, and the Owner, not less than twenty-four hours in advance of the use of any C6-6(4) Y� activity which might damage or endanger their or his property along or adjacent to the work. Where the use of explosives is to be permitted on the project, as specified in the Special Conditions Documents, or the use of explosives is requested, the Contractor shall submit notice to the Engineer in writing twenty-four hours prior to commencing and shall furnish evidence that he has insurance coverage to protect against any damages and/or injuries arising out of such use of explosives. C6-6.10 WORK WITHIN EASEMENTS: Where the work passes over,through, or into private property, the Owner will provide such right-of-way or easement privileges, as the City may deem necessary for the prosecution of the work. Any additional rights-of-way or work area considered necessary by the Contractor shall be provided by him at his expense. Such additional rights-of-way or work area shall be acquired for the benefit of _ the City. The City shall be notified in writing as to the rights so acquired before work begins in the affected area. The Contractor shall not enter upon private property for any purpose without having previously obtained permission from the owner of such property. The Contractor will not be allowed to store equipment or material on private property unless and until the specified approval of the property owner has been secured in writing by the Contractor and a copy furnished to the Engineer. Unless specifically provided _ otherwise, the Contractor shall clear all rights-of-way or easements of obstructions which must be removed to make possible proper prosecution of the work as a part of the project construction operations. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of and shall use every precaution to prevent damage to, all tress, shrubbery, plants, lawns, fences, culverts, curbing, and all other types of structures or improvements, to all water, sewer, and gas lines, to all conduits, overhead pole lines, or appurtenances thereof, including the construction of temporary fences and to all other public or private property adjacent to the work. re The Contractor shall notify the proper representatives of the owners or occupants of the public or private lands of interest in lands which might be affected by the work. Such notice shall be made at least 48 hours in advance of the beginning of the work. Notices shall be applicable to both public and private utility companies or any corporation, company, individual, or other, either as owners or occupants, whose land or interest in land might be affected by the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage or - injury to property of any character resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the manner or method or execution of the work, or at any time due to defective work, material, or equipment. When and where any direct or indirect or injury is done to public or private property on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work, or in consequence of non-execution thereof on the part of the Contractor, he shall restore or have restored as his cost and expense such property to a condition at least equal to that existing before such damage or injury was done, by repairing, rebuilding, or otherwise C6-6(5) replacing and restoring as may be directed by the Owner, or he shall make good such damages or injury in a manner acceptable to the owner of the property and the Engineer. All fences encountered and removed during construction of this project shall be restored to the original or a better than original condition upon completion of this project. When wire fencing, either wire mesh or barbed wire is to be crossed, the Contractor shall set cross brace posts on either side of the permanent easement before the fence is cut. Should additional fence cuts be necessary, the Contractor shall provide cross-braced posts at the point of the proposed cut in addition to the cross braced posts provided at the permanent easements limits, before the fence is cut. Temporary fencing shall be erected in place of the fencing removed whenever the work is not in progress and when the site is vacated overnight, and/or at all times to prevent livestock from entering the construction area. The cost for fence removal, temporary closures and replacement shall be subsidiary to the various items bid in the project _ proposal. Therefore, no separate payment shall be allowed for any service associated with this work. In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore such property or to make good such damage or injury, the Owner may, upon 48 hour written notice under ordinary circumstances, and without notice when a nuisance or hazardous condition results, proceed to repair, rebuild, or otherwise restore such property as may be determined by the Owner to be necessary, and the cost thereby will be deducted from any monies due to or to become due to the Contractor under this contract. _ C6.6.11 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR: It is understood and agreed by the parties hereto that the Contractor shall perform all work and services hereunder as an independent contractor, and not as an officer, agent, servant, or employee of the Owner. Contractor shall have exclusive control of and exclusive right to control the details of all work and services performed hereunder, and all persons performing the same, and shall be solely responsible for the acts and omissions of its officers, agents, servants, employees, contractor, subcontractors, licensees and invitees. The doctrine of respondeat superior shall not apply as between Owner and Contractor, its officers, agents,employees, — contractors and subcontractors, and nothing herein shall be construed as creating a partnership or joint enterprise between Owner and Contractor. C6-6.12 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS: Contractor covenants and agrees to, and does hereby indemnify, hold harmless and defend Owner, its officers, agents, servants, and employees from and against any and all claims or suits for — property damage or loss and/or personal injury, including death, to any and all persons, of whatsoever kind or character, whether real or asserted, arising out of or in connection with, directly or indirectly, the work and services to be performed hereunder by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees, whether or not caused, in whole or in apart, by alleged negligence on the part of officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees of the C6-6(6) Owner; and said Contractor does hereby covenant and agree to assume all liability and responsibility of Owner, its officers, agents, servants, and employees for property damage or loss, and/or personal injuries, including death, to any and all person of whatsoever kind or character, whether real or asserted, arising out of or in connection with, directly or indirectly, the work and services to be performed hereunder by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees, whether or not caused, in whole or in apart, by alleged negligence of officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees of the Owner. Contractor likewise covenants and agrees to, and does hereby, indemnify and hold harmless Owner from and against any and all injuries, loss or damages to property of the Owner during the performance of any of the terms and conditions of this Contract, whether arising out of or in connection with or resulting from, in whole or in apart, any and all alleged acts of omission of officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees, or invitees of the Owner. In the event a written claim for damages against the contractor or its subcontractors remains unsettled at the time all work on the project has been completed to the satisfaction of the Director of the Water Department, as evidenced by a final inspection, final payment to the Contractor shall not be recommended to the Director of the Water Department for a period of 30 days after the date of such final inspection, unless the Contractor shall submit written evidence satisfactory to the Director that the claim has been settled and a release has been obtained from the claimant involved. If the claims concerned remains unsettled as of the expiration of the above 30-day period, the Contractor may be deemed to be entitled to a semi-final payment for work completed, such semi-final payment to be in the amount equal to the total dollar amount then due less the dollar value of any written claims pending against the Contractor arising out of performance of such work, and such semi-final payment may then be recommended by the Director. The Director shall not recommend final payment to a Contractor against whom such a claim for damages is outstanding for a period of six months following the date of the -. acceptance of the work performed unless the Contractor submits evidence in writing satisfactory tot he Director that: 1. The claim has been settled and a release has been obtained from the claimant involved, or 2. Good faith efforts have been made to settle such outstanding claims, and such good faith efforts have failed. - If condition (1) above is met at any time within the six month period, the Director shall recommend that the final payment to the Contractor be made. If condition (2) above is met at any time within the six month period, the Director may recommend that final payment to the Contractor be made. At the expiration of the six month period, the C6-6(7) Director may recommend that final payment be made if all other work has been — performed and all other obligations of the Contractor have been met to the satisfaction of the Director. The Director may, if he deems it appropriate, refuse to accept bids on other Water Department Contract work from a Contractor against whom a claim for damages is outstanding as a result of work performed under a City Contract. C6-6.13 CONTRACTOR'S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES: Should the Contractor claim W compensation foe any alleged damage by reason of the acts or omissions of the Owner, he shall within three days after the actual sustaining of such alleged damage, make a written statement to the Engineer, setting out in detail the nature of the alleged damage, and on or before the 25th day of the month succeeding that in which ant such damage is claimed to have been sustained, the Contractor shall file with the Engineer an itemized statement of the details and the amount of such alleged damage and, upon request, shall give the �. Engineer access to all books of account, receipts, vouchers, bills of lading, and other books or papers containing any evidence as to the amount of such alleged damage. Unless such statements shall be filed as hereinabove required, the Contractor's claim for _ compensation shall be waived, and he shall not be entitled to payment on account of such damages. C6-6.14 ADJUSTMENT OR RELOCATION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES, ETC.: In case it is necessary to change, move, or alter in any manner the property of a public utility or others, the said property shall not be moved or interfered with until orders thereupon have .� been issued by the Engineer. The right is reserved to the owners of public utilities to enter the geographical limits of the Contract for the purpose of making such changes or repairs to the property that may be necessary by the performance of this Contract. _ C6-6.15 TEMPORARY SEWER AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS: When existing sewer lines have to be taken up or removed, the Contractor shall, at his own expense and cost, provide and maintain temporary outlets and connections for all private or public drains and sewers. The Contractor shall also take care of all sewage and drainage which will be received from these drains and sewers, and for this purpose he shall provide and maintain, at his own cost and expense, adequate pumping facilities and temporary outlets or divisions. The Contractor, at his own cost and expense, shall construct such troughs, pipes, or other structures necessary, and be prepared at all times to dispose of drainage and sewage received from these temporary connections until such times as the permanent connections are built and are in service. The existing sewers and connections shall be kept in service and maintained under the Contract, except when specified or ordered to be abandoned by the Engineer. All water, sewage, and other waste shall be disposed of in a satisfactory manner so that no nuisance is created and so that the work under construction will be adequately protected. C6-6(8) C6-6.16 ARRANGEMENT AND CHARGES FOR WATER FURNISHED BY THE CITY: When the Contractor desires to use City water in connection with any construction work, he shall make complete and satisfactory arrangements with the Fort Worth City Water Department for so doing. City water furnished to the Contractor shall be delivered to the Contractor from a connection on an existing City main. All piping required beyond the point of delivery shall be installed by the Contractor at his own expense. The Contractor's responsibility in the use of all existing fire hydrant and/or valves is detailed in Section E2-1.2 USE OF FIRE HYDRANTS AND VALVES in these General Contract Documents. When meters are used to measure the water, the charges, if any, for water will be made at the regular established rates. When meters are not used, the charges, if any, will be as prescribed by the City ordinance, or where no ordinances applies, payment shall be made on estimates and rates established by the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department. C 6-6.17 USE OF A SECTION OR PORTION OF THE WORK: Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, any section or portion of the work or any structure is in suitable condition, it may be put into use upon the written notice of the Engineer, and such usage shall not be held to be in any way an acceptance of said work or structure or any part thereof or as a waiver of any of the provisions of these Contract Documents. All necessary repairs and removals of any section of the work so put into use,due to defective materials or workmanship, equipment, or deficient operations on the part of the Contractor, shall be performed by the Contractor at his expense. C6-6.18 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE WORK: Until written acceptance by the Owner as provided for in these Contract Documents, the work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution to prevent injury or damage to the work or any part thereof by action of the elements or from any cause whatsoever, whether arising from the execution or nonexecution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good at his own expense all injuries or damage to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the hereinabove causes. r. C6-6.19 NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS: Inspection by the Engineer or any order by the Owner by payment of money or any payment for or acceptance of any work, or any extension of time, or any possession taken by the City shall not operate as a waiver of any provision of the Contract Documents. Any waiver of any breach or Contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. The Owner reserves the right to correct any error that may be discovered in any estimate that may have been paid and to adjust the same to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3 C6-6(9) C6-6.20 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS: In carrying out the provisions of these Contract Documents or in exercising any power of authority granted thereunder, there shall be no liability upon the authorized representative of the Owner, either personally or other wise as they are agents and representatives of the City. C6-6.21 STATE SALES TAX: On a contract awarded by the City of Fort Worth, and organization which qualifies for exemption pursuant the provisions of Article 20.04 (H) of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act, the Contractor may purchase, rent or lease all materials, supplies and equipment used or consumed in the performance of this contract by issuing to his supplier an exemption certificate in lieu of the tax, said exemption certificate to comply with State Comptroller's Ruling .007. Any such T exemption certificate issued to the Contractor in lieu of the tax shall be subject to and shall comply with the provision of State Comptroller's Ruling .011, and any other applicable State Comptroller's rulings pertaining to the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and _ Use Tax Act. On a contract awarded by a developer for the construction of a publicly-owner _ improvement in a street right-of-way or other easement which has been dedicated to the public and the City of Fort Worth, an organization which qualifies for exemption pursuant the provisions of Article 20.04 (H) of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act, the Contractor can probably be exempted in the same manner stated above. Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act permits and information can be obtained _ from: Comptroller of Public Accounts Sales Tax Division Capitol Station Austin,TX C6-6(10) " PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS C7-7 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS SECTION C7-7 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS: C7-7.1 SUBLETTING: The Contractor shall perform with his own organization, and with the assistance of workmen under his immediate superintendance, work of a value of not less than fifty (50%) percent of the value embraced on the contract. If the Contractor sublets any part of the work to be done under these Contract Documents, he will not under any circumstances be relieved of the responsibility and obligation assumed under these Contract Documents. All transactions of the Engineer will be with the Contractor. Subcontractors will be considered only in the capacity of employees or workmen of the Contractor and shall be subject tot he same requirements as to character and competency. The Owner will not recognize any subcontractor on the work. The Contractor shall at all times, when the work is in operation, be represented either in person or by a superintendent or other designated representatives. C7-7.2 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT: The Contractor shall not assign, transfer, sublet, or otherwise dispose of the contract or his rights, title, or interest in or to the same or any part thereof without the previous consent of the Owner expressed by resolution of the City Council and concurred in by the Sureties. If the Contractor does, without such previous consent, assign, transfer, sublet, convey, or otherwise dispose of the contract or his right, title, or interest therein or any part thereof, to any person or persons, partnership, company, firm, or corporation, or does by bankruptcy, voluntary or involuntary, or by assignment under the insolvency laws of any states, attempt to dispose of the contract may, at the option of the Owner be revoked and annulled, unless the Sureties shall successfully complete said contract, and in the event of any such revocation or annulment, any monies due or to become due under or by virtue of said contract shall be retained by the Owner as liquidated damages for the reason that it would be impracticable and extremely difficult to fix the actual damages. C7-7.3 PROSECUTION OF THE WORK: Prior to beginning any construction operations, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in five or more copies, if requested by the Engineer, a progress schedule preferably in chart or diagram form, or a brief outlining in detail and step by step the manner of prosecuting the work and ordering materials and equipment which he expects to follow in order to complete the project in the scheduled time. There shall be submitted a table of estimated amounts to be earned by the Contractor during each monthly estimate period. The Contractor shall commence the work to be performed under this contract within the time limit stated in these Contract Documents and shall conduct the work in a continuous manner and with sufficient equipment, materials, and labor as is necessary to insure its completion within the time limit. C7-7(1) The sequence requested of all construction operations shall be at all times as specified in the Special Contract Documents. Any Deviation from such sequencing shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. Contractor shall not proceed with any deviation until he has received written approval from the Engineer. Such specification or approval by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from full responsibility of the complete performance of the Contract. The contract time may be changed only as set forth in Section C7-7.8 EXTENSION OF TIME OF COMPLETION of this Agreement, and a progress schedule shall not constitute a change in the contract time. C7-7.4 LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS: The working operations shall at all times be conducted by the Contractor so as to create a minimum amount of inconvenience to the public. At any time when, in the judgment of the Engineer, the Contractor has obstructed or closed or is carrying on operations in a portion of a street or public way greater than is necessary for proper execution of the work, the Engineer may require the Contractor to finish the section on which operations are in progress before the work is commenced on any additional section or street. C7-7.5 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT: Local labor shall be used by the Contractor when it is available. The Contractor may bring from outside the City of Fort Worth his key men and his superintendent. All other workmen, including equipment operators, may be imported only after the local supply is exhausted. The Contractor shall employ only such superintendents, foremen, and workmen who are careful, competent, and fully qualified to perform the duties and tasks assigned to them, and the Engineer may demand and secure the summary dismissal of any person or persons employed by the Contractor in or about or on the work who, in the opinion of the Owner, shall misconduct himself or to be found to be incompetent, disrespectful, intemperate, dishonest, or otherwise objectionable or neglectful in the proper performance of his or their duties, or who neglect or refuses to comply with or carry out the direction of the owner, and such person or persons shall not be employed again thereon without written consent of the Engineer. All workmen shall have sufficient skill, ability, and experience to properly perform the work assigned to them and operate any equipment necessary to properly carry out the performance of the assigned duties. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain on the work all such equipment as is considered to be necessary for the prosecution of the work in an acceptable manner and at a satisfactory rate of progress. All equipment, tools, and machinery used for handling materials and executing any part of the work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be maintained in a satisfactory, safe and efficient working condition. Equipment on any portion of the work shall be such that no injury to the work. Workmen or adjacent property will result from its use. C7-7(2) C7-7.6 WORK SCHEDULE: Elapsed working days shall be computed starting with the first day of the work completed as defined in C1-1.23 "WORKING DAYS" or the date stipulated in the "WORK ORDER"for beginning work, whichever comes first. Nothing in these Contract Documents shall be construed as prohibiting the Contractor from working on Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holidays, providing that the following requirements are met: a. A request to work on a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday must be made to the Engineer no later that the preceding Thursday. b. Any work to be done on the project on such a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday must be, in the opinion of the Engineer, essential to the timely completion of the project. The Engineer's decision shall be final in response to such a request for approval to work on a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday, and no extra compensation shall be allowed to the Contractor for any work performed on such a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday. Calendar Days shall be defined in C1-1.24 and the Contractor may work as he so desires. C7-7.7 TIME OF COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION: The Contractor shall commence the working operations within the time specified in the Contract Documents and set forth in the Work Order. Failure to do so shall be considered by the owner as r. abandonment of the Contract by the Contractor and the Owner may proceed as he sees fit. The Contractor shall maintain a rate of progress such as will insure that the whole work will be performed and the premises cleaned up in accordance with the Contract Documents and within the time established in such documents and such extension of time as may be properly authorized. C7-7.8 EXTENSION OF TIME COMPLETION: The Contractor's request for an extension of time of completion shall be considered only when the request for such extension is submitted in writing to the Engineer within seven days from and after the time alleged cause of delay shall occurred. Should an extension of the time of completion be requested such request will be forwarded to the City Council for approval. In adjusting the contract time for completion of work, consideration will be given to unforeseen causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, fire, flood, tornadoes, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, embargoes, or delays of sub-contractors due to such causes. C7-7(3) When the date of completion is based on a calendar day bid, a request for extension of time because of inclement weather will not be considered. A request for extension of time due to inability to obtain supplies and materials will be considered only when a review of the Contractor's purchase order dates and other pertinent data as requested by the — Engineer indicates that the Contractor has made a bonafide attempt to secure delivery on schedule. This shall include efforts to obtain the supplies and materials from alternate sources in case the first source cannot make delivery. If satisfactory execution and completion of the contract should require work and materials in greater amounts or quantities than those set forth in the approved Contract Documents, then the contract time mat be increased by Change Order. C7-7.9 DELAYS: The Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the work, except when direct and unavoidable extra cost to the Contractor is caused by the failure of the City to provide information or material, if any, which is to be furnished by the City. When such extra compensation is claimed, a written statement thereof shall be presented by the Contractor to the Engineer and if by the Engineer found correct, shall be approved and referred by the Engineer to the City Council for final _ approval or disapproval; and the action thereon by the City Council shall be final and binding. If delay is caused by specific orders given by the Engineer to stop work, or by the performance of extra work, or by the failure of the City to provide material or necessary instructions for carrying on the work,then such delay will entitle the Contractor to an equivalent extension of time, his application for shall, however, be subject to the approval of the City Council: and no such extension of time shall release the Contractor or the surety on his performance bond from all his obligations hereunder which shall remain in full force until the discharge of the contract. C7-7.10 TIME OF COMPLETION: The time of completion is an essential element of the Contract. Each bidder shall indicate in the appropriate place on the last page of the proposal, the number of working days or calendar days that he will require to — fully complete this contract or the time of completion will be specified by the City in the proposal section of the Contract Documents. The number of days indicated shall be a realistic estimate of the time required to complete the work covered by the specific contract being bid upon. The amount of time so stated by the successful bidder or the City will become the time of completion specified in the Contract Documents. For each calendar day that any work shall remain uncompleted after the time specified in the Contract Documents, or increased time granted by the Owner, or as automatically increased by additional work or materials ordered after the contract is signed, the sum per day given in the following schedule, unless otherwise specified in other parts of the Contract Documents, will be deducted from the monies due the Contractor, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages suffered by the Owner. C7-7(4) AMOUNT OF CONTRACT AMOUNT OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES PER DAY Less than $ 5,000 inclusive $ 35.00 $ 5,001 to $ 15,000 inclusive $ 45.00 $ 15,001 to $ 25,000 inclusive $ 63.00 $ 25,001 to $ 50,000 inclusive $ 105.00 $ 50,001 to $ 100,000 inclusive $ 154.00 $ 100,001 to $ 500,000 inclusive $ 210.00 $ 500,001 to $ 1,000,000 inclusive $ 315.00 $ 1,000,001 to $ 2,000,000 inclusive $ 420.00 $ 2,000,000 and over $ 630.00 The parties hereto understand and agree that any harm to the City caused by the Contractor's delay in completing the work hereunder in the time specified by the Contract Documents would be incapable or very difficult to calculate due to lack of accurate information, and that the "Amount of Liquidated Damages Per Day", as set out above, is a reasonable forecast of just compensation due the City for harm caused by any delay. C7-7.11 SUSPENSION BY COURT ORDER: The Contractor shall suspend operations on such part or parts of the work ordered by any court, and will not be entitled to additional compensation by virtue of such court order. Neither will he be liable to the City in the vent the work is suspended by a Court Order. Neither will the Owner be liable to the Contractor by virtue of any Court Order or action for which the Owner is not solely responsible. C7-7.12 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION: The Owner shall have the right to suspend the work operation wholly or in part for such period or periods of time as he may deem necessary due to unsuitable weather conditions or any other unsuitable conditions which in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer cause further prosecution of the work to be unsatisfactory or detrimental to the interest of the project. During temporary suspension of the work covered by this contract, for any reason, the Owner will make no extra payment for stand-by time of construction equipment and/or construction crews. If it should become necessary to suspend work for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall store all materials in such manner that they will not obstruct or impede the public - unnecessarily nor become damaged in any way, and he shall take every precaution to prevent damage or deterioration of the work performed; he shall provide suitable drainage about the work, and erect temporary structures where necessary. Should the Contractor not be able to complete a portion of the project due to causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor as set forth in Paragraph C7-7.8 EXTENSION OF THETIME OF COMPLETION, and should it be C7-7(5) determined by mutual consent of the Contractor and the Engineer that a solution to allow construction to proceed is not available within a reasonable period of time, then the Contractor may be reimbursed for the cost of moving his equipment off the job and returning the necessary equipment to the job when it is determined by the Engineer that construction may be resumed. Such reimbursement shall be based on actual cost to the Contractor of moving the equipment and no profit will be allowed. No reimbursement shall be allowed if the equipment is moved to another construction project for the City of Fort Worth. The Contractor shall not suspend work without written notice from the Engineer and shall proceed with the work operations promptly when notified by the Engineer to so resume _ operations. C7-7.13 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT DUE TO NATIONAL EMERGENCY: Whenever, because of National Emergency, so declared by the president of the United States or other lawful authority, it becomes impossible for the Contractor to obtain all of the necessary labor, materials, and equipment for the prosecution of the work with reasonable continuity for a period of two months, the Contractor shall within seven days notify the City in writing, giving a detailed statement of the efforts which have been made and listing all necessary items of labor, materials, and equipment not obtainable. If, after _ investigations, the owner finds that such conditions existing and that the inability of the Contractor to proceed is not attributable in whole or in part to the fault or neglect of the Contractor, than if the Owner cannot after reasonable effort assist the Contractor in procuring and making available the necessary labor, materials, and equipment within thirty days, the Contractor my request the owner to terminate the contract and the owner may comply with the request, and the termination shall be conditioned and based upon a _ final settlement mutually acceptable to both the Owner and the Contractor and final payment shall be made in accordance with the terms of the agreed settlement, which shall include. But not be limited to the payment for all work executed but not anticipated profits on work which has not been performed. C7-7.14 SUSPENSION OR ABANDONMENT OF THE WORK AND ANNULMENT OF THE CONTRACT: The work operations on all or any portion or section of the work under Contract shall be suspended immediately on written order of the Engineer or the Contract may be declared canceled by the City Council for any good and sufficient cause. The following, by way of example, but not of limitation, may be considered grounds for suspension or cancellation: a. Failure of the Contractor to commence work operations within the time specified in the Work Order issued by the Owner. b. Substantial evidence that progress of the work operations by the Contractor is insufficient to complete the work within the specified time. C7-7(6) r. C. Failure of the Contractor to provide and maintain sufficient labor and equipment to properly execute the working operations. d. Substantial evidence that the Contractor has abandoned the work. e. Substantial evidence that the Contractor has become insolvent or bankrupt, or otherwise financially unable to carry on the work satisfactorily. f. Failure on the part of the Contractor to observe any requirements of the Contract Documents or to comply with any orders given by the Engineer or Owner provided for in these Contract Documents. g. Failure of the Contractor promptly to make good any defect in materials or workmanship, or any defects of any nature the correction of which has been directed in writing by the Engineer or the Owner. h. Substantial evidence of collusion for the purpose of illegally procuring a contract or perpetrating fraud on the City in the construction of work under contract. i. A substantial indication that the Contractor has made an unauthorized assignment of the contract or any funds due therefrom for the benefit of any creditor or for any other purpose. j. If the Contractor shall for any cause whatsoever not carry on the working operation in an acceptable manner. k. If the Contractor commences legal action against the Owner. A Copy of the suspension order or action of the City Council shall be served on the Contractor's Sureties. When work is suspended for any cause or causes, or when the contract is canceled, the Contractor shall discontinue the work or such part thereof as the owner shall designate, whereupon the Sureties may, at their option, assume the contract or that portion thereof which the Owner has ordered the Contractor to discontinue, and may perform the same or may, with written consent of the owner, sublet the work or that - portion of the work as taken over, provided however, that the Sureties shall exercise their option, if at all, within two weeks after the written notice to discontinue the work has been served upon the Contractor and upon the Sureties or their authorized agents. The Sureties, in such event shall assume the Contractor's place in all respects, and shall be paid by the Owner for all work performed by them in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. All monies remaining due the Contractor at the time of this default shall thereupon become due and payable to the Sureties as the work progresses, subject to all of the terms of the Contract Documents. C7-7(7) In case the Sureties do not, within the hereinabove specified time, exercise their right and option to assume the contract responsibilities, or that portion thereof which the Owner has ordered the Contractor to discontinue, then the Owner shall have the power to complete, by contract or otherwise, as it may determine, the work herein described or such work thereof as it may deem necessary, and the Contractor hereto agrees that the Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any materials, plants, tools, equipment, supplies, and property of any kind provided by the Contractor for the purpose of carrying on the work and to procure other tools, equipment, materials, labor and property for the completion of the work, and to charge to the account of the Contractor of said contract expense for labor, materials, tools, equipment, and all expenses incidental thereto. The expense so charged shall be deducted by the owner from such monies as may be due or may become due at any time thereafter to the Contractor under and by virtue of the Contract or any part thereof. The Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest bid for the work completing the contract, but the expense to be deducted shall be the actual cost of the owner of such work _ In case such expenses shall exceed the amount which would have been payable under the Contract if the same had been completed by the Contract, then the Contractor and his s Sureties shall pay the amount of such excess to the City on notice from the Owner of the excess due. When any particular part of the work is being carried on by the Owner by contract or otherwise under the provisions of this section, the Contractor shall continue the remainder of the work in conformity with the terms of the Contract Documents and in such a manner as to not hinder or interfere with the performance of the work by the Owner. C7-7.15 FULFILLMENT OF CONTRACT:The Contract will be considered as having been fulfilled, save as provided in any bond or bonds or by law, when all the work and all sections or parts of the project covered by the Contract Documents have been finished and completed, the final inspection made by the Engineer, and the final acceptance and final payment made by the Owner. C7-7.16 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF THE OWNER: The performance of the work under this contract may be terminated by the Owner in whole, or from time to time in part, in accordance with this section, whenever the Owner shall determine that such termination is in the best interest of the Owner. A. NOTICE OF TERMINATION: Any Termination shall be effected by mailing a notice of the termination to the Contractor specifying the extent to which performance of work under the contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective. Receipt of the notice shall be deemed conclusively presumed and established when the letter is placed in the United States Postal Service Mail by the Owner. Further, it shall be deemed conclusively presumed and established that such termination is made with just cause as therein stated; and no proof in any C7-7(8) claim, demand or suit shall be required of the Owner regarding such discretionary action "' B. CONTRACTOR ACTION: After receipt of a notice of termination, and except as otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall: 1. Stop work under the contract on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of termination; 2. place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services or facilities except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the work under the contract as is not terminated; 3. terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by notice of termination; T 4. transfer title to the Owner and deliver in the manner, at the times, and to the extent, if any, directed by the Engineer: a. the fabricated or unfabricated parts, work in progress, completed work, supplies and other material produced as a part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of, the work terminated by the notice of the termination; and b. The completed, or partially completed plans, drawings, information and other property which, if the contract had been completed, would have been required to be furnished to the Owner. 5. complete performance of such work as shall not have been terminated by the notice of termination; and 6. Take such action as may be necessary, or as the Engineer may direct, for the protection and preservation of the property related to its contract which is in the possession of - the Contractor and in which the owner has or may acquire the rest. At a time not later than 30 days after the termination date specified in the notice of termination, the Contractor may submit to the Engineer a list, certified as to quantity and quality, of any or all items of termination inventory not previously disposed of, exclusive of items the disposition of y C7-7(9) which has been directed or authorized by Engineer, Not later than 15 days thereafter, the owner shall accept title to such items provided, that the list submitted shall be subject to verification by the Engineer upon removal of the items or, if the items are stored, within 45 days from the date of submission of the list, and any necessary adjustments to correct the list as submitted, shall be made prior to final settlement. C. TERMINATION CLAIM: Within 60 days after the notice of termination, the Contractor shall submit his termination claim to the Engineer in the form and with the certification prescribed by the Engineer. Unless one or more extensions in writing are granted by the Owner upon request of the Contractor, made in writing within such 60-day period or _ authorized extension thereof, any and all such claims shall be conclusively deemed waived. D. AMOUNTS: Subject to the provisions of Item C7-7.1(C), the Contractor and the Owner may agree upon the whole or any part of the amount or amounts to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the total or _ partial termination of the work pursuant hereto; provided, that such agreed amount or amounts shall never exceed the total contract price reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made and as further reduced by the contract price work not terminated. The contract shall be amended accordingly, and the Contractor shall be paid the agreed amount. No amount shall be due for lost or anticipated profits> Nothing in C7-7.16(E) hereafter, prescribing the amount to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the termination of work pursuant to this section, shall be deemed to limit, restrict or otherwise determine or affect the amount or amounts which may be agreed upon to be paid to the Contractor pursuant to this paragraph. E. FAILURE TO AGREE: In the event of the failure of the Contractor and the Owner to agree as provided in C7-7.16(D) upon the whole amount to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the termination of the work pursuant to this section, the Owner shall determine, on the basis of — information available to it, the amount, if any, due to the Contractor by reason of the termination and shall pay to the Contractor the amounts determined. No amount shall be due for lost or anticipated profits. F. DEDUCTIONS: In arriving at the amount due the Contractor under this section there shall be deducted; -' 1. all unliquidated advance or other payments on account theretofore made to the Contractor, applicable to the terminated portion of this contract; C7-7(10) 2. any claim which the Owner may have against the Contractor in connection with this contract; and 3. the agreed price for, or the proceeds of the sale of, any materials, supplies or other things kept by the Contractor or sold, pursuant to the provisions of this clause, and not otherwise recovered by or credited to the Owner. G. ADJUSTMENT: If the termination hereunder be partial, prior to the settlement of the terminated portion of this contract, the Contractor may file with the Engineer a request in writing for an equitable adjustment of the price or prices specified in the contract relating to the continued portion of the contract (the portion not terminated by notice of termination), such equitable adjustment as may be agreed upon shall be made in such price or prices; noting contained herein, however, shall limit the right of the owner and the Contractor to agree upon the amount or amounts to be paid tot he Contractor for the completion of the continued portion of the contract when said contract does not contain an established T contract price for such continued portion. H. NO LIMITATION OF RIGHTS: Noting contained in this section shall limit or alter the rights which the Owner may have for termination of this contract under C7-7.14 hereof entitled "SUSPENSION OR T ABANDONMENT OF THE WORK AND ANNULMENT OF CONTRACT" or any other right which the Owner may have for default or breach of contract by Contractor. C7-7.17 SAFETY METHODS AND PRACTICES: The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work at all times and shall assume all responsibilities for their enforcement. The Contractor shall comply with federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, and regulations so as to protect person and property from injury, including death, or damage in connection with the work. + C7-7(11) PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT SECTION C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT C8-8.1 MEASUREMENT OF OUANTITIES: The determination of quantities of work performed by the Contractor and authorized by the Contract Documents acceptably completed under the terms of the Contract Documents shall be made by the Engineer, based on measurements made by the Engineer. These measurements will be made according to the United States Standard Measurements used in common practice, and will be the actual length, area, solid contents, numbers, and weights of the materials and item installed. C8-8.2 UNIT PRICES: When in the Proposal a "Unit Price" is set forth, the said "Unit Price" shall include the furnishing by the Contractor of all labor, tools, materials, machinery, equipment, appliances and appurtenances necessary for the construction of _ and the completion in a manner acceptable to the Engineer of all work to be done under these Contract Documents. _ The "Unit Price" shall include all permanent and temporary protection of overhead, surface, and underground structures, cleanup, finishing costs, overhead expense, bond, insurance, patent fees, royalties, risk due to the elements and other clauses, delays, profits,injuries, damages claims,taxes, and all other items not specifically mentioned that may be required to fully construct each item of the work complete in place and in a satisfactory condition for operation. C8-8.3 LUMP SUM: When in the Proposal a "Lump Sum" is set forth, the said "Lump Sum" shall represent the total cost for the Contractor to furnish all labor, tools, n materials, machinery, equipment, appurtenances, and all subsidiary work necessary for the construction and completion of all the work to provide a complete and functional item as detailed in the Special Contract Documents and/or Plans. C8-8.4 SCOPE OF PAYMENT: The Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation as herein provided, in full payment for furnishing all labor,tools, materials, - and incidentals for performing all work contemplated and embraced under these Contract Documents, for all loss and damage arising out of the nature of the work or from the action of the elements, for any unforeseen defects or obstructions which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution of the work at any time before its final acceptance by the Owner, (except as provided in paragraph C5-5.14) for all risks of whatever description connected with the prosecution of the work, for all expenses incurred by or in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of such prosecution of the working operations as herein specified, or any and all infringements of patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other legal reservations, C8-8(1) and for completing the work in an acceptable manner according to the terms of the — Contract Documents. The payment of any current or partial estimate prior to the final acceptance of the work by the Owner shall in no way constitute an acknowledgment of the acceptance of the work, materials, or equipment, nor in any way prejudice or affect the obligations of the Contractor to repair, correct, renew, or replace at his own and proper expense any defects or imperfections in the construction or in the strength or quality of the material used or equipment or machinery furnished in or about the construction of the work under contract and its appurtenances, or any damage due or attributed to such defects, which defects, imperfections, or damage shall have been discovered on or before the final inspection and acceptance of the work or during the one year guaranty period after the final acceptance. The Owner shall be the sole judge of such defects, imperfections, or damage, and the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for failure to correct the same as provided herein. C8-8.5 PARTIAL ESTIMATES AND RETAINAGE: Between the l' and the 5`h .. day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a statement showing an estimate of the value of the work done during the previous month, or estimate period under the Contract Documents. Not later than the 10`h day of the month, the Engineer shall verify such estimate, and if it is found to be acceptable and the value of the work performed since the last partial payment was made exceeds one hundred dollars ($100.00) _ inn amount, 90% of such estimated sum will be paid to the Contractor if the total contract amount is less than $400,000.00, or 95% of such estimated sum will be paid to the Contractor if the total contract amount is $400,000.00 or greater, within twenty-five (25) _ days after the regular estimate period. The City will have the option of preparing estimates on forms furnished by the City. The partial estimates may include acceptable nonperishable materials delivered to the work which are to be incorporated into the work as a permanent part thereof, but which at the time of the estimate have not been installed (such payment will be allowed on a basis of 85% of the net invoice value thereof). The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer such information as he may request to aid him as a guide in the verification or the preparation of partial estimates. It is understood that partial estimates from month to month will be approximate only, all — partial monthly estimates and payment will be subject to correction in the estimate rendered following the discovery of an error in any previous estimate, and such estimate shall not, in any respect, be taken as an admission of the Owner of the amount of work — done or of its quantity of sufficiency, or as an acceptance of the work done or the release of the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the Contract Documents. The City reserves the right to withhold the payment of any monthly estimate if the Contractor fails to perform the work strictly in accordance with the specifications or provisions of this Contract. C8-8(2) C8-8.6 WITHHOLDING PAYMENT: Payment on any estimate or estimates may be held in abeyance if the performance of the construction operations is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. .e C8-8.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: Whenever the improvements provided for by the Contract Documents shall have been completed and all requirements of the Contract Documents shall have been fulfilled on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing that the improvements are ready for final inspection. The Engineer shall notify the appropriate officials of the Owner, will within a reasonable time make such final inspection, and if the work is satisfactory, in an acceptable condition, and has been completed in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents and all approved modifications thereof, the Engineer will initiate the processing of the final estimate and recommend final acceptance of the project and final payment thereof as outlines in paragraph C8-8.8 below. C8-8.8 FINAL PAYMENT: Whenever all the improvements provided for by the Contract Documents and all approved modifications thereof shall have been completed and all requirements of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled on the part of the Contractor, a final estimate showing the value of the work will be prepared by the Engineer as soon as the necessary measurements, computations, and checks can be made. All prior estimates upon which payment has been made are subject to necessary corrections or revisions in the final payment. The amount of the final estimate, less previous payments and any sums that have been deducted or retained under the provisions of the Contract Documents, will be paid to the .. Contractor within 60 days after the final acceptance by the Owner on a proper resolution of the City Council, provided the Contractor has furnished to the owner satisfactory evidence of compliance as follows: Prior to submission of the final estimate for payment, .. the Contractor shall execute an affidavit as furnished by the City, certifying that; A. all persons, firms, associations, corporations, or other organizations .. furnishing labor and/or materials have been paid in full, B. that the wage scale established by the City Council in the City of Fort Worth has been paid, and C. that there are no claims pending for personal injury and/or property damages. The acceptance by the Contractor of the last or final payment as aforesaid shall operate as and shall release the owner from all claims or liabilities under the Contract for anything done or furnished or relating to the work under the Contract Documents or any act or neglect of said City relating to or connected with the Contract. C8-8(3) The making of the final payment by the Owner shall not relieve the Contractor of any guarantees or other requirements of the Contract Documents which specifically continue thereafter. C8-8.9 ADEQUACY OF DESIGN: It is understood that the Owner believes it has employed competent engineers and designers to prepare the Contract Documents and all modifications of the approved Contract Documents. It is, therefore, agreed that the = Owner shall be responsible for the adequacy of its own design features, sufficiency of the Contract Documents, the safety of the structure, and the practicability of the operations of the completed project, provided the Contractor has complied with the requirements of the said Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof, and additions and alterations thereof approved in writing by the Owner. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the Contractor to show that he has complied with the Contract Documents, approved modifications thereof, and all alterations thereof. C8-8.10 GENERAL GUARANTY: Neither the final certificate of payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents nor partial or entire occupancy or use of the premises by the Owner shall constitute an acceptance of the work not done in accordance = with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The Contractor shall remedy any defects or damages in the work and pay for any damage to the other _ work resulting therefrom which shall appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the work unless a longer period is specified and shall furnish a good and sufficient maintenance bond in the amount of 100 percent of the amount of the _ contract which shall assure the performance of the general guaranty as above outlined. The Owner will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. C8-8.11 SUBSIDIARY WORK: Any and all work specifically governed by documentary requirements for the project, such as conditions imposed by the Plans, the General Contract Documents or these Special Contract Documents, in which no specific item for bid has been provided for in the Proposal, shall be considered as a subsidiary item of work, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid in the Proposal, for each bid item. Surface restoration, rock excavation and cleanup are general items of work — which fall in the category of subsidiary work. C8-8.12 MISCELLANEOUS PLACEMENT OF MATERIAL: Material may be allocated under various bid items in the Proposal to establish unit prices for miscellaneous placement of material. These materials shall be used only when directed by the Engineer, depending on field conditions. Payment for miscellaneous placement of material will be made for only that amount of material used, measured to the nearest one- tenth unit. Payment for miscellaneous placement of material shall be in accordance with the General Contract Documents regardless of the actual amount used for the Project. C8-8.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS: The Contractor shall keep on record a copy of all specifications, plans, addenda, modifications, shop drawings and samples at the — C8-8(4) — site, in good order and annotated to show all changes made during the construction process. These shall be delivered to the Engineer upon completion of the work. ,w C8-8(5) PART cl SECTION Cl: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS A. General These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. Provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and affect. B. C8-8.5 PARTIAL ESTIMATES AND RETAINAGE: Page C8-8 (2), should be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following: Partial pay estimates shall be submitted by the Contractor or prepared by the City on the 5th day and 20th day of each month that the work is in progress. The estimate shall be proceeded by the City on the loth day and 25th day respectively. Estimates will be paid A within 25 days following the end of the estimate period, less the appropriate retainage as set out below. Partial pay estimates may include acceptable nonperishable materials delivered to the work place which are to be incorporated into the work as a permanent part thereof, but which at the time of the pay estimate have not been so installed. If such materials are included within a pay estimate, payment shall be based upon 85% of the net voice value thereof. The Contractor will furnish the Engineer such information as may be reasonably requested to aid in the verification or the preparation of the pay estimate. For contracts of less than$400,000 at the time of execution, retainage shall be ten per cent (10%). For contracts of$400,000 or more at the time of execution, retainage shall be five percent(5%). Contractor shall pay subcontractors in accord with the subcontract agreement within five (5) business days after receipt by Contractor of the payment by City. Contractor's failure to make the required payments to subcontractors will authorize the City to withhold future payments from the Contractor until compliance with this paragraph is accomplished. It is understood that the partial pay estimates will be approximate only, and all partial pay estimates and payment of same will be subject to correction in the estimate rendered following the discovery of the mistake in any previous estimate. Partial payment by Owner for the amount of work done or of its quality or sufficiency or acceptance of the work done; shall not release the Contractor of any of its responsibilities under the Contract Documents. The City reserves the right to withhold the payment of any partial estimate if the Contractor fails to perform the work in strict accordance with the specifications or other provisions of this contract. C. Part C - General Conditions: Paragraph C3-3.11 of the General Conditions is deleted and replaced with D-3 of Part D - Special Conditions. D. C3-3.11 INSURANCE: Page 0-3 (6): Delete subparagraph "g. LOCAL AGENT FOR INSURANCE AND BONDING" Revised Pg. 1 10/24/02 E. C6-6.12 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBLITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS: Page C6-6 (8), is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following: Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify City's engineer and architect, and their personnel at the project site for Contractor's sole negligence. In addition, Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend, at its own expense, the Owner, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all claims or suits for property loss, property damage, personal injury, including death, arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be performed hereunder by Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, subcontractors, licensees or invitees, whether or not any such t iniury, damage or death is caused, in whole or in Part, by the negligence or alleged negligence of Owner, its officers, servants, or employees. Contractor likewise covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from and against any and all injuries - to Owner's officers, servants and employees and any damage, loss or destruction to property of the Owner arising from the performance of any of the terms and conditions of this Contract, whether or not any such injury or damage is caused in whole or in part by the negligence or alleged negligence of Owner, its officers, servants or employees. In the event Owner receives a written claim for damages against the Contractor or its subcontractors prior to final payment, final payment shall not be made until Contractor either (a) submits to Owner satisfactory evidence that the claim has been settled and/or a release from the claimant involved, or (b) provides Owner with a letter from Contractor's -` liability insurance carrier that the claim has been referred to the insurance carrier. The Director may, if he deems it appropriate, refuse to accept bids on other City of Fort - Worth public work from a Contractor against whom a claim for damages is outstanding as a result of work performed under a City Contract. F. INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES: Part C - General Conditions, Section C4-4 SCOPE OF WORK, Page C 4-4 (1), revise paragraph C4-4.3 INCREASED OR .. DECREASED QUANTITIES to read as follows: The Owner reserves the right to alter the quantities of the work to be performed or to extend or shorten the improvements at any time when and as found to be necessary, and the Contractor shall perform the work as altered, increased or decreased at the unit prices as established in the contract documents. No allowance will be made for any changes in lost or anticipated profits nor shall such changes be considered as waiving or invalidating any conditions or provisions of the Contract Documents. Variations in quantities of sanitary sewer pipes in depth categories shall be interpreted herein as applying to the overall quantities of sanitary sewer pipe in each pipe size but not to the various depth categories. G. C3-3.11 INSURANCE: Page C3-3 (7): Add subparagraph"h. ADDITIONAL Revised Pg. 2 10/24/02 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS" a. The City, its officers, employees and servants shall be endorsed as an additional insured on Contractor's insurance policies excepting employer's liability insurance coverage under Contractor's workers'compensation insurance policy. b. Certificates of insurance shall be delivered to the City of Fort Worth, contract administrator in the respective department as specified in the bid documents, 1000 Throckmorton Street, Fort Worth, TX 76102, prior to commencement of work on the .. contracted project. c. Any failure on part of the City to request required insurance documentation shall not constitute a waiver of the insurance requirements specified herein. d. Each insurance policy shall be endorsed to provide the City a minimum thirty days .. notice of cancellation, non-renewal, and/or material change in policy terms or coverage. A ten days notice shall be acceptable in the event of non-payment of premium. e. Insurers must be authorized to do business in the State of Texas and have a current A.M. Best rating of A: VII or equivalent measure of financial strength and solvency. f. Deductible limits, or self-funded retention limits, on each policy must not exceed $10,000.00 per occurrence unless otherwise approved by the City. g. Other than worker's compensation insurance, in lieu of traditional insurance, City may consider alternative coverage or risk treatment measures through insurance pools or risk retention groups. The City must approve in writing any alternative coverage. h. Workers' compensation insurance policy(s) covering employees employed on the ., project shall be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation providing rights of recovery in favor of the City. i. City shall not be responsible for the direct payment of insurance premium costs for contractor's insurance. j. Contractor's insurance policies shall each be endorsed to provide that such insurance is primary protection and any self-funded or commercial coverage maintained by City shall not be called upon to contribute to loss recovery. k. In the course of the project, Contractor shall report, in a timely manner,to City's officially designated contract administrator any known loss occurrence which could give rise to a liability claim or lawsuit or which could result in a property loss. .. L Contractor's liability shall not be limited to the specified amounts of insurance required herein. Revised Pg. 3 10/24/02 m. Upon the request of City, Contractor shall provide complete copies of all insurance policies required by these contract documents. H. C8-8.4 SCOPE OF PAYMENT: Delete C8-8.4, Scope of Payment at page C8-8(1) is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following: The Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation as herein provided, in full payment for furnishing all labor, tools, materials, and incidentals for performing all work contemplated and embraced under these Contract Documents, for all loss and damage arising out of the nature of the work or from the action of the elements, for any unforeseen defects or obstructions which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution of the work at any time before its final acceptance by the Owner, (except as provided in paragraph C5-5.14) for all risks of whatever description connected with the prosecution of the work, for all - expenses incurred by or in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of such prosecution of the working operations as herein specified, or any and all infringements of patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other legal reservations, and for completing the work in an acceptable manner according to the terms of the Contract Documents. The payment of any current or partial estimate prior to the final acceptance of the work by the Owner shall in no way constitute an acknowledgment of the acceptance of the work, materials, or equipment, nor in any way prejudice or affect the obligations of the Contractor to repair, correct, renew, or replace at his own and proper expense any defects - or imperfections in the construction or in the strength or quality of the material used or equipment or machinery furnished in or about the construction of the work under contract and its appurtenances, or any damage due or attributed to such defects, which defects, imperfections, or damage shall have been discovered on or before the final inspection and acceptance of the work or during the two (2) year guaranty period after the final acceptance. The Owner shall be the sole judge of such defects, imperfections, or damage, " and the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for failure to correct the same as provided herein. I. C8-8.10 GENERAL GUARANTY: Delete C8-8.10,General Guaranty at page C8-8(4)is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following: Neither the final certificate of payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents, nor partial or entire occupancy or use of the premises by the Owner shall constitute an acceptance of work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The Contractor shall remedy any defects or damages in the work and pay for any damage to other work or property resulting therefrom which shall appear within a period of two(2)years from the date of final acceptance of the work unless a longer period is specified and shall furnish a good and sufficient maintenance bond in the amount of 100 percent of the amount of the contract which shall assure the performance of the general guaranty as above outlined The Owner will give notice of observed Y defects with reasonable promptness. Revised Pg. 4 10/24/02 Any reference to any shorter period of time of warranty contained elsewhere within the specifications shall be resolved in favor of this specifications, it being the City's intent that the Contractor guarantee its work for a period of two (2) years following the date of acceptance of the project. In the Special Instructions to Bidders, TPW contracts place the following in lieu of the existing paragraph 2. .. J. Part C- General Conditions, Section C2-2 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL,Page C2-2 (4) exchange paragraphs C2-2.7, C2-2.8 and C2-2.9 with the following: C2-2.7 DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL: No proposal will be considered unless it is delivered, accompanied by its proper Bid Security, to the Purchasing Manager or his .• representative at the official location and stated time set forth in the "Notice to Bidders." It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to deliver the proposal at the proper time to the proper place. The mere fact that a proposal was dispatched will not be considered. The Bidders must have the proposal actually delivered. Each proposal shall be in a sealed envelope plainly marked with the word"PROPOSAL," and the name or description of the project as designated in the "Notice to Bidders." The envelope shall be addressed to the Purchasing Manager, City of Fort Worth Purchasing Division, P.O. Box 17027, Fort Worth, Texas 76102. - C2-2.8 WITHDRAWING PROPOSALS: Proposals actually filed with the Purchasing Manager cannot be withdrawn prior to the time set for opening proposals. A request for non-consideration of a proposal must be made in writing, addressed to the City Manager, and filed with him prior to the time set for the opening of proposals. After all proposals not requested for non-consideration are opened and publicly read aloud, the proposals for which non-consideration requests have been properly filed may, at the option of the "' Owner,be returned unopened. C2-2.9 TELEGRAPHIC MODIFICATION OF PROPOSALS: Any bidder may modify his proposal by telegraphic communication at any time prior to the time set for opening proposals, provided such telegraphic communication is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the said proposal opening time, and provided further, that the City Manager is satisfied that a written and duly authenticated confirmation of such telegraphic communication over the signature of the bidder was mailed prior to the proposal opening time. If such confirmation is not received within forty-eight (48) hours after the proposal opening time, no further consideration will be given to the proposal K. C3-3.7 BONDS (CITY LET PROJECTS): Reference Part C, General Conditions, dated November 1, 1987; (City let projects)make the following revisions: 1. Page C3-3(3);the paragraph after paragraph C3-3.7d Other Bonds should be revised to read: Revised Pg. 5 10/24/02 In order for a surety to be acceptable to the City, the surety must (1) hold a certificate of authority from the United States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law; or(2)have obtained reinsurance for any liability in excess of$100,000 from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a reinsurer in the state of Texas and is the holder of a certificate of authority from the Untied States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or - required under federal law. Satisfactory proof of any such reinsurance shall be provided to the City upon request. The City, in its sole discretion, will determine the adequacy of the proof required herein. 2. Pg. C3-3(5) Paragraph C3-3.11 INSURANCE delete subparagraph"a. COMPENSATION INSURANCE". 3. Pg. C3-3(6),Paragraph C3-3.11 INSURANCE delete subparagraph"g. LOCAL AGENT FOR INSURANCE AND BONDING". �. L. RIGHT TO AUDIT: Part C- General Conditions, Section C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT, Page C8-8 (5), add the following: C8-8.14 RIGHT TO AUDIT: (a)Contractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three(3) years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine and photocopy any directly pertinent books, documents,papers and records of the Contractor involving transactions relating to this contract. Contractor agrees that the City shall have access during normal working hours to all necessary Contractor facilities and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space in order to conduct audits in compliance with the provisions of this section. The City shall give contractor reasonable advance notice of intended audits. (b) Contractor further agrees to include in all its subcontracts hereunder a provision to the effect that the subcontractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three(3) years after final payment under the subcontract, have access to and the right to examine and photocopy any directly pertinent books, documents,papers and records of such subcontractor, involving transactions to the subcontract, and further, that City shall have access during normal working hours to all subcontractor facilities, and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space, in order to conduct audits in compliance with the provisions of this article. City shall give subcontractor reasonable advance notice of intended audits. (c) Contractor and subcontractor agree to photocopy such documents as may be requested by the City. The City agrees to reimburse the Contractor for the cost of copies as follows: 1. 50 copies and under- 10 cents per page Revised Pg. 6 10/24/02 2,More than 50 copies- 85 cents for the first page plus fifteen cents for each page thereafter M. SITE PREPARATION: The Contractor shall clear rights-of-way or easements of obstruction which must be removed to make possible proper prosecution of the work as a part of this project construction operations. The contractor's attention is directed to paragraph C6-6.10 work within easements, page C6-6(4),part C - General Conditions of the Water Department General Contract Document and General Specifications. Clearing and restoration shall be considered as incidental to construction and all costs incurred will be considered to be included in the Linear Foot price of the pipe. N. Reference Part C- General Conditions, Section C6-6.8 BARRICADES, WARNINGS AND WATCHMEN: 1. Wherever the word Watchmen appears in this paragraph, it shall be changed to the word flagmen. 2. In the first paragraph, lines five(5) and six(6), change the phrase take all such other precautionary measures to take all reasonable necessary measures. O. MINORITY/WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE COMPLIANCE: Reference Part C(General Conditions), Section C3-3.2 Entitled "MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE/WOMEN-OWNED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE COMPLIANCE" shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following: Upon request,Contractor agrees to provide to Owner complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by a Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and/or a Woman Business Enterprise (WBE) on the contract and payment therefore. Contractor further agrees to permit an audit and/or examination of any books,records or files in its possession that will substantiate the actual work performed by an MBE and/or WBE. The misrepresentation of facts(other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or the commission of fraud by the Contractor will be grounds for termination of the contract and/or initiating action under appropriate federal, state or local laws or ordinances relating to false statements; further, any such misrepresentation(other than negligent misrepresentation) and/or commission of fraud will result in the Contractor being determined to be irresponsible and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than thee(3)years. Revised Pg. 7 10/24/02 P. WAG RATES: Section C3-3.13 of the General Conditions is deleted and replaced with the following: (a)The contractor shall comply with all requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code, including the payment of not less than the rates determined by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth to be the prevailing wage rates in accordance with.Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code. Such prevailing wage rates are included in these contract documents. (b)The contractor,shall, for a period of three(3)years following the date of acceptance of the work,maintain records that show(i7 the name and occupation of each worker employed by the contractor in the construction`of the work provided for in this contract; and(ii) the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. ,These records shall be open at;all; reasonable hours for inspection by the City. The provisions of Section C-1,L. Right to Audit(Rev. 9/30/02)pertain to this inspection. (c), The contractor shall include in its subcontracts and/or shall otherwise require all of its subcontractors to comply with paragraphs(a)and(b)above. (d)With each partial payment estimate or payroll period,whichever is less, an affidavit stating that the contractor has complied with the requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code. Tlie contractor shall post the prevailing wage rates in a conspicuous place at the site of the project at all times w w w Revised Pg. 8 10/24/02 r a 4 } w City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements PART D SPECIAL CONDITIONS ' This Part D — Special Conditions is complimentary to Part C — General Conditions and Part C 1 — Supplementary Conditions to Part C of the Contract. Anything contained in this Part D that is additive to any provision in Part C—General Conditions and part C1—Supplementary Conditions to Part C of the Contract are to be read together. Any conflict between Part C—General Conditions and Part C 1 —Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and this Part D,Part D shall control. FOR: SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION—MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 01632 D-1 GENERAL The order or precedence in case of conflicts or discrepancies between various parts of the Contract Documents subject to the ruling of the Engineer shall generally,but not necessarily,follow the guidelines listed below: 1. Plans 2. Contract Documents 3. Special Conditions The following Special Conditions shall be applicable to this project and shall govern over any conflicts with the General Contract Documents under the provisions stated above. The Contractor shall be responsible for defects in this project due to faulty materials and workmanship,or both,for a period of two(2)years from date of final acceptance of this project by the City of Fort Worth and will be required to replace at his expense any part or all of this project which becomes defective due to these causes. Subject to modifications as herein contained, the Fort Worth Water Department's General Contract �. Documents and General Specifications, with latest revisions, are made a part of the General Contract Documents for this project. The Plans, these Special Contract Documents and the rules, regulations, requirements,instructions,drawings or details referred to by manufacturers name,or identification include _ therein as specifying,referring or implying product control,performance,quality,or other shall be binding upon the contractor. The specifications and drawings shall be considered cooperative; therefore,work or material called for by one and not shown or mentioned in the other shall be accomplished or famished in a faithful manner as though required by all. Any general Contractor performing any work on Fort Worth water or sanitary sewer facilities must be pre- qualified with the Water Department to perform such work in accordance with procedures described in the current Fort Worth Water Department General Specifications, which general specifications shall govern performance of all such work. Part D-Special conditions D-1 09/26/11 City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements This contract and project, where applicable, may also be governed by the two following published specifications,except as modified by these Special Provisions: 1. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR STREET AND STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTION-CITY OF FORT WORTH 2. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION-NORTH CENTRAL, TEXAS Any conflict between these contract documents and the above 2 publications shall be resolved in favor of these contract documents. A copy of either of these specifications may be purchased at the office of the Transportation and Public Works Director, 1000 Throckmorton Street,2nd Floor,Municipal Building,Fort Worth,Texas 76102. The specifications applicable to each pay item are indicated by the call-out for the pay item by the designer. If not shown, then applicable published specifications in either of these documents may be followed at the discretion of the Contractor. General Provisions shall be those of the Fort Worth document rather than Division 1 of the North Central Texas document. Bidders shall not separate, detach or remove any portion, segment or sheets from the contract document at any time. Failure to bid or fully execute contract without retaining contract documents intact may be grounds for designating bids as"non-responsive"and rejecting bids or voiding contract _ as appropriate as determined by the City Engineer. D-2 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT The South Holly Water Treatment Plant is located at 1500 11t'Avenue in Fort Worth. The existing high service pump station was built in the 1950s and the electrical equipment was put in place when the station was originally built. The average lifetime for such type of electrical equipment is 30 years.Therefore in -' order to avoid any service disruption due to sudden failure of electrical equipment,the electrical gear at South Holly High Service Pump Station needs to be replaced. The South Holly WTP High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical improvements project consists of work to be performed at both North and South Holly plants.Work at North Holly includes but is not limited to replacement of panelboards,wiring,lighting,receptacles and medium voltage switches. Work at South Holly includes but is not limited to Medium Voltage Switchgear replacement,medium and low voltage MCC replacement,medium voltage pump motor replacement, low voltage panelboard replacement,bridge crane rehabilitation,lighting replacement and fan and heater replacement.It also involves installation of new pad mounted metering units in the pump station yard and plumbing work within the pump station. D-3 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW A. Definitions: 1. Certification of coverage("certificate"). A copy of a certificate of insurance,a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission,or a coverage agreement(TWCC-81,TWCC-82,TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or - entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Part D-Special conditions D-2 09/26/11 City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements 2. Duration of the project-includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the r contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in §406.096)- includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors,leasing companies,motor carriers,owner operators,employees of any such entity,or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include,without limitation,providing,hauling,or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other services related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage,based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) or all employees of the Contractor providing services on the project,for the duration of the project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being �. warded the contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage,prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. F. The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. G. The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten(10)days after the contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. H. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice,in the text,form and manner prescribed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission,informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered,and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. Part D-Special conditions D-3 09/26/11 City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pomp Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements I. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: I. Provide coverage,based on proper reporting on classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44)for all of its employees providing services on the project,for the duration of the project; 2. Provide to the Contractor,prior to that person beginning work on the project,a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project,for the duration of the project; 3. Provide the Contractor,prior to the end of the coverage period,a new certificate of coverage showing _ extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a.) A certificate of coverage,prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and b.) A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. t 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within ten(10)days after the person knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts,to perform as required by paragraphs(1)- (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing — services. 8. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the -- contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project,that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts,and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or,in the case of a self-insured,with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative,criminal,civil penalties or other civil actions. 9. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. J. The contractor shall post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered,and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Part D-Special conditions D-4 09/26/11 1.. City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other Texas Worker's Compensation Commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text,without any additional words or changes: "REQUIRED WORKER'S COMPENSATION COVERAGE The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers'compensation insurance. This includes persons providing,hauling, or delivering equipment or materials,or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project,regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." Call the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission at(512)440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage". D4 PROJECT DESIGNATION SIGNS A project sign is required for this project. The signs may be mounted on skids or posts. The Engineer shall approve the exact locations and methods of mounting. Any and all cost for the required materials,labor,and equipment necessary for the furnishing of Project Signs shall be considered as a subsidiary cost of the project and no additional compensation will be allowed. D-5 WAGE RATES The labor classifications and minimum wage rates set forth herein have been predetermined by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth,Texas,in accordance with statutory requirements,as being the prevailing classifications and rates that shall govern on all work performed by the Contractor or any subcontractor on the site of the project covered by these Contract Documents. In no event shall less than the following rates be paid(see wage rate schedule at the end of the Special Conditions). When two or more wage rate scales are shown and wage rates shown in specific classifications are in conflict,the `W higher wage will be used. D-6 EXISTING UTILITIES AND D"ROVEMENTS The plans show the locations of all known surface and subsurface structures. However,the Owner assumes no responsibility for failure to show any or all of these structures on the Plans,or to show them in their exact location. It is mutually agreed that such failure shall not be considered sufficient basis for claims for additional compensation for extra work or for increasing the pay quantities in any manner whatsoever. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the locations of and protecting all existing utilities,service lines, or other property exposed by his construction operations. Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for the support,protection,relocation,and/or temporary relocation of all utility poles,gas lines, telephone cables,utility services,water mains,sanitary sewer lines,electrical cables,drainage pipes,and all other utilities and structures both above and below ground during construction. The Contractor is liable for all damages done to such existing facilities as a result of his operations and any and all cost incurred for the protection and/or temporary relocation of such facilities are deemed subsidiary work and the cost of same and shall be included in the cost bid per linear foot of pipe installed. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED. Part D-Special conditions D-5 09/26/11 City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements Where existing utilities or service lines are cut,broken or damaged the Contractor shall replace or repair the utilities or service lines with the same type of original material and construction,or better,unless otherwise shown or noted on the plans,at his own cost and expense. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner of the damaged utility or service line. He shall cooperate with the Owners of all utilities to locate existing underground facilities and notify the Engineer of any conflicts in grades and alignment. Any and all permanent structures such as parking lot surface,fencing,and like structures on either public or private property shall be replaced at no cost to the City by material of equal value and quality as that damaged. In case it is necessary to change or move the property of any owner of a public utility,such property shall not be moved or interfered with until ordered to do so by the Engineer. The right is reserved to the owner of public utilities to enter upon the limits of the project for the purpose of making such changes or repairs of their property that may be made necessary by performance of this contract. The utility lines and conduits shown on the plans are for information only and are not guaranteed by the City of the Engineer to be accurate as to extent, location, and depth; they are shown on the plans as the best information available at the time of design, from the owners of the utilities involved and from evidences found on the ground. D-7 EXPLORATORY EXCAVATIONS In addition to those areas as may be designated on the Drawings,it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to excavate and locate existing utilities which may affect construction of the facilities. All exploratory excavations shall occur for enough in advance to permit any necessary relocation to be made with minimum delay. All costs incurred by the Contractor in making exploratory excavations shall be considered to be included in the total price bid for the project. D-8 SUBSTITUTIONS The specifications for materials set out the minimum standard of quality,which the City believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. No substitutions will be permitted until the Contractor has received written permission of the Engineer to make a substitution for the material,which has been specified. Where the term "or equal",or"or approved equal"is used,it is understood that if a material,product,or piece of equipment bearing the name so used is furnished,it will be approvable, as the particular trade name was used for the w purpose of establishing a standard of quality acceptable to the City. If a product of any other name is proposed for use, the Engineer's approval thereof must be obtained before the Contractor procures the proposed substitute. Where the term"or equal",or"or approved equal"is not used in the specifications,this does not necessarily exclude alternative items or material or equipment which may accomplish the intended purpose. However,the Contractor shall have the full responsibility of proving that the proposed substitution is,in fact,equal,and the Engineer,as the representative of the City,shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of substitutions. The provisions of this sub-section as related to "substitutions" shall be applicable to all sections of these specifications. D-9 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL/FILL MATERIAL Prior to the disposing of any spoil/fill material,the Contractor shall advise the Director of Engineering Department,acting as the City of Fort Worth's Flood Plain Administrator("Administrator"),of the location of all sites where the Contractor intends to dispose of such material. Contractor shall not dispose of such material until the proposed sites have been determined by the Administrator to meet the Part D-Special conditions D-6 09/26/11 T City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements requirements of the Flood Plain Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth(Ordinance No. 10056). All disposal sites must be approved by the Administrator to ensure that filling is not occurring within a floodplain without a permit.A floodplain permit can be issued upon approval of necessary Engineering studies. No fill permit is required if disposal sites are not in a floodplain. Approval of the Contractor's disposal sites shall be evidenced by a letter signed by the Administrator stating that the site is not in a known flood plain or by a Flood Plain Fill Permit authorizing fill within the flood plain. Any expenses associated with obtaining the fill permit,including any necessary Engineering studies,shall be at the Contractor's expense. In the event that the Contractor disposes of spoil/fill material at a site without a fill permit or a letter from the administrator approving the disposal site,upon notification by the Director of Engineering Department,Contractor shall remove the spoil/fill material at its expense and dispose of such materials in accordance with the Ordinances of the City and this section. D-10 TEMPORARY SOIL EROSION SEDIMENT AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. DESCRIPTION: This item shall consist of temporary soil erosion sediment and water pollution control measures deemed necessary by the Engineer for the duration of the contract. These control measures shall at no time be used as a substitute for the permanent control measures unless otherwise directed by the Engineer and they shall not include measures taken by the CONTRACTOR to control conditions created by his construction operations. The temporary measures shall include dikes, dams, berms, sediment basins,fiber mats,jute netting,temporary seeding,straw mulch,asphalt mulch,plastic liners, rubble liners,baled-hay retards,dikes,slope drains and other devices. B. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: The Engineer has the authority to define erodible earth and the authority to limit the surface area of erodible-earth material exposed by preparing right-of-way,clearing and grubbing,the surface area of erodible-earth material exposed by excavation,borrow and to direct the CONTRACTOR to provide temporary pollution-control measures to prevent contamination of adjacent streams,other water courses,lakes,ponds or other areas of water impoundment. Such work may involve the construction of temporary berms, dikes,dams, sediment basins,slope drains and use of temporary mulches, mats, seeding, or other control devices or methods directed by the Engineer as necessary to control soil erosion. Temporary pollution-control measures shall be used to prevent or correct erosion that may develop during construction prior to installation of permanent pollution control features,but are not associated with permanent control features on the project. The Engineer will limit the area of preparing right-of-way, clearing and grubbing, excavation and borrow to be proportional to the CONTRACTOR'S capability and progress in keeping the finish grading,mulching,seeding,and other such permanent pollution-control measures current in accordance with the accepted schedule. Should seasonal conditions make such limitations unrealistic,temporary soil-erosion-control measures shall be performed as directed by the Engineer. 1. Waste or disposal areas and construction roads shall be located and constructed in a manner that will minimize the amount of sediment entering streams. 2. Frequent fordings of live streams will not be permitted; therefore, temporary bridges or other structures shall be used wherever an appreciable number of stream crossings are necessary. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer,mechanized equipment shall not be operated in live streams. 3. When work areas or material sources are located in or adjacent to live streams, such areas shall be ., separated from the stream by a dike or other barrier to keep sediment from entering a flowing stream. Care shall be taken during the construction and removal of such barriers to minimize the muddying of a stream. Part D-Special conditions D-7 09/26/11 City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements 4. All waterways shall be cleared as soon as practicable of false work, piling, debris or other _ obstructions placed during construction operations that are not a part of the finished work. 5. The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions to prevent pollution of streams,lakes and reservoirs with fuels,oils,bitumen,calcium chloride or other harmful materials. He shall conduct and schedule his operations so as to avoid or minimize siltation of streams, lakes and reservoirs and to avoid interference with movement of migratory fish. C. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT: All work, materials and equipment necessary to provide temporary erosion control shall be considered subsidiary to the contract and no extra pay will be given for this work. D-11 UTILITIES The Contractor shall at his expense provide all utility services,including water,electricity,gas,telephone, etc.,as may be required by him and during the construction and testing period.The City may be able to make provisions for connections to the existing utilities provided that adequate service is available at appropriate points within the plant site;however,the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements, furnish materials,and perform all labor and services for connections and metering. For utility services received by connections to utility lines owned by the City within the plant,the Contractor will be billed by the City each month. D-12 SUBSIDIARY WORK Any and all work specifically governed by documentary requirements for the project,such as conditions imposed by Plans,the General Contract Documents or these Special Contract Documents,in which no specific item for bid has been provided for in the proposal, shall be considered as a subsidiary item of work,the cost of which shall be included in the price bid in the Proposal for each bid item. Surface restoration and cleanup are general items of work which fall in the category of subsidiary work. D-13 RIGHT OF ACCESS Representatives of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ), Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA),and City Code Inspectors shall have access to the project wherever and -- whenever it is in preparation or progress,and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access. D-14 OSHA STANDARDS All work performed under this contract shall meet the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA). It is the responsibility of the Contractor to become familiar with the provisions of regulations published by the OSHA in the Federal Register and to perform all of the responsibilities thereunder. It is the Contractor's responsibility to see that the project is constructed in accordance with OSHA regulations and to indemnify and save harmless the City from any penalties resulting from the _ Contractor's failure to so perform. Part D-Special conditions D-8 09/26/11 ' City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements D-15 TIME OF COMPLETION The Owner desires that all work under this contract be substantially completed, in total,within 395 Calendar Days. Final completion of all work under this contract shall be completed,in total,within 485 Calendar Days. Furthermore,the maximum amount of time between the shutdown of the existing high service pump station and startup and reliable operation of the updated pump station shall be 14 calendar days. Liquidated damages will be assessed the Contractor for failure to complete necessary work to meet these completion dates in accordance with the general conditions, Section C7-7.10,Time of Completion. Substantial Completion of the project shall be defined as operation of the updated pump station,with all instrumentation and SCADA controls and feedback functional. The time period between Substantial Completion and Final Completion shall be scheduled for completing ancillary items which have no impact on the pumping of water,such as finish grading and paving, painting,and architectural finish work. D-16 INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Wherever the words"Directed","Required","Permitted","Designated","Considered Necessary", "Prescribed",or words of like import are used on the Plans or in the Specifications,it shall be understood that they are intended as Specifications,it shall be understood that they are intended as prerogative of the Owner and/or the Engineer; and,similarly,the words,"Approval',"Acceptable","Satisfactory",or words of like import,shall mean approval,etc.,by the Owner and/or Engineer. Wherever in the Specifications or in the Plans for the work the terms or description of various qualities relative to finish,workmanship,or other qualities of similar kind cannot,because of their nature,be specifically and briefly described and are customarily described in general terms,the Owner and/or Engineer shall be final judge as to whether,or not the workmanship so described is being performed in accordance with the intent of the Plans and Specifications the work shall be completed in accordance with his interpretation of the meaning of such words,terms,or clauses. D-17 TERMINATION It is understood and agreed that this contract may be terminated by the City without obligation to the Contractor,in whole or from time to time in part,whenever such termination is determined by the City to be in the best interests of the City. Termination may be effected by delivering to the Contractor or his designated representative a notice of termination,specifying to what extent performance of the work .. under the contract is being terminated and the effective date of termination. After receipt of notice of termination Contractor shall: 1. Stop work specified in the notice on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of termination. 2. Place no further order or subcontract except as necessary to complete work already underway. 3. Terminate all orders and contracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by the Notice of Termination. D-18 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION/FINAL INSPECTION Part D-Special conditions D-9 09/26/11 City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements r D-21 HAZARDOUS AND TOXIC MATERIALS Insofar as permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor from and against any and all liabilities,losses, cost,damages and expenses,arising out of use of the materials at the Owners site which are not under the direct control of the Contractor,including,but not limited to,any and all liability resulting form personal injury,including death,property liability,at any time,however caused,due to the presence or release of,or exposure,whether to the person or property injured or otherwise,to any hazardous or toxic substance,provided,however,that the City liability shall be limited to that established in Article 6252-19,Texas Revised Code and other applicable State statutes and Constitutional provisions. D-22 AGE In accordance with the policy C'Policy')of the Executive Branch of the Federal Government,Contractor covenants that neither it nor any of its officers,members,agents,employees,program participants or subcontractors,while engaged in performing this contract,shall,in connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with the terms,conditions or privileges of their employment,discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification,retirement plan or statutory requirement. Contractor further covenants that neither it nor its officers,members,agents,employees,subcontractors, program participants,or persons acting on their behalf,shall specify,in solicitations or advertisements for employees to work on this contract,a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification,retirement plan or statutory requirement. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the policy and will defend,indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractor's alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of this agreement. D-23 DISABILITY In accordance with the provisions of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 C'ADA"),Contractor warrants that if any and all of its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public,nor in the availability,terms and/or conditions of a. employment for applicants for employment with,or employees of Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with ADA'S provision and any other applicable federal,state and local laws concerning disability and will defend,indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractor's alleged failure to comply with the above-referenced law concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this agreement. D-24 INSURANCE Property insurance upon the entire work,including materials not in place at the site to the full insurable aw value thereof,is required. All Risk Builder's Risk Insurance shall include the interests of the Owner,the Contractor,Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractors in the work and shall include,but not be limited to,the perils of fire,lightning,flood, collapse,windstorm,hail, explosion,riot, civil commotion, smoke,aircraft, .. Part D-Special conditions D-1 1 09/26/11 City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements r� The Contractor shall submit resumes for the Electrical and Instrumentation superintendents listing qualifications and experience records prior to the award of contract for approval by the Owner. All requirements for assignment and replacement of resident superintendents shall apply equally to Electrical and Instrumentation Superintendents. D-28 CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE The Contractor may elect to furnish a field construction trailer for management of the field activities. Installation of a field office shall receive no direct compensation from the Owner. Contractor shall provide temporary utilities(water,sewer,power,and phone)to the temporary construction trailer. Contractor shall remove all temporary facilities at the end of construction. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all City permits required for the trailer and associated utilities. Power costs will be back- charged to the Contractor at the end of the job by means of deductive Change Order. D-29 SANITARY FACILITIES FOR WORKMEN As set forth in the General Conditions, Section C6-6.4,the Contractor shall provide all necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of workmen at the project site. The Contractor shall also provide adequate drinking water facilities. D-30 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION Prior to the start of any work on the project,Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a construction schedule and sequence of operation. The construction schedule shall be prepared in accordance with Sections 01040 and 01310. D-31 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT The Owner will provide at the site of the work horizontal control in the form of grid reference points and vertical control in the form of bench marks. From the controls established by the Owner,the Contractor shall be responsible for the complete layout of the work and for establishing lines and elevations as needed during construction. The Contractor shall furnish at his own expense labor,including the services of competent personnel,equipment,including accurate surveying instruments,stakes,templates, platforms,tools,and materials as may be required for laying out any and all parts of the work. The Engineer will be available for assistance in an advisory capacity. D-32 WARRANTY CERTIFICATES The Manufacturer shall warrant that all equipment furnished by it hereunder complies in all respects with the design and specification of this contract and contains no defect of material or workmanship. In the event of failure of any part or parts of the equipment during the two years of service following final project completion,due to defects of design,materials,or workmanship,the affected part or parts shall be replaced promptly upon notice by the Contractor. All replacement parts shall be furnished,delivered and installed at the expense of the Manufacturer. All warranty certificates or manufacturer's guarantees,for equipment purchased by the Contractor shall be issued in the name of the City of Fort Worth. D-33 LIMITS OF EXTRA COMPENSATION FOR DELAYS The Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the work,except when direct and unavoidable extra cost to the Contractor is caused by the failure of the City to provide information or Part D-Special conditions D-13 09/26/11 City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements Equipment and material covered in PART E-SPECIFICATIONS shall have Shop Drawings and Operation and Maintenance Manuals submitted in accordance with Sections 01300 and 01430;regardless if reference is or is not made to Sections 01300 or 01430 within the section of the specification under which the equipment or material is purchased. D-38 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION When necessary,the Contractor shall request additional information,clarification or interpretation of the contract documents or when the Contractor believes there is a conflict between contract documents or when the Contractor believes there is a conflict between the drawings and specifications,he shall identify the conflict and request clarification using the Request for Information(RFI)form provided by the Engineer. Sufficient information shall be attached to permit a written response without further information. The Engineer will log each request and will review the request. If review of the project information request indicates that a change to the contract documents is required,the Engineer will issue a Proposed Contract Modification as described in Paragraph D-39. D-39 CONTRACTOR MODIFICATION REQUEST/PROPOSED CONTRACT MODIFICATION Any change in the contract documents that is requested will be initiated by the Contractor issuing a Contractor's Modification Request or by Engineer issuing a Proposed Contract Modifications. Proposals will be reviewed by the Owner and if found acceptable will be incorporated in a Change Order in accordance with Section C4 of the GENERAL CONDITIONS,or by Field Order in accordance with Paragraph D-43 of the SPECIAL CONDITIONS. The Contractor's Modification Request shall fully identify and describe the deviations and associated costs,and state the reason the change is requested. Any savings in cost related to the substitution is to be stated in the request for consideration. D-40 RECORD DATA Record Data shall be submitted to provide information as to the general character, style and manufacturer of the equipment to allow the Owner to adequately identify the materials or equipment incorporated into the project. Record Data shall be provided for all equipment and materials of construction. Record Data are not required for items which Shop Drawings and/or Operations and Maintenance manuals are required. Record Data shall be complete to indicate where the material was incorporated into the project,provide schedules of materials and their use,colors,model numbers and other information which would allow this material to be replaced at some future date. Record Data will be received by the Engineer and logged for transmittal to the Owner. Record Data will not be reviewed for comment and no response will be made to the Contractor. D-41 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REPORT A written report shall be submitted by the equipment supplier performing the installation check for equipment as required. This report shall certify that 1)the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated,2)is in accurate alignment,3)is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping, Part D-Special conditions D-15 09/26/11 s City of Fort Worth, Texas Mayor and Council Communication COUNCIL ACTION: Approved on 7/8/2008 DATE: Tuesday, July 08, 2008 LOG NAME: 30WAGE RATES REFERENCE NO.: **G-16190 SUBJECT: Adopt 2008 Prevailing Wage Rates for City-Awarded Public-Works Projects RECOMMENDATION: It is recommended that the City Council adopt the attached 2008 Prevailing Wage Rates for City-awarded public works projects. DISCUSSION: Texas Government Code Chapter 2258 requires that a public body awarding a contract for public works shall determine the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the contract, and shall specify In the bid documents and in the contract the prevailing wage rates in that locality. Each year The Quoin Chapter of the Associated General Contractors, in conjunction with the Association of Builders and Contractors (ABC) and the American Sub-Contractors Association (ASA), conducts a wage rate survey for North Texas construction. The attached 2008 Prevailing Wage Rate data was compiled from that survey. FISCAL INFORMATION/CERTIFICATION: The Finance Director certifies that this action will have no material effect on City funds. TO Fund/Account/Centers FROM Fund/Account/Centers Submitted for City Managges Office by: Fernando Costa (8476) Originating Department Head: A. Douglas Rademaker(6157) Additional Information Contact: Eric Bundy (7598) 2008 PREVAILING WAGE RATES CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY Classification Classification Hrly Rate AC Mechanic $21.69 Plumber $20.43 AC Mechanic Helper $12.00 Plumber Helper $14.90 Acoustical Ceiling Mechanic $15.24 Reinforcing Steel Setter $10.00 Bricklayer/Stone Mason $19.12 Roofer $14.00 Bricklayer/Stone Mason Helper $10.10 Roofer Helper $10.00 Carpenter $16.23 Sheet Metal Worker $16.% Carpenter Helper $11.91 Sheet Metal Worker Het per $12.31 Concrete Finisher $13.49 Sprinkler System Installer $18.00 Concrete Form Builder $13.12 Sprinkler System Installer Helper $9.00 D all Mechanic $14.62 Steel Worker Structural $17.43 Drywall Helper $10.91 Concrete Pump $20.50 Crane,Clamsheel,Backhoe, Derrick, D'Line Drywall Taper $13.00 Shovel $17.76 Drywall Taper Helper $9.00 Forklift $12.63 Electrician(Journeyman) $20.20 Front End Loader $10.50 Electrician Helper $14.43 Truck Driver $14.91 Electronic Technician $19.86 Welder $16.06 y Electronic Technician Helper $12.00 Welder Helper $9.75 Floor Layer(Resilient) $20.00 Floor Layer Helper $13.00 Glazier $18.00 .,r Glazier Helper $13.00 Insulator $14.78 Insulator Helper $11.25 Laborer Common $10.27 Laborer Skilled $13.18 �r Lather $16.10 Painter $14.83 Painter Helper $8.00 Pi efitter $18.85 - Pi efitter Helper $12.83 Plasterer $17.25 Plasterer Helper $12.25 s I Compliance with and Enforcement of Prevailing_Wage Laws (a) Duty to pay Prevailing Wage Rates. The contractor shall comply with all requirements of Chapter 2258,Texas Government Code(Chapter 2258), including the payment of not less than the rates determined by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth to be the prevailing wage rates in accordance with Chapter 2258. Such prevailing wage rates are included in these contract documents. (b) Penalty for Violation. A contractor or any subcontractor who does not pay the prevailing wage shall,upon demand made by the City,pay to the City$60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the prevailing wage rates stipulated in these contract documents. This penalty shall be retained by the City to offset its administrative costs, pursuant to Texas Government Code 2258.023. (c) Complaints of Violations and City Determination of Good Cause. On receipt of information, including a complaint by a worker, concerning an alleged violation of 2258.023, Texas Government Code,by a contractor or subcontractor,the City shall make an initial determination,before the 3 1"day after the date the City receives the information, as to whether good cause exists to believe that the violation occurred. The City shall notify in writing the contractor or subcontractor and any affected worker of its initial determination. Upon the City's determination that there is good cause to believe the contractor or subcontractor has violated Chapter 2258,the City shall retain the full amounts claimed by the claimant or claimants as the difference between wages paid and wages due under the prevailing wage rates, such amounts being subtracted from successive progress payments pending a final determination of the violation. (d) Arbitration Required if Violation Not Resolved. An issue relating to an alleged violation of Section 2258.023, Texas Government Code, including a penalty owed to the City or an affected worker,shall be submitted to binding arbitration in accordance with the Texas General Arbitration Act(Article 224 et seq., Revised Statutes)if the contractor or subcontractor and any affected worker do not resolve the issue by agreement before the 15th day after the date the City makes its initial determination pursuant to paragraph(c) above. If the persons required to arbitrate under this section do not agree on an arbitrator before the 11 th day after the date that arbitration is required, a district court shall appoint an arbitrator on the petition of any of the persons. The City is not a party in the arbitration. The decision and award of the arbitrator is final and binding on all parties and may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction. PART E Contract No.01632 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section generally describes the project and provides an overview of the extent of the work to be performed. Detailed requirements and extent of work is stated in the applicable specification sections and shown on the plans. The Contractor shall, except as otherwise specifically stated herein or in any applicable parts of these Contract Documents, provide and pay all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution, testing, and completion of the work and to make the system fully operational. B. Any part or item of the work which is reasonably implied or normally required to make each installation satisfactorily and completely operable shall be performed by the Contractor and the expense thereof shall be included in the applicable unit prices or lump sum prices bid for the various items of work. It is the intent of these specifications to provide the Owner with complete operable systems, subsystems, and other items of work. All miscellaneous appurtenances and other items or work that are incidental to meeting the intent of these specifications shall be considered as having been included in the applicable unit prices or lump sum prices bid for the various items of work even though these appurtenances and items may not be specifically called for in the specifications or indicated on the plans. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. It is the intent to award contract work for motor and switchgear replacement and electrical improvements at the South Holly Water Treatment Plant. The contract award will be based on a fixed unit price proposal. Prices will have to be provided for the following: 1. Purchase of 2000 Hp motors, Each, Quantity 4. 2. Purchase of 900 Hp motors, Each, Quantity 1. 3. Purchase of Medium Voltage Switchgear, Each, Quantity 1. 4. Purchase of Medium Voltage Motor Control Center, Each, Quantity 2. 5. Bridge Crane Modifications, Lump Sum. 6. Installation of Medium Voltage Switchgear, Motor Control Center and Motors, Lump Sum. 7. Electrical Modifications in North Holly WTP Administration Building, Lump Sum. 8. HVAC Work in South Holly WTP High Service Pump Station, Lump Sum. 9. Power System studies as detailed in specification section 16055, Lump Sum. 10. Trench safety, 100 L.F. 11. South Holly Chemical Building modifications, Lump Sum. 12. All miscellaneous work required for the completion of the project that is not specifically identified in Bid Items 1-11. Work shall include but not be limited to: Replacement of the pump station lighting, civiVstructural foundation for Oncor FTWH1101 01010-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SUMMARY OF WORK MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS • Contract No.01632 1.06 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct work in stages to accommodate the Owner's use of the premises during the construction period; coordinate the construction schedule and operations with the Owner's representative and as specified in Section 01310. B. Parts of the proposed work in this project may require facilities or plant shut downs. The Contractor shall coordinate that portion of work with the Owner as specified in Section 01310. 1.07 QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor is responsible for quality control throughout the project. B. All Contractor's operations shall be under the quality control of the Contractor's General Superintendent. T he General Superintendent shall be experienced in all aspects of the project, including pipe laying, concrete work, mechanical piping, electrical and instrumentation work. The General Superintendent's experience and diligence will be the key to maintain proper quality control during the project. C. Dimensions and elevations indicated on the plans for existing facilities were obtained by the Owner solely for use as references by the Engineer in establishing design criteria for this project. The accuracy of the information is not guaranteed, and it is not to be construed as part of the project specifications governing construction of the project. Neither the Owner, Engineer, or the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative accept any responsibility for any deviation in dimensions and/or elevations shown on the plans. D. Daily records for quality control purposes shall be maintained for all aspects of the work and all tests performed throughout construction. E. One (1) copy of daily records and all tests performed shall be maintained by the Contractor, with one (1) copy given to the Engineer and two (2) copies to the Owner. F. All records of the work shall be kept available by the Contractor for the Engineer or the Owner at any time. G. A specific plan and a check list shall be made between the Contractor, the Engineer, and the Owner for observation and inspection to assure that all work requirements have been met. 1.08 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. Designate required delivery data for each product as specified in Section 01310. B. Furnish, install, connect, and finish products. C. Serve as an overall coordinator among all subcontractors. D. Handle material and equipment at site including uncrating, storage, and security. FTWH1101 01010-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 �- SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SUMMARY OF WORK MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 01039 INTERNET-BASED CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The Owner will subscribe to an Internet-based construction management system specific to this project. B. The project website will provide server space and secured access to staff members representing the Owner, Engineer, Key Equipment Suppliers, and Contractor. Each user will have a separate log-in name and password to access the website. C. Contract management-related documents will be submitted, tracked, responded to, and made available to the Owner, Engineer, Supplier, and Contractor over the Internet. Operation and Maintenance Manuals are required for submittal in electronic format and hard copies. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS A. The Supplier will be required to make all submittals in electronic format. The software product to be chosen will support multiple file formats and provide viewing and markup capability. See potential software products in""Part 2 Products"below. B. The website includes a secured document management system for storing and making available to the project team the following: 1. Ability to store files and correspondence. -- 2. Latest drawings and specifications. 3. Project progress photos. C. ARCHIVES 1. Owner's chosen web based project management application is capable of archiving all files on the website periodically. 2. All data from the website, such as RFIs, Submittals, etc. will be available in the archive. PART 2 PRODUCTS General information on the software product to be used can be obtained by looking at the following website: Buzzsaw by Autodesk http://usa.autodesk.com/buzzsaw/ FTWH1101 01309-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 i SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LIGHTING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS+ ILl Contract No.01632 12. Safety issues 13. Other business END OF SECTION FfWH1101 01200-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PROJECT MEETINGS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Product Submittals and Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples for all equipment, material, and products. 2. Shop drawings, product data, and samples are not considered a part of contract documents. 3. Review of shop drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility from meeting all contract requirements as defined by the Contract Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Submittals: Operation and maintenance data shall be submitted for each piece of equipment and process listed in Section 01620 and as specified in Section 01430. 1.02 TYPES OF PRODUCT AND SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL DATA A. As applicable, the following types of data are required: 1. Fabrication, erection, or placement data — Dimensioned plans, lists, and schedules 2. Catalog sheets 3. Specification sheets 4. Certifications S. Laboratory, shop, or mill test reports 6. Basis of design and design calculations, test procedures, and related information as required per various sections of these specifications 7. Anchor bolt layouts 8. Lifting device plans 9. Experience and facilities brochures 10. Samples 11. Parts lists 12. Recommended normal wear and tear spare parts for one year of operation 13. Short and long term maintenance procedures 14. Shipping procedures and details of ocean container 15. Short and long term storage procedures 16. Operation and Maintenance manuals 17. Manufacturer's certification of proper installation 18. Warranties 19. Other submittals required to complete the Contract FTWH1101 01300-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SUBMITTALS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS A. All documents and markings in the submittal shall be clearly legible. Documents considered not clearly legible by the Engineer shall be rejected. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Preparation by a qualified detailer is required. 2. Identify details by reference to sheet, detail numbers, and specification section, schedule, or other identifying system as shown on the contract drawings. 3. Include all information required for submission. 4. Submit the number of copies as specified in paragraph 3.03. C. Product Data: 1. Modify the manufacturer's standard schematic plans to delete or supplement information as applicable. 2. For manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other descriptive data: a. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products, or models b. Show dimensions and clearances required c. Show performance characteristics and capacities _ d. Show wiring diagrams and controls 3. Include all information required for submission. D. Submission Requirements: 1. Accompany submittals with a transmittal letter in duplicate. 2. Include the following information for each submittal: a. Submittal number, date, and revision dates b. Project title and number c. The names, addresses, and phone numbers of: (i) Engineer (ii) Supplier (iii) Contractor d. Identification of product or material e. Relation to adjacent structure or materials f. Field dimensions clearly identified as such g. Specification section number h. Applicable standards, such as ASTM number or Federal specification i. A blank space on each shop drawing, approximately 5" x 5", for the Engineer's stamp j. Identification of deviations from contract documents FfWH1101 01300-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SUBMITTALS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.05 DISPOSITION OF SUBMITTALS A. The Engineer will first review the submittal contents for completeness and compliance with this section. Partial or incomplete submittals or submittals made not in accordance with the requirements of this section will be returned without any further review. B. After review, the Engineer shall mark each item with one of the following: 1. No Exceptions Taken —furnish item as submitted ., 2. Exceptions As Noted —furnish item with changes as noted 3. Revise and Resubmit— revise and resubmit to incorporate Engineer's comments 4. Rejected (item is not acceptable) — resubmit alternative item conforming to the project requirements C. Contractor will distribute reviewed copies as noted in paragraph 3.03. 3.06 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Revise initial plans as required and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. 2. Indicate on plans any changes, which have been made, including those requested by the Engineer. B. Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples as required for initial submission. 3.07 REPETITIVE REVIEW A. Submittals for each item will be reviewed not more than two times at the Engineer's expense. All subsequent reviews will be performed at times convenient to the Engineer and at no additional expense to the Owner. The Contractor shall pay the Engineer based on the Engineer's then prevailing rates. B. The need for more than one resubmission or any other delay in obtaining Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle the Contractor to an extension of Contract Time. 3.08 ENGINEER DUTIES A. The submittal schedule shall allow sufficient time for the Engineer to adequately complete his review. A minimum of twenty-one (21) calendar days exclusive mailing days shall be allotted for the review of each submittal. Allow more time for large, voluminous, or complex submittals. The supplier assumes all responsibility for delays due to incomplete or incorrect submission. B. Affix stamp and signature, and indicate results of his review as specified in paragraph 3.04. Review of submittals shall not constitute approval of any deviation from the requirements of these specifications and plans, unless those deviations are clearly noted on the submittal as specified in Paragraph 3.01. FTWH1101 01300-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SUBMITTALS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Prepare and submit a construction schedule that accomplishes the work, as described in Section 01010, within the allotted time and adheres to the overall schedule and project specific constraints listed herein. B. Owner shall provide a Notice to Proceed for the work. C. Complete the work in accordance with the schedule. D. Update the schedules as necessary to reflect changes in the work and actual site conditions. In no case shall the contract completion date be altered, unless specifically approved by the Owner. Schedules shall be updated and submitted at least once per month. The Owner may request updates more often if needed to coordinate "-' the work. E. Prepare and submit monthly progress reports. F. Coordinate the Work with activities of the Owner and other contractors. G. The Construction Schedule is a tool for the Contractor's and Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative's use in executing and monitoring the progress of the Work. Failure to include any items of Work in the schedule does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to complete the work as specified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. General Provisions. B. Section 01010—Summary of Work. C. Section 01300—Submittals. D. Section 01370— Schedule of Values. 1.03 SIGNIFICANCE OF CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING DOCUMENTS A. The percentage completion reported for each activity as listed in the monthly progress report and prices of those activities as stated in Section 01370 will be used in part to determine the amount of each monthly payment to the Contractor. B. The CPM network diagram, bar charts, and monthly progress reports will be primary references in evaluating claims for delay and requests for time extensions. C. No monthly progress payments will be made to the Contractor until all required scheduling reports and documents have been received and accepted by the Owner. FTWH1101 01310-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 (ii) South Holly High Service Pump Station offices: Temporary power requirements will be handled by the plant. f. Liquidated damages for the two weeks plant shutdown are based on the following: (i) Inability to pump out of South Holly HSPS, resulting in higher risk to Fort Worth Water District, (ii) Inability to utilize the South Holly WTP, resulting in higher risk to Fort Worth Water District, (iii) Inconvenience to staff located at South Holly HSPS building. g. Motor delivery: Motors shall be delivered on site prior to switchgear replacement and two weeks shutdown. 4. North Holly improvements: a. No power outage shall happen between 6:00 am and 6:00 pm, Monday through Friday. b. Electrical panelboards shall be replaced during week-ends. c. Circuits shall be replaced individually. Replacement of circuits shall be coordinated with owner's representative. C. The work must be completed in such a manner to allow the existing treatment plants to operate at their maximum capacity throughout the duration of the project, except as provided in this Section. The facilities on which the work is to be completed are operating facilities and are critical components of the Owner's water supply system. D. The following milestone dates and/or calendar days after the date of notice to proceed, shall be met for the work indicated below: 1. Substantial Completion...........................................................395 calendar days 2. Final Completion ...................................................................485 calendar days 3. South Holly Plant Two weeks shutdown 4. Liquidated damages for uncompleted work that is required to meet the milestones set out above shall be as follows: a. Item 1.04.D.1 ................... Refer to section C7-7.10 of the general conditions b. Item 1.04.D.2.................... Refer to section C7-7.10 of the general conditions c. Item 1.04.D.3..........................................................$5,000.00/calendar day PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE DOCUMENTATION A. Prepare and submit the following construction schedule within fifteen (15) days of the date of effective date of the agreement. B. Execute the Work in a manner consistent with the proposed schedule. Revise the schedule monthly as necessary to reflect the actual conduct of work. FfWH1101 01310-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 C. Contractor shall coordinate his work to prevent damages or delays to concurrent work completed by others under other construction contracts. D. Except as specified herein, the Owner shall have continuous use of all facilities without impediment or interference from the Contractor's operation. END OF SECTION FrWH1101 01310-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE MOTOR AND$WITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 01350 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide operation and maintenance data for the following items. It is intended that the Supplier shall submit the specified operation and maintenance data, if it is specified in the Technical Specifications and not listed in this section. 1. All process, HVAC, plumbing and electrical equipment. 2. Valves, cocks, gates and related accessories. 3. Instruments, control and SCADA devices and systems. 4. Pumps and pump drives. 5. Switchgear and MCC. 6. All Facilities or Equipment specified in other Specification Sections 1.02 RELATED WORK AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Section 01300: Submittals. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Operations and Maintenance Data: All product related information and documents which are required for preparation of the plant operation and maintenance manual. This information shall be supplied by the Manufacturer for initial use during testing and start-up. B. Preventive Maintenance Instructions: All information and instructions required by plant personnel to keep a product or piece of equipment properly lubricated, adjusted and otherwise maintained so that the item functions economically throughout its full design life. C. Corrective Maintenance: All information and instructions required by plant personnel to repair a product or piece of equipment in the field. 1.04 REQUIRED INFORMATION A. Prepare the data specifically for this installation. B. Include, as a minimum requirement, the following items for each piece of equipment listed in Paragraph 1.01.A of this section. 1. Tracing, photocopy or other suitable reproduction of the equipment nameplates. 2. Equipment performance curves, where applicable. (Copies of those submitted r under Section 01300). 3. Installation and start-up instructions. 4. Name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer. FfWH1101 01350-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 r SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 5. Name, address and telephone number of source of replacement parts and service nearest to the Project site. 6. Complete, detailed operating instructions, written in the English language for overall system and each subassembly. 7. Complete, detailed written preventive maintenance instructions as defined in Paragraph 1.03.B. of this section for each system and subassembly. 8. Recommended spare parts lists and life expectancy of each part. 9. Written explanations of all safety considerations relating to operation or maintenance procedures. 10. Parts lists showing parts and catalog numbers with exploded view showing interrelationship of parts. 11. A written explanation with illustrations as required for each preventive maintenance task. 12. Recommended schedule for execution of preventive maintenance tasks. 13. Lubrication and other consumables charts, including rate of consumption and M alternate lubricants. 14. Troubleshooting instructions and diagnostic procedures. 15. List of required maintenance tools and equipment. -- 1.05 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Adequate Operations and Maintenance Data shall be submitted for initial use in testing and start-up. B. Submit Operations and Maintenance Data to Owner within 60 days after review of y shop drawings, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled equipment installation date. C. Submit updated Operation and Maintenance Data to the Owner as it becomes available. D. Submit all revisions of manufacturer's literature and Operation and Maintenance Data to the Owner within 60 days after such revision is made. E. Submit number of copies of each item as specified in Section 01300. F. Major equipment items may be submitted in separate binders. Minor miscellaneous equipment shall be submitted together in a c ommon manual (i.e., Miscellaneous Mechanical Equipment, Miscellaneous Instruments, Miscellaneous HVAC). G. Attach a letter of transmittal (to be provided by Engineer) with each submittal and _ include the following in the letter: 1. Date of submittal. 2. Contract title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. A list of the attachments and the specification sections to which they relate. FfWH1101 01350-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 5. Reference to or explanation of any related submittals previously submitted or to be submitted at a future date. H. Submit electronic version of final Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Electronic manuals shall be provided on compact disc, in pdf format to be viewed by Adobe Acrobat Reader. - 2. Files shall be organized in a tree structure utilizing the"Bookmarks"tab within the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. The tree structure within the "Bookmarks" tab and the file naming convention shall be organized similar to the hard copy. The contents of the O&M Manual shall be accessible by navigating through the bookmarks. 3. Provide two copies of each compact disc. 4. Provide an adhesive label to each compact disc. The label shall contain the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Date of the submission of the electronic O&M Manual. c. Name of Manufacturer. d. Name of the equipment, followed by the phrase"O&M Manual". e. Specification section(s) relating to the equipment. 1.06 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data for inclusion in an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. �., B. Do not staple pages, drawings and illustrations. C. Format: 1. Size: 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch or 11 inch x 17 inch, folded. 2. Paper: Manufacturer's data printed, or neatly typewritten. 3. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b. Z-Fold 11-inch x 17-inch drawings to size of text pages. 4. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment. a. Provide typed description of product, tag number as shown in plans and specifications, and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide left-hand binding margin of 1.25 inches. D. Organization and Packaging: 1. Submit data in a 3-ring binder arranged in logical sequence, neatly boxed in cardboard boxes. 2. Provide a table of contents for each box. 3. Label exterior of each box with typewritten labels indicating the titles of contents. 4. Use dividers between major categories of information such as operating instructions, preventive maintenance instructions, etc. 5. Identify products by their functional names and tag number in the table of contents and at least once in each chapter or section. Thereafter, abbreviations FfWH1101 01350-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 and acronyms with the tag number may be used if their meaning is explained in a — table in the back of each box. Exclusive use of model or catalog numbers or letters for identification is not acceptable. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE. PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT APPLICABLE. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 01350-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall develop and submit to the Owner for approval a schedule of values for the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF VALUES *• A. Within fifteen (15) calendar days following the effective date of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, in triplicate, a tentative schedule of values (a breakdown of each lump sum bid), which shall be used to determine partial payment w- estimates and may be used to verify costs of credits, change orders, etc. 1. The tentative schedule of values will be reviewed by the Engineer to determine whether, in his judgement, the schedule of values is of sufficient detail and if the prices included are "unbalanced" or "front-end loaded", in an effort to inflate the price of those items of work to be completed in the early stages of the work. 2. The Engineer will provide the Contractor with his comments and/or may request additional information from the Contractor to justify certain item quantities and prices therefore. On the basis of the Engineer's comments, the Contractor shall revise and resubmit the tentative schedule for further review and/or approval. -- 3. Once the tentative schedule is accepted by the Project Manager, it shall become the schedule of values to be used in determining partial payment estimates. Six (6) copies of this schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for distribution and his use. 4. No partial payment request (including the first) shall be approved until the schedule of values has been approved by the Owner and the Engineer. B. Each partial payment request by the Contractor shall include the approved schedule of values, modified to indicate the total quantity and price of the work completed to the date of the request. After acceptance of the Schedule of Values Submittal, no modifications will be made to the schedule of values, except as required by approved change orders. C. In so far as possible, total quantities and unit prices shall be shown for all items of work, separating for each item the materials and labor and such other sub-items as the Contractor may desire. "Lump sum", "miscellaneous", and other such general entries in the schedule shall be avoided whenever possible. Such items as Bond premiums, insurance, temporary facilities and equipment storage may be listed separately in the schedule of values, provided the costs can be substantiated. .. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items. FTWH1101 01370-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 �^ SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SCHEDULE OF VALUES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 D. The sum of the items listed on the schedule of values shall equal the contract lump sum price. The value for mobilization costs list in the Schedule of Value shall not exceed 5% of the total contract price. No additional payment will be allowed if the quantities shown on the schedule are less than those actually required to accomplish r the work, unless the quantities are altered by a change order. 3.02 FORECASTS OF PAYMENTS r A. Within fifteen (15) days after the award of the Contract, prepare and submit to the Engineer and Owner a chart forecasting the monthly partial payment amounts that are anticipated for this project. During progress of the job, mark this chart to show actual w payments to date and revise the forecast of payments whenever the actual payment varies by more than 10 percent from the forecast. Submit the revised chart to the Engineer and Owner monthly. ` END OF SECTION FTWH1101 01370-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SCHEDULE OF VALUES -� MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS - Contract No.01632 SECTION 01430 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide operation and maintenance data for the equipment referenced in other sections of these specifications. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. C. Provide the following Operation & Maintenance Manuals: 1. All process, HVAC, plumbing and electrical equipment. F. 2. Instruments, control and SCADA devices and systems. 3. High service pump motors. 4. Switchgear, MCC and VFD. -- 5. All facilities or equipment specified in other specification sections. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: All product-related information and documents, which are required for preparation of the system Operation and Maintenance Manual, shall be supplied by the manufacturer for initial use during testing and startup. B. Operation and Maintenance (0&M) Manual: All information and documents specially developed by the Contractor for operation and maintenance of entire system based on the Operation and Maintenance Data supplied by the manufacturer. C. Preventive Maintenance Instructions: All information and instructions required by operating personnel to keep a product or piece of equipment properly lubricated, adjusted, and otherwise maintained so that the item functions economically throughout its full design life. The instructions shall include short and long-term maintenance procedures. D. Corrective Maintenance: All information and instructions required by operations personnel to repair a product or piece of equipment in the field. E. Short and Long-Term Storage Instructions: All information and instructions required to store the equipment on site for a short and long duration prior to installation. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 01300 — Submittals. B. Section 01640 — Manufacturer's Services. C. Section 01720 — Project Record Documents. FTWH1101 01430-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- OPERATION&MAINTENANCE DATA MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 ' D. Division 16—Equipment. ` 1.04 FORMAT OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. j B. Format: 1. Size: 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches or 11 inches x 17 inches, folded. 2. Paper: a. 40-pound minimum, white, for typed pages. b. Holes reinforced with plastic, cloth, or metal. 3. Text: Manufacturer's data printed or neatly typewritten. 4. Plans: — a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab bound in with text b. Fold 11 inches x 17 inches plans to size of text pages 5. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment: a. Typed description of product tag number as shown in plans and specifications and major component parts of equipment b. Left-hand binding margin of 1.25 inches c. Indexed tabs 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL". List: a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structure as applicable . c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the volume C. Organization and Packaging: _ 1. Submit data in a 3-ring binder arranged in logical sequence; neatly boxed in cardboard boxes. 2. Provide a table of contents for each box. — 3. Label exterior of each box with typewritten labels indicating the titles of contents. 4. Use dividers between major categories of information such as operating instructions, preventive maintenance instructions, etc. When necessary, place each major category in a separate box. 5. Identify products by their functional names and tag number in the table of contents and at least once in each chapter or section. Thereafter, abbreviations and acronyms with the tag number may be used if their meaning is explained in a table in the back of each box. Exclusive use of model or catalog numbers or letters for identification is not acceptable.D. Do not staple pages, plans, and illustrations. E. An electronic form of the approved O&M Manual shall be provided in PDF format viewable with Adobe Acrobat Reader. FFWH1101 01430-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- OPERATION&MAINTENANCE DATA — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of operation and maintenance data shall done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this section. 3. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required for communicating essential data. 4. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required plans. 1.06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Complete and detailed O&M Manual for overall system shall be provided in English and Spanish. The literature and manuals with Operation and Maintenance Data for each a, subassembly shall be written in either English or Spanish. B. All dimensions and units shall be in accordance with the following table. Linear measures Feet Flow rate U.S. Gallons per minute (gpm) or million gallons per day (mgd) Total dynamic head (TDH) Feet Hydraulic surface elevation and Feet headloss Power Horsepower Weight Pounds Volumes U.S. Gallons Bolt Sizes Inches or fractions thereof Stresses Pounds per square inch Forces Pounds, kips C. Include, as a minimum requirement, the following items: 1. Tracing, photocopy, or other suitable reproduction of the equipment nameplates. 2. Equipment performance curves where applicable. 3. Pre-installation, short and long-term storage and handling, installation, and start- up instructions. 4. Name, address, and telephone number of the manufacturer. F 5. Name, address, and telephone number of source of replacement parts and service nearest to the project site. .r FTWH1101 01430-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- OPERATION&MAINTENANCE DATA MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 6. Complete detailed written preventive short and long-term maintenance instructions as defined in paragraph 1.02.6. of this section for each system and subassembly. 7, Recommended spare parts lists for one year of operation and life expectancy of each part. 8. Written explanations of all safety considerations relating to operation or maintenance procedures. ` 9. Parts lists showing parts and catalog numbers with exploded view showing interrelationship of parts. 10. A written explanation with illustrations as required for each preventive maintenance task. 11. Recommended schedule for execution of preventive maintenance tasks. 12. Lubrication and other consumables charts, including rate of consumption and R alternate lubricants. 13. Troubleshooting instructions and diagnostic procedures. _. 14. List of required maintenance tools and equipment. 1.07 CONTENT OF MANUAL ! A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, telephone number, and e-mail address (if available). 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. 3. List with each product, name, address, telephone number, and e-mail address (if available) of: a. Subcontractor or installer. b. Identify area of responsibility. c. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product-by-product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation c. Delete reference to inapplicable information C. Plans: 1. Supplement product data with plans as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems b. Control and flow diagrams 2. Coordinate plans with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Project Record Plans as maintenance plans. FrWH1101 01430-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- OPERATION&MAINTENANCE DATA MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organization in consistent format under separate headings for different installation. 2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure. E. Copy each warranty, bond, and service contract issued. Provide information sheet for - Owner's personnel giving the following: 1. Proper procedure in event of failure 2. Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds 1.08 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Content for architectural products, applied materials, and finishes shall include: 1. Manufacturer's data giving full product information. a. Catalog number, size, composition w- b. Color and texture designations c. Information required for reordering specially manufactured products 2. Instructions for care and maintenance. a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to product c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance B. Content for moisture protection and weather exposure products shall include: ' 1. Manufacturer's data giving full product information. a. Applicable standards .r b. Chemical composition c. Details of installation 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. C. Refer to respective specifications sections for additional requirements for maintenance data. 1.09 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Content for each unit of equipment and system shall include: f 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts 2. Operating procedures. a. Startup, break-in, routing, and normal operating instructions b. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions c. Summer and winter operating instructions d. Special operating instructions FrWH1101 01430-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 r SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- OPERATION&MAINTENANCE DATA MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 y 3. Maintenance procedures. a. Routine operations b. Guide to troubleshooting _ c. Disassembly, repair, and re-assembly d. Alignment, adjustment, and checking 4. Servicing and lubrication schedule. _ a. List of lubricants required 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer - 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly plans, and diagrams required for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear ` b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts 8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each contractor's coordination plans. + a. As-installed color-coded piping diagrams 10. Charts of valve tag numbers with location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications.B. Content for each electric and electronic system as appropriate shall include: 1. Description of system and component parts. w a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts 2. Circuit directories of panelboards. a. Electrical service b. Controls c. Communications 3. As-installed color-coded wiring diagrams. T 4. Operating procedures. a. Routine and normal operating instructions b. Sequences required c. Special operating instructions 5. Maintenance procedures. a. Routine operations - b. Guide to troubleshooting c. Disassembly, repair, and re-assembly d. Adjustment and checking 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. FfWH1101 01430-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- OPERATION&MAINTENANCE DATA MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications. C. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. D. Refer to respective sections of the specifications for additional requirements for operating and maintenance data. 1.10 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Adequate Operations and Maintenance Data shall be submitted for initial use in testing and startup. B. Submit draft O&M Manual to the Owner no later than 50% of physical completion. C. Submit final O&M Manual to the Owner no later than 90% of physical completion or two (2) months before the substantial completion, whichever is earlier. D. Submit updated Operation and Maintenance Data to the Owner as it becomes available. E. Submit documents in accordance with Section 01300. F. Attach a I etter of transmittal with each submittal and include the following in the letter: 1. Date of submittal 2. Contract title and number 3. Supplier's name and address 4. List of attachments and specification sections to which they relate 5. Reference to or explanation of any related submittals previously submitted or to be submitted at a future date G. The Owner may withhold an additional ten (10) percent of progress payments until satisfactory operation and maintenance data has been submitted. 1.11 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. O&M Manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. The O&M Manual shall be approved prior to conducting training. Review contents of O&M Manual with Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operating and maintenance considerations. FfWH1101 01430-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- OPERATION&MAINTENANCE DATA MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION FTWH1101 01430-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- OPERATION&MAINTENANCE DATA -- MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The facilities and controls specified in this section are considered minimum for the project. The Contractor shall provide additional facilities and controls, which he considers necessary for the proper execution of the work and to meet his responsibilities for protection of persons, property, and the environment. B. The Contractor shall furnish facilities and equipment that will be efficient, appropriate, and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of progress that will ensure the completion of the work within the contract time stipulated in the Contract Documents. If at any time such facilities appears to the Owner's Representative to be inefficient, inappropriate, or insufficient for securing the quality of work required or for producing the rate of progress specified, he may order the Contractor to increase the efficiency, change the character, or increase the facilities and equipment at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall conform to such order. Failure of the Owner's Representative to give such order shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligations to secure the quality of work and rate of progress required. C. The Contractor shall limit his operations to the designated storage area and work areas. The Contractor shall not use any of the Owner's facilities nor the facilities of other Contractors. Use of any area other than the designated storage and work areas shall be by prior written approval of the Owner's Representative. Use of any staging or storage areas is subject to weather impact. The Contractor, at his option, may elect to provide certain improvements to counter effects of the weather. Regardless, the Contractor shall be responsible for restoring areas used by his forces for staging and storage, to their pre-construction condition or better. 1.02 SUBMITTALS AND APPROVALS A. Submit plan of temporary facilities noting location of all temporary facilities including storage areas and areas where hazardous or dangerous materials or waste will be stored. B. Obtain any necessary permits and or approvals necessary for the storage of fuels, lubricants, paints or other hazardous or dangerous materials or waste. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PERMITS A. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all regulatory permits required for the temporary facilities, if needed. FTWH1101 01500-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONSTRUCTION TEMPORARY MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Contract No.01632 3.02 BUILDINGS A. Contractor's Field Office 1. The Contractor may provide, at his own discretion, a temporary field office for his - use at the project site on an approved location. 2. The building shall be weatherproof with a I ockable door with adequate illumination. - 3.03 UTILITIES A. Sanitary facilities: - 1. Water and sewer are not available in the general vicinity of the plant for contractor's use 2. Shall contractor elect to install temporary field office facilities a chemical toilet 4 shall be provided 3, Chemical toilets, if used, shall be of watertight construction. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one toilet per 10 employees. Chemical toilets shall be maintained by the Contractor until the completion of construction or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Upon completion of the work, all sanitary _ facilities shall be removed and the areas restored to its original condition. B. Air, Steam, and Water for Construction: 1. The Contractor shall arrange for all necessary temporary air, steam, and water - services including securing of any necessary permits and the temporary piping and appurtenances required therefore, as may be required for the cleaning and testing of pipelines and equipment necessary for his work. 2. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements to supply water required for testing of the pipelines and equipment necessary for his work prior to acceptance of the work. 3. Cost of water usage and permit shall be borne by the Contractor. C. Light and Power for Construction: -• 1. The Contractor shall determine the type and amount required, and make arrangements for providing temporary electric power with sufficient power capacity to meet the reasonable need of the Contractor and all subcontractors. 2. The Contractor shall maintain the temporary electric power system during the Contract period at his expense. Electrical power for the Contractor's construction trailers and associated equipment shall also be supplied and paid for by the - Contractor, if applicable. 3. Temporary power installation shall meet the construction safety requirements of National Electrical Code, Federal (OSHA), City of Fort Worth, and other governing agencies. 4. Electrical service shall be of adequate capacity for all lights, construction tools, and equipment without overloading the temporary facilities. The temporary systems and their components shall be furnished and installed in conformance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code and all local authorities having jurisdiction. - FTWH1101 01500-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONSTRUCTION TEMPORARY MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Contract No.01632 • 3.04 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. The Contractor shall provide portable UL-rated, Class ABC dry chemical fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide portable UL-rated, Class ABC dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of NFPA recommended Classes for exposure. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure. 3.05 SITE MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall limit his operations and storage of equipment and materials to the areas designated and as directed by the Owner's Representative. • B. Except as provided herein, no sidewalk, private property, or other area adjacent to the plant site shall be used for storage of the Contractor's equipment and materials unless prior written approval is obtained from the legal owner. C. The Contractor shall maintain the area during construction in a manner that will not obstruct operations of existing facilities. The Contractor shall proceed with his work in an orderly manner, maintaining the construction site free of debris and unnecessary equipment or materials. D. At all times, maintain areas covered by the Contract and Owner's properties free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by construction operations. Follow cleaning procedures outlined in Section 01710. E. Provide approved containers if needed for collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. F. Excavated materials shall be removed from the site in a manner that will cause the least damage to adjacent lawns, grassed areas, trees, gardens, shrubbery, or fences regardless of whether these are on Owner's or other private property or on public rights-of-way. 3.06 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Furnish, install, and maintain required construction aids: 1. Provide construction aids required by personnel and to facilitate the execution of the work: scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, and other such facilities and equipment. 2. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms, and railings for use by construction personnel. 3.07 SECURITY AND TEMPORARY PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain suitable barriers and protections to protect the work, existing facilities, and existing roads from construction operations. Damage to existing roads caused by the Contractor's vehicles shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. Damage to existing roads that is considered a FTWH1101 01500-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONSTRUCTION TEMPORARY MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Contract No.01632 safety issue by the Owner shall be repaired immediately by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. B. The Contractor will take all necessary measures and be solely responsible for the - protection of temporary facilities, finished construction areas, equipment, and materials at the site until the project has been completed and accepted by the Owner. The Contractor shall repair and restore any and all damage to finished work to its original or better state at no cost to the Owner. 3.08 SAFETY AND CONSTRUCTION SIGNS INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install safety and hazardous warning signs, such as "CAUTION/WATCH STEP", "DANGER/HIGH VOLTAGE", "DANGER/HAZARDOUS CHEMICAL", "NO SMOKING", etc., to meet the construction safety requirements of Federal (OSHA), City of Fort Worth, and other governing agencies. B. The Contractor shall install information signs with NFPA hazard rating data for all _ hazardous materials to provide fire fighters adequate information in case a fire hazard occurs on the construction site. 3.09 ACCESS AND PARKING AREAS a A. Access to the project sites for construction personnel, materials, and equipment can be through the North or South entrance of the plant. Si gns shall be installed, if needed to divert all traffic to that gate, including signs inside the plant site. Location of job sign will be as directed by the Owner's Representative. B. Contractor and subcontractor parking areas shall be as directed by the Owner. C. The Contractor shall control vehicular traffic and parking to preclude interference _ access by emergency vehicles or operations of existing facilities. D. The Contractor shall limit the number of vehicles on site to minimum required for the work in progress. E. Traffic control and protective devices used shall conform to the Manual on Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways. Barricades, warning signs, flares, flashing - devices, and flag persons shall be provided by the Contractor. 3.10 FIRST AID FACILITIES A. Maintain at a well-known location at the job site all articles for giving first aid to the injured. Make standing arrangements for the immediate removal of persons, including employees, who may be injured on the job site to a hospital or a doctor's care. In no case shall employees be permitted to work at a job site before the employer has made standing arrangements for removal of injured persons to a hospital or a doctor's care. FTWH1101 01500-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONSTRUCTION TEMPORARY -- MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Contract No.01632 3.11 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. Prior to final inspection, remove all temporary buildings, sanitary conveniences, signs, and other items. Remove, as required, all temporary roads and parking areas. Clean up all construction areas at the site. B. In unfinished areas, the site shall be left in a condition that will restore original drainage, evenly graded, seeded, or planted as necessary, and left with an appearance equal to, or better than original. END OF SECTION R ,F- FTWH1101 01500-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONSTRUCTION TEMPORARY MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Contract No.01632 SECTION 01600 GENERAL MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. All material and equipment furnished and installed under this Contract shall conform to the general stipulations set forth in this section, except as otherwise specified in other sections. B. Provide material and equipment as specified conforming to the following: 1. New and in current production, conforming to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified unless specifically authorized .. in writing by the Engineer. 3. Manufactured and fabricated products. a. Design, fabricate, and assemble in accordance with good engineering and shop practices. b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be interchangeable. c. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. d. Equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. C. Material and equipment installed in chemical storage or use areas shall be designed to operate under the corrosive service conditions that exist in that area. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01300—Submittals. B. Section 01640— Manufacturer's Services. C. Section 01650 — Testing, Adjusting, Balancing, Demonstration, and Startup of Systems. 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S EXPERIENCE A. Unless specifically named in the specifications, a manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified, which has been in successful operation for not less than the past five (5) years. FrWH1101 01600-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GENERAL MATERIAL AND MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTRACTOR'S SELECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Coordinate all details of the equipment with other related parts of the work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are - compatible. B. For products specified only by reference standard, select a product meeting that standard. C. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of _. the products or manufacturers named, which complies with the specifications. D. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers, "or approved equal", "'or approved equivalent", the Contractor must submit a request for substitution for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. E. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option. 3.02 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all structural and other alterations in the Work required to accommodate equipment differing in parameters, dimensions, or other characteristics from that contemplated in the contract documents. B. For a period of thirty (30) days after contract date, the Engineer will consider written requests from the Contractor for substitution of products or manufacturers. C. The Contractor shall submit a separate request for each product or manufacturer, supported with complete data, with plans and samples as appropriate, including: 1. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that specified. 2. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the substitution. 3. Effect on the construction schedule. 4. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product specified. 5. Listing of any required license fees or royalties. 6. Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement materials. D. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of the proposed substitution. E. In submitting a request for a substitution, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Engineer that he: 1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equivalent to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. Will provide the same or superior warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified. FfWH1101 01600-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GENERAL MATERIAL AND MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS Contract No.01632 3. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the work, and make all other changes as may be required to make the work complete in all respects. 4. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which may subsequently become apparent. F. The Engineer will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and notify Contractor, in writing, of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of any proposed substitution. The Engineer may request additional fees for reviewing substitutions and such fes will be deducted from the Contract Price. If additional fees are requested by the Engineer, the Engineer will provide the cost to the Owner prior to reviewing the information. G. Structural, mechanical, and electrical changes that are necessitated because the Contractor selects equipment with dimensional, power, or mechanical differences from that shown on the plans shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. A II engineering costs associated with revisions shall be borne by the Contractor. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. B. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. C. Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in equipment shall conform to AISC standards. All structural members shall be designed for shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel, which will be submerged all or in part during normal operation of the equipment, shall be at least 1/4-inch thick. D. Manufacturer shall supply to the Owner a Certificate of Compliance on equipment furnished that it meets the specification requirements. 3.04 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each item of equipment. Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting plans, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is place. Anchor bolts shall comply with the anchor bolts and expansion anchors section, and, unless otherwise specified, shall be at least 3/4-inch in diameter. FTWH1101 01600-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GENERAL MATERIAL AND MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS Contract No.01632 B. Unless other indicated or specified, anchor bolts for items of equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit 1-1/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete. 3.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES A. Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those devices. 3.06 SHOP PAINTING A. All steel and iron surfaces shall be protected by suitable coatings applied in the shop. LL Surfaces, which will be inaccessible after assembly, shall be protected for the life of the equipment. Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed. Exposed surfaces shall be finished, thoroughly cleaned and filled, as necessary, to provide a smooth, uniform base for painting. Electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other self-contained or enclosed components shall be shop- primed or finished with an oil-resistant enamel or universal-type primer suitable for - top coating in the field with a universal primer and aliphatic polyurethane system. B. Surfaces to be coated after installation shall be prepared for painting as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended service, and then shop-painted with one or more coats of the specified primer. Unless other specified, the shop primer for steel and iron surfaces shall be Ameron "Amercoat 385 Epoxy", Carboline ''Carboguard 888 Primer", or Tnemec"'Series N27 S.T. Typoxy". C. Machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces, which are not to be painted, shall be coated with rust-preventive compound, Houghton"Rust Veto 344". ! 3.07 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT BY MANUFACTURERS A. All equipment shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and to protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements and shall be kept dry at all time. B. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Painted surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer's or Owner's Representative. C. Grease and lubricating oil shall be applied to all bearings and similar items when preparing the shipment. D. Each item of equipment shall be tagged or marked as identified in the delivery schedule or on the Shop Drawings. Complete packing lists and bills of material shall be included with each shipment. FIWH1101 01600-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GENERAL MATERIAL AND MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS Contract No.01632 3.08 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules; coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. B. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that the products are properly protected and in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 3.09 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Upon delivery, all materials and equipment shall immediately be stored and protected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations until installed in the Work. B. Indoors: 1. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 2. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures. 3. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions for all materials and equipment. In general, pumps, motors, electrical equipment, and all equipment with antifriction or sleeve bearings shall be stored in weathertight structures maintained at a temperature above 600F. Equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected against moisture and water damage. C. Outdoors: 1. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids; prevent soiling or staining. Cover products, which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, shall provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 2. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 3. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. D. Materials and equipment shall not show any pitting, rust, decay, or other deleterious effects of storage when installed in the work. E. Contractor may store materials and equipment in bonded warehouse off-site subject to Owner's approval. 3.10 COMPLIANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION AND OPERATION A. All equipment shall not be installed or operated except by, or with the guidance of, qualified personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary to obtain proper FfWH1101 01600-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GENERAL MATERIAL AND MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS Contract No.01632 results. When so specified, or when employees of the Contractor or subcontractors - are not qualified, such personnel shall be field representatives of the manufacturer of the equipment or materials being installed. Qualified field representatives shall be provided by each equipment manufacturer as specified in Section 01640. B. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to _ parties involved in the installation, including two (2) c opies to the Engineer's or Owner's Representative. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion. _ C. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. D. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instruction, consult with the manufacturer for further instructions. E. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. - F. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically authorized in writing by the manufacturer. G. Manufacturer shall supply to the Owner a Certificate of Proper Installation that it has ` been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. H. All equipment installed under this Contract shall be placed into successful operation after proper testing, adjusting, balancing, demonstration, and startup as specified in Section 01650. 3.11 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION A. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 01600-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GENERAL MATERIAL AND -- MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS Contract No.01632 SECTION 01640 MANUFACTURERS'SERVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Person-Day: One person for one (1) days consisting of eight (8) hours at the project site. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES FOR MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES AND FIELD TESTING 4 A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for the services of manufacturer's representatives to perform the specified services and all costs associated with field testing of equipment. B. The Contractor shall schedule manufacturer's field services and all field testing to avoid conflicting with other field testing or other manufacturer's field services. C. The Contractor's responsibilities for field testing shall include: 1. Provide all required materials, labor, equipment, and power required for testing. 2. Perform all tests in presence of the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative. 3. Prepare and submit to Engineer five (5) copies of written reports detailing the results of the tests and identifying corrective action for materials and equipment that fail to pass field tests. 4. Repair all materials and equipment that fail during testing with no additional compensation. D. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders, or approvals of public authorities: conditions of Contract. 2. Certification of products as specified in respective specification sections. 3. Test, adjust, and balance equipment as specified in respective specification sections. 4. Field tests required and standards for testing as specified in respective 0 specification sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Trip Reports: Submit a written trip report within one (1) week of each site visit stating purpose for Visit, observation, and recommendations. B. Quality Control Submittals: Complete and submit seven (7) copies of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation to the Engineer, through the Contractor. One form is appended at end of this section. FTWH1101 01640-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MANUFACTURERS'SERVICES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 C. Training Schedule: Submit not less than thirty (30) calendar days prior to substantial completion and revise as necessary for acceptance. D. Preliminary Training Plan: Submit thirty (30) days prior to Project Completion. 4 E. Final Training Plan: Submit after training coordination meeting. F. Training Materials: 1. Submit written outlines of proposed training sessions not less than ninety (90) calendar days prior to substantial completion. 2. Furnish complete training materials, to include operation and maintenance data as required in this section to be retained by each trainee. 1.04 QUALIFICATION OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Authorized representative of the manufacturer, factory trained, experienced in the technical applications, installation, operation, and maintenance of respective equipment, subsystem, or system, and capable of providing a quality training program for the Owner's staff. Representative subject to acceptance by Owner and Engineer. No substitute representatives will be allowed unless prior written approval by Engineer has been given. 1.05 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR FIELD SERVICES PROVIDED BY MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Where manufacturers' field services are specified, furnish manufacturer's qualified representative. B. Schedule manufacturer's field services. Avoid conflicting with other field testing or other manufacturer's field services. Determine that all conditions necessary to allow successful testing have been met before scheduling services. C. Manufacturer's field services shall include as a minimum: } 1. Inspecting existing site facilities prior to starting work and factoring in all constraints in equipment design and configuration. 2. Inspection, checking, and adjustment as required for equipment to function as - warranted by manufacturer and necessary to furnish written approval of installation. 3. Performing periodic visits to site during construction to assure installation — tolerance and methods meet manufacturer and industry standards. 4. Revisiting the site as required to correct problems and until equipment installation and operation are acceptable to the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative. r 5. Resolution of assembly or installation problems attributable to, or associated with, respective manufacturer's products and systems. 6. Assistance during functional and performance testing and start-up demonstration, and until product acceptance by the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative. 7. Training of Operator's personnel in the operation and maintenance of respective product as required herein. - FTWH1101 01640-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MANUFACTURERS'SERVICES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 8. Completion of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation (form enclosed at end of this section) with applicable certificates for proper installation and initial, interim, and final test or service. D. Instruct Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment in accordance with Section 01430, and other requirements as specified in respective specification sections. 1.06 TRAINING SCHEDULE A. List specified equipment and systems with respective manufacturers that require training services and include: 1. Estimated dates for installation completion. 2. Estimated training dates to allow for multiple sessions at the project sites. B. Adjust training schedule to ensure training of appropriate personnel as deemed necessary by operator, and to allow full participation by manufacturers' representatives. Adjust schedule for interruptions in operability of equipment. C. Coordinate facility startup and follow-up training with the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative as specified in other specification sections. 1.07 TRAINING PLAN A. Preliminary Training Plan: Submit for each project site: 1. Title and objectives. 2. Training schedule. 3. Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. 4. Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, engineers, operators, maintenance). 5. Course description and outline of course content. 6. Duration. 7. Location (e.g., training center or site). 8. Format(e.g., lecture, self-study, demonstration, hands-on). 9. Instruction materials and equipment requirements. B. Final Training Plan: Submit the following after training coordination meeting. 1. Updated versions of course descriptions from preliminary training plan. 2. Who will attend each course. 3. Schedule of training courses including dates, durations, and locations of each class. 4. Detailed course schedule for each day showing time allocated to each topic. 5. Resumes of instructors providing the training. 1.08 TRAINING OPERATOR'S PERSONNEL A. Furnish trained, articulate English-speaking personnel to coordinate and expedite training, to be present during training coordination meetings with Engineer, and FTWH1101 01640-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MANUFACTURERS'SERVICES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 familiar with operation and maintenance manual information as specified in Section 01430. B. Furnish manufacturers' representatives for detailed classroom and onsite hands-on training to Operator's personnel on operation and maintenance of specified product (system, subsystem, component) and as may be required in applicable specifications. Manufacturer's Representative should be familiar with facility operation and maintenance requirements as well as with specified equipment. C. If equipment is installed at multiple facilities, Manufacturer's Representative shall provide applicable training at each facility. D. Pre-Startup Training: 1. Coordinate training sessions with Operator's personnel and manufacturers' representatives, and with submission of operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements as specified in Section 01430. 2. Complete at least 14 days prior to actual startup. E. Post-Startup Training: As required in specifications furnish and coordinate training of Operator's personnel by respective manufacturer's representatives. - 1.09 SUPPLEMENTS A. The form, Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, following "END OF SECTION", is part of this specification. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION FTWH1101 01640-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MANUFACTURERS'SERVICES " MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION COMPANY: EQPT SERIAL NO.: EQPT TAG NO.: EQPT/SYSTEM: PROJECT NO.: SPEC. SECTION I hereby certify that the above-referenced equipment/system has been: (Check applicable) ❑ Installed in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. ❑ Inspected, checked, and adjusted. ❑ Serviced with proper initial lubricants. ❑ Electrical and mechanical connections meet quality and safety standards. ❑ All applicable safety equipment has been properly installed. ❑ System has been performance tested, and meets or exceeds specified performance requirements, (when complete system of one manufacturer). Comments: I, the undersigned Manufacturer's Representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, (ii) empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate his equipment, and (iii) authorized to make recommendations required to assure that the equipment furnished by the manufacturer is complete and operational, except as may be otherwise indicated herein. I further certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate. Date: , 20 Manufacturer: By Manufacturer's Authorized Representative: (Authorized Signature) FTWH1101 01640-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WfP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MANUFACTURERS'SERVICES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 01650 TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING, DEMONSTRATION, AND STARTUP OF SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide all materials, equipment, and personnel required to test, adjust, balance, and start the various mechanical systems installed as a part of the work. B. Provide procedures for demonstration of equipment operation and instruction of Owner's personnel. C. Provide procedures for starting of mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, security and alert systems. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01640 — Manufacturers'Services. B. Respective Sections: Specific requirements for testing, adjusting, balancing, demonstration, and startup of systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. No later than thirty (30) days prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing of the first system, submit to the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative a complete schedule indicating when and by when testing, adjusting, and balancing will be complete. �y B. Submit to the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative a final schedule of testing, adjusting and balancing listing times and dates for each system two (2) weeks prior to proposed dates. C. Submit preliminary schedule to the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative listing times and dates for demonstration of each item of equipment and each system one (1) month prior to proposed dates. D. No later than thirty (30) days prior to the startup of system, submit to Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative a complete startup schedule listing times and dates for start-up of each item of equipment. E. Prior to start of testing, adjusting, and balancing work, submit to Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative the name of organization proposed to perform services. Designate Contractor's managerial responsibilities for coordination of entire testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Submit to the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative documentation to confirm �+ organization qualifications for testing, adjusting, balancing and startup work. FTWH1101 01650-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- TESTING,ADJUSTING,BALANCING, MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS DEMONSTRATION,AND STARTUP OF SYSTEM Contract No.01632 G. Submit to the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative three (3) p reliminary " specimen copies of each of the report forms proposed for use. H. Fifteen (15) d ays prior to either the Owner's Beneficial Use of the System or - Substantial Completion, submit to Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative three (3) copies of final testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. 1. The Contractor shall prepare the overall report. 2. Each form shall bear the signature of recorder and that of supervisor of reporting organization. 3. Identify each instrument used and latest date of calibration of each. - 4. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services. I. Submit to the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative reports of testing, adjusting, and balancing which is postponed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other reasons beyond Contractor's control, promptly after execution of those services. J. Submit to the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative a minimum of five (5) copies of startup reports from the manufacturer's representative within one (1) week after startup, listing satisfactory startup dates. K. Submit to the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative reports within one week after completion of demonstrations, that demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed. Give time and date of each demonstration, and hours devoted to demonstration, with a list of persons present. 1.04 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Prepare each system for testing, adjusting, balancing, startup, and demonstration. B. Cooperate with testing organization or manufacturer's representative to provide access to equipment and systems. Operate systems at designated times and under conditions required for proper testing, adjusting, balancing, demonstration, and startup. C. Notify testing organization and the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative seven (7) days prior to time system will be ready for testing, adjusting, and balancing. - D. Prepare overall reports. 1.05 TESTING ORGANIZATION'S RESPONSIBILITIES y A. Comply with procedural standards for certifying association under whose standards service will be performed. B. Notify Owner's Representative in writing seven (7) days prior to beginning of operations.C. Accurately record data for each step during performance of services. FTWH1101 01650-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- TESTING,ADJUSTING,BALANCING, MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS DEMONSTRATION,AND STARTUP OF SYSTEM Contract No.01632 D. Prepare the final testing, adjusting, and balancing reports for inclusion in Contractor's overall report. 1.06 MANUFACTURERS' RESPONSIBILITIES A. Each manufacturer shall provide field services and authorized manufacturer's representative as specified in Section 01640. B. Manufacturer's representative shall demonstrate operation of equipment and systems, instruct Owner's personnel, and provide written report that demonstrations and instructions have been completed. C. Manufacturer's representative shall be present at site to inspect, verify, and approve equipment installation prior to startup. D. Manufacturer's representative shall supervise placing equipment in operation during startup. E. A written report shall be provided that equipment has been properly stored, installed, and lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting lines or anchor bolts, and has been satisfactorily operated under full-load conditions. • 1.07 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Owner will coordinate attendance of Owner's personnel at agreed-upon times for testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems, as needed. B. Owner will coordinate attendance of Owner's personnel at agreed-upon times for startup and demonstration. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Preparation: 1. Verify installation of system to be tested is complete and in continuous operation. 2. Verify ambient conditions and related facilities are in full operation. B. Procedure: 1. Operate each system through the design performance range. Adjust, balance, calibrate, and in general, check out the equipment, safety devices, controls, and process system within the design conditions. 2. If required by the specifications, the Owner's Representative shall provide a supply of chemicals sufficient for two (2) we eks [ten (10) wo rking days] of testing. Should testing exceed this time, the Owner's Representative may, at his discretion, charge the Contractor for the excess chemicals, such amount to be permanently deducted from the Contract Price. FTWH1101 01650-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- TESTING,ADJUSTING,BALANCING, MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS DEMONSTRATION,AND STARTUP OF SYSTEM Contract No.01632 3. A condition of acceptance of the requirements of this section shall be the satisfactory operation of the constructed facilities using all specified systems in combination with each other, for a period of thirty (30) days, unless otherwise specified. Any interruption caused by the malfunction of any constructed item or system shall cause the 30-day clock to be set to zero and the test restarted. The time need not be continuous, based on malfunctions of associated existing facilities. 4. Submit final reports. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION A. Preparation: 1, Verify equipment has been inspected and certified by the manufacturer and put into operation in accordance with Section 01640. 2. Verify equipment and systems are fully operational. 3. Have copies of completed operation and maintenance manuals at hand for use in demonstrations and instructions. 4. Submit schedule of systems demonstrations. B. Procedures: T 1. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of equipment and systems of Owner's personnel a minimum of two (2) weeks prior to date of final inspection. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons within six (6) months. 2. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 3. Demonstrate startup, operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, _ maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at designated location(s). 4. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and _ system is that specified in equipment schedule or in individual sections. 5. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data become apparent during instructions. 6. Submit system demonstration reports. 3.03 STARTUP A. Inspection by Manufacturer's Representative: 1. Verify that equipment installation complies with manufacturer's and Contract requirements. 2. Verify that status of work meets requirements for starting of equipment and systems. 3. Prepare a field inspection report as specified in paragraph 1.04 and Certification of Proper Installation (CPI) as specified in Section 01640. B. Preparation: FTWH1101 01650-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- TESTING,ADJUSTING,BALANCING, MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS DEMONSTRATION,AND STARTUP OF SYSTEM Contract No.01632 1. Coordinate sequence for startup of various items of equipment and systems. 2. Provide confirmation notice to Owner's Representative seven (7) d ays prior to startup of each item of equipment. 3. Have Contract Documents, shop drawings, product data, and operation and maintenance data at hand during entire startup process. 4. Verify that each piece of equipment has been checked for proper operation, installation and field conditions, which may cause damage. S. Verify control systems are fully operational. 6. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specific electrical characteristics agree with those specified by electrical equipment manufacturer. 7. Verify wiring to motors and controls required by mechanical work for operational smoke and fire protection demonstrations is complete. 8. Bearings: In spect for cleanliness; clean and remove foreign matter. V erify alignment; take corrective measures. 9. Drives: Inspect for tension on belt drives, adjustment of varipitch sheaves and drives, alignment, proper equipment speed, and cleanliness. Take corrective action. 10. Motors: Verify that motor amperage agrees with nameplate value. Inspect for conditions, which produce excessive current flow and which exist due to equipment malfunction. Take corrective action. 11. Alert Systems: Verify that sound levels have been checked and adjusted, supervisory control of components is functioning, and signal strengths are within manufacturer's recommended ranges. C. Procedure 1. The Contractor will execute startup under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative. 2. The Contractor will place equipment in operation in proper sequence as per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Submit system startup report. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 01650-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- TESTING,ADJUSTING,BALANCING, MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS DEMONSTRATION,AND STARTUP OF SYSTEM Contract No.01632 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall comply with related requirements in other parts of the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, fiscal provisions, legal submittals, and additional administrative requirements. B. Closeout submittals required for trades shall comply with the respective sections of the specifications. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01010 — Summary of Work. B. Section 01430 —Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Section 01710 —Cleaning. D. Section 01720 — Project Record Documents. E. Section 01740—Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When Contractor considers the work to be substantially complete, he shall submit written certification to the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. The Contractor has inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. The Contractor has developed a punch list of which no item shall have more than a 30-day completion time. 4. Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 5. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Contractor and Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative and are operational. 6. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. B. Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative will conduct site observations with the Contractor to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. C. Should the Work be designated as incomplete or defective: FTWH1101 01700-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 R 1. Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. 2. The Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and send a second written certification, as specified in paragraph A, to Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative that the work is complete. 3. Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative and Contractor will reinspect the work. D. When the work is designated as acceptable under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be requested to make closeout submittals. E. If more than one substantial completion and one closeout site visit is required, associated additional Engineer's Representative fees will be deducted from the contract price. r 3.02 SUPPLIER'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents. As required in Section 01720. B. Operation and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative. As required in Section 01430, and/or specified in respective sections of specifications. C. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. A s specified in respective sections of specifications. D. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens. Submit the following in such form as approved by Owner prior to release of final payment. 1. Contractor's affidavit of payment of debts and claims. 2� Contractor's affidavit of release of liens, with: a. Consent of surety to final payment. b. Separate releases or waivers of liens for subcontractors. 3. All submittals shall be duly executed before delivery to the Owner. E. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. F. Equipment Warranties and Bonds. As required Section 01740. G. Certification from all manufacturers of proper equipment installation. H. Submittals required by federal, state, and local regulatory agencies. 3.03 ACCESSORY ITEMS A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative, prior to the acceptance of the equipment, all special accessories required to place each item of equipment in full operation. These special accessory items include the specified spare ` parts, special maintenance tools, adequate oil, and grease as required for the first lubrication of the equipment. FTWH1101 01700-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT - MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.04 FINAL PAYMENT REQUEST A. Submit a final payment request to Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative. B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to Contract Price: 1. Original Contract Price 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous change orders b. Deductions for uncorrected work c. Deductions for liquidated damages d. Reductions for additional Engineering charges 3. Total Contract Price, as adjusted 4. Previous payments 5. Sum remaining due C. Owner's and/or Engineer's Representative will prepare any final change orders reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Price, which were not made by previous change orders. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 01700-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Supplier's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate 6. Signature of Contractor. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 01720-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY A. Provide duplicate, notarized copies of all warranties. Execute Contractor's documents and assemble documents executed by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. Provide table of contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover. B. Submit material prior to final application for payment. For equipment put into use with Owner's permission during construction, submit within 10 days after beneficial use operation. For items of work delayed materially beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after final acceptance, listing date of final acceptance as start of warranty period. C. Maintain and keep in good repair the improvements covered by these plans and specifications during the life of the Contract. D. Indemnify the Owner against any repairs, which may become necessary to any part of the work performed and to items of equipment and systems procured or furnished under this Contract, arising from defective workmanship or materials used therein, for a period of two (2) years after date of final payment by the Owner for the work. Such warranty period shall be provided by the Contractor regardless of supplier's standard warranty provisions. E. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall, at no additional expense to the Owner, furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required, and shall make such repairs and removals or shall perform such work or reconstruction as may be made necessary by any structural or functional defect or failure resulting from neglect, faulty workmanship or faulty materials, in any part of the work performed by him. Such repair shall also include refilling of trenches, excavations, or embankments that show settlement or erosion after backfilling or placement. F. Except as noted on the plans or as specified, all structures such as embankments and fences, shall be returned to their original condition prior to the completion of the Contract. Any and all damage to any facility not designated for removal resulting from - the Contractor's operations, shall be promptly repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. G. In the event the Contractor fails to proceed to remedy the defects of which he has been notified within fifteen (15) days of the date of such notice, the Owner reserves the right to cause the required materials to be procured and the work to be done, as described in the plans and specifications, and to hold the Contractor and the sureties on his bond liable for the cost and expense thereof. H. In the event that immediate repairs are necessary to continue operations of the facility, the Owner reserves the right to cause those repairs to be made and hold the FTWH1101 01740-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- WARRANTIES AND BONDS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 Contractor liable for the expense of such repairs. In such a case, every reasonable effort will be made by the Owner to notify the Contractor in advance, but failure of such notification shall not constitute a waiver of the Contractor's liability. In any case, the Contractor will be notified as soon as reasonably possible of the need for such repairs. I. Notice to the Contractor for repairs and reconstruction will be made as prescribed for giving Notice in the Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION - FTWH1101 01740-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- WARRANTIES AND BONDS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section defines requirements for design, construction, erection and removal of concrete formwork. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Coordinate the requirements of this section with all other sections of Division 3 - Concrete. �- 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARD A. American Concrete Institute; ACI 117, "Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." B. American Concrete Institute; ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete." C. American Concrete Institute; ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIAL A. Smooth Forms: 1. Construct formwork with plywood; tempered, concrete-form hardboard; dressed lumber faced with plywood or fiberboard lining; metal; plastic; or metal-framed plywood-faced panel material acceptable to the Engineer to provide continuous, straight smooth surfaces. Form material will be free of raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents or other defects. Furnish material in largest practical sizes to minimize the number of joints and, when shown on the drawings, conform to the joint system shown. Form material will have sufficient strength and thickness to withstand the pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. 2. Smooth forms will be used on all concrete surfaces exposed to view or liquid in the completed structure. B. Rough Forms: 1. Construct forms of dressed or undressed lumber free of knots, splits, or other defects; plywood; metal; or other material acceptable to the Engineer. Material shall have sufficient strength and thickness to withstand the pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. FTWH1101 03100-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE FORMWORK MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2. Rough forms may be used on concrete surfaces that will not be exposed to view or liquid in the completed structure. C. Waterproofed Surfaces: At surfaces to be waterproofed, provide formwork with - sufficient anchor pattern to facilitate bond of the membrane waterproofing. D. Shores: Wood or adjustable metal type with bearing plates and with double wedges at bottom. 2.02 FORM ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: 1. Form ties shall be of the removable end, permanently embedded body type and shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to support and maintain the form in proper position and alignment without the use of auxiliary spreaders. 2. Use removable cones of one-inch by one-inch minimum size on the end of the form tie. - 3. Grout depressions left in concrete by the cones with non shrink grout after the ends of the cones have been removed. B. Coating for Plastic Forms: Alkali-resistant gel-coat. C. Chamfers: Provide a chamfer on all exposed edges by using either wooden or plastic _ chamfer strips. Chamfer strips shall be a forty-five degree right triangle in section with the two shorter sides measuring 3/4-inch. 2.03 DESIGN OF FORMWORK A. Form Design: The design and engineering of all concrete formwork, including all shoring, bracing and reshoring, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Design formwork for loads, lateral pressure, and allowable stresses as described in ACI 347. Allow for design consideration, wind loads, allowable stresses and other applicable requirements of controlling local building codes. Camber formwork to compensate for w anticipated deflection during placement of concrete when required to maintain specified tolerances. Design formwork to be readily removed without impact, shock, or damage to concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. _ B. Slip Forming: Not permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. All formwork, scaffolds and work platforms shall be safe and conform to OSHA Requirements. -- 2. Construct and maintain formwork, complying with ACI 347 and these specifications so that it will maintain correct sizes of members, shape, alignment, elevation and position during concrete placement and until concrete has gained FTWH1101 03100-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE FORMWORK MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 sufficient strength. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, anchorages and inserts, as required. 3. Construct forms for easy removal without damage to concrete surfaces. 4. Formwork shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins. 5. Chamfer strips shall be placed in forms to bevel all edges and corners permanently exposed to view, except the top edges of walls and slabs which are shown to be tooled. Edges of formed joints and interior corners shall not be beveled unless shown or specified otherwise. Equipment bases shall have formed beveled edges for all vertical and horizontal corners. Unless otherwise noted, bevels shall be 3/4-inch wide. 6. If runways are required for moving equipment, provide for support of runways with struts or legs resting directly on the formwork or structural member. Do not allow runways or supports to rest on reinforcing steel. 7. Provide openings below large pipe (over 10" diameter) or large embedments to allow adequate concrete fill and minimize honeycombs and voids. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in the finish slab surface. Provide and secure units to support types of screeds required. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork so that concrete surfaces will conform to tolerance limits as listed in ACI Sections 117, 301 and 347. B. Establish sufficient control points and bench marks as references for tolerance checks. Maintain these references in undisturbed condition until final completion and acceptance of the project. 3.03 ADJUSTMENTS OF FORMWORK A. Use wedges or jacks to provide positive adjustment of shores and struts. Wedges used for final adjustment of forms should be fastened in position after final inspection and before concrete placement. B. Securely brace forms against lateral deflections. Prepare to compensate for settling '* during concrete placement. 3.04 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Before placing concrete, clean surfaces of forms and embedded materials. Remove accumulated mortar, grout, rust and other foreign matter. B. Coat forms for exposed or painted concrete surfaces with form oil or form-release agent before placing reinforcement. Cover form surfaces with coating material used in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not allow excess coating material to accumulate in forms or to contact hardened concrete against which FTWH1101 03100-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 - SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE FORMWORK MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 fresh concrete will be placed. Remove coating material from reinforcement before - placing concrete. C. Other than retained-in-place metal forms, forms for unexposed surfaces may be wet — with water immediately before concrete placement in lieu of coating. One exception is that when a possibility of freezing temperatures exists, use of a coating is mandatory. 3.05 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Forms on vertical surfaces, when repair of surface defects or finishing is required _ before concrete is aged, may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations. B. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Loosen wood forms for wall openings as soon as this can be accomplished without damage to concrete. Formwork for sides of beams and other parts not supporting weight of concrete may be removed provided that concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations and provided the removal of these forms will not disturb members supporting the weight of the concrete. C. All forms and shoring used to support weight of concrete or any construction loads shall remain in place until concrete has reached the minimum strength specified for removal of forms and shoring. In no case shall forms be removed in less than 4 days. 3.06 FORM REUSE A. Do not reuse forms that are worn or damaged beyond repair. Thoroughly clean and recoat forms before reuse. For wood and plywood forms to be used for exposed smooth finish, sand or otherwise dress concrete contact surface to original condition or provide form liner facing material. For metal forms, straighten, remove dents and clean to return to original condition. END OF SECTION T FTWH1101 03100-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE FORMWORK MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section specifies requirements for all concrete reinforcement. Also included is grouting of reinforcement dowel bars. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 3 - Concrete: Coordinate the requirements of this section with all other sections of Division 3 - Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ANSI/ASTM): 1. ANSI/ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 2. ANSI/ASTM A 497 - Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ANSI/ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 315 - Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. 2. ACI 318-latest edition - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit the Manufacturer's certificate giving the properties of steel proposed for use. List the Manufacturer's test number and heat number, chemical analysis, yield point, tensile strength and percent elongation. Also identify on the certificates the proposed location of the steel in the work. B. Bill of Materials: Submit bills of materials to be reviewed with shop drawings. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings according to the General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements. Show reinforcement fabrication, bar placement location, splices, spacing and bar designation, bar type, length, size, bending, number of bars, bar support type, and other pertinent information, including dimensions. Information must correspond directly to data listed on the bill of materials. 2. Provide sufficient detail to permit placement of reinforcement without use of design drawings. Reproduction of design drawings for use as shop drawings will not be allowed. Do not begin fabrication of reinforcing steel until after shop drawings have been reviewed by the Owner's Representative. *- 3. Detail shop drawings in accordance with ACI 315. FTWH1101 03200-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 4. Rebar submittal shall include following information. 5. Grade of bars. 6. Table of bending dimensions, bar size, bar length, number of bars and spacing. _ 7. The rebar shall be listed separately for each structural element (wall, slab, footing, beam, etc.). Each element shall be labeled on the rebar list and clearly identified on the shop drawings. 8. Each bar shall be identified such as corner bars, tie bars, vertical bars, etc. D. Manufacturer's Technical Literature: Epoxy Grout. Submit Manufacturer's technical literature on the epoxy grout proposed for anchoring reinforcing dowels to hardened - concrete. Information shall include Manufacturer's recommended application procedures and allowable loading criteria. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Y A. Unloading, storing and handling bars on the job shall meet CRSI publication "Placing Reinforcing Bars", and the following: Store steel reinforcement above the ground on w platforms, skids or other supports. Protect reinforcing, as far as practicable, from mechanical injury, surface deterioration and rusting caused by exposure to the weather. 1.06 NOTIFICATION A. Notify the Owner's Representative at least 48 hours before concrete placement so that - reinforcement may be inspected and errors corrected without delaying the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS — 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Deformed Bars: Use Grade 60 deformed bars conforming to ANSI/ASTM A 615. B. Marking: Clearly mark all bars with waterproof tags showing the number of bars, size, mark, length and yield strength. Mark steel with the same designation as the member in which it occurs. Key marks to the concrete placement number as designated on the 4 concrete place sequence shop drawings. C. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. Welded Deformed Wire Fabric. Conform to ANSI/ASTM A 497. 2. Provide wire size, spacing and type as shown. 2.02 TIE WIRE A. 16-gauge, black, soft-annealed wire where tie wire is not closer than 1 i rich from surface of form after tying in place. B. Provide nylon-, epoxy-, or plastic-coated tie wire to fasten noncoated reinforcing steel, unless tie wire is bent to maintain a minimum of 1 inch from surface of form. 2.03 BAR SUPPORTS A. Provide chairs, riser bars, ties and other accessories made of metal, except as otherwise specified. Bar supports and accessories shall be of the sizes required to FTWH1101 03200-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 provide concrete cover as specified. Metal bar supports and accessories shall be Class 1 or 2 conforming to the requirements of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 2.04 EPDXY GROUT A. Epoxy grout shall be a Hilti HVA adhesive (vinylester resin with a dibenzoyl peroxide hardener), Hilti HIT RE 500 adhesive or Hilti HIT HY 150 adhesive for the purpose of anchoring dowels into hardened concrete. B. When base material temperature drops below 40OF use Hilti HIT-ICE/HIT-HY 150 adhesive for the purpose of anchoring dowels into hardened concrete. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Bending: Fabricate bars to the shapes shown on the drawings by cold bending. Bends shall conform to the minimum bend diameters specified in ACI 318. Do not heat, straighten or rebend bars without specific approval. B. Splices: Locate splices as shown on the drawings. Where it is necessary to splice reinforcement at locations other than shown on the drawings, the splices shall be approved by the Owner's Representative. Use a minimum number of splices located at the points of minimum stress. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. Length of lap splices shall be in accordance with ACI 315, unless called out in the contract drawings. C. Construction Joints: Reinforcing shall be continuous through construction joints. D. Fabrication Tolerances: Bars must conform to the following fabrication tolerances. Measurement Tolerance in Inches Sheared Length ± 1 Stirrups, ties and spirals ± 1/4 All other bends ± 1 PART 3 EXECUTION .- 3.01 CLEANING A. Clean reinforcement of all scale, loose or flaky rust or other foreign material, including oil, mud or coating that will reduce the bond to concrete. 3.02 PLACEMENT A. Placement Tolerances: Place reinforcement within the following tolerances: Placement Tolerance in Inches Concrete cover to formed surfaces + 1/4 Minimum spacing between bars ± 1/4 Top bars in slabs and beams to 8-inch depth ± 1/4 Top bars in slabs and beams between 8 and 24-inch depth ± 1/2 Top bars in slabs and beams more than 24 inches in depth ± 1 Crosswise of members spaced evenly within ±2 Lengthwise of members ± 2 FTWH1101 03200-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 — B. Interferences: If reinforcing interferes with the location of other reinforcing steel, conduits or embedded items, bars may be moved within specified tolerances or one bar diameter whichever is greater. If greater movement of bars is required to avoid interference, notify the Owner's Representative. Do not cut reinforcement to install inserts, conduits, mechanical openings or other items without approval of the Owner's Representative. C. Concrete Cover: Except as otherwise shown on the contract drawings, provide a clear cover measured from reinforcement to the face of the concrete as listed. Surfaces Minimum Clear Cover in Inches w Slabs and joists: Top and bottom bars for dry conditions: #14 and #18 bars 1-1/2 in. #11 bars and smaller 3/4 in. Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth, water, or weather, and over or in contact with sewage and for bottoms bearing on - work mat, or slabs supporting earth cover: #5 bars and smaller 1-1/2 in. #16 through #18 bars 2 in. Beams and columns: For dry conditions: Stirrups, spirals, and ties 1-1/2 in. Principal reinforcement 2 in. Exposed to earth, water, sewage, or weather: Stirrups and ties 2 in. Principal reinforcement 2-1/2 in. ` Walls: For dry conditions: #11 bars and smaller 3/4 in. #14 and#18 bars 1-1/2 in. Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth, water, sewage, weather, or in contact with ground: x Circular tanks with ring tension 2 in. Formed concrete surfaces permanently exposed to earth 3 in. All others 2 in. - Footings and base slabs: At formed surfaces and bottoms bearing on concrete work mat 2 in. At unformed surfaces and bottoms in contact with earth 3 in. Top of footings-same as slabs Over top of piles 2 in. Cover for reinforcing steel shall not be less than the minimum given above (no minus tolerance) and shall not exceed the minimum by more than 3 inch where the thickness is 24 inches or less, or more than 2 inch where the concrete thickness is more than 24 inches. D. Placement in Forms: Use spacers, chairs, wire ties and other accessory items necessary to properly assemble, space and support reinforcing. Wire ties through forms and temporary spacers will not be allowed. Provide accessories of sufficient FTWH1101 03200-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 number, size and strength to adequately prevent deflection or displacement of reinforcement due to construction loads or concrete placement. Use appropriate accessories to position and support bolts, anchors and other embedded items. Tie reinforcing bars at each intersection and to accessories. Blocking reinforcement with concrete or masonry is prohibited. E. Placement for Concrete on Ground: Support reinforcement on precast concrete blocks spaced at approximately 3 feet on centers each way. Use a minimum of one block for each 9 square feet. Tie blocks to at least one reinforcing bar using tie wires embedded in the block. F. Splices: 1. Do not splice bars, except at locations shown on the drawings or the reviewed shop drawings, without approval of the Owner. 2. Lap Splices. Tie securely with wire to prevent displacement of splices during placement of concrete. = G. Construction Joints: Place reinforcing continuous through construction joints. H. Welded Wire Fabric: Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh plus 2 inches, or 6 inches, whichever is larger. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps. I. Field Bending: Shape reinforcing bent during construction operations to conform to the drawings. Bars shall be cold-bent; do not heat bars. Closely inspect the reinforcing for breaks. Replace damaged reinforcing. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete. Do not field bend any reinforcing without Owner's Representative's approval. J. Field Cutting: Reinforcing bars cut on the job shall be cut by shearing or sawing. Do = not cut bars with a cutting torch. K. Reinforcement Around Openings 1. Place an equivalent area of steel around pipe or opening and extend on each side sufficiently to develop bond in each bar. 2. Refer to Details on Drawings for bar extension length of each side of opening. 3. Where welded wire fabric is used, provide extra reinforcing using fabric or deformed bars. 3.03 GROUTING OF REINFORCING BARS A. Installation shall be according to Manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 03200-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 .� SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 ' SECTION 03251 CONCRETE JOINTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install concrete joints. 2. The types of concrete joints required include the following: _ a. Construction joints. b. Expansion joints. c. Control joints. d. Isolation joints. e. Waterstops. B. General: All joints subject to hydrostatic pressure or in contact with soil, except non- water bearing slabs-on-grade, shall be provided with continuous waterstop. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Water stop manufacturer shall demonstrate 5 years, minimum, continuous successful experience in production of PVC Waterstops. B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. ACI 301, Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ASTM C 920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 3. ASTM D 412, Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension. 4. ASTM D 624, Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and thermoplastic Elastomers. 5. ASTM D 1752, Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 6. ASTM D 2240, Test Method for Rubber Property— Durometer Hardness. 7. CRD-0572, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinyl-Chloride Waterstop. 8. ASTM A 240 —Test Method for Stainless Steel Physical Properties. 9. ANSI/NSF 61, Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects. 10. COE CEGS-03250 July 1995 Guide Specification for Military Construction. FrWH1101 03251-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 •• SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE JOINTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 11. EPA Title 40 CFR Section 265.193. C. All manufactured items shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all materials required. 2. Manufacturer's literature for waterstops include waterstop profiles with dimensions, shop made fittings, field splice joint detailed instructions, MSDS sheets, installation instructions, and certificate of compliance to specified physical _ properties. 3. Layout of all construction, contraction and expansion joint locations prior to the submittal of steel reinforcement Shop Drawings. y 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials used for joints in concrete shall be stored on platforms or in enclosures and covered to prevent contact with the ground and exposure to the weather and direct sunlight. Storage and handling requirements of the manufacturer shall also be followed. - PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EPDXY BONDING AGENT A. Provide a two-component epoxy-resin bonding agent. B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following 1. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod LPL, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. 2. Eucopoxy LPL, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company. 2.02 EPDXY-CEMENT BONDING AGENT A. Provide a three component epoxy resin-cement blended formulated as a bonding agent. B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. 2. Corr-Bond, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company. 2.03 NEOPRENE BEARING PADS A. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: -- 1. 65 Durometer, Sheet Neoprene No. 1200, as manufactured by Williams Products Company. 2. Or Engineer approved equal. F1WH1101 03251-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE JOINTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.04 JOINT SEALANT A. Sealant shall be a two part polyurethane type sealant meeting the requirements of ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25. The manufacturer's recommended primer must be used with the sealant. B. The sealant shall meet the following requirements (measured at 73 degrees F and 50 percent RH). : 1. Ultimate hardness (ASTM D 2240, Type A, Shore): 20 to 45. 2. Tensile strength (ASTM D 412): 200 psi, minimum. 3. Ultimate elongation (ASTM D 412): 400 percent, minimum. 4. Tear strength (ASTM D 624, die C): 75 pounds per inch of thickness, minimum. 5. Color: light gray. C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Sikaflex-2c, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. 2. Or Engineer approved equivalent. 2.05 SEALANT ACCESSORIES A. Backer Rod: Backer rod shall be an extruded closed-cell polyethylene foam rod. The material shall be compatible with the sealant material used and shall have a tensile strength of not less than 40 psi and a compression deflection of approximately 25 percent at 8 psi. The rod shall be 1/8-inch larger in diameter than the joint width at joints less and 1/4-inch larger in diameter t joints 3/4-inch and wider. B. Bond Breaker Tape: Bond breaker shall be polyethylene or TFE-fluorocarbon self adhesive tape, as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Contractor shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which Work is to be performed and notify Engineer, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Engineer. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Comply with the requirements of ACI 301 and as specified below. B. Vertical Joints: 1. Apply roughener to the form in at hin, even film by brush, spray or roller in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. After roughener is dry, concrete .. may be placed. 2. When concrete has been placed, remove joint surface forms as early as isnecessary to allow for removal of the surface retarded concrete. Forms covering member surfaces shall remain in place as required by Section 03100, CONCRETE FTWH1101 03251-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 - SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE JOINTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS �r Contract No.01632 .� FORMWORK. Wash loosened material off with high-pressure water spray to obtain roughened surface subject to approval by Engineer. Alternately, the surface shall be roughened by abrasive blasting or hydroblasting to expose aggregate. The outer 1-inch of each side of the joint face shall be masked and protected from the blasting to avoid damage to the member surface. 3.03 CONTROL JOINTS a A. Control joints shall be provided in non-water bearing slabs on grade only where specifically shown or specified herein or in the drawings. Do not cut control joints in structured slab on void forms. A groove, with a depth of at least 25 percent of the - member thickness, shall be formed or saw-cut in the concrete. This groove shall be filled with joint sealant material. B. Where the control joint is formed by sawcutting, the cut shall be made immediately after the concrete has set enough to support the saw and be cut without being damaged. The concrete shall be kept continually moist until the cutting operation. All -- saw cuts shall be installed within twelve hours of concrete placement. C. Control joints may be formed with a tool or by insertion of a joint forming strip. After the concrete has gained its design strength, the upper portion of the joint forming strip shall be removed and the void filled with sealant. 3.04 ISOLATION JOINTS A. Wherever a sidewalk or other slab on grade abuts a concrete structure and is not shown doweled into that structure, an isolation joint shall be provided. Such joint - shall be formed by a 1/2-inch joint filler extending the full depth of the deeper section with the upper 1/2-inch of the joint filled with sealant. 3.05 BONDING AGENT A. Use epoxy bonding agent for bonding of fresh concrete to concrete that has been in _ place for at least 60 days or to existing concrete. B. Use epoxy-cement bonding agent for the following: 1. Bonding toppings and concrete fill to concrete that has been in place for at least 60 days or to existing concrete. 2. For all locations where bonding agent is required and concrete cannot be placed within the open time period of epoxy bonding agent. C. Use a cement-water slurry as a bonding agent for toppings and concrete fill to new concrete. The cement water slurry shall be worked into the surface with a stiff bristle broom and concrete shall be placed before the cement-water slurry dries. D. Handle and store bonding agent in compliance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, including safety precautions. E. Mix the bonding agent in complete accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. FTWH1101 03251-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE JOINTS -- MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 F. Before placing fresh concrete, thoroughly roughen and clean hardened concrete surfaces and coat with bonding agent not less than 1/16-inch thick. Place fresh concrete while the bonding agent is still tacky (within its open time), without removing the in-place bonding agent coat, and as directed by the manufacturer. 3.06 SEALANT INSTALLATION A. Sealants shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations for sealant which is to be subjected to continuous submerged conditions and the following requirements. P rior to sealant installation, Contractor shall arrange to have a representative of the sealant manufacturer instruct the crew doing the Work as to the proper methods of surface preparation, mixing, and application of the sealant. B. Surfaces to receive sealant shall be cleaned of all materials which could interfere with proper bonding. Concrete surfaces shall have all fins or other defects removed or repaired and shall receive a I ight abrasive blasting prior to priming and sealant application. All surfaces to receive sealant shall be completely dry. C. Spaces to receive sealant shall be filled with joint filler as shown. Where not shown, the space shall be filled with joint filler or a backer rod so that the depth of sealant does not exceed the width of the space. Where the bottom of the space to receive sealant is formed by a material other than backer rod, a bond breaker tape shall be placed. The maximum sealant depth, at middle of the joint width, shall be 1/2-inch. D. The primer and sealant used shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. No sealant shall be placed without the use of a primer. E. Self-leveling sealants shall only be used in joints with a slope less than 0.5 percent and where maximum and minimum sealant depths can be maintained. Non-sag sealant shall be used at all other locations and may be used instead of self-leveling sealant. All non-sag sealant shall be tooled to a uniform concave surface before skinning and curing begins. F. Sealant material shall be conditioned to be within the optimum temperature range recommended by the manufacturer for installation for a minimum of 16 hours prior to installation. Installation shall proceed only when the substrate is at a temperature recommended by the manufacturer. Sealant shall not be placed if there is a threat of imminent rainfall. Contractor shall submit a letter certifying that the applied sealants were installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including temperature, relative humidity, etc. G. All joints to receive sealant shall be inspected by the Engineer prior to sealant placement. Provide 24-hour written notice to OWNER representative prior to inspection. H. All sealant shall achieve final cure at least seven days before the structure is filled with water. I. Any sealant which, after the manufacturer's recommended curing time for the job conditions, fails to fully and properly cure shall be completely removed. The surfaces FfWH1101 03251-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE JOINTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 ' to receive sealant shall be completely cleaned of all traces of the improperly cured sealant and primer. The specified sealant shall then be reinstalled. All costs of such removal, surface treatment, and reinstallation shall be at the expense of Contractor. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 03251-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE JOINTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section gives requirements for normal weight and structural concrete. B. Coordinate the requirements of this section with all other sections of Division 3, Concrete. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). B. American Concrete Institute (ACI). 1. ACI 613, Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete. 2. ACI 68-63, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. 3. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. C. Mixer Manufacturer's Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval a proposed design mix for each concrete strength and class required by these Specifications. Failure to include any items of information noted in this paragraph for a given concrete strength or type will be cause for requirement of a resubmittal. Information to be submitted for each strength and class shall include the following items: 1. Sources of concrete mix components including coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, .� cement, water admixtures, and pozzolans where included. 2. Chemical analysis (mill test report) for each cement type to be used. 3. Current laboratory sieve analysis, mechanical properties and deleterious substance content for coarse and fine aggregate. 4. Concrete mix design a. Constituent quantities per cubic yard. b. Cement type and manufacturer. c. Water/cement ratio, by weight. d. Mix design slump. e. Average laboratory cylinder strength test results at 7 an d 28 d ays for concrete mix designs (include standard deviation). Provide results of 14 day tests if available. f. Water soluble ion content at 28 days. g. Laboratory shrinkage test results for concrete mix designs, where specified. 5. Admixtures. Submit manufacturer's data brochures on admixtures proposed for use. FTWH1101 03300-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 r a. Submit manufacturer's technical information on the air-entraining admixture proposed for use. Give requirements to control percent of air content under various temperatures and job conditions. b. Submit manufacturer's technical information on the water-reducing admixture proposed for use. G ive dosage requirements to be used under various temperatures and job conditions to produce a u niform, workable concrete mix. - c. Submit manufacturer's technical information on the high range water- reducing admixture (superplasticizer) proposed for use. Identify the portions of the project for which use of a superplasticizer is proposed. Indicate slump - range, maximum drop without segregation, retarding time, water requirement percent of control, and dosage requirements. d. Submit manufacturer's technical information on any other admixtures — proposed to be used in the Work, including accelerating and retarding admixtures. Identify the portions of the Project for which use of each admixture is proposed. Give dosage requirements to be used under various temperatures and job conditions to produce a uniform, workable concrete mix. e. Provide certification of compliance with specified ASTM standards for each - admixture. 6. Where pozzolans are used in combination with cement, provide laboratory test results to certify compliance with specified ASTM standards and the - supplementary requirements included in these Specifications. Provide chemical analysis of fly ash. B. Submit concrete placement drawings showing lift numbers, locations of all joints, concrete mix being placed, concrete finishes, and all pertinent embedments including embedded plates, sleeves, pipes, conduits, anchors, etc., where applicable. Where _ the Drawings permit the Contractor to select joint locations, show the selected dimensions on the placement drawings. Approval of the placement drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of placing all concrete and embedments as specified. C. Submit a work plan for cold weather concreting and for hot weather concreting, describing proposed methods and procedures for mixing, delivering, placing, finishing, - and curing concrete. Include also procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or due to equipment failures. D. Furnish a delivery ticket for ready mixed concrete to the Owner's Representative as each truck arrives. Each ticket shall provide a printed record of the weight of cement batched and each separate aggregate individually batched. Use the type of indicator _ that returns for zero punch or returns to zero after a batch is discharged. Clearly indicate the weight of fine and coarse aggregate, cement, and water in each batch, the quantity delivered, the time any water is added, and the numerical sequence of _ the delivery. Show the time of day batched and time of discharge from the truck. Indicate the number of revolutions of mix trucks. FfWH1101 03300-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 E. Other product submittals of manufacturer's data sheet and product specifications required include curing compounds and items specified in other Sections including form release agents, bonding agents, etc. Identify the locations where each will be used in the Work as a part of the submittal. F. Submitted data shall demonstrate compliance with all requirements of this Specification or deviations shall be clearly noted. 1.04 STORAGE OF MATERIALS a A. Cement: Store cement in watertight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set. B. Aggregate: Arrange and use aggregate stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding three feet in thickness. Complete each layer before the next is started. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates. C. Sand: Before using, allow sand to drain until a uniform moisture content is reached. D. Admixtures: Store admixtures to avoid contamination, evaporation or damage. For those used in the form of suspensions or nonstable solutions, provide suitable agitating equipment to assure uniform distribution of ingredients. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which would adversely affect their characteristics. 1.05 CONTROL OF CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Consistency: Test for slump shall be performed at the job site immediately prior to placing in accordance with Method of Slump Test for Consistency of Portland Cement Concrete (ASTM C143). If the slump is greater than that specified, the concrete shall be rejected. Concrete showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse aggregate with paste shall be remixed. If the slump is within the allowable limit, but excessive bleeding, poor workability, or poor finishability are observed, changes in the concrete mix shall be obtained only by an adjustment of one or more of the following: 1. The gradation of aggregate. 2. The proportion of fine and coarse aggregate. 3. The percentage of entrained air, within the allowable limits. B. Air Content: Test for air content shall be made on a fresh concrete sample. Air content for concrete made of ordinary aggregates having low absorption shall be made in accordance with either Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method (ASTM C231), or Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method (ASTM C173). If light weight aggregates or aggregates with high absorptions are used, the latter test method shall be used. C. Unit Weight: Test in accordance with Method of Test for Weight per Cubic Foot, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete (ASTM C138), may be used in lieu of the air FTWH1101 03300-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 content test, provided the relationship between air content and unit weight has been established for the materials being used. D. Strength: Compression test specimens shall be made and cured in accordance with -- Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexural Test Specimens in the Field (ASTM C31); Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders (ASTM C39). E. Number of Specimens: Number of sets of concrete test cylinders to be cast for each concrete pour shall be as follows: No. of C.Y. Concrete Poured Minimum No. of Sets of Cylinders - 0 - 25 1 25 - 75 2 75 - 150 3 150 - 250 4 250 - 400 5 400 - 550 6 A "set" of test cylinders consists of six cylinders, two to be broken and strengths averaged at seven days; and two broken and strengths averaged at 28 days. Two cylinders will remain unbroken so that they will be available to be broken upon unforeseen circumstances or upon the option of the Consulting Engineer to break cylinder at different times. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: 1. Use cement conforming to ASTM C 150, Type II. Use the same brand of cement upon which the selection of concrete was based. Only one brand of each type will be permitted in any one structure, unless otherwise specified. Cement used in concrete placed in openings in existing water bearing structures shall be shrinkage compensating cement, ASTM C845. 3�. Fly ash is not permitted B. Admixtures: Using the following admixtures as required or permitted. The use of calcium chloride will not be permitted. The products must conform to the referenced standards. 1. Air-entraining Admixtures. Conform to ASTM C 260, such as Sika's "AER," Sonneborn's Aerolith," or approved equal. 2r Chemical Admixtures. Conform to ASTM C 494, "Tentative Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete." I Water-reducing Retarder. Use of an admixture containing chloride is not permitted. The product must be non staining. User Master Builder's "MBHC," ` Sika's "Plastiment," or approved equal. FfWH1101 03300-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 4. High-Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer). Conform to ASTM C 494 T ype F. Acceptable products are W. R. Grace -"WRDA-19", American Admixtures - "Melment", Gifford-Hill-"PSI-Super", or approved equal. C. Mixing Water: Fresh, clean and drinkable. D. Aggregates: Use coarse aggregate from only one source and fine aggregate from only one source for exposed concrete in a single structure. 1. Coarse aggregate for concrete of normal weight shall conform to ASTM C 33. Grading limits for precast, prestress members and for all members six inches or less in least dimension, one inch to No. 4. Grading for all other normal weight concrete, 3/4 inches to No. 4. 2. Use natural sand complying with ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate in normal weight concrete. E. Membrane-forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, commercial curing compound which will not permanently discolor concrete. All curing compound shall be white. F. Sheet Material for Curing Concrete: ASTM C 171, waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheeting. 2.02 PROPORTIONING A. Objective: S elect proportion of ingredients to produce concrete having proper durability, strength, appearance and other required properties. Proportion ingredients to produce a homogenous mixture, which will work readily into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement by methods of placing and consolidation employed on the work, but without permitting materials to segregate or allowing excessive free water to collect on the surface. B. Strength: Provide ultimate strength concrete in all portions of the work. Strength must conform to values for the class of concrete specified for each portion of the structure. Requirements are based on 28-day compressive strength. If high early- strength concrete is specified, requirements are based on 7-day compressive strength. C. Entrained Air: Air-entrain all concrete, unless otherwise specified. Provide for not less than three percent nor more than five percent by volume of total entrapped and entrained air for normal weight concrete. D. Slump: 1. The maximum permissible slump for concrete is 4 inches; the minimum is 2-1/2 inches. Determine slump by methods given in ASTM C 143. E. Admixtures: Proportion admixtures according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Submit manufacturer's literature of all admixtures proposed to engineer in writing for approval prior to use. F. Classification and Use: 1. Classification. FTWH1101 03300-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 - SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 Minimum 28-Day Water-Cement Minimum Cement Compressive Strength Ratio Contents Sacks Class si Max. (Gal/Sack) Sacks per Cubic Yard* Normal - Weight Al 5000 5 7 A 4000 5 6-1/2 - B 3000 6-1/2 5 C 2000 8 4 * I�the required strength is not secured with the minimum cement content as specified, add cement or provide other aggregates as necessary. 2. Use: Unless otherwise specified, use the specified classes of concrete in the following locations: Class Al: Not Used Class A: All other concrete structures other than specified in Class Al, drilled piers, and concrete pavement. Class B: Sidewalks, pipe encasements, blocking Class C: Embedment, blocking, and lean concrete seal slabs, and mud slabs. G. Water-Cement Ratio for Normal Weight Concrete: If the relationship between strength and the water-cement ratio has been determined previously for materials specified for normal weight concrete, the ratio may be used. Otherwise, determine the proper water-cement ratio by using the following procedures. 1. Make concrete trial mixtures having suitable proportions and consistency. Use at least three different water- cement ratios which will produce a range of strengths encompassing those required. Design trial mixes to produce the maximum allowable slump. Determine proportions of ingredients and conduct tests in accordance with basic - relationships and procedures outlined in ACI 613, "Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete." $. Make and cure specimens in sets of six (6) according to ASTM C 192, "Method of - Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory." For each water-cement ratio prepare at least three specimens for each age test. Test for strength at 7, 14, 21 and 28 days, or other age as required. Conduct tests according to ASTM C 39, "Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders." 4. From results of these tests, plot a curve showing the relationship between water- - cement ratio and compressive strength. Determine the maximum permissible water-cement ratio for ultimate strength concrete by using the value from the curve that corresponds to a mi nimum strength 25 p ercent greater than the specified strength. FTWH1101 03300-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE -- MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.03 MIXING NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Mix and transport ready-mixed concrete according to ASTM C 94, "Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete." In addition to normal batch plant procedures as outlined in ASTM C 94, provisions must be made at the batch plant for the following items: 1. Arrangement. Provide separate bins or compartments for different sized aggregates and for bulk cement. Compartments of ample size constructed so that materials will be kept separate under all working conditions are required. 2. Weighing of Materials. Aggregates may be weighed in separate weigh batchers with individual scales. Weigh bulk cement on a separate scale in a separate weigh batcher. Observe the following limits of accuracy when weighing or measuring materials. Materials Percent Accuracy Cement 1 Water 1 Aggregates 2 Admixtures 3 3. Water Meter or Batcher. Provide a suitable measuring device capable of measuring mixing water within the specified accuracy for each batch. Note the number of gallons of water as batched on printed batching tickets. 4. Moisture Control. Provide a moisture meter to measure the amount of free water in fine aggregates within 0.3 of a percent. Compensate for varying moisture contents of fine aggregates and change batch weights of materials if necessary before batching. 5. Scales. Provide adequate facilities for accurate measurement and control of each material entering each batch of concrete. Accuracy of weighing equipment must conform to applicable requirements of ASTM and NRMCA for such equipment. 6. Recorders or Printers. Provide recorders/printers to produce tickets. Each ticket will provide a printed record of volume of water and weights for cement as batched and for separate aggregates as batched individually. Use the type of indicator that returns for zero punch or to zero after a batch is discharged. Clearly indicate by stamped letters or numerals the difference between aggregates and cement as batched. Show the time of day stamped or printed at intervals of not more than six minutes. The delivery ticket shall also show the volume of water, in gallons, added at the batch plant. Deliver recorded ticket copies with concrete. The testing agency will keep one copy. 7. Protection. Protect weighing, indicating, recording or printing, and control equipment against exposure to dust and weather. B. Transit Mix Truck Requirements: 1. Clean each transit mix truck drum and reverse drum rotation before the truck proceeds under the batching plant. FfWH1101 03300-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 y SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2_ Keep the water tank valve on each transit truck locked at all times that the truck is in use. Any addition of water must be directed by the Engineer. Added water must be incorporated by additional mixing of at least 35 revolutions. 3. Equip each transit-mix truck with a continuous, nonreversible, revolution counter showing the number of revolutions at mixing speeds. Counter shall be reset to zero at the batch plant. Concrete may be rejected if counters have fewer than 70 or more than 150 turns when they arrive at the site. 4. Transmit mix trucks are to be in good working condition. Trucks which are not mechanically sound, have worn or obstructed mixing fins, have non-functioning drum counters, or leaking water valves shall not be used. C. Admixtures: 1. Charge air-entraining and chemical admixtures into the mixer as a solution using an automatic dispenser or similar metering device. Measure admixture to an accuracy within + three percent. Do not use admixtures in powdered form. Two or more admixtures may be used in the same concrete, provided that the admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on the concrete or on the properties of each other. Inject the admixtures separately during the batching sequence. 3. Add retarding admixtures as soon as practicable after the addition of cement. D. Temperature Control: _ 1. When the mean temperature falls below 40 degrees F, keep the admixed temperature above 55 degrees F to maintain concrete temperature at the time of placement in the forms above 60 degrees F nor more than 85 degrees F. .. . If water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in the mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when the temperature of the mixture is greater than 100 degrees F. .. 3, In hot weather, cool ingredients before mixing to maintain temperature of the concrete below the maximum placing temperature. If necessary, substitute well- crushed ice for all or part of the mixing water. The maximum time interval �. between the addition of mixing water and/or cement to the batch, and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following: AGITATED CONCRETE u Air or Concrete Temperature (whichever is higher) Maximum Time -_ (32.2oC) 90oF or above 45 minutes (23.9oC) 75oF to 89oF(31.6oC) 60 minutes ( 5.OoC) 40oF to 74oF (23.3oC) 90 minutes FTWH1101 03300-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND WCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Mix concrete only in quantities for immediate use. Discard concrete which has set. Retempering of set concrete is not permitted. Completely discharge concrete at the site within one hour and 30 minutes after adding cement to aggregate. In hot weather, reduce this time to one hour or less to prevent stiffening of concrete before it is placed. B. Protection from Adverse Weather: If adverse weather is imminent, no concrete placement is permitted. Do not permit rainwater to increase mixing water or to damage the surface finish. If rainfall occurs after placing operations begin, provide adequate covering to protect the work. C. Placing Temperature: 1. Cold Weather Concreting. Except as modified herein, cold weather concreting shall comply with ACI 306. The temperature of concrete at the time of mixing shall be not less than that shown in the following table for corresponding outdoor temperature (in shade) at the time of placement: Outdoor Temperature Concrete Temperature Below 40 F No concrete placement Between 40 F and 45 F 60 F Above 45 F 45 F When placed, heated concrete shall not be warmer than 80 degrees F. When freezing temperatures may be expected during the curing period, the concrete shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F for five days or 70 degrees F for three days after placement. Concrete and adjacent form surfaces shall be kept continuously moist. Sudden cooling of concrete shall not be permitted. 2. Hot Weather Concreting. Except as modified herein, hot weather concreting shall comply with ACI 305. At air temperature of 90 degrees F or above, concrete shall be kept as cool as possible during placement and curing. The temperature of the concrete when placed in the work shall not exceed 90 degrees F. Plastic shrinkage cracking, due to rapid evaporation of moisture, shall be prevented. Concrete shall not be placed when the evaporation rate (actual or anticipated) equals or exceeds 0.2 pound per square foot per hour, as determined by Figure 2.1.5 in ACI 305. D. Adjusting Slump. If concrete arrives at the project with slump below that specified, water may be added. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump is prohibited. Do not exceed either the maximum permissible water-cement ratio or maximum slump. Mix adjustments to obtain specified slump must be approved and directed by the Engineer. FTWH1101 03300-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.02 CONVEYING A. Objectives: Handle concrete from mixer to placement as quickly as practicable while providing concrete of required quality in the placement area. U se methods which prevent loss of ingredients and segregation. B. Equipment: Obtain approval of the conveying equipment. Select equipment of size _ and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end. Conform to the following equipment and operations requirements. Provide truck mixers, agitators and nonagitating units and manner of operation _ conforming to requirements of ASTM C 94, "Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete." 2. Provide metal or metal-lined chutes. A rrange for slopes not exceeding one _ vertical to two horizontal and not less than one vertical to three horizontal. Chutes more than 20 feet long and chutes not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into a hopper before distribution. Pumping of concrete will be permitted only after written approval. Use a batch v design and aggregate sizes suitable for pumping. 3.03 PLACING A. Preparation: I n addition to the previous requirements, confirm that formwork has been completed. Remove ice, excess water, dirt and other foreign materials from - forms. Confirm that reinforcement is securely in place and positioned. Have a competent workman at the pour location who can assure that reinforcement and embedded items remain in design locations while concrete is being placed. Sprinkle _ semiporous subgrades to eliminate suction. Seal extremely porous subgrades in an approved manner. Clean and moisten existing concrete surface prior to placing new concrete. r B. General Procedure: 1, Deposit concrete continuously, or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If the section cannot be placed continuously, place construction joints as specified or as approved. 2. Proceed with placement at a rate such that concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials. Remove temporary spreaders from forms when the spreader is no longer useful. Temporary spreaders may remain embedded in concrete only if made of galvanized metal or concrete, and if prior approval has been obtained. R Do not start placing of concrete in supported elements until concrete previously placed in columns and walls is no longer plastic. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to a procedure which will cause segregation. 6. Where surface mortar is to be the basis of a finish, especially those designated to r be painted, work coarse aggregate back from forms with a suitable tool to bring FTWH1101 03300-10 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 the full surface of mortar against the form. Prevent formation of excessive surface voids. 7. Consolidate concrete by vibration, spading, rodding or forking so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, around embedded items and into corners of forms. Eliminate air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting or planes of weakness. A minimum frequency of 7000 revolutions per minute is required for mechanical vibrators. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Insert vibrators and withdraw at points from 18 to 30 inches apart. At each insertion, vibrate sufficiently to consolidate concrete, generally from five to 15 seconds. Do not over-vibrate causing segregation. Keep a spare vibrator on the site during concrete placing operations. C. Slabs: 1. After suitable bulkheads, screeds and if specified, jointing materials, have been positioned the concrete shall be placed continuously between construction joints, beginning at a bulkhead, edge form, or corner. Each batch shall be placed into the edge of the previously placed concrete to avoid stone pockets and segregation. 2. If there is a delay in casting, the concrete placed after the delay shall be thoroughly spaded and consolidated at the edge of that previously placed to avoid cold joints. 3. Concrete shall then be brought to correct level with a straightedge and struck off. Bullfloats or darbies shall be used to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. D. Formed Concrete: 1. Place concrete in forms using tremie tubes and taking care to prevent segregation. Bottom of tremie tubes shall be in contact with the concrete already placed. Do not drop concrete free more than five feet, or so that it can ricochet from reinforcing steel. 2. In walls, place concrete in 12" to 24" lifts, keeping the surface horizontal. Compaction shall be by vibrator and by puddling stick. The vibrator shall be inserted vertically at regular intervals, through the fresh concrete and slightly into the previous lift, if any. It shall be removed as soon as the surface begins to liquefy around the vibrator. 3. Vibration shall be supplemented by hand puddling; puddling shall be continuous while pouring concrete and shall be done primarily between forms and reinforcing steel, around openings, or wherever needed to prevent honeycomb, fill voids or drive out large air bubbles. E. Concrete Poured Against Rock: 1. Where concrete is poured against undisturbed rock, place concrete as soon as practicable after excavation to prevent weathering of exposed rock. a. For footings and slabs, place mud slabs within 4 hours after the excavation is at final grade. 2. Remove all water from excavation or shaft before placing concrete. FfWH1101 03300-11 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.04 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE A. General: All concrete shall be placed and compacted with mechanical vibrators. The number, type, and size of the units shall be approved by the Consulting Engineer in advance of placing operations. No concrete will be ordered until sufficient approved vibrators (including standby units in working order) are on the job. B. Concrete Slabs: Concrete for slabs shall be compacted with Vibrating Screeds and internal vibrators. C. Amount of Vibration: Vibrators are to be used to consolidate properly placed concrete, but not to move or transport concrete in the forms. Vibration shall continue until: 1. Frequency returns to normal. 2. Surface appears liquefied, flattened and glistening. 3. Trapped air ceases to rise. 4. Coarse aggregate has blended into surface, but has not disappeared. 3.05 REPAIRING SURFACE DEFECTS A. Defective Areas: Repair defective areas immediately after the removal of forms. - Consulting Engineer may reject if necessary. i. Remove honeycombed and other defective concrete down to sound concrete. To prevent absorption of water from patching mortar, dampen the defective area and a strip six inches wide surrounding the area to be patched. P repare bonding grout by mixing approximately one part cement to one part fine sand passing a No. 30 mesh sieve. Mix to a consistency of thick cream, and brush thoroughly into the surface. a. Make patching mortar of the same materials and of approximately the same proportions as concrete, except omit coarse aggregate. Prepare mortar with not - more than one part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand by damp loose volume. Substitute white Portland cement for part of the gray Portland cement on exposed concrete in order to produce a color matching the color of surrounding concrete. -- Determine color by making a trial patch. 3. Use no more mixing water than necessary for handling and placing. Mix patching mortar in advance and allow to stand. Mix frequently with a trowel until it has reached the stiffest consistency that will permit placing. Do not add water. 4. After surface water has evaporated from the area to be patched, thoroughly brush a coat of bond grout into surface. When bond grout begins to lose its water - sheen, apply the premixed patching mortar. Thoroughly consolidate the mortar into place and strike off to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. To permit initial shrinkage, leave undisturbed for at least one hour before final finishing. Keep the patched area damp for seven days. Do not use metal tools in finishing patches in a formed wall which will be exposed. B. Tie Holes: Patch tie holes immediately after removal of forms. After cleaning and y thoroughly dampening the tie hole, fill solid with non-shrink, non-metallic grout. FrWH1101 03300-12 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLL WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND CHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 -' C. Proprietary Materials: If permitted or required, proprietary compounds for adhesion or as patching ingredients may be used in lieu of or in addition to the forgoing patching procedures. Use such compounds according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.06 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES A. Surfaces Requiring No Finish: A finish is not required on surfaces concealed from view by earth, in the completed structure. B. Smooth Form Finish: 1. Use plywood or fiberboard linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Rub fins and joint marks with carborundum stone to leave a smooth, unmarred finish surface. 3. Use a smooth form finish on all surfaces exposed to view and liquid. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: Tops of piers, walls, bent caps and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed. Float unformed surfaces to a texture reasonably consistent with that of the formed surfaces. Final treatment on formed surfaces shall continue uniformly across the unformed surfaces. 3.07 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES A. Shaping to Contour: Use strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to the proper contour. See the section on Concrete Formwork for edge forms and screeds. B. Consolidation: Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. 0 btain consolidation of slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other approved means. Concrete to be consolidated must be as dry as practicable. Do not permit manipulation of surfaces prior to finishing operations. 3.08 CURING PROCEDURES A. All Freshly Cast Concrete: Shall be protected from damaging effects of the elements (freezing, rapid drop in temperature, and loss of moisture) and from subsequent construction operations. When necessary, the Contractor shall provide and use insulation and tarpaulins to maintain the concrete temperature above 50OF for the first week. Do not apply curing compound at the construction joints. B. Curing for Slabs and Footings: 1. Initial Curing. Immediately after the finishing operations are completed, the concrete shall be covered with two thicknesses of 10-ounce burlap or other approved materials, thoroughly saturated with water before placement. This covering shall remain in contact with the concrete and be kept saturated with water by spraying until the peak temperature produced by hydration has passed, d FrWH1101 03300-13 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 v but for at least 24 hours. At the end of this time, initial curing may be terminated and final curing begun. 2_ Final Curing. Cover concrete with an approved curing compound conforming to ASTM Designation C309 (latest). Color to be white. Waterproof curing paper conforming to ASTM Designation C171 (latest) is also acceptable. Total curing time shall be at least seven days during which interface temperature of concrete shall be above 50 degrees. Curing compound shall be applied heavily and evenly - in two coats until no pinhole or other coating break remains, and an opaque white coating is achieved. Curing compound will not be allowed for final curing of structural floor slabs. Final curing will be accomplished by continuing initial curing process for the time with regard to temperature as stated above. C. Curing for Walls and Columns: _ L Initial Curing. Immediately after concrete is completed, the exposed surface of the concrete shall be covered with two thicknesses of 10-ounce burlap or other approved absorptive materials, thoroughly saturated with water before placement. This covering shall remain in contact with the concrete and be kept saturated with water by spraying for at least 96 hours. At the end of this time, initial curing may be terminated and final curing begun. 2, Final Curing. Cover concrete with an approved curing compound conforming to ASTM Designation C309. Color to be white. Waterproof curing paper conforming to ASTM Designation C171 is also acceptable. Total curing time shall be at least _ ten days, during which interface temperature of concrete shall be above 50°F. "Curing compound will not be allowed for final curing of any interior or exterior exposed structural concrete. Final curing will be accomplished by continuing initial curing process for an additional ten days." Curing compound shall not be used on walls to be painted or to receive a water proofing system. Alternate Initial Curing. In case forms are removed before end of initial cure period, or in the case of unformed wall surfaces (shot-crete), the exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be covered with two thicknesses of 10-ounce burlap or other approved absorptive materials, thoroughly saturated with water before placement. This covering shall be held in contact with the concrete and be kept — saturated with water by spraying until the end of the initial curing period (96 hours curing). D. Protection: If at any time during the progress of work the temperature is, or in the opinion of the Engineer will drop below 40 degrees F, the Contractor shall make suitable provisions to protect the concrete. This protection shall consist of the use of insulating materials such as blankets, mats, etc., and equipment for providing artificial heat. Unvented salamanders or other heaters which produce carbon dioxide as a by- product shall not be permitted in the building during the casting operation or for the . following 36 hours. Salamanders or other heaters shall be placed in the building prior to concreting to maintain the temperature above 50 degrees F, and to remove any frost from the subgrade. A thermometer accurate +2 degrees F shall be placed at the T interface of the slab under the curing blanket to record the temperature. If the temperature at this position falls below 50 degrees F, additional insulating material shall be supplied to maintain the temperature above 50 degrees F. If heaters are used, precautions shall be taken to prevent drying to the slab. Water jackets or other FTWH1101 03300-14 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 suitable devices shall be provide on all heaters to maintain the relative humidity of the atmosphere as high as possible. E. After the curing period, the temperature of the exposed surface shall not be permitted to drop faster than 30 degrees F, in 24 hours. F. In hot weather, suitable precautions shall be taken to avoid drying of the slab prior to the finishing operation. Wind-breaks, and/or sunshade shall be provided as directed by the Owner. During extremes in weather, floors shall not be cast unless the slab is protected by a roof and other suitable measures can be taken. After curing has been completed, the floor shall be exposed to the air for at least 48 hours prior to allowing wheel traffic on the floor. 3.09 GROUTING STRUCTURAL STEEL BASE PLATES Grout structural steel base plates solid with nonshrink grout. Use in accordance with Section 03600, Grout. END OF SECTION s w FfWH1101 03300-15 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 03600 GROUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install grout. 2. The types of grout include the following: a. Non-Shrink Grout: This type of grout is to be used wherever grout is shown ' in the Contract Documents, unless another type is specifically referenced. Two classes of non-shrink grout (Class I and II) and areas of application are specified herein. b. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout(Class III). c. Grout Fill, Topping Grout. d. Construction Joint Grout. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement. 2. Section 03251: Concrete Joints. 3. Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete. 4. Section 05500: Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 05501: Anchor Bolts, Expansion Anchors, and Concrete Inserts. C. Application: The following is a listing of typical applications and the corresponding type of grout which is to be used. U nless indicated otherwise, grouts shall be provided as listed below whether called for on the Drawings or not. Application ape of Grout Beam and column (1 or 2 story)base plates less Non-shrink Class II than 16-inches in the least dimension. Column base plates(greater than 2 story or larger Non-shrink Class I than 16-inches in the least dimension). Base plates for storage tanks and other non- motorized equipment and machinery less than 30 Non-shrink Class I horsepower. Machinery over 30 horsepower and equipment under 30 horsepower but subject to severe shock Non-shrink Class III loads and high vibration. Filling blockout spaces for embedded items such as railing posts, gate guide frames,etc. Non-shrink Class II (Class I FFWHI101 03600-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 where placement time exceeds ` 15 minutes) Toppings and concrete fill less than 4-inches thick. Grout Fill,Topping Grout Toppings and concrete fill greater than 4-inches thick. Class B Concrete in accordance with Section 03300, Cast-In- All anchor bolts and reinforcing steel set in grout. Place Concrete. Refer to Section 03200, _ Concrete Reinforcement, and Section 05501,Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Any application not listed above,where grout is Inserts. — called for on the Drawings. Non-shrink Class I, unless noted otherwise 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the - following, except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. ACI 211.1, Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavy-Weight and Mass Concrete. — ACI 301, Specification for Structural Concrete (Includes ASTM Standards referred to herein). ASTM C 33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. ASTM C 109, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (using 2-in. or 50 mm. Cube Specimens). ASTM C 150, Specification for Portland Cement. R ASTM C 230, Specification for Flow Table for use in Tests of Hydraulic Cement. ASTM C 531, Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical- Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. ASTM C 579, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes. ASTM C 8271 Test Method for Early Volume Change of Cementitious Mixtures. 0. ASTM C 882, Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete. �. 11. ASTM C 937, Specification for Grout Fluidifier for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete. 12. ASTM C 939, Text Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method). - 3. ASTM C 1107, Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non- shrink). FfWH1101 03600-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUT — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 14. ASTM C 1181, Test Method for Compressive Creep of Chemical-Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts. 15. ASTM D 696, Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics. B. Field Tests: 1. Compression test specimens will be taken during. construction from the first placement of each type of grout, and at intervals thereafter as selected by the Engineer to ensure continued compliance with these specifications. The specimens will be made by the Engineer or its representative. 2. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for non-shrink grout will be performed as specified in ASTM C 109 at intervals during construction as selected by the Engineer. A set of three specimens will be made for testing at seven days, 28 days, and each additional time period as appropriate. 3. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for epoxy grout will be performed as specified in ASTM C 579, Method B, at intervals during construction as selected by the Engineer. A set of three specimens will be made for testing at seven days, and each earlier time period as appropriate. 4. The cost of all laboratory tests on grout will be borne by the Owner, but Contractor shall assist in obtaining specimens for testing. However, Contractor shall be charged for the cost of any additional tests and investigation on work performed which does not conform to the requirements of the specifications. Contractor shall supply all materials necessary for fabricating the test specimens. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings, submit for approval the following: 1. For Grout Fill and Construction Joint Grout, copies of grout design mix and laboratory test reports for grout strength tests. B. Reports and Certificates, submit for approval the following: 1. For proprietary materials, submit copies of manufacturer's certification of compliance with the specified properties for Class I, II, and III grouts. 2. Submit certified testing lab reports for ASTM C 1107, Grade B and Grade C (as revised herein) requirements for Class I and II grouts tested at a fluid consistency for temperatures of 45, 73.4, 90OF with a p of life of 30 mi nutes at fluid consistency. 3. Submit certification that materials meet specification requirements for nonproprietary materials. 4. Submit certifications that all grouts used on the project are free of chlorides or other chemicals causing corrosion. 5. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all proprietary materials. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Grout materials from manufacturers shall be delivered in f,. unopened containers and shall bear intact manufacturer's labels. FTWH1101 03600-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Storage of Materials: Grout materials shall be stored in a dry shelter and shall be protected from moisture. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUTS A. General: Non-shrink grout shall be a prepackaged, inorganic, Fowable, non-gas- liberating, non-metallic, cement-based grout requiring only the addition of water. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each bag or other container in which the materials are packaged. The specific formulation for each class of non-shrink l grout specified herein shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application. B. Class I Non-Shrink Grout: ]_ Class I non-shrink grouts shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 7000 psi. This grout is for precision grouting and where water tightness and non- shrink reliability in both plastic and hardened states are critical. Refer to areas of application as specified herein. �. Shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107 Grade C and B (as modified below) �- when tested using the amount of water required to achieve the following properties: a. Fluid consistency (20 to 30 seconds) in accordance with ASTM C 939. b. At temperatures of 45, 73.4, and 95°F. 3. The length change from placement to time of final set shall not have a shrinkage greater than the amount of expansion measured at 3 or 14 days. The expansion ` at 3 or 14 days shall not exceed the 28-day expansion. 4. The non-shrink property is not based on a chemically generated gas or gypsum expansion. ` Fluid grout shall pass through the flow cone, with a continuous flow, one hour after mixing. �. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Masterflow 928, as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc. b. Five Star Grout, as manufactured by Five Star Products, Inc. c. Hi-Flow Grout, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company C. ass II Non-Shrink Grout: Class II non-shrink grouts shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 7000 psi. This grout is for general purpose grouting applications as specified herein. 2. Shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107 and the following requirements when tested using the amount of water required to achieve the following properties: a. Flowable consistency (140 percent flow on ASTM C 230, five drops in 30 seconds). b. Fluid working time of at least 15 minutes. c. Flowable for at least 30 minutes. FfWH1101 03600-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3. The grout when tested shall not bleed at maximum allowed water. 4. The non-shrink property is not based on a chemically generated gas or gypsum expansion. 5. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Set Grout, as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc. b. NBEC Grout, as manufactured by Five Star Products, Inc. c. NS Grout, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company. D. Class III Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: 1. Epoxy grout shall be a pourable, non-shrink, 100 percent solids system. T he epoxy grout system shall have three components: resin, hardener, and specially blended aggregate, all premeasured and prepackaged. The resin component shall not contain any non-reactive diluents. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) or other highly volatile and hazardous reactive diluents are not acceptable. Variation of component ratios is not permitted, unless specifically recommended - by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each container in which the materials are packaged. The following properties shall be attained with the minimum quantity of aggregate allowed by the manufacturer. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. E3-HP, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b. Sikadur 42 Grout Pak, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. c. Five Star Epoxy Grout, as manufactured by Five Star Products, Incorporated. 3. The vertical volume change at all times before hardening shall be between 0.0 percent shrinkage and four percent expansion when measured according to ASTM C 827 (modified for epoxy grouts by using an indicator ball with a specific gravity between 0.9 and 1.1). Alternately, epoxy grouts which maintain an effective bearing area of not less than 95 percent are acceptable. 4. The length change after hardening shall be negligible (less than 0.0006 in/in) and the coefficient of thermal expansion shall be less than 0.00003 in/in/F when tested in accordance to the requirements of ASTM C 531. 5. The compressive creep at one year shall be negligible (less than .001 in/in) when tested under a 400 psi constant load at 140OF in accordance to the requirements of ASTM C 1181. 6. The seven day compressive strength shall be a minimum of 13,000 psi when tested in accordance to the requirements of ASTM C 579. 7. The grout shall be capable of maintaining at least a flowable consistency for a minimum of 30 minutes at 70°F. 8. The shear bond strength to portland cement concrete shall be greater than the shear strength of the concrete when tested in accordance to the requirements of ASTM C 882. 9. The effective bearing area shall be a minimum of 95 percent. E. Grout Fill, Topping Grout: 1. Grout for topping of slabs and concrete fill for built-up surfaces of tank, channel, and basin bottoms shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and admixtures proportioned and mixed as specified herein. All FTWH1101 03600-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 materials and procedures specified for normal concrete in Section 03300, Cast-In- Place Concrete, shall apply except as noted otherwise herein. 2. Topping grout and concrete fill shall contain a minimum of 564 pounds of cement per cubic yard with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.45. Where concrete fill is thicker than 4-inches, Class B concrete, as specified in Section 03300, Cast-In- Place Concrete, may be used when accepted by the Engineer. 3. Coarse aggregate shall be graded as follows: U.S. STANDARD PERCENT BY SIEVE SIZE WEIGHT PASSING 1/2-inch 100 3/8-inch 90 to 100 No. 4 20 to 55 No. 8 5 to 30 No. 16 0 to 10 No. 30 0 Final mix design shall be as determined by trial mix design under supervision of the approved testing laboratory. 5. Strength: Minimum compressive strength of Grout Fill at the end of 28 days shall be 4000 psi. F. Construction Joint Grout: 1. Construction Joint Grout approximates Class B concrete, as specified in Section _ 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete, with aggregate coarser than 1/2-inch removed. The mix is to be designed as flowable with a high mortar content. It is intended to be placed over construction joints and mixed with Class A concrete as specified in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete. The mix requirements are as follows: a. Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi minimum at 28-days. b. Maximum Water - Cement Ratio: 0.45 by weight. c. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, No. 8 size. d. Fine Aggregate: A STM C33, approximately 60 percent by weight of total aggregate. e. Air Content: 6±1 percent. f. Minimum Cement Content: 752 pounds per cubic yard. G. Requirements for Grout Fill and Construction Joint Grout 1. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the Project for grout required. Comply with - ACI 211.1 and report to Engineer the following data: a. Complete identification of aggregate source of supply. b. Tests of aggregates for compliance with specified requirements. c. Scale weight of each aggregate. d. Absorbed water in each aggregate. e. Brand, type and composition of cement. FfWH1101 03600-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUT MOTOR AND 7GEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 f. Brand, type and amount of each admixture. g. Amounts of water used in trial mixes. h. Proportions of each material per cubic yard. i. Gross weight and yield per cubic yard of trial mixtures. j. Measured slump. k. Measured air content. I. Compressive strength developed at seven days and 28 days, from not less than three test specimens cast for each seven day and 28-day test, and for each design mix. 2. Submit written reports to Engineer of proposed mix of grout at least 30 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin grout production until mixes have been approved by Engineer. 3. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select grout proportions, prepare test specimens and conduct strength tests as specified in ACI 301, Section 4 - Proportioning. However, mixes need not be designed for greater than 125 percent of the specified strength, regardless of the standard deviation of the production facility. 4. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select grout proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301, Section 4. 5. Admixtures: Use air - entraining admixture in all grout. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. Do not use admixtures which have not been incorporated and tested in the accepted design mix, unless otherwise authorized in writing by Engineer. 2.02 CURING MATERIALS A. Curing materials shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete, and as recommended by the manufacturer of prepackaged grouts. 2.03 CONSISTENCY A. The consistency of grouts shall be that necessary to completely fill the space to be grouted for the particular application. B. The slump for topping grout and grout fill shall be adjusted to match placement and finishing conditions, but shall not exceed 4-inches. C. The slump for Construction Joint Grout shall be 7 f 1-inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Contractor shall examine the substrate and conditions under which grout is to be placed and notify Engineer, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed FfWH1101 03600-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION a A. General: 1. Place grout as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If manufacturer's instructions conflict with the Specifications do not proceed until Engineer provides clarification. �. Manufacturers of proprietary products shall make available upon 72 hours notification the services of a qualified, full time employee to aid in assuring proper use of the product under job conditions. Placing grout shall conform to temperature and weather limitations in Section - 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete. Grout shall be cured following manufacturer's instructions for prepackaged grout and the requirements in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete, for grout fill and topping grout. B. Columns, Beams and Equipment Bases: w 1. Epoxy grout: After shimming equipment to proper grade, securely tighten anchor bolts. Properly form around the base plates, allowing sufficient room around the edges for placing the grout. Adequate depth between the bottom of the base plate and the top of concrete base must be provided to assure that the void is completely filled with the epoxy grout. 2. Non-shrink, non-metallic grout: After shimming columns, beams and equipment to proper grade, securely tighten anchor bolts. Properly form around the base plates allowing sufficient room around the edges for placing the grout. Adequate depth between the bottom of the base plate and the top of concrete base must be provided to assure that the void is completely filled with the non-shrink, non-metallic grout. C. Handrails and Railings: 4 1. After posts have been properly inserted into the holes or sleeves, fill the annular space between posts and sleeve with the non-shrink, non-metallic grout. Bevel grout at juncture with post so that moisture flows away from post. — D. Construction Joints: 1. Place a 6-inch minimum thick layer of Construction Joint Grout over the contact -- surface of the old concrete at the interface of horizontal construction joints as specified in Section 03250, Concrete Joints and Embedded Items, and Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.E. Topping Grout: 1. All mechanical, electrical, and finish work shall be completed prior to placement of topping grout. The base slab shall be given a roughened textured surface by sandblasting or hydroblasting exposing the aggregates to ensure bonding to the base slab. 2. The minimum thickness of grout topping shall be 1-inch. FfWH1101 03600-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3. The base slab shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted prior to placing topping and fill. N o topping concrete shall be placed until the slab is complete free from standing pools or ponds of water. A thin coat of neat Type II cement slurry shall be broomed into the surface of the slab and topping or fill concrete shall be placed while the slurry is still wet. The topping and fill shall be compacted by rolling or tamping, brought to established grade, and floated. Grouted fill for tank and basin bottoms where scraping mechanisms are to be installed shall be screeded by blades attached to the revolving mechanism of the equipment in accordance with the procedures outlined by the equipment manufacturer after the grout is brought to the established grade. 4. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. S. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge to detect high and low spots which shall be immediately eliminated. W hen the topping has hardened sufficiently, it shall be steel troweled to a smooth surface free from pinholes and other imperfections. An approved type of mechanical trowel may be used as an assist in this operation, but the last pass over the surface shall be by hand-troweling. During finishing, no water, dry cement or mixture of dry cement and sand shall be applied to the surface. 6. Cure and protect the grout topping as specified in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete. F. Grout Fill 1. All mechanical, electrical, and finish work shall be completed prior to placement of grout fill. Grout fill shall be mixed, placed, and finished as required in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. The minimum thickness of grout fill shall be 1-inch. Where the finished surface of grout fill is to form an intersecting angle of less than 45 degrees with the concrete surface it is to be placed against, a key shall be formed in the concrete surface at the intersection point. The key shall be a minimum of 3-1/2-inches wide by 1-1/2-inches deep. 3. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge to verify that the surface slopes uniformly to drain and to detect high and low spots which shall be immediately eliminated. When the grout fill has hardened sufficiently, it shall be steel troweled to a smooth surface free from pinholes and other imperfections. During finishing, no water, dry cement or mixture of dry cement and sand shall be applied to the surface. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 03600-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to repair or otherwise modify parts of in-place concrete. Work under this Section includes bonding new concrete and appurtenances to in-place concrete. B. Work under this Section may also be performed as a remedy for improperly or poorly placed concrete, or concrete damaged during construction operations. Such work shall be performed only after receiving written directions from the Engineer. C. The concrete surface repairs due to demolition, removal of equipment, deterioration or spalling concrete, etc. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03251 - Concrete Joints. D. Section 03600 - Grout. E. Section 03740 - Modifications and Repair to Concrete. F. Section 05501 -Anchor Bolts, Expansion Anchors and Concrete Inserts. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for use. The PW submittal shall include the Manufacturer's installation and/or application instructions. B. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified herein are proposed by the Contractor, submit Manufacturer's substitutions for approval prior to delivery to the Site. Submitted data shall demonstrate compliance with all requirements of this Specification or deviations shall be clearly noted. C. Submit documentation of Manufacturer qualifications and names of projects where products have been used, in accordance with Paragraph 1.05.0 herein. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). Standard specifications as referenced. FTWH1101 03740-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 s SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise altered until authorization is given by the Engineer.B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making openings in existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all necessary barriers, shoring and bracing, and other protective devices shall be erected to prevent damage to the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work to protect personnel, to control dust, and to prevent damage to the structures or contents by falling or flying _ debris. Unless otherwise permitted, shown, or specified, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete. C. Manufacturer qualifications. The Manufacturer of the specified products shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the manufacture of such products, and shall have an ongoing program to provide training and technical support for the Contractor's personnel. - 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the Manufacturer's name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. B. Store products as recommended by the Manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. general _ 1. Materials shall comply with these Specifications and any applicable federal, state or local regulations. All materials used shall be approved for use in potable water facilities. �. The repair mortar shall be a blend of selected Portland cements, specially graded aggregates, admixtures for controlling setting time and workability and any other materials required to make the necessary repairs or modifications. 3. Concrete bonder to be sprayed on large surface areas in contact with wastewater, chlorine and ammonia. Properties of the cured material. a. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109 Modified) b. 3800 psi min. at 7 days. c. 4800 psi min. at 28 days. - d. Splitting Tensile strength (ASTM C-496) e. 500 psi min. at 28 days. f. Flexural strength (ASTM C-78) g. 1300 psi min. at 28 days. h. Bond strength (ASTM C-882 Modified) i. 2000 psi min. at 28 days. FTWH1101 03740-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 5. Provide repair mortar as follows: a. Sika-Top 122 plus or Sika-Top 123 plus for concrete repair as manufactured by Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ. b. EMACO R310 C1, by BASF, The Chemical Company. 6. Color to match surrounding material color which is exposed to view. B. Expansion Joint Repair: Provide fill joint Sika fix HH+ and Sikadur-Combiflex. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Apply methods specified in this Section as indicated on the Drawings, specified, or as directed or approved by the Engineer. Finishes, joints, reinforcements, sealants, etc., shall be as specified in their respective Sections of this Specification. B. All commercial products specified in this Section shall be mixed and applied in strict compliance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. C. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint or control joint, the repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation between components on either side of the joint. D. When drilling holes in concrete for dowels or bolts, drilling shall stop if reinforcing steel is encountered. The hole shall be relocated to avoid rebar. Rebar shall not be cut. Where possible, rebar locations shall be identified prior to drilling using "rebar locators" so that drilled hole locations may be adjusted to avoid rebar interference. 3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL A. Concrete required to be removed shall be done by line drilling at the given limits followed by chipping or jack-hammering, as appropriate in areas where concrete is to be taken out. Remove concrete in such a manner that surrounding concrete or existing reinforcing to be left in place and existing in place equipment are not damaged. B. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting or core drilling and no new material is to be placed on the cut surface, a coating or surface treatment of epoxy paste shall be applied to the entire cut surface to a thickness of 1/4 inch. C. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing concrete will be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or specified, the edge of concrete removal shall be a one inch deep saw cut on the exposed surface of the existing concrete. D. Concrete specified to be left in place which is damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired by approved means to the satisfaction of the Engineer. FTWH1101 03740-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 .� SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS nr Contract No.01632 3.03 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas requiring patching, repairs or modifications as specified. B. Where bonding new concrete to existing concrete, the existing surface shall be roughened to a minimum 1/4 inch amplitude. C. Where bonding to existing surfaces, remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond inhibiting materials from the surface by mechanical means, i.e. - abrasive blasting, grinding, etc. Existing surface material shall be removed to a minimum of 1/2 inch in depth. Irregular voids or surface stones need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into parent concrete. D. Existing reinforcing which is to be incorporated in new concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to remove all loose material and products of corrosion before proceeding with the repair. If more than half of the diameter of the reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out behind the steel. The distance chipped behind the steel shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch. Reinforcing to be left in place shall not be damaged during the demolition operation. It shall be cut, bent or lapped to new reinforcing as directed and _ provided with one inch minimum cover all around. 3.04 CONNECTION METHODS A. The following are specific concrete "connection methods" to be used. i�. Method A: Bonding by using cement paste. After the existing concrete surface at ` connection has been roughened and cleaned, thoroughly moisten the existing surface with water. Brush on a 1/16 inch layer of cement and water mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately after application of cement paste, place new concrete or grout mixture as shown on the Drawings. Method B: Bonding by using bonding agent. After the existing concrete surface has been roughened and cleaned, apply epoxy bonding agent at connection surface. The field preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent shall comply strictly with the Manufacturer's recommendations. Place new concrete or grout mixture as shown on the Drawings within time constraints recommended by the Manufacturer to ensure bond. — 1 Method C: Drilled dowels or bolts using epoxy paste. Drill a hole 1/4 inch larger than the diameter of the dowel. The hole shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just prior to installing epoxy. The drilled hole shall first be filled with -- epoxy paste and the dowel bolt buttered with paste, and then the dowel/bolt shall be inserted by tapping. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, deformed bars shall be drilled and set to a depth of ten bar diameters and smooth bars shall be drilled and set to a depth of 15 bar diameters. If not noted or shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall request details regarding the size and depth of anchor bolts from the Engineer. 4. Method D: Use method B &C simultaneously. $. Method E: Drilled dowels or bolts using cement grout. Drill a hole 1/2 inch larger than the diameter of the dowel. The hole shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just prior to installing grout. The drilled hole shall first be filled with Non- FTWH1101 03740-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 Shrink Grout and then the dowel inserted by turning and tapping to the specified embedment depth. 3.05 CEMENT GROUTING A. Cement grouting shall be as specified in Section 03600 - Grout. l END OF SECTION FTWH1101 03740-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 03900 CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all necessary materials, labor, tools, equipment and other incidentals required to repair concrete cracks where applies in scope of work as directed by the Owner's Representative. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01045 - Demolition, Cutting and Patching. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unit prices include the cost of materials, labor, tools, equipment, and testing to determine leaks. B. Repair Cracks: Paid for by the linear foot of crack repaired. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. C. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. D. ASTM C 321 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars. E. ASTM C 881 - Standard Spec for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. F. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. G. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. H. ASTM D 695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. I. ASTM D 790 - Standard test Methods for Flexural properties of unreinforced and reinforced Plastics and electrical Insulating Materials. J. AWS DIA - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; Am Welding Society. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. FfWH1101 03900-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 w SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Product Data: Include Manufacturer's printed data sheets specifying chemical and ` physical properties, uses and limitations of use, maintenance instructions, and general recommendations. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Provide all bonding, patching, anchoring, and injecting materials by a single Manufacturer and provided through a single source. B. Installer: Company specializing in operations of the types required for this project, with not less than 5 y ears of documented experience and approved by the Manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver all concrete repair materials to project site in Manufacturer's original, unopened containers, clearly labeled. B. Comply with Manufacturers' instructions for storage and handling, including maximum shelf life limitations. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with temperature limitations and precautions for use recommended by Manufacturer of rehabilitation products. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide concrete rehabilitation products as manufactured by Dayton Manufacturing Y Company; www.daytonsuperior.com. B. Sika Corporation; www.sikausa.com -- 2.02 EPDXY REPAIR PRODUCTS A. Anchoring Materials: Medium/Slow Set, Anchoring Epoxy: Dowel-Loc high modulus, igh strength epoxy paste; complying with ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class B and and with properties as follows: Pot life: 16 minutes at 77 degrees F (25 degrees C). 2. Pot life: 30 minutes at 77 degrees F (25 degrees C). . Tensile strength: Minimum 6,000 psi (41.3 MPa), per ASTM D 638. 4. Flexural strength: Minimum 8,000 psi (55 MPa), per ASTM D 790. $. Compressive strength: Minimum 10,000 psi (69 MPa), per ASTM D 695. Bond strength: Minimum 525 psi (3.6 MPa) after 24 hours, per ASTM C 321. �. Elongation: 2-3 percent, per ASTM D 638. B. Bonding Agents: FfWH1101 03900-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1. High Modulus, Clear Binding Epoxy: Pebble-Bond high modulus, medium viscosity, moisture insensitive epoxy binder/bonding system; complying with ASTM C 881, Type II, Grade 2, Class B and C; and with properties as follows: a. Pot life: 21 minutes at 77 degrees F (25 degrees Q. b. Gel time: 6-8 hours at 77 degrees F (25 degrees Q. c. Tensile strength: Minimum 6,000 psi (41.3 MPa), per ASTM D 638. d. Flexural strength: Minimum 7,000 psi (48 MPa), per ASTM D 790. e. Compressive strength: Minimum 6,500 psi (45 MPa), per ASTM D 695. f. Bond strength: Minimum 600 psi (4.1 MPa) after 24 hours, per ASTM C 321. g. Elongation: 22 percent, per ASTM D 638. 2. Injection Epoxy for Voids and Large Cracks: Void-Loc low exotherm, moisture- insensitive epoxy resin system; complying with ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 1, Class B and C; and with properties as follows: a. Pot life: 1/2 hour to 4 hours at 77 degrees F (25 degrees C), depending on volume mixed and mix ratio. b. Compressive strength: Minimum 11,000 psi (76 MPa) per ASTM D 695. c. Bond strength: Minimum 500 psi (3.5 MPa) after 24 hours, per ASTM C 321. d. Elongation: 80 percent at 1:1 mix ratio; 30 percent at 3:2 mix ratio; and 6 percent at 2:1 mix ratio. e. Water absorption: Maximum 0.45 percent at 1:1 mix ratio; 0.30 percent at 3:2 mix ratio; and 0.23 percent at 2:1 mix ratio. C. Epoxy Gels: 1. Pre-Injection Concrete Sealant: Gel-Loc R high modulus, high strength, moisture insensitive epoxy system; complying with ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class B and C; and with properties as follows: a. Pot life: 15 minutes at 77 degrees F (25 degrees Q. b. Gel time: 2-3 hours. c. Tensile strength: Minimum 10,000 psi (69 MPa), per ASTM D 638. d. Flexural strength: Minimum 12,000 psi (83 MPa), per ASTM D 790. e. Compressive strength: Minimum 14,000 psi (96.5 MPa), per ASTM D 695. f. Bond strength: Minimum 600 psi (4.1 MPa) after 24 hours, per ASTM C 321. g. Elongation: 2 percent. h. Water absorption: Maximum 0.1 percent after 24 hours. 2. Semi-Flexible Bonding Gel: Gel-Loc 25 moisture insensitive epoxy bonding agent; complying with ASTM C 881, Type I, Grade 3, Class A, B, and C; and with properties as follows: a. Pot life: 40 minutes at 77 degrees F (25 degrees C), with gel time of 6-8 hours. b. Pot life: 11 minutes at 77 degrees F (25 degrees C), with gel time of 2-3 hours. c. Pot life: 7 mi nutes at 77 d egrees F (25 d egrees C), with gel time of 1-2 hours. d. Tensile strength: Minimum 5,000 psi (34.5 MPa), per ASTM D 638. FfWH1101 03900-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 e. Flexural strength: Minimum 3,000 psi (20.8 MPa), per ASTM D 790. f. Compressive strength: Minimum 5,000 psi (34.5 MPa), per ASTM D 695. g. Bond strength: Minimum 500 psi (3.4 MPa) after 48 hours, per ASTM C 321. h. Elongation: 25 percent, per ASTM D 638. i. Water absorption: Maximum 0.35 percent after 24 hours. D. Injection Resins: High Modulus, Low Viscosity Injection Epoxy: Injection-Loc XLV high strength epoxy crack injection system; complying with ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 1, Class B and C; and with properties as follows: 1. Pot life: 18-20 minutes at 77 degrees F (25 degrees Q. 2. Gel time: 6-7 hours. 3. Tensile strength: Minimum 10,000 psi (69 MPa), per ASTM D 638. 4. Flexural strength: Minimum 12,000 psi (83 MPa), per ASTM D 790. 5. Compressive strength: Minimum 12,000 psi (83 MPa), per ASTM D 695. 6. Bond strength: Minimum 600 psi (4.1 MPa) after 24 hours, per ASTM C 321. 7. Elongation: 2-5 percent, per ASTM D 638. 8. Water absorption: Maximum 0.15 percent after 24 hours. E. (track 1/8 inch and smaller: Provide Sikadur 31 and Sikadur 35. F. The color of the bonding agents shall match the existing color of surrounding surfaces if exposed to view. 2.03 MIXES A. Epoxy Repair Products: Mix epoxy products in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions for intended application and project conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Locate areas to be repaired and mark boundaries using straight lines. B. Verify that concrete surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. rotect adjacent areas from damage due to concrete repair and rehabilitation work. ~ B. Install temporary supports before beginning concrete removal. C. ;Cn sound concrete surfaces to be repaired using water and wire brush. 3.03 K REPAIR A. Flush out cracks and voids with chemical agent or chemical solvent to remove dirt and laitance prior to epoxy injection. FTWH1101 03900-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLL WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR MOTOR AND sWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Provide temporary entry ports spaced to accomplish movement of fluids between ports, complying with Manufacturer's recommendations. Provide temporary seal at concrete surface to prevent adhesive leakage. C. Inject epoxy adhesive into prepared ports under pressure, using equipment appropriate for the particular application. Begin injection at lower entry port and continue until adhesive appears at adjacent entry port; continue from port to port until each crack is filled. D. After epoxy adhesive has set, remove temporary seal and excess adhesive. Grind surfaces smooth. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 03900-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units (CMU). B. Mortar and pointing mortar. C. Grout for masonry. D. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. E. Parged masonry surfaces. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03251 -Joint 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM A82 - Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. C. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM C62 - Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). E. ASTM C73 - Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-Lime Brick). F. ASTM C90 - Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. G. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement. H. ASTM C129 - Non-Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. I. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. J. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. K. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. L. ASTM C216 - Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). FfWH1101 04200-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UNIT MASONRY MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 M. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. N. ASTM C404 -Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 0. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry. P. ASTM C595 - Blended Hydraulic Cement. , Q. ASTM C652 - Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). R. IMIAC - Intemational Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. S. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices rt and Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement, accessories. B. Product Data 1. Provide data for masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement. 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, positioning of reinforcement, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 3. Include design mix complying with the Property specification of ASTM C270, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. 4, Design Data: Indicate required mortar strength, masonry unit assembly strength in all planes, supportive test data. C. Samples 1. Samples: Submit four samples of each type of face brick, units to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range. 2. Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range. D. Reports 1. Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C270 component mortar materials to requirements of ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C780. 2, Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C1019. - E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. _ 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. FTWH1101 04200-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UNIT MASONRY MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS f_ Contract No.01632 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept masonry units on site. Inspect for damage. C. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Hot Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the masonry work with installation of windows, doors, frames, louvers and other items to be built-in. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Concrete Masonry Units 1. Featherlite Block Co. B. Prefaced Concrete Masonry Units 1. Burns & Russell Co. 2. Trenwyth Industries, Inc. C. Portland Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime 1. E ssroc Materials, Inc. 2. Glen-Gery Corporation. 3. Lafarge Corporation. 4. Lehigh Portland Cement Co. 5. Riverton Corporation. FfWH1101 04200-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UNIT MASONRY MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 D. M rtar Pigments 1 Davis Colors. 2 Lafarge Corporation. 3 Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc. E. J�int Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors 11 Dur-O-Wal, Inc. Z Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 4, Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. 5. National Wire Products Industries. 6. Southern Construction Products. F. Admixtures 1. Integral CMU Water Repellent a. W.R. Grace &Co. b. Master Builders, Inc. c. Addiment, Inc. 2, Cold-Weather Admixture a. Euclid Chemical Co. b. W.R. Grace &Co. 3, Water-Repellent Admixture a. W.R. Grace &Co. b. Master Builders, Inc. c. Addiment, Inc. G. Insulation Inserts 1. W.R. Grace &Co. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS u A. Hollow Non-Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C129, Type I - Moisture Controlled medium weight, with integral water-repellent admixture. �- 2.03 BRICK UNITS A. Face Brick 1. Conformance: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 2. Size and Shape: Match Existing. t 3. Color: To match existing. 2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE L A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 1 after fabrication, cold drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A82, FfWH1101 04200-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UNIT MASONRY MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS ,� Contract No.01632 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A580 Type 304, 3/16 inch side rods with 3/16 inch cross ties. B. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: At Contractor's option, either three sided Truss type; without moisture drip or two sided Truss type with adjustable double eye and pintel, steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 3 after fabrication, cold drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A82, stainless steel conforming to ASTM A580 Type 304, 3/16 inch side rods with 3/16 inch cross ties. C. Veneer Wall Ties 1. Corrugated Type: Formed sheet metal, 7/8 x 7 inch size x 16 gage thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123 B2 steel finish. D. Reinforcing Steel: A s specified in Sections 03200 and 03300 an d as indicated on drawings. �- E. Mortar Guards: Any standard manufactured system of any of the listed acceptable accessory manufacturer's. 2.05 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color, or otherwise selected by Architect. `- B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type N. D. Grout Course Aggregate: ASTM C404. E. Water: Clean and potable. F. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment color to match existing. 2.06 ADMIXTURES A. Plasticizer: A s recommended by primary materials manufacturer. B. Water Repellent: Liquid type; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. 2.07 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Non-Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: Portland cement and lime, ASTM C270, Type N using the Property specification. 2.08 GROUT MIXES A. 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Course grout. F I WH1101 04200-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UNIT MASONRY MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.09 GROUT MIXING A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. ! D. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. C. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Mortar Mixing 1, Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. 2� Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. 3. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. _ Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. 4. Provide water-repellent admixture in mortar for all exterior exposed masonry 5. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. & If water i s lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. 7� Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), or two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. B. Coursing 1. General a. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. b. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. FTWH1101 04200-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WfP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UNIT MASONRY MOTOR AND rHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Bond: Running to match existing. b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches to match existing. c. Mortar Joints: Match Existing. C. Placing and Bonding 1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. 2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 3. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 4. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. 5. Interlock intersections and external corners. 6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. 7. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 8. Cut mortar joints flush where resilient base is scheduled, cavity insulation vapor barrier adhesive i s applied, or bitumen dampproofing is applied. 9. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint. 10. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. D. Reinforcement and Anchorage - Single Wythe Masonry 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 5. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. FTWH1101 04200-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UNIT MASONRY MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. H. Variation From Joint Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch and minus 0 inches. I. Maximum Variation from Plane of Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. J. Maximum Variation of Panel from Plane: 1/8 inch. 3.05 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, grounds. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. _ B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.B. Inspect all masonry work. C. Inspect engineered masonry work. D. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. E. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C780. F. Vest and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019. _ G. Test mortar and masonry units to ASTM C1072, E447, and E518; test in conjunction with masonry unit sections specified. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. F. Do not scratch or deface units. _ 3.08 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. FTWH1101 04200-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UNIT MASONRY MOTOR AND7EAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS _ Contract No.01632 B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. C. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners. Provide protection without damaging completed work. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 04200-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UNIT MASONRY MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 05210 STEEL 30IST FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Open-web K-series steel joists. 2. Joist accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, for installing bearing plates in - concrete. 2. Section 05500, METAL FABRICATIONS, for furnishing steel bearing plates. 3. Section 09900, PROTECTIVE COATINGS, for prime painting. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Special Joists: Joists requiring modification by the Manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders." 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated on drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 1. Comprehensive engineering analysis signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation. C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. D. Mill certificates signed by Manufacturers of bolts certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. FTWH1101 05210-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- STEEL JOIST FRAMING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. - 1. Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with SJI standard specifications and load tables. 2. Assumes responsibility for engineering special joists to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 3, Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of joists that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. B. SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, "Specifications"), applicable to types of joists indicated. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for chord and web members. B. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex- head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.C. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. y 1. Finish: Plain, uncoated. 2.02 PRIMERS _ A. Priming of joists and joist accessories is specified in Section 09905, PROTECTIVE ATINGS FTWH1101 05210-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- STEEL JOIST FRAMING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.03 OPEN-WEB K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series," in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord; of joist type indicated. 1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists. B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. C. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications" recommended magnitudes without the option to neglect camber. D. Equip bearing ends of joists with Manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 2.04 JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. 1. Furnish additional erection bridging if required. 2. Furnish additional bridging required to resist net wind uplift indicated on drawings. 3. Bridging indicated on drawings is schematic only and should be interpreted as an additional requirement to that bridging required above. Bridging shown on the drawings should not be interpreted as limiting the installation of additional bridging or negating the joist supplier's need to design the bridging for the above requirements. B. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Section 05500, METAL FABRICATIONS. C. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist Manufacturer to complete joist installation. 2.05 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories to be primed by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. B. Apply one shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick. C. is specified in Section 09905, PROTECTIVE COATINGS. FTWH1101 05210-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- STEEL JOIST FRAMING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. _ B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications,"joist Manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. 4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads have been applied. R C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures _ for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with RCSC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high- strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements. E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. C. Bplted connections will be visually inspected. 1fI High-strength, field-bolted connections will be tested and verified according to procedures in RCSC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts." FTWH1101 05210-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- STEEL JOIST FRAMING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 D. Correct deficiencies in Work that inspections and test reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements. E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.04 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing plates and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. 2. Apply a compatible primer of the same type as the shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Manufacturer and Installer, that ensures joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 05210-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- STEEL JOIST FRAMING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS or Contract No.01632 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Shelf angles. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 5. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections. 6. Miscellaneous steel trim. 7. Metal bollards. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: FTWH1101 05500-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- METAL FABRICATIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 Paint products. B. op Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional Engineer responsible for their preparation. v C. Mill Certificates: Signed by Manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.D. Welding certificates. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 4. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel." 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. - 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. FTWH1101 05500-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- METAL FABRICATIONS MOTOR AND S"HGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.02 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316L. F C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L. D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 283, Grade C or D. E. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. H. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Material: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653, structural steel, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness. I. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.03 NONFERROUS METALS A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6. C. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632,Alloy 6061-T6. D. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26, Alloy 443.0-F. E. Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 36, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent copper). F. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze). FTWH1101 05500-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 r SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- METAL FABRICATIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 G. Bfonze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 (leaded semired brass). H. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151, Alloy UNS No. C74500. I. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze). 2.04 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. -- Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for - n(js, Alloy Group 1. C. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1. G. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1. H. Lbck Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1. I. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable - iron or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot- dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. J. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a I oad equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1, Material for Anchors: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594. K. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Provide 316 SS anchor bolts. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal _ alloy welded. FTWH1101 05500-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WfP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- METAL FABRICATIONS -- MOTOR AND rHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9, painting and protective coatings Sections. C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Products: a. Benjamin Moore &Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.06 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. FTWH1101 05500-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 - SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- METAL FABRICATIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. - G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. - H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS - A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. _ B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed. C. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 2.08 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of - clear span but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. " 2.09 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to TM concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. F FWH1101 05500-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- METAL FABRICATIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. C. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. D. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete. 2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer. 2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim, where indicated with zinc-rich primer. 2.13 METAL BOLLARDS .. A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. B. Fabricate bollards with 3/4-inch- thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all 4 corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts. C. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb alignment of bollards. FfWH1101 05500-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- METAL FABRICATIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 D. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe or 1/4- inch wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch less than ID of bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 3/4 inch steel machine bolt. 2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.15 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard _ listed below: 1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications _ and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: C. Retain or revise both subparagraphs below to suit Project service conditions of installed work. Insert other exposures and preparation requirements where applicable. Refer to SSPC's painting manual. Both subparagraphs apply to locations that would normally remain dry in service. 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 2.16 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. C. Bright, Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. D. Pull Satin Finish: No. 6. T E. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign Matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. FTWH1101 05500-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- METAL FABRICATIONS — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.17 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified). C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. FTWH1101 05500-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 .h SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- METAL FABRICATIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.02 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS ` A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including Manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on - Shop Drawings. 3.03 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before - packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, w unless otherwise indicated. 3.04 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards to existing construction with adhesive anchor rods. Provide four 3/4- inch threaded anchor rods at each bollard, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Embed anchor rods at least 7 inches in concrete. Verify existing slab thickness.B. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 6 ches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for - consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. C. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in concrete by inserting into pipe -- sleeves preset into concrete or formed or core-drilled holes not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of sleeve. Fill annular space around internal sleeves solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout Manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward internal sleeve. D. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align sleeves in holes 6 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in position until concrete has cured. - E. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4-inch machine bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner will furnish padlocks. F. II bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. ._ Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. FTWH1101 05500-10 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- METAL FABRICATIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 05500-11 SEPTEMBER 2011 �r SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- METAL FABRICATIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 05501 ANCHOR BOLTS, EXPANSION ANCHORS AND CONCRETE INSERTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide anchor bolts, expansion anchors and concrete inserts including but not limited - to: 1. Rails. 2. Hangers and brackets. 3. Equipment. 4. Piping. 5. Grating and floor plate. 6. Electrical, Plumbing and HVAC Work. 7. Wood and plastic fabrications. 8. Partitions and ceilings. B. This Section includes all bolts, anchors and inserts required for the Work but not specified under other Sections. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit the following: Representative samples of bolts, anchors and inserts as may be requested by the Engineer. His review will be for type and finish only. Compliance with all other requirements is exclusive responsibility of Contractor. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Setting drawings and templates for location and installation of anchorage devices. 2. Copies of Manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams and installation instructions for the devices. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM A307, Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 2. ASTM A193 Type 316, Stainless Steel Bolting Materials. FfWH1101 05501-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS AND CONCRETE INSERTS Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA A. When the size, length or load carrying capacity of an anchor bolt, expansion anchor, or concrete insert is not shown on the drawings, provide the size, length and capacity required to carry the design load times a minimum safety factor of four. n B. Determine design loads as follows: 1. For equipment anchors, use the design load recommended by the Manufacturer and accepted by the Engineer. 2. For pipe hangers and supports, use one half the total weight of pipe, fittings, valves, accessories and water contained in pipe, between the hanger and support in question and adjacent hangers and supports on both sides. 3. Allowances for vibration are included in the safety factor specified above. 2.02 MATERIALS y A. Anchor Bolts: Provide stainless steel bolts complying with ASTM A193, Type 316. Other AISI types may be used subject to Engineer's acceptance. B. Expansion Anchors: 1. All expansion bolts shall be 316 stainless steel. R 2. All expansion bolts shall have a 4:1 safety factor with a minimum working capacity as follows: Bolt size 7/8" 3/4" 1/2" 3/8" — Minimum Shear Strength 5250# 4250# 1650# 625# Minimum Pullout Strength 5250# 4250# 1300# 1030# Minimum Embedment 7" 5" 3-1/2" 3-1/2" — 3. Size required for the concrete strength specified. 4. Stud type (male thread) or flush type (female thread), as required. S. UL or FM approved. 6. Provide Manufacturer's technical literature and test reports from an accredited independent testing laboratory showing certified bolt capacities for expansion bolts proposed for use on this project. 7. Product and Manufacturer: HILTI, Incorporated. C. Adhesive Anchors (capsule anchors): Adhesive anchors shall consist of all-thread anchor rod, nut, washer, and adhesive capsule. Anchor rods to be manufactured from AISI 316 stainless steel which meets the requirements of ASTM F593-80. Anchor rods shall have rolled threads. The adhesive capsules shall contain a vinylester resin, quartz and aggregate and hardener as equal to the Hilti HVA adhesive, HILTI HIT RE 500 adhesive, HIT HY 150 adhesive. When base material temperatures drop below 400 F use HILTI HIT-ICE/ HIT-HY 150 adhesive. FfWH1101 05501-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS AND CONCRETE INSERTS Contract No.01632 D. Concrete Inserts: 1. For piping, grating and floor plate provide malleable iron inserts. 2. Provide those recommended by the Manufacturer for the required loading. 3. Finish shall be black. 4. UL and FM approved. E. Powder actuated fasteners and other types of bolts and fasteners not specified herein shall not be used unless approved by Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Drilling equipment used and installation of expansion anchors shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Assure that embedded items are protected from damage and are not filled in with concrete. C. Expansion anchors may be used for hanging or supporting pipe two inches diameter and smaller. Expansion anchors shall not be used for larger pipe unless otherwise shown or approved by the Engineer. D. Use concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports for the pipe size and loading recommended by the insert Manufacturer. E. Unless otherwise shown or approved by Engineer conform to following for expansion anchors: 1. Minimum embedment depth as defined in 2.02 B. 2. Minimum anchor spacing on centers: ten diameters. 3. Minimum distance to edge of concrete: five diameters. 4. Increase dimensions above if required to develop the required anchor load capacity. 3.02 CLEANING A. After embedding concrete is placed, remove protection and clean bolts and inserts. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall employ a testing laboratory to perform field quality testing of installed anchors. Field engineer or Owner inspector is to determine the level of testing which is required for the various types of adhesive anchors and anchor bolts. A minimum of ten percent of the adhesive anchors are to be tested to 50 percent of the ultimate tensile capacity of the adhesive anchor as published in the manufacturer's catalogue. B. If failure of any of the adhesive anchors occurs, Contractor will be required to pay for the costs involved in testing the remaining 90 percent. FfWH1101 05501-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS AND CONCRETE INSERTS Contract No.01632 T C. Contractor shall correct improper workmanship, remove and replace, or correct as directed by the Engineer, all adhesive anchors found unacceptable or deficient, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Contractor shall pay for all corrections and subsequent tests required to confirm the integrity of the adhesive anchor. E. The independent testing and inspection agency shall complete a report on each area. ! The report should summarize the observations made by the inspector and be submitted to Engineer. LL F. Provide access for the testing agency to places where Work is being produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 05501-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS ' MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS AND CONCRETE INSERTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section provides requirements for furnishing labor, materials and equipment to prepare surfaces and to apply protective coatings to new equipment, pumps, piping and valves, structural steel, masonry and concrete (where required), and miscellaneous items. B. The term "paint" as used in this section means the protective coatings specified. Other paintings may be required in other sections of the specifications. All paint for concrete or metal surfaces shall be especially adapted for use around a moist and humid environment and shall be applied in conformance with the manufacturer's published specifications. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 1: General Provisions. B. Division 3: Concrete. C. Division 5: Metals. D. Division 15: Mechanical. E. Division 16: Electrical 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) - Industrial Maintenance Painting. C. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) - Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications. D. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) - Painting - Architectural Specifications Manual. E. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual. F. Materials to be used in contact with the raw water or potable water process stream shall meet the current requirements of the Food and Drug Administration Document, Title 21, Section 175.300 or have been approved by the EPA for potable water use and have been certified by the National Sanitation Foundation for Standard 61 listing. Submit certification that the material meets these requirements. FfWH1101 09900-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAINTING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.04 -SUBSTITUTIONS Wherever a product is designated by trade name with provision for an equal, the product specified must be used unless a written request for substitution is submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. The request for substitution must include the manufacturer's complete technical data sheets on the proposed product with a certified ingredients analysis signed by an officer of the manufacturer and sufficient information, including applicable case history -- informati:BMITTALS for making a complete comparison between specified and proposed product. 1.05 w A. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Submit product data, shop drawings, certificates and instructions on all protective coatings items as specified herein and in accordance with Division 1 - General Provisions. B. Product Data: Complete data on each type and kind of paint and primer shall be submitted for review. Submittal data shall show where and for what uses each paint - product is to be used, with cross reference made to paragraphs of the specifications or the coating schedule. Data submitted on each type and kind of paint product shall include information to show that the product meets the detailed requirements of these specifications. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: The manufacturer's published instructions, for use as a _ guide in specifying and applying the manufacturer's proposed paint, shall be submitted. Paint shall not be delivered to the job site before review of the manufacturer's instructions by the Owner's Representative. A manufacturer's paint will not be considered for use unless that manufacturer's published instructions meet the following requirements: 1. The instructions must have been written and published by the manufacturer for the purpose and with the intent of giving complete instruction for the use and application of the proposed paint in the locality and for the conditions for which the paint is specified or shown to be applied under this contract. All limitations, precautions and requirements that may adversely affect the paint; _ that may cause unsatisfactory results after the painting application; or that may cause the paint not to serve the purpose for which it was intended, that is, to protect the covered material from corrosion, shall be clearly and completely stated in the instructions. These limitations and requirements shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Surface preparation. b. Methods of application. c. Number of coats. _ d. Thickness of each coat. e. Total thickness. f. Drying time of each coat, including primer. g. Drying time of final coat before placing in service. h. Time allowed between coats. i. Primer required to be used. ` FFWH1101 09900-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAINTING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 E - j. Primers not permitted. k. Use of a primer. I. Compatible topcoats. m. Thinner and use of thinner. n. Weather limitations during and after application (temperature, humidity, wind velocity). o. Protection from sun. p. Physical properties of paint, including percent solids content by volume, ingredient analysis, and weight per unit surface per dry mil thickness. q. Cathodic disbonding limitations, if any. r. Equipment settings (air cap, fluid tip, equipment pressure settings, etc.). 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in original, unopened, and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Store materials in an approved location which meets the manufacturer's storage requirements. Recommended storage temperatures and ventilation shall be maintained. Keep the storage area clean and repair any damage done. Remove oily rags, waste, or other fire hazards from buildings each night; take adequate precautions to avoid damage by fire. Place cloths and cotton waste which might constitute a fire hazard in metal containers or destroy at the end of each workday. 1.07 SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS A. General: In accordance with requirements set forth by regulatory agencies applicable to the construction industry and manufacturer's printed instructions and appropriate technical bulletins and manuals, the Contractor shall provide and require use of personal protective lifesaving equipment for persons working on or about the project site. B. Head and Face Protection and Respiratory Devices: Equipment shall include protective helmets which shall be worn by all persons while in the vicinity of the work. In addition, workers engaged in or near the work site during sandblasting shall wear eye and face protection devices and air purifying, halfmask or mouthpiece respirators with appropriate filters. Barrier creams shall be used on any exposed areas of skin. C. Ventilation: Where ventilation is used to control hazardous exposure, all equipment shall be explosion-proof. Ventilation shall reduce the concentration of air contaminants to the degree a hazard does not exist. Air circulation and exhausting of solvent vapors shall be continued until coatings have fully cured. FTWH1101 09900-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAINTING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 D. Sound Levels: Whenever the occupational noise exposure exceeds maximum ` allowable sound levels, the Contractor shall provide and require the use of approved ear protective devices. E. Illumination: Adequate illumination shall be provided while work is in progress, including explosion-proof lights and electrical equipment. Whenever required by the Engineer or Owner's Representative, the Contractor shall provide additional illumination and necessary supports to cover all areas to be inspected. The level of illumination purposes shall be determined by the Engineer or Owner's Representative. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS V A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes. 1.09 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL A. At the end of the project, the Contractor shall turn over to the Owner a gallon of each type and color of paint, primer, thinner, or other coatings used in the field painting. The material shall be delivered in unopened labeled cans, just as it comes from the factory. If the manufacturer does not package the material in gallon cans, and in the case of special colors, the materials shall be delivered in new gallon containers, properly closed with typed labels indicating brand, type, color, etc. Where multiple component materials are used, the Contractor shall supply an unopened kit of the necessary materials in the manufacturer's smallest standard packaging size (i.e., a ' 2-component epoxy with a 1:1 mix ratio would require a 1-gallon can of resin and a 1- gallon can of curing agent). The manufacturer's literature describing the materials and giving directions for their use shall be furnished in three bound copies. A typewritten inventory list shall be furnished at the time of delivery. PART 2 PRODUCTS - 2.01 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Final color selection will be made by the Engineer from color chips submitted by the Contractor; colors selected may or may not be a manufacturer's standard color. Submit color charts to Owner's Representative at least 60 d ays prior to paint application to allow time for color selection. B. Shop Painted Equipment: Motors, equipment, pumps, valve bodies and metal pump bases shall be shop painted. - 1. Motors, equipment, pumps, pump bases and valve bodies shall be painted color as selected by the Owner. 2. All bronze or stainless steel valve bodies shall not be painted. C. Exposed Moving Parts and Guards. All exposed moving parts such as couplings, shafts, etc., shall be painted OSHA red. 2. All guards and shields such as belt guards, chain guards, etc., shall be painted OSHA orange. FTWH1101 09900-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAINTING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.02 TEST EQUIPMENT The Owner's Representative will use, but is not limited to, the following pieces of equipment to determine film thickness and presence of flaws. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and calibrate the following equipment for the Owner's Representative's use for testing the coating system. All costs related to the testing equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. A. Electronic Digital Readout Gage: 0 .40 mils film thickness gage including as et of 0.5 Department of Commerce, Bureau of Standards Film Thickness Calibration Standards from 0-8 mils and 10-25 mils or equivalent. B. Wet Sponge Holiday Detector: Low voltage (67-1/2 volts) flow detector (holiday detector). C. Clemtex Comparator: Surface anchor profile standard. D. Wet Film Thickness Gage. E. Sling Psychrometer. 2.03 MATERIAL A. Paint shall arrive on the job ready-mixed, except for the tinting of undercoats, field catalyzed coatings, and possible thinning. B. All coating shall meet all Federal, State, United States Corps of Engineers, Environmental Quality Board, and any other local governmental ordinances and regulations for allowable Volatile Organic Compounds and other hazardous contents. C. When thinning coating, the amount of thinner used shall not exceed the limit recommended by the manufacturer, nor shall it cause the paint to exceed the allowable limits for VOCs. Only thinners recommended by the manufacturers, or approved equal, shall be used. 2.04 COATING SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal, Interior, Non-Immersed, Subject to Non-Abrasive Conditions: 1. General. All interior above ground ferrous surfaces subject to dry non-abrasive conditions shall be painted in accordance to the following provisions. This includes, but is not limited to: exposed pumps, exterior of valves, pipes, motors, machinery, and miscellaneous metals such as structural steel. 2. Surface Preparation. SSPC SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning, Reference Part 3.02 Surface Preparation, item D for description. 3. Coating (Epoxy-Polyamide) Minimum Coverage Mfg or Equal Primer 4.0 mils *DFT Tnemec, 66-1211 Epoxoline Primer Valspar, 89 Series High-Build Epoxy Carboline, 893 Polymid Epoxy Primer FfWH1101 09900-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 •� SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAINTING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 Finish Coat 5.0 mils DFT Tnemec, 66 - Color High-Build Epoxoline - Valspar, 89 Series High-Build Epoxy Carboline, 134 HS Polyurethane * DFT - Dry Film Thickness B. Ferrous Metal, Exterior, Non-Immersed, Subject to Non-Abrasive Conditions: 1. General. All exterior ferrous surfaces not submerged, and subject to non-abrasive - conditions shall be painted in accordance to the following provisions. This includes but is not limited to: Exterior of non-submerged equipment, valves, pipes, pipe sleeves, brackets, grates, structural steel, light poles, exterior face of _ overhead doors, etc. Surfaces intermittently or partially submerged will be treated as submerged. 2. Surface Preparation. SSPC SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Reference Part 3.02 _ Surface Preparation D for description. 3. Coating (Aliphatic-Polyurethane System) Minimum Coverage Mfg or Equal Primer 5.0 mils DFT Tnemec, 66-Color High-Build Primer Valspar, 89 Series High-Build Epoxy _ Carboline, 890 Epoxy Finish Coat 4.0 mils DFT Tnemec, 75-Color Endura-Shield Valspar, V40 Series Urethane Carboline, 134 HS Polyurethane C. Ferrous Metals, Immersed or Subject to Abrasive Conditions 1. General. A II ferrous surfaces below ground level, submerged, or subject to abrasive conditions shall be painted in accordance with the following provisions. This includes but is not limited to: Ladders, grates, checkered plates, handrails, — access covers, exterior of submerged valves, piping, brackets, structural steel, sluice gates, roller gates, drains, etc. (Surfaces that are questionable as to if they are subject to submerged or abrasive conditions will be considered as subject to those conditions). 2. Surface Preparation. SSPC SP-10 Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. Reference Part 3.02 Surface Preparation Ferrous Metal D for description. Coating (Epoxy-Polyamide System) Minimum Coverage Mfg or Equal Primer 4.0 mils DFT Tnemec, 20-1255 Pota-Pox Primer Valspar, 78 Series Tank Epoxy Finish Coat 5.0 mils DFT Tnemec, 20-11WH Pota-Pox Finish Valspar, 78 Series Tank Epoxy D. �.on Ferrous Metal Interior: v General. All non ferrous surfaces where painting is required shall be painted in accordance with the following provisions. This includes but is not limited to: pipe supports, underside of roof decks and service doors. FfWH1101 09900-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAINTING — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2. Surface Preparation. SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Reference Part 3.02 Surface Preparation D for description. 3. Coating (Epoxy-Polyamide System) Minimum Coverage Mfg or Equal Primer Coat 3.0 mils DFT Tnemec, 66-color High-Build Epoxoline Finish Coat 4.0 mils DFT Tnemec, 66-High-Build Epoxoline Finish Coat (For Exterior Tnemec Series 75 Endura-Shield Installation) 3.0 mils DFT in addition of Primer and Finish �. Coat described above E. Aluminum, Stainless Steel, Galvanized Steel, Copper, or Brass: Unless specifically called out, only clean these surfaces. Do not paint. F. All Aluminum in Contact with Dissimilar Materials: 1. Surface Preparation. Remove all foreign matter and apply sealer as required by coating manufacturer. 2. Coating (Epoxy-Polyamide) Minimum Coverage Mfg or Equal Primer (not required) Finish Coats - 2 coats at Tnemec, 66 - High Build Epoxoline 4.0 mils each Valspar, 89 Series High-Build Epoxy Carboline, 890 Epoxy G. Interior Concrete: Unless specifically called out, only clean these surfaces. Do not paint. H. Exterior Concrete - Exposed. 1. One coat, Tnemec Series 151 Elasto-grip applied at 200—400 SF per gallon. 2. Two coats, Tnemec Series 157 Enviro-crete applied at 8.0 dry mils, each coat. I. Interior Concrete Block Masonry - Exposed. 1. One coat, Tnemec Series 130-6601 Enviro-fill cementicious block filler applied at 65-75 square feet pr gallon. 2. Two coats, Tnemec Series 84, 5.0-6.0 mils DFT, each coat. ]. Exterior Concrete Block Masonry - Exposed. 1. One coat, Tnemec Series 130 Enviro-fill waterborne Cementicious Acrylic applied at 85 -115 SF per gallon. 2. Two coats, Tnemec Series 181 Tnemec-crete applied at 8.0 — 10.0 dry mils, each coat. K. PVC Pipe Interior FfWH1101 09900-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAINTING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1 Surface Preparation. As recommended by manufacturer. - 2 Coating (Epoxy-Polyamide) Coverage Mfg. Or Equal Primer(not required) Finish Coat 4 mils DFT Tnemec, 66 High-Build Epoxoline Epoxoline _ L. PVC Pipe Exterior 1. Surface Preparation: As recommended by manufacturer. 2. Coating (Aliphatic-Polyurethane System). Minimum Coverage Mfg. Or Equal Primer 4.0 -6.0 mils DFT Tnemec, 66 High-Build Epoxoline Valspar, 89 Series High-Build Epoxy Finish Coat 2.5 mils SFT Tnemec, 73-Endura-Shield III Valspar, V40 Series Urethane -- PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORK CONDITIONS A. Coating or painting shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Surface: If surfaces to be painted cannot be put in proper condition for painting by customary cleaning and sanding operations, notify the Engineer's Representative in writing or assume the responsibility for and rectify any unsatisfactory finish resulting from application to an unsatisfactory surface. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until adverse conditions are corrected to provide an acceptable surface. The paint supplier shall inspect and certify all surfaces prior to _ coating application. Do not apply paint to a wet or damp surface. C. Equipment: The Contractor's coating and painting equipment shall be designed for application of the materials specified and shall be maintained in good working order y comparable to that described in printed instructions of the coating manufacturer. Clean equipment thoroughly before and after use with the appropriate cleaning solution indicated by the coating manufacturer. All gages and controls on spray equipment shall be in proper working order at all times and the gages must be operational and readable. D. Warnings: Display caution signs in necessary areas advising of spray painting and warning against open flames. E. Barriers: Provide barriers or shelters on windy days to protect equipment and treatment facilities. FTWH1101 09900-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAINTING -- MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Surface preparation standards are as described in this specification. The Steel Structures Painting Council, Surface Preparation Specification is used for steel and as a guide for concrete. B. Solvent Cleaning: Remove oil, grease, soil and other contaminants by use of solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or similar materials and methods which involve a solvent or cleaning action, in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Surface Protection Specifications (SSPC) SP-1. Care must be taken to not allow solvent chemicals to enter treatment processes. C. Grinding: Remove weld splatter and rough edges and grind rough welds so that all surfaces are in proper condition, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, to receive the specified coating. D. Abrasive Grit Cleaning: 1. Use a source that provides compressed air, free of detrimental amounts of water and oil. The compressor shall, as a minimum, be capable of delivering a pressure at the blast nozzle of at least 90 psig; the blast nozzle shall be of the Venturi type. 2. Use a grit of 16/40 mesh. Keep grit clean, dry and free of clay particles and other extraneous matter. 3. Blast only those areas that can be primed the same day. Areas which are not painted the same day must be reblasted again on the day the prime coat is applied. Remove grit from surface by brush or industrial vacuum. 4. All immersed iron and steel surfaces shall be blasted to "near-white" metal in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Surface Preparation Specification (SSPC) SP-10, Near White Blast Cleaning. The blast cleaning shall produce an anchor pattern of 2-1/2 to 3 mils. 5. All non-immersed iron and steel surfaces shall be commercial blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-6. The blast cleaning shall produce an anchor pattern of 1-1/2 to 2 mils. 6. Concrete surfaces to be blasted should be prepared by using a brush-off blast cleaning unless otherwise specified. T his blast shall lightly abraid the surface without entirely removing the surface or exposing the underlying aggregate. E. Power Tool Cleaning: Subject to review by the Engineer or Owner's Representative, any above metalwork in which SP-6 or SP-10 blasting cannot be accomplished shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-3, Power Tool Cleaning, removing loose mill scale, loose rust, loose paint and other foreign matter. Pumps, motors and similar equipment to be painted should be prepared per SSPC-SP3. F. Unknown or Noncompatible Materials: Items coated with an unknown paint system, or a primer or system which is not compatible with the specified system, shall be blast cleaned and recoated with the specified coating system at the job site. When blasting is not feasible, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative and request permission to apply a barrier coat over the unknown or noncompatible material. The proposed barrier coat must be recommended in writing by the paint system FfWH1101 09900-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 + SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAINTING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 manufacturer and is subject to review by the Owner's Representative. Following application of the barrier coat, if permitted, the specified coating system shall be applied. Minimum dry film thickness shall be increased an amount equal to the barrier coat and unknown or noncompatible coats. - 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect surfaces and installations requiring no painting or finishing by use of drop cloths, masking or other approved precautionary measures. Repair or replace property and work of other trades damaged, marred or stained by painting and finishing operations. B. Prior to surface preparation and painting operations, remove, mask or otherwise protect hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, light fixtures and — similar items not to be painted but which are in contact with painted surfaces. C. Protect spaces used for mixing or storage of paint materials from damage or staining. Leave space in clean, neat condition. 3.04 MIXING AND THINNING A. Mix and thin paints in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. At the time of application, paint must show no signs of hard settling, excessive — Skinning, livering, or other deterioration. 3.05 COATING APPLICATION _ A. Manufacturer's Representative: The coating manufacturer will be responsible, through an authorized representative, to provide technical assistance to the paint contractor as needed.B. Workmen: E mploy workmen skilled in structural steel, piping, and mechanical equipment painting. - C. Materials: 1. Coating materials, abrasive grit, and equipment used in painting and blasting are - subject to inspection at any time by the Engineer and Owner's Representative. Remove blasting grit and dust from the surface to be painted before paint application is begun. Dust, dirt, oil, grease, or any foreign matter that will affect the adhesion or . durability of the finish must be removed by washing with clean rags dipped in an approved cleaning solvent and wiped dry with clean rags. D. int Coating Methods: Finished surfaces must be free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks — and variations in color, texture and finish. Double-lap all welds. Apply prime coat by brush to all weld areas; then apply prime coat to entire surface, including weld areas, by spray, roller or method selected. FTWH1101 09900-10 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAINTING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3. Coat areas with a uniform film, free of sags, runs, or brush marks. 4. Except where otherwise specified, thin paint only as necessary for workability of coating material in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Use only an appropriate thinner as recommended by the paint manufacturer. 5. When paint is being applied to any other closed areas, provide adequate ventilation. 6. Comply with recommendations of the paint manufacturer in regard to drying time for each coat, technique of spray application, ventilation, paint thinning, and safety precautions. The Contractor must fully inform all members of his field crew of these recommendations. 7. Where inspection shows that the specified thickness is not developed, apply additional coats in accordance with the manufacturer's surface preparation and cure schedule requirements to produce the required film thickness. 8. Repair and recoat improper applications as recommended by the manufacturer or as required by the Owner's Representative. 9. Factory finished items shall be protected against damage during transit, storage and erection. Damaged areas must be refinished as the original. The following items shall receive final finish at the factory, colors to be reviewed by the Owner's Representative. a. Electrical panels (to be factory painted ANSI No. 61 gray). b. Light fixtures. c. Pressure gages. d. Instrumentation. e. Valves and accessories f. Mechanical equipment with standard factory finish, subject to Engineer's review. 10. The following items shall not be painted unless otherwise specified: a. Aluminum, brass, bronze, chrome, copper or stainless steel. b. Nameplates or serial numbers. c. Grease fittings. d. Valve operator stems. e. Buried or encased piping or conduit. f. Concrete floors, interior walls and slabs. g. Glass. .� h. Fiberglass doors, grating and handrail. i. Existing and new corrugated metal wall panels. 11. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as the exterior face. 12. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coating. 13. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. E. Cleaning: Upon completion of the work, remove all staging and scaffolding. Dispose of all used grit, containers and rubbish in a suitable manner. Remove overspray, paint spots, oil or stains on adjacent surfaces. Leave the entire job clean and acceptable. FrWH1101 09900-11 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAINTING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 j 3.06 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspection: 1. The Contractor shall provide OSHA-approved staging, scaffolding and lighting as -- required to permit proper inspection as outlined in these specifications. 2. Surface preparation, coating application and repairs are subject to inspection by the Engineer and Owner's Representative. The standards published by the Steel - Structures Painting Council, especially SSPC-VISL-635, Pictorial Surface, will be used as guides for acceptance or rejection of the cleaning, painting or coating application. Particular attention will be given hard-to-reach areas, bolted - connections, supports, anchor bolts and threaded joints. �. A magnetic-type dry film thickness gage, and an electrical holiday detector will be used to determine the acceptability of the paint application. Calibration of the magnetic thickness gage will be done on the site using the U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of Standard Film Thickness Calibration Standards. Give sufficient notice in advance of coating applications so that the Engineer and Owner's Representative can perform the following inspections: a. Examination and approval of surface preparation prior to any coating. b. Examination and approval of each coat prior to application of the next coat. l c. Inspection of the completed coating for runs, overspray, roughness, and any evidence of improper application. d. Direction or observation of testing. B. Testing: i. Contractor shall be responsible for and shall bear all the costs to perform the - quality control tests for the coating. 2. Should any paint system fail to pass a test, the Contractor shall make necessary changes approved by the Owner's Representative for the corrective measures. The paint system will then be retested. 3. The following tests will be conducted: a. Dry film thickness will be tested after each coat of paint has been applied, and after final coat of the exterior system has been applied to the pump, motor, piping, equipment, metal and appurtenances. A test will be made for every 25 square feet of surface and at locations designated by the inspector. b. All submerged paint systems will be tested for holidays after the final coat has been applied. c. Warranty Inspection: Warranty inspection shall be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of all coating and painting work. All defective work shall be repaired in accordance with this specification and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 09900-12 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLL WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PAINTING MOTOR AND CHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 13280 PCB CONTAINING EQUIPMENT REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Base Bid: 1. Electrical/PCB Equipment Disposal Contractor provides: a. Testing and labeling of PCB filled electrical equipment as required by law. b. Remove and lawfully dispose or destroy PCB containing equipment including PCB and PCB contaminated fluids as identified on the drawings and in the specification documents. c. Provide all shipment and disposal tracking documentation required by law and specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. DOT Requirements: Transporting PCB and PCB contaminated materials shall be in accordance with Department of Transportation (DOT) Hazardous Materials Regulations in 49 CFR 171-179, and 40 CFR 390-397 as applicable. Also comply with State and Local requirements, including obtaining all necessary permits, licenses and approvals. 2. Environmental Protection Agency 40 CFR Chapter 1 (7-1-86 Editions, Part 761). 1.03 REFERENCES A. Specified references, or cited portions thereof, current at date of bidding documents unless otherwise specified, govern the work. In conflict between referenced standards and contract documents, notify Architect/Engineer immediately. Confirm notification in writing. Do not proceed with the work until Architect/Engineer issues written instructions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit: 1. Qualifications of firm offering removal and disposal service 2. Equipment Test Data. 3. Procedures for: 3r a. Removal b. Disposal or destruction FTWH1101 13280-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PCB CONTAINING EQUIPMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL/DESTRUCTION A. Provide labor, equipment, necessary packaging, materials, labels, placards and any and all materials, services and transportation necessary to safely remove and dispose of all PCB filled equipement including PCB and PCB contaminated fluids in accordance with all Federal, State, and local laws, statutes, rules, regulations and ordinances. B. Provide competent and properly trained employees for safe and lawful transporting of the hazardous materials named in this bid proposal and assume full and complete v. responsibility for the competency, judgement, and actions of said employees at all times, and Using Agency will not assume, and will be under no obligation whatsoever for the same. C. Assume full liability for any spill, leak, or uncontrolled discharge from any item made a part of this bid proposal, once the contractor commences work. In event of any spill, - leak, or uncontrolled discharge, contractor shall provide all necessary cleanup, labor, equipment, materials, and assume all associated costs resulting from the incident with all such cleanup material being transported and disposed of in accordance with all r. Federal, State, local statutes, laws, rules, regulations, and ordinances in effect at time of incident and cleanup operations. D. provide to the City of Ft. Worth certificates of final disposal from the disposal facility indicating name, location, and EPA disposal number for all items in this bid proposal prior to any payment for services. Certificates shall be in a form acceptable to the Using Agency. E. Provide within ten (10) days after Notice of Award, the contractor's EPA permits for handling and disposal of these hazardous waste items and the DOT transportation - permit numbers. F. Inspect project site and examine all affected transformers in project. Be fully responsible for ascertaining the extent to which all sited and referenced regulatory requirements affect the required and specified work. 2.02 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE A. The work shall be arranged so that the power outages are kept at a minimum and minimum time per outage. Whenever power outages are necessary, the City of Ft. - Worth and Architect/Engineer shall be notified at least 15 days before. No power outages shall occur, unless this contractor is given written permission by the City of Ft. Worth. B. Where necessary, provide temporary power services while work is being performed. The Contractor shall furnish the required and specified equipment, material and labor r such temporary power service and shall fully coordinate such work with the City of . worth. FfWH1101 13280-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PCB CONTAINING EQUIPMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL Contract No.01632 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION s s FTWH1101 13280-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 = SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PCB CONTAINING EQUIPMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL s - Contract No.01632 SECTION 14630 BRIDGE CRANES REHABILITATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required to rehabilitate the electrical mechanisms and controls, test and leave in satisfactory operation the existing overhead traveling bridge crane hoist, bridge crane, specified herein. B. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to, providing rehabilitation to the existing electric overhead traveling bridge crane hoist and provide accessories required for South Holly High Service Pump Station equipment. All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this section or not shall be furnished and installed as required for a rehabilitation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. C. The work requires that one manufacturer accept responsibility for rehabilitation the equipment and work as indicated but without altering the Contractor's responsibilities under the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and all provisions of the Contract Documents shall apply to this section. B. General provisions included in Division 1. C. Metal fabrications included in Division 5. e D. Painting included in Division 9. E. Electrical requirements included in Division 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, shop drawings and product data. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Replacement part, assembly, and installation drawing. 2. Report showing result of crane test and visual inspection. 3. Operation and maintenance manual. 4. Manufacturer's warranty agreement in compliance with the Contract Documents. 5. Manufacturer's recommended spare parts. 6. Installation, start-up, and test schedule with installation and test procedures shall be furnished prior to installation of the equipment. 7. Submit four (4) c opies of a Ce rtificate of Compliance with the Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA), Part 1910, Subpart N, Section 1910.179, Overhead and Gantry Cranes, at the time that shop drawings are submitted. FfWH1101 14630-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- BRIDGE CRANES REHABILITATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 8. Submit manufacturer's field report of installation and equipment testing. 9, Submit various loads imparted by the crane operation. B. All submittal requirements as specified in related sections shall apply to the work described in this section. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Hoist Manufacturer's Institute (HMI): HMI 100-74 for Electric Wire Rope Hoists. B. Crane Manufacturer's Association of America (CMAA): Specification No. 70 for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes. C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) specifications. D. American Welding Society (AWS) standards. E. National Electric Code. F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards of the U.S. Department of Labor. G. Comply with all Federal, State and City of Fort Worth, Texas codes and ordinances. H. Underwriters' Laboratory (UL) regulations as specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Refurbishment of the unit shall be done in compliance with the applicable requirements of the following: a. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards b. CMAA Specifications 2. All structural steel members of the crane shall be designed in compliance with the specifications of the American Institute of Steel Construction, current edition, and any welded construction shall be in accordance with the standards of the American Welding Society. 3. Castings, forgings, stampings, and other structural elements shall have a minimum safety factor of five. Y 4. Conduct plant testing according to manufacturer's commercial testing procedures. S. All refurbish materials shall be new and unused. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Morris Material Handling, P&H Cranes, Houston, Texas �. Prosery Anchor Crane Group, Houston, Texas FfWH1101 14630-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- BRIDGE CRANES REHABILITATION MOTOR AND$WITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Replace the electrical bus bars, and crane control for overhead 15-ton, top running, double girder bridge crane, bridge, and crane for the high service pump station by new control system including remote operator, replacement of bus bars with Festoon cables with associated track. B. The bridge crane is utilized for loading and unloading equipment from the pumps and motors in the high service pump station. C. Festoon cables system with associated track and control equipment system shall be suitable for indoor service. The environment will be moist. These and other conditions generally characteristic of a water treatment are not considered abusive or abnormal with respect to the equipment warranty provisions. 1.07 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE: A. Provide the services of a factory certified service engineer specifically trained in the installation, start-up, testing, operation, and maintenance of bridge cranes as herein specified. Such services shall be provided by a representative who is a direct, full-time employee of the bridge crane manufacturer(s) or local representative certified by the manufacturer in installation and startup of the equipment. B. Provide the services of a factory certified service engineer specifically trained in the inspection and refurbishment of existing crane to inspect the overall crane condition. And provide a written report of recommended part to be replaced in order to have the crane in compliance with the requirements of the specification. C. The bridge crane factory certified engineer shall advise, consult, and instruct the Contractor on installation procedures and adjustments and inspect the operators during installation as a condition of acceptance of the work. D. The bridge crane factory certified service engineer shall again be present during all start-up and testing operations to make final adjustments as a condition of acceptance of the work. E. Owner training shall be provided and shall include operational instructions to one operational team over one time period. Training shall be given at times convenient to the operational team being trained in light of duties while on shift. Operational training shall be conducted during the hours of 6:30am to 3:00 pm. Operational training shall include the following at a minimum: 1. Trouble shooting guidance. 2. Recognizing normal and abnormal operating conditions. F. Owner training shall also include maintenance instructions to one maintenance team. -- Maintenance training shall be conducted during the hours of 6:30am to 3:00pm, Monday through Friday, with exact schedule being determined in light of on-going maintenance team duties. Maintenance training shall include the following, at a minimum: 1. Step-by-step assembly and disassembly procedural requirements. FTWH1101 14630-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- BRIDGE CRANES REHABILITATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2. Replacement part identification and ordering procedures. 3. Lubrication procedures. 4. Torque and limit switch adjustment. $. Recommended routine maintenance procedures. 6. Trouble-shooting and diagnostic procedures. 7. Fuse and pilot lamp replacement. G. Person-hour requirements tabulated below are exclusive of travel time and do not relieve the Contractor of obligation to provide sufficient services to place all equipment and appurtenances into satisfactory operation. R Services Provided by Factory Representative Minimum Number Minimum Time On-site of Trips Per Trip(Hours) 1.Supervise installation 1 8 2.Inspect and approve installation(b) 1 4 3.Supervise initial adjustment(c) 1 4 4.Supervise and assist in testing(d) 1 4 S.Instruct Owner and Owner's Representative in 1 8 proper startup and O&M(e) 6. Inspection of existing crane 1 8 (a) The Manufacturer's factory representative shall be present at frequent enough intervals to ensure proper m installation,testing,and initial operation of the equipment. (b) The Manufacturer's factory representative shall provide to the Owner's Representative a written certification that the system has been installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. (c) May be done upon completion of item 2 if acceptable to the Owner's Representative. (d) May be done upon completion of items 2 and 3 if acceptable to the Owner's Representative. (e) Instruction may be given upon completion of Item 4,provided the test is successful and the O&M manuals have been submitted to and accepted by the Owner's Representative. _ 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Shipment preparations shall include steps necessary for protection during shipment, storage, and erection. Apply an anti-corrosion compound such as grease, vaseline, or heavy oil on such parts and components that will be subjected to the weather in storage. B. Prior to the actual date of delivery, the crane company's representative shall contact the Contractor, visit the construction site, and issue instructions for storage of the equipment to prevent damage. C. Upon delivery to the job site, receipt and storage shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Storage, care, and maintenance shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. D. If the equipment must be stored for an extended period of time, the Contractor, at his - expense, shall wire and furnish electrical power to each crane electrical system and energize the heaters in the motors for protection against condensation. Such wiring shall follow the manufacturer's recommendations. " FfWH1101 14630-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- BRIDGE CRANES REHABILITATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.09 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall provide an all-inclusive one-year extended warranty additional to the Contractor's one-year warranty. The submittal shall provide a contract specific warranty document as detailed in Division 1. The warranty shall include normal wear and tear parts to all equipment parts furnished under this contract. All materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be free from defects in material or workmanship. B. Manufacturer's Certification: Provide a letter of certification addressed to the Owner and signed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer. The letter shall state the following: 1. The equipment will efficiently and thoroughly perform the required functions in accordance with the Contract Documents, that the materials are best suited for the chemicals handled, and that the manufacturer accepts joint responsibility with the Contractor for coordination of equipment, controls, and services required for proper installation and operation of the completely assembled and installed unit. 2. The equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and is in proper adjustment and operating condition, the manufacturer is prepared to warrant the equipment to perform in full compliance with these specifications, and the equipment is ready to be turned over to the Owner for operation. 3. The manufacturer has inspected the installation and verified training of the Owner's operations and maintenance personnel upon completion of the system installation. C. The Contractor shall also furnish the manufacturer's warranties as published in its literature. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. General: General design top running, double girder conditions applicable to crane and hoist are as follows: 1. Electric overhead bridge crane (15-ton Bridge Crane) B. Electrical: Hoist shall be electrically operated and controlled on 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, A.C. current, three-wire feed system. The crane and appurtenances shall be designed for indoor service. Electrical enclosures shall be NEMA 3R 316SS. 1. The hoist system shall be furnished with a manually operated main line fused disconnect switch near the hoist power connection point with provisions for �- locking in the"off'position. 2. Equip each motor and control cabinet with space heaters. Motor space heater shall maintain the temperature 10 to 15 degrees above ambient. Space heaters in control cabinets and panels shall remain on at all times, except when mainline contactor is engaged, to prevent condensation. 3. Control Panel(s) shall also include mainline magnetic contactor, contactor for the control of the hoist and a control transformer. FfWH1101 14630-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- BRIDGE CRANES REHABILITATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS r Contract No.01632 4� Furnish an adjustable time delay relay for each the host motion as follows: a. 1 speed, one relay 5r Provide adjustable upper and lower geared limit switches on hoist. C. Electrical Conductors: Furnish enclosed Howell Corporation safety insulated type galvanized steel conductors (SAF-T-BAR) for runways. The conductors shall have at least 110 ampere continuous duty rating and sized for maximum voltage drop of one percent at any point on the runway. The current collector and conductor system shall be complete with power feeds, intermediate hanger clamps, expansion joints, angle support brackets, and all other required items for a complete installation. Trolley conductors shall be festooned across the bridge by a"C"track festoon system. D. Painting of the existing crane: Thoroughly clean crane of all rust, mill scale, and foreign substances prior to painting. Apply a prime coat followed by two finished coats of high visibility yellow in the field. The hoist load block shall be painted with alternate yellow and black stripes. Repair paint scratches and surface damage after equipment has been erected and final adjustments made. E. Paint the capacity of crane in large block black letters on both sides of the bridge and block. 2.02 15-TON BRIDGE CRANE A. Speeds: Provide single speed operation as follows: Y a. Main Hoist: 11 feet per minute B. Crane Controls: Crane operation and control systems for single-speed motor shall be designed for floor operated pendant control stations as follows: 1. Furnish an independent pendant control station and cable. Pendant control station is for operations 3 ft. from floor elevation. �. The assembled pendant shall consist of a hand-held polymeric enclosure with four pushbuttons and laminated legend plates. Enclosure shall be supplied with a 316 stainless steel hanger bracket and internal strain relief post. Enclosure shall be yellow in color. 3. Pendant control station shall be thermoplastic enclosed pushbutton units for single R speed operation of the hoist. Control unit to be yellow color with laminated legend plates. The assembled pendant to have pushbuttons to perform functions as follows: a. System (i) One pushbutton -"ON" (ii) One pushbutton -"OFF" b. Hoist Module with: (i) One pushbutton -"UP" (ii) One pushbutton -"DOWN" - 4. The pendant shall be suspended from a festoon track running across the bridge. The pendant shall reach a point 3.0 feet above its respective ground elevation. The pendant shall be suspended in such a manner that the electrical conductors FfWH1101 14630-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- BRIDGE CRANES REHABILITATION •- MOTOR AND 7EAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 do not receive any strain from the weight of the pushbutton station or by the operator pulling on the pendant cable. There should also be a tool balancer placed on the pendant cable so that the pushbutton station can be operated from a portable platform and be placed at different elevations. 5. The crane shall be completely wired for pendant in the field. All wiring shall be of the type and sufficient size to safely carry the load. It shall be completely enclosed in conduits and weatherproof fittings. The control system and circuits are to be installed with all wiring, reversing contactors, limit switches, accessories, devices, and appurtenances ready for operation. The installation shall be complete in all respects, and checked and adjusted in the field by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. 6. Pendant Storage. Pendant shall be stored in separate NEMA 3R 316 SS type enclosure (with lock and key) fastened to the pump room wall. 7. Protection Limit Switches: In addition to the limit switches provided for hoist travel, furnish and install a limit switch system for protection against damage as follows: a. Limit switch at each end of a runway. 8. Provide protection to have only one unit operating at any time pendant or remote control unit. C. Bridge Crane Construction: Specifications for construction of the 15-ton crane are as follows: 1. Trolley: Inspect and provide preventive maintenance to all mechanical components, replace track with Festoon cable system. 2. Bridge Drive: Inspect and provide preventive maintenance to all mechanical components, replace track with Festoon cable system. 3. Trolley Traversing: Inspect and provide preventive maintenance to all mechanical components, replace track with Festoon cable system. 4. Hoisting: Inspect and provide preventive maintenance to all mechanical and electrical components, replace track with Festoon cable system. 5. Motors: Inspect and provide preventive maintenance. All motors shall be totally enclosed and have anti-friction ball bearings suitable for crane service. They shall have a 30-minute rating with a temperature rise in accordance with the latest NEMA standards for the class F insulation and enclosure used. Full load motor speeds shall not exceed 1750 R.P.M. 6. Provide new Controller and Associated Equipment: Hoist motions shall have two points of control as specified. Floor controlled cranes shall be operated from a pushbutton station at the pump room floor and from the bridge platform as specified to suit application. a. The controls shall consist of necessary electrical contactors, relays, transformers, and pendant pushbutton station or master switches. The reversing magnetic controllers shall give good acceleration, plus load and crane control. The control unit for each crane motion shall consist of a contactor or relay, etc., for each speed variation, a reversing contactor, and overload protection. All speed points beyond the second are to be controlled by means of time delay relays. The pilot.control circuit to the pushbutton station or to the master switches shall be reduced to 115 volts. Overload FTWH1101 14630-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 aw SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- BRIDGE CRANES REHABILITATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS s Contract No.01632 protection shall be automatic reset type. A main line magnetic contactor is to be included as an emergency stop safety feature, and operated by means of pushbutton at the operator's location. b. A main line fusible safety disconnect switch manually controlled by a lever located on the pump floor wall shall be included on all floor controlled cranes. i�. Wiring: All wiring shall be completely enclosed and capable of safely carrying the rated electrical load. The bridge conductor shall be safety type bars as specified. 8. Replace wiring for the drive and the trolley by Festoon wire and track. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All crane equipment, apparatus, and devices shall be set in place as to provide a complete operable system. Before final setting, all clearance line requirements shall be checked and verified. 3.02 TESTING A. After installation, and as a prerequisite to acceptance, run a full operational test on the complete crane and hoist system using a load equal to 125 percent of rated capacity. Testing procedures shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Owner's Representative. Such testing shall be conducted in the presence of, and witnessed by, the Owner's and Manufacturer's authorized representatives. Testing and associated costs shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Failure of any part of the crane and hoist system and/or appurtenants in the operational test shall be corrected .. and the system retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Furnish the labor and weights required for testing the capacity of the hoist. C. Upon final completion and testing, the Contractor and manufacturer shall issue a certification to the Owner that the crane and hoist system are in compliance with the Owner's and OSHA's safety requirements. 3.03 USE OF COMPLETED SYSTEM A. After installation and testing, hoist system may be used for construction purposes only R with the written permission of the Owner. B. Use of the system shall not affect the warranty period stipulated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. Any damage to the system due to usage during construction shall be repaired at the - Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 14630-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- BRIDGE CRANES REHABILITATION MOTOR AND 9WITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Summary description of work: 1. This section describes piping and equipment identification and the associated color code system to be used. 1.02 RELATED WORK: A. General requirements: Division 1. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Piping system identification: 1. ANSI-A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Submit all shop drawings with all information required per Sections 01300 and 15500 to the Engineer for review. Submit also the following additional information for Engineer review: 1. Product data. 2. Samples of each type. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Pipe and equipment markers: a. Base: (i) Seton Name Plate Corp. (ii) W H Brady Co. (iii) EMED Company Inc. (iv) Kolbi Industries, Inc. (v) 3M Co. (vi) Craftmark Identification Systems. (vii) Marking Services, Inc. FTWH1101 15190-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MECHANICAL—IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS a Contract No.01632 (viii) Carlton Industries, Inc. B. Olor - Prior to ordering materials, obtain list of Owners Standard colors for identification of mechanical equipment, piping and devices and conform to this listing. Unless specified otherwise or identified in the Owners Standards, conform to ANSI/ASME - A13.1. C. Application 1. Identification shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor application, for area temperature and other ambient conditions, as required per use. Outdoor identification systems shall be UV rated. 2.02 PIPE MARKERS A. Pipe markers: Provide color-coded pipe markers conforming to ANSI-A13.1. Pipe markers shall be pressure sensitive vinyl (self-adhesive) material. Marker shall be of color (Legend and Background) per Table at the end of this specification, and of the approved Legend Letter Size and Marker Length as listed below. For dirty, greasy, or oily pipe where pressure sensitive markers may not perform satisfactorily, provide semi-rigid plastic pipe markers performed to fit around pipe or pipe covering which snap into place around pipe. y B. The system for preparation and application of letters shall be Type B a.s.i./2 by ASI Sign Systems; Architectural Graphics Inc. or equal. Letter type shall be Optima Bold, upper case. Grid 2 spacing shall be employed. Arrow shall match as approved, letter type and size. The instructions of the manufacturer shall be followed in respect to storage, surface preparation and applications of letters. 1. Each color-coded marker shall contain: a. Legend (letters, numbers) b. Nominal Pipe Size of the identified pipe — c. Direction of Flow Arrows 2, For piping with external diameters less than 6-inches (including insulation), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360-degrees around pipe at each location. 3. Size of letters legend: Outside Diameter of Length of Size of Letters Pipe or Pipe Covering Color Field and Arrows 3 4-to 1-1/4 IN 8 IN 1 2 IN -- 1-1/2 to 2 IN 8 IN 3 4 IN 2-1/2 to 6 IN 12 IN 1-1/4 IN 8 to 10 IN 24 IN 2-1/2 IN Over 10 IN 32 IN 3-1/2 IN 4. For base pipes smaller than 3/4 in. O.D. provide Seton, or an approved equal, Style 2070 color coded aluminum tags not less than 2 in. diameter with engraved FTWH1101 15190-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MECHANICAL—IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 natural aluminum numbers not less than 1/2 in. high and engraved natural aluminum letters not less than 1/2 in. high. Background colors of tags shall conform to ANSI A13.1 and as specified herein. Fasteners shall be approved metal seals with 4 ply .018 monel wire. 2.03 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Equipment Data Plate: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard permanent nameplate constructed of stainless steel, with data engraved or stamped, permanently attached to the equipment. 2. Data shall include, as a minimum, Engineer's equipment tag number as shown on Drawings; Manufacturer name, product name, model number, and serial number; equipment capacity, operating and power characteristics; and labels of testing agencies. B. Equipment Tag Nameplate: 1. Provide 1/16 inch thick, engraved laminated phenolic markers for each piece of equipment equal to Setonply or Emedolite. 2. Nameplates shall have black exterior and white core, neatly beveled edges, and shall show white letters or numbers (letter/number height minimum 1/2 inches) on a black background. 3. Unit numbers indicated in equipment schedules shall be provided in vinyl film as specified above on all equipment using 1-in high Optima Bold, upper case, Grid 2 spacing, white or black in color as approved depending on substrate. U nit numbers shall be mounted at eye level on machines where possible or at the upper most broad vertical surface of low equipment. 4. Inscribe on the nameplate the Engineer equipment tag number as used on the Drawings. (Example: P-02 or AHU-01) C. Where specific equipment is described elsewhere herein, it shall take precedence over this paragraph. 2.04 WARNING TAGS A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE. 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Plan the locations of markers, tags, and nameplates to insure good visibility of such markers, tags, and nameplates in conformance with ANSI A13.1. FFWH1101 15190-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 a SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MECHANICAL—IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. (Mean the area to which said markers, tags, and nameplates shall be applied. C. Where adhesive markers are used, degrease and clean surface prior to applying marker. D. Install markers, tags, and nameplates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 PIPE IDENTIFICATION r A. Pipe markers and line tags of the colors indicated on the following pages; locate and size per ANSI A13.1. Comply with manufacturer's directions. Install line tags with metal seal fasteners. B. Markers shall be in clear view aligned with axis of piping and shall not be obscured by other work. Label should be clearly visible from operating positions especially those adjacent to control valves. Markers shall be applied to exposed and concealed piping. Locate pipe markers as follows: 1. Next to each valve and fitting, except on plumbing fixtures and equipment. 2. At each branch or riser take off. 3. At each passage through walls, floors and ceilings (both sides). - 4. At each pipe passage to underground. 5_ On horizontal pipe runs every 20 FT, at least once in each room and each story traversed by piping system. 6. All access doors, manholes, or equivalents that permit view of concealed piping. 7. Near major equipment and other points of origin and termination. - C. Install markers with tape color bands over each end of marker, extending around pipe and overlapping a minimum of 30 degrees. D. Install flow direction arrow tape to extend full circumference of pipe. E. Seal markers with clear lacquer. _ F. See Drawings for Symbols. Markers shall include line size, service designation, area code and line number, where applicable; see Table 15190-1 for pipe service designations and abbreviations. G. Soil, waste and vent piping does not require identification. 3.03 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Permanently attach equipment nameplates in conspicuous, accessible, and visible location, directly on equipment. Provide for all mechanical equipment such as starters, fans, heaters and control panels. Secure nameplates with adhesive and pop-rivet in place with 316 stainless steel rivets or use self-tapping screws, or nuts and bolts. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with metal tags. Verify with equipment manufacturer if NEMA ratings will be violated if mechanical fasteners are used, in which adhesive alone to attach nameplate shall be allowed. FfWH1101 15190-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MECHANICAL—IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. For unsuitable surfaces, such as high temperature or lack of space, use 316 stainless steel copper or brass rings or chains to attach tags. 3.04 CONTROL DIAGRAMS AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide HVAC control and systems instructions and diagrams in wall mounted frames. 1. Mount framed diagrams in conspicuous, easily accessible places in equipment rooms housing appropriate HVAC system. B. Diagrams and instructions may be reduced in size provided they are easily readable and lettering is not smaller than "elite" type of standard typewriter. 3.05 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 15190-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 a SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MECHANICAL—IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 {. Table 15190-1 PIPE MARKER LEGEND CODING COLORS G - Green B - Blue 0 - Orange — R - Red Y- Yellow W- White Symbol Pipe Label Wording NGAS Natural Gas BACKGROUND COLOR/ SERVICE TAG LEGEND SERVICE IDENTIFICATION - LETTER COLOR GASES & GAS MIXTURES Y NG Natural Gas Yellow/Black NG High Pressure Natural Gas Above 5 PSIG Medium Pressure Natural Gas Yellow/Black NGM 14"W.C. to 5 PSIG Yellow/Black NGL Low Pressure Natural Gas .� Less than 14"W.C. FTWH1101 15190-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MECHANICAL—IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 15400 PLUMBING - GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies the general requirements of the Plumbing work to be performed and described in other Division 15 sections, and shall not void any of the requirements specified under the General Conditions or General Requirements. B. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, services and incidentals required and install and test a complete plumbing system as specified and shown in the Plumbing Drawings and Specifications. C. More specifically the work shall include, but shall not be limited to the following: 1. All items included under the Scope of Work of other Plumbing Sections. 2. All parts necessary to make a complete Plumbing System ready for continuous operation. 3. Removal of existing piping fixtures and equipment in existing buildings. Refer to Section 15405. D. Job Conditions 1. Examine Contract Documents to determine how other work will affect execution of mechanical work. 2. Determine and verify locations and arrangement of existing utilities, systems and equipment, and become familiar with existing conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data to establish compliance with this Section and the individual equipment specifications. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Shop drawings and technical literature covering details of all equipment, fixtures and accessories being furnished under this Section prior to fabrication, assembly or shipment. 2. Provide a recommended list of spare parts to be provided. B. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Submit to the Engineer as provided in Section 01350, Operating and Maintenance Manuals for each piece of equipment. Personnel familiar with the operation and maintenance of the specific information shall prepare manuals. Include the following information as a minimum. Where applicable, provide information -- required for specific pieces of equipment. 2. Equipment shall be identified with the Engineer's Equipment Numbers and Identification as shown in the Schedules and on the Drawings. 3. Provide information in three ring binders. A II sheets shall have reinforced punches. Tabbed dividers shall separate all sections. Drawings will be bound in FfWH1101 15400-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS E Contract No.01632 n the manual, or contained in envelopes bound into the manual. Provide with Table " of Contents. 4. Contents - Each volume shall contain the following minimum contents: a. Equipment Catalog Cutsheets. b. Equipment Schedules with all data filled in. Indicate selections and options with indicating arrows, or equivalent. Do not use highlighter marker since it does not transmit during copying. c. Installation including instructions for unpacking, installing, aligning, checking and testing. Foundation data and allowable loads shall be included. _ d. Operating Instructions to provide pre-operational checks and start up. Procedures for long term storage shall be included. e. Maintenance shall include preventive and corrective. Trouble shooting instructions to include a trouble-shooting guide shall be included where applicable. The instruction manual shall list all special materials, tools, and test equipment that are required to perform troubleshooting and all phases of maintenance. Provide exploded view drawings or other similar drawings of all assemblies showing all parts which are separately replaceable for maintenance. f. Testing Instructions (where applicable) g. Warranty information h. Spare Parts List- Provide a list of manufacturer's recommended spare parts C. In general, corrections or comments or lack there of, made relative to submittals during review shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Submittals are for review of general conformance with the design concepts of the project and general compliance with the contract documents. T he Contractor is responsible for the final design conforming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and r techniques of construction, coordinating the work of all trades, and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) _ B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) F. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI) G. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISP) H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) _ FTWHI101 15400-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 I. Factory Mutual (FM) J. American Society of Plumbing Engineers Data Book (May be used as a design guide.) K. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper execution and performance of the work described herein. It shall be their responsibility to inspect all installation conditions and bring to the attention of the Engineer any conditions which may affect their work adversely. They shall report to the Engineer, prior to commencing any portion of this work, any conditions unsuitable for the installation of their portion of the work. B. Mention herein or indication on the Drawings of equipment, materials, operation or methods shall require that each item mentioned or indicated be provided to make a complete system of plumbing ready for continuous operation. C. Attention is called to the necessity for elimination of transmission of vibration from mechanical equipment to building structures. All equipment, therefore, shall be carefully selected and installed to meet this condition and isolators and water hammer arrestors shall be provided where required. D. Instruct such persons as designated by the Owner in the care and use of all plumbing equipment and piping systems installed. E. Comply with all the laws, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations of the State, local or other authorities having jurisdiction over any of the work specified herein. F. Obtain all required permits, licenses, and inspections and pay all legal fees for the same and in general take complete charge and responsibility for all legal requirements pertaining to this Section of the work. G. Requirements set forth in this Section and indicated on the Drawings shall be followed when in excess of the required or minimum regulations. H. If any work is performed and subsequent changes are necessary to conform to the regulations, such change shall be made as part of this work at no additional cost to the Owner. I. Refer to the Architectural Drawings and existing building conditions to confirm the type of construction in which the work shall be installed. All measurements must be taken at the building. -" J. All equipment of a given type included in this Section shall be furnished by or through a single manufacturer or as specified on the schedules. FfWH1101 15400-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 K. Inspection by the Engineer or failure to inspect shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to provide materials and perform the work in accordance with the documents. L. The piping manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit of compliance certifying that all materials used and work performed complies with the specified requirements. The Contractor shall provide copies of mill test confirming the type of material used in the �. various components. M. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to sample and test any materials after delivery and to reject all components represented by a sample that fails to comply with the specified requirements. N. Use all new materials unless otherwise specified. Materials and equipment shall be free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the finished product. No used equipment or materials will be allowed. O. Where Drawings and Specifications are in conflict with one another, the information on the Drawings shall take precedence. 1.05 DRAWINGS A. The Drawings are essentially diagrammatic, although all work shown on the Drawings is approximately shown to scale. Figured dimensions and detailed drawings shall be followed in every case. Si ze of pipes and general method of running them are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset, crossover, transition or fitting nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. To carry out the true intent and purpose of the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide all necessary parts for a final installed system which conforms to the structure, avoids obstructions and provides required clearances and passageways. The Contractor shall be responsible to - coordinate the system installation and routing with the work of all other trades. B. Do not change sizes indicated on the Drawings without written approval of the Engineer. C. When significant changes in equipment locations, devices and distribution systems are required, obtain approval of the Engineer before making changes. D. The absence of pipe supports and details on the Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing them.E. The location of all equipment, fixtures and piping shall be considered as approximate only and the right is reserved by the Engineer to change at any time, before the work _ is installed, the position of such equipment and piping to meet structural conditions and to provide proper headroom clearance or for other sufficient causes and such changes shall be made without additional expense to the Owner. ,. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to requirements of Section 01600. FfWH1101 15400-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWrrCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. All materials shall be inspected for size, quality and quantity against approved shop drawings upon delivery. C. Delivery schedule of all equipment shall be coordinated with the Contractor. Equipment ready for shipment prior to the agreed on shipping date shall be stored without cost to the Owner by the manufacturer. D. All materials shall be suitably packed for shipment and long term storage. Each package shall be labeled to indicate the project and the contents of each package. Where applicable, equipment numbers shall be marked on the container. E. All equipment shipped that is exposed such as on a flat bed truck shall be protected during transit. The equipment shall be protected from moisture, road salt, dirt and stones or other materials thrown up from other vehicles. Electrical components shall be protected as above, but with special attention to moisture. The method of shipment protection shall be defined in the submittals. F. Instructions for the servicing and startup of equipment in long term or prolonged storage shall accompany each item. .. G. All materials shall be stored in a covered dry location off of the ground. When required to protect the materials they shall be stored in a temperature-controlled location. H. Provide covering and shielding for equipment provided to protect from damage. I. Repair, restore and replace damaged items. J. Protect plumbing fixtures and brass or chromium plated trim, valves and piping from damage. 1.07 COORDINATION A. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departures from the drawings or specifications are deemed necessary, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practical for review. No such departures shall be made without the prior written concurrence of the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for coordination of the Plumbing systems, including; scheduling, and verification that all structures, piping and the mounting of equipment are compatible. 1.08 SUPPORTS A. All components shall be provided with lugs, brackets or field supplied devices to allow the components to be firmly attached to the structure. FfWH1101 15400-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 s SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS i Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All products specified in the Specification Sections listed under 1.01 Scope of Work shall be installed according to the applicable manufacturer's recommendations, the details shown on the Drawings and as specified herein and in other related Sections. B. The Contractor shall start up each piece of equipment and system and shall make all adjustments so that the system is placed in proper operating condition. C. The Contractor shall not install any equipment or materials until the Owner and W Engineer have approved all submittals. If any equipment or materials are installed prior to approval of the submittals, it shall be at the Contractor's risk. D. All work shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and shall be rigid, plumb and true to line, with all parts in perfect working order. Maintain protective covers on all units until final cleanup time and at that time remove covers and clean and polish all surfaces. E. Where piping penetrates fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors, seal annular spaces with approved firestopping to maintain fire and smoke ratings. - F. Verify that equipment will fit support layouts indicated. Where substitute equipment is used, revise indicated supports to fit. 3.02 WORK IN EXISTING FACILITIES A. Field verify existing conditions and confirm new work will fit. B. Coordinate shutdown of plumbing systems with Owner at least 3 days prior to scheduled shutdown. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Avoid cutting, where possible, by setting sleeves or frames, and by requesting openings in advance. Coordinate locations with work of other sections. B. Lpcate openings and sleeves to permit neat installation of piping and equipment. C. Do not remove or damage fireproofing materials. 1. Install hangers, inserts, supports, and anchors prior to installation of fireproofing. 2. Repair or replace fireproofing damaged. D. In existing areas remove and replace existing finishes for plumbing Work if not shown to be removed on architectural drawings and schedules. FfWH1101 15400-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.04 TEMPORARY OPERATION A. Properly maintain and service all equipment and systems until the particular equipment or the system has been accepted by the Owner. Contractor shall follow manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule during this period. B. This maintenance shall include compliance with the manufacturers operating and maintenance instructions as well as periodic checking and cleaning. C. Contractor shall repair any piping, equipment and systems that fail, leak or get damaged. Any systems that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer shall be replaced in kind, without additional cost to the Owner. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Materials, fixtures and equipment shall be properly protected at all times and all pipe openings shall be temporarily capped or plugged so as to keep dirt and debris out. Keep plug or cap in place until final connections are made. 3.06 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Test and inspect all systems and put into satisfactory operation prior to final acceptance Owner. Furnish all instruments, test equipment and personnel required for �- the tests. Provide competent personnel to conduct all tests. Systems will not be considered complete until all tests have been concluded to the satisfaction of the Engineer and all authorities having jurisdiction. In event of leakage or defects, tests must be repeated until all faults are corrected. B. Contractor shall demonstrate satisfactory performance of all equipment and systems for a minimum period of 5 working days prior to final acceptable by Owner. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean exposed and concealed items: 1. Clean floor drains, traps and plumbing fixtures. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 15400-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 15405 PLUMBING - DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and remove and dispose of the interior plumbing systems, including fixtures and equipment, in the existing buildings as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Provide all plumbing demolition work associated with the removal of equipment from the existing facilities, including disconnecting and removing all piping to equipment being removed under other related Sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The demolition and removal work shall be coordinated with the construction schedule for new work and the demolition work of other contracts. B. Removal of existing plumbing systems have not been detailed on the Drawings. Trace out piping systems to be removed and perform the removal work as required to provide complete and safe operating systems. C. The Owner is permitting a temporary shut-down of the plumbing systems during the demolition and installation of the new plumbing fixtures and facilities. Employees will use other restroom facilities provided by the Owner during the temporary shutdown. D. In general, the work includes removal and disposal of: 1. Plumbing equipment including their hangers, supports, supply piping, pipe insulation, and soil, drain, waste and vent piping. Piping shall be capped or plugged at the service indicated to remain. 2. Gas and service piping systems inside the building including hangers, valves, fittings and accessories. Piping shall be cut and capped at the foundation wall or source as indicated on the Drawings. 3. All piping that is abandoned or non-functioning as a result of this or previous alterations shall be removed back to the next live branch or main and plugged or - capped whether or not indicated on the Drawings. 3.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Demolition shall include: 1. Natural gas supply, flue duct, service connections and accessories. s FfWH1101 15405-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING-DEMOLITION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS i Contract No.01632 .. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL — A. Remove all plumbing work associated with equipment scheduled for demolition except portions indicated to remain. f B. Remove abandoned piping and insulation back to the source or nearest point of usage. C. Disconnect and remove abandoned fixtures and equipment. D. Remove all associated brackets, stems, hangers, valves and other accessories. 3.04 DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Except as indicated herein or otherwise directed by the Owner, all material and equipment removed under this Section shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor. Provide the Owner with receipts verifying acceptable disposal of any legally regulated materials and equipment. R END OF SECTION FTWH1101 15405-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING-DEMOLITION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 15410 PLUMBING - PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies the basic Plumbing Systems of Piping and the materials of each system, including valves, within the building perimeter. Specific uses and applications are specified in other related Sections. B. Furnish all labor, materials, transportation, equipment, tools, services and incidentals required and install complete interior Plumbing Piping Systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1. Natural Gas System 2. Furnishing and installing all pipe, fittings, valves, floor drains, hangers and insulation in conjunction with the above listed piping systems. C. All piping, connections and equipment shall be tested as herein specified in accordance with all laws, codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. Provide all apparatus, temporary piping connections, supplies, materials and resources necessary for testing the systems and operating the apparatus during the period while tests of any kind are being made, or for carrying out the work of the Contract. D. All piping, and equipment shown on the Drawings is intended to be approximately correct to scale, but figured dimensions and detailed drawings of the actual equipment furnished shall be followed in every case. The Drawings shall be taken in a sense as y diagrammatic. Size of piping is shown, but it is not the intent to show every offset or fitting, nor every hanger or support, or structural difficulty that may be encountered. To carry out the intent and purpose of the Drawings all necessary parts to make a complete working system ready for use shall be furnished without extra charge. The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate the system installation and routing with the work of all trades. E. Refer to Section 15400 for General Provisions relating to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all shop drawings with all information required per Sections 01300, 15400 and the following additional specific requirements: B. Include catalog cutsheets of all submitted piping with reference standards included. C. Provide manufacturers catalogs, literature, and engineering data on all hangers and supports. Load ratings, materials, and installation shall be in accordance with the recommendations of MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. FfWH1101 15410-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING—PIPING SYTEMS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 - 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The piping manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit of compliance certifying that all materials used and work performed shall comply with the specified requirements. The - Contractor shall provide copies of mill test confirming the type of material used in the various components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Natural Gas Systems - Inside Building Perimeter 1, Low pressure (less than 14-in water column) piping 2-in and smaller, shall be Schedule 40, black steel with malleable iron fittings. 2. High pressure (greater than 14-in water column) piping shall be Schedule 40, black steel with welded fittings. 3. Piping larger than 2-in diameter shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe and fittings with welded joints. 4. Gas train vent piping shall be of the same material as that specified for low pressure piping systems. 2.02 VALVES A. General 1, It is the intention of the Plumbing Drawings and this Section to require control valves at the bottom of all potable water service risers and as shown on the t Drawings. 2r Valves, in general, shall be of the same manufacture throughout unless noted otherwise. All valves, except as noted otherwise, shall be made for 125 lb steam working pressure. 3 Provide isolation ball valves to all plumbing fixtures and plumbing equipment. B. s Valves 1. Gas valves 2-in and smaller shall be three-piece bronze ball valve with threaded ends equal to Hammond 8604; Watts 6800 (YRPV) or Apollo 82-100, modified with tee handles. 2. Gas valves larger than 2-in shall be lubricated plug valves equal to valves manufactured by Powell; Homestead and Rockwell. 3. Gas valves shall be listed suitable for natural gas service. 2.03 SLEEVES, CASTINGS AND FLASHING A. Sleeves 1. Sleeve all piping through walls, beams and partitions. All wall sleeves shall finish flush with the finish line. Sleeve all piping passing through floor slabs. All sleeves shall extend 2-in above the finish floor slab. FfWH1101 15410-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING-PIPING SYTEMS - MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.04 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. The absence of pipe supports and details on the drawings shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for providing them. B. In certain locations pipe supports may be indicated on the drawings. The contractor shall be responsible to provide a complete system of supports. Additional supports may be required adjacent to couplings, and valves. C. Supply and service vertical risers shall be supported by friction clamps on the riser which shall rest on the sleeve at each floor level and at 10-ft intervals. D. Hangers supporting horizontal piping at ceilings shall be of the clevis type and spaced 5-ft apart for soil, waste, drain and vent pipes; 8-ft apart for supply and service pipe 1-1/2-in diameter and larger; and 6-ft apart for pipe smaller than 1-1/2-in diameter. E. All hangers shall be of a type to permit vertical adjustment after installation. F. Supports and hangers for cast iron soil piping shall be installed in accordance with the latest addition of the cast iron soil pipe handbook unless noted otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all piping, valves, hangers and appurtenances as specified herein and in the referenced Sections above. B. Valves 1. Install all final water connections to plumbing fixtures and equipment. Each connection shall be preceded by a ball valve directly adjacent to the unit. 2. Install all valves in a horizontal to upright position. Valves shall not be installed in down position from the horizontal. C. Welding 1. Welding of joints shall be by metal-arc welding process. Welding shall be by qualified welders meeting the requirements outlined in Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and certified by the Hartford Steam Boiler Inspection Company. 2. Welding shall not be done when the atmospheric temperature is less than 32 degrees F or when surfaces to be welded are wet. 3. Surface to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, paint, oil and other foreign material. Joint surfaces shall be smooth, uniform and free from fins, tears and other defects which might affect proper welding. 4. Bevels shall be accurately cut by machining or by a mechanically guided cutting torch. 5. Piping shall be carefully aligned before welding and maintained in alignment during welding. Tack welds may be used to maintain alignment. They shall be FrWH1101 15410-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING—PIPING SYTEMS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS cr Contract No.01632 the same quality as the final welds and shall be fused thoroughly therein. " Defective tack welds shall be removed before the final weld is made. 6. The surface of the finished welds shall have a bright metallic luster after cleaning, a fairly smooth and uniform contour with regular ripples and be free from overlaps, undercuts and excessive convexity. 7. Welds shall be sound throughout, fused thoroughly and free from gas pockets, oxide, slag inclusions and surface porosity. The inside of the pipe shall be free from globules of weld metal, spacers or other material which would restrict the pipe area or become loose to enter the fluid stream. 8. Defective or unsound welds shall be corrected by removing and replacing the ` welds. Pipe or fittings which cannot be rewelded satisfactorily shall be replaced with new pipe or fittings at the Contractor's expense. D. Flanged Connections 1. All flange faces shall be in perfect alignment with the holes straddling the vertical center line of the piping. 2. All bolts shall be well lubricated over the entire thread length with a heavy graphite and oil mixture prior to the tightening operation. Bolts shall be tightened with proper wrenches, care being taken to secure uniform pressure on the bolts and gasket and to avoid overstressing of the bolts, dishing of the flanges and compression of the gasket beyond its proper limits. a. Commercial grade carbon steel bolts, ASTM A307, Grade B shall be tightened to obtain approximately 15,000 psi stress based on the root area of the thread. Alloy steel bolts, ASTM A193, Grade B7 shall be tightened to obtain a stress of 45,000 psi. - 3. All bolts shall be of sufficient length so that when fully tightened, a minimum of two full threads shall extend beyond the nut. E. Screwed Connections y 1. All screwed connections shall have full thread of true taper, accurate to gauge and conform to ANSI. 2 Reduction in size shall be made using reducing fittings. 3 The use of bushings or close nipples is prohibited. Nipples shorter than 4-in in length shall be Schedule 80. - 4. Plugs shall be steel or brass with square head. 5. Screwed joints shall be made with an approved joint compound applied to the male thread only. Caulking of screwed joints will not be allowed. F. Welding 1�. Welding of joints shall be by metal-arc welding process. Welding shall be by qualified welders meeting the requirements outlined in Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and certified by the Hartford Steam Boiler Inspection Company. 2. Welding shall not be done when the atmospheric temperature is less than 32 degrees F or when surfaces to be welded are wet. FTWH1101 15410-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING—PIPING SYTEMS •— MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3. Surface to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, paint, oil and other foreign material. Joint surfaces shall be smooth, uniform and free from fins, tears and other defects which might affect proper welding. 4. Bevels shall be accurately cut by machining or by a mechanically guided cutting torch. 5. Piping shall be carefully aligned before welding and maintained in alignment - during welding. Tack welds may be used to maintain alignment. They shall be the same quality as the final welds and shall be fused thoroughly therein. Defective tack welds shall be removed before the final weld is made. 6. The surface of the finished welds shall have a bright metallic luster after cleaning, a fairly smooth and uniform contour with regular ripples and be free from overlaps, undercuts and excessive convexity. 7. Welds shall be sound throughout, fused thoroughly and free from gas pockets, oxide, slag inclusions and surface porosity. The inside of the pipe shall be free from globules of weld metal, spacers or other material which would restrict the pipe area or become loose to enter the fluid stream. 8. Defective or unsound welds shall be corrected by removing and replacing the welds. Pipe or fittings which cannot be rewelded satisfactorily shall be replaced with new pipe or fittings at the Contractor's expense. 9. All welded joints will be visually inspected by the Engineer or Owner for defects beyond those acceptable in ANSI B31.1. Method of repair shall be in accordance with instructions as received from the Engineer. 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. Provide all air and water necessary for testing the piping systems as specified under this Section of the work. Provide all connections for testing under this Section. Remove all debris resulting from testing. Use the water in an efficient and economical manner. B. The various piping systems shall be subjected to water, smoke, or air tests as noted and shall hold tight at pressures stated without extra pumping or water addition for the time intervals stated. C. All additional tests, methods or materials that may be required by the local ordinances and not specifically specified herein, shall be made as directed by the Engineer or the local inspection authority. D. Provide for all repeated tests as necessary to make systems tight as required. E. Take precautions to prevent damage to building or its contents during testing. At the Contractor's expense, the Contractor shall repair or make good any building components or contents damaged during testing. Any leaks, defects or deficiencies discovered during testing shall be immediately repaired and testing shall be repeated until the testing requirements are fully complied with and approved by the Engineer and local plumbing inspectors having jurisdiction. Caulking of pipe joints shall not be allowed as a remedy to pipe leaks. FTWH1101 15410-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING—PIPING SYTEMS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 F. Do not cover, enclose or conceal any piping until it has been inspected, tested and approved. G. Test gas piping as follows: -- 1. Test all gas piping with air under pressure as required and recommend by the NFPA Pamphlet Nos. 54 and 58 Regulations which shall be considered as part of this Section. - 3.03 CLEANING A. At the completion of the work, clean all piping, equipment, apparatus and exposed trim for same included in this Section and, where required, polish ready for use. Clean prior to painting. 3.04 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Pipe marking is included in Section 15190. - END OF SECTION FTWH1101 15410-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLUMBING—PIPING SYTEMS — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 15500 HVAC - GENERAL PROVISIONS F PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies the general requirements of the HVAC work to be performed and described in other Division 15 sections, and shall not void any of the requirements specified under the General Conditions or General Requirements. B. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, services and incidentals required and install and test a complete HVAC system as specified and shown on the Drawings and specifications. C. The requirements specified herein shall be modified only if specified otherwise for particular application in other Divisions. D. Work to be included under the "Scope of Work" of each HVAC Specification Section listed above shall include all labor, material, equipment, tools and services necessary to furnish, deliver, unload, install, test and place in satisfactory operation the equipment, services and systems as called for under each HVAC Section including any incidental work not shown, or not specified but which can reasonably be inferred as belonging to the various systems and necessary in good practice to provide complete and fully operational systems. E. This HVAC specification is incomplete without the information contained on the Drawings and in the Equipment Schedules. F. Description of the work included in each Section is not intended to in any way limit the above broad statement, but is intended as a more specific mention of the most important items included therein. G. Without limiting the scope of work as shown on the Drawings and required in this Section the following specific mention of items of included work is made. H. Design Conditions: 1. Outdoor Design Conditions The following outside design conditions will be used, based on climate data at Dallas-Fort Worth International Airport, as documented in the 2005 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook: Summer(0.4%): 100.70F Dry-bulb, 74.50F Wet-bulb Winter (99.6%): 19.90F Dry-bulb FfWH1101 15500-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2. Indoor Design Conditions Refer to individual HVAC drawings for indoor design conditions and setpoints. 3. Capacity of equipment is indicated at actual operating conditions, unless otherwise noted. I. Job Conditions Examine Contract Documents to determine how other work will affect execution of mechanical work. 2. Determine and verify locations and arrangement of existing utilities, systems and equipment, and become familiar with existing conditions. 1.02 RELATED WORK ` A. The following work related to, but not covered under the HVAC work, will be done under other related Sections as listed below. - 1. Concrete work, except for furnishing of required anchor bolts, sleeves and templates, which shall be furnished with equipment, is included in Division 3. 2. Structural steel and miscellaneous metal, except for supplementary steel required - for hangers, equipment supports, anchors and guides, which shall be furnished with equipment, is included in Division 5. 3. Painting, except for factory finished equipment, shop painting and identification labeling, is included in Division 9. 4. Plumbing, except water and drain closing in connections to HVAC equipment, is included in other Sections of this Division. 5. Refer to Division 16 for electrical requirements. 6. Electrical field power and interlock wiring, except for field wiring for automatic temperature HVAC controls as specified and as shown on the HVAC Drawings, is - included in Division 16. 7. Motor starters and disconnects, except for those furnished as an integral part of equipment supplied under this Division, shall be provided under Division 16. B. Related Sections: 1. General requirements: Division 1. 2. Cleaning: Section 01710. 3. Record documents: Section 01720, 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings - Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, all shop drawings and product data specified in this Section and in each individual HVAC Specification Section. All information should be provided at one time for each specification section. Incomplete submittals will be rejected. Submittals shall include _ the following minimum information: 1. Equipment Schedules — Provide Equipment Schedules in a format equivalent to Equipment Schedules on Drawings. Provide all data indicated on the Equipment Schedules. FrWH1101 15500-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS .. Contract No.01632 bW 2. Catalog Cutsheets — Provide for each equipment unit and accessory. Indicate options from cutsheets with arrows, or equivalent. Indicating options with a highlighter marker is unacceptable, as it does not transmit during the copying - process. Indicate specification number and equipment tag number on all cutsheets. As a minimum, provide information for the following: a. Catalog data for all motors to include operating efficiency. b. Catalog data on vibration isolator, including materials of construction, operating efficiency and layout diagrams that locate the isolators on the equipment by model number. c. Catalog data on bearings and confirmation of bearing life for the service specified. d. Catalog data on selected filters: types and sizes, quantity of modules required for each filter type and efficiency ratings performance data. e. For belt drive equipment, provide drive data indicating sheave sizes, belt size, number and length. 3. Drawings — Provide description of the proposed unit, general equipment arrangement, equipment dimensional data, materials of construction, location and size of outside air, return air and supply air openings, clearance requirements for maintenance access and equipment operation and equipment operating weights, furnished specialties and accessories. Significant dimensional differences between the specified equipment verses the proposed equipment shall be noted on the - equipment submitted. Indicate specification number and equipment tag number on all drawings. 4. Equipment Performance Curves for equipment with fans - Indicate fan size, type, arrangement, materials of construction, weight, motor horsepower, type, power supply and motor frame size. Each submittal shall include pertinent fan performance (operating data) information and a performance curve showing the fan operating point or range, including operating efficiency, flow rate, pressure and BHP. The minimum size of the actual fan curve shall be no less than 6-in by 8-in. The use of faxed copies of curves is not acceptable. Provide certified test data for all fans. For fans show shutoff head. 5. Accessories — A list of accessories to be furnished shall be included on each submittal. 6. Spare Parts List— Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts list. 7. Certification that equipment capacities meet requirements on Equipment Schedules based on indicated design criteria as specified. 8. Detail mounting and securing structure. 9. Warranty Information 10. Wiring Diagrams - Provide power, signal, and control wiring for all equipment. 11. Provide nameplate data and arrangement for approval by Engineer and Owner's Representative. 12. Equipment and materials shall be in strict accordance with the Specification requirements. Fully explain and itemize any exceptions to, or deviations from this Specification and the individual Division 15 specification section. 13. Where corrosion resistance is required, provide conformation of material suitability for the specified service. FfWH1101 15500-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 14. For units that will be shipped exposed, provide a description of the protective packaging that will be used during transit. 15. All submittals shall contain a statement that all specification Sections have been read and complied with. The certification statement shall be made by all of the following that are applicable; the Contractor, sub-contractor and the vendor. The statement shall be an individual statement for each party involved, and shall be included with every submittal and resubmittal. B. In the event the vendor and/or manufacturer starts procurement and/or fabrication prior to receipt of approved shop drawings, then vendor/manufacturer does so at their _. own risk. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. Submit to the Engineer, as provided in Section 01350, Operating and Maintenance Manuals for each piece of equipment. Personnel familiar with the operation and maintenance of the specific information shall prepare manuals. 2. Equipment shall be identified with the Engineers Equipment Numbers and Identification as shown in the Schedules and on the Drawings. Provide information in three ring binders. A II sheets shall have reinforced punches. Tabbed dividers shall separate all sections. Drawings will be bound in the manual, or contained in envelopes bound into the manual. Provide with Table of Contents. 4. Contents - All of the information listed above under `Shop Drawings' shall be incorporated into the O&M manuals including the following additional information. The O&M manuals shall be consolidated into a c omplete package, without duplicate information. a. Installation Instructions shall include unpacking, installing, aligning, checking and testing instructions. Foundation data, allowable piping loads, and _ electrical design shall be included. b. Operating Instructions shall include pre-operational checks, start up and shut down, and description of all control modes. Include emergency procedures for all fault conditions and actions to be taken for all alarms. Procedures for long term storage shall be included. c. Maintenance Instructions shall include preventative and corrective maintenance measures. Items such as inspection, calibration, lubrication, tests, etc., shall be covered. A complete list of materials for preventative maintenance shall be included. Instructions for assembling, disassembling, repairing and reordering parts shall be included in the instruction manual for corrective maintenance. Schedules for test of other functions are to be included. Provide a list of tools required to service the equipment. Trouble shooting instructions to include a trouble-shooting guide shall be included. The instruction manual shall list all special materials, tools, and test equipment that are required to perform troubleshooting and all phases of maintenance. Provide exploded view drawings or other similar drawings of all assemblies showing all parts which are separately replaceable for maintenance. FfWH1101 15500-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS = MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 d. Test and Startup Reports — Test reports shall include date and time of successful testing and startup of each system, including names and contact information of all individuals (i.e. manufacturer's representative, Owner, etc.) present for testing. e. Air/Water Test and Balance Reports. f. Sequences of Operation and associated air flow schematics. D. In general, corrections or comments or lack thereof, made relative to submittals during review shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Submittals are for review of general conformance with the design concepts of the project and general compliance with the contract documents. T he Contractor is responsible for the final design conforming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the work of all trades, and performing the work in a s afe and satisfactory manner. I tems resubmitted by Contractor shall specifically reference comments made on Engineer's submittal review documents. Failure to do so may prolong submittal review process and cause additional incurred costs. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published issue of Standards or Recommendations of the following listed Societies, Associations or Institutes in effect 3 months prior to the date of this Contract are part of this Section. These shall be considered as minimum requirements. Specific requirements of this Section and/or Drawings shall have ._. precedence. In case of conflict between published requirements, the Engineer shall determine which is to be followed. B. Abbreviation and the title of Federal, State and industry standards, technical societies, associations and institutes and other organizations used are as follows: 1. AABC—Associated Air Balance Council 2. ACGIH—American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists 3. ADC—Air Diffusion Council 4. ABMA—American Bearing Manufacturers Association 5. AMCA—Air Movement and Control Association 6. ANSI—American National Standards Institute 7. ARI—Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 8. ASHRAE — American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 9. ASME —American Society of Mechanical Engineers 10. ASTM —American Society for Testing and Materials 11. FM — Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corp. 12. IBR— Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers 13. IEEE— Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 14. NIST — National Institute of Standards and Technology 15. NEBB— National Environmental Balancing Bureau FFWH1101 15500-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 = SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS ..r Contract No.01632 y.. 16. NEC— National Electrical Code 17. NEMA— National Electrical Manufacturers Association 18. NFPA— National Fire Protection Association 19. OSHA—Occupational Safety and Health Administration 20. SMACNA—Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association 21. UL— Underwriters Laboratories 22. State and city building, plumbing and mechanical codes. 23. American Gas Association. 24. Authorities having jurisdiction. 25. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper execution and performance of _ the work described herein. It shall be their responsibility to inspect all installation conditions and bring to the attention of the Engineer any conditions which may affect their work adversely. They shall report to the Engineer, prior to commencing any portion of this work, any conditions unsuitable for the installation of their portion of the work. B. Mention herein or indication on the Drawings of equipment, materials, operation or methods shall require that each item mentioned or indicated be provided to make a complete system ready for continuous operation. C. Attention is called to the necessity for elimination of transmission of vibration from mechanical equipment to building structures. All equipment, therefore, shall be carefully selected and installed to meet this condition and isolators and water hammer arrestors shall be provided where required. D. All equipment of a given type shall be furnished by or through a single manufacturer or as specified on the schedules. ` E. Inspection by the Engineer's representative or failure to inspect shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to provide materials and perform the work in accordance with the documents. F. Use all new materials unless otherwise specified. Materials and equipment shall be free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the finished product. No used equipment or materials will be allowed. G. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to sample and test any materials after — delivery and to reject all components represented by a sample that fails to comply with the specified requirements. H. All equipment shall be UL listed and stamped with all testing agency seals. I. Use of asbestos or material containing asbestos for work specified under this Section shall be strictly prohibited. FfWH1101 15500-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS -- MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS w� Contract No.01632 J. All rotating parts of equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. K. Guarantee that all equipment meets the design and performance requirements specified, and alter and/or replace, at no cost to the Owner any piece of equipment which fails to meet these requirements. L. If, during the performance of the work, the Contractor finds a conflict, error or discrepancy between or among one or more of the Sections or between or among one or more Sections and the Drawings, furnish the higher performance requirements. The higher performance requirement shall be considered the equipment, material, device or installation method which represents the most stringent option, the highest quality or the largest quantity. M. Obtain all required permits, licenses, and inspections and pay all legal fees for the same and in general take complete charge and responsibility for all legal requirements pertaining to this Section of the work. N. Where Drawings and Specifications are in conflict with one another, the information on the Drawings shall take precedence. 1.06 DRAWINGS A. The Drawings are essentially diagrammatic, although all work shown on the Drawings is approximately shown to scale. Figured dimensions and detailed drawings shall be followed in every case. Size and routing of piping and ductwork are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset, crossover, transition or fitting nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. To carry out the true intent and purpose of the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide all necessary parts for a final installed system which conforms to the structure, avoids obstructions and provides required clearances and passageways. The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate the system installation and routing with the work of all other trades. B. Do not change sizes indicated on the Drawings without written approval of the Engineer. C. When significant changes in equipment locations, devices and distribution systems are required, obtain approval of the Engineer before making changes. D. The absence of duct and pipe supports and details on the Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing them. E. The location of all equipment, ductwork and piping shall be considered as approximate only and the right is reserved by the Engineer to change at any time, before the work is installed, the position of such equipment, ductwork and piping to meet structural conditions and to provide proper headroom clearance or for other sufficient causes and such changes shall be made without additional expense to the Owner. F. For locations of building elements, refer to dimensioned architectural/structural drawings. FTWH1101 15500-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 G. Field measurements take precedence over dimensioned drawings. — 1.07 CODES, LOCAL CODE AMENDMENTS AND ORDINANCES A. Comply with all the laws, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations of the State, local or other authorities having jurisdiction over any of the work specified herein. All such laws, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations governing this work shall be a part of the Specifications. Where the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings are more stringent than the codes, ordinances, etc., the Contract Documents shall take precedence. B. Obtain all required permits and pay all legal fees for the same and in general take complete charge and responsibility for all legal requirements pertaining to this Section of the work.C. If any work is performed and subsequent changes are necessary to conform to the regulations, such change shall be made as part of this work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to general requirements under Section 01600 and the following specific requirements. B. All materials and equipment shall be inspected for size, quality and quantity against approved shop drawings upon delivery. C. Delivery schedule of all equipment shall be coordinated with the Contractor. Equipment ready for shipment prior to the agreed on shipping date shall be stored without cost to the Owner by the manufacturer. _ D. Deliver equipment and materials to the site in the manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging. All materials shall be suitably packed for shipment and long term storage. Each package shall be labeled to indicate the project and the contents of each package. Where applicable, equipment numbers shall be marked on the container. E. All equipment and materials shipped that are exposed such as on a flat bed truck shall be protected during transit. The equipment and materials shall be protected from moisture, road salt, dirt and stones or other materials thrown up from other vehicles. _ Electrical components shall be protected as above, but with special attention to moisture. The method of shipment protection shall be defined in the submittals. F. Instructions for the servicing and startup of equipment in long term or prolonged storage shall accompany each item. G. All equipment and materials shall be stored in a covered dry location off of the ground. - When required to protect the materials they shall be stored in a temperature- controlled location. H. Provide covering and shielding for equipment and materials to protect from damage. FfWH1101 15500-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 I. Repair, restore and replace damaged items. J. Protect equipment and materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. 1.09 COORDINATION A. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departures from the Drawings or specifications are deemed necessary, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practical for review. No such departures shall be made without the prior written concurrence of the Engineer. B. Refer to the Structural and Architectural Drawings which indicate the type of construction in which the work shall be installed. Locations shown on the HVAC Drawings shall be checked against the general and detailed drawings of the construction proper. All measurements must be taken at the building. C. The Contractor shall coordinate the location and placement of all concrete inserts and welding attachments with the structural engineer. D. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for coordination of the HVAC systems with the work of all trades, including; scheduling, and verification that all structures, ducts, piping and the mounting of equipment are compatible. E. It shall be the responsibility of the subcontractor to have employed a competent - coordinator of mechanical systems and as such to provide all coordination of drawings or sketches as may be required or deemed necessary by the Engineer to obtain the required ceiling heights and eliminate conflicts with all piping, ducts, electrical, process mechanical and installations of all other trades. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Warrant all material and workmanship included herein. Warranty shall include parts & labor for a period of 1 year from date of final acceptance by Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cost incurred in furnishing and installing the replacement equipment. B. Refer to Section 01740 for general warranty requirements. 1.11 NOISE CRITERIA A. The selection of fans, air handling equipment and mechanical equipment and the installation of the system components such as duct work and piping shall be such as not to exceed to maximum permissible noise for non-equipment spaces as defined in Table 2, Design Guidelines for HVAC System Noise in Unoccupied Spaces contained in the 1995 edition of the ASHRAE Application Handbook. Under no conditions shall the noise created by equipment exceed the levels of permissible noise exposures of occupational areas as established by the OSHA and other Federal, State and local safety and health standards, codes and ordinances. FfWH1101 15500-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Refer to Equipment Schedules for sound criteria. Provide sound data for fans, ventilating equipment and air-conditioning units as listed in the Equipment Datasheets for the following frequency bands: 63, 125, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000 and 8000 Hz. Data shall be the sound power level (reference 10^12 watts per octave band) and to - include the dBA at 5 feet. The equipment supplier shall provide actual data for the equipment submitted. If the space does not meet the required criteria, and the noise level of the equipment is found to be the cause, the equipment supplier shall be - responsible for the modifications required to correct the condition. 1.12 DEFINITIONS A. Particular terminology used under this Division is defined as follows: 1. Fan Unit—Any unit or assembly containing a fan, motor and drive. 2. Readily Accessible — Shall mean that the unit shall be accessible without the need for ladders, harness or other device. Basically the unit shall be accessible at operator level. It shall also mean that no equipment, piping, or other systems shall need to be removed or dismantled to access the unit. 3. Easily Accessible - Shall mean that the unit shall be accessible without the need for removing or dismantling any equipment, piping, or other systems; however it may require the use of a ladder of harness to reach the unit. 1.13 SPARE PARTS A. Spare parts shall include all special items on the manufacturer's standard list of spare parts. B. In addition to special items, the following spare parts shall be provided: 1. Furnish all special tools required for normal operation and proper servicing of the equipment. 2. Spare parts shall include all items on the manufacturer's standard list of spare parts and the following for each unit: a. One complete set of drive belts for each piece of belt driven equipment.C. Pack spare parts in containers suitable for extended storage without deterioration of the parts. Containers shall be clearly labeled designating contents, pieces of equipment for which intended and equipment identification numbers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Due to the pump area being a wet and un-airconditioned space, special attention shall be made to materials of construction called out in each specification section and on the equipment schedules in the Drawings. Where not called out in each individual specification section or on the Drawings, all material for equipment, ductwork, dampers, linkages, supports, hardware, etc. specified under Division 15 shall be constructed of corrosion resistant materials —aluminum or 304 stainless steel. Uncoated steel, galvanized steel or painted steel shall not be acceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Drawings or equipment specifications. FfWH1101 15500-10 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.02 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Certain items of electrical equipment which are furnished under this Section shall meet the requirements specified in Division 16. B. Electric Motors 1. The motor manufacturer shall confirm that motors used to power equipment are provided with bearings that will provide a bearing life equal to the driven equipment or better. Confirmation shall be included with shop drawing submittal. 2. Motors will be selected to be non-overloading over the entire operating range of the equipment. A safety factor of 25 percent will be added to all motors up to and including 50 horsepower. A safety factor of 15 percent will be added to all motors over 50 horsepower. Motors indicated on the schedules are to be considered a minimum. This sizing is not to limit compliance with the above requirements. 3. Motors shall be premium efficiency type as rated by NEMA. Where premium efficiency motors are not available for the motor size specified, provide high- efficiency motors. C. Electrical enclosures and panels, including HVAC control panels and associated switches, lights, pushbuttons and other controls components, shall be suitable for the environment and electrical classification for the space they are located in and shall meet Division 16 requirements. Refer to the electrical drawings for the space classifications and NEMA designations. D. Where hazardous classifications and NEMA ratings are not shown on the HVAC Drawings refer to the Electrical Drawings. E. Where a conflict with NEMA rating occurs between or within Drawings and Specifications, the more restrictive NEMA rating shall govern. 2.03 BEARINGS A. Grease lubricated bearings (except where driven by motors smaller than 1/2 Hp) shall be equipped with Zerk lubrication fittings and with provision for automatic relief of F lubricant pressure away from fan wheel. The latter may be accomplished by either built in relief devices or automatic ball and spring relief fittings at the bottom of the bearing housing. B. Pressure relieves shall be located outside of the units and shall be visible from maintenance locations. Lubrication fittings shall be located to be easily accessible from maintenance or operating levels. W here necessary, extension tubes shall be provided to bring the service fitting to an accessible location and the relief visible from the same location. C. Bearings for all equipment in the schedule below shall have heavy-duty grease lubricated ball or roller bearings. Bearings shall have ample thrust provision to prevent end play during the normal life of the bearing. Unless specifically noted FTWH1101 15500-11 SEPTEMBER 2011 -' SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 otherwise, all fans shall have bearings for both the equipment and motors with the - following ABMA L-10 life. 1. Fans over 3000 cfm —40,000 hours. 2. Continuous duty fans with motors over 25 horse power 100,000 hours. 3. All fans with motors over 50 horse power 100,000 hours. D. For systems with bearings requiring L-10 lives of 100,000 hours or greater, the equipment supplier shall provide calculations for both the equipment bearings and the motor bearings to confirm the bearing selections. For belt drives, the calculations shall include the effect of the sheave size, number of belts, the sheave location on the - shaft, and the location of the motor to the driven sheave. E. The equipment manufacturer shall provide confirmation of the required life based on the actual drive components. For motors 50 horsepower and greater, the bearing life calculations for both the equipment bearings and the motor bearings shall be provided. 2.04 FLAME AND SMOKE RATINGS A. All materials, including adhesives, surface coatings, sealers, assemblies of several materials, insulation, jacketing, finish, etc, shall have flame spread ratings not over 25 (fire resistive) and smoke development ratings not over 50 and fuel contributed rating not over 50, as established by tests conducted in accordance with the Federal Standard 00136B, National Bureau of Standards Radiant Energy Fire Test and the National Fire Code of the NFPA. B. These requirements shall apply to all circumstances whether the materials are field applied or have been applied by a manufacturer in his/her shop, or elsewhere, prior to delivery to the project for installation. _ 2.05 V-BELT DRIVE A. V-belt drives shall consist of the driver and driven sheaves and one or multiple — matched V-belts. Drives furnished to transmit less than 3/4 Hp may be a single groove, single belt type. Drives to transmit 3/4 Hp or more shall consist of at least two belts. Belts smaller than "A" cross section shall not be used. B. Each sheave shall be grooved to match the belt selection, bored and keyed to fit the receiving shaft, and grooves shall be in parallel planes exactly perpendicular to the bore for the full 360 degrees. Sheaves shall have keys and setscrews. Sheave material may be cast iron. C. The drive shall be sized 1.5 times the motor nameplate rating and also shall have ample strength to start the driven equipment by full voltage across the line motor starting. 2.06 ROOF CURBS A. Roof curbs shall be furnished for all roof mounted HVAC equipment, including fans and i at all duct penetrations unless otherwise noted. FIWH1101 15500-12 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Roof curbs shall be pre fabricated type, minimum 12 in height and sized to match the dimensions of the equipment base supported. Curbs shall be straight sided type of all aluminum welded construction with nominal 2 in thick acoustical/thermal insulation in curb walls. A perforated metal liner shall be provided to protect the insulation. Aluminum shall be 0.080-in 3003-1-114 alloy. Provide with 1/4-in polyurethane gasket on top of wood nailer. Curbs shall provide a flat top surface regardless of the roof slope. Provide with damper rack for mounting of dampers, security bars and/or sound baffles as called for on the drawings. Curb interiors and exterior shall be provided with protective coatings when a coating is specified. Roof curbs shall be supplied by the equipment manufacturer. C. Fans - Provide with aluminum (unless material is specified otherwise in Equipment Schedule or in Section 15860) factory fabricated insulated curbs. Provide with wood nailer and damper tray. Provide neoprene vibration isolation at metal contacts. 2.07 EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATORS AND MOUNTINGS A. General 1. Unless otherwise specified in this Division all machinery or vibrating mechanical equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by vibration isolators with a minimum deflection as specified. Operating equipment that can transmit objectionable vibration and noise must be installed with special types of vibration isolators such as flexible connectors to ductwork, piping and wiring. In more critical areas and under particular conditions, additional vibration isolators shall be installed as specified in other related Sections in this Division, or in specific equipment schedules. 2. All equipment shall be provided with attachment points for floor or suspended mounting that will safely transmit all loads. 3. The vibration isolator manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper selection of vibration isolators suitable for the particular application. Selection of the vibration isolator shall include the following factors: a. Equipment Weight b. Equipment operating frequencies c. Type of building support structure 4. Except for the Owner Furnished equipment, vibration isolators shall be furnished with the equipment. 5. All floor mounted vibration isolators shall be bolted to the floor or framing on which they rest. B olts shall be arranged to prevent transmission of vibration through the bolts. 6. All isolation devices for a single piece of equipment shall be selected for a uniform static deflection according to distribution of weight in the equipment. 7. After installation of equipment, isolators shall be adjusted for proper loading and distribution of weight. 8. In general, packaged rooftop equipment does not need isolation rails if fan motor assembly and compressor are internally isolated. B. Types—The following types of vibration isolators may be used. FrWH1101 15500-13 SEPTEMBER 2011 �s SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS w Contract No.01632 y 1. Isolation for Suspension a. Isolation hangers for suspension of equipment and piping shall have a single element of elastomer for 1/4 in deflection, a double or a single molded element of 1/2 in deflection, a s ingle spring element with an elastomer grommet for up to 3/4 in deflection and a combination of an elastomer and spring elements in series for 1 i n deflection and up contained within a structural rigid one piece steel hanger box. Springs shall have a minimum - ratio of outside diameter to operating spring height of 0.8 and an additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the specified deflection. b. The neoprene element shall have a bushing to prevent hanger rod contact with the housing box. The lower rod shall be free to swing in a 30 degree arc without touching the spring or the housing. 2. Rigidly Mounted Equipment a. When equipment doesn't require vibration isolation, it shall be firmly attached to the building structure. 2.08 EQUIPMENT GUARDS A. Use suitable structural frames with minimum 12 GA, 3/4 IN stainless steel mesh, or } expanded metal mesh. B. Attach to equipment by bolts with wing nuts, or other approved connectors. C. At belts, provide opening for measuring RPMs. D. Provide at belts, couplings, moving machinery and equipment in accord with OSHA. E. Design for easy access to belts and other items requiring replacement. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All products specified in the Specification Sections listed under 1.01 Scope of Work shall be installed according to the applicable manufacturer's recommendations, the _ details shown on the Drawings and as specified herein and in other related Sections. B. The Contractor shall start up each piece of equipment and system and shall make all adjustments so that the system is placed in proper operating condition. C. Install all equipment, ductwork, piping and trim in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and install rigid, plumb and true to line, with all parts in perfect - working order. D. The Contractor shall not install any equipment or materials until the Owner and i Engineer have approved all submittals. If any equipment or materials are installed prior to approval of the submittals, it shall be at the Contractor's risk. E. Provide necessary anchoring devices and supports. FfWH1101 15500-14 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 - I. Use structural supports suitable for equipment, or as indicated. 2. Check loadings and dimensions of equipment with shop drawings. 3. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members. 4. Provide equipment supports even though not detailed on architectural and structural drawings. F. Verify that equipment will fit support layouts indicated. Where substitute equipment is used, revise indicated supports to fit. G. Arrange for necessary openings to allow entry of equipment. Where equipment cannot be installed as structure is being erected, provide and arrange for building in of boxes, sleeves or other devices to allow later installation. H. Install metal counter flashings to make penetrations of mechanical work through walls and roofs water and weathertight. 1. Furnish clamps, waterproofing material and labor. 2. Where metal flashings are applied over concrete, paint concrete with 1/8 IN of mastic cement first. 3. Set flashing in mastic cement, watertight. I. Repair and replace roof construction which is damaged by this work in manner which will not nullify roof warranty. J. Do not use equipment exceeding dimensions indicated on detail drawings or arrangements that reduce required clearances or exceed specified maximum •i dimensions. K. Install equipment, piping and ductwork to permit easy access for normal maintenance. 1. Maintain easy access to filters, motors, drives, compressors, and arrange piping, conduit, ducts and related work to facilitate maintenance. 2. Relocate items which interfere with access. 3.02 EQUIPMENT PADS A. Floor-mounted and grade-mounted HVAC equipment shall be provided with concrete foundations (isolation pads). Refer to Structural Contract Documents for details. 3.03 WORK IN EXISTING FACILITIES A. Fabricate and install interconnecting portions of systems prior to shut down for final connections including valve assemblies in piping systems and dampers in ductwork. B. Maintain existing services and equipment unless indicated to be removed. 3.04 CLEANING A. All equipment, fan wheels, motors, ductwork and piping shall be left in a thoroughly cleaned condition. Refer to specification sections and Division 1 for additional information. FfWH1101 15500-15 SEPTEMBER 2011 ` SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. All piping shall be thoroughly flushed to remove all foreign materials prior to any cleaning procedure. All strainer baskets shall be removed, cleaned and reinstalled at the completion of the cleaning operation and also at the completion of all system and equipment final tests. All flushing and cleaning shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Furnish, install and remove all temporary piping and equipment used in the cleaning and flushing operations. Cleaning and flushing shall be performed as specified in other Sections. 3.05 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. General -Test and inspect all systems and put into satisfactory operation prior to final acceptance to Owner. Test the work as required by the Engineer during the progress of the work to demonstrate the strength, durability and fitness of the installation. Furnish all instruments, ladders, lubricants, test equipment and personnel required for the tests; including manufacturer's representatives for testing and start up of all - supplied equipment. Balancing and testing shall be performed as specified in Section 15990 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing and need not be duplicated under other sections. Before testing and final inspection, all systems shall be cleaned and - disinfected as specified. B. Final Tests-Tests of all systems shall be carried out as required by the Engineer prior to final acceptance of the systems for the purpose of demonstrating satisfactory functional and operating efficiency as well as adjustment. D uring this period, the setting of all automatic controls shall be checked and sufficient measurements taken to ensure that conditions are correct and that capacities are adequate to meet the specified requirements. Provide competent personnel to conduct all tests. Systems will not be considered complete until all tests have been concluded to the satisfaction of the Engineer and all other parties having jurisdiction. In event of leakage or defects, tests must be repeated until all faults are corrected. All tests may be requested to be performed in the presence of the Engineer. The general operating tests shall be performed under as near design conditions as possible. Four copies of - records of all tests, measurements, settings of throttling devices and nameplate data shall be submitted to the Engineer. C. Contractor shall demonstrate satisfactory performance of all equipment and systems for a minimum period of 5 working days prior to final acceptable by Owner. D. Test and Inspection Reports - Contractor shall submit certified test reports, verifying that equipment is operating per the design conditions. Where the individual specification sections require factory-trained representatives to make inspections and/or assist with testing. The name and contact information of said individuals shall be in the test and inspection reports. Four copies of records of all tests, measurements, settings of throttling devices and nameplate data shall be submitted to the Engineer. _ FTWH1101 15500-16 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.06 BALANCE OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT A. All machines shall be balanced both statically and dynamically by the manufacturer within the limits of best commercial practices. The term machine, as used above, is to be considered as any piece of equipment which contains rotating components. All machines furnished shall have operating speed not exceeding 80 percent of the first critical speed. 3.07 TRAINING A. Provide the Owner with training instruction for the proper operation maintenance, inspection, troubleshooting, etc. of equipment and systems installed under this Section. Refer to individual specification sections and Division 1 for additional requirements. 3.08 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Equipment shall be provided with labels per Section 15190. 3.09 TEMPORARY OPERATION A. Properly maintain and service all equipment and systems until the particular equipment or the system has been accepted by the Owner. Contractor shall follow manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule during this period. B. This maintenance shall include compliance with the manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions as well as periodic checking, cleaning, and/or replacement of belts, strainers and filters and the lubrication of moving parts and all required adjustments. C. Contractor shall repair any equipment and systems that fail, leak or get damaged. Any systems that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer shall be replaced in kind, without additional cost to the Owner D. Records of all maintenance and lubrication work performed on Owner or Contractor furnished equipment shall be maintained at the construction or installation site and be available at all times for a review by the Owner or Engineer. At the request of the Owner or Engineer copies of these records shall be submitted for information and/or review. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Materials, fixtures and equipment shall be properly protected at all times and all pipe openings shall be temporarily capped or plugged so as to keep dirt and debris out. Keep plug or cap in place until final connections are made. •' B. Protect nameplates on all equipment. FTWH1101 15500-17 SEPTEMBER 2011 �. SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.11 OPPOSITE SEASON STARTUP A. At first heating or cooling season following final acceptance, start up systems not started due to lack of seasonal design load. The Contractor shall make any necessary - modifications to the initial adjustments to produce optimum system operation. 3.12 PAINTING AND COATINGS V A. Unless otherwise specified, all machinery and factory finished equipment such as fans and other items of manufacture shall be hot dipped galvanized, aluminum, stainless steel, or will have a factory applied finish, color as standard with the manufacturer. ` Components fabricated from stainless steel do not require a coating finish unless otherwise specified. All tanks, supporting steel, hangers, rods and all other uncoated or non galvanized steel other than standard piping and fittings shall have a shop coat consisting of a suitable primer and finish coat. If not factory applied, the prime coat shall be as specified in Division 9. All items not factory or shop primed prior to installation shall be suitably cleaned of rust and mill scale by wire brushing, sanding,or other means and prime painted, immediately after installation. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of all defects, blemishes, holidays and the like apparent in manufactured coatings and shall ensure that the materials used for such repair shall match and be compatible with the manufacturer's standard color, coatings and practices. Surfaces to be repaired or recoated are to be prepared as recommended by the paint or coating supplier. Care shall be taken not to paint over nameplates. C. Furnish touch up paint for the various types of equipment furnished and deliver u unopened paint to the Owner at completion of the project. The amount of touch-up paint supplied shall be sufficient to cover 15 percent of the applicable painted surfaces or one pint, whichever is greater. D. Where specified, or called for on the following schedule, special corrosion resistant/protective coatings shall be provided. Whenever a protective coating is - specified, the equipment shall be coated both inside and out. Whenever necessary to provide full coverage of the equipment, the equipment shall be completely disassembled to allow proper preparation and coating application. Any component that would block the coating process shall be removed. Equipment provided with gaskets or liners shall be coated before the application of the gasketing or liner. The equipment Vendor shall test rotating equipment after coating to confirm dynamic balance. If work needs to be done to correct the equipment balance, the integrity of the coating must be corrected after such work. E. Ductwork connections to units that require corrosion resistant coatings shall be made with flanges. Flanges shall be factory drilled before coating. Resilient washers suitable for the environment shall be used to protect the coating from the bolts in the flange. The use of self tapping screws or other fastening methods that will damage the coating are not acceptable. F. All items to be provided with a protective coating shall have the following data on the - coating included with the unit submittal. Submittal shall include vendor data sheets on FTWH1101 15500-18 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 the specific coating being used, corrosion resistance data sheets, detailed application data sheets to include surface preparation procedures. For baked coatings submit a letter from the coating manufacturer, that the company doing the actual coating operation is an approved coating company. When an equipment supplier provides the coating, the information shall be supplied by the coating manufacturers. 3.13 MANUFACTURER STANDARD COATINGS A. Coating material shall be manufacturer's standard as specified in the schedule below. Surfaces shall be prepared, primed and coated as required by the coating supplier. Heat curing shall be provided where required by the coating supplier. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 15500-19 SEPTEMBER 2011 -.+ SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 15503 HVAC - DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and remove and dispose of the HVAC systems, including ductwork, piping, insulation, controls and equipment, in the existing buildings as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Provide all HVAC demolition work associated with the removal of equipment from the existing facilities, including disconnecting and removing all piping and ductwork to equipment being removed under other related Sections. C. The existing systems shall remain in service until they have been replaced by new or temporary systems. D. Dismantle equipment, ductwork and piping to sizes that can be removed from the building. E. Contractor shall protect floors, walls and doors from damage during demolition work. Contractor shall be responsible for repairing damaged surfaces due to demolition work. F. Contractor shall reasonably clean affected areas at the completion of each workday to allow plant personnel access to equipment and areas still in service. Spills shall be immediately cleaned. G. Contractor shall be responsible for remediation of all lead paint prior to removal of lead painted piping/equipment. Contractor shall follow all OSHA requirements for remediation of lead paint. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to structural detail drawings for permanent closure of roof, wall and floor openings left by removal of piping, ductwork, flues and equipment. B. Disconnecting electrical equipment and removal of non-control wiring is included under Division 16. FTWH1101 15503-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 4 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-DEMOLITION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS on Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The existing HVAC systems, including piping, ductwork and equipment, shall remain in operation until the new or temporary systems are placed in service. Air-conditioning, ventilation and heating shall be maintained without interruption. The demolition and removal work shall be coordinated with the construction schedule for new work and the demolition work of other contracts. B. Removal of existing HVAC systems have not been detailed on the Drawings. Trace out piping systems to be removed and perform the removal work as required to provide complete and safe operating systems. C. Provide continuous service on all systems affected by the demolition except where Owner may permit a temporary shutdown. Where a shutdown cannot be allowed, provide temporary services as required to maintain air-conditioning, ventilation and heating in the affected spaces. D. Large floor and roof openings left exposed after removal of equipment and/or ductwork, but prior to permanently closing openings, shall be temporarily covered with 3/a-inch plywood or steel plate to prevent personnel, tools, equipment, etc. from failing through the opening. Signage and/or barricades shall be appropriately placed around the openings to warn personnel. E. In general, the work includes removal and disposal of: 1. Ductwork, piping, insulation and equipment including their hangers, supports. Piping and ductwork shall be capped or plugged at the service indicated to remain. 2. All piping that is to be removed shall be removed back to the next live branch or main and plugged or capped whether or not indicated on the Drawings. 3.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Demolition shall include: 1+ Cabinet Heaters. 2. Fans. 3. Gas Piping. 4. HVAC Hot Water Piping, supports, insulation and accessories. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL A. Remove all HVAC work associated with equipment scheduled for demolition except portions indicated to remain. B. Remove abandoned piping, ductwork and insulation back to the source or nearest point of usage, including piping above accessible ceiling finishes and in chases. FfWH1101 15503-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-DEMOLITION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 ' 3.04 DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Except as indicated herein or otherwise directed by the Owner, all material and equipment removed under this Section shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor. Provide the Owner with receipts verifying acceptable disposal of any legally regulated materials and equipment. r END OF SECTION FfWH1101 15503-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-DEMOLITION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS • • Contract No.01632 �- SECTION 15550 HVAC - HEATING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install all heating units as shown on the Drawings, scheduled and as specified herein. B. This HVAC specification is incomplete without the information contained on the Drawings and in the Schedules. C. Refer to Section 15500 for HVAC General Provisions related to the work of this Section. ' 1.02 RELATED WORK A. HVAC Controls is under Section 15950. Sequences of control are in the Drawings. B. Remote disconnects shall be provided under Division 16. C. Refer to Division 16 for electrical requirements. 1.03 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES A. This Section is incomplete without the information contained in the equipment schedules shown on the Drawings. All heating units shall be of the type, capacity and arrangement as listed on the schedules. Units shall consist of the components listed in the schedule and those components obviously required for the type of unit. Particular attention must be paid to the remarks and notes in these schedules. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all shop drawings and Operating and Maintenance Manuals with all information required per Sections 01300, 01350, and 15500. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 15500 and the following additional specific requirements related to this Section. _y B. Manufacturer of heating equipment shall have minimum 5 years experience in the manufacture of heating equipment of similar type and size as specified herein and suitable for installation in a wastewater facility. 1.06 WARRANTY- GUARANTEE A. Refer to Sections 01740 and 15500 for warranty requirements. FfWH1101 15550-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—HEATING EQUIPMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.07 SPARE PARTS A. Spare parts shall include all special items on the manufacturer's standard list of spare parts B. In addition to special items, the following spare parts shall be provided: 1. Furnish all special tools required for normal operation and proper servicing of the equipment. C. Pack spare parts in containers suitable for extended storage without deterioration of the parts. Containers shall be clearly labeled designating contents, pieces of equipment for which intended and equipment identification numbers. PART 2 PRODUCTS y 2.01 GAS UNIT HEATERS A. Unit heaters shall be gas-fired type substantially constructed, corrosion-resistant, self-contained factory-assembled unit consisting of heat section, fan, motor, housing, outlet diffuser or vanes. They shall be the suspended or wall-mounted type arranged for horizontal or vertical air flow, as shown on the Drawings and schedules. Casings shall be painted with a primer and finished with baked-on enamel at the factory. All parts shall be heavily braced and stiffened to prevent vibration and hold all working parts rigidly in line. Casing sides shall be readily removable for access to interior Y parts. Casings of suspended-type units shall be designed for direct attachment of the hangers. Adjustable, horizontal and vertical vanes, nozzles or diffusers, arranged to give uniform air distribution without objectionable drafts, shall be provided for each heater. B. Provide with stainless steel heat exchanger. C. The gas burner shall be stainless steel and be equipped with single stage intermittent gas pilot, safety control automatic gas valve, main gas regulator, pilot regulator and cock and all components for a complete burner. The unit shall have all required burner and safety controls. Burner control and fuel piping train shall conform to FM requirements. D. Factory wired controls shall be provided in the unit control panel. Panel shall include all safety controls and interlocks, control devices, and terminal strip for remote wired devices. Control type shall be as specified in the schedules. Control voltage shall not exceed 120 Volt. E. Where called for on the equipment schedules, units shall be provided with powered -- venting or powered venting and combustion air ducting to the outdoors. Units shall include a power venter motor and wheel. A pressure sensor shall be provided to confirm operation of the power venter before operation of the unit is allowed.F. Gas unit heaters shall be Modine Model HD series or equal. FTWH1101 15550-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—HEATING EQUIPMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 G. Gas vent shall be Double Wall Type B for gravity vented systems and Type PS for positive pressure vent systems, UL listed for use with residential and commercial buildings. The double wall metal vent piping shall be an outer casing of 0.018-in thickness galvanized steel, an inner casing of 0.012-in thickness 1100 aluminum alloy as manufactured by Metalbestos or equal. 2.02 ELECTRICAL A. The type of enclosure, including unit mounted components and subsystems, shall be NEMA rated in accordance with requirement indicated on the Equipment Schedule of the Drawings. Electrical components (wiring, transformers, relays, labeling, terminal connections, etc.) shall be provided by the manufacturer in strict compliance with Division 16 requirements. B. The capacity, operating and safety controls and control sequence shall be designed for completely fail-safe, automatic operation. The sequence shall prevent recycling of the unit prior to a predetermined safe time interval. 2.03 LABELING A. Provide each piece of equipment with a factory-applied stainless steel nameplate permanently attached to the exterior of the equipment, in an accessible location, external to any insulated surface and observable while the equipment is in operation. Include the following information, where applicable, on the nameplate: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Equipment Model Number 3. Equipment tag number. 4. Purchasers order number. 5. Serial Number 6. Manufacturer's size and type 7. Air Flow Rate—CFM. 8. Fan Horsepower and RPM. 9. Heating Capacity— MBH or KW. 10. For gas-fired equipment, Type of Fuel Approved for use. y 11. Volts/Phase/Hertz 12. List of each individual component's electrical data: volts, amps or watts, phase 13. Date of manufacture. 14. Approving Agency Seals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall not install any equipment or materials until the Owner and Engineer have approved all submittals. If any equipment or materials are installed prior to approval of the submittals, it shall be at the Contractor's risk. FTWH1101 15550-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—HEATING EQUIPMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 + B. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. -- Provide piping and ductwork connections in accordance with the requirement of the other related Sections. C. The Contractor shall start up each piece of equipment and system and shall make all adjustments so that the system is placed in proper operating condition. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature set point on room thermostats. B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. 3.03 CLEANING A. At the completion of the work, clean all piping, equipment and apparatus for same included in this Section and, where required. 3.04 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide each heater unit with an equipment tag label. Label shall be a plastic plate or self-adhesive tag. Lettering shall be 1-inch tall minimum. Label shall be located in a visible location. END OF SECTION r FrWH1101 15550-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—HEATING EQUIPMENT ... MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 15860 HVAC - FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install all fans and fan accessories as shown and scheduled on the Drawings, and as specified herein. B. This HVAC specification is incomplete without the information contained on the Drawings and in the Equipment Schedules. C. Due to corrosive nature at plant, fans shall be all aluminum construction as a minimum, including all associated accessories, including dampers. D. Refer to Section 15500 for HVAC General Provisions related to the work of this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Ductwork and accessories are included in Section 15890. B. HVAC Controls is under Section 15950. Sequences of control are in the HVAC Drawings. C. Remote disconnects shall be provided under Division 16. D. Refer to Division 16 for electrical requirements. 1.03 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES A. This Section is incomplete without the information contained in the schedules. All fans shall be of the type, capacity and arrangement as listed on the schedules. Units shall consist of the components listed in the schedule and those components obviously required for the type of unit. Particular attention must be paid to the remarks and " notes in these schedules. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all shop drawings and Operating and Maintenance Manuals with all information required per Sections 01300 and 15500. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. These standards shall be considered as minimum requirements. This is a general list and not all standards listed are necessarily referenced elsewhere in this Section. Specific requirements of this Section and/or Drawings shall have precedence. The Owner shall resolve conflicts between published requirements. FTWH1101 15860-1 AUGUST SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-FANS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 .� B. Titles and abbreviation of Federal, State and industry standards, technical societies, associations and institutes and other organizations, which may be used, are as follows: 1. Air Diffusion Council (ADC) 2. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 3. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) 4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 5. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 6. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 7. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 8. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 9. Factory Mutual (FM) 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 11. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) 12. National Electrical Code (NEC) 13. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) _ 14. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 15. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 16. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) _ 17. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of equipment supports/roof curbs with Division 7. 1.07 NOISE CRITERIA .� 1. Refer to Section 15500 and individual Equipment Schedules. 1.08 WARRANTY- GUARANTEE A. Refer to Sections 01740 and 15500 for warranty requirements. B. Guarantee that all equipment meets the design and performance requirements specified, and alter and/or replace, at no cost to the Owner any piece of equipment, which fails to meet these requirements. Include any work and factory trained supervision necessary. - FTWH1101 15860-2 AUGUST SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-FANS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and model of catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard quality, grade, type, size, physical arrangement, performance characteristics and availability. B. Fans shall be factory assembled, complete with fan wheel, fan housing or cabinet, bearings, drives, drive guard, motor, motor base, unit base and vibration isolators, dampers and bird screens unless otherwise specified. All fans shall be provided with lugs, brackets or field supplied devices to allow the fan to be firmly bolted to the structure or fastened to specified vibration isolators. C. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced prior to shipment from factory. D. Where belt drives are used, motors shall be provided with adjustable slide bases. Adjustable sheaves and slide bases shall be selected so that the midpoint of the adjustable range matches the fan schedule data. Drives selected shall have a safety factor of 1.5 times motor horsepower. E. All fans shall be AMCA certified for air performance and sound ratings tested in accordance with AMCA 300. F. Motor shall be selected to be non overloading for the entire fan curve range and for the reasonable expected temperature and humidity. Schedule motor sizes are minimum. If a larger motor is required for the fan proposed, the larger motor shall be provided at no additional cost. G. Fans shall be assembled with OSHA shaft, drive, and motor guards. Provide access for greasing bearings, tachometer readings of fan and motor speed without removing the cover. Cover shall be properly ventilated to prevent motor overheating. H. Ductwork connections to units that require corrosion resistant coatings shall be made with flanges. Flanges shall be factory drilled before coating. Resilient washers suitable for the environment shall be used to protect the coating from the bolts in the flange. The use of self tapping screws or other fastening methods that will damage the coating are not acceptable. I. The noise level of the equipment operating in the field shall not exceed 85 dBA overall sound pressure level (referenced to 20 micro pascals) at a distance of 3-ft from equipment surfaces. Provide octave band sound data if another noise level is specified in the schedule or if sound data submission is specified in the schedules. 3. Additional requirements are contained herein for specific fan types and in the schedules. K. Section 15500 contains general requirements for vibration isolators, bearings and motor drives. Adhere to those requirements and the specific requirements in this Section. FTWH1101 15860-3 AUGUST SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-FANS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 L. When bearings are not accessible, extended supply and relief fittings shall be supplied. " Both supply and relief fittings shall terminate in the same location. M. Provide inlet and outlet screens for fans that are not directly duct connected. - N. Fans shall be UL listed and AMCA certified. 2.02 TUBEAXIAL AND VANEAXIAL FANS A. Axial fans shall have flanged inlet and discharge, access door in fan tube. Belt drive fans shall have shroud over the belt drive in the air stream. Mounting brackets shall be provided based on fan mounting orientation. Unless spark resistant construction or other materials of construction are specified on the schedule, fans shall be of welded steel construction with cast aluminum wheels. Manufacturers shall be Aerovent, Inc.; Buffalo Forge Co.; Hartzell Fan, Inc.; New York Blower Co.; Loren Cook Co.; Peerless- Winsmith, Inc. or equal. 2.03 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHAUST FANS A. Centrifugal wall and roof exhaust fans shall be furnished with removable discharge _ safety/bird screen and inlet safety screen if not directly connected to duct work. Motor and drive shall be located out of the exhaust air stream. Provide neoprene vibration isolation at metal contacts and permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearings. Bearings shall have an L-50 rating of 200,000 hours. Fan wheel shall be backward - inclined. Fans shall be aluminum construction with spun aluminum drive housing and shroud unless other materials of construction are specified on the schedule. Manufacturers shall be Greenheck, Acme Eng. & Mfg. Corp.; Buffalo Forge Co.; New - York Blower Co.; Hartzell Fan Inc.; Loren Cook Co. or equal. 2.04 ROOF CURBS A. Refer to Section 15500. 2.05 LABELING A. Provide each piece of equipment with a factory-applied stainless steel nameplate permanently attached to the exterior of the equipment, in an accessible location, external to any insulated surface and observable while the equipment is in operation. B. a minimum, include the following information on the nameplate: -- Manufacturer's name. Equipment Model Number 3. Equipment tag number. ` 4. Purchasers order number. 5. Serial Number 6. Manufacturer's size and type 7. Air Flow Rate-CFM. 8. Design Pressure (inch W.G.). 9. Fan Horsepower and RPM. FTWH1101 15860-4 AUGUST SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-FANS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 10. Volts/Phase/Hertz 11. Date of manufacture. 12. Approving Agency Seals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The fans shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and as shown on the Drawings. B. The Contractor shall not install any equipment or materials until the Owner and Engineer have approved all submittals. If any equipment or materials are installed prior to approval of the submittals, it shall be at the Contractor's risk. C. Ensure that lubricating fluids and greases have been applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor shall be responsible for all start-up checks and adjustments and shall perform them unless they are done by the manufacturer's representative. D. Statically and dynamically balance each fan to assure vibration free operation. E. Provide manufacturers representative to inspect fans and supervise start-up of all fans 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall engage a manufacturer's factory representative to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation (pre-startup checks), including ductwork and electrical connections. B. Perform field quality-control inspections per the attached report, and per any pre- startup checklists from the manufacturer. Fill out reports and submit to the Owner's Representative. C. Replace any damaged or malfunctioning equipment with new equipment. = 3.03 STARTUP SERVICE A. The Contractor shall do the initial startup of the equipment under the supervision and direction of a manufacturer's factory representative so that each fan is placed in proper operating condition. The Owner shall witness startup. B. Perform Field Quality Control checks and inspections specified above prior to start-up procedures. Do not startup equipment without filters and do not run equipment with dirty filter pressure drop more than twice clean filter pressure drop. C. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the startup checks per the attached Startup Report, and per any startup checklists from the manufacturer. Fill out reports and submit to the Owner's Representative. FTWH1101 15860-5 AUGUST SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-FANS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.04 CLEANING A. At the completion of the work, clean all piping, equipment and apparatus for same included in this Section and, where required. B. Thoroughly flush the system. 3.05 TRAINING A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units and condensing units. Refer to Division 1. 3.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION } A. Provide each equipment unit with an equipment tag label. Label shall be a plastic plate or self-adhesive tag. Lettering shall be 6-inches tall. Label shall be located in a visible location. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 15860-6 AUGUST SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-FANS MOTOR AND$WITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 15862 HVAC - AIR FILTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to remove particulate matter from air for HVAC applications. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. 15860 HVAC- Standard Fans 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all product data in accordance with Sections 01300 and 15500 and the following additional requirements. B. Product Data: Include dimensions; shipping and installed weights; required clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air filters and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1. B. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. C. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 52.1 for method of testing and rating air filter units. D. Comply with ARI 850. E. Comply with NFPA 70 for installing electrical components. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing - contents. FfWH1101 15862-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 ti SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-AIR FILTERS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1. Provide one complete set of filters for each filter bank. If system includes prefilters, provide only prefilters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Air Filters, Electrostatic Air Cleaners, and Filter-Holding Systems: a. Farr Co. b. Flanders Filters, Inc. c. International Air Filter, Inc. d. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 FILTERS A. See Equipment Schedule for filter types by unit. B. Filter Box shall have tracks for the specified filter types to allow filter replacement from either side. Sealing material shall be provided at tracks and ends to prevent air by passing the filters. C. Filtration shall be as follows: -- 1. Prefilter: Camfil Farr 30/30 or equal. a. Nominal filter depth: 2-in. b. Minimum pleats per linear foot: 15 c. Initial resistance to airflow at 500 fpm: 0.28-in w.g. d. ASHRAE 52.2-1999 Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value: MERV 8. e. ASHRAE 52.1-1992 Minimum dust holding capacity: 170 gms. f. Media: Cotton and synthetic blend lofted to a uniform depth of 0.18-in and formed into a uniform radial pleat. g. Media support: Welded wire grid spot weld on one-inch centers, treated for corrosion resistance, bonded to the downstream side of media. h. Enclosing frame: minimum 28-point high wet-strength beverage board bonded to media. D. Filter Housing: Camfil Farr 3P Glide Pack or equal. Housing shall accept and individually seal any standard nominal 24-in x 24-in or 12-in x 24-in air filtration device. 1. Side-Access 2. Material. Minimum 16-gauge 316 stainless steel housing and holding frame, stainless steel tracking. 3. Design _ a. All components weatherproof for interior or exterior installation. b. Predrilled standing flanges for attachment to other components. 4. Leakage/bypass �- FTWH1101 15862-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-AIR FILTERS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 a. Maximum house to ambient leakage total: 0.5 percent of rated airflow at 3.0- in w.g. b. Maximum leakage upstream to downstream of filter, holding frame, and slide mechanism: 1.0 percent of rated airflow at 3.0-in w.g. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install filter frames according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. C. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. D. Install filter gage for each filter bank. E. Install filter gage static-pressure tips upstream and downstream from filters to measure pressure drop through filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in an accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages. F. Coordinate filter installations with air-handling unit installations. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a fac tory-authorized service representative to ftJ inspect field assembled components, filter and filter-frame installation. Report results in writing. 3.03 CLEANING A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and air distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 15862-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-AIR FILTERS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 15890 HVAC - DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish, fabricate and install all ductwork, including fittings, accessories, dampers, hangers, diffusers, registers, grilles and any incidental work or components required to provide complete air supply, return and exhaust ductwork systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. In general, ductwork shall consist of any passageway made of sheet metal or other material substantially air-tight, used for the conveying of air, gas or materials. Included are fittings, transitions, bracing, fasteners, sealers, supports and accessories such as access panels, access doors, turning vanes and manual air balancing dampers. All ductwork shall be of size and material as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. All duct sizes indicated on the Drawings are clear, inside dimensions. �i C. The following work descriptions are not intended to in any way limit the above broad statement, but are intended as a more specific mention of the most important items included therein. D. All ductwork, piping, and equipment shown on the drawings is intended to be approximately correct to scale, but figured dimensions and detailed drawings of the actual equipment furnished shall be followed in every case. The drawings shall be taken in a sense as diagrammatic. Size of ductwork and piping are shown, but it is not the intent to show every offset or fitting, nor every hanger or support, or structural difficulty that may be encountered. To carry out the intent and purpose of the drawings all necessary parts to make a complete working system ready for use shall be furnished without extra charge. T he contractor shall be responsible to coordinate the system installation and routing with the work of all trades. E. Due to corrosive nature at plant, ductwork, dampers and associated accessories shall be aluminum construction as minimum. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete work is included in Division 3 except for required HVAC anchor bolts, sleeves and templates, which shall be furnished under this Section. B. Structural steel and miscellaneous metal is included in Division 5 except for supplementary steel required for HVAC hangers, equipment supports, anchors and guides, which shall be furnished under this Section. C. Painting is included in Division 9 except for factory finished HVAC equipment, HVAC shop painting and HVAC identification labeling and as required below in Part 2. D. Thermal insulation is included in Section 15250. FTWH1101 15890-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 E. Duct mounted instruments are specified in Section 15950 and installed under this — Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Sections 01300 and 15500, the following Drawings and data. _ 1. Detailed equipment and ductwork drawings at a minimum scale of 1/4 in = 1 ft 0 in. Site layout drawings and roof plans may be submitted at scales smaller than 1/4 in = 1 ft 0 in, subject to Engineer's prior approval. Drawings shall locate _ ductwork accessories including manual, automatic and fire dampers and flex connectors. Ratings of fire dampers shall be shown. Drawings shall show location of all equipment, and equipment motors. Drawings shall also show and dimension maintenance clear spaces for motors, drives, coils, filters and access doors or panels. Indicate ductwork pressure class and duct material used for fabrication. Include location of duct supports and details of each type of duct support. 2. Standard shop and field installation details for transitions, elbows, takeoffs, discharge nozzles, turning vanes, access panels and doors, volume control and hangers. When SMACNA references are used, the specific methods for the " project shall be clearly defined. Where SMACNA has more than one option, the option to be used shall be indicated. 3. Ductwork materials, joining methods, reinforcing and material gauges. W here options are allowed by SMACNA, the proposed option shall be clearly defined. Indicate proposed materials and methods for ductwork and equipment hangers. Indicate in the submittal where each type of duct material will be used by area or ` building name and system (i.e. supply, exhaust or return). 4. For all associated air devices such as louvers, diffusers, grilles, volume dampers, fire dampers, gravity dampers, etc., provide device data in table format indicating ID tag, quantity, type, location used, size, etc. Provide each device type on separate sheets; for example all fire dampers with required data should be listed on one sheet and volume dampers on a separate sheet. In clude catalog cutsheets for each device type, clearly indicating type used and any options selected. Indicate options and any other selections from cutsheets by indicating arrow or other appropriate indicator. Use of highlighter is unacceptable since it does not copy. Indicate where each device will be used by building name or area and service type, i.e. supply, exhaust or return. 5. Submit air device information with ductwork layout drawings in one complete package. 6. For insulation include proposed installation directions as recommended by manufacturer for each distinct system type. - 7. For items that will be shipped exposed, provide a description of the protective packaging that will be used during transit. 8. All submittals shall contain a statement that Sections 15250, 15500, 15890, 15990 and all other referenced Sections have been read and complied with. The certification statement shall be made by all of the following that are applicable; the Contractor, sub-contractor and the vendor. The statement shall be an FfWHI101 15890-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 individual statement for each party involved, and shall be included with every submittal and resubmittal. B. In general, corrections or comments or lack thereof, made relative to submittals during review shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Submittals are for review of general conformance with the design concepts of the project and general compliance with the contract documents. T he Contractor is responsible for the final design conforming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the work of all trades, and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. These standards, including all applicable state and local codes, shall be considered as minimum requirements. This is a general list and not all standards listed are necessarily referenced elsewhere in this Section. Specific requirements of this Section and/or Drawings shall have precedence. The Engineer shall resolve conflicts between published requirements. B. Titles and abbreviations of Federal, State and industry standards, technical societies, associations and institutes and other organizations which may be used are as follows: 1. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) 2. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. Air conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 5. Air Diffusion Council (ADC) a. ADC 1062 R4 - Certification, Rating and Testing Manual. 6. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) a. ASHRAE 68 - Laboratory Method of Testing In Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure for Fans. 7. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 8. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron, Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. b. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. c. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 9. Factory Mutual (FM) 10. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NBS) 11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. FfWH1101 15890-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 b. NFPA 102 - Standard for Grandstand, Folding and Telescopic Seating, Tents ` and Membrane Structures. c. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. d. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 12. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 13. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 14. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) a. UL 214 - UL Standard for Safety Tests for Flame Propagation of Fabrics and ., Films. b. UL 555 - UL Standard for Safety Fire Dampers. c. UL 723 - UL Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of - Building Materials. C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection by the Engineer's representative or failure to inspect shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to provide materials and perform the work in accordance with the documents. - B. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to sample and test any materials after delivery and to reject all components represented by a sample that fails to comply with the specified requirements. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Environmental Requirements B. Existing Conditions C. Field Measurements 1.07 ENGINEERING SERVICES A. When engineering services are specified to be provided by the Contractor, the Contractor shall retain a licensed professional engineer to perform the services. The engineer shall be licensed at the time the work is done and in the State in which the project is located. If the State issues discipline specific licenses, the engineer shall be licensed in the applicable discipline. In addition, the engineer shall be experienced in the type of work being provided. B. All work is to be done according to the applicable regulations for professional _ engineers, to include signing, sealing and dating documents. When submittals are required by a professional engineer, in addition to state required signing and sealing, a copy of the current wallet card or wall certificate indicating the date of expiration shall be included with the submittal. FfWH1101 15890-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES Y MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.08 DEFINITIONS A. Particular terminology used under this Section is defined as follows: 1. Traffic Level and Personnel Level - Areas, including process areas, equipment rooms, boiler rooms and other areas where insulation may be damaged by normal activity and local personnel traffic. Area extends vertically to 8-ft above floor, walkways, platforms and stairs, and horizontally 3-ft beyond the edge of walkways, platforms, and stairs. 2. Exposed Piping and Ductwork - Piping and ductwork visible from the floor level and includes all piping and ductwork in equipment rooms, boiler rooms, etc. 3. Concealed Piping and Ductwork - Piping and ductwork not visible from the floor level and includes piping and ductwork above hung ceilings and in shaftways. 1.09 COORDINATION A. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departures from the drawings or specifications are deemed necessary, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practical for review. No such departures shall be made without the prior written concurrence of the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall coordinate the location and placement of all concrete inserts and welding attachments with the structural engineer. C. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for coordination of the HVAC systems, including; scheduling, and verification that all structures, ducts, piping and the mounting of equipment are compatible. D. The Contractor shall not install any equipment or materials until the Owner and Engineer have approved all submittals. If any equipment or materials are installed prior to approval of the submittals, it shall be at the Contractor's risk. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR DUCTWORK A. Flexible fabric connectors for aluminum ductwork shall be airtight, watertight, fire retardant, and weather-resistant, UL 214 approved, and a minimum of 3" of metal on each side of 3" of fabric crimped into .032 gage aluminum metal edging strips. Fabric shall be 26 oz/sq yd glass fabric, 0.019-inch thickness, double-coated with duPont's Hypalon. Rated temperature range shall be between —10 deg.F to 275 deg.F. Fabric shall have a flame spread rating of not over 25 and smoke developed rating of not higher than 50, complying with NFPA 90A. Fabric shall be equal to Ventlon as manufactured by Ventfabrics or approved equal. B. Flexible duct connectors shall be installed at all inlet and outlet of air-handling units. FfWH1101 15890-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.02 FLAME AND SMOKE RATINGS A. All materials, including adhesives, surface coatings, sealers, assemblies of several materials, insulation, jacketing, finish, etc, shall have flame spread ratings not over 25 - (fire resistive) and smoke development ratings not over 50 and fuel contributed rating not over 50, as established by tests conducted in accordance with the Federal Standard 00136B, National Bureau of Standards Radiant Energy Fire Test and the National Fire Code of the NFPA. B. These requirements apply to all circumstances whether the materials are field applied or applied by a manufacturer in his/her shop, or elsewhere, prior to delivery to the project. 2.03 SOUND CONTROL " A. The selection of ductwork and accessories shall be such as not to create noise that will exceed the levels of permissible noise exposures for occupational areas as established by the OSHA and other Federal, State and local safety and health standards, codes and ordinances. 2.04 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. Furnish supports, hangers and other devices necessary to support firmly and substantially the equipment and ductwork described in this Section. Design shall be -` provided by a professional engineer hired by the Contractor as specified in other sections of the specification. B. Rectangular, Round and Flat - Oval Ductwork- Spacing and size of hangers shall be as called for in the SMACNA standards, except as limited below. 1. Rectangular ductwork 48-in wide and larger shall be supported by adjustable threaded rod hangers. 2. Round ductwork 37-in and larger shall be supported by two adjustable threaded rods at each support. Y C. All hangers shall be of same material as ductwork which they serve, e.g., galvanized, aluminum, black steel, etc. D. All hanger hardware and fasteners shall be of the same material as the duct they serve or shall be of a material with equal or greater corrosion resistance. Where materials other than the duct material are used, they must be approved by the Engineer before installation. E. Perforated band iron or wire for supporting ducts shall not be permitted. F. Where C clamp type hangers are used, furnish with a retainer strap. G. Support flexible duct with aluminum band hangers, 1 in wide minimum, attached so as - not to crush the ductwork. The use of wire to hang flexible ductwork shall not be permitted. _ FTWH1101 15890-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 H. The following methods of hanger attachment to the building structure are NOT allowed. The numbers and letters refer to hanger methods shown in Figure 4-1, 4-2, 4-3 and 4-4 of the 1985 edition of the HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible as published by SMACNA. 'T'- wrap around strap on open web joist. "W" - bent over band on open web joist. "14" - friction clamps. "17" - bent wire in metal deck. Hanger Straps I. Design of hangers shall include the effect of all loads applied to the duct as well as the load of the duct. These loads include, but are not limited to wind, snow and internal dirt or liquid buildup. 1. Hangers shall not be supported from roof decking or bulb tees. W here required, provide supplemental steel to span between the building structure. K. For large diameter duct, provide neoprene pad at contact point between duct and duct support. 2.05 DUCTWORK MATERIAL A. Ductwork shall be constructed of the materials specified using the gauges or thicknesses, reinforcing and construction methods in accordance with SMACNA standards. U nless otherwise specified, all components of the duct systems shall be constructed of the same material as the ductwork. Or shall be of a material with equal or greater corrosion resistance as the duct material specified. For example, if aluminum ductwork is called out and aluminum supports are not available then FRP or stainless steel supports shall be used. Or if aluminum dampers are not available then stainless steel dampers shall be used, this is to include braces and turning vanes. 1. Aluminum ductwork shall be constructed of 3003H-14 alloy B&S Gauges. 2. Fiberglass ductboard shall not be allowed. 2.06 DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION DETERMINANTS A. Ductwork shall be constructed of the following materials and to the following standards: Static Construction SMACNA Duct System Location Pressure Material Standard in-w EA Pump Room Neg 2 AL M&F SA Pump Room Pos-2 AL M&F Abbreviations M&F- SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards- 1st Edition. - Metal &Flexible IRD - SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards IRT- SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards TP- SMACNA Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual - 1st Edition. AL-Aluminum FfWH1101 15890-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 + SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 T B. Design of ductwork shall include all loads applied to the ductwork, in addition to the load of the duct. These loads include but are not limited to wind, snow and internal dirt or liquid build up. 2.07 DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION A. All ductwork shall be substantially built with joints and seams smooth on the inside t and given a neat appearance on the outside. Inside surfaces and joints shall be smooth and free from pockets, burrs and projections. All joints shall be substantially airtight with laps made in the direction of air flow and no flanges projecting into the air stream. B. Pressure Classes 1. Pressure classes for determination of sheet metal gauge and reinforcing shall be as defined by the table above and the latest issue of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 2nd Edition. M etal & Flexible, SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, and SMACNA - Industrial Duct Construction Standards. 2. All metal and flexible ductwork shall be constructed according to SMACNA 2 inch positive or 2 inch negative pressure class unless noted otherwise on the contract drawings. 3. The pressure class shall be the same for the entire length of ductwork, including branches, of the specific duct system. - C. Rectangular Ductwork (Sheet Metal) 1. Ductwork shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the specified SMACNA - Construction Standard. 2. Cross breaking or beading shall conform to SMACNA standard. Cross breaking or beading shall be applied to the sheet metal between the standing seams or reinforcing angles. The center of the cross break shall be of the required height to assure rigidity for each panel. 3. Alternate Construction Factory fabricated joint systems may be offered as an - alternate form of construction. The system offered shall meet all requirements of SMACNA. Alternate joint systems shall be "Ductmate System" as manufactured by Ductmate Industries, Inc., installed in accordance with the manufacturer's - recommendations. The system shall be sealed for zero leakage and angle attachment to the main duct section shall be by tack welding. The use of screws or nails is not allowed. D. ound Ductwork (Sheet Metal) 1. Ductwork shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings in accordance with the specified SMACNA - Construction Standard. 2. Round ductwork longitudinal seams shall be either lock type or continuous welded construction. 3. Slip joints shall be used on ductwork and fittings up to 36 in. in diameter and Vanstone style flanges shall be used on ducts over 36 in. in diameter. FTWH1101 15890-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 4. Fittings shall be fabricated with continuous welds. 90 degree elbows shall have a turning radius of 1.5 times the fitting diameter, 90 degree elbows shall be smooth stamped or mitered construction with five segments. 5. All fittings in the round duct system shall be of the male and female type. Mechanically fasten the conduits together using sheet metal screws not less than four per fitting 6 i n on centers maximum and equally spaced around the circumference of fitting. 6. Round ductwork and fittings shall be manufactured by United Sheet Metal; SEMCO or equal. E. Round Duct Takeoffs 1. Shall be factory-fabricated equal to duct material called out on the Drawings and specifications for respective air system. Takeoffs for diffusers and/or grilles shall be straight spin-in type or as detailed on the drawings with integral balancing dampers. Round to round takeoffs shall be flanged saddle type, constructed to mate with radius of main duct, 45 degree with integral balancing dampers, and secured via sheet metal screws. F. Round Flexible Ductwork 1. Aluminum flexible ductwork shall be self supporting, suitable for both high and low velocity systems. Attachment shall be by means of stainless steel worm drive band clamps. Duct shall be "United Flex" as manufactured by United Sheet Metal or equal. Maximum length shall be 14-ft. The remainder shall be sheet metal. Duct run shall be as short and straight as possible to minimize static pressure loss. 2. Flexible ductwork (to diffusers) shall be composed of a heavy woven and coated fiberglass cloth core bonded to a h eavy spring steel wire helix, wrapped in a blanket of fiberglass insulation and sheathed by an exterior bi-directional re- inforced metallized jacket with an overall minimum R=6.0 value. Duct shall be suitable for both high and low velocity systems. Maximum length shall be 5-ft. The remainder shall be sheet metal. Flexible duct shall be UL listed and comply with NFPA standards 90A, and 90B as manufactured by Thermaflex model M-KC or equal. 2.08 DAMPERS A. General 1. Dampers shall be constructed of the same material as the ductwork or a material with greater corrosion resistance, including blades, housings, channels, shafts, linkages and fasteners. 2. Rectangular damper blades shall not exceed 6 inch in width. Maximum blade length in any section shall be 48 inches. Gang multiple dampers together for larger sizes. Additional stiffening or bracing shall be provided for sections exceeding 48 i rich in height. M ulti section dampers shall be provided with sufficient interconnecting hardware to provide unison operation of blades in the entire assembly. 3. Dampers shall be of size and type as indicated on the Drawings. FrWH1101 15890-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 - 4, All dampers shall be selected for a rating that equals or exceeds the specified system pressure and velocity. Field fabricated dampers are not acceptable. 5. Manual dampers shall be supplied with locking quadrants. Quadrants in galvanized steel and black steel ductwork shall be galvanized steel. All other duct LL systems shall have stainless steel locking quadrants. Locking quadrants shall have an infinitely adjustable positive method of holding the damper in its selected position such as a bolt through both the slotted quadrant and the lever arm. - Systems using springs or other devices that can vibrate loose are not acceptable. 61 Damper linkages and motors shall be face mounted where indicated on the contract drawings. B. Gravity/Backdraft/Relief Dampers 1. Outside air, relief, and makeup air dampers at intake hoods and louvers as shown - on Drawings shall be provided with automatic gravity-type dampers with adjustable counter-balance. Dampers shall be all aluminum construction for use with aluminum louvers and provided with flanged connection where required. Provide mechanically attached vinyl edge seals on damper blades. Blades set in parallel-bladed position and gang operated by exterior linkage. Dampers shall be of size, type and capacity as specified on the Drawings. Manufacturer shall be Ruskin Model No. CBD2 or equal. 2.09 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors shall be minimum 24-in by 24-in in ducts 26-in and larger. Where the duct size is less than 26-in, the largest door that can be accommodated shall be used. Access doors shall be of the same material as the duct, pan type construction for - metal ductwork, with smooth edges and fitted seals, constructed and installed for air-tight fit with ease of opening and closing. Doors shall be substantially butt hinged, with heavy sash locks and substantial door pulls, provide access doors with key lock where located in public area. Door openings and door frames shall be reinforced with bar stock or angle. W here ductwork is installed with exterior duct insulation, the access door shall be of the double wall insulated type. Access doors shall be factory _ fabricated. Where ductwork is constructed of aluminum or stainless steel, access door and hardware shall be of material with equal or greater corrosion resistance. B. Hand hole access panels shall be 12-in by 12-in, constructed of the same material as the ductwork, with peripheral gaskets and sash locks. Provide hinges or chain for attachment to duct. C. Provide access doors for access to fire dampers. Door shall be UL listed with automatic door closing system and same fire rating as fire damper. 2.10 FASTENERS A. Sheet metal screws, drive cleats, cinch bands and other fasteners shall be fabricated from materials with an equal or greater corrosion resistance than the ductwork in which they are installed. Where a material other than the duct material is used, it shall be approved by the Engineer before installation. FfWH1101 15890-10 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR.REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.11 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. General 1. All diffusers, registers and grilles shall be of the shape, sizes, capacity and type as shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide ceiling diffusers as scheduled below on the drawings. B. Wire Mesh Covers 1. On all duct openings that do not have a specific diffuser, register, or grille or where called for on the drawings provide a removable wire mesh cover, the wire mesh and support frame shall be the same material as the duct where the cover is installed. Unless otherwise noted the wire mesh shall be 0.5-in mesh. 2. The wire mesh shall be contained in a metal frame. The mesh shall be firmly attached to the frame to prevent it being pulled out of the frame by casual contact. The frame shall be a minimum of 16 gauge sheet metal, or the minimum gauge for a flange based on SMACNA, whichever is greater. The frame shall be on both sides of the mesh creating a sandwich with the mesh in the middle. Fastenings shall go through the frame on both sides of the cover. 2.12 SEALANT A. Duct sealant shall be water based, asbestos free, mildew and mold resistant, crack and peel resistant, industrial grade synthetic latex sealant, suitable for indoor and outdoor applications, and for service temperature ranges between —20 deg. F to 200 deg. F, and rated for pressure classes of 1/2 to 10-in wg and SMACNA seal classes A,B, and C. Sealant shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 and a maximum rate of fuel contributed and smoke developed of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. B. Sealant shall be LEED compliant, and bear the applicable LEED compliant stamp on the product literature and product packaging. C. Sealant shall be Iron-Grip 601 as manufactured by Hardcast, Carlisle coating and waterproofing or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and erect all ductwork where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and in accordance with SMACNA standards. Rigidly support and secure ductwork. B. Install ductwork parallel to walls and/or roof and vertically plumb. C. Any change in duct sizes, offsets, transitions and fittings required to accommodate job conditions shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. D. The Contractor shall not install any equipment or materials until the Owner and Engineer have approved all submittals. If any equipment or materials are installed prior to approval of the submittals, it shall be at the Contractor's risk. FTWH1101 15890-11 SEPTEMBER 2011 r SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 E. During installation, temporarily close the open ends of ducts to prevent debris and dirt from entering. Install work in accordance with the overall approved progress schedule and in cooperation with all other trades so there will be no delay to other trades. F. The Drawings of the air ducts and air risers show the general location for installation of the ducts and risers. Should additional offsets or changes in direction be made, these changes must be considered in the original bid and shall be installed at no additional cost to the Owner. G. All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made in the installation of the ducts _ for the structural conditions of the building. Ducts shall be transformed or divided as may be required. Wherever this is necessary, maintain the cross sectional area. All of these changes, however, must be approved and ducts installed as directed by the Engineer or as approved on shop or erection drawings. H. The taper of all transformations shall be not more than 15 degrees. I. Secure casing to curbs according to SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards." J. Where ducts are constructed of materials other than galvanized steel the reinforcing _ members shall be of the same material as the ductwork. K. The use of button punching or snap locks on ductwork constructed of aluminum shall not be permitted. - L. Ducts carrying moist air that pass through areas that could cause condensation shall be pitched to facilitate condensate removal. L ow points of such ducts shall be provided with drains. M. Ductwork connections to units that require corrosion resistant coatings shall be made with flanges. Flanges shall be factory drilled before coating. Resilient washers suitable for the environment shall be used to protect the coating from the bolts in the flange. The use of self tapping screws or other fastening methods that will damage the coating are not acceptable. - N. The unused portion of external louvers (where it is not used as a fresh air intake or exhaust) shall be provided with a blank off constructed of 0.0625 in aluminum. Blank off panels shall be provided with aluminum reinforcing angles to prevent buckling and secured to the exterior wall with aluminum angles and rustproof fasteners on not more than 12 in centers. Caulking shall be provided completely around the outside edge of the angle and the aluminum to seal airtight. Insulate inside of blank-off panels with 2" rigid fiberglass board. O. Do not run any ductwork through elevator machine rooms, egress stairwells or electrical rooms, except for ductwork specifically serving the room (i.e. air-conditioning ductwork serving electrical room). FrWH1101 15890-12 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.02 HANGERS A. Rectangular, Round and Flat-Oval Ductwork - Spacing and size of hangers shall be as recommended in the SMACNA standards except as noted in PART 2. B. Install hangers plumb and securely suspended from supplementary steel or inserts in concrete slabs. Sufficiently thread lower ends of hanger rods to allow adequate vertical adjustment. Do not use building siding or metal decking to hang ductwork. C. Ducts shall not be supported from furring, hung ceilings or from another duct or pipe. D. Ductwork shall not come in contact with any of the ceiling construction or any other equipment piping, conduit, etc. in the ceiling cavity. E. Duct support at flexible connections shall be adjustable for ease of aligning the duct to the piece of equipment 3.03 SEALING OF DUCTWORK A. General - Unless otherwise indicated, seal all ductwork joints and seams using sealant in accordance with the instructions of the sealant manufacturer and this Section. All transverse seams, joints and fitting connections, both shop and field assembled, shall be sealed in accordance with this Section. Longitudinal seams shall be sealed on all duct systems with a design operating pressure greater than 2 in w.g. B. Application of Sealant - Thoroughly clean all seams, joints, etc, of dirt, oil, grease, or other coatings which might interfere with the adhesion of the duct sealant before the sealant is applied. Do not apply to cold or wet ductwork or where subject to temperatures below 35 deg F. or above 110 deg F. and/or rain is expected within 36 hours of application. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. C. Uncured sealant may be forced into the slotted side of the seam or joint before shop or field assembly and the joint or seam completed while the sealant is still uncured. Excess sealant shall be removed from both the inside and outside of the duct before it sets. D. Duct Tape -The use of duct tape is prohibited. E. Installed duct systems shall be tested in accordance with the SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Leakage rates shall not exceed those predicted for ASHRAE - Leakage Class 6 at the system design pressure. For flexible ducts and ducts with design pressures less than 2 in w.g., ASHRAE - Leakage Class 12 shall be used. Duct systems that fail to pass the test standards shall be repaired and tested again until standards are attained. F. The following ductwork systems do not require sealing of joints and seams. Gaskets at flanged joints are still required. 1. Ventilation supply air systems down stream of the supply fan or air handling unit and located in the area being served by the system. FTWH1101 15890-13 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 w 2. Return air systems upstream of the return fan or air handling unit and located in the area being served by the system. 3. Return air systems upstream of the return fan or air handling unit and located in a return air plenum for the system being served. 3.04 DOCTWORK FITTINGS AND ACCESSORY ITEMS A. Duct Elbows Changes in direction and offsets shall be made in a gradual manner to facilitate streamline flow of air. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, all elbows shall be made with long-radius elbows. Long-radius elbows are considered to have a centerline radius of not less than 1 1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the elbow. Where long-radius elbows are not practical due to clearance issues, short-radius elbows may be used. Short-radius elbows are considered to have a centerline radius of not less than 1 times the width of the duct in the plane of the - elbow. For rectangular ductwork where full radius elbows cannot be installed, provide abrupt elbows equipped with shop installed turning vanes unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Flexible Fabric Connectors 1. Where the construction of the flexible connection or vibration isolator results in a - cross sectional area of the connection which is less than 90 p ercent of the adjacent ductwork, the size of the connection shall be increased to provide a cross sectional area equal to or greater than 90 percent of the adjacent duct. - 2. Provide flexible duct connections at both the intake and discharge connections for all fans, fan units or blowers, air handling units and air conditioning units except as noted below. — a. Wall and roof fans that have integral motor/fan wheel isolation. b. Air handling units where the fan is isolated from the intake and discharge connections by internal flexible connections or separations, and the unit is mounted without vibration isolators between the unit and the support structure. 3. Ductwork spacing and alignment for flexible connections shall be aligned to the tolerances of the flexible connection manufacturer, or plus/minus 1/4-in whichever is less. Bolts shall be torqued to the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not over tighten. C. Dampers 1. Install manual volume control dampers wherever it may be necessary to regulate -- air volume for system air balancing and where shown on the Drawings. 2. Install motorized and/or pneumatic actuated dampers where shown on plans and when supplied by other trades. Y D. Access Doors 1, Hinged access doors shall be installed where listed below, wherever shown on the — Drawings and wherever access may be required for service, maintenance and adjustment. 2. Provide access doors at the following locations (minimum requirements): a. Coils in ducts both entering and leaving side. FTWH1101 15890-14 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 b. Motorized or pneumatic actuated dampers linkage side. c. Plenums. d. Fire dampers. e. Smoke dampers. f. Electric duct heaters. g. Filter banks. h. As necessary or required. i. Inlet and outlet ducts to fans and air handlers. • 3. Where access doors are required in ductwork located above ceilings, coordinate the location of the access doors to clear the ceiling support system and to be accessible through the ceiling grid. 4. 12 in by 12 in handhole access panels may be substituted for access doors when indicated on the Drawings. 3.05 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. The location of diffusers, registers and grilles shall be as shown on the Reflected Ceiling Plans and as shown on the ductwork drawings. The exact location of these devices shall be determined in the field in cooperation with the other trades. B. Install all devices in an approved manner in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. 3.06 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Make connections, joints and terminations air tight as recommended by the manufacturer. W here joints are made to rigid sheet metal ductwork, apply 3M Company EC 800 sealer. Attachment of flexible duct to sheet metal duct shall be by means of non reusable plastic strap, inside insulation, capturing at least one coil of internal metal helix and secured with a minimum of three, evenly spaced, tek screws penetrating plastic strap. Additional plastic straps shall be used to secure outer jacket and insulation. B. Install flexible ducts with minimum bend radius no less than one diameter and cut as short as possible. Duct shall not be compressed and the length shall be kept short so minimum hangers or supports are required and static pressure losses are kept to a minimum. Sag in flexible duct shall not exceed 1/2 in/ft between duct supports. 3.07 FILLING IN SPACE AROUND DUCTWORK A. To prevent sound passing through the area between the duct and the framed or cut opening in the floors, walls or partitions, pack mineral wool to completely fill the space the full depth of the opening. Whenever a fire rated wall or floor is penetrated do not fill or caulk the space or provide angles around the fire damper sleeve. B. At standard wall penetration, apply escutcheon plates on both faces of the wall to close the gap between the structure and the sides of the insulated or bare duct. FrWH1101 15890-15 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 Escutcheon plates shall be the same material as the duct. Seal gap between ` escutcheon plate and wall surface, air and water tight with clear, silicone caulk. 3.08 SUPPORTING OUTDOOR DUCTS Y A. Roof top ductwork shall be installed using structural steel supports as shown on the Drawings. T B. The vertical supporting angles shall be continuous full height of the duct and shall be bolted to same. Intermediate duct supporting angles and bottom plates shall be welded to the vertical angles. Weld all of these angles together to form a stiff " continuous supporting unit for the duct. Paint angles with rust inhibitive primer after welding. C. Slope ductwork to shed water. 3.09 DUCTWORK TERMINATIONS AT MASONRY OR CONCRETE A. Where ducts terminate at masonry or concrete openings, place a continuous 2 1/2 in by 2 1/2 in by 3/16 in angle, miter corners or roll for round ductwork, of the same material as the duct around the ductwork. Bolt the angle to the construction and make airtight by applying caulking compound on the angle before it is drawn down tight to construction. B. Fasten plenums to concrete curbs with 3 in by 3 in by 1/4 in continuous angle. Concrete curbs are provided under another Division. Mount angle on a continuous bead of caulking compound and anchor to the curb on 16 in centers. Terminate duct - at the curb and bolt to the angle. Seal the duct to the curb with a continuous bead of caulking compound. Apply neoprene filler strip to level curb surface as necessary. 3.10 DUCTWORK GENERATED NOISE A. All ductwork shall be free from pulsation, chatter, vibration or objectionable noise. After system is in operation, should these defects appear, correct by removing, replacing or reinforcing the work. No discreet tones will be allowed. 3.11 TEST PORTS A. Where shown on the Drawings and where required for testing and balancing, provide instrument insertion ports. Size and location of ports shall be coordinated with the Contractor performing air balancing. Seal ports with plastic snap lock plugs. When the ductwork will be insulated, extend the port to the face of the insulation and seal the vapor barrier to the port. _ B. In round ductwork provide 2 ports 90 degrees on centers. In rectangular ductwork provide ports as required by AABC or NEBB for a full traverse measurement. C. As a minimum, ports shall be provided in the following connections: 1. All duct mains. FTWH1101 15890-16 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 36� Contract No.01632 2. All duct branches unless all connections are diffusers, registers, or grilles and the total can be calculated by summing the readings for all of the connections. 3. All connections to tanks or hoods where there is no other access for taking a measurement. D. A main duct is defined as one of the following: 46 1. A duct serving five or more outlets. 2. A duct serving two or more branch ducts. 3. A duct emanating from a fan or plenum. 4. All remaining ducts are considered branch ducts. 3.12 ADJUSTMENT A. Start- Up and Temporary Operation 1. Properly maintain and service all equipment and systems until the particular equipment or the system has been accepted by the Owner. 3.13 CLEANING OF DUCTWORK A. Maintain all ductwork, fans, coils, air filters, outlets and other parts of the ductwork systems in a clean condition during installation. B. Clean complete ductwork systems prior to testing and air balancing. Secure cheese cloth over all openings of the ductwork system for entrapment of dirt during the cleaning operation. C. Thoroughly clean all parts of the installation at the completion of the work and prior to turning work over to Owner. All surface defects and scuff marks shall be removed or painted. Also remove any debris and construction material from inside ductwork. 3.14 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Provide ductwork insulation as specified under Section 15250 and as called for on the drawings. B. Duct liner is not allowed. C. All ductwork, except as specifically noted below, shall be insulated unless approved in writing by the Engineer. 1. Exposed supply and return air ductwork located in the area it serves. 2. Exposed ventilation exhaust and relief ductwork located in the area it serves. 3. Exposed ventilation and relief ductwork located in areas that are neither heated nor cooled. 4. Exposed outdoor air intake ductwork and plenums located in areas that are neither heated nor cooled. 5. Return air ductwork located in return air ceiling spaces above the area it serves, except where the return ductwork is installed in ceiling spaces with a roof above. FrWH1101 15890-17 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 6. Toilet exhaust from toilets without showers, up to the exhaust air plenum if applicable. 7. Toilet exhaust from toilets with showers in heated spaces, up to the exhaust air plenum if applicable. 3.15 PAINTING A. Paint the outside face of all louver blank off panels and the interiors of unlined plenums and ductwork where connected to louvers. Prime and paint with two coats of flat black exterior paint. Painting shall be performed under this Section and shall be as specified in Division 9. B. Unless otherwise indicated, all uninsulated ductwork that is exposed within the space shall be painted. Painting shall be done under Division 9. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 15890-18 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC—DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 15950 HVAC - CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Design, furnish, install, test and calibrate a complete and fully functioning HVAC control system as indicated in the Drawings and as described in these specifications. The HVAC control system shall be as manufactured by Honeywell, Inc., Johnson Controls, Landis Division of Siemens, Andover Controls, Trane or equal. 1. Electro-mechanical where operating sequences call for simple thermostatic or interlock control. B. The HVAC Controls Contractor shall ensure the compatibility of all components of the HVAC control system and interconnections with other disciplines to provide a fu Ily functional system in accordance with the sequence of operations, specifications and drawings. C. The HVAC control system shall be as specified herein and shall perform the functions specified and shown on the Drawings and as described in the Sequence of Operation shown on the HVAC Drawings. D. Wiring and conduit between HVAC control devices and HVAC equipment for a complete, fully-functional system. Installation shall be in accordance with Division 16 requirements. E. Refer to Section 15500 for HVAC General Provisions. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. The following shall be furnished and/or installed, under other sections: 1. The necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air volumes specified is included under Division 15. Locate baffles by experimentation and affix and seal permanently in place only after stratification problem has been eliminated. 2. Access doors or other approved means of access through ducts for service to ^ control equipment is included under other sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certification of System Installer Qualifications — Submit proof of system controls certification and submit qualifications and experience information per Paragraph 1.05 "Quality Assurance" below. Include only qualifications and experience related to type of work described herein and as indicated on the drawings and other sections of the specifications. FrWH1101 15950-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC CONTROLS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Siop Drawings - Submit all shop drawings with all information required per Sections 0 300 and 15500 and the following additional specific requirements: 1 HVAC Controls submittal shall be submitted as one complete package with all items as required by Sections 01300, 15500, and this section. 2. Control drawings with control wiring diagrams, airflow diagrams, bill of material and sequence of operation for each system as indicated on the HVAC Drawings. 3. Catalog Cutsheets — Provide for each equipment unit and accessory. Indicate options from cutsheets with arrows, or equivalent. Indicating options with a highlighter marker is unacceptable, as it does not transmit during the copying process. As a minimum, provide information for the following: a. Thermostats. b. Relays and switches. _ 4. Provide a recommended list of spare parts to be provided. 5. Technical specification data sheets of each system component and device with indication of its use. 6. Complete listing of deviations from the system as specified. — C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. In accordance with Section 15500 requirements, submit to the Engineer Operating and Maintenance Manuals for the complete controls system. Personnel familiar with the operation and maintenance of the specific information shall prepare manuals. - 2. Contents - All of the information listed above under `Shop Drawings' and Section 01720 and 15500 shall be incorporated into the O&M manuals including the following additional information. The O&M manuals shall be consolidated into a - complete package, without duplicate information. 3. Sequences of Operation and associated air flow schematics. - D. Successful System Startup and Operation Report — Submit report with name and contact information of supervising technician, and dates of testing procedure. E. In general, corrections or comments or lack thereof, made relative to submittals during review shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Submittals are for review of general conformance with the design concepts of the project and general compliance with the contract documents. T he Contractor is responsible for the final design conforming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the work of all trades, and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The HVAC Controls Contractor shall provide a system to meet requirements of NFPA- 72A, 726, 72C and 72D, and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Each — component of the system shall be, where applicable, UL listed for the intended service and meet the safety requirements. FfWH1101 15950-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC CONTROLS — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The HVAC Controls Contractor and manufacturer shall be fully licensed at the time of bid to do business in the job site area and have a minimum 5 years experience designing, installing, testing and calibrating the type of HVAC control systems described herein and on the Drawings. Wholesalers, contractors, franchisers, dealers, or any firm whose principle business is not that of manufacturing and installing HVAC controls as herein specified will not be acceptable. B. The HVAC Controls Contractor and controls manufacturer must have a branch office facility within 25 miles of the project for at least 5 years, with technical staff and complete spare parts inventory and test and diagnostic equipment to keep systems in operation 24 hours per day 7 days per week. He/She shall have emergency service available in the local area for temperature control systems for which he/she is currently performing on-call emergency service 24 hours per day 7 days per week with a maximum response time of 4 hours. C. The HVAC Controls Contractor shall have in his/her direct employ the personnel capable of detailed engineering, coordination, drafting, procurement, and expediting, scheduling construction, testing, inspection, installation, startup, calibration, and commissioning. Work shall be done under the supervision of the Controls Manufacturer. +' D. The equipment to be furnished under this Section shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, they shall be the product of a single manufacturer; however, all the component parts of the system need not be the products of one manufacturer. E. System components may be from multiple manufacturers whose products meet the performance requirements of the Contact Documents. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for each system component and for determining that all equipment supplied for this project is suitable for installation and proper operation in the space -- provided with fully adequate operating and maintenance access space. The HVAC Contractor shall also be responsible for the overall integration of the system components and overall performance of the system in compliance with the Contract Documents. F. The equipment furnished for installation under this Section shall be tested at the factory as standard with the manufacturer of the equipment. G. Inspection by the Engineer's representative or failure to inspect shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to provide materials and perform the work in accordance with the documents. H. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to sample and test any materials after delivery and to reject all components represented by a sample that fails to comply with the specified requirements. FTWH1101 15950-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC CONTROLS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.06 COORDINATION A. The HVAC Controls Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the coordination of the work of this Section with that of the HVAC sections to accomplish the — requirements of space conditioning as indicated on the construction drawings and as specified. The HVAC Controls Contractor shall furnish, install, supervise and test the field wiring associated with the work of this Section and shall be responsible to coordinate the installation of controls with the HVAC Contractor. B. The HVAC Controls Contractor shall coordinate the locations of desired items such as access doors, size of instrument holes, conduits/wiring, or other devices in the - ductwork, piping and plenums with the HVAC Contractor. 1.07 ENVIRONMENT " A. All components shall be suitable for operating in a normal plant environment without requirements for special temperature and humidity control. - PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HVAC CONTROLS - GENERAL A. Area Classification 1. Where specific area classifications are called for or shown on the electrical drawings and/or Division 16 specifications, all HVAC controls equipment, devices, components and associated wiring shall be in conformance with the requirements for that classification. 2.02 ROOM THERMOSTATS A. General: T 1. Room thermostats mounted on exterior walls shall be provided with insulated mounting plates. 2. All room thermostats shall be mounted 5-ft-0-in above finish floor except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, the controls shall maintain space temperatures within plus or minus 2 degrees F of their set points. 4. Thermostat controls shall have 5 deg. F deadband minimum. 5. Thermostats shall cover their respective temperature ranges as called out on the Sequences of Operation or as specifically called out below. 6. Label thermostats with tag name of unit it serves. 7. Pump Room thermostats shall be heavy-duty, NEMA 4X rated equal to Ruffneck Model no. TF115. 8. Thermostats for unit heaters shall be furnished with the equipment from the equipment manufacturer. Thermostat shall be equal in corrosion-resistance and rating as equipment. Wiring between equipment and thermostat shall be provided under this section. FfWH1101 15950-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLL WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC CONTROLS MOTOR AND sWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.03 SAFETY THERMOSTATS A. Low Temperature Duct Mounted Safety Thermostat - Electric low temperature thermostats shall be duct mounted probe type. Location of thermostats shall be as shown on the Drawings. These thermostats shall be two-position with manual reset. Low temperature safety thermostats shall be provided with as pring return bypass switch to permit cold weather start up. The thermostat shall be bypassed only while the switch is manually held in position. Low temperature safety thermostats shall be provided with a timed bypass to permit cold weather start up. The thermostat shall only be bypassed when the timer is timing. The timer shall be adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes. The reset shall be located such that it can be reached without the use of a ladder. 2.04 EQUIPMENT TAGGING A. All HVAC control devices including but not limited to room thermostats and switches, shall be provided with an engraved plastic plate mechanically attached to the wall surface. The plastic label shall contain the name of the device, its function and system or system number for the device. 2.05 ELECTRICAL A. All field wiring (other than power wiring) between control devices and control terminals in motor control centers shall be furnished and installed under this Section and shall conform to the requirements of Division 16. Wiring to suspended and cabinet unit heaters shall be considered power wiring. All interlocking wiring within MCC shall be done by Division 16. B. Refer to the electrical drawings and Division 16 specifications for NEMA enclosure types, other than NEMA 1, by room or location designation such as "Damp," "Wet,", etc. C. Installation of all conduit, wire, sleeves, outlet boxes, insulating bushings, system cabinets, terminal boxes, pull boxes, junction boxes, inserts, anchors, system devices, etc, shall be in accordance with the appropriate requirements of Division 16, and in accordance with sections of the current edition of the local codes for signal systems and electrical systems. D. Conduit, boxes and fittings and their installation and testing shall be as specified in Division 16. W here not called out in Division 16, the following requirements shall apply. For installations in corrosive process and industrial type areas, wiring shall be run in rigid aluminum conduit. For installations in non-corrosive process and industrial type areas, wiring may be run in rigid steel conduit. EMT, aluminum construction, shall only be allowed in dry locations above ceilings and wood or metal stud framed partition walls for office type and commercial type work. FTWH1101 15950-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC CONTROLS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall not install any equipment or materials until the Owner and Engineer have approved all submittals. If any equipment or materials are installed prior to approval of the submittals, it shall be at the Contractor's risk. _ B. The Controls Contractor shall coordinate final locations of all control devices with other trades and actual conditions at the site to assure that all installed control devices shall be accessible after the project is complete, so that the Owner can perform required maintenance, repair or troubleshooting work. Co ntrol devices requiring regular access, including but not limited to room thermostats and switches, shall be readily accessible without requiring ladders, temporary platforms, or removal of other - equipment for accessing the device. 3.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND CALIBRATION A. Upon completion of the project, completely test, adjust and calibrate all thermostats, safety thermostats and all other components provided under this Section for a complete and functioning system. B. Testing and calibration shall be done under the specific device manufacturer's testing and calibration procedures and requirements. - 3.03 FIELD TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT A. A manufacturer's factory representative shall conduct the field testing and adjustment of the system so that it is placed in proper operating condition. The Contractor shall provide personnel and equipment, as required, to assist manufacturer's factory �. representative with testing and adjusting procedure. B. Remove all temporary devices and equipment resulting from testing. C. Test unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: 1. Test and adjust controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls equipment. 2. Calibrate and adjust initial temperature set point on thermostats. 3. Run unit in Auto and Manual mode, from thermostat or MCC, as applicable. 4. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices 5. Test all safety devices for functionality. Replace malfunctioning or damaged safety devices. _ 3.04 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE A. Upon successful completion of the system, the Engineer and Owner shall be requested, in writing, to inspect and approve the satisfactory operation of the HVAC controls system, sub-system(s) and accessories. FfWH1101 15950-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC CONTROLS MOTOR AND sWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Upon receipt of a detailed punch list from the Engineer, an installation inspection report shall be prepared showing, by system, each outstanding item on the punch list. After all items appearing on the installation inspection report are completed, a second written request for system approval shall be made to the Engineer. As each or all items are approved, an appropriate notation shall be entered at the time of joint inspection on the system report, with counter signature of the Engineer and date. A copy of this report shall be made for the Engineer. C. Problems, which occur within approved hardware, shall be corrected in an appropriate fashion under guarantee. Any such occurrence shall not void previous approval; however, the system contractor shall be responsible to attend to and remedy, such items within a reasonable amount of time. Appropriate logs, schedules, and reports shall be maintained to reflect these items and their redress. D. During the acceptance inspections, the HVAC Controls Contractor shall provide the required personnel to operate the system and show complete functionality. In general each system will be run through its complete operating sequence. E. Functional acceptance testing will be halted for systems that are found to be operating incorrectly. Corrections will not be made during the inspection. If multiple systems are found to have operating deficiencies, the acceptance testing will be canceled and rescheduled at the System Supplier's expense. F. Final payment to the Contractor shall be made until after the successful testing and acceptance by the Engineer and Owner of the complete controls system. 3.05 CONTROL SEQUENCES A. The following information shall apply to all sequences. HVAC equipment will operate with the sequences of operation as indicated on the Drawings. 1. All sequences are reversible unless otherwise noted. 2. All setpoints given on the control sequences shown on the Drawings are indicative r; only and shall be fully adjustable above and below such set points. The stated setpoints are given as initial starting points to be adjusted as desired during startup and operation. If a set point is not stated, the control range of devices shall be suitable for the intended service. R ange of devices shall be approximately 50 percent greater in both directions than span of variable, with a minimum of 25 degrees and a maximum of 100 degrees F for air systems. 3. Manual reset of control functions with manual reset will be at the safety device. 4. Where required to prevent nuisance shut downs of systems, provide time delay before the sensors are activated during system startup. This would include, but not be limited to low temperature freeze protection on 100 percent outdoor air units. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 15950-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC CONTROLS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 15990 HVAC - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish the necessary labor, materials, instruments, transportation and devices required to test, adjust and balance all HVAC systems as detailed herein and as shown on the HVAC Drawings. Each system shall be tested, adjusted and balanced as required to cause the systems to perform in accordance with the intent of the Drawings, the Control Sequences and this Section. B. Work Description - Refer to Section 15500 for a general description of work and to the following additional specific descriptions: 1. General air distribution and air moving systems. 2. Instrumentation and controls systems. 3. Heating systems. C. The Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing all the HVAC Drawings and associated Sequences of Operation and accompanying specification information on the HVAC systems and the intended operation for every system. D. Test and balance air system and submit testing and balancing reports to the Engineer for review and approval. Re-balance when required by the Engineer, incorporating all changes and certify the systems have been tested and balanced to meet specified requirements. The tests shall demonstrate the specified capacities and operation of equipment and materials comprising the systems. Such tests other than as described herein, which are deemed necessary by the Engineer to indicate the fulfillment of the Contract, shall be made. E. The test and balance work shall comply with the requirements of this specification and all data required by this Section shall receive complete final approval by the Engineer before final payment is made. F. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor has not, will not, or cannot comply with the testing, balancing and adjusting requirements of this Section, he may advise the Owner to employ a qualified firm to perform such work at Contractor's sole expense. G. Related Sections — The following documents shall also govern the work under this Section. 1. Division 1 General Requirements. 2. Section 15500 - HVAC General Provisions. FTWH1101 15990-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 t. SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 V 1.02 RELATED WORK A. The Mechanical Contractor shall: Install, startup, operate and check all HVAC systems prior to balancing work. Provide the necessary personnel to assist the TAB Subcontractor during the balancing work and shall make all necessary adjustments and corrections to equipment and systems (i.e. add pulleys and belts, etc.) as directed by the TAB Subcontractor. �. Provide the necessary equipment to the TAB Subcontractor for making readily accessible all HVAC equipment and other devices requiring adjustment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE _. A. TAB Contractor Qualifications 1. Testing, balancing and operation of the systems shall be performed by competent and experienced technicians, having formerly done similar work in this field and whose qualifications and performance shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. TAB work shall be performed by an AABC or NEBB certified agency, which is ! independent of all suppliers and installers on the particular job. All TAB work shall be done under the supervision of registered mechanical _ engineers or AABC or NEBB certified test and balance engineers employed directly by the TAB Contractor. Supervisory personnel shall have at least 5 years experience in TAB work. 4. Show five successfully completed projects of similar size and scope. 5. The TAB Contractor shall furnish all necessary calibrated instrumentation to adequately perform the specified services. An inventory of all instruments and devices in possession of the TAB Contractor may be required by the Engineer to determine the TAB Contractor's performance capability. 6. The TAB contractor shall be prepared to submit credentials and other evidence of qualifications, and work experience, following receipt of, but prior to award of filed subbids. Submit qualifications within 60 days after Contract award. B. Test and Balancing Standards 1. AABC or NEBB requirements and recommendations. 2. Report forms for TAB work shall be as recommended by the AABC or the NEBB. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Pre-Qualifications, in accordance with Section 01300, with the following information: 1. Qualifications and experience information and data as detailed under Paragraph 1.04 below. Include only qualifications and experience related to type of work -- described herein and as indicated on the drawings and other sections of the specifications. 2. Evidence of registration as certified AABC or NEEB TAB contractor where work is to be performed in the State of Texas. FfWH1101 15990-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3. Proposed testing schedules and procedures. 4. Results of periodic field inspections as specified under Paragraph 3.01 below. S. Preliminary draft "system" balancing reports as systems are completed and tested. 6. Final systems and Project balancing reports as final system adjustments are made as systems are accepted by the Owner. B. Testing and Balance Reports - Submit final Test Reports after completion of testing, adjusting and balancing work. Submit reports by building, individually bound. Refer to Part 3 of this Section for testing procedures. Each report per building shall have the following minimum information. 1. Cover Sheet - Provide the following general data in a format selected by the TAB Contractor: a. Project title name b. Project address and location c. Contract number d. Building name e. Project mechanical engineer f. General contractor g. Name of HVAC contractor h. Name, address and phone number of test, adjust and balance (TAB) contractor i. Printed Name, signature and seal/certification of responsible-in-charge TAB engineer/technician. j. All TAB Certifications k. Dates tests were performed 2. Preface - A general discussion of the systems, any abnormalities and problems encountered. 3. Instrumentation List- The list of instruments including type, model, manufacturer, serial number and calibration dates. 4. Forms - Furnish test report data on 8-1/2-in by 11-in bond AABC or NEBB form paper in accordance with Section 01300. Submit format for recording data and receive approval prior to use. a. System Identification. In each report, zones, supply, return and exhaust openings and traverse points shall be numbered and/or lettered to correspond to the numbers and letters used on the report data sheets and on the report diagrams. S. Diagrams - Prepare 11-in by 17-in single line diagrams or 12-in by 18-in half size drawings showing all duct systems indicating all terminal air outlets including diffusers, grilles and registers, perforated plates, nozzles and other types of air supply, exhaust or return outlets. The minimum scale for diagrams showing the measurement points shall be 1/8-in=l-ft-0-in in the final form as submitted. The use of faxed copies of diagrams is not acceptable. Location of test points shown on the diagrams shall be clear and easy to locate on the diagram. T he E identification mark of the test points shall be the same as is shown on the test FTWH1101 15990-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 report showing the test data. The identification for test points shall include ` indication of the units served, and shall not have a duplicate in the project. All supply outlets shall be adjusted so that there are no drafts. Grille and register readings may be made by a vane anemometer, but diffuser readings shall be " made by a flow hood or a velometer, using the tip recommended by the diffuser manufacturer. Each test sheet shall include the following data: a. Job name and address. - b. Name of HVAC Contractor. c. Name of balancing organization. d. Instruments used to perform the test. e. Name of test technician or test engineer. f. Fan system. g. Room number or area name. h. Size of outlet. i. Type outlet. j. Manufacturer of outlet. k. The cfm at each outlet on system and corresponding cfm at each outlet as noted on the plans. - I. Percent deviation of the measured flow versus the design flow. m. Indication of the branch and terminal that are the open/low that are the basis for balancing the remainder of the system C. All submittals shall contain a statement that Sections 15500, 15990 and all other referenced Sections have been read and complied with. The certification statement shall be made by all of the following that are applicable; the Contractor, sub- contractor and the vendor. The statement shall be an individual statement for each party involved, and shall be included with every submittal and resubmittal. _ D. In general, corrections or comments or lack thereof, made relative to submittals during review shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Submittals are for review of general conformance with the design concepts of the project and general compliance with the contract documents. T he Contractor is responsible for the final design conforming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the work of all trades, and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 1.05 SCHEDULE AND PROCEDURES A. A complete schedule of balancing procedures for each of the buildings or systems shall be submitted in sufficient time in advance so that the Engineer, at his option, might arrange to observe these procedures as they progress. Before commencing with the balancing of the systems submit the methods and instruments proposed to be used to _ adjust and balance the air systems. FTWH1101 15990-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Submit proposed testing programs at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled test to assure agreement as to personnel and instrumentation required and scope of each testing program. 1.06 EQUIPMENT CURVES A. Fan Characteristics Charts: The HVAC and General Contractors shall provide to the Balancing Contractor any required characteristic curve charts for all fans to include air conditioning units and air handling units. Characteristic curve charts shall be not less than 8-1/2-in by 11-in and shall show the static pressure, capacity horsepower and overall efficiency for operating conditions from no load to 130 percent of specified load. The minimum size of the actual fan curve shall be no less than 6-in by 8-in. The use of faxed copies of curves is not acceptable. 1.07 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY A. The balancing work shall be guaranteed to be accurate and factual data, based on readings in the field. All typewritten data shall be submitted within 14 working days of the performance of the test. Test data shall not be held until final completion, but shall be submitted on an interim basis as soon as the test or appropriate group of tests are finished. B. Provide extended warranty of 90 days after completion of test and balancing work, during which time Owner/Engineer/Owner's Representative may request a recheck or resetting of equipment or systems which may not be performing satisfactorily. Provide technicians as required to perform additional testing and balancing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Furnish gaskets, lubricants and other expendable materials required to be replaced during the execution of this work. B. Fixed-pitched pulleys required for fan adjustments shall be furnished on an exchange basis by the party responsible for the fan installation. C. Where test results indicate that air quantities at any system fan are below or in excess of the specified amount, the HVAC and General Contractors, at their own expense, shall change driving pulley ratio or shall make approved changes to obtain the specified or scheduled air quantities. D. Testing apparatus: Furnish plugs, caps, stops, blowers and similar devices required to perform this work. 1. Furnish anemometers, thermometers, gauges, voltmeters, ammeters, lachometers and similar instruments, not part of the permanent installation, but required to record the performance of the equipment and systems. 2. Testing apparatus, not part of the permanent installation, shall remain the property of the Contractor, but made available to the Engineer. FfWH1101 15990-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 w $. Instruments used for testing shall be certified accurate to within plus or minus l 0.10 degrees F for temperature or plus or minus 0.10-in we for pressure. Calibration of the instruments shall be done within 7 days of testing for this project and henceforth every 30 days thereafter for the duration of the testing - period. Certification of calibration shall be submitted to the engineer prior to starting the work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 START OF BALANCING A. The General Contractor shall notify the TAB Contractor and Engineer when systems become operational and ready for preliminary and final testing, adjusting and balancing. B. Final balancing shall not begin until system has been installed complete and is capable of normal operation. Provide personnel to assist in rough balance and calibration. C. If requested by Owner, testing, adjusting and balancing work shall be done in the presence of the Owner's Representative. Notify Owner's Representative at least two weeks prior to commencing balancing work. D. All grilles, dampers and fans shall be verified to be installed and operating. E. System shall be capable of operating under control as specified on Drawings and/or contained herein. F. TAB work shall be done under normal operating conditions of equipment. G. Verify with straight edge that fan motor shafts are parallel and that sheaves are in proper alignment. ! H. Verify that belts are properly tensioned when unit is operating with no excessive squeal at startup. If not correct, adjust sheaves or motor base accordingly. I. Check dampers on system are open, where required, prior to starting fans. 3. Start fans verify that rotation is correct. If rotation is incorrect coordinate with - electrical contractor to switch power leads such that the motor rotates correctly. K. Check nameplate voltage on motor, compare to scheduled voltage. Notify the Engineer immediately of any discrepancies. Measure and record actual voltage across all power leads. Notify the Engineer of discrepancies immediately. L. Check motor nameplates full load amps, measure and record amperage across all power leads. If there are marked discrepancies in amperage draws between legs, notify the Engineer immediately. M. Measure and record fan motor rpm. Check that motor rpm agrees with nameplate and scheduled rpm. _ FfWH1101 15990-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 N. If, upon commencing the work, the balancing contractor finds that the systems are not ready, or if a dispute occurs as to the readiness of the systems, the TAB Contractor shall request an inspection to be made by the Engineer. This inspection shall establish to the satisfaction of the represented parties whether or not the systems meet the basic requirements for testing and balancing. Should the inspection reveal the notification to have been premature, all costs for the inspection and work previously accomplished by the TAB Contractor shall be paid for by the General Contractor. Furthermore, such items that are not ready for testing and balancing shall be completed and placed in operational readiness before testing and balancing services shall be recommenced. 0. Leaks, damage and defects discovered or resulting from startup, testing and balancing shall be repaired or replaced to like-new condition with acceptable materials. Tests shall be continued until system operates without adjustments or repairs. 3.02 REQUIRED ACCURACY A. Air systems shall be balanced to be within the following limits of the capacity shown on the Drawings. Limits shall be applied to both individual components and to the system totals. 1. General Systems (plus/minus 10 percent) 3.03 TESTING A. HVAC Air Systems 1. Test and balance exhaust air systems in accordance with AABC or NEBB Standards by the use of direct reading instruments such as an "anemotherm" or velometer which has been properly calibrated. 2. Temporarily add static pressure to the system, to simulate the effect of dirty filters, by blanking off portions of the filter section, covering filter section with cheesecloth, sheet metal or other suitable means. Confirm static has been added with new static pressure reading across fan. Remove cheesecloth, etc, after traverses are complete. 3. If so instructed by the Engineer, further balancing of temperature shall be made either by thermometer or by temperature recorder. 4. The sequence of air balancing shall be as follows: a. First, establish air flow quantity at supply fan by main duct traverse. b. Next, establish air flow quantities in main ducts. c. All main air ducts shall be traversed, using a Pitot tube and manometer. The manometer shall be calibrated to read two significant figures in all velocity pressure ranges. The static pressure reading at the traverse point shall be recorded for each successive traverse. 5. Adjust fan speeds if results of system capacity tests are not within tolerances specified and repeat steps above, as required. FTWH1101 15990-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 u 3.04 REPORT FORMS A. HVAC Air Systems _ Furnish typewritten data tabulating the following: a. Opening number, type, size and design flow rate. Indicate design flow rate and actual flow rate. b. Quantity of air in cfm at each air outlet and inlet. Indicate design flow rate and actual flow rate. c. Dry bulb temperature in each room. -- d. Dewpoint in each room. e. Dry bulb temperature of the supply air. f. Dewpoint of the supply air. - g. Outdoor dry and wet bulb temperature at the time the above tests are conducted. h. Provide data in schematic format, indicating design and actual air flow rates at each inlet and outlet. B. Adjust belts, sheaves and the alignment of air handling equipment. C. Where various combinations of sheaves must be installed on fan systems to achieve the correct air delivery, change the sheaves and continue to take successive readings - until the correct combinations are installed. D. Furnish typewritten data taken at each air moving device, to include fans, tabulating _ the following: 1. Manufacturers, model number and serial number of units. 2. All design and manufacturer's rated data. n 3. Total quantity of supply or exhaust air in cfm, design and actual. 4. Outlet velocity - fpm. 5. The rpm of each fan or blower. - 6. Maximum tip speed - fpm. 7. The rpm of each motor. 8. Voltage and ampere input of each motor (one reading for each phase leg on 3 - phase motors). 9. Pressure in inches w.g. at inlet of each fan or blower. 10. Pressure in inches w.g. at discharge of each fan or blower. 11. External static pressure in inches w.g. 12. Air stream temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb) in deg. F. .� 13. Pressure drops across system components such as filters. 14. Submit the actual fan operating point on a copy of the fan shop drawing showing operating curve. - 15. List the following data from all fan motors installed. a. Manufacturer model and size. b. Motor horsepower, service factor and rpm. FIWH1101 15990-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS LM Contract No.01632 c. Volts, phases, cycles and full load amps. d. Equipment locations. E. Gas Heating Coils 1. Furnish typewritten data tabulating the following: a. Manufacturer and model number. b. All design and manufacturer's rated data. c. Coil location and identification. d. Dry bulb air temperature entering and leaving coil. e. Manifold Pressure/CFH. f. High limit setting. g. Operating Set Point. 3.05 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. At the time of final inspection, the TAB Contractor shall recheck, in the presence of the Engineer, specific and random selections of data recorded in the certified test-and- balance report. B. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Engineer. C. Measurements and test procedures shall be the same as the original test and balance. D. Selections for recheck, specific plus random, shall not normally exceed 15 percent of the total number tabulated in the report, except where special air systems require a complete recheck for safety reasons. E. If the specific rechecks are more than 5 percent deviation from the report or specified flows, all of the systems, that require specific recheck, shall be rebalanced. I f 5 percent or 5 of the random checks, whichever is less, exceeds a 10 percent deviation from the specified flows, the report shall be rejected. I n the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, a n ew certified test-and-balance report submitted, and a new inspection test made, all at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Each fan shall operate with no objectionable noise or vibration. END OF SECTION FrWH1101 15990-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HVAC-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING MOTOR AND SWrrCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following principal systems and equipment: 1. 120/208 V system. 2. 480 V system. 3. 2400 V Medium voltage system. 4. Motors. 5. Low and Medium Voltage Motor control centers. 6. Medium Voltage switchgear. 7. Panelboards 8. Automatic Transfer Switch 9. Conduit and Raceways. 10. Transformers. 11. Lighting fixtures and lamps. 12. Grounding and Lightning Protection. 13. Conductors. 14. Power Factor Correction Capacitor 15. Miscellaneous controls and Equipment. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Perform work, furnish and install materials and equipment in full accordance with the latest issue of the applicable rules, regulations, requirements, and specifications of the following: 1. Local laws and ordinances. 2. State and Federal Laws. 3. National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. State Fire Marshal. 5. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL). 6. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 8. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 9. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA) Standard of Installation. 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 11. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 12. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 13. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 14. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). FTWH1101 16010-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 15. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 16. American Concrete Institute (ACI). 17. International Building Code (IBC). _ 18. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA). 19. Association Edison Illuminating Company (AEIC). 20. Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace (NFPA 70E). _ B. Wherever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the above items, the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings govern. Code compliance is mandatory. C. Product Quality: All electrical items shall be new and unused. Items such as cables, transformers, motors, control centers, etc., shall be newly manufactured for this project. Proof of purchase documents shall be provided upon request. Utilize products of a single manufacturer for each item. 1.03 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Intent: 1. The intent of the contract drawings or Plans is to establish the types of systems - and functions, but not to set forth each item essential to the functioning of the system. 2. Electrical drawings are generally diagrammatic and show approximate location and extent of work. 3. Install the work Complete, including minor details necessary to perform the function indicated. 4. In case of doubt as to work intended, or if amplification or clarification is needed, request instructions from the Engineer. _ 5. It is also the intent of these Contract Documents for the electrical and process system Contractor to coordinate with each other in order to provide a complete and workable system with all wiring, conduit and accessories required which may not be shown on the Plans. 6. The Plans and Specifications are intended to comply with listed codes, ordinances, regulations and standards. w B. Discrepancies: 1. Review pertinent drawings and adjust the work to conditions shown. - 2. Where discrepancies occur between Plans, Specifications, and actual field conditions, immediately notify the Engineer in writing and ask for an interpretation. 3. Dimensions on electrical drawings shall be verified with structural, architectural and mechanical drawings. 4. Should installed materials or workmanship fail to comply, the Contractor is �- responsible for correcting the improper installation. FfWH1101 16010-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS a MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS T Contract No.01632 C. Outlet and Equipment Locations: 1. Coordinate the actual locations of electrical outlets and equipment with building features and mechanical equipment as indicated on architectural, structural and mechanical drawings. 2. Review with the Engineer any proposed changes in outlet or equipment location. 3. Relocation of outlets before installation, up to 3 feet from the position indicated, may be directed by Owner without additional cost. 4. Remove and relocate outlets placed in an unsuitable location, when so requested by the Engineer. 1.04 REGULATIONS AND PERMITS A. Regulations: Work, materials and equipment must comply with the latest rules and regulations of the following: 1. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). 2. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 3. Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace (NFPA70E). 4. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 5. State and federal codes, ordinances and regulations. 6. Local Electrical Code. B. Discrepancies: 1. The Plans and Specifications are intended to comply with listed codes, ordinances, regulations and standards. 2. Where discrepancies occur, immediately notify the Engineer in writing and ask for an interpretation. ` 3. Should installed materials or workmanship fail to comply, the Contractor is responsible for correcting the improper installation. 4. Additionally, where sizes, capacities, or other such features are required in excess of minimum code or standards requirement, provide those specified or shown. C. Permits: Obtain certificates of inspection and other permits required as a part of the work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. An acceptable Contractor for the work under this division must have personnel with experience, training, and skill to provide a practical working system. The Contractor shall have previous water and wastewater experience with at least 5 years in business. 1. The Contractor shall be required to furnish acceptable evidence of having installed not less than three systems of size and type comparable to this project. 2. The systems must have served satisfactorily for not less than 3 years. 3. The superintendent must have had experience in installing not less than three systems. 4. The Contractor shall submit qualifications of his firm and resumes of his personnel who will work on this project. FTWH1101 16010-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS a . Contract No.01632 1.06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WORKMANSHIP, EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. All electrical work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the electrical trade and licensed for the work by the local authority. B. A licensed Master Electrician will be required for the issuance of a building permit for constructing, installing, altering, maintaining, repairing, or replacing any electrical wiring, apparatus, or equipment on any voltage level. A licensed Master Electrician or a licensed Journeyman Electrician holding a current license in the state of Texas is required to be on the job site during the performance of any electrical work. Master Electrician shall spend minimum of 2 h rs per week at the job site reviewing work completed. C. All cable splicing and termination methods and materials shall be of the type recommended by the splicing materials manufacturer for the cable to be spliced, and shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation. D. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer, the best practices of the trade, and in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner in writing of any conflict between any requirements of the Contract Documents and manufacturer's directions, and shall obtain written instructions from the Owner before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such written instructions from the Owner, he shall bear all costs arising in correcting deficiencies. E. All equipment and materials shall be new, unless specifically noted otherwise, and shall bear the manufacturer's name, trademark and ASME, UL, and/or other labels in every case where a standard has been established for the particular item. Equipment shall be the latest approved design of a standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of the required type of equipment, and shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Owner, reasonably convenient to the site. y F. The Electrical design is based on preliminary equipment selections. If contractor provides equipment that is larger than the selections, the contractor is responsible for upsizing all cables, starts, overloads, transformers, etc. to meet the National Electrical Code and provide an overall voltage drop of less than 5%. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that items furnished fit the space available with adequate room for proper operation and maintenance. He shall make measurements to ascertain space requirements, including those for connections, and shall furnish and install such sizes and shapes of equipment that, in the final inspection, will suit the true intent and meaning of the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents. G. The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, connections and incidental items necessary to complete the work, ready for use and operation by the Engineer/Owner. FTWH1101 16010-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS F l Contract No.01632 H. When the Engineer/Owner has reviewed equipment submittals and given instructions to proceed with the installation of items of equipment that require arrangements or connections different from those shown on the drawings, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install the equipment to operate properly and in accordance with the intent of the Plans and Specifications, and he shall provide any additional equipment and materials that may be required. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location of roughing-in and connections by other trades. All changes shall be made at no increase in the Contract Amount or additional costs to other trades. R I. The Contractor shall support the installation of all equipment, plumb, rigid and true to line. The Contractor shall determine how equipment, fixtures, conduit, etc., are to be installed, and shall provide foundations, bolts, inserts, stands, hangers, brackets and accessories for proper support whether or not shown on the drawings. 1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Data Required: 1. Submit shop drawings, product data and all other required information as .r specified in Division 1. Submittals are required on all products and items to be installed on this project. 2. Submittal data must show manufacturer's name, published ratings or capacity _ data, detailed equipment drawing for fabricated items, panel diagrams, wiring diagrams, installation instructions and other pertinent data. 3. Where literature is submitted covering a group or series of similar items, the applicable items must be clearly indicated. Mark through items not being provided and clearly identify all options being provided. 4. Do not combine submittal for multiple Specifications Sections. B. Submit a letter showing all the exception to the specification. If no exceptions are taken the letter shall indicate no exception. Submittal will be rejected without preliminary review if the letter is not submitted. C. Submittal Items: Submittals are required for all equipment and materials to be used on this project. Submittals shall be complete with all pertinent information and installation details. Assume all costs and liabilities which may result from the ordering of any material or equipment prior to the review of the shop drawings or submittals, and no work shall be done until the shop drawings or submittals have been reviewed. In case of correction or rejection, resubmit until such time as they are accepted by the Owner's Representative, and such procedures will not be cause for delay D. Terminal Connection Diagrams: 1. Submit terminal connection diagrams for approval prior to any wire installation. 2. Submit finalized terminal connection diagrams at the end of the Contract. 3. All manufacturers named are a basis as a standard of quality and substitutions of any equal product will be considered for acceptance. The judgment of equality of product substitution shall be made by the Engineer. FTWH1101 16010-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 w SOUTH HOLLY WfP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS ►r Contract No.01632 1.08 SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall be responsible for: I_ Complete systems in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents. -- 2. Coordinating the details of facility equipment and construction for all Specification Divisions which affect the work covered under Division 16, Electrical. 3. Furnishing and installing incidental items not actually shown or specified, but which are required by good practice to provide complete functional systems. 4. Coordinate the work with the instrumentation Contractor. a. The Instrument Contractor shall furnish and install the primary and secondary instruments, flow transmitter b. The conduit and wiring to and from the instruments shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. Termination in the instrument shall be by the Instrument Contractor. c. All terminations in the control panel shall be by the Instrument Contractor. d. The Electrical Contractor shall provide termination drawings for the instrumentation Contractor. e. The equipment pad for the control panels, consoles and instrument panels shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. f. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate the testing of the electrical system being furnished. He shall be responsible for the equipment he is supplying. g. The Electrical Contractor shall be present at time of the instrument system testing and start-up. He shall be responsible to coordinate the testing of the facility with the Instrument Contractor. h. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate the interface requirement between each starter and control panel furnished under this Contract with the Instrument Contractor. i. Written proof shall be furnished and submitted to the Engineer prior to installation to verify that a clear understanding has been reached between the Electrical Contractor and the Instrument Contractor for each control loop _ requirements, (e.g. type of contacts (momentary, maintained), interface relay requirement number of wires, terminal marking, control schematic information, and wiring diagrams). B. Electrical plan drawings show only general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper routing of raceway, subject to the approval of the Engineer. C. Submit to the Engineer in writing details of any necessary, proposed departures from these Contract Documents, and the reasons therefore. Submit such request as soon as practicable, and within ten (10) days after award of the Contract. Make no such departures without written approval of the Engineer. D. Dimensions on electrical drawings shall be verified with structural, architectural, and - mechanical drawings. F FWHI101 16010-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 E. Where the Contractor is submitting a packaged system, Contractor shall meet the requirements of electrical specifications. This includes field cables, conduits, junction boxes, circuit breakers, combination starters, pushbuttons, pilot lights, and motors. Deviations shall not be accepted, unless approved in writing in advance. Control centers and special control cabinets wired to terminal blocks shall include the manufacturer's standard quality, unless specifically mentioned to the contrary on the drawings or in the specifications. F. Maintain continuity of electric service to functioning portions of the process or buildings during hours they are normally in use. Temporary outages will be permitted during cutover work at such times and places as can be prearranged with the Owner's designated Representative. Such outages shall be kept to a minimum number and minimum length of time. Make no outages without prior written authorization of the Engineer. Include costs for temporary wiring and overtime work required in the Contract price. Remove temporary wiring at the completion of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide and pay for temporary power to any facility during construction to facilitate the new construction. If generator is needed contractor shall be responsible for all the cost associated with, including fuel. G. Unless shown in detail, the drawings are diagrammatic and do not necessarily give exact details as to elevations and routing of raceways, nor do they show all offsets and fittings; nevertheless, install the raceway system to conform to the structural and mechanical conditions of the construction. H. Cabling inside equipment shall be carefully routed, trained, and laced. Placing cables so that they obstruct equipment devices is not acceptable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Condition: Materials and equipment provided under these Specifications must be new - products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment. Provide the manufacturer's latest standard design for the type of equipment specified. B. NEC and UL: Products must conform to requirements of the National Electrical Code. Where Underwriters' Laboratories have set standards, listed products, and issued labels, products used must be listed and labeled by UL. C. NEMA and IEC: Only NEMA rated equipment is acceptable. IEC or dual rated NEMA/IEC equipment are not acceptable. D. Space Limitations: Equipment selected must conform to the buildings features and must be coordinated with them. Do not provide equipment that will not suit arrangement and space limitations. E. Factory Finish: Equipment must be delivered with a hard surface, factory-applied finish so that no additional field painting is required. M .s FTWH1101 16010-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 F. Field Installation: All field installed equipment, conduit, etc., shall require Type 316 stainless steel nuts, bolts, washers, metal framing and supports, and other items as indicated on the Plans. G. Installation and supply of electrical equipment shall be conformed to NEC 500, for classified area. H. Seismic Design: All electrical equipment to be designed in accordance with/IBC-2006 & - ASCE 7-05 code for Seismic Design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT A. Moisture: 1. During construction, provide heaters to protect switchgear, transformers, motors, control equipment, and other items from moisture absorption and corrosion. 2. Apply protection immediately on receiving the products and provide continuous protection. 3. Store all equipment indoors in dry, well ventilated and heated space. B. Clean: Keep products clean by elevating above ground or floor and by using suitable coverings. t C. Damage: Take such precautions as are necessary to protect apparatus and materials from damage. Failure to protect materials is sufficient cause for rejection of the apparatus or material in question. D. Finish: Protect factory finish from damage during construction operations and until final acceptance of the project. E. Protect Equipment per the manufacturer's requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cooperation with Other Trades: _ 1. Cooperation with trades of adjacent, related or affected materials or operations, and of trades performing continuations of this work under subsequent contracts, is considered a part of this work in order to effect timely and accurate placing of _ work and to bring together, in proper and correct sequence, the work of such trades. 2. Coordinated equipment layout in sufficient time to be coordinated with work of others, provide drawings and layout work showing exact size and location of sleeves, openings or inserts for electrical equipment in slabs, walls, partitions and chases. rt B. Workmanship: Work must be performed by workmen skilled in their trade. The installation must be complete whether the work is concealed or exposed. FTWH1101 16010-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS dw Contract No.01632 C. Setting of Equipment: 1. Equipment must be leveled and set plumb. 2. Stainless Steel 316 enclosures mounted against a wall must be separated from the wall not less than 1/2-inch by means of corrosion resistant spacers or by 3 inches of air for freestanding units. 3. Stainless Steel 316 bolts, nuts and washers to anchor the equipment. D. Sealing of Equipment: 1. Permanently seal outdoor equipment at the base using concrete grout. 2. Seal or screen openings into equipment to prevent entrance of animals, birds and insects. 3. Use stainless steel mesh with openings not larger than 1/16-inch squares for screened openings. 4. Seal small cracks and openings from the inside with silicone sealing compound. E. Concealed Work: Conceal electrical work in walls, floors, chases, under floors, underground and above ceilings except: 1. Where shown or specified to be exposed. Exposed is understood to mean open to view. 2. Where exposure is necessary to the proper function. 3. Where size of materials and equipment precludes concealment. 3.03 TESTING A. Test Conditions: 1. Place circuits and equipment into service under normal conditions, collectively and separately, as may be necessary to determine satisfactory operation. 2. Perform specified tests in the presence of the Engineer, as specified in Division 1- General Requirements and 16- Electrical. 3. Furnish all instruments, wiring, equipment, and personnel required for conducting tests. 4. Demonstrate that the equipment operates in accordance with requirements of the plans and specifications. 5. No process equipment is to be operated until any associated HVAC equipment and auxiliary equipment is operational. B. Test Dates: Schedule final acceptance tests sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion date to permit completion of any necessary adjustment or alterations within the number of days allotted for completion of the Contract. C. Retests: Conduct retests as directed by the Engineer of such time duration as may be necessary to assure proper functioning of adjusted or altered parts or items of equipment. Any resultant delay as a result of such necessary retests does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility under this contract. Provide notice to Engineer and Owner of testing 30-days prior to testing. FfWH1101 16010-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS — A. Preparation: 1. At the job site, maintain a set of white prints of the contract drawings. 2. At the job site, maintain a set of equipment terminal connection diagrams. 3. On the prints, record field changes and diagrams of those portions of work in which actual construction is at variance with the contract drawings. ` 4. Mark the drawings with a c olored pencil. Record installed feeder conduits, dimensioning the exact location and elevation of the conduit. B. Delivery: Deliver record drawings to the Engineer in the number and manner specified in Division 1 - General Requirements. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Lay out work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without specific approval of the Engineer. Carefully carry out any y cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, paving, or other surfaces required for the installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. Do not cut beams for any reason. Following such work, restore surfaces neatly to original condition. 3.06 LOAD BALANCE A. The Drawings and Specifications indicate circuits to electrical loads and distribution equipment. Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, etc. 3.07 MOTOR ROTATION A. Before and after final service connections are made, check and correct as necessary the rotation of motors. B. Coordinate rotation checks with the Engineer and the Contractor responsible for the driven equipment. Submit a written report to the Engineer for each motor verifying that rotation has been checked and corrected. 3.08 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP PAINTING A. Touch up scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior and exterior surfaces of devices and ` equipment with finishes matching as nearly as possible the type, color, consistency, and type of surface of the original finish. If extensive damage is done to equipment paint surfaces, refinish the entire equipment in a manner that provides finish equal to or better than the factory finish, and that meets the requirements of the Specifications and is acceptable to the Engineer. B. Remove all temporary labels, dirt, paint, grease and stains from all exposed equipment. Upon completion of work, clean equipment and the entire installation so as to present a first class job suitable for occupancy. No loose parts or scraps of equipment shall be left on the premises. FrWH1101 16010-10 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS .� MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 C. All temporary wiring, wiring devices and associated equipment shall be removed upon completion of the project. END OF SECTION IL IL a. FTWH1101 16010-11 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16012 IDENTIFICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install tags/nameplate on all equipment, devices, instruments, conduit and conductor marking as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Major equipment shall be furnished with nameplates in accordance with their individual specifications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, detailed catalog information or drawings describing electrical and physical characteristics of all equipment specified. B. Submittal shall be clearly marked showing only equipment provided. Mark through equipment option not provided. C. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. D. Submit a letter showing all the exception to the specification. If no exceptions are taken the letter shall indicate no exception. Submittal will be rejected without preliminary review if the letter is not submitted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE MARKERS A. Provide heat shrinkable sleeves and machine printed legends at every conductor. Sleeves and legends shall be high resistant to abrasion, solvents and chemicals. Provide Tyco TMS, Brady Perma Sleeve XPS, or approved equal. Markers shall be white with black lettering. B. Markers shall have conductor origin, termination and circuit number, terminal number whichever applies. C. Large conductors, multi-conductor cable and tray cables to be identified with placards held on with wire ties and of the same quality as markers for smaller single conductors. D. Cables in cable tray to be identified with place cards at the equipment and at 20 feet spans in between. E. All control wiring in electrical equipment or manufactured supplied panel shall have wire markers. F FWH1101 16012-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- IDENTIFICATIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.02 CONDUIT MARKERS A. Exposed Conduit 1. Stencil high voltage conduit with the legend "HIGH VOLTAGE" and indicate voltage stenciled in minimum 1-inch high red letters. 2.03 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates: 1. Externally mark electrical equipment by means of suitable nameplates identifying r each and the equipment served. 2. Provide each piece of equipment with a white phenolic nameplate with 3/16-inch- high black lettering secured to front of equipment. 3. Supply blank nameplates for spare units and used spaces. 4. Actual nameplate legend, which may consist of up to three lines, will be provided to the Engineer on submittals. 5. ERN (Equipment Registration Numbering) tag system to be used. Coordinate with City Standards for tagging and naming convention. B. Nameplate Fasteners: Fasten nameplates to equipment only by means of appropriate 316 SS screws and gasket. Stick-ons or adhesives will not be allowed. C. Nameplate Information: In general, the following information is to be provided for the types of electrical equipment as listed. 1. Switchgear, Motor Control Centers and Distribution Panelboards: On the mains, identify the piece of equipment, the source, and voltage characteristics, i.e., 480V, 3PH, 3W, etc. For each branch circuit protective device, identify the load served and the primary side circuit number. 2. Transformers: Identify the service source and load served. 3. Panelboards: Identify the service source, panelboard designation and voltage characteristics. D. Panelboards: 1. Prepare a neatly typed circuit directory behind clear heat-resistant plastic for each panelboard. 2. Identify circuits by equipment served and by room numbers, where room numbers exist. 3. Use equipment names and room numbers selected by the Engineer; names and numbers may be different from those shown on plans. 4. Indicate spares and spaces with light, erasable pencil markings. S. Provide a final set of the panel schedule in the O&M manuals. 6. Provide a CD with the file for each Panel to the Owner with the O&M manual. E. Boxes, Small Equipment: 1. Pull boxes and similar items shall be marked with Nameplates. FTWH1101 16012-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- IDENTIFICATIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2. Provide identification stencils for high voltage equipment and raceways with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE". Mark all exposed high voltage raceways every 25 feet. F. Power Receptacles: Use nameplate or engraved plate to identify power receptacles where the nominal voltage between a pair of contacts is greater than 150 volts with circuit number, voltage, and phases. 2.04 POWER OUTLETS, SWITCHES, AND PILOT DEVICES A. Mark power outlets with voltage, phase, panel name, and circuit number. B. Identify all wall switches, disconnect switches, etc. with nametags, circuits served, and panel origin, list to be approved by Engineer/Owner. C. Identify all push-button stations with their functions and equipment served. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FURNISH AND INSTALL NAMEPLATES/TAGS A. Furnish and install nameplates for all panelboards, motor starters, motor control center cubicles, disconnect switches, instrument panels, dry type transformers and control stations. B. Engrave the equipment designation, (e.g., "Starter Pump P1"), on nameplates in 3/16- inch black letters on white background of laminated phenolic. Securely fasten nameplates using stainless steel 316 sheet metal screws or rivets; or contact cement if enclosure is sealed. All switches, indicating lights, pushbuttons, meters and parameter indicators on panels shall be clearly identified with its function or tag, as required. Identification list to be approved by plant personnel through the Engineer. C. Stainless Steel tags shall be used on instrument, motors and other devices, as applicable. The tags shall be affixed to the instrument with drive pins or stainless steel chain in such a manner that it does not need to be removed to install the instrument. Motors shall carry the tag assigned to its driven equipment, (e.g., P-101). END OF SECTION t FfWH1101 16012-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 -+ SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- IDENTIFICATIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16020 UTILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install necessary materials and make arrangements for the connection of utilities for the project. The required utilities are electrical service. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with all service installation standards of the serving utility companies. PART 2 PRODUCTS - 2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The Contractor shall coordinate Oncor Electric installation of work as shown on the drawings. Utility contact information: Ralph Schroeder (Ralph.Schroeder(&oncor.com or (817) 988-8904) B. Entrance must be coordinated with the Engineer/Owner. Provide materials and equipment required to connect the project service to the system. Coordinate with Electric Company for requirements of power service. C. All fees other than those mentioned in the service agreement between Oncor Electric and the City of Fort Worth shall be covered by the contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 UTILITY A. Electric company is to provide two 2000A, 2400V pad mounted metering units. Cost for pad mounted units in the service agreement between the City Of Fort Worth and the electric utility. B. Cables and conduits from the South Holly substation to the metering units and from the metering units to the main incoming plant new switchgear shall be provided by the contractor. C. Contractor will be responsible for all the electrical civil work including the concrete poured in place pads for the new PMU's (see exhibit A at the end of this specification for details). D. Demolition of the equipment and equipment pads located in the zigzag area and demolition of the fence around the zigzag area as shown on the drawings shall be the responsibility of the contractor. FTWH1101 16020-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 + SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UTILITIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 E. Removal of the four sets of service cables and potheads inside the South Holly substation shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Installation of the new four sets of service cables and potheads inside the South Holly substation shall be the responsibility of the contractor as well. Oncor will terminate the jumpers on the lineside of the potheads onto the buss work inside the substation. Contractor to coordinate with Oncor for termination. F. Oncor will install the new PMU's and terminate the customer's line side and load side conductors inside the PMU's. G. The contractor will provide to Oncor the lugs to terminate the conductors inside the PMU's. H. Contractor to follow the mechanical construction sequencing Section 01110, electrical ! equipment shall be energized on time. Delay to the startup shall not be caused due to electrical contractor miscoordination. I. Contractor to minimize interruption of service. Contractor to coordinate with Owner prior to any interruption per Section 01110. 1. Contractor shall coordinate with electric utility for connection and disconnection of the service feeders to plant equipment from the Middle Holly and the South Holly substations: _ 1. Disconnection of the feeder from South Holly substation to South Holly High Service Pump Station to be performed prior to the plant two weeks shutdown. Disconnection of the service feeders will be by the electric utility. 2. Disconnection of the feeder from Middle Holly substation to South Holly High ! Service Pump Station prior to the plant two weeks shutdown. Disconnection of the service feeders will be by the electric utility. Conductors will remain de-energized until end of two weeks shutdown and will be reconnected when High Service Pump station new gear is energized. 3. Reconnection of the Middle Holly feeder to the Middle Holly substation and connection of the new South Holly feeder to the South Holly substation shall happen prior to the end of the two weeks plant shutdown when the High Service Pump station new gear is energized. Utility PMUs shall be connected at the same time. K. All fees other than those mentioned in the service agreement between Oncor Electric and the City of Fort Worth shall be covered by the contractor. " FfWH1101 16020-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UTILITIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 EXHIBIT A South Holly WTP Oncor Metering Pad 66" mw e� O so Doors \ Doors Line 66" Load Side Side s s 3L'X 8'Ground Rods(2) ♦A A I_ O B .. PLAN VIEW Final "' 2"Above Grade"'� Walls&floor to be Final Grade 6"thick concrete SO" Ground Rods Conduits 00 ,---, 00 00 00 SECTION A—A FfWH1101 16020-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 _ SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UTILITIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 South Holly WTP Oncor Metering Pad Contd. 6" � ! 54" Final .1-... "''"''—'Grade SO" #3 Rebar on 12"Centers for walls&floor SECTION B-B END OF SECTION FTWH1101 16020-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- UTILITIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16040 ELECTRICAL MOTOR 150HP AND LESS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Equipment: This section specifies general requirements for fractional and integral a horsepower electric motors 150hp and below with a voltage rating of 480VAC or below. Unless otherwise specified, provide motors meeting the basic requirements for high efficiency premium insulation general-purpose alternating current motors, as defined in NEMA MG 1. B. Unit Responsibility: Motors shall be furnished under other sections of this specification as a part of the driven equipment. The contractor is responsible for all coordination between the various components, as well as for the warranty. C. Exceptions: Exceptions to this section are listed in the various sections that specify motor-driven equipment or are indicated on the drawings. D. Motors connected to variable frequency drives shall be inverter duty rated; each bearing on the non-drive end shall be insulated. E. This specification does not cover Submersible Motors. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. ANSI/NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. 2. ANSI/UL 674(A) - Safety Standard for Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous Locations, Class II, Groups E, F and G. 3. ANSI/UL 674(B) - Safety Standard for Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous Locations, Class I, Groups C and D. 4. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (latest Edition). 5. IEEE 112 - Standard Test Procedure for polyphase induction motors and generators. 6. UL 1004 - Electric Motors. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: No less than the driven equipment warranty. 1.04 SUBMITTALS tin A. Requirements: Refer to, Division 1 and Division 16 and to the specific driven equipment sections. FTWH1101 16040-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL MOTOR 150HP AND LESS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 .t B. Information: Include the following information on the attached motor data sheet. 1, Manufacturer. 2. Rated full load horsepower. 3. Rated volts. 4. Number of phases. 5. Frequency in hertz. 6. Locked rotor amperes (LRA) at rated voltage or NEMA code letter. - 7. NEMA design letter. 8. Bearing Type. 9. Service Factor. 10. Nominal speed at full load. 11. Full Load Amperes (FLA) 12. Efficiency at 1/2, 3/4 and full load. 13. Power factor at no load, 1/2, 3/4 and full load. 14. NEMA insulation system classification. For motors installed outdoors, include information showing compliance with the intent of paragraph 2.31). 15. Corrosion duty rating 16. Fan, end bell cast evidence. C. Integral Horsepower Motors 40HP and Larger: In addition to the information listed above, include: _ 1. No load amperes. 2. Safe stall time. 3. Maximum guaranteed slip at full load. Motor damage curves for motors larger than 100HP. Motor manufacturer recommended maximum power factor correction capacitor KVAR.D. Include the motor data sheet at the end of this section in submittal. E. The motor manufacturer shall provide in writing that he has coordinated the motor data with VFD and or RVSS manufacturer and that the motor is suitable for VFD or RVSS application. F. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. G. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. FTWH1101 16040-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL MOTOR 150HP AND LESS — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RATING A. Speed and Size: 1. Speed and horsepower sizes are specified in the driven equipment specification sections or are indicated on the drawings. 2. Furnish motors sufficiently sized for the particular application and with full-load rating not less than required by the driven equipment at specified capacity. 3. Size motors so as not to overload at any point throughout the normal operating range. 4. Furnish dual speed motors of two speed, two winding type, when specified. B. Frequency: 60 hertz. C. Service Factor: 1.15 for all motors. 2.02 DESIGN TYPE A. Motors Smaller Than 1/6 Horsepower: Provide single-phase 120 v olts, induction motors with integral thermal protectors. B. Motors 1/6 Through 1/2 Horsepower: Provide single-phase 120 volts, NEMA Design N, induction motors. C. Motors Larger Than 1/2 Horsepower: Provide 3-phase, 480 volts NEMA Design B, induction motors unless specified otherwise. D. Acceleration NEMA Time: If the calculated acceleration time of the combined motor and driven load exceeds 3 seconds at 90 percent of rated voltage, request review by the Engineer. Do not proceed with manufacturing without approval. E. All induction motors shall have squirrel cage rotors. F. Motor shall be suitable for outdoor environment. 2.03 MOTOR INSULATION AND WINDING A. Class: Use a Class F insulation with temperature Rise of Class B or better, meeting the requirements of NEMA MG 1 and made of non-hygroscopic materials. The insulation shall be manufacturer's premium grade, resistant to attack by moisture, acids, alkalies, and mechanical or thermal shock for 480-volt motors. B. All insulated winding conductors shall be copper. C. Insulation for inverter duty motor shall meet or exceed the Pulse Endurance Index for magnetic wire and shall not be damaged when exposed to repeated pulse type wave forms, repetitive high voltage transients, switching frequency and rate of rise of the pulse. All bearings on the non-drive end shall be insulated. y D. Outdoor Suitability, all motors must be suitable for outdoor installation. FfWH1101 16040-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL MOTOR 150HP AND LESS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.04 GROUNDING CONNECTIONS A. Ground provisions shall be furnished per NEMA STANDARD. B. For motors less than 1/6 HP, each motor shall be furnished with provision for attaching a ground connection to the motor frame inside the motor terminal housing. - 2.05 LEADS A. For motor leads, use not less than ASTM B 173, Class G, stranded copper conductors with insulation the same as or better than specified in the preceding Motor Insulation paragraph. B. Provide permanent identification numbers on leads according to NEMA MG. C. Use crimp-on, solderless copper terminals on leads and place heat-shrink insulation sleeves or covers between leads and terminals. D. Or approved equal. 2.06 ENCLOSURE A. Use enclosure type as follows: R 1. Indoors: Totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC). 2. Outdoors: Totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC), weatherproof. 3. Class 1 Division 2 Area: Provide motors totally enclosed, non vented, explosion proof(TEFC-XP). 4. Class 1 Division 1 Area: Provide motors rated for this class. 5. Motors mounted vertically shall be provided with rain/snow shield made of the x same material as the motor frame. 6. Motors shall have drain openings and plugs suitably located for the type assembly being provided. 7. Motor shall be corrosion resistant and severe duty rated per IEEE 841. B. TEFC motors shall have a cast iron frame, cast iron end brackets, cast iron bell frame, cast iron conduit box, tapped drain holes (erosion resistant plug for frames 286T(20HP) and smaller and automatic breaker/drain devices for frame 324T(25HP) and larger, and upgraded insulation by additional dips and baked to increase moisture resistance. 2.07 BEARINGS A. Motors smaller than 1/6 Horsepower: Motor manufacturer's standard bearing is acceptable. B. Motors 1/6 Horsepower and Larger: Supply these motors with grease-lubricated antifriction ball bearings conservatively rated for 60,000 hours L10 minimum life of ` continuous operation under the total radial and thrust loads produced by the actual combination of motor-driven equipment. Provide each motor with suitable lubrication fittings and pressure relief devices. FTWH1101 16040-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL MOTOR 150HP AND LESS - MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 C. Oil Lubricated: If the driven equipment section specifies oil-lubricated bearings for motors, include a suitable sight gauge on each bearing with maximum and minimum levels clearly indicated. D. Unless specified otherwise in the driven equipment specifications. Motor bearing life shall be 60,000 hours L10 minimum life whichever is greater. 2.08 NAMEPLATES A. Main Nameplate: Provide each motor with a stainless steel nameplate meeting the requirements of NEMA MG, and the National Electrical Code, Section 430-7. B. Heater Nameplate: When space heaters are furnished, include voltage and wattage on a suitable nameplate. C. Bearings Nameplate: When bearings are oil lubricated, include oil type information on a suitable nameplate. Also, indicate bearing data if nonstandard. D. Attachment: Attach the nameplates to the motor with stainless steel fastening pins or screws. 2.09 IDENTIFICATIONS: A. All motors shall be identified per Section 16012. • 2.10 CONDUIT BOX A. Provide each motor not supplied with a cord and plug with a conduit box amply dimensioned for the motor lead terminations. Include a grounding lug on motors 1/6 horsepower and larger. Supply a gasket suitable for the motor enclosure type and application. B. Provide an oversize box to facilitate wiring terminations. C. Oversized terminal box shall have a volume greater than or equal to the next standard NEMA size box. 2.11 SPACE HEATERS A. Provide space heaters in all motors 25HP and above. 1. Use heaters hermetically sealed in stainless steel or equivalent corrosion-resistant sheaths. 2. Heaters shall be rated for 240V, but will be operated at 120 volts. 3. Braze heat-resistant insulated leads to the heater or supply heater with brazed leads and extend to the conduit box. 2.12 MONITORING DEVICES A. Motor shall be protected and be supplied with necessary monitoring devices per driven equipment specification and contract drawings. FfWH1101 16040-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 �s SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL MOTOR 150HP AND LESS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 Y 2.13 PAINT A. Shall be severe duty and shall have an epoxy coating per IEEE 841. 2.14 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The motor model shall be as listed and manufactured by one or more of the following manufacturers unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 1. General Electric. 2. TECO/Westinghouse 3. Siemens. 4. Toshiba. -- 5. US Motors. 2.15 MOTOR EFFICIENCIES — A. Three phase motors rated 1 Hp and larger shall be of the NEMA premium efficiency type. Efficiency values shall be based on tests performed in accordance with IEEE 4 Publication No. 112, Method B. Motors with horsepower or rpm's not listed shall conform to comparable standards of construction and materials as those for listed motors. B. Motor shall be severe duty rated for industrial application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall make all electrical connections to equipment specified. Installation shall be made in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Drawings. If the Contract Drawings or drawings and recommendations from the Manufacturer are not available then installation shall proceed according to - the best electrical industry and trade practice. B. Properly install and align motors in the locations shown, except motors which are factory mounted on the driven equipment. When the motor and equipment are installed, the nameplate must be in full view. 3.02 LARGER MOTORS A. If a motor horsepower rating larger than indicated is offered as a substitute and accepted, provide required changes in conductors, motor controllers, overload relays, fuses, breakers, switches and other related items with no change in the contract price. 3.03 TESTING A. General: Provide all necessary instruments, labor and personnel required to perform motor inspection and testing.B. Inspection: Inspect all motors for damage, moisture, alignment, freedom of rotation, proper lubrication, oil leaks, phase identification and cleanliness, and report any 4 abnormalities to Engineer before energizing. FfWH1101 16040-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL MOTOR 150HP AND LESS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 C. Energizing: After installation has been thoroughly checked and found to be in proper condition, with thermal overloads in motor controllers properly rated and all controls in place, energize the equipment at system voltage for operational testing. D. As a part of the testing procedure, the Contractor shall prepare a card for each motor, 20 HP and larger, installed on this contract. After each motor has been run to operating temperature, the motor shall be shut down and an insulation resistance shall be made, using a megohmmeter. Make the test immediately after shutdown. Record megohmmeter reading and winding temperature. Correct reading of insulation resistance to 400 C/104°F. Insulation resistance in megohms, corrected to 400 C, shall be at least equal to one (1) megohm for each 1000 volts applied. E. Testing shall be in accordance with Division 16. FfWH1101 16040-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL MOTOR 150HP AND LESS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 ELECTRIC MOTOR QUESTIONNAIRE Motor Data Manufacturer: Motor HP: Frame Enclosure: Type: RPM: Voltage: Phases: Hertz: Starting Method: Shaft: Size: Insulation Class: Duty: Full Load AMPS: No Load AMPS: Locked Rotor AMPS: Locked Rotor Time: Locked Rotor Torque: % Breakdown Torque: Locked Rotor KVA/HP: Rotor WK2 (lb-ft2): NEMA Design: Service Factor: Inrush Current (%of Full Load): Max Safe Stalled Time (Seconds): Number of Safe Starts Per Day: Number of Consecutive Starts: *Full Load Temp Rise, degrees C over 400 C Ambient (at 1.0 S.F.): *Service Factor Temp Rise, degrees C over 400 C Ambient (at 1.15 S.F.): *Limiting Temperature Rise: Resistance (at 250 C): { Bearings: Type/Size Life Lubrication: Exhaust Air (CFM): Exhaust Air Temp Rise (°F): EFFICIENCY: POWER FACTOR:CURRENT 1.15 S.F. Load: 4/4 Load: 3/4 Load: 1/2 Load: 1/4 Load: *Temperature rise measured by embedded detectors and not by resistance. All Data Fields To Be Completed By The Motor Manufacturer _ END OF SECTION FTWH1101 16040-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL MOTOR 150HP AND LESS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16055 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Short Circuit Studies, Protective Device Evaluation Studies, Arc Flash Studies and Protective Device Coordination Studies, and Capacitor back-to-back switching study shall be performed by the Switchboard/MCC manufacturer, or an electrical testing service firm regularly engaged in power system studies. The company and individual(s) performing the study shall have a minimum 5 years documented experience in power system analysis and completed projects of similar size and scope. The individual(s) performing the study shall be a registered Professional Engineer in the state of Texas. B. The studies shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings, and/or prior to release of equipment for manufacture. If formal completion of the studies cause delay in equipment manufacture, approval from the Engineer may be obtained for a preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of device ratings and characteristics will be satisfactory. C. The studies shall include all portions of the electrical distribution system from the normal power source or sources down to, and including, the 120/208-Volt distribution system, including 208V main 3 phase circuit breaker and all 208V, 3 phase loads. The studies shall be limited to all the new equipment installed at South Holly and down to the main breaker of any existing equipment that is re-fed from the new gear. Study shall also include all manufacturer supplied equipment. Normal system connections and those, which result in maximum fault conditions, shall be adequately covered in the study. System showing the largest load or partial list of the equipment on the bus will be rejected. D. Protective relay devices with microprocessor based settings shall be determined with the study. E. The work associated with this section is to be performed by or under the direction of a professional engineer licensed by the State of Texas. 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. The results of the power system study shall be summarized in a final report. Six (6) bound copies of the final report shall be submitted. R eport to be sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. Submit a preliminary report for approval prior to release equipment for manufacture. B. The report shall include the following sections: 1. Description, purpose, basis, and scope of the study and a single-line diagram of that portion of the power system which are included within the scope of the study. FTWH1101 16055-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 3 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- POWER SYSTEM STUDIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated short circuit duties and commentary regarding same. 3. Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of relay and circuit breaker trip settings, fuse selection, and commentary regarding same. 4. Fault current calculations, including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of computer printout. 5. A letter from utility provider showing available short circuit current at the service entrance. 6. A complete list of all recommended settings for all protective relays, including all 4 solid state protective relay packages. 7. A complete detail of the Arc Flash Study analysis as specified in 2.04. 8. An arc flash label showing the information requested in section 2. 9. A CD with an electronic version of the analysis to be submitted with each submittal. The electronic version shall include the backup folder with all the libraries files. C. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or } deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DATA COLLECTION FOR THE STUDIES A. The Contractor shall provide the required data including field settings on existing equipment for preparation of the studies. T he switchboard/switchgear and MCC manufacturer shall furnish the Contractor with a I isting of the required data immediately after award of the Contract. B. The Contractor shall expedite collection of the data to assure completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings, and/or prior to release of the equipment for manufacturer. C. The Contractor is responsible for gathering all manufacturer panel equipment data. - 2.02 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY A. The short circuit study shall be performed with the aid of a digital computer program, SKM and shall be in accordance with ANSI C37.5-1969 (R1975), IEEE std. 320-1721 IEEE 339, IEEE 242 and IEEE std. 141-1976. B. The study input data shall include the power company's short circuit contribution, resistance and reactance components of the branch impedances, the X/R ratios, base quantities selected, and other source impedances. T C. Calculate phase and phase-to-ground current and impedance. D. Short circuit close and latch momentary duty values and interrupting duty values shall Y be calculated on the basis of assumed three-phase bolted short circuits at each switchgear bus, medium voltage controller, switchboard, low voltage motor control n center, distribution panelboard, pertinent branch circuit panel, and other significant FFWH1101 16055-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- POWER SYSTEM STUDIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 locations through the system. The short circuit tabulations shall include symmetrical fault currents and X/R ratios. For each fault location, the total duty on the bus, as well as the individual contribution from each connected branch, shall be listed with its respective X/R ratio and impedance. E. A protective device evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of circuit breakers, molded case switches, automatic transfer switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the calculated fault currents. Appropriate multiplying factors based on system X/R ratios and protective device rating standards shall be applied. A ny problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment due to short circuit currents shall be promptly brought to the Engineer's attention, and corrective measures implemented at no extra cost to the Owner. 2.03 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to provide the necessary calculations and logic decisions required to select or to check the selection of power fuse ratings, protective relay characteristics and settings, ratios, and characteristics of associated current transformers, and low voltage breaker trip characteristics, and settings. B. The coordination study shall include all medium and low voltage classes of equipment from the building or plant service protective devices down to and including the largest rated device in the MCC low voltage motor control center and panelboard. The phase and ground overcurrent protection shall be included, as well as settings of all other adjustable protective devices. C. The undervoltage relay setting shall be carefully selected in order to override momentary voltage drop conditions. In addition, a time delay relay shall be used to help override undervoltage conditions. Switchgear manufacturer shall coordinate with utility company to determine a suitable relay setting and time delay setting to override the distribution system normal/abnormal voltage drop conditions. D. The time-current characteristics of the specified protective devices shall be drawn on Keuffel and Esser log-log paper. The plots shall include complete titles, representative one-line diagram and legends, significant motor starting characteristics, complete parameters of transformers, complete operating bands of low voltage circuit breaker trip curves, and fuses. The coordination plots shall include the types of protective devices selected, proposed relay taps, time dial and instantaneous trip settings, transformer magnetizing inrush and ANSI transformer withstand limits, and significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. All restrictions of the National Electrical Code shall be adhered to and proper coordination intervals and separation of characteristic curves shall be maintained. T he coordination plots for phase and ground protective devices shall be provided on a system basis and on separate log sheets. A sufficient number of separate curves shall be used to clearly indicate the coordination achieved. E. The selection and settings of the protective devices shall be provided separately in a tabulated form listing circuit identification, IEEE device number, current transformer ratios and connection, manufacturer and type, range of adjustment, and FfWH1101 16055-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 .,� SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- POWER SYSTEM STUDIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS -w Contract No.01632 i recommended settings. A tabulation of the recommended power fuse selection shall be provided for the medium voltage fuses where applied in the system. Any discrepancies, problem areas, or inadequacies shall be promptly brought to the Engineer's attention. F. The coordination study shall be calculated by means of computer software package, v SKM. 2.04 ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY A. Perform an arc flash hazard study after the short circuit and protective device coordination study has been completed based upon IEEE Std 1584, "IEEE Guide For Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations." a B. The maximum arc Flash protection boundary allowed inside building shall be limited to a category 3 if the rating is found to be higher than Category 3, Electrical Equipment ` shall be modified to reduce the incident energy level to a Category 3. C. The study shall be calculated by means of computer software package SKM. Pertinent L data, rationally employed, and assumptions in developing the calculations shall be incorporated in the introductory remarks of the study. D. The study shall be in accordance with applicable NFPA 70E, OSHA 29-CFR, Part 1910 Sub part S and IEEE 1584 Standards. E. Determine the following 1. Flash Hazard Protection Boundary. 2. Incident Energy. 3. Working Distance. - 4. Required PPE Level. 5. Shock Hazard Voltage. 6. Limited Approach. - 7. Restricted Approach 8. Prohibited Approach. F. Produce an Arc Flash Warning label listing items 1-8 above arc Flash label size shall be 3"0" minimum. Also include the bus name, system operating voltage, and date of issue. Labels shall be printed in color and be printed on adhesive backed labels. See example below. Provide a minimum 3"x 3"Labe% DANGER i fire Flash and Shod Hazard F ia%h 11retedion Domm ar7': 2,7 R incident EnsrW. 3.2 COWIN, Working Distance: is to Required PPE i.evele i Schack ii*ard!'*page: M VAC United Approach: 10.0 ft Restricted Appraactis 1A it Prohibited Approach: Equip.ID: C831. FTWH1101 16055-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- POWER SYSTEM STUDIES - MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 G. Produce Bus Detail sheets that list the items E 1-8 from above and the following additional items. 1. Bus Name. 2. Upstream Protective Device Name, Type, and Settings. 3. Bus Line to Line Voltage. H. Produce Arc Flash Evaluation Summary Sheet listing the following additional items: 1. Bus Name. 2. Upstream Protective Device Name, Type, and Settings 3. Bus Line to Line Voltage. 4. Bus Bolted Fault. 5. Protective Device Bolted Fault Current. 6. Arcing Fault Current. 7. Protective Device Trip/ Delay Time. 8. Breaker Opening Time. 9. Solidly Grounded Column. 10. Equipment Type. 11. Gap. 12. Arc Flash Boundary. 13. Working Distance. 14. Incident Energy. 15. Required Protective Fire Rated Clothing Type and Class. 2.05 BACK-TO-BACK CAPACITOR SWITCHING STUDY AND ANALYSIS A. The Manufacturer shall prepare a capacitor back-to-back switching study for the addition of power factor correction capacitors at the South Holly High Service Pump Station as shown on the plans. The study shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Texas. B. The Manufacturer shall be responsible for obtaining all information necessary to perform the capacitor back-to-back switching study. C. Provide a back-to-back capacitor switching study for the system. T he study shall examine the cases that are representative of the various combinations of motors running and starting (assuming that no two motors will ever start simultaneously). Show the resultant capacitor inrush current and frequency. Sh ow that the inrush current will not damage capacitors or cause nuisance tripping of capacitor fuses without additional switching transient mitigating technology. D. If the calculations indicate switching transient mitigating technology be added, the Manufacturer shall add the switching transient mitigating technology and calculate the results with additional inductors connected in series with the capacitors. E. Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing the required mitigating technology to alleviate any switching transients that may cause possible damage to the equipment at the new pump station. F. At the pump station, the Manufacturer shall formally recommend what mitigating means are required, if any, to alleviate the damaging transients caused by the back- to-back switching of the capacitor banks. The Manufacturer shall conduct real time FrWH1101 16055-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 lip SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- POWER SYSTEM STUDIES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 T field measurements such as voltage monitoring, etc. as required to evaluate the back- to-back switching transients and harmonics that may be occurring. The Manufacturer is responsible for providing all metering devices as required to obtain these measurements. The Manufacturer shall simulate all possible operating scenarios and coordinate with the Owner for taking field measurements. The recommendations shall include a proposed cost from the Manufacturer to make modifications to the existing capacitor banks based on the results of the study. G. The back-to-back capacitor switching study shall be verifiable by hand calculations. The study shall show all steps for calculating and all necessary steps for the study result. Hand calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer as an official submittal. 2.06 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS A. SKM System Analysis Inc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTIVE DEVICE TESTING, CALIBRATION, AND ADJUSTMENT A. The equipment manufacturer shall provide the services of a qualified field Engineer and necessary tools and equipment to test, calibrate, and adjust the protection relays and circuit breaker trip devices as recommended in the power system study. B. As a part of this Contract, the manufacturer's system Engineer shall make one formal presentation in the Owner's office to the Owner's personnel. The presentation shall include all training materials and visual aids. END OF SECTION FrWH1101 16055-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- POWER SYSTEM STUDIES — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16060 ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section provides the guidelines for testing of electrical equipment, cable, protective relays, circuit breakers, motor control centers, motors, and related apparatus to be used for the site interior and exterior electrical distribution system. This specification does not release the Contractor or vendor from any further testing required for safe commissioning of the equipment. All tests shall be completely recorded on forms provided at the end of this section. Tests shall be submitted to Engineer/Owner for approval. B. Contractor will provide and pay the cost of electrical testing by an independent testing firm. Testing firm shall have a minimum of five years of experience in providing acceptance testing for water/wastewater treatment plants. Testing shall be performed per the latest InterNational Electric Testing Association Standards (NETA) standard. This cost will be included in the Contract Bid. C. The Contractor shall immediately correct all deficiencies discovered during testing by the independent firm. The independent testing firm has the final say on the acceptance of the equipment, if testing determined the equipment is deficient, contractor shall be responsible for fixing the deficiency even if the manufacturer said the equipment is satisfactory. D. The Contractor shall update the protective device settings with the final power system study acceptance. ., 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. InterNational Electric Testing Association Standards (NETA) for acceptance testing of Electrical Distribution Apparatus, Publication 2.001, and IEEE Publication No. 141, are hereby made a part of this section, unless otherwise modified herein. B. Related equipment specification in all section of Division 16. C. NETA Maintenance Testing Specifications for electrical power distribution equipment and system (latest edition). 1.03 SUBMITTAL A. The testing result shall be summarized in a f inal report certified by the testing technician. Report shall be submitted per division 1 requirement. B. The report shall include the following section: 1. Description, purpose, basis and scope of work. 2. Field data sheet showing all visual, mechanical and electrical inspection done on the equipment. The data sheet shall show check marks and values of all the testing done and a description of the instrument used for testing. FfWH1101 16060-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 s SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3. A summary of the deficiency, concern, repairs and recommendations. 4. A table showing the final settings of all the adjustable equipment tested. _ S. All the testing values shall be in accordance with the latest NETA standard. C. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. { D. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTS A. All tests, other than Low Voltage Systems and Equipment, shall be supervised by the Engineer/Owner and the contractor. Contractor shall give a one week notice of all scheduled tests to the Engineer/Owner in writing. B. Contractor shall notify the Engineer/Owner of scheduled dates of electrical equipment — installation completion. Equipment testing shall be coordinated at this time by Contractor with Engineer/Owner and appropriate Manufacturer's Representatives. C. Under this specification the Contractor shall perform the electrical tests on specified equipment and as specified under Part 3, Execution. The Contractor shall supply all equipment required to perform all testing responsibilities. T 3.02 EXECUTION A. Preparatory Work } 1. Prior to the testing of any specific piece of equipment, the Contractor shall remove all shipping hardware and inspect for broken or missing parts and proper _ connections in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1. Prior to any electrical testing Contractor shall perform a visual and mechanical inspection as specified in the latest NETA standard. 3.03 DEVICE A. Air switches— Low voltage Electrical Tests a. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to- phase and phase- to-ground for one (1) minute. Test voltage and minimum resistances should be in accordance with NETA Standard. b. Perform contact-resistance test across each switch blade and fuse holder, or perform thermographic survey in accordance with the lastest NETA Standard. FTWHI101 16060-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS T Contract No.01632 B. Switchgear and Switchboard Assemblies 1. Electrical Tests a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with NETA Standard. b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade and fuseholder. c. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase- to-ground with switch closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA Standard whichever is more stringent Cl. Perform an overpotential test on each pole with switch closed. Test each pole-to-ground with all other poles grounded. Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA Standard whichever is more stringent e. Measure fuse resistance. f. Verify cubicle space heater operation. C. Transformers— Dry-type 1. Small Transformers: Dry-Type, Air-Cooled (600 Volt and Below) (less than 100 kVA single-phase or 300 kVA three-phase) a. Inspect for physical damage, broken insulation, tightness of connections, defective wiring, and general condition. b. Thoroughly clean unit prior to making any tests. c. Perform insulation-resistance test. Calculate polarization index. Measurements shall be made from winding-to-winding and windings-to- ground. Test voltages and minimum resistance shall be in accordance with NETA Standard. Results to be temperature corrected in accordance with NETA Standard. Cl. Verify that the transformer is set at the specified tap. D. Cables— low-voltage, 600V maximum 1. Electrical Tests a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low- resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with latest NETA standard. b. Perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 500 volts do for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts do for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. c. Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection. E. Cables— medium-voltage 1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with latest NETA standard. 2. Perform an insulation-resistance test utilizing a megohmmeter with a voltage output of at least 2500 volts. Individually test each conductor with all other conductors and shields grounded. Test duration shall be one minute. 3. Perform a shield-continuity test on each power cable by ohmmeter method. 4. Perform an acceptance test on cables, including terminations and joints, after cable system installation and before the cable system is placed into service. In FTWH1101 16060-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 accordance with ANSI/IEEE 400, ICEA S-93-639/NEMA WC 74, ICEA S-94-649 and ICEA S-97-682, testing can be performed by means of direct voltage (dc), alternating voltage (ac), partial discharge (pd), or very low frequency (VLF). The ' selection can be made only after an evaluation of the alternative methods. Test procedure shall be as follows, and the results for each cable test shall be recorded as specified herein. Test voltages shall not exceed 80 percent of cable TM manufacturer's factory test value or the maximum test voltage in latest NETA standard. a. Insure that the input voltage to the test set is regulated. b. Current-sensing circuits in test equipment, when available, shall measure only the leakage current associated with the cable under test and shall not include internal leakage of the test equipment. c. Record wet- and dry-bulb temperatures or relative humidity and temperature. d. Test each cable section individually. e. Test each conductor individually with all other conductors grounded. Ground all shields. f. Terminations shall be adequately corona-suppressed by guard ring, field reduction sphere, or other suitable method, as necessary. g. Insure that the maximum test voltage does not exceed the limits for terminators specified in ANSI/IEEE 48, IEEE 386, or manufacturer's specifications. h. Raise the conductor to the specified maximum test voltage and hold for 15 minutes. Refer to latest NETA standard. i. If performed by means of direct voltage (dc), reduce the test set potential to zero and measure residual voltage at discrete intervals. j. Apply grounds for a time period adequate to drain all insulation stored - charge. k. Spliced cables (new to existing) 5. When new cables are spliced into existing cables, the acceptance test shall be L performed on the new cable prior to splicing in accordance with latest NETA standard. 6. After test results are approved for new cable and the splice is completed, an insulation-resistance test and a shield-continuity test shall be performed on the length of new and existing cable including the splice. F. Switches, Vacuum, Medium Voltage 1. Electrical Tests a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted electrical connections with -- a low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable. b. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. c. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase- ` to-ground with switch closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA Standard d. Perform vacuum bottle integrity (overpotential) test across each vacuum bottle with the contacts in the open position in strict accordance with manufacturer's published data. Do not exceed maximum voltage stipulated for this test. Provide adequate barriers and protection against x-radiation FrWH1101 16060-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 during this test. Do not perform this test unless the contact separation of each interrupter is within manufacturer's tolerance. (Be aware that some do high-potential test sets are half-wave rectified and may produce peak voltages in excess of the manufacturer's recommended maximum.) e. Remove a sample of insulating liquid, if applicable, in accordance with ASTM D 923. Sample shall be tested in accordance with the referenced standard. (i) Dielectric breakdown voltage: ASTM D 877 (ii) Color: ASTM D 1500 (iii) Visual condition: ASTM D 1524 f. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential shall be 500 volts do for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts do for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components, follow manufacturer's recommendation. g. Perform an overpotential test in accordance with manufacturer's published data. h. Verify open and close operation from control devices, if applicable. G. Circuit Breakers, Vacuum, Medium-Voltage 1. Electrical Tests a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with the latest NETA Standard. b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase- to-ground with circuit breaker closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published .. data or the latest NETA Standard. c. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. d. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on trip and close coils in accordance with the latest NETA Standard. e. Verify trip, close, trip-free, and antipump functions. f. Trip circuit breaker by operation of each protective device. - g. Perform vacuum bottle integrity (overpotential) test across each vacuum bottle with the breaker in the open position in strict accordance with manufacturer's published data. Do not exceed maximum voltage stipulated - for this test. Provide adequate barriers and protection against x-radiation during this test. Do not perform this test unless the contact displacement of each interrupter is within manufacturer's tolerance. (Be aware that some do high-potential test sets are half-wave rectified and may produce peak voltages in excess of the breaker manufacturer's recommended maximum.) h. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential shall be 500 volts do for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts do for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components, follow manufacturer's recommendation. i. Perform an overpotential test in accordance with manufacturer's published data. j. Test instrument transformers in accordance with the latest NETA Standard. H. Surge Arresters, Surge Protection Devices (Low and Medium Voltage): FfWH1101 16060-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 s SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1_ Electrical Tests a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- _. resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with NETA Standard. b. Perform an insulation-resistance test at voltage levels in accordance with NETA Standard. c. Test grounding connection in accordance with NETA Standard. I. Circuit Breakers—Air, Insulated Case/Molded Case 1. Electrical Tests a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with lateset NETA standard. a b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase- to-ground with the circuit breaker closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data or latest NETA standard. c. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. d. Perform adjustments for final setting in accordance with coordination study. e. Determine long-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. f. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. g. Determine ground-fault pickup and time delay by primary current injection. — h. Determine instantaneous pickup by primary current injection. i. Perform minimum pickup voltage test on shunt trip and close coils in accordance with latest NETA standard. j. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, and antipump function. R k. Verify operation of charging mechanism. J. ircuit breakers—Air, low voltage, power Electrical Tests a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with latest NETA standard. — b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase- to-ground with the circuit breaker closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data or latest NETA standard. c. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. d. Make adjustments to the trip settings in accordance with the coordination — study. e. Determine minimum pickup current by primary current injection. _ f. Determine long-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. g. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. h. Determine ground-fault pickup and time delay by primary current injection. L Determine instantaneous pickup by primary current injection. j. Perform minimum pickup voltage test on shunt trip and close coils in accordance with latest NETA standard. FfWH1101 16060-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 k. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip, and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, antipump function, trip unit battery condition, and reset all trip logs and indicators. I. Verify operation of charging mechanism. K. Protective Relays 1. Electrical Tests a. Perform insulation-resistance test on each circuit-to-frame. Do not perform this test on solid-state devices. b. Perform the following tests on the nominal settings specified by the Owner/user's electrical Engineer: (i) Pickup parameters on each operating element. (ii) Timing tests at two (2) or more points on time-current curve. (iii) Pickup target and seal-in units. (iv) Special tests as required to check operation of restraint, directional and other elements per manufacturer's instruction manual. (v) Conduct tests to verify satisfactory performance of each control feature. (vi) Electrically confirm that CT and VT secondary circuits are intact. L. Instrument Transformers 1. Electrical Tests —Current Transformers a. Electrically confirm that CT secondary circuits are intact. b. Perform a ratio verification test of each current transformer. This shall be performed using the voltage method or current method in accordance with ANSI C57.13.1 (IEEE Guide for Field Testing of Relaying Current Transformers). c. Perform insulation-resistance tests on current transformer secondary winding. Value of test voltage on secondary wiring shall be 1000 volts do for one (1) minute. Do not perform this test with solid-state devices connected. 2. Electrical Tests—Voltage Transformers a. Perform insulation-resistance tests on voltage transformers, winding-to- winding and windings-to-ground. Value of test voltage on secondary wiring shall be 500 volts do for one (1) minute. Do not perform this test with solid- state devices connected. b. Electrically confirm proper secondary voltage. c. Perform a d ielectric withstand test on the primary windings with the secondary windings connected to ground. The do dielectric voltage shall be in accordance with NETA Standard. M. Metering 1. Electrical Tests a. Check calibration of meters at all caradinal points. b. Calibrate watthour meters to within manufacturer's published accurance. c. Verify all instrument multipliers. d. Electrically confirm that CT and VT secondary circuits are intact. FrWH1101 16060-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 �► SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 N. Grounding Systems 1. Electrical Tests a. Perform fall-of-potential test or alternative per IEEE Standard No. 81-1991 on the main grounding electrode or system. b. Perform point-to-point test to determine the resistance between the main — grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and/or derived neutral points. O. Ground-fault protection systems 1T Electrical Tests a. Measure the system neutral to ground insulation resistance with the neutral disconnect link temporarily removed. Replace neutral disconnect link after testing. Notify equipment Owner or operator of any improper neutral to ground connections detected. b. Measure insulation resistance of the control wiring at 1000 volts do for 1 minute. If necessary, disconnect the solid state components. c. Perform pickup tests as follows using primary injection. (i) Verify the relay does not operate at 90% of the set pickup current. (ii) Determine the pickup current of the relay and verify that this current is no greater than 125% of the setting. Pickup must not be greater than R 1200 amperes. d. For summation type systems utilizing phase and neutral CT's, verify proper polarities by applying current to each phase-neutral CT pair. This test also applies to molded case brakers utilizing an external neutral CT. (i) Relay should operate when current direction is the same relative to polarity marks in the two CT's. — (ii) Relay should not operate when current direction is opposite relative to polarity marks I the two CT's. e. Measure time delay of the relay at 150% of pickup or greater. — f. Verify the system is able to trip with control voltage at 55% of rated for systems utilizing ac control power and 80% of rated for systems utilizing do control power. g. Verify operation of zone interlock systems by simultaneously injecting current at the interlocked relays and monitoring the control signals. P. ABC motors 1, Electrical Tests —Induction Motors a. Perform insulation-resistance tests in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 43. (i) Motors larger than 200 horsepower: Test duration shall be for 10 minutes with resistances tabulated at 30 s econds, one (1) mi nute, and 10 — minutes. Calculate polarization index. (ii) Motors 200 horsepower and less: Test duration shall be for one (1) minute with resistances tabulated at 30 and 60 seconds. Calculate the v dielectric absorption ratio. FfWHI101 16060-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS T Contract No.01632 b. Perform do overpotential tests on motors rated at 1000 horsepower and greater and at 4000 volts and greater in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 95. c. Perform insulation power-factor or dissipation-factor tests. d. Perform surge comparison tests. e. Perform insulation-resistance test on pedestal per manufacturer's instructions. f. Perform insulation-resistance test on surge protection device in accordance with NETA Standard. g. Test motor starter in accordance with NETA Standard prior to re-energizing the motor. h. Check resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits for conformance with drawings. Check that metering or relaying devices using the RTD's are of the proper rating. i. Check that the motor space heater is operating. j. Perform a rotation test to insure proper shaft direction if the motor has been electrically disconnected. k. Measure running current and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full-load amperes. I. Perform vibration tests: - (i) Motors larger than 200 horsepower: Perform vibration base line test. Amplitude shall be plotted versus frequency. (ii) Motors 200 horsepower and less: Perform vibration and amplitude test. Q. Motor Control Center/Motor Starters, Medium Voltage 1. Electrical Tests a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with the latest NETA Standard b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase- to-ground with starter closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data and NETA Standard whichever is more stringent. Perform insulation-resistance tests on contactor(s), phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase, and across the open contacts for one minute in accordance with the latest NETA Standard c. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential shall be 500 volts do for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts do for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components, follow manufacturer's recommendation. d. Perform system function test in accordance with latest NETA standard. e. Test control power transformers in accordance with the latest NETA Standard f. Perform an overpotential test in accordance with manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer has no recommendation for this test, it shall be in accordance with the latest NETA Standard g. Perform vacuum bottle integrity test(overpotential), if applicable, across each vacuum bottle with the contacts in the open position in strict accordance with manufacturer's published data. Do not exceed maximum voltage stipulated for this test. FfWH1101 16060-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 r- SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 h. Perform contact resistance tests. i. Measure blowout coil circuit resistance. j. Measure resistance of power fuses. k. Energize contactor using an auxiliary source. Adjust armature to minimize operating vibration where applicable. ti I. Test motor protection devices in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's data, use the latest NETA Standard m. Test starting transformers, if applicable, in accordance with the latest NETA Standard n. Test starting reactors, if applicable, in accordance with the latest NETA Standard o. Verify operation of cubicle space heater. R. Motor control centers/Motor starters, Low Voltage 1, Electrical Tests a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with NETA Standard. b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase- to-ground with starter closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data and NETA Standard whichever is more stringent. c. Measure insulation resistance of each control circuit-to-ground. d. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ti ground. Applied potential shall be 500 volts do for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts do for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components, follow manufacturer's recommendation. e. Test motor protection devices in accordance with manufacturer's published data and NETA Standard whichever is more stringent. f. Test circuit breakers in accordance with NETA Standard. - g. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices. S. Type Power Factor Correction Capacitor: t Electrical test 2. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter, in accordance with latest NETA standard. - 3. Perform winding-to-ground insulation-resistance tests. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use latest NETA standard. - 4. Measure winding resistance. 5. Perform overpotential tests on each winding-to-ground. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 16060-10 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the project shall be built, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension and shear force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of 3 times the applied force. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 316 stainless steel slotted support systems. B. Record data: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer Licensed in the state where the project is constructed. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations (The dead load, live load, wind and allowable capacity) for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Type 316 stainless steel slotted channel system and all bolts to be type 316ss. 3. Equipment supports and connections detail. C. Welding certificates. D. Field Test Report. E. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. F. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. FTWH1101 16073-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Contract No.01632 1.04 Q ALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/DIAM, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Y Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS ~ A. Use only stainless steel 316 components for support, anchorage and attachment components. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube &Conduit. ' b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed r for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: 316 Stainless Steel only. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Adhesive Anchor Systems: Wedge-type 316 Stainless Steel, for use in hardened - portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Hilti Inc. only. - FTWH1101 16073-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR •- MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Contract No.01632 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Wedge-type 316 Stainless Steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Hilti Inc. only. 3. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: 316 Stainless Steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Hilti Inc. only. 4. Concrete Inserts: 316 Stainless Steel, Slotted support system units. 5. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: 316 Stainless Steel, type suitable for attached structural element. 6. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. 316 Stainless Steel Toggle Bolts: 316 Stainless Steel. 7. Hanger Rods: 316 Stainless Steel. G. Cast aluminum one-hole clam conduit supports are not acceptable. 2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metals" for 316 Stainless Steel shapes and plates. C. All outdoor equipment rack shall be provided with canopy to protect the equipment for being overheated by the sun. Canopy shall extend at a minimum 1 foot in front of the equipment enclosure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for conduit as required by NECA 1 Table 1 when the maximum spacing is less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with 316 Stainless Steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. D. 316 Stainless Steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits may be used for 1- 1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION F WH1101 16073-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Contract No.01632 A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. All supports and fastening devices shall be stainless steel 316. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so n strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 300 lb.D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1, To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2, To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts or Adhesive Anchor Bolt. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Adhesive Anchor System provided with lock washers and nuts shall be used in existing normal weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete slabs or wall less than 4 inches thick. 5, Expansion Anchor Bolt can be used for concrete thickness is less than 4 inches to meet minimum 6, To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock -- washers and nuts 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount } cabinets, panel boards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint wind strength and anchorage — requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations to avoid reinforcing bars. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metals" for site-fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. FTWH1101 16073-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WfP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR MOTOR AND$WITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Contract No.01632 3.04 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 6 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 4000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast- in-Place Concrete." C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturers written instructions. 3.05 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 9 "Finishes" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair coating to comply with ASTM A780. 3.06 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Stands: Field mounted disconnects, pushbutton control stations, etc, shall be mounted on steel stands as shown on the Drawings. Where clearance requirements for stands may not be maintained, the Engineer may direct equipment to be wall- mounted adjacent to the drive, but in no case shall the distance from the drive motor to the control station exceed 3-ft. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 16073-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section specifies the furnishing and installation of electrical raceway systems. 1. Conduit: a. Rigid aluminum conduit. b. PVC-coated rigid aluminum conduit. c. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. d. PVC Schedule 40 conduit. 2. Wireways. r 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC) 2. UL 1 - Safety Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit 3. UL 5 - Safety Standard for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings 4. UL 651 - Standard for Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings 5. UL 870 - Safety Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings 6. NEMA RN 1 - PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 8. UL 6 and 614 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit 9. UL 360 - Liquid-tight Flexible Steel Conduit 10. UL 467 - Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment 11. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code 12. NFPA 70E - National Fire Protection Association 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, detailed catalog information or drawings describing electrical and physical characteristics of all equipment specified. B. Submittal shall be clearly marked showing only equipment provided. Mark through equipment option not provided. C. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. D. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. FfWH1101 16110-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- RACEWAYS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: 1. Conduit: Rigid copper free aluminum (alloy 6063-Ti) conduit (RAC). 2. Fittings: For RAC use threaded aluminum. 3. Listing: UL 6A. 4. Acceptable RAC Manufacturers: Allied Tube and Conduit, Consolidated Aluminum Corporation, Kaiser, V.A.W., Reynolds. 5. Acceptable Fittings Manufacturers: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Midwest, OZ/Gedney, Raco and listed conduit manufacturers. B. PVC-Coated Rigid aluminum Conduit: 1. Conduit: Rigid aluminum conduit plus a factory-applied, 40-mil-thick covering of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) bonded to the metal, and 2 mil polyurethane coating on the inside. 2, Fittings: Same as aluminum conduit fittings plus a factory-applied, 40-mil-thick covering of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) bonded to the metal. 3, Listing: UL 6. 4. Acceptable Conduit and Fittings Manufacturers: Killark, KorKap, OCAL, Perma- cote, Plasti-bond and Robroy Industries. C. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Conduit: Spiral-wound, square-locked, aluminum plus a bonded outer jacket of PVC. 2. Fittings: Compression sealed type aluminum. 3. Listing: UL 467 for fittings. 4. Acceptable Conduit Manufacturers: Allied tube and Conduits, Anaconda, Anamet, Liquatite. 5. Acceptable Fittings Manufacturers: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Midwest, OZ/Gedney, Raco, and listed conduit manufacturer. D. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: 1. Non-metallic rigid conduit made of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) manufactured in accordance with the National Electrical Code UL 651 and NEMA TC-2. 2. Fittings shall also be non-metallic. 3. Acceptable conduit and fittings manufacturers: Allied Tube and Conduit, Carlon, CertainTeed Products, Electri-Flex, Heritage Plastics Central. E. Explosion Proof Seal and Fitting 1. Conduit seal: Explosion proof, aluminium conduit filling with fiber and compound as define by NEC Article 500 and as manufactured by Crouse -Hinds or Appleton. 2. Explosion proof fittings: aluminium fittings; flexible coupling to match the hazard as defined by NEC Article 500 and as manufactured by Appleton or Crouse-Hinds. 3. Explosion proof conduits and fillings shall be rated for 40% fill. F. Bushing: High impact, thermosetting, phenolic insulation; 150 degrees C; as manufactured by Appleton "BBUH", Blackburn, or OZ Gedney type A. FfWH1101 16110-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- RACEWAYS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 G. Ground bushings: Conduit grounding bushings shall consist of a insulated throat conduit bushing with an attached aluminum set screw lug. Grounding bushing shall comply with Fed. Spec. W-F-408b and W-W-0581d, UL Standards 514B and 467, and shall be Crouse Hinds Lazy Lug or approved equal. H. Locknuts: Stainless Steel as manufactured by Appleton. I. Hubs: 1. Cast aluminum, with broad flat surfaces with gripping teeth on both sides of conduit entry. Hub portion on exterior side of entry shall contain "0" ring for watertight seal of conduit entry. Hubs shall be Myers Hub, Appleton or Efcor. J. Conduit through-wall and floor seal: PVC coated malleable aluminum body with oversized sleeves, sealing ring, pressure clamp and rings and sealing grommet; hex head cap screw, as manufactured by OZ Gedney, type FSK. K. Smoke and fire seals: Material shall be intumescent, one (1) part (requiring no mixing) and capable of expanding up to a minimum of eight (8) times. Material shall be U.L. classified with a fire rating equal to or greater than the penetrated number. Products to be in caulk, putty, wrap strip, sheet, or access kit foam and shall be 3M "Fire Barrier". L. Conduit drains: Conduit drains shall be Crouse Hinds ECD Universal, or approved equal. M. Expansion Joints: Hot-dipped, galvanized, malleable iron with bonding jumpers. Linear expansion fittings shall be OZ Gedney Zx for rigid, metal conduit or Appleton "XJ" series. Combination linear and deflection expansion fittings shall be OZ Gedney type AXDX. N. Threaded nipples: As manufactured by Allied, Triangle or Steel Duct. Conduit nipples shall have two (2) independent sets of threads. Running threads shall not be used. Utilize the conduit union when joining two (2) fixed conduits in a continuous run. 0. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated, sectional floor and ceiling plates, as manufactured by Crane No. 10. P. Accessories: Reducers, washer, etc., shall be stainless steel. Q. Weatherheads: Weatherheads shall be threaded aluminum for threaded rigid conduit application and shall not be a clamp type. Weatherheads shall be Crouse Hinds series F, O-Z type 17 or Appleton Series F. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Minimum Trade Size: 3/4 inch, except that 1/2-inch flexible metal conduit may be used in lengths not exceeding 72 inches for tap conductors supplying lighting fixtures and for switch legs. The minimum size for underground conduit shall be 11/2" inch. FTWH1101 16110-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 -r SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- RACEWAYS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Conduit sizes, where not indicated, shall be N.E.C. code-sized to accommodate the number and diameter of wires to be pulled into the conduit. C. Plastic coated metallic conduit lengths shall be joined with threaded metallic coupling that shall be each equipped with a 40 mil thickness sleeve that shall extend over the threads of the joined conduit. Each joint shall be watertight. D. Conduit runs made in concrete pours or surface-mounted runs that are attached to the structure, shall be equipped with an expansion/deflection fitting where they cross an - expansion joint, and at every 100 feet. E. All conduit runs shall be watertight over their lengths of run. Slope conduits such that they drain, and install drain fitting as required to remove condensation from the conduit. F. Install a drain fitting for all conduits subject to condensation. Condensation water shall never enter electrical or instrumentation enclosure. G. Plastic jacketed flexible metal conduit shall be used to connect wiring to motors, limit - switches, bearing thermostats, and other devices that may have to be removed for servicing. Unless otherwise indicated, maximum lengths of flex shall be thirty (30'1 inches. H. All raceways shall be swabbed clean after installation. There shall be no debris left inside. All interior surfaces shall be smooth and free from burrs and defects that would injure wire insulation. I. Application of Conduit Types: 1. Provide PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit bends for all PVC conduits bends. Only factory bended long sweep elbow are acceptable. 2. Exposed conduits inside dry ventilated areas, outdoors in non-corrosive atmosphere shall be rigid aluminum. Aluminum shall not come in contact with -� concrete at any point. 3- Exposed conduits in areas where chemicals are stored, handled, or utilized shall be PVC coated aluminum. 4. Exposed conduits in high humidity, non-ventilated areas, constant or frequency wet areas, corrosive atmosphere areas the conduit shall be PVC coated aluminum. 5� At the transition from PVC to rigid aluminum conduit, provide a 12"section of PVC coated aluminum conduit with a minimum of 6-inches into the concrete. The PVC coated aluminum conduit shall be per the specification, field wrapping or applying by spray shall not be acceptable. 3. Holes for raceway penetration into sheet metal cabinets and boxes shall be accurately made with an approved tool. Cutting openings with a torch or other device that produces a jagged, rough cut will not be acceptable. K. Preparation: 1. Place conduit or sleeves in the forms of walls and floor slabs for the free passage of wire or conduits. 2. Set conduit or sleeves in place a sufficient time ahead of concrete placement so as not to delay the work. FTWH1101 16110-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- RACEWAYS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3. Apply sealing methods for sleeves through floors and through exterior walls, per details shown on plans. 4. Plugs or caps shall be installed before concrete placement begins. L. Installation Requirements: 1. Metallic Conduits: a. Continuous between enclosures such as outlet, junction and pull boxes, panels, cabinets, motor control centers, etc. b. The conduit must enter and be secured to enclosures so that each system is electrically continuous throughout. c. Where knockouts are used, provide double locknuts, one on each side. d. At conduit terminations, provide insulated bushings for conductor protection. e. Where conduits terminate in equipment having a ground bus, such as in switchgear, motor control centers and panelboards, terminate conduit with an insulated grounding bushing and extend a suitable grounding wire to the ground bus. f. Hubs of the same material shall be used at conduit termination. 2. Run concealed conduit as directly and with the largest radius bends as possible. 3. Run exposed conduit parallel or at right angles to building or other construction lines in a n eat and orderly manner. Conceal conduit in finished areas. Unless otherwise shown, remaining conduit may be exposed. 4. Provide chrome-plated floor and ceiling plates around conduits exposed to view and passing through walls, floors, partitions, or ceilings in finished areas. 5. Select properly sized plates to fit the conduit when securely locked in place. M. Installation Methods: 1. Install each entire conduit system complete before pulling in any conductors. 2. Clean the interior of every run of conduit before pulling in conductors to guard against obstructions and omissions. 3. Cut all joints square, then thread and ream smooth. 4. Bends: a. Make bends with standard elbows or conduit benders in accordance with the NEC. b. Make field bends using equipment designed for the particular conduit material and size involved. Particularly PVC coated so as not to damage coating c. PVC coated field bend not acceptable. d. Bends must be free from dents or flattening. e. Use no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any run between terminals and cabinets, or between outlets and junction boxes or pull boxes. 5. Conduit bodies may be used in lieu of conduit elbows where ease of installation and appearance warrants their use. Conduit bodies larger than 1-inch may be used only where approved. 6. Fastenings: Securely fasten and support exposed conduit to framing using stainless steel unistrut and straps of same material as unistrut with 316 stainless steel fastening hardware. FrWH1101 16110-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- RACEWAYS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 7, Provide a No. 30 nylon pulling line in conduits in which wiring is not installed under this work, such as telephone, signal, and similar systems. Identify both ends of the line by means of labels or tags reading "Pulling Line." Also, state the panel the conduit originated from. Apply write-on identification to empty conduits to identify each conduit as to terminus of other end and also to identify trade size of conduit. 8. Suitably cap conduit during construction to avoid water, dirt and trash entrance. 9. Use expansion-deflection fittings on conduit crossing structural expansion joints and on exposed conduit runs of more than 100 feet or where necessary. Provide bonding jumpers across fittings in metal raceway systems. Conduit runs made in concrete pours or surface-mounted runs that are attached to the structure, shall be equipped with an expansion/deflection fitting where they cross an expansion joint, and at every 100 feet. 1 . Use expansion-deflection fittings on all conduit runs that transition from underground to above ground within 12"of grade level. } 1 . With a coupling, terminate concealed conduit for future use at structural surfaces. Install a pipe plug flush with the surface. 12. Openings around electrical penetrations of fire-resistance rated walls, partitions, floors or ceilings shall maintain the fire resistance rating using approved methods. See NEC 300-21. Fire barrier shall be 3M 2001 RW silicone RN foam or approved equal. 13- Conduits shall be installed with uniform slope which will permit drainage toward manholes, pull boxes, or building walls. Utilize conduit drain as require to remove condensate in the conduits. 14. Seal all conduits with pliable sealant such as "Duraseal" where entering boxes, manholes, switchgear, motor control centers, panelboards, enclosures, etc. 15. PVC coated conduit shall be installed by certified installer. PVC coated conduit installation shall follow manufacturer recommendation. 16. All termination at an enclosure shall be made from the bottom of the enclosure, no overhead penetrations are allowed. When conduits are located above the enclosure route the conduit at the same height as the bottom of the enclosure, install a drip lane at the end of the conduit and use flexible conduit to terminate at the bottom of the enclosure. N. Hazardous Areas 1. Install conduit seals at all penetrations to hazardous area, as define by the NEC. LL Install additional seal-type fittings within the hazardous area in accordance with the requirements of the NEC Article 500. 2. Install dam and sealing compound per the Seal Manufacturer's instructions. 3. Provide flexible conduit which is listed for use in hazardous areas. Conduit, flexible conduit fittings and all other materials shall be listed for use in Class 1, Division 1 or 2 Group D atmosphere. 3.02 WIREWAYS A. Installation 1. Install wireways, where shown, according to NEC Articles, 376 and 378. FfWH1101 16110-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- RACEWAYS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2. Limit capacity to a maximum of thirty (30) current carrying conductors including neutrals at any cross section of the wireway with 20% conductor fill at any cross sectional area. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 16110-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- RACEWAYS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16111 CABLE TRAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Furnish and install cable trays systems, including all hardware and accessories. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cable trays shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with NEMA VE- 1, ASTM, and the National Electrical Code Article 392. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Cable trays shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor, complete with all fittings, accessories, and supports to form a complete system as herein specified and indicated on the Plans. 1.04 STORAGE A. Store products specified in this section in a dry location. Following installation, protect products from the effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Approved manufacturers are B-Line, Husky or approved equal. All components shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Cable trays shall be heavy-duty, ladder type aluminum 6063. Tray side rails shall have 3/4-inch flanges with 1-inch by 13/16-inch minimum deep rungs, spaced on 9-inch centers and welded into side rails. Trays shall have a minimum depth of six (6) inches. Tray sections shall be 12 feet in length. B. All cable tray bends shall have a minimum 12-inch radius bend, but not less than the minimum bending radius of the largest cable. C. Cable trays shall be provided with metallic covers where mechanical protection is required. Covers shall be grounded. D. Barriers strips shall be provided 4-inches high and in 10-foot sections where required and where indicated on the Plans. Horizontal barriers shall be slotted for curvature flexibility. Vertical barriers shall be factory formed to the required radius and length. Self-tapping screws shall be used for securing barriers in place. FTWH1101 16111-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CABLE TRAYS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 E. Cable Firestop Material shall be fiberglass blanket with noncombustible binder, manufactured by Owns Coming or approved equivalent. Conduit sealant material shall be Johns-Manville Duxseal, or approved equivalent. F. Tray systems shall be complete with all splice plates, expansion joints, hardware, covers, and cover clips, where specified for a complete system. Covers, where } required, shall be flanged type in standard lengths and in configurations to fit all width of bends, tees, etc. Cover clips shall be thumb type. Connectors for joining trays shall develop the full strength and rigidity of the run, and shall not introduce any sharp edges or corners. Bolt ends and nuts shall not be located inside cable tray. Lock washers shall be used with bolts and nuts. Cable trays shall be bolted at each penetration provided for by the cable tray manufacturer. All nuts, bolts, washers, and all thread shall be 316 stainless steel. G. At 12-foot spans, 12-inch cable trays with 3 inches usable fill depth shall sustain a _ working (allowable) load of 25 lbs. per linear foot, 18 and 24-inch cable trays with 3 or 5 inches usable fill depth shall sustain a working load of 45 lbs. per linear foot, and 30 and 36-inch cable trays with 5 inches usable fill depth shall sustain a working load of _ 55 lbs. per linear foot. For these loading conditions, the cable trays shall have a safety factor of 2 when tested in accordance with NEMA load test VE13.01. In addition to the loads specified above, trays should be able to withstand a concentrated load of 200 pounds at mid-span, at the center of the rung or on either side rail. The safety factor R for this load condition shall be at least 1.5, based on the ultimate capacity of the tray of any of its components as determined by test in accordance with NEMA load test VE13.01. - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The installation shall conform to Article 392 of the National Electrical Code and NEMA VE.1, the manufacturer's shop drawings and recommendations, and in accordance } with drawing details and field conditions. Cable trays shall be grounded in accordance with NEC. B. Cable trays shall be insulated from stainless steel hangers or structures by using nylon pads at least 1/8-inch thick to prevent galvanic corrosion. 3.02 CABLE TRAYS A. Cable trays shall not be walked upon by any personnel, and care shall be exercised _ during erection to prevent deformation. Additional supports shall be provided if necessary. 3.03 FIELD CUTTING A. Field cutting shall be accomplished as necessary, all sharp edges shall be ground smooth where rungs or side channels must be cut or removed. FTWH1101 16111-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CABLE TRAYS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.04 TRAY EXPANSION JOINTS A. Trays shall have expansion joint splice plates installed at intervals not exceeding 50 feet of straight runs. Expansion joint splice plates shall also be installed at tees and crosses. Trays shall be supported within one foot maximum of each side of the gap. The gap between the tray ends shall be based on a temperature at the time of installation and the temperature extreme, a maximum of 140°F. and minimum of 45°F. Keamalex gritless inhibitor #30584-22, or equal, shall be used on all sliding surfaces of expansion joints. 3.05 BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS A. Expansion joint splice plates shall also be installed whenever the cable tray crosses a building expansion joint. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRAY EXPANSION JOINTS A. When tray expansion joints are installed, the tray shall be firmly affixed close to the midpoint between expansion joints or to the nearest 90 degree bend. This shall be done to prevent the tray from possibly creeping to one end or the other. 3.07 TRAY EXPANSION JOINT GROUNDING A. Expansion joint grounding and tray grounding shall be according to Grounding and as shown on the tray drawings. Trays shall be grounded at both ends and at least every 50 feet. 3.08 CABLE TRAY IDENTIFICATION A. Cable tray identification shall be as specified in Identifications. 3.09 CABLE TRAYS AND SUPPORTS A. Cable trays and supports shall be installed as indicated on the Plans. Cable trays shall be supported every six feet and at all fittings. 3.10 CABLE LENGHTS _y A. Long low voltage cable lengths shall be installed using cable rollers and basket grips and tools designed specifically for this purpose, with care being taken not to exceed pulling tensions and bending radii recommended by the manufacturer of the cable. Short lengths of low voltage cable may be laid in place without special tools. 3.11 CABLE TIES A. Cables shall be fastened in place with plastic Ty-Raps as manufactured by Thomas and Betts, approximately every 5 feet for straight horizontal runs and every 12 inches on radii and vertical bends. 3.12 CABLE TRAY FIRESTOPS A. Cable tray firestops, consisting of fiberglass blankets on both sides of the tray, retained with solid hot-dip galvanized steel covers, shall be installed at locations and in FfWH1101 16111-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CABLE TRAYS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS z Contract No.01632 the manner shown on the Plans. In general, firestops shall be installed where trays pass through walls, ceilings, and floors. Conduit dropouts shall be sealed with Duxseal; vertical firestops shall be sealed with fiberglass. Fiberglass shall also be used to seal any openings around the tray where it passes through floors, walls, or ceilings. 3.13 CHANGES IN TRAY SIZE A. Changes in tray size or direction, crosses, dropouts, etc., shall employ use of standard fittings and standard connectors approved for this purpose. - 3.14 VERTICAL RUNS A. All vertical runs of cable trays shall be provided with ventilated cable tray- covers from the floor line to a point six feet above floor. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 16111-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CABLE TRAYS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS - 600V AND BELOW PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install, complete and ready for operation, electrical conductor systems as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data as per Division 1 - General Provisions, showing all details of materials. B. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. 1.03 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING A. Color-coding of multi-conductor control and instrumentation cable is specified in the individual cable type specification. B. For power conductors, provide all single conductors power cables with integral insulation pigmentation of the designated colors, except conductors larger than No. 6 may be provided with color-coding by wrapping the conductor at each end and at all accessible locations with vinyl tape. Where this method of color-coding is used, wrap at least six full overlapping turns of tape around the conductor covering an area 1-1/2 to 2 inches wide at a visible location. C. Phase A, B, and C implies the direction of positive phase rotation. D. Use owner's current color scheme. If owner does not have a consistent color scheme use the following: Use the following colors: System Conductor Color All Systems Equipment Grounding Green 240/120 Volts Grounded Neutral White 1-Phase, 3-Wire One Hot Leg Black Other Hot Leg Red 208Y/120 Volts Grounded Neutral White 3-Phase, 4-Wire Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue 480Y/277 Volts Grounded Neutral Gray 3-Phase, 4-Wire Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow FTWH1101 16120-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONDUCTORS 600V AND BELOW MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ' A. Use the manufacturer's name, model or catalog number, if for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired only. B. Splices are not acceptable on this project, except at light fixtures and receptacles. 2.02 CONDUCTORS - 600 VOLTS A. Single Conductors 600 Volts and Below: 1f Unless otherwise indicated, all conductors shall be copper and shall be stranded. ` Solid conductors shall not be used. A II conductors with the exception of grounding conductors shall be standard copper. 2. Utilize only conductors meeting applicable requirements of UL 44, UL 1685, IECA S-95-658 (NEMA WC70). 3. Provide conductors with type XHHW insulation except for tray cable. Tray cable shall be type XHHW-2 insulation. - 4. Unless noted otherwise, conductor sizes indicated are based on copper conductors. Do not provide conductors smaller than those indicated. S. Where flexible cords and cables are specified, provide Type STJO, 600 volt, with the number and size of copper conductors indicated. 6. Single Pair (600 Volt No. 16 AWG Twisted, shielded Pair Instrumentation Cable, } Type TC): a. General: Single pair instrumentation cable designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications. Suitable for installation in cable trays, conduit, or other approved raceways. Minimum cable temperature rating shall be 900 C dry locations, 750 C wet locations. b. Individual Conductors: Soft annealed copper, Class B, 7-strand concentric per ASTM B8, 22 AWG, 7-strand copper tinned drain wire. - c. Insulation and Jacket: Each conductor XHHW-2. Pair conductors pigmented black and white. Jacket flame-retardant and sunlight and oil resistant PVC with 45 mils nominal thickness. Shield aluminum/mylar overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. d. Dimension: 0.30 inch nominal OD. e. Manufacturers: Alpha Wire Corporation, Belden, General Cable, The Okonite Company. 7. Single Triad (600 Volt No. 16 Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable, Type TC): a. General: Single triad instrumentation cable designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications. Suitable for installation in cable tray, conduit, or other approved raceways. Minimum cable temperature - rating shall be 900 C dry locations, 750 C wet locations. b. Conductors: Soft annealed copper, Class B, 7-strand concentric per ASTM B8, 22 AWG, 7-strand copper tinned drain wire. c. Insulation and Jacket: Each conductor, XHHW-2 insulation. Triad conductors pigmented black, red, and white. Jacket flame-retardant and sunlight and oil retardant PVC with 45 mils nominal thickness. Shield aluminum/mylar, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. FfWH1101 16120-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONDUCTORS 600V AND BELOW MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 d. Dimensions: 0.32-inch nominal OD. e. Manufacturers: Alpha Wire Corporation, Belden, General Cable, The Okonite Company. 8. Equipment Grounding Conductors: a. Provide stranded copper conductors, as indicated or as required by NEC, for equipment grounding. All grounding conductor shall be stranded copper. b. Provide conductors with green Type XHHW insulation with a minimum thickness of 1/32-inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii. Pulling compound shall be used. Use only UL listed compound compatible with the cable outer jacket and with the raceway involved. B. CONTRACTOR is to provide and install all low voltage (120V, 208V, 480V, etc.) distribution equipment and hardware associated with this project as shown on the plan drawings. C. Tighten screws and terminal bolts using torque type wrenches, and/or drives, to tighten to the inch-pound requirements of the NEC and UL. D. Where single conductors and cables in manholes, hndholes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means such as arc and fireproofing tapes, bundle throughout their exposed length conductors entering from each conduit with nylon, self-locking, releasable, cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 12 inches on centers. 3.02 CONDUCTOR- 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Provide conductor sizes as indicated on the drawings. B. Minimum size for control shall be #14 for individual wire and #16 TSP, TST. Minimum size for power cables shall be #12. C. Use silicone filled pressure connectors. P lace no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure connection. D. Motors connector shall be crimp connectors or kernys varnish carbonic C130. E. Soldered mechanical joints insulated with tape will not be acceptable. F. Vinyl plastic insulating tape for wire and cable splices and terminations shall be flame retardant, 8.5-mil thick minimum, rated for 1050C minimum meeting the requirements of UL 510. Acceptable product 3M-Scotch 88. G. Provide terminals and connectors acceptable for the type of material used. H. Arrange wiring in cabinets, panels, and motor control centers neatly cut to proper length. R emove surplus wire, and bundle and secure in an acceptable manner. FFWH1101 16120-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONDUCTORS 600V AND BELOW MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 Identify circuits entering motor control centers or other control cabinets in accordance with the conductor identification system specified herein. _ I. Terminate control and instrumentation wiring with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in accordance with terminal manufacturer's instructions. Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and instrumentation wiring (except solid thermocouple leads) with insulated, locking-fork compression lugs, Thomas & Betts, Sta-Kon, or equal. 1. For terminals designed to accept only bare wire compression terminations, use only stranded wire, and terminate only one wire per terminal. Tighten terminal screws with torque screwdriver to recommended torque values. _. K. Attach compression lugs with a t ool specifically designed for that purpose which provides a complete, controlled, crimp where the tool will not release until the crimp is complete. Use of plier type crimpers is not acceptable. L. Cap spare conductors and conductors not terminated with UL listed end caps. M. Where conductors pass through holes or over edges in sheet metal, remove all burrs, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors. N. For conductors that will be connected by others, provide at least 6 feet spare conductor in freestanding panels, and at least 2 feet spare in other assemblies. Provide more spare conductor in any particular assembly where it is obvious that more conductor length will be needed to reach the termination point. 3.03 CABLES A. Do not splice without permission of the ENGINEER. Locate splices, when permitted, only in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using terminal strips. B. Where connections of cables installed under this section are to be made to instrumentation and controls, leave pigtails of adequate length for neat bundled type connections. C. Maintaining the integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables is essential to the operation of the control systems. Take special care in cable installation to ensure that grounds do not occur because of damage to the jacket over the shield. D. Cable Placement: 1. Immediately prior to the placement of each cable or cable group, inspect the raceway to determine that installation is complete and that the interior is clean and free of all materials detrimental to the cable or its placement. Group all cable assigned to a particular conduit and pulled simultaneously, using cable grips and acceptable lubricants. 2� Provide adequately sized raceways to accommodate the number and size of cable _ as specified, and in compliance with Article 300 of the National Electric Code. If at any time during the progress of the work raceways appear inadequate to accommodate the assigned cable, notify the Engineer/Owner at once and FTWH1101 16120-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONDUCTORS 600V AND BELOW MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 discontinue further work on the questionable raceway until advised by the Owner as to how to proceed. 3. Carefully check all cable as to size and length before pulling into conduits. Remove and replace cable pulled into the wrong conduit or cut too short at no additional cost to the Engineer/Owner. Do not pull cable removed from one conduit or duct into another conduit or duct without permission of the Engineer/Owner. E. Use woven wire cable grips to pull all low voltage single conductor cable, No. 2/0 and larger, and all low voltage multi-conductor cable. U se pulling loops to pull single conductor cable smaller than No. 2/0. When a cable grip is used for pulling, the arc of the cable covered by the grip plus 6-inches shall be cut off and discarded. F. Insert a reliable non-freezing type of swivel or swivel connection between the pulling ropes and the cable eye, or grip to prevent twisting under strain. G. Do not exceed the maximum pulling tension recommended by the cable manufacturer. Pulling mechanisms of both the manual and power types shall have the rated capacity in tons clearly marked on the mechanism. Whenever the capacity of the pulling mechanism exceeds the recommended pulling tension of the cable as given by the cable manufacturer, a dynamometer shall be used to show the tension on the cable, and the indicator shall be constantly watched. If any excessive strain develops, stop the pulling operation at once and determine and correct the difficulty. 3.04 CONDUCTOR ARC AND FIREPROOFING TAPES A. Use arc and fireproofing tapes on 600 volt single conductors and cables, except those rated Type TC, throughout their entire exposed length at splices in manholes, handholes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations. B. Wrap together as a single cable conductors entering from each conduit. C. Follow tape manufacturer's installation instructions. Secure the arc and fireproofing tape at frequent intervals with bands of the specified glass cloth electrical tape. Make each band of at least two wraps of tape directly over each other. D. Arc and Fireproofing tape shall be 3M Scotch #77 or equal. 3.05 FIELD TESTS A. Instrumentation Cables: After instrumentation cable installation and conductor termination by the instrumentation and control supplier, perform tests witnessed by the ENGINEER to ensure that instrumentation cable shields are isolated from ground, except at the grounding point. Remove improper grounds. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 16120-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONDUCTORS 600V AND BELOW MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16121 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish, install and test the medium voltage cables and accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Medium voltage cables shall meet or exceed the specifications and requirements of the latest Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) and the Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) publications, except as modified by this Section. B. Ethylene-propylene rubber (EPR) insulated cable shall comply with ICEA S-93-639 (NEMA WC 74) AEIC CS-8. C. Cables shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 1072. D. Field testing and commissioning shall be done in accordance with the latest revision of the "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems" published by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA Standard ATS) unless otherwise modified by these specifications. Shall be in accordance with specification Section 16060 Acceptance Testing and Calibration. E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 1. B. Product data sheets. C. Factory and field test reports. D. Cable samples. E. Literature identifying the methods and materials for splicing and termination. F. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The general construction of the cable and the insulation material used shall be similar to that used for cable of the same size and rating in continuous production for at least 15 years and successfully operating in the field in substantial quantities. Upon request, the manufacturer shall submit a copy of his Quality Assurance Manual detailing the quality control and quality assurance measures in place at his facility. FTWH1101 16121-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 ~J B. The manufacturer shall have available for audit detailed descriptions of the method by which his various manufacturing processes and production test are recorded, thus enabling the "traceability" of the completed cable. A II steps in the manufacturing process, from receipt of raw material to the final tests, are to be included. Where multiple records are used, the method for cross-referencing shall be noted. C. Cable shall be UL listed as Type MV-105. D. Minimum insulation level shall be 133%. 1.05 CERTIFICATION A. Each electrician that is to perform medium voltage connection shall show evidence of proper training and certification over the last 5 years. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Check for reels not completely restrained, reels with interlocking flanges or broken flanges, damaged reel covering or any other indication of damage. Do not drop reels from any height. B. Unload reels using a sling and spreader bar. Roll reels in the direction of the arrows shown on the reel and on surfaces free of obstructions that could damage the cable. C. Store cable on a solid, well drained location. Unjacketed armored cable shall be stored indoors. Cover cable reels with plastic sheeting or tarpaulin. Do not lay reels flat. D. Seal cable ends with heat shrinkable end caps. Do not remove end caps until cables are ready to be terminated. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall warrant the cable against failures for a period of 20 years from date of installation and shall remove and replace failed cables at his own expense during this warranty period. - PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The manufacturer's name, the voltage class, type of insulation, thickness of insulation, conductor size, UL listing and date of manufacture shall be printed on the jacket. B. Cables shall be suitable for use in partially submerged wet locations, in non-metallic or metallic conduits, underground concrete encase duct systems and direct buried installation. C. Cables shall be able to operate continuously at a temperature not in excess of 1050C for normal operation, 1400C for emergency overload conditions and 2500C for short circuit conditions. Emergency overloads shall be possible for periods of up to 100 hours. Five 100 hours emergency overload operations within the lifetime of the cable _ shall be possible. FfWH1101 16121-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES - MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 D. Cable shall be shielded unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. Insulation shield shall have 100 % copper tape shield coverage. E. Cables shall have the following physical characteristics in accordance with ICEA, AEIC and UL standards: 1. Conductors: Class B bare compressed or compact soft copper in accordance with ASTM spec B3 and B8 or ASTM B469 and ICEA Part 2, Section 2.1 and 2.5. 2. Conductor shield: The conductor shall be shielded with an extruded semi- conducting thermo setting polymeric layer over the conductor, applied in tandem with and firmly bonded to the insulation. 3. Insulation shield: The insulation shall be covered with an extruded layer of semi- conducting thermosetting material which shall be identified as being semi- conducting. Over this layer shall be applied a helically-wrapped copper tape with 25% overlap. 4. Jacket: The cable shall be provided with a jacket of black sunlight resistant PVC conforming to requirements specified for polyvinyl chloride jacket in ICEA. The thickness shall be in accordance with Table 7 of ICEA. 5. Insulation: Thermosetting ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) compound over an extruded, semi-conducting insulation screen and copper shielding applied directly over the insulation. 6. Minimum installation temperature: minus 10°C. F. Cable installed in cable tray system: 1. Cable installed in cable tray system shall be armored power cable, shielded with EPR insulation. G. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Aetna Insulated Wire. 2. Kerite Company, Inc. 3. General Cable. 4. Okonite Company, Inc. S. Prysmian. 6. Southwire Corporation 2.02 CABLE APPLICATIONS A. 5kV cable. B. Cable type: Single conductor and Multiconductor. C. Insulation level: 5kV - 133 percent, type MV-105. D. Operating voltage: 2400 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz, grounded distribution system. 2.03 CABLE ACCESSORIES A. General 1. The manufacturer shall be able to document a minimum of 5 years successful field experience as well as demonstrating technical life assessment as requested. The manufacturer shall establish and document a Quality Assurance Program implementing suitable procedures and controls for all activities affecting quality. The program shall provide documentation that verifies the quality of production FTWH1101 16121-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 joint kits and traceability back to inspection records, raw material and the original designs and design proof tested joints. _ 2. All material used in terminating medium voltage cables shall be as recommended by the cable manufacturer. Cables shall be terminated in accordance with the kit supplier's drawings. 3. Cable terminations shall meet or exceed IEEE Standard 48, Class I requirements. 4. AEIC CS8 standards for XLP and EPR Insulated Cables. 5. Cable accessories shall be by one manufacturer to assure adequate installer training and application assistance. 6. Cable terminators shall be selected for the application. Elbow and Jacket seal when required be supplied and shall be dead break. 7. Close coordination with switchgear manufacturer and transformer manufacturer shall be done in order to get a complete and operable system. B. Connectors _ 1. Connectors shall be installed with standard industry tooling. All connections of copper stranded wire in size No. 6 AWG through 1000 kcmil shall be made electrically and mechanically secured. The connectors shall have a current x carrying capacity equal to the 5kV and meet UL 486 requirements. The connectors shall be rated for operation through 5kV. The lugs shall be of closed end construction to exclude moisture migration into the cable conductor. _ Connector shall be elastimold, elbows to be dead front or approved equal. C. Electrical Grounding Braid 1. Conducting metal braid shall be woven from 240 strands of 30 AWG tinned copper wires and be capable of carrying fault current comparable to that of 6 AWG copper wire, 3M Corp., Scotchbrand 25 or equal. D. General 1. Cable termination and splicing material shall be as manufactured by Canusa or Raychem or equal. All material used in terminating and splicing medium voltage cables shall be as recommended by the cable manufacturer. Cab les shall be terminated and spliced in accordance with the kit supplier's drawings. 2. Cable terminations shall meet or exceed IEEE Standard 48, Class I requirements. ,. 3, EP insulated cable splices shall be hand wrapped and shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI C119.1 and IEEE 404. 4, Cable accessories shall be by one manufacturer to assure adequate installer _ training and application assistance. 5. The manufacturer shall be able to document a minimum of 5 years successful field experience as well as demonstrating technical life assessment as requested. The manufacturer shall establish and document a Quality Assurance Program ! implementing suitable procedures and controls for all activities affecting quality. The program shall provide documentation that verifies the quality of production joint kits and traceability back to inspection records, raw material and the original designs and design proof tested joints. E. Indoor Cable Termination 5kV - 1. Single conductor shielded cable terminations for indoor applications shall be one piece, track resistant EPDM rubber with top seal and ground strap assemblies. 2. Termination shall have a c urrent rating equal to, or greater than the cable r ampacity. FTWH1101 16121-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3. Termination shall accommodate any form of cable shielding or construction without the need for special adapters. 4. Termination shall be heat shrinkable. 5. Acceptable products: a. Canusa CT Series b. Raychem Corp., HVT Series. F. Outdoor Cable Terminations 5kV �- 1. Single conductor shielded cable terminations for outdoor protected or exposed locations shall be one piece, track resistant silicone rubber with top seal, rain skirt and ground strap assemblies. Cable compartments of outdoor metal clad switchgear shall be considered as outdoor locations. 2. Termination shall have a c urrent rating equal to, or greater than the cable ampacity. 3. Termination shall accommodate any form of cable shielding or construction without the need for special adapters. 4. Termination shall be heat shrinkable 5. Acceptable products: a. Canusa CT Series. b. Raychem Corp., HVT Series. G. Tape Shielded Inline and Tee Cable Splice 1. Splice all shielded cables rated 5,000 Volts or less with conductor sizes ranging from No. 4 to 1,000 Kcmil in accordance with the manufacturer instructions. ` 2. Termination shall be heat traceable, Canusa CG series or Raychem HVS Series. 3. Shielded cable splices shall be capable of normal continuous operations at the rated voltage and current on the cable it is to be used on (5kV maximum). The splice kit shall contain all of the necessary materials required to make three splices including cable preparation materials, such as solvents, rags and abrasive materials. The primary insulating tape shall be an all-voltage linerless tape. A comprehensive step-by-step instruction sheet shall be included with each kit. H. Heat Shrinkable Bus Connection Kits 1. Bus kits shall be capable of insulating bus bars 2-in to 6-in wide and for connection of 1 to 4 cables. Kits shall electrically insulate and environmentally seal the connection and be easily re-enterable. 2. Cable-to-bus bar connection kits shall be rated up to 5kV class and tested in accordance with ANSI C37.20c, Section 5.2.1.4 Test for Bus Bar Insulation and Section 5.2.9 Flame-Retardant Test for Applied Insulation. Kits shall be Raychem Corp., Type HVBC or equal. I. Medium Voltage Heat-Shrinkable Motor Connection Kits. 1. Motor connection kits shall insulate the motor feeder motor lead connection and allow installation within the motor conduit box. 2. Kits shall environmentally seal the connection and be easily re-enterable. Kits shall be Raychem, Type MCK; Canusa CMTK. 1. Lugs and Connectors 1. Copper lugs and connectors shall be crimped with standard industry tooling. All connections of copper stranded wire in size No. 6 AWG through 1000 kcmil shall be made electrically and mechanically secured. The lugs and connectors shall FTWH1101 16121-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 have a current carrying capacity equal to the conductors for which they are rated and meet UL 486 requirements. Lugs larger than 4/0 AWG shall be two-hole lugs _ with NEMA spacing. The lugs and connectors shall be rated for operation through SkV. The lugs shall be of closed end construction to exclude moisture migration into the cable conductor. K. Electrical Grounding Braid 1. Conducting metal braid shall be woven from 240 strands of 30 AWG tinned copper wires and be capable of carrying fault current comparable to that of 6 AWG copper wire, 3M Corp., Scotchbrand 25 or equal. L. Cable Marking Systems 1. A 7-mil, flame retardant, cold and weather-resistant vinyl plastic electrical tape shall be used for phase identification, 3M Corp.; Scotch 35 Tape or equal. Cable tags shall be heat stamped nylon secured by polypropylene cable ties, Thomas & Betts No. TC228-9 or equal. 2.04 PULLING COMPOUNDS A. Pulling compound shall be nontoxic, nonflammable, noncombustible and noncorrosive. The material shall be UL listed and compatible with the cable insulation and jacket. B. Acceptable manufacturers are Ideal Company; Polywater, Inc.; Cable Grip Co. or equal. 2.05 SHOP TESTING L A. Perform manufacturers standard production testing and inspection in accordance with Section 9 of the referenced ICEA standards. If requested by the Engineer, the manufacturer shall submit certified proof of compliance with ICEA design and test standards. B. Provide certified test reports indicating that the cable has passed the following tests: 1. Partial Corona Discharge Test in accordance with AEIC CS8. 2. Vertical tray flame test in accordance with IEEE 1202. f C. After completion of the factory tests, individual pulling eyes shall be installed on single or triplexed conductor length of cable. Pulling eyes shall be suitable for maximum allowable pulling tension on the conductors and they shall be sealed against entrance of water. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Determine the cutting lengths, reel arrangements and total lengths of cable required and shall furnish this data to the cable manufacturer as soon as possible to assure on- time delivery of cable. B. Make use of the field engineering services available from the cable manufacturer. FfWH1101 16121-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cable Installation I. When temperature is below 50 degrees F, cable reels shall be stored at 70 degrees F for at least 24 hours before installation. 2. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii. 3. Pull cables from direction that requires the least tension. 4. Feed cables into raceway with zero tension and without cable crossover at raceway entrance. B. Marking and Identification 1. Plastic nameplates shall be installed in each manhole, pull box and at splice and terminating points. These nameplates shall show the phase and feeder designations and the date when the cable was installed or splice or termination was made. The feeder designation shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Nameplates shall be tied to each cable with self-locking nylon ties. 2. Apply write-on identification labels to wiring wire termination in each instrument junction box. Show wire size, conduit size, and line and load information. Use waterproof plastic write-on labels with nylon tie-wraps. 3. Indentification shall be as specified under Division 16. 3.03 FIELD TESTING A. Field testing shall be performed in accordance with Division 16. B. Immediately notify the Owner and do not energize the cables if any of the following conditions occur: 1. Cable damage. 2. Improper installation or grounding. 3. Shield discontinuity or high resistance. 4. Dielectric absorption ratio and polarization index below 1.5. 5. Abnormal plot of leakage current versus voltage. 6. Defective or Damaged Cables C. The Engineer shall make sole determination of the acceptability of the cables based on the submitted test reports. Do not energize cables until the test reports have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer. D. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the cables, terminations or splices are determined to be damaged or defective, provide the following remedial actions at no additional cost to the Owner: 1. Remove splices and terminations and completely re-test the cables to determine whether the cables are damaged or defective. 2. Remove and replace damaged or defective cables as directed by the Engineer. 3. Remake terminations and splices with new kits. 4. Completely re-test cable, splices and terminations in accordance with Division 16. END OF SECTION FrWH1101 16121-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16130 BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED ` A. Furnish and install outlet boxes, floor boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes and terminal boxes. B. All boxes located outdoors containing heat sensitive equipment shall be factory painted white. .� 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/NEMA Publication No. OS 1 - Cast Aluminum Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports, and Steel Covers. B. ANSI/UL 514 - Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings. C. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, detailed catalog information or drawings describing electrical and physical characteristics of all equipment specified. B. Submittal shall be clearly marked showing only equipment provided. Mark through equipment option not provided. C. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. D. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. T PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES A. Flush Device Boxes: ,T 1. Provide cast aluminum boxes of sufficient size to accommodate wiring devices to be installed at outlet. 2. Extension rings shall not be acceptable. 3. Square or rectangular boxes may be supplied. 4. Unless otherwise noted, provide boxes 3-1/2-inches deep by 4 inches wide. 5. Boxes in hazardous locations shall be NEMA rated for the application. 6. Boxes in contact with masonry or concrete shall be gray steel. FfWH1101 16130-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 •� SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- BOXES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Exposed Device Boxes: Provide FD aluminum boxes for surface mounting in areas having exposed conduit systems. Provide gray steel boxes in areas in contact with masonry or concrete. Coordinate box cover for proper use. C. Boxes for Lighting Fixtures: 1. Provide aluminum octagonal boxes with fixture stud supports and attachments as required to properly support ceiling and bracket-type lighting fixtures. 2. Unless otherwise noted, provide boxes 2 inches deep by 4 inches wide. - 3. Boxes in contact with masonry or concrete shall be grey steel. D. Masonry Boxes: 1. Provide stamp metal masonry boxes. 2. Use boxes with 1-gang capacity in excess of the number of devices to be installed. _ 3. Extension ring covers shall not be acceptable. E. Listing: UL 514. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Appleton, Bowers, Crouse-Hinds, Efcor, Midwest, OZ/Gedney, RACO, Steel City, T& B. 2.02 JUNCTION, PULL AND SPLICE BOXES A. Construction: Provide boxes conforming to NEC Article 314. B. Interior Spaces: Boxes inside dry ventilated area, non-corrosive, shall be NEMA 1 Aluminum at least 4 inches deep. C. Exterior Spaces: NEMA 4 aluminum at least 4 inches deep. D. Box in area where chemicals are stored, handled or utilized shall be NEMA 4X PVC - coated Aluminum or Friberglass. E. Embedded: Provide cast iron type with external recessed flanged cover when cast in concrete. F. Listing: UL 514. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hoffman, Keystone, OZ, Stahlin, Crouse-Hinds. H. Hazardous location: Box shall be NEMA rated for the application. 2.03 TERMINATION CABINETS & BOXES A. Termination cabinets shall be NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel gasketed. Cabinets shall be of sufficient size to adequately contain all terminals, wire-duct, and cables as determined by the CONTRACTOR. Cabinets shall have removable doors (lift-off) not more than 30 i riches wide, and shall be equipped with a three-point locking latch handle. B. Wire terminal blocks shall be Square D Type M Barrier Block system, or equal. FTWH1101 16130-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- BOXES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1. M4/6G or B 22014 AWG 6MM (.234 inch) wide, Grey, Blue, Single Level, 600 volt, 25 amp. 2. M6-8G or B 22-8AWG 8MM (.315 inch) wide, Grey Blue, Single Level, 600 volt, 55 amp. C. The wire terminal block system shall be for DIN rail mounting, and shall include fuse/switch blocks, circuit breaker block, and isolation switches. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hoffman. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate location of all boxes with all other work. B. Verify location of floor boxes with Engineer before installation. —' 3.02 OUTLET BOXES A. Flush Boxes: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, mount all outlet boxes flush within 1/4-inch of the finished wall or ceiling line. 2. Securely fasten outlet boxes in position using clips or other suitable means. 3. Provide plaster covers for all boxes in plastered walls and ceilings. B. Fixture Boxes: Where boxes for suspended lighting fixtures are attached to and supported from suspended ceilings, adequately distribute the load over the ceiling support members. C. Mounting Height: 1. Mounting height of a wall-mounted outlet box means the height from finished floor to horizontal center line of the cover plate. 2. Where outlets are indicated adjacent to each other, mount these outlets in a symmetrical pattern with all tops at the same elevation. 3. Where outlets are indicated adjacent, but with different mounting heights, line up outlets to form a symmetrical vertical pattern on the wall. 4. Verify the final location of each outlet with Engineer before rough-in. 5. Remove and relocate any outlet box placed in an unsuitable location. D. Back-to-Back Boxes: 1. Do not connect outlet boxes back to back unless approval is obtained. 2. Where such a connection is necessary to complete a particular installation, fill the voids around the wire between the boxes with sound insulating material. E. Box Openings: Provide only the conduit openings necessary to accommodate the conduits at the individual location. 3.03 FLOOR BOXES A. Completely envelop floor boxes in concrete except at the top. Increase slab thickness at boxes if required for bottom covering. Adjust covers flush with finished floor. FrWH1101 16130-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 �a SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- BOXES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.04 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be provided to facilitate the installation of cable and wires. "Condulet" type fittings shall not be used in lieu of boxes when the conduit contains wire #4 AWG or larger. B. Installation: 1. Install boxes as required to facilitate cable installation in raceway systems. 2. Generally provide boxes in conduit runs of more than 100 feet. 3. Locate boxes strategically and make them of such shape and size to permit easy pulling of wire or cables. Size boxes in accordance to NEC Article 314.28 requirements.C. Covers: 1. Provide boxes so that covers are readily accessible and easily removable after completion of the installation. 2. Include suitable access doors for boxes above suspended ceilings. 3. Select a practical size for each box and cover. END OF SECTION F WH1101 16130-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WfP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- BOXES - MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install complete lighting and receptacle systems, including lighting fixtures, receptacles, switches, and all accessories and appurtenances as shown on =a the drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings showing complete construction details for all equipment in compliance with Division 1 - General Provisions. B. Submittal shall be clearly marked showing only equipment provided. Mark through equipment option not provided. C. Submit a letter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. D. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wiring Devices shall be in compliance with the National Electrical Code, and shall be constructed in compliance with the Underwriters' Laboratories and shall be Underwriters' Laboratories labeled. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Switches: 1. Wall switches shall be of the heavy-duty specification grade, toggle action, and flush mounting quiet type. 2. Wall switches shall be of the following types and manufacturer, or equal. a. Single Pole: Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 1991I, or Pass and Seymour 20AC1-I, or Leviton 1221-2I. b. Double Pole: Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 1992I, or Pass and Seymour 20AC2-I, or Leviton 1222-2I. c. Three-Way: Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 1993I, or Pass and Seymour 20AC3-I, or Leviton 1223-2I. d. Momentary Contact, 2 Circuit, Center Off: Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 1895I, or Pass and Seymour 1250-I, or Leviton 1256-I. FfWH1101 16140-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- WIRING DEVICES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 e. Weatherproof switch covers shall be Crouse-Hinds rain-tight Type DS with PVC coating where used with aluminum. f. Lock out attachment when used for instrument disconnect shall be NEMA 4X. 3. Switch to be installed in classified area shall be rated for application per NEC 500. B. Receptacles: 1. Wall receptacles shall be 120 volts, single-phase, single or duplex, industrial specification hospital grade, and be of the following types: a. Duplex, 20A, 125V, 2P, 3W: Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 8300I, or Pass and Seymour 9300-HG, or Leviton 8300-I. " b. Ground fault interrupter, lockout type, duplex, 20A, 125V, 2P, 3W: Leviton 7899I. c. Stainless steel indoor mounting plate for GFCI receptacle: A rrow-Hart, l Catalog No. S2G, or Pass and Seymour S-26N, or Leviton 84401-40. d. Weatherproof cover for GFCI receptacle in FS box while in use: Leviton 5997 GY. e. Computer or computer related equipment: Leviton 8380IG, or Pass and Seymour, Catalog No. IG6362ISP, ivory with translucent surge suppressor, 5- 20R, 20A, 125V duplex hospital grade with audible alarm. 2. Receptacles listed as weatherproof shall be provided with a watertight back box and hinged cover. Welding receptacles shall be surface mounted, 30 or 60 ampere, 600 volts, three- phase, with grounding conductors connected through a fourth pole and the shell mounted four feet above the floor. One matching plug with woven grip shall be furnished with each receptacle for the cable size as directed by the OWNER. Receptacles shall be Crouse-Hinds, "Arktite" series, or equal. 4. Receptacles for three-phase dewatering sump pumps shall be similar to welding receptacles. 5. Receptacles to be installed in classified area shall be rated for the application per NEC 500. _ C. 30 amp, 480 Volt Receptacles 1. 30 Amp, 480 Volt receptacles shall be 3 Pole, 4 Wire, grounding pin-and-sleeve type, with circuit breaking capability. a 2. 30 Amp, 480 Volt receptacles shall be Crouse-Hinds, Arktite style 2, Catalog No. ARE 3423 or equal. D. Safety Switches Safety Switches shall be of heavy duty, specification grade. 2. Switch shall be UL listed. 4. Switch shall be NEMA 4X 316ss when located outdoor. 4. Switch shall be NEMA 4X fiberglass when located in a chemical room. - Switch shall be NEMA 4X 316ss when located indoor in a controlled environment unless otherwise noted. 6. Switch located in classified area shall be rated for the application per NEC 500. 7. Switch shall be quick-make, quick-break construction. FfWH1101 16140-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- WIRING DEVICES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 8. Operating handle shall be of box mounted type that directly drives the switch mechanism suitable for padlocking in the off position with up to three padlocks. Switch shall be interlock defeat. 9. The interior shall be easily removable. The wiring gutter shall be clear of any obstructions and moving parts. 10. Fusible switch, fuse selection shall be rated for the application, minimum KAIC rating shall match the protective device on the line side of the switch. 11. Switch shall be provided with grounding kit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Wiring devices must be operating properly at final completion. B. Provide hangers and support members for wiring devices as required for proper installation. C. Provide appurtenances which include stud supports, stems, mounting brackets, frames, and plaster rings. D. Support wiring devices from the building structure, or from furring channels. Furring channels must be a minimum of 1-1/2 inches wide. 3.02 RECEPTACLE AND SWITCH INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights(from the bottom of the device): 1. Mount receptacles 48 inches above finished floor except finished indoor areas. 2. Mount outdoor receptacles at least 24 inches above finished grade. 3. Mount receptacles in control room 12 inches above finished floor. 4. Mount all wall switches 54 inches above finished floor. 5. Mount thermostats 60 inches above floor. B. Boxes: 1. Finished areas such as offices: Flush mounted devices in aluminum boxes. 2. Other areas: Surface mounted cast aluminum metal boxes. C. Weatherproof Receptacle Lift Covers: Install with hinge pin horizontal at top of the finished plate. Provide oversized covers for plug-in devices. D. Install receptacles with grounded blade up. E. Switches and receptacles shall be mounted in 4" x 4" aluminum outlet boxes concealed in the office walls. F. Indoor and outdoor boxes shall be grounded by use of a No. 12 green insulated ground wire run with the wiring per Division 16 specification. END OF SECTION FrWH1101 16140-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- WIRING DEVICES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16151 MEDIUM VOLTAGE PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This specification covers the basic requirements for design, accessories and testing of 4000/2300 V dual rated form wound horizontal, squirrel-cage induction motors. Motors will be operated at 2300V. A total of five horizontal induction motors for the South Holly High Service Pump Station shall be provided: One 900 hp and four 2000 hp induction motors to replace the existing synchronous motors. The motors are to be installed on existing pump bases at the pump station. All five motors are to be from the same manufacturer. B. The Contractor shall install the motors under the supervision and guidance of the motor manufacturer's representative. The Contractor shall supply the coupling, modify the existing baseplates and align the new motors with the existing pumps. C. Work shall include pre-removal field inspection and performance test, installation inspection milestones, startup services, post start-up field inspection and performance test, training and warranty services, in accordance with Division 1. D. The Contractor/Motor Manufacturer shall field verify all necessary baseplate and pump shaft dimensions prior to submitting a bid. E. The Contractor shall produce a pump speed vs. torque curve for each unit and provide to the motor manufacturer. The motor Manufacturer shall provide in writing that he has coordinated the motor data with the Starter Manufacturer and that the motor is suitable for an across the line starting application. The pump is started against a closed pump control valve. F. The motor manufacturer shall coordinate the rotation of the motor with its existing pump. G. The Contractor shall provide a structural analysis of the existing pump/motor base. H. If a motor horsepower rating larger than indicated is offered as a substitute and accepted, the contactor shall provide required changes in conductors, motor controllers, overload relays, fuses, breakers, switches, and other related items with no change in the contract price. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following documents of the exact issue indicated, or of the issue in affect on the date of invitation for bids where no issue is indicated, shall apply to this procurement to the extent specified herein. In the event of any conflict between the requirements of this Specification and the requirements of the following documents, the .. requirements of the Specification shall govern. FIWH1101 16151-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR Contract No.01632 1. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association (AFBMA): a. 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. b. 11, Load Rating and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C50.41, Polyphase Induction Motors for Power Generating Stations. 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. 85, Test Procedure for Airborne Sound Measurements on Rotating Machines. b. 112, Standard Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. c. 620, Guide for Construction and Interpretation of Thermal Limit Curves for Squirrel-Cage Motors Over 500 Horsepower. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): } a. MG 1, Motors and Generators. b. MG 2, Installation and Operation of electric motors. 5. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 6. Other standards: Motor shall be built to all other applicable NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE standards not included above. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Special warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Manufacturer agrees to Y repair or replace components that fails in materials and workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty period: Manufacturer warrants equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 2 years from the date of substantial completion. Warranty shall comply with Division 1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Bid submittals: Motor pump units will be evaluated on a life cycle cost basis. In addition to the initial equipment bid, Motor Manufacturers shall furnish the following information. Failure to furnish the complete information requested shall be grounds for rejecting the bid. 1. Manufacturer. �. Locked rotor current. Locked rotor kVA/hp, code and material. 4. Starting torque. 5. Breakdown torque. 6. Efficiencies at 1/2,3/4, and full (4/4) load. 7. Power factor at 1/2, 3/4, and full (4/4) load. 8. Rated full load hp. _ 9. Rated volt. 10. Synchronous speed. 11. Rated FLA. 12. Service factor. FfWH1101 16151-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE -- ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR Contract No.01632 13. Insulation class. 14. Winding material. 15. Enclosure type. 16. Motor outline drawing. 17. Description of what modifications will be made to accommodate the new motor on the existing base. 18. Guaranteed shaft speed at full load. B. Contract Submittals 1. Motor Design Information: For each motor specified under this section, provide the following design information on the Electric Motor Questionnaire included at the end of this specification. a. Manufacturer. b. Rated full load horsepower. c. Rated volts. d. Number of phases. e. Synchronous speed. f. Frequency. g. Full load amperes (FLA). h. No load amperes. i. Locked rotor amperes (LRA) at rated voltage and NEMA code letter. j. Guaranteed maximum slip at full load in percent. k. NEMA insulation system classification and description of Manufacturer's method of application. I. Temperature rise at rated full load by resistance temperature detector (RTD) and resistance. m. Maximum ambient temperature for which motor is designed. n. Maximum air flow through motor in cfm at maximum temperature rise. o. Service factor. p. Frame size, outline dimensions, net weight, and weight of rotating element. q. Limiting temperature rise by resistive temperature detector method. r. NEMA enclosure/machine type (TEFL, WP-I, WP-II). s. Bearing size and calculation. t. Lubrication (compatible by equipment Manufacturer). u. Safe stall time. v. Maximum acceleration time with NEMA standard Wk2 value, at rated voltage and at 80 percent of rated voltage. w. Number of safe starts in succession when starting from a 50 degree Celsius ambient, intermediate waiting periods, and other conditions for driving _ equipment with a NEMA standard Wk2 value. x. Efficiency at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, full load; and service factor. y. Power factor at no load, 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, full load; and service factor. r z. Space heater voltage and wattage. aa. RTD literature with wiring diagram. FrWH1101 16151-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR Contract No.01632 bb. RTD Alarm and Trip set points. y cc. RTD Type and Mounting. dd. Motor space heater voltage and watts. ee. Motor sound power level. ff. Motor power factor at full load. gg. Date and place of Manufacturer. 2. Shop Drawings and Product Data. Provide the following information: a. Nameplate picture or drawing. b. Dimensioned outline drawings. c. Description of any sub base or modifications contemplated to mount motor on the existing base. d. Structural analysis of existing pump/motor base. e. Net weight of assembled motor and net weight of heaviest part to be handled during field assembly or disassembly. Complete dimensioned drawing of lifting bracket for motors. " f. Dimensions and internal arrangements of terminal boxes. g. Stator and rotor thermal damage curves for motor located in a 506 C ambient. h. Anticipated temperature rise of motor measured by RTD at specified, pressure and temperature. _ i. Maximum WAR allowed for power factor correction. Maximum WAR shall be included on motor nameplate as well. j. Motor insulation voltage rating k. Instruction manual I. Hand calculations verifying motor power factor corrected to 0.95 or better. m. Allowable time periods between starts. n. Subtransient reactance and X/R. o. Speed-torque curve at 100% and 80% of rated voltage. p. Speed-current curve at 100% and 80% of rated voltage. q. Acceleration time at 100% and 80% of rated voltage. r. Thermal damage curve (I2t) s. Locked rotor withstand time. t. Rotor inertia. u. Schematic and interconnection diagrams. y. v. Detailed conduit layout drawing. 3. Note: All documentation listed above shall be supplied with the motor's initial submittal with the exception of the motor test results, photographs, and Y instruction manual which shall be furnished later in the project. Incomplete submittals will be returned "NOT APPROVED, REVISE AND RESUBMIT" 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SERVICE OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE 1. Motor Manufacturer Representative FfWH1101 16151-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE -- ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR Contract No.01632 a. The motor manufacturer shall furnish the services of a competent factory trained technician, who shall have had a minimum of five (5) y ears experience in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment which is being furnished under this contract. This service is to ensure proper installation and adjustment of the motor, instruct personnel in proper operation, maintenance, and care of the equipment, for making operation tests of equipment, and recommendations for obtaining the most efficient use thereof. The motor technician shall be an employee of the motor manufacturer unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. b. The service representative shall verify the proper installation, alignment, wiring, lubrication, and connection of all appurtenances prior to start-up. He shall be present during testing, and start-up and shall certify to the OWNER in writing that the motor has been properly installed and operate satisfactorily. c. The minimum time required to be on-site for 8 hours, not including travel time, is as follows: (i) Check motor installation .................................4 days (2 trips minimum) (ii) Pump start-up and testing................................8 days (2 trips minimum) (iii) Troubleshooting..............................................4 days (3 trips minimum) (iv) Personnel training ............................................ 1 days (1 trip minimum) B. CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS 1. Submit the following certified test reports for pump, motor and variable frequency drive. a. Provide CTR for motor factory performance tests. b. Provide CTR (with EIR) for pump field tests before and after motors are replaced. c. Provide CTR(with EIR) for motor field tests. C. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REPORT 1. Submit Equipment Installation Reports from the motor manufacturer field service representative indicating the equipment was installed in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and that the equipment was adjusted and aligned to be in the best operating condition. The report shall also indicate that the equipment is operating satisfactorily in accordance with the project specifications. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (MOTOR) A. Organization: The following information needs to be provided by the Motor 4 Manufacturer and incorporated in the Motor Operation and Maintenance manual: 1. Project record drawings clearly indicating operating features and including as-built shop drawings, outline drawings, and schematic and wiring diagrams. 2. Instructions for erection, alignment (including tolerances), and preparation for use. 3. Complete description of safety equipment, safety procedures, and safety precautions. FTWH1101 16151-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR w Contract No.01632 4. Normal starting, running, and shutdown procedures, as well as emergency shutdown procedures. 5. Recommended number of starts in any 24-hour period. 6. Normal maintenance, inspection, and lubrication procedures. 4 7. Recommended spare parts list. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The motors shall be single speed, single winding, in strict compliance with the ~ requirements specified herein. The motors shall be designed to fit in the space shown on the drawings. Confirm location of terminal box from drawings. B. Applicable motors shall be suitable for operation on an across-the-line starter. C. The brake horsepower required at any point along the driven curve including tolerance allowed by Hydraulic Institute standards and during shop and field testing of driving units shall not exceed the rated motor horsepower. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MOTOR MANUFACTURERS 1. General Electric 2. Siemens 3. TECO-Westinghouse Motor Co 4. U.S Motors 5. Reliance (Baldor) G. Hyundai Ideal 2.03 RATINGS A. General 1. For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish identical motors and - accessories of a single Manufacturer. 2. Meet requirements of latest version of NEMA MG I. 3. Motors shall be specifically designed for the use and conditions intended, with a NEMA design letter classification to fit the application. 4. Lifting lugs on all motors. 5. Operating Conditions: a. Outdoor, high humidity, dusty. b. Maximum ambient temperature not greater than 50 degrees C. 6. The ambient air temperature shall be defined as air immediately surrounding the motor. 7. The motor shall be suitable for operation up to 3300 feet elevation above sea �r level. 8. Motors shall be suitable for operating conditions without any reduction being required in the nameplate rated horsepower or exceeding the rated temperature rise. FrWH1101 16151-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR r Contract No.01632 9. Overspeed in either direction in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 10. Motor locked rotor kVA/hp shall not exceed NEMA Code Letter F, 5.9 kVA/hp (no exceptions). f " B. Horsepower Rating and Full Load RPM 1. Motors shall be the following RPM: a. 900 hp: 900 RPM b. 2000 hp: 720 RPM 2. The motor nameplate horsepower shall be equal to or greater than the maximum load which will be imposed on it by the pump when operating at any point in the operating head range, and not less than designated in the motor-driven pump specification. 3. Motor shall be selected so that pump horsepower and coupling loss shall not exceed the motor nameplate (at unity service factor) rating over the entire pump curve. C. Temperature Rise: Motors shall have a maximum temperature rise, by resistance, of 700C (Class B) and 80°C (Class B) by RTD for continuous operation at 100% rated load at a 50 degree C ambient and a maximum temperature rise, by resistance, of 800C (class B) for continuous operation at 1.15 service factor and at a 50 degree C ambient. D. Service Factor: 1.15 minimum at 50 degrees C temperature. E. Voltage and Frequency Rating: 1. Motor shall be dual rated for voltage of 4000/2300 volts, 3-phase, 60Hz. 2. Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor starter supply terminals dipping to 80 percent of motor rated voltage. F. Efficiency and Power Factor: 1. Efficiency: a. The minimum efficiency at full load shall be: (i) For each 900 hp motor: 94.8% (ii) For each 2000 hp motor: 95% b. Tested in accordance with NEMA MG 1. c. Guaranteed minimum at full load. 2. Power Factor: Minimum Uncorrected Power Factor at full load: a. For each 900 hp motor: 83% b. For each 2000 hp motor: 82% 3. Power factor for each motor shall have the capability to be corrected to 95% or better without overexciting the motor. G. Starting full voltage: Each motor shall be capable of producing the required starting torque as required by the pump Manufacturer. All motor driven pump units shall be capable of starting the pump against a closed pump control valve. H. Locked Rotor Ratings: FrWH1101 16151-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR Contract No.01632 I. Safe stall time 15 seconds or greater. - 2. Locked Rotor Code shall be"F. Code shall be shown on motor nameplate. 2.04 ENCLOSURE A. Enclosure to conform to NEMA MG 1. B. Enclosure shall be of constructed steel plate. C. Enclosure shall be NEMA Weather Protected Type I (WPI) with stainless steel screens over all openings.D. Bolts/fasteners shall be stainless steel. E. Drain shall be provided to prevent accumulation of liquids. F. There shall be a metal arrow on each end of the motor to indicate direction of rotation. 2.05 STATOR A. Laminations: The stator core shall be an assembly of laminations of high-grade fully processed and C-5 or better silicon sheet steel securely clamped between heavy end rings. Core bars shall be located outside of the lamination stack to accomplish this _ clamping. B. Windings: all windings shall be copper assembled using form wound coils of the same _ size and shape. Random wound coils are not acceptable. Turn to turn insulation shall be provided to ensure machine winding protection against surges at the machine terminal. C. Insulation: All motors shall have an epoxy based, VPI insulation system. All winding connections, including leads, shall be placed prior to VPI. As a minimum, the insulation system shall meet the criteria for NEMA class F insulation or better. After winding, the stator shall be subjected to two complete VPI cycles of 100 % solid epoxy resin. Following these cycles, the stator shall be coated with solvent type epoxy varnish. D. End turn support system: Coil ends shall be braced in order to prevent fatigue and cracking of insulation during starting and extended insulation. Motor windings shall be braced to withstand an external three phase short circuit at full load and 100 percent v of rated voltage. E. Stator windings to be designed to have surge capability of 3.5 p.u. at rise time of 0.1 to 0.2 ps and 5 p.u. at a rise time of 1.2 ps or longer. F. Stator accessories: Resistance Temperature detectors (RTD): platinum, three wire RTDs shall be provided. Two RTD's shall be installed per phase and they shall be evenly distributed around the circumference in the motor's stator winding slots. FfWH1101 16151-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR r Contract No.01632 2.06 ROTOR A. Rotor cage shall be constructed of copper or copper alloy bars. ALUMINUM ROTOR BARS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. B. Rotor bars and end ring shall be copper or copper alloy with uniform resistance characteristics. The bars shall be shaped to meet motor starting and running torque requirements. C. Shaft shall be forged or rolled steel. Provide shaft end details coordinated with pump and shafting as specified. D. Core shall be built up with high grade non-aging silicon steel, each piece lamination core plated to minimize eddy current losses. E. Rotors shall be dynamically balanced prior to assembly. Balancing shall be checked after assembly with the motor running at rated speed. Run out on shaft shall be checked and in no case shall exceed 0.001 inch measured with a precision indicator with reading taken at the end of the shaft. 2.07 BEARINGS A. Characteristics: 1. Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life. 2. Motor bearing shall be ring oiled, split-sleeve type. Bearings shall be insulated to prevent shaft-bearing-frame current. Insulating means shall also be provided for any oil-supply connections and monitoring equipment to prevent electrical bypassing of the bearing insulation. B. Each motor bearing shall be equipped with an RTD, for monitoring and shutdown protection. 2.08 LEADS A. Shall be made of ASTM B 173, class G stranded copper. B. Provide permanent identification numbers on leads as per NEMA MG 1. C. Motor leads shall have same class of insulation as the motor stator windings. 2.09 TERMINAL BOXES A. Main terminal box: 1. Provide custom built, gasketed, oversized terminal box. 2. Terminal box to be located as shown on the contract drawings. 3. Threaded hubs to be provided for conduit attachment. 4. Minimum usable volume in percentage of that specified in NEMA MG1-1 and NFPA 70, shall be 200 percent. Motor terminal box shall not be less than the next standard NEMA Type II size box. The cables associated with both the motor and FIWH1101 16151-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR r Contract No.01632 the power factor correction capacitors (PFCC) will terminate in the motor terminal box. 5. Motor terminal box shall be with motor leads landing on three-phase, insulated bus drilled with NEMA 2-hole pads to terminate the feeder cables. Direct cable- to-cable connections shall not be permitted. Terminal box shall be provided with standoff insulators and suitable for terminations using a NEMA two hole lug. Motor terminal box shall be of adequate size to accommodate stress cones to make up cable terminations for 5000 volt shielded cable. The motor terminal box shall be located on the NEMA F1 side. Bottom and front of box shall be removable. Terminal box shall be adequately insulated to prevent excessive vibration. The motor terminal box shall be suitable for terminating conductors as shown in the table below without exceeding the minimum bending radius of the cables as required by the National Electrical Code. t 6. Terminal box size and layout shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 7. A grounding pad shall be furnished external to the terminal box for connection of a No. 4/0 copper grounding conductor to the station ground grid. 8. Terminals shall be tinned copper. 9. Terminal box shall be supported by the motor frame. 10. Terminal box shall be suitable for bottom entry and suitable for terminating the ` following: Pump Cable re uarements with phd�e acid ground oonduct©rs/condt It size,. Motor 900 hp 3- 250kcmil (5W), #3G. (600V), 4"conduit- motor cables RW 342 5kV #6G. 600V 3"conduit—PFCC cables 2000 hp 2 sets of(3- 250kcmil (5kV), #3G. (600V), 4"conduit) — motor cables 3- #1/0 (5kV), #6G. 600V 3"conduit—PFCC cables B. Space heater terminal box: 1. Provide separate terminal box for the motor space heater leads. The box shall accept a 3/4"conduit. Provide 600 volt rated molded insulation terminal blocks with ring-tongue - terminals under screws. Permanently identify all leads and terminals. Provide proper voltage barriers. Terminals shall be tinned copper. Space heater terminal box shall be located on the NEMA F2 side and suitable for bottom entry. C. RTD terminal box: Provide a separate terminal box for RTD leads. The box shall be oversized to accommodate a 1-1/2-inch conduit entrance. 2. Provide 600 V terminal blocks inside the terminal box, either strap screw type or . spring steel spring trap type. Terminate all conductors whether spare or active. FTWH1101 16151-10 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR Contract No.01632 Mark each RTD wire and terminal and provide a detailed shop drawing showing which RTD each triad connects to. 3. RTD terminal box shall be located on the NEMA F2 side and suitable for bottom entry. D. Conduits 1. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be Anaconda Sealtite, Type HTUA by Anamet Electrical, or equal. Fittings used with liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be of the screw-in type with insulated throat by Thomas & Betts Co.; no equals. 2. Rigid aluminum conduit, couplings, factory elbows, and fittings shall be 6063 alloy by Allied Tube & Conduit Co., or approved equal. Conduit hubs shall be insulated throat by Crouse-Hinds. 3. Liquidtight strain relief cord and cable connectors shall be Series LS by Crouse- Hinds, or approved equal. 4. Design neat layout of conduit from sensors to the accessory terminal boxes. Submit a detailed layout drawing to the ENGINEER for review. 5. All conduits and wire shall be routed and installed in an identical fashion for like motors. 6. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4-in. 7. Mounting Hardware- All mounting hardware including but not limited to strut channels, clamps, etc. shall be 316 stainless steel. 8. All appurtenance boxes shall be laid out to avoid overlap and access limitation to the boxes. Appurtenance boxes shall be secured with stainless steel screws. E. GROUNDING MEANS 1. Provide a grounding lug threaded into the motor frame within the motor terminal box and other motor conduit boxes. Lug shall be similar and equal to Burndy KC Servit and suitable for terminating #3 ground wire. Provide two NEMA 2-hole ground pads located near the base of the motor mounted 180 degrees apart. Ground pads shall be stainless steel and suitable for terminating #4/0 ground conductor. 2.10 NAMEPLATES A. Main nameplate: Each motor to be provided with a stainless steel nameplate. All motor data required per NEMA MG -10.37 and NEMA MG 1-10.38 shall be displayed. Letters shall be raised or stamped. The following additional information shall be provided on the main or additional nameplate: insulation system classification, connection diagram, direction of rotation for driven equipment, temperature rise measured by RTD at 1.0 SF, electric phase standard rotation for NEMA standard direction of rotation. B. Heater nameplate: Display voltage and wattage. C. Bearings nameplate: Display bearing Manufacturer's name and identifications and recommended lubricant. FTWH1101 16151-11 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR Contract No.01632 D. Attachment: Nameplate to be attached with stainless steel fasteners. 2.11 SPACE HEATER A. Motors shall be furnished with a space heater. B. Type: Electric resistance, silicon-rubber clad or equivalent non-exterior with oxidizing maximum temperature of 1300 C rated for 240 VAC that will be operated on 120 volt. Motor space heater shall be sized to provide adequate heating when operating at 120 volts. C. Controlled by remote motor starter contact. D. Manufacturers standard construction, designed for long life. 2.12 RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS (RTDS) A. Winding Thermal Protection: Resistance Temperature Detectors: 1. All motors shall be provided with replaceable 100 ohm platinum stator RTD's. 2. Six (two each phase) positioned to detect highest winding temperature and located between coil sides in stator slots. 3. RTD leads brought to conduit box separate from motor terminal box, together with bearing RTD leads. Box shall be located on F1 side of the motor. 4 B. Bearing Temperature Protection: Replaceable 100 ohm platinum on each bearing of motor. RTD leads brought to conduit box separate from motor terminal box, together with winding RTD leads. C. All RTDS shall be brought back separately to the motor protection relay (provided by others). Series wiring of the RTDS will not be acceptable. D. MOTOR COUPLINGS 1. Flexible limited slip couplings shall be the heavy duty type, designed so that the pump shaft may be removed without disturbing the position or adjustment of the driving unit. Coupling shall be all carbon steel. Minimum factor of safety of 1.5 times shaft strength shall be used. Horizontal surface of the coupling shall be machined parallel to the axis of the shaft, and faces shall be machined perpendicular to the axis of the shaft. Provide an appropriate coupling guard, acceptable to OSHA, securely attached to the pump base with stainless steel bolts and nuts. Furnish all coupling bolts, nuts, washers and keys. Coupling shall be KOP-FLEX 2257980 Special per KOPFLEX SER# 583425. 2.13 EQUIPMENT FINISH A. When approved by the Owner, Manufacturer's standard shop paints for prime and finish coats are acceptable. Motors shall be painted with two (2) coats of -- manufacturer's standard exterior enamel. FfWH1101 16151-12 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR Contract No.01632 2.14 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS OF EXISTING PUMP/MOTOR BASE A. Contractor/Motor supplier shall provide a s tructural analysis of the existing pump/motor base for each pump/motor. Analysis shall include recommendations for modifications/repairs required. Structural analysis shall be signed by a licensed professional Engineer in the State of Texas. Analysis shall be submitted with the motor initial shop drawing submittal. 2.15 SOUND REQUIREMENTS A. Motor shall have a sound power level of no more than 85 dBA average at 1 meter (3.3 ft) distance when measured per IEEE Std. 85 "Test Procedure for Airborne Measurements on Rotating Electrical Machinery". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTS 1. Test Facility. Each motor unit shall be fully tested as herein after specified at the Motor Manufacturers' testing facility. Testing shall be performed preferably in the United States. 2. Test Results. Certified copies of all test and retest results shall be furnished to the Engineer and final tests results shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. All test results shall be certified by a registered professional engineer holding a current and valid registration in the State of the testing facility and shall bear the engineers'seal, signed and dated. 3. Motor Performance Test a. General: (i) All motors shall be tested at the motor factory according to NEMA and IEEE Standard. (ii) An ANSI complete (Engineering) Test shall be performed on all motors at the factory, which consist of but not limited to the following: (a) Measurements of winding resistance of stator. (b) No-load reading of current, power and power factor at normal frequency and voltage. (c) High potential tests (2 times the voltage plus 1000 volts) of stator winding. (d) Mechanical vibration test of the motor per NEMA MG 1-1998 7.8 (Bearing Bracket) and 7.9 (Shaft Vibration). (e) Shaft Voltage test per IEEE 112 9.4. (f) Bearing temperature rise checks. (g) Thorough mechanical checks of the entire motor. (h) Full load heat run. (i) Current unbalance. (j) Efficiency testing at full Efficiencies shall be determined per IEEE 112 Method F"Segregated Loss"method with calculated values used for slip and stray load losses. Heat run is by dual frequency, equivalent load method. FTWH1101 16151-13 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR Contract No.01632 - (k) Power Factor. - (1) Locked rotor current and power factor. (m) Starting Torque. (n) Noise Testing per ANSI S1.2 or IEEE 85. (o) Polarization Index Test. 4. Factory tests at the motor factory: Two representatives from the Owner and one representative from the Engineer will witness the motor factory test. 5. Witness Testing a. In addition to factory tests, as specified above, the Owner/Engineer will t witness the factory tests for all equipment. b. Testing shall be conducted in consecutive days. c. The number of Owner/Engineer persons witnessing the tests will be three persons. d. Under no circumstances, will the equipment be approved for shipment, nor will the equipment be accepted by the Owner, if witness testing is specified, and the equipment is shipped without the testing being witnessed. e. If a test must be re-run due to failure in meeting the specified requirements, the witness expenses for the re-test shall be borne by the manufacturer or Vendor. f. The Equipment Manufacturer shall test the equipment in the Continental United States of America, and the cost for the travel, lodging expenses, meals and transportation to witness the factory motor tests shall be borne by Owner and Engineer. g. It is preferred that witness testing be conducted in the Continental United States of America. If the Equipment Manufacturer wishes to test equipment outside of Continental United States of America, the cost for the travel, lodging expenses, meals and transportation for Owner and Engineer - personnel (three representatives maximum) to witness the factory motor inspections and tests shall also be included in the bid price. (i) All travel arrangements are subject to approval by the Owner and Engineer. (ii) Where available, all flights shall be non-stop originating and returning to DFW International Airport. -- (iii) The Owner/Engineer, who is witnessing the testing, shall approve all travel arrangements, including the airline selected, flight times, hotel selected, testing agenda, etc. (iv) An interpreter/guide shall be provided if English is not widely spoken, or in areas where English I not the native language. The Contractor shall arrange to provide an interpreter/guide for the entire time that the Owner's representatives are in the country for trips outside North America. (v) The Owner/Engineer shall direct communications with the person who is responsible for local arrangements and has the authority to pay for those expenses prior to leaving Dallas. FfWH1101 16151-14 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY wTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR i Contract No.01632 (vi) The Contractor shall submit the testing agenda for approval at least 30 days prior to the test date, or the test date shall be rescheduled, with no change in the Contract price or time. The agenda shall include a detailed list of all tests to be done. (vii) Where travel is over night, testing shall not start on the arrival day. Provide a testing schedule before the trip agenda is set. Tests may not start any sooner than 12 hours after arrival at hotel for trips outside North America. Owner and Engineer will review agenda to ensure adequate time is allowed for shorter flights. F h. Passport Services (if required) (i) The Contractor shall be responsible to obtain Letters of Invitation and other documentation required to obtain a VISA into the host county. The A Contractor shall obtain the VISA itself and directly pay for the cost of a VISA service and the fee that the host country charges for the VISA. (ii) The Contractor shall use a VISA service located in the Dallas area to handle the Owner/Engineer's passports who are traveling to witness the test, and to pay all expenses for the VISA service company and the cost of the VISA required by the host country. Each Owner's and Engineer's Representative shall have the Visas in hand at least two weeks before the flight. i. Owner/Engineer Persons Travel Expenses for Tests Conducted Outside Continental United States (i) Owner/Engineer representatives shall not have to provide for any out of pocket expenses related to the trip, transportation, meals or incidentals that would require later reimbursement. (ii) The Contractor shall provide, and pay for, all air travel fare, including ground shuttle or taxi, to and from the Owner/Engineer's office or -i residence. Flight arrangements shall be at least as follows: Coach for flights up to 2 hours in length, Business Class for flights longer than 2 hours, if the tests are to be conducted outside the Continental United States. (iii) The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner's and Engineer's Representatives for airfare from Dallas/Fort Worth Airport, rental car, hotel, meals, and other expenses in accordance with the Federal Meals & Incidental Expenses Rate for the amount of time required for the Owner's and Engineer's Representatives to witness the factory tests, and �. any retests required. (iv) Ground transportation at any destination shall be provided by the host Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM). The Owner/Engineer persons shall not be required to drive in a fo reign country under any circumstances. (v) The Contractor shall provide for hotel, meals, travel and incidentals to be paid for by the host OEM at the testing location, whose equipment is being tested. T he host OEM shall have the authority to resolve any expense problems. If the Hotel offers restaurants, those charges shall be covered in the Hotel expenses. If meals are not offered at the Hotel, FTWH1101 16151-15 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR Contract No.01632 4 transportation to restaurants and the cost of those meals, shall be provided by the host OEM. (vi) Access to an international cell phone shall be provided while out of the Continental United States. Contractor shall provide and pay for at least one cell phone to be used by the Owner's representatives, purchased in the United States with a U nited States phone number that works at all times and locations as required by the witness testing. - (vii) Access to the internet shall be provided while out of the Continental United States. (viii) Each of the Owner's Representatives shall be responsible for obtaining their own passport. This is not the responsibility of the Contractor. (ix) Provide confirmed reservations at least two weeks before the trip. (x) Owner's and Engineer's Representatives shall be allowed to return at any time. Contractor shall be responsible for any penalties, if applicable. Owner and Engineer will stay no more than one week for factory testing. For factory test requiring more than one week, the testing shall be broken up into two separate trips. Contractor shall make travel arrangements for two separate trips. j. For each additional trip after the first that is required due to witnessed testing a partial/complete failure or incomplete occurrence because the Contractor or Manufacturer is not ready, any component of the motors are not ready for testing, or any reason caused by the Manufacturers, Contractor, or his subcontractors/Suppliers, the Contractor shall pay all costs described in this specification. In addition, Contractor shall reimburse Engineer for Engineer's labor at $1,200 per day. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall make all electrical connections to equipment specified. Installation shall be made in compliance with Manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Drawings. If the Contract Drawings or drawings and recommendations from the Manufacturer are not available then installation shall proceed according to the best electrical industry and trade practice. B. Properly install and align motors in the locations shown, except motors which are factory mounted on the driven equipment. When the motor and equipment are installed, the nameplate must be in full view. Make electrical connections as specified under Division 16. - C. Reuse existing baseplate. Provide any sub-bases or base modifications necessary to properly mount and support the new motors. 3.03 FIELD TESTING A. General: Provide all necessary instruments, labor, and personnel required to perform motor inspection and testing. B. Perform a performance test of existing pump and motor prior to motor replacements. FTWH1101 16151-16 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR Contract No.01632 1. Measure flow, head, shaft speed, voltage, current, power factor, and kilowatts under the following three conditions. 2. Measure pump and motor vibration amplitudes at the bearing housings for all the above flow conditions. Take readings in the horizontal(x) and vertical (y) planes at each bearing housing, and take an axial (z) reading for each machine. Record unfiltered and filtered readings in velocity units, in/sec. rms. Maximum unfiltered vibration amplitude at any of the five measurement locations on the new motor shall not exceed 50% of the limit set by the Hydraulic Institute. 3. Measure pump and motor noise measurements six places with the measuring device located 1 meter from the machine being measured. 4. Inspect and record coupling alignment. 5. Prepare a report that provides all of the above measurements in a neat and clear fashion. Include digital photographs of the installation, and of the test set-ups. Analyze vibration data, and report any problems observed. 6. After installation and start-up of the new motor, repeat the above test. C. Inspection: Inspect all motors for damage, moisture, and alignment, freedom of rotation, proper lubrication, oil leaks, phase identification and cleanliness, and report any abnormalities to Engineer before energizing. D. Energizing: After installation has been thoroughly checked and found to be in proper condition, with thermal overloads in motor controllers properly rated and all controls in place, energize the equipment at system voltage for operational testing. E. As a part of the testing procedure, the Contractor shall prepare a card for each motor, installed under this contract. After each motor has been run to operating temperature, the motor shall be shut down and an insulation resistance shall be made, using a megohmmeter. Make the test immediately after shutdown. Record megohmmeter �- reading and winding temperature. Correct reading of insulation resistance to 500 C/122°F. Insulation resistance in megohms, corrected to 500 C, shall be at least equal to one (1) megohm for each 1000 volts applied. WW FTWH1101 16151-17 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR ELECTRIC MOTOR QUESTIONNAIRE Motor Data Contract No.01632 Manufacturer: Motor HP: Frame: Enclosure: Type: RPM: Voltage: Phases: Hertz: Starting Method: .- Shaft: Size: Insulation Class: Duty: Full Load AMPS: No Load AMPS: ' Locked Rotor AMPS: Locked Rotor Time: Locked Rotor Torque: % Breakdown Torque: Locked Rotor KVA/HP: Rotor WK2 (lb-ft2): — NEMA Design: Service Factor: Inrush Current(% of Full Load): Max Safe Stalled Time(Seconds): Number of Safe Starts Per Day: Number of Consecutive Starts: *Full Load Temp Rise, degrees C over 500 C Ambient(at 1.0 S.F.): *Service Factor Temp Rise, degrees C over 500 C Ambient(at 1.15 S.F.): *Limiting Temperature Rise: Resistance (at 250c): Bearings: Type/Size Life Lubrication: Exhaust Air (CFM): Exhaust Air Temp Rise(OF): EFFICIENCY: POWER FACTOR: CURRENT 1.15 S.F. Load 4/4 Load: 3/4 Load: 1/2 Load: 1/4 Load: RTD Types and Mounting: RTD Alarm and Trip Setpoint: Motor Sound Power Level: Motor Recommended Power Factor: Space Heater Voltage: Wattage: *Temperature rise measured by embedded detectors and by resistance.All Data Fields To Be Completed By The Motor Manufacturer END OF SECTION FTWH1101 16151-18 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR Contract No.01632 SECTION 16191 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install all miscellaneous equipment as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Equipment enclosures shall have NEMA ratings suitable for the location in which they are installed, as specified in Division 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, detailed catalog information or drawings describing electrical and physical characteristics of all equipment specified. B. Submittal shall be clearly marked showing only equipment provided. Mark through equipment option not provided. C. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. D. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Control Stations 1. Control stations shall be heavy-duty type, with full size operators. Momentary contact stop buttons shall have a lockout latch that can be padlocked in the open position. Provide an extra contact to monitor the auto position of the switch as shown on the drawings. 2. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be stainless steel. 3. NEMA 7 enclosures shall be copper free cast aluminum. 4. Control stations shall be Allen-Bradley or approved equal. B. Wireway 1. NEMA 4X wireway shall be stainless steel with gasketed, hinged covers and stainless steel type 316 screws. a, 2. NEMA 4X shall be Bulletin F-22 as manufactured by the Hoffman Engineering Co. or approved equal. FTWH1101 16191-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 ` C. Control Relays 1. Control relays shall be heavy duty machine tool type, with 10 Amp, 300 Volt convertible contacts. Number of contacts and coil voltage shall be as shown on the Drawings. General use relays shall be General Electric Co., Catalog No. CR120B, similar by Square D Co.; Allen-Bradley Co. or equal. Latching relays shall be General Electric Co., Catalog No. CR120BL, similar by Square D Co.; Allen- Bradley Co. or approved equal. 2. Time delay relays shall be pneumatic, 600 Volt, 20 Amp contacts, with calibrated knob operated adjustment. On delay and off delay types and timing ranges shall be as shown on the Drawings. Relays shall be Agastat Model 7012 or 7022 or approved equal. D. Terminal Blocks _ 1, Terminal blocks shall be 600 Volt, channel mounted, with tubular screw and pressure plate. 2. Terminal blocks shall be Bulletin 1492 as manufactured by the Allen-Bradley Co. _ or approved equal. E. Intrinsically Safe Relays 1. Intrinsically safe relays shall be solid state type with 5 Amp output contacts, suitable for use on a 120 Volt, 60 Hz power supply and shall be FM approved for pilot devices in Class I, Division 1, Group D hazardous atmospheres. 2� Intrinsically safe relays shall be Gems Solid State Safe-Pak as manufactured by Gems Sensors, Division of Transamerica Delaval, Inc. or approved equal. F. JIC Boxes for GF Receptacles LL 1. Furnish all necessary hardware for mounting the heat tape and thermostat. 2. JIC boxes shall be 6-in by 6-in by 4-in aluminum continuous hinge clamp cover boxes, Hoffman, Catalog No. A-606 CHAL with Type L23 stainless steel type 316 Y fast operating JIC clamp or approved equal. 3. Install 1-1/2-in bushings in bottom of box for cord and plug to pass through.G. On-Delay, Off-Delay Timers (Solid State) 1. On and off delay timers shall be microprocessor based, solid state type. 2. Timers shall have the following features: a. Adjustable timing ranges from 0.1 seconds to 99 hours, 59 minutes minimum. b. Setpoints entered by pressing membrane covered keyboard on unit. ., c. LCD readout of timing progress and setpoint. d. Adjustable for on-delay or off-delay modes. e. Standard sized plug-in case. w f. Totally sealed face plate. g. Sealed battery backup power to retain memory for up to 30 days. h. Accuracy plus or minus 0.01 second. T i. DPDT isolated instantaneous and timed output contacts rated 6 Amps minimum at 120 Volt. FTWH1101 16191-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3. Timers shall be Bulletin 651 Multirange, solid state as manufactured by Tenor Co., Inc.; Eagle Signal, CS-300 Series or approved equal. H. Corrosion Inhibitors 1. All equipment enclosures, terminal boxes, etc, located in a N EMA 4X rated area (where shown on the Drawings) that contains electrical or electronic equipment or . terminal strips shall be furnished with an internally mounted, chemically treated corrosion inhibitor pad. 2. The corrosion inhibitor pads shall be as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Co.; 3M or approved equal. I. Instrumentation Disconnect Switches: Provide a heavy-duty single pole disconnect toggle switch in a weather proof cast enclosure for all field instruments served with electric power. This feature shall be included whether or not shown on drawings. 1. Fuses, 0 to 600 Volts ` 1. Provide a complete set of current-limiting fuses wherever fuses are indicated. Supply a set of six (6) spare fuses of each type and each current rating installed. Utilize fuses that fit mounting specified a. For 0 to 600 volt motor and transformer circuits, 0 to 600 amps, UL Class RK- 1 with time delay, Bussmann Type LPS-RK, Shawmut Type A6D-R, or equal. b. For 0 to 250 volt motor and transformer circuits, 0 to 600 amps, UL Class RK- 1, Bussmann Type LPN-RK, Shawmut type A2D-R, or equal. c. For 0 to 600 volt feeder and service circuits, 0 to 600 amps, UL Class RK-1, Bussmann Type KTS-R, Shawmut Type A6K-R, or equal. d. For 0 to 250 volt feeder and service circuits, 0 to 600 amps, UL Class Rd-1, Bussmann Type KTN-R, Shawmut Type A2K-R, or equal. e. For 0 to 600 volt feeder and service circuits, 601 to 6,000 amps, UL Class L, Bussmann type KRP-C, Shawmut Type A4BY, or equal. K. Indicating Lights: 1. Indicator lamps shall be heavy duty 30mm, industrial type oil tight, high-visibility LED, full voltage type. Units shall have screw on plastic lenses and shall have factory engraved legend plates as required. Unless otherwise specified in each equipment specification lens color shall be green for equipment OFF, red for equipment operating, blue for FAIL or ALARM and amber for power ON/Equipment Stand-by. For all control applications, indicator lamps shall incorporate a push-to-test feature. L. Selector Switches 1. Mode selector switches (HAND-OFF-AUTO, LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE, MOTOR SELECTOR, LEAD-LAG, etc) shall be heavy-duty 30mm, oil tight, industrial type with contacts rated for 120 VAC at 10 Amps continuous. Units shall have standard size, black field, and legend plates with white markings, as indicated. Operators shall be black knob type. Units shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements, as required. Units shall be single-hole mounting, accommodating panel thicknesses from 1/16-in minimum to 1/4-in maximum. FrWH1101 16191-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 7� SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 M. Push Buttons: 1. Push-button, shall be heavy-duty, industrial type with momentary or maintained contacts as required, rated for 120 VAC at 10 Amps continuous. Units shall have standard size, black field, and legend plates with white markings, as indicated. Button color shall be red for EMERGENCY STOP or START and green for STOP. Contact arrangement shall be as required. N. Combination starters: 1. Combination starters shall be provided with motor circuit protectors and equipped to provide under-voltage release and overload protection on all three phases. Combination Starter is applicable for single motor starter only, refer to common control panel specification for other application. 2. Motor starters shall be 2 or 3 Pole, 1 or 3-phase as required, 60 Hz, 600 Volt, - magnetically operated, full voltage non-reversing except as shown on the drawings. NEMA sizes shall be as required for the horse power shown on the drawings. 3r Each motor starter shall have a 120 Volt operating coil and control power transformer. Starters shall have motor overload protection in each phase. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as shown on the drawings. A minimum of one N.O. and N.C. auxiliary contacts shall be provided in addition to the contacts shown on the drawings. 4. Overload relays shall be adjustable ambient compensated and manually reset. 5. Control power transformers shall be sized for additional load where required. Transformer primaries shall be equipped with time-delay fuses. 6. Switches, relays, push buttons shall be as specified under this section. 7. Provide additional protection as shown on contract drawing. 8. Enclosure shall be NEMA 3R for outdoor application in a non corrosive environment and NEMA 12 for indoor application. PART 3 EXECUTION — NOT USED END OF SECTION FTWH1101 16191-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16280 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section covers the minimum technical requirements for the design, ratings, materials, fabrication, assembly, etc. for three-phase Power Factor Correction Capacitors (PFCCs) rated for 2400V, 60 Hz. The B. Furnish PFCC for High Service Pump Motors No.1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 located at the South Holly High Service Pump Station. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions, operating characteristics of multiple capacitor cells or elements and data on features, ratings, and performance. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Show access and workspace requirements and required clearances. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Complete ratings 2. Rated reactive power 3. Rated rms voltage 4. Certified production test reports 5. Installation information 6. Number of phases 7. Rated frequency 8. Bill of Material 9. Weight of Enclosure including capacitors and inrush reactor 10. Three Line Diagram 11. Cable terminal sizes 12. Product data sheets 13. Rated BIL 14. Amount of fluid, indicate flammable or not flammable 15. Overall outline dimensions, both plan and elevations, including the space available for conduit. Outline drawing shall clearly show location of conduit entry. FTWH1101 16280-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 16. Product Data for each overcurrent protection device description. Manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings and finishes. 17. Hand calculations showing power factor corrected to 95% or better without overexciting the motor. Coordinate with motor manufacturer for motor data. 18. Enclosure type and rating 19. Wiring diagrams for power, signal and control wiring, if applicable 20. Spare parts list 21. Manufacturer's sizing calculations using actual motor data showing the power factor corrected to 95% or better without overexciting the motor. C. Qualification Data and testing agency. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Provide letter showing coordination with motor manufacturer and certifying that PFCC } will not overexcite the motor. F. Provide letter stating that the current inrush reactor size for the capacitor banks was sized per the recommendations of the Capacitor back-to-back switching study in Section 16055, Power System Studies. PFCC manufacturer shall obtain a copy of the study from the Contractor. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended for storage at Project site. 2. Detailed instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal - conditions. H. Submittal shall be clearly marked showing only equipment provided. Mark through ti equipment option not provided. I. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. T J. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with IEEE 18 and NEMA CP 1. FTWH1101 16280-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Comply with UL810. 1.05 WARRANTY A. All equipment furnished under this section shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 24 months, including all parts, labor, and all related expenses. The warranty period shall not begin until the date of substantial completion. B. The Manufacturer shall guarantee that all elements of the systems provided under his/her Contract, are of sufficient capacity to meet the specified performance requirements as set forth herein or as indicated. C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner's representative of failure of any part of the systems or equipment during the warranty period, the Manufacturer, shall replace the affected part or parts within ten (10) weeks, at no cost to the Owner. D. The Manufacturer shall furnish a written guarantee covering the above requirements before the final payment is made. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Obtain all capacitors through a single source from a single manufacturer. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Power Factor Correction Capacitors: a. General Electric. b. Gilbert/K&M (contact: Brooks Shafer ph: 817-608-9334) c. Schneider Electric/ Square D. d. Eaton / Cutler Hammer. 2.02 CAPACITORS, GENERAL A. Capacitors shall be enclosed, three-phase capacitor equipment consisting of a complete assembly including non-PCB, three-phase capacitors, current limiting reactors, terminal compartment, and fuses. Solderless connectors shall be provided on each line terminal B. Description: Integrally fused power factor correction capacitors and line reactor/filter unless otherwise indicated. C. Construction: 3 phase power factor correction capacitor shall be comprised of 3 single phase capacitors delta connected. D. Internal Wiring: Factory wire, ready for field connection to external circuits at a single phase capacitors delta connected. FTWH1101 16280-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 E. Capacitor Cells: Dry type, utilizing metalized foil electrodes in a non chlorinated - dielectric liquid and a propylene film. Each cell shall be hermetically sealed in a metal enclosure with porcelain or resin bushings. Wet Cells with Pressure Sensitive interrupters are approved. - F. Bushing terminals shall be tin plated copper. G. Units containing PCB dielectric fluid are unacceptable. T H. Capacitor Fuses: Current-limiting, non interchangeable type; factory installed in each phase and located within the equipment enclosure. Features include the following: 1. Interrupting Capacity: 50,000 A, minimum. 2. Quantity: 1 fuse per phase (total of 3 fuses per device). 3. Fuse Ratings and Characteristics: As recommended by capacitor manufacturer. - I. Blown fuse LED type indication pilot lights to be provided for each capacitor on the project. 3. Discharge Resistors: Shall be mounted internal to the enclosure to reduce voltage on the cells to 50V or less within 5 min after the capacitor has been switched off. K. Temperature range: -400C to +46°C at 3,300 ft. and below. . The nominal rating if the capacitor cell shall be 1.08 times the voltage rating of the system. L. Enclosure: Type 3R, equipped with watertight conduit connections. M. Capacitor units shall be the required KVAR size, 2400 v olt (unless manufacturer _ recommends alternate voltage rating to meet the KVAR requirements), 3-phase, 60 Hertz. Capacitor units shall be suitable for bottom or side entry. Capacitor units shall be suitable for floor mounting. N. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 5% of voltage waveforms shall not affect the life of capacitors, contactors or controller. O. Capacitor Permissible Overloads: �. Maximum current (rms):.............................................................. 135% of rated Maximum voltage (rms):.............................................................. 110% of rated ` 3. Maximum KVAR output:.............................................i................. 135% of rated 2.03 ENCLOSURE ` A. Enclosed, indoor, dustproof, three-phase capacitor units containing internally mounted, indicating type, high interrupting-capacity, current limiting fuses, discharge - resistors and inrush reactors. B. Terminal box: shall be manufactured from mild steel. The terminal box shall utilize 4 gasket seals. FTWH1101 16280-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS = ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 C. Capacitor assembly shall be totally metal-enclosed. The bolted or welded construction of the enclosure shall be such that the unit can be lifted, skidded or slid into place on a pad without damage to any portion of the cabinet or its contents. D. Enclosure(s) shall be free standing, constructed of #11 gauge formed sheet steel, minimum. All external welds shall be grounded and sanded. The enclosure shall be rated NEMA 3R for outdoor applications. E. Enclosure shall be painted ANSI No. 61 light gray. Enclosure shall be chemically cleaned and dried prior to painting. An anti-corrosive base primer followed by two finish coats of enamel shall be applied. The entire part shall be baked and cured in an oven. The paint applied shall provide long life, durability and an attractive finish. F. The terminal box shall be capable of terminating shielded cable: 1. 3 #1/0 (5KV) conductors with stress cones and a #6 (600V) ground conductor in a 3"conduit for the capacitors associated with the 2000 HP motors. 2. 3 #2 (5KV) conductors with stress cones and a #6 (600V) ground conductor in a 3"conduit for the capacitors associated with the 900 HP motor. 3. Terminal box shall be large enough to terminal 5kV shielded cable without exceeding the minimum bending radius per the National Electrical Code. 4. The paint system for the terminal box shall be durable Epoxy/Urethane composition that meets the requirements of ANSI C57.12.31 (Pole Mounted Transformer Enclosure Coating Integrity). The terminal box shall utilize gasket seals and be of suitable design for indoor or outdoor use. 2.04 KILOVAR RATING A. Kilovar ratings of capacitors connected to individual motor circuits were selected based on expected motor power factor. B. Check motor nameplate and manufacturer's power factor and no-load current data for actual motor installed. C. Reduce capacitor WAR if required, so the size does not exceed the motor manufacturer's recommended maximum size, and so it does not exceed the value required to raise motor no-load power factor to 95%. D. Do not exceed motor manufacturer recommended KVAR rating. 2.05 FACTORY FINISH Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test power factor correction equipment before shipment. Comply with NEMA CP 1. Include the following: 1. Routine capacitor production tests, including short-time overvoltage, capacitance, .. leak, and dissipation-factor tests. FTWH1101 16280-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2. Functional test of all operations, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices. PART 3 EXECUTION -- 3.01 TESTING A. The capacitors shall be of a design and construction which have been validated by the 4 type tests specified in the applicable Standards. The manufacturer shall provide a certified test report that verifies that the capacitor unit has adequate overvoltage endurance. B. Production Tests 1, Each capacitor shall be subjected to the routine production tests as specified in the applicable standard. 2. Short-time overvoltage test: a. terminal to terminal test: AC at 2 x rated voltage 10 seconds b. terminal to case test: 26 kVAC for 10 seconds 3. Capacitance test at rated voltage 4. Loss determination test at rated voltage 5. Discharge resistor test 6. Leak test _ C. Design Tests - Design tests shall be performed by the manufacturer on a sufficient number of capacitors to demonstrate that the design meets industry standards. _ Capacitors shall first meet production tests before being subjected to design tests. Design tests shall include the following: 1. Impulse withstand test _ 2. Bushing test 3. Thermal stability test 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Division 3. B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 16073 "Hangers and supports for electrical systems". C. Maintain minimum workspace according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Identify components according to Section 16012 "Identification." 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each power factor correction capacitor element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. -- 2. Test continuity of each circuit. FTWH1101 16280-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a fac tory-authorized service representative to perform the following: 1. Inspect capacitors, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust components, and equipment. 2. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of automatic power factor correction units. 3. Report results in writing. C. Field tests and inspections to be performed in accordance with section 16060 "Acceptance testing and Calibration"and prepare test reports. D. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3.04 CLEANING A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. B. Clean components internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic power factor correction units. Demonstrate method of determining optimum settings for system controls. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." B. Conduct a minimum of two hours training as specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 3.06 SPARE PARTS A. The following spare parts of the type and size furnished shall be provided: manufacturer B. Provide one (1) spare set of fuses (3 fuses) for each Power Factor Correction Capacitor provided for a total of five (5) sets of spare fuses. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 16280-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16289 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surge protective devices for low-voltage power, control, and communication equipment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications. B. SVR: Suppressed Voltage Rating. C. SPD: Surge Protective Device 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include rated capacities, operating —• weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Product Certificates: For surge protective devices, signed by product manufacturer certifying compliance with the following standards: 1. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic. 2. UL 1449 3'd Edition—UL Standard for Surge Protective Devices. C. Qualification Data: For testing agency. D. Field quality-control test reports, including the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transient voltage suppression devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. G. Submittal shall be clearly marked showing only equipment provided. Mark through equipment option not provided. H. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. FTWH1101 16289-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS i Contract No.01632 I. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. ; 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain surge protective devices and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, dimensional requirements, and electrical performance of suppressors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. } D. Comply with IEEE C62.41, "IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits," and test devices according to IEEE C62.45, "IEEE Guide on Surge Testing for ti Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 Volts or less) AC Power Circuits." E. Comply with NEMA LS 1, "Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices." F. Comply with UL 1283, "Electromagnetic Interference Filters," and UL 1449, "Standard for Surge Protective Devices." 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: D o not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission. B. Service Conditions: Rate surge protection devices for continuous operation under the - following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage. 2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C). 3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, non-condensing. 4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6090 m) above sea level. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location of field-mounted surge protective devices to allow adequate clearances for maintenance. FrWH1101 16289-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. General Electric Company. 2. Innovative Technology, Inc. 3. Siemens. 4. Schneider Electric/ Square D. 5. Eaton/ Cutler Hammer. 2.02 480V SWITCHBOARD AND 480V MCC SUPPRESSORS A. Surge Protective Devices with the following features and accessories: 1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3. Integral disconnect switch. 4. Redundant suppression circuits. 5. Redundant or replaceable modules. 6. Arrangement with copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 7. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 8. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 9. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 10. One set of dry contacts, for remote monitoring of protection status. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. 11. Surge-event operations counter. B. Surge suppressor shall be of type 2. C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 300kA/phase. D. Connection Means: Permanently wired. E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 480Y/277, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 1200V FfWH1101 16289-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2. Line to Ground: 1000V 3. Neutral to Ground: 1000V F. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 480, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Line: 3000V 2. Line to Ground: 1500V 2.03 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS A. TVSS with the following features and accessories: Y 1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. - 3. Integral disconnect switch. 4. Redundant suppression circuits. 5. Redundant or replaceable modules. 6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 9. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250Vac, for remote monitoring of protection status. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. 10. Surge-event operations counter. B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA/ phase C. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 480Y/277, 208Y/120, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2.04 ENCLOSURES A. Install surge protective devices in the same cabinet as the MCC. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES Y A. Surge protective devices shall be installed by the MCC manufacturer at the factory. 3.02 PLACING SYSTEM INTO SERVICE A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment, panelboards, control terminals, data terminals to their sources until surge protection devices are installed and connected. FfWH1101 16289-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transient voltage suppression devices. END OF SECTION FTWHI101 16289-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 4W Contract No.01632 SECTION 16345 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The requirements of the Contract, Division 1, and Division 16 apply to work in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Medium Voltage, 5 KV, Metal Clad Switchgear. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Medium Voltage motor control center. B. Division 16 specification 1.04 REFERENCES A. The medium voltage metal clad switchgear and protection devices in this specification are designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted). B. ANSI C37.06, Switchgear - AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis - Preferred Ratings and Related Required Capabilities (includes supplement ANSI C37.06a) C. ANSI C39.1, Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments, Requirements for D. ANSI/IEEE C37.04, Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis (includes supplements C37.04C, C37.04G, C3704H, C37.04I) E. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2, Metal-Clad and Station-Type Cubicle Switchgear F. ANSI/IEEE C57.13, Instrument Transformers, Requirements for G. IEEE C37.90, Standard for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus H. NEMA SG 2, High Voltage Fuses I. NEMA SG 4, Alternating - Current High Voltage Circuit Breaker J. NEMA SG 5, Power Switchgear Assemblies FfWH1101 16345-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.05 DEFINITIONS 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Indoor metal clad switchgear intended for use on 2.4KV/5KV, 3-phase, 3 wire grounded 60-Hz system. Switchgear shall be rated as indicated in drawings and have removable-element vacuum circuit breakers. Enclosures and circuit breaker(s) shall have a basic impulse rating of 60KV. Switchgear, including circuit breakers, meters, and relays, shall be factory tested. B. Switchgear will be used at 2400 V. Distribution voltage might be switched to 4160V in the future and minor modifications only shall be required to use switchgear at 4160V. C. Equipment shall be completely factory-built, assembled, wired, and tested. All equipment and components shall be of new construction. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer shall provide copies of following documents to owner for review and evaluation in accordance with general requirements of Division 1 and Division 16, clearly identify item selected cross out irrelevant items. 1. Product Data on a specified product; 2. Shop Drawings on a specified product; Shop drawing shall include wiring diagram with wire tass. Internal enclosure components, External dimension. 3. Certified copies of all Type (Design) and Verification Test Reports on a specified product. B. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. C. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or Y deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. 1.08 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain an up-to-date set of Contract documents. Note any and all revisions and deviations that are made during the course of the project. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Manufacturer shall provide copies of installation, operation and maintenance w procedures to owner in accordance with general requirements of Division 1 and Division 16. B. Submit operation and maintenance data based on factory and field testing, operation and maintenance of specified product. C. Provide certified factory test reports — FfWH1101 16345-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 - D. Final factory drawings shall be provided in an electronic format as well as hardcopy format. Provide electronic files in DXF CAD format. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE (QUALIFICATIONS) A. Manufacturer shall have specialized in the manufacture and assembly of medium voltage metal clad switchgear for a minimum of 15 years. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in accordance with recommended practices listed in manufacturer's Installation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Deliver each medium voltage metal clad switchgear section in individual shipping splits for ease of handling. Each section shall be mounted on shipping skids and wrapped for protection. C. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within specified time. D. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory protection or cover with heavy canvas or �- plastic to keep out dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. (Heat enclosures to prevent condensation.) E. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damaging equipment, installed devices, and finish. Lift only by installed lifting eyes. 1.12 PROJECT CONDITIONS (SITE ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS) A. Follow manufacturer recommended standard for service conditions before, during and after switchgear installation. B. Switchgear shall be located in well-ventilated areas, free from excess humidity, dust and dirt and away from hazardous materials. Ambient temperature of area will be between minus 10 and plus 40 degrees C. Indoor locations shall be protected to prevent moisture from entering enclosure. 1.13 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 1.14 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer warrants equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 2 years from date of acceptance or 2 1/2 years from date of shipment of motors whichever happens first. Warranty shall comply with Division 1. 1.15 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one set of manufacturer recommended spare parts. FfWH1101 16345-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.16 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Make all necessary field measurements to verify that equipment shall fit in allocated space in full compliance with minimum required clearances specified in local codes and standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, Schneider Electric/Square D, RV metal clad switchgear. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Furnish Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switchgear with UL label as indicated in drawings 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings of devices, bus bars, and components; voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. B. Enclosure ., 1. Switchgear shall consist of breaker and auxiliary units, as indicated in drawings, assembled to form a r igid, self-supporting, metal-enclosed structure. Indoor equipment to be furnished with equipment heaters, heaters are to remain _ energized with no switch or thermostat provided. In each unit, major primary circuit parts (breaker, buses, transformers) shall be completely enclosed by grounded metal barriers, including a front barrier as part of the circuit breaker. �. 2. Switchgear units shall be arranged as shown on attached drawings. 3. For rigidity during fault conditions all connections to roll-out potential transformer trays and control power transformer trays shall be rigid bus bars insulated to full voltage rating of switchgear assembly. 4. Circuit breaker compartments shall be designed to house 5kV removable-element circuit breakers. Stationary primary disconnect contacts shall be tin plated copper. Grounded metal safety shutters shall isolate all primary connections in '- compartment when breaker is withdrawn from connected position. 5. Furnish nameplates for each device as specified in Division 16. There shall be a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. 6. Energized bare parts mounted on doors shall be guarded where the door must be opened for maintenance of equipment or removal of drawout equipment. 7. Furnish full height hinged covers which can be bolted closed for each cable compartment. 8. Enclosure shall have provisions for close coupled coordination to MV motor -- controller lineup. C. Main Bus FfWH1101 16345-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1. The main bus shall be tin plated copper and rated as indicated in drawings. Bus bars shall have a continuous current rating based on temperature rise and documented by design tests. All joints will be tin plated with at least 2 bolts per joint. Bus bars will be braced to withstand magnetic stresses developed by currents equal to main power circuit breaker close, carry, and interrupt ratings. Access to bus bars shall be through removable front panels. Bus bars shall have fluidized bed epoxy flame retardant and non-hydroscopic insulation with a continuous current rating. The bus supports shall be polyester glass. D. Ground Bus 1. A ground bus (1/4 by 2 inch copper) shall extend throughout assembly with connections to each breaker grounding contact and cable compartment ground terminal. Joints shall be made up as indicated in drawings. Station ground connection points shall be located in each end section. E. Circuit Breakers 1. Circuit breakers shall be rated as indicated in drawings. Circuit breakers of equal rating shall be interchangeable. Circuit breakers shall be operated by an electrically charged, mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy spring. A -� handle shall be used to manually charge the spring for slow closing of contacts for inspection or adjustment. 2. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with secondary disconnecting contacts which shall automatically engage in the connected position. 3. Each breaker compartment shall have a breaker rackout device. Using rackout device, a breaker will be self-aligning and will be held rigidly in the operating position. In the disconnect position, breaker shall be easily removable from compartment. Breaker racking shall be accomplished with door closed and latched. Insert handle through a hole in front door to operate rackout device. 4. An indicating tape shall show breaker position when racking breakers in or out of their connected positions 5. Interlocks shall prevent moving breaker to or from operating position unless main contacts are open. Operating springs shall be discharged automatically when breaker is rolled fully into connected or disconnected position. Rackout device shall have provisions to padlock in connected or disconnected position. When locked in disconnected position, breaker shall be removable from compartment using portable lifting device. Padlock shall not interfere with breaker operation. 6. Automatic shutters shall cover primary disconnect stabs when breaker is withdrawn to test/disconnect position. Shutters shall be positively driven by linkages connected to racking mechanism. A stationary barrier shall be located in front of the shutters for additional safety. 7. Breaker control voltage shall be capacitor trip. 8. Circuit breakers shall have a rated interrupting time of 3 cycles. 9. Each circuit breaker shall be provided with an auxiliary switch. Main breakers shall have a 6-stage switch containing six "a" (normally open) and six "b" (normally closed) contacts. All spare contacts shall be wired to terminal boards. 10. Each circuit breaker shall be provided with a position switch indicating whether the circuit breaker is in the "Connect" or Disconnect" position. Main and tie F" breakers shall have a 6-stage switch containing six "a" (normally open) and six FTWH1101 16345-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 "b" (normally closed) contacts. All spare contacts shall be wired to terminal boards. F. Instrument Transformers — 1. Current transformer ratios are listed in each switchgear units specification paragraphs shall be as indicated on drawings. Current transformer accuracy shall be ANSI standard. Transformer mechanical ratings shall equal the momentary rating of the circuit breakers. Transformers, when mounted in switchgear assemblies, shall be rated for the full voltage of the switchgear. 2. Voltage transformers shall be drawout type, with current-limiting fuses and with _ BIL rating equal to the switchgear. Transformer ratios are listed on drawings. 3} Secondary control wiring shall be No. 14, extra flexible, stranded, tinned-copper control wire, Type SIS cross-linked polyethylene, rated 600 volts, except for _ specific circuits requiring larger wire. CT control wiring shall be No.12. 4. Crimp-type, insulated spade terminals shall be furnished on all wire ends 5. Secondary control wires shall be armored where they pass through primary compartments. 6. Control power transformer to be furnished with an auto throw over circuit between CPT's. 7. Short circuit style terminal blocks shall be installed in current transformer secondary wiring between the current transformer and all connected devices. 8. Provide marking sleeves on all switchgear control wiring, heat stamped with wire origin and / or destination information. �- 2.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Protective Devices - Protective relays shall be GE/MULTILIN 750 relays or approved equal by the following manufacturers: 1. Schweitzer. 2. Basler. 3. Eaton. 4. Siemens. 5. Square D. B. Provide automatic transfer switch with 15 minutes UPS to provide continuous power to the relays. 2.05 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS A. All the protective relays shall support RS485 modbus protocol. All protective relays to be daisy chained together and connected to RS485 to RS232 new converter provided within the existing PLC panel. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Provide two indicating lights (red and green) for each breaker and one indicating light (white) for each lockout relay. The indicating lights shall be 30mm, industrial rated and shall be provided with LED lamps. FTWHI101 16345-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Provide a hand-resettable lockout relay (device 86). The lockout relay shall disable closing of the corresponding circuit breaker until the relay has been reset. The lockout relay shall be industrial rated. C. Provide at wo-position auto/manual selector switch in each breaker control circuit. Selecting "auto" will permit automatic operation. Selecting "manual" shall permit operation using the local breaker control switch. Contacts from the selector switch shall be wired to inputs on the appropriate protective relay to allow the PMCS to monitor the switch position. The switch shall be a GE type SB1 or approved equal. D. Provide station type class arresters where indicated on drawings. Arresters shall be gapless metal-oxide type with a nominal rating of RV and an MCOV of 2.55kV. The arrester shall be enclosed in polymer housing. Arresters shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the latest revision of ANSI/IEEE C62.11. E. Provide CT and PT test block and test plugs. F. Lift truck (1 furnished per lineup) G. Manual racking handle (1 furnished per lineup) H. Test cabinet to bench test, inspect and maintain the breaker. I. A remote racking device shall be provided including push-button, motor operator, and 25 feet of cable. 2.07 TESTING A. The switchgear equipment and circuit breakers shall receive factory production test as listed below: 1. Equipment a. Low frequency dielectric test b. Grounding of instrument cases c. Control wiring and device functional test d. Polarity verification e. Sequence test f. Low frequency withstand voltage test on major insulation components g. Low frequency withstand test on secondary control wiring 2. Breakers a. Coil check test b. Clearance and mechanical adjustment c. 300 Electrical and mechanical operation test d. Timing test e. Conductivity of current path test f. Hi-potential testing of breaker g. Vacuum bottle integrity test B. Manufacturer shall provide to the Engineer documents verifying completion of factory production tests. FfWH1101 16345-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.08 FINISH T A. All steel structure members shall be cleaned, rinsed, and phosphatized prior to painting. B. The switchgear shall be painted with an electrostatically applied polyester powder with final baked on average thickness between 1.5 and 2.0 mils and meet ANSI requirements for indoor equipment. C. All exterior surfaces of the switchgear assembly shall be given final finish coats of ANSI 61 gray as standard. D. Finish shall have a minimum pencil hardness of 2H as tested per ASTM D3363 and shall pass the SATM B117 Salt spray test for a minimum of 1000 hours. - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install switchgear. B. Check concrete pads for uniformity and level surface. C. Verify that medium voltage metal clad switchgear is ready to install. D. Verify field measurements E. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location and ready for use. - F. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions. 3.02 LOCATION 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Installer has specialized in installing medium voltage 5KV metal clad switchgear with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Install per manufacturer's instructions. C. Install required safety labels. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed switchgear for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections with a c alibrated torque wrench. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions.C. Test the switchgear in accordance with division 16. FfWH1101 16345-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust all circuit breakers, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. Adjust relay trip and time delay settings to values determined as recommended in the Coordination Study, as specified in division 16. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean interiors of switchgear to remove construction debris, dirt, shipping materials. B. Repaint scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION _y FTWH1101 16345-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16360 UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide underground electrical duct banks as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. ANSI C80.1, Specifications for Zinc-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit. 2. ANSI/ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 3. ANSI/ASTM A 615, Specifications for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ANSI/NEMA TC6, PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. 5. ANSI/NEMA TC9, Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Unless otherwise noted, provide Schedule 40 PVC conduit inside of ductbanks. Provide fittings of the same type material as the conduit. B. Ductbanks under 600 V shall be sand encased with a red concrete cap. C. Ductbanks over 600 V shall be red concrete encased. 2.02 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Provide PVC conduit to PVC coated aluminum adapter fitting in order to convert to metal conduit before surfacing from the underground duct bank. B. Expansion/deflection fillings to be installed on all stub-up above grade from duct banks. 2.03 CONCRETE A. Provide concrete conforming to the following. 1. Compressive strength: 4,000 psi at 28 days. 2. Slump: Not exceeding six inches. 3. Aggregate size: Use pea gravel. 4. Additive: Red ferrous oxide concrete coloring pigment mixed at the rate of 1-1/2 pounds per sack of cement. Sprinkle color on the top of the duct bank will be unacceptable. FfWH1101 16360-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.04 REINFORCING BARS A. Provide Grade 40 steel reinforcing bars, for all duct banks. 2.05 POLYETHYLENE WARNING TAPE A. Identifying tape for buried conduits: 6" wide, polyethylene with continuous printing } along the length of the tape, as manufactured by Brady "Identoline" or Sentry Lin "Terra Tape". Use red with black letters for buried electrical power conduits. Use green with black letters for buried electric instrumentation and communication conduits. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Duct bank configurations are detailed on the drawings. A minimum of 3-inch concrete cover shall be required on all sides of the conduits. Conduits shall be spaced with 3- inch clearance on all sides. 3.02 LOCATION AND INSPECTION A. Before beginning trenching operations stake out the proposed duct bank routing and obtain approval of the Owner. After trenching has begun and before any ducts or conduits are placed, notify the Owner so that the trenching and installation may be inspected. Also notify the Owner prior to any placement of concrete for duct banks, so that he may observe the placing. Placing concrete on muddy trench bottoms will not be acceptable. 3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation: Excavate trenches for installation of duct banks. Form the trench bottom to follow closely the specified grade and depth for the duct banks. B. Backfill: Trenches may be backfilled with excavated soil and supplemented as necessary with select materials. Compact the backfill and mound slightly above natural grade. C. Restoration: Restore adjacent areas disturbed by trenching or backfilling to a condition equal to the original. 3.04 PLACING OF DUCT BANKS A. Cover: Unless otherwise shown, provide a minimum 18" of earth and select materials cover. Coordinate grade with other work, if in conflict, rework grade at no cost to Owner. B. Grade: Place duct banks with a minimum grade of four inches per 100 feet. Grade -� between manholes may be from one manhole to the next manhole or from a high point between manholes. Where terminating ducts inside of buildings, always slope the grade away from building to the nearest manhole. FTWH1101 16360-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WfP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 C. Changes in Direction: Make changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either horizontal or vertical, by using long sweep bends. Long sweep bends must have a minimum radius of curvature of 3 feet and may be made up of one or more curved or straight sections. Manufactured bends having a minimum radius of curvature of three feet may be used at the ends of duct runs which are less than 100 feet in length. D. Joints: Make joints in ducts and conduits watertight, in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Stagger joints in adjacent ducts and conduits a m inimum of six inches. Make joints between ducts and conduit with appropriate no-thread-to-threaded adapters. Use appropriate sealant. E. Spacing: Unless otherwise shown, space ducts and conduits with 3" spacers. Place spacers or separators on not greater than eight-foot centers. Use spacers or separators made of plastic, concrete or a suitable nonmetallic, nondecaying material. F. Drainage: All conduit duct banks shall be sloped sufficiently to drain into manholes, pull boxes or sumps. 3.05 PLACING OF CONCRETE A. Place concrete using chutes and tremies as necessary to limit the free drop of the mix to a maximum of two feet. Carefully rod or vibrate the concrete to aid uniform encasement of the ducts. Smooth the top of the pour with a float. Encase the conduits in concrete, a minimum thickness of three inches, on all sides. 3.06 CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean all ducts and conduits before placing. During construction and after the duct line is complete, plug open ends of ducts and conduits to prevent the entrance of foreign matter. After the duct line has been completed, pull a flexible mandrel through each duct and conduit. The mandrel must not be less than 12 inches long with a diameter approximately 1/4 inch less than the inside diameter of the duct or conduit. After cleaning, place in each duct and conduit a No. 30 nylon line with a plastic tag on each end reading "Pulling Line", and a tag identifying the location of the other end. 3.07 SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall employ hand trenching at locations where existing underground utilities are present. B. All damaged utilities should be repaired immediately in a manner acceptable to the Owner at Contractor's expense. Any damaged cables shall be replaced in full. Splices shall not be acceptable. Damaged conduits shall be replaced between the two closest manholes and cables repulled. C. Install a #4/0 bare copper grounding conductor, centered over the ductbank and located 3" above the ductbank in the backfill. Bond ductbank grounding conductor to FfWH1101 16360-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS r Contract No.01632 building or transformer ground loop at one end and to the manhole ground electrode at the other end. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 16360-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16362 ELECTRICAL MANHOLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The section provides the guidelines for construction and installation of electrical manholes. Precast manholes meeting the specifications and drawings will be acceptable in lieu of poured-in-place manholes. B. Furnish traffic rated HS 20 electrical manhole. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. ANSI/ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ANSI/ASTM A 615 - Specifications for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal shall be in accordance with division 1. B. Submit Layout Drawing with dimension and calculation. C. Submittal shall be clearly marked showing only equipment provided. Mark through equipment option not provided. D. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. E. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. Provide concrete conforming to Division 3 - Concrete. 2.02 REINFORCING BARS A. Provide Grade 60 reinforcing bars. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS A. General: FTWH1101 16362-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL MANHOLES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 I. Manhole frame and cover. 2. Stainless steel 316 ladder if neck extensions are used. 3. Pulling eyes. _ 4. Equipment supports. 5. Cable racks and insulators. 6. Inscription "ELECTRIC"or"COMMUNICATIONS"on all manhole covers as applies. 7. Manhole to be HS 20 traffic rated. B. Finish: Miscellaneous steel equipment, other than manhole frame and cover. Shall be _- stainless steel 316. Equipment supports and cable rack shall be stainless steel 316. C. Size: Manhole shall be sized to accommodate all conduits in the duct bank as shown. D. Size: Minimum manhole size shall be 6'x 6'. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RESPONSIBILITY A. A 6'x6' manhole along with the associated castings will be provided by the City of Fort Worth. The manhole shall be installed by the contractor. 3.02 LOCATION AND INSPECTION A. Construct manholes approximately where shown on the plans. Final location may be adjusted slightly to fit actual field conditions. B. Before beginning excavation operations, stake out the proposed manhole locations and obtain approval of the Engineer. C. Contractor shall verify elevation of top of manholes is above and coordinated with surrounding finish grade. Failure to coordinate grades, will require repairs at no extra cost to owner. 3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Perform all necessary excavation and backfill for proper installation of manholes. Use N excavated soil for backfill and supplement as necessary with select materials. Compact all backfill and restore adjacent areas disturbed by excavation and backfilling — operations to the condition equal to the original. B. Subgrade shall be scarified to depth of 8' and recompacted to 95% standard proctor density (ASTM D-698). Where P.I. of subgrade material is 20 or greater. Subgrade 4 shall be modified with a minimum of 6% by weight of hydrated lime (27 pounds per s.y.). Where P.I. of subgrade is <20 and >15, lime modification may be required as directed by the Engineer. Modification shall extend to 1' beyond edge of concrete — base. FfWH1101 16362-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL MANHOLES 4 MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.04 PLACING OF CONCRETE A. Set concrete formwork and place concrete reinforcement. After concrete has been placed and formwork has been removed, fill voids and properly patch concrete surfaces. 3.05 CLEANING A. Before any equipment or cable is installed, remove all dirt and debris and pump out the manhole so that it is free of standing water. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 16362-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ELECTRICAL MANHOLES MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16380 MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR PART1 GENERAL E 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish and install assemblies of medium voltage load interrupter switchgear, together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein 4 and as shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16000 Electrical —General Provisions 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 16000 and as specified herein. B. Provide systems engineering with coordination curves, to demonstrate coordination between existing and proposed breakers and/or fuses submitted, such that protective device coordination is accomplished. Such curves and settings shall be included as a part of these submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned unreviewed. D. The original equipment manufacturer (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. E. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for all equipment specified and shown on the Drawings, as follows: 1. Master drawing index 2. Front view elevation 3. Floor plan 4. Top view 5. Single line 6. Schematic diagram 7. Nameplate schedule 8. UL Listing of the completed assembly 9. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer's part number. FfWH1101 16380-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR ao Contract No.01632 + 10. Assembly ratings including: — a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage �. c. Continuous current d. Basic impulse level for equipment over 600 volts 11. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 12. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal sizes. 13. Switchboard floor mat F. Field Test Reports G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. e. Field Test Reports 1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA SG 2, High Voltage Fuses 2. NEMA SG5 - Power Switchgear Assemblies. - 3. NEMA SG6 - Power Switching Equipment 4. ANSI C37.30, C37.32 and C37.34 - Standard requirements for high voltage air switches. T. 5. ANSI C37 - 20.3, 20.4 - Metal-enclosed Interrupter Switchgear. 6. ANSI 5. - ANSI/IEEE C57.13 — Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers. ` 7, National Electrical Code (NEC) 8. Solid - state circuitry shall meet or exceed the Transient Overvoltage Withstand _ Test per NEMA ISCI-109 and the Surge Withstand Capability Tests (SWC) per IEEE Standard 472-1974 (ANSI C37.90A-1974). In addition, where UL Standards exist for components, devices and/or assemblies, such standards shall apply. B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. FTWH1101 16380-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR Contract No.01632 C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of ten (10) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled"shall not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. F. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.06 )OBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted., B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two (2) copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment, and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner. C. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. D. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available, equipment shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower the groups. E. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven (7) calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven (7) calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the Contractor's expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. FFWH1101 16380-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 —+ SOUTH HOLLY HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR Contract No.01632 F. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during jobsite storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 3 years from date of final acceptance of the switchgear. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all travel, material, parts, shipping and labor necessary to return the switchgear to new operating condition, at no cost to the Owner. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS ` 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are - acceptable: 1. Cutler-Hammer 2. S &C Electric 3. Square D 4. G &W B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. - 2.02 RATINGS A. The switchgear described in this specification shall be designed for operation on the - voltage systems as shown on the Drawings. Each switch shall have the following ratings: 1. Maximum Voltage 15KV 5KV 2. BIL Rated 95kV 60kV 3. Continuous Current As shown As shown 4. Load Interrupting Same as Contin. Same as Contin. 5. Sym. Momentary Current a. 600A Continuous 40kA 40kA B. 1200A Continuous 60kA 60kA 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. General 1. This specification describes metal enclosed load break air interrupter switches, fused or non-fused and stand alone or in a lineup, as shown on the Drawings. FfWH1101 16380-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD -- MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR Contract No.01632 2. Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings of devices, bus bars, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. 3. Nameplates a. External (i) Furnish nameplates for each device as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a wh ite background, attached with stainless steel screws. There shall be a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. Cubicle nameplates shall be mounted on the front face, on the rear panel and inside the assembly, visible when the rear panel is removed. b. Internal (i) Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification, corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. c. Special (i) Identification nameplates shall be white with black letters, caution nameplates shall be yellow with black letters, and warning nameplates shall be red with white letters. 4. Control Devices and Indicators a. All operating control devices, indicators, and instruments shall be securely mounted on the panel door. All controls and indicators shall be 30mm, corrosion resistant, reinforced plastic, NEMA 4/4X/13. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as specified herein and as required by the detailed mechanical and electrical equipment requirements. b. Indicator lamps shall be LED type. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, lens color shall be green for OPEN, red for CLOSED and amber for FAIL or ALARM. For all control applications, except NEMA 7, indicator lamps shall incorporate a push-to-test feature. c. Mode selector switches (HAND-OFF-AUTO, LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE, etc) shall be as shown on the Drawings. Units shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements, as required. Each switch shall have an extra dry contact for remote monitoring. d. Pushbuttons shall be red for CLOSE and black for OPEN, with momentary or maintained contacts as required by the Drawings. e. Furnish nameplates for each device. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached with stainless steel screws. Device mounted nameplates are not acceptable. f. The manufacturer shall not remove, reuse, alter, or replace original equipment nameplates or equipment tags associated with equipment or components supplied by the manufacturer's suppliers and sub-suppliers. 5. Voltage Transformers FTWH1101 16380-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR Contract No.01632 4 a. Voltage transformers shall have current-limiting fuses and with BIL rating equal to the switchgear. b. Size and type shall be as shown on the Drawings. 6. Current Transformers a. Current transformers shall be furnished as indicated on the contract drawings. b. Size and type shall be as shown on the Drawings. 7. Control Power Transformers a. Control power transformers shall be as shown on the Drawings. - b. Transformer mechanical ratings shall equal the BIL and momentary rating of the circuit breakers. Transformers, when mounted in switchgear assemblies, shall be rated for the full voltage of the switchgear. - 8. Instrument Transformers a. All instrument transformers shall be metering accuracy type and vacuum cast using polyurethane resin. b. Number and type shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Enclosures _ 1. Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 1A, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. Where switchgear is shown outdoors, the construction shall be as follows: a. Outdoor non walk-in structures shall utilize tamper resistant sheet steel or unitized monocoque construction. To guard against unauthorized entry, there shall be no access to high voltage through side or rear sheets of the enclosure and no access to high voltage by means of externally removable - panels. Structures shall be front accessible only. Cab le entrance shall be from the bottom only. b. Each cubicle bay shall be supported on a heavy gauge, welded steel channel base extending around all four sides, constructed to exclude rodents, vermin, and dust. Apply a non-flammable undercoating to the base and to the underside of the cubicle floor plates. c. Roof structure shall be watertight with a continuous drip edge channel on the front. Roof shall slope to the rear for water drainage. Apply a non- flammable, non-disintegrating, insulating compound to the underside of the - roof to prevent moisture condensation. Holes for lifting eyes shall be blind tapped. d. Provide tamper resistant, padlockable, weathertight, gasketed cubicle doors and switch handle covers, with stainless steel hinge pins. e. Raintight, corrosion resistant ventilation louvers shall provide air circulation within the structure, while excluding insects, vermin, dust and sand. f. Each cubicle shall have heavy duty, 240 VAC, space heaters, thermostat controlled, of sufficient capacity to prevent condensation with the equipment de - energized, while operating at half their rated voltage. Heaters shall be provided with perforated metal guards and a circuit breaker disconnect. 120 VAC control power shall be provided from an internnal CPT, to be provided with the switch. FTWH1101 16380-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR Contract No.01632 g. The switch compartment shall contain barriered compartments for incoming and outgoing cables. All cables shall enter and exit underground from the bottom of the cubicle as shown on the Drawings. C. Incoming Line Section 1. Incoming power to the switch lineup shall be from a main switch section as shown on the Drawings. 2. If the lineup is fed by cables, the size and number shall be as shown on the Drawings. D. Section Construction 1. Each section of the equipment lineup shall be constructed of sheet steel and shall be bolted frame construction. Each section shall be adequately braced and shall have adequate venting to prevent distortion of the cubicle doors and windows under operating conditions. Operating conditions shall include normal operations under load, short circuits, and fuse operation and interruption of short circuits up to the specified rating of the switch. 2. Each switch section shall be front connected and front accessible. .. 3. Each section shall be constructed of 11-gauge sheet steel. This shall include doors, back panels, and side panels. 4. Each switch section shall have a front steel door with safety protected observation windows that shall allow sufficient viewing of the switch contact position. All steel doors shall have concealed hinges and bolting hardware to secure the door in the closed position. A mechanical switch and door interlock shall be provided to prevent opening the door when the switch is in the "on" position. 5. Individual doors shall be provided for each switch compartment and for each fuse compartment. 6. All sections in the lineup shall align front and rear. 7. Louvered ventilation openings shall be provided as required. 8. All housings shall be chemically cleaned inside and out and then treated with a phosphoric acid, etched and cleaned. All surfaces shall be finished in ANSI 61 medium light gray. The paint finish shall be rated for 1000-hour salt spray, per ANSI C37.20.3. 9. Provide rodent barriers. 10. Enclosure shall be dust resistant. 11. A high-impact viewing window that permits full view of the position of all three switch blades through the closed door. The window shall not be more than 58- inches above the switch pad level to allow ease of inspection. 12. The door shall be interlocked with the switch so that: a. The switch shall be opened before the door can be opened. b. The door shall be closed before the switch can be closed. c. A hinged grounded metal barrier bolted closed in front of every switch to prevent inadvertent contact with any live part, yet allow for a full-view inspection on the switch blade position d. Provision for padlocking the switch in the open or closed position. e. The Switch shall be removable as a complete operational component. FfWH1101 16380-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 -� SOUTH HOLLY HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR Contract No.01632 E. Finish 1. Prior to assembly, all enclosing steel shall be thoroughly cleaned and phosphatized. A powder coating shall be applied electrostatically then fused-on by baking in an oven. The coating is to have a thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. The finish shall have the following properties: a. Impact resistance (ASTM D-2794) 60 direct/60 indirect b. Pencil hardness (ASTM D-3363)............................................................... H c. Flexibility (ASTM D-522).............................................Pass 1/8-inch mandrel d. Salt spray (ASTM B117-85 [20])....................................................600 hours _ e. Color: ANSI 61 gray F. Busses 1, The switchgear bus shall be tin plated copper. The main bus shall be fully rated and arranged for future extension. Conical washer bolts shall be provided on all bus joints. The main bus shall be braced to withstand the effects of a short circuit within the ratings of the equipment. Supports for the main bus shall be polyester glass. The main bus shall be fully insulated. 2. A tin plated copper ground bus, fully rated, shall extend throughout assembly with connections to each breaker grounding contact and cable compartment ground terminal. Joints shall be made up as indicated in drawings. Station ground connection points shall be located in each end section. Ground bus shall have sufficient space and provisions for grounding all cables as shown on the Drawings. G. Barriers 1. Provide full depth barriers between each switch and power fuse assembly. 2. Provide full depth interphase and side barriers of insulating material in switch and fuse compartments. 3. Provide an expanded metal screen door barrier in front of the switch compartment, independent of the cubicle door. 4. Instruments, meters, relays and low voltage control devices and wiring shall be installed in grounded, metal enclosed compartments, isolated from the high voltage sections. H. Control and Secondary Wiring 1. Wiring: 600 Volt, stranded copper, Type SIS, flameproof switchboard wire, minimum size No. 14 AWG for control, and No. 12 AWG for power and instrument transformer secondaries. ; 2. Crimp-type, uninsulated spade terminals shall be furnished on all wire ends, except where non-insulated ring terminals are used to connect to fuse blocks, and instrument transformer studs. Secondary control wires shall be armored where they pass through primary compartments. I. Load Interrupter Switches _ 1. Load interrupter switches: 3 Pole, two position, gang operated, bottom hinged stationary load break type, mounted on a rigid, hot-dipped galvanized welded steel frame. Main switch blades shall be high conductivity, hard drawn copper. _ Mechanical linkages shall be porcelain or epoxy, with leakage and flashover FfWH1101 16380-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR Contract No.01632 distances equal to the mounting insulators. Circuit interrupting arc shall be completely contained and vented within the arc chutes. 2. Manual switch operator: Quick make, quick break, non-defeatable, high speed, stored energy operating mechanism actuated by a non-removable, external operating handle, capable of being padlocked in either the OPEN or CLOSED position. Opening and closing shall be accomplished by a single upward or downward stroke of the handle. The operating speed of the interrupter switch shall be independent of the operator handle speed. Provide permanent "OPEN-CLOSED" switch position indicator targets and DPDT auxiliary switch for remote switch position. 3. Where Duplex Load Interrupters are shown on the Drawings, or specified elsewhere, a duplex switchgear assembly configuration shall be furnished, consisting of two (2) load interrupter switches with common load side bus to feed one load circuit, which shall be fused or unfused as indicated on the Drawings. Key interlocks shall be supplied to prevent paralleling the incoming sources, and to prevent opening the front door of each vertical section containing one of the two switches unless both switches are locked open. 4. Where Kirk-Key arrangements are used, the Kirk keyed interlocks shall be Kirk HD Series (Heavy Duty) 316 Series of 316 stainless steel or approved equal. 1. Power Fuses 1. Power fuses: Non - aging, vented, solid material type with blown fuse indicators for local indication, blown fuse trip switches for remote indication, silencers, and disconnect style mounting. Non - disconnect style mountings shall be used only where required to meet the specified equipment short circuit rating. 2. Continuous current ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3. Cable terminations; Two - hole NEMA bus pads with provisions for attaching compression/crimp type cable terminals suitable for copper cable of the number and sizes indicated on the Drawings. P rovide adequate vertical clearance for electric stress cone cable terminations. 2.04 MAINTENANCE AND SPARE PARTS A. Furnish the following maintenance accessories: 1. One fuse handling tool 2. One set of three 10-ft grounding jumpers and storage bags. 3. One audio-visual voltage tester with batteries, storage case and clamp stick adapter. 4. One shotgun clamp stick with canvas storage bag. 5. Furnish and install a non-conducting switchboard floor mat, minimum 3/8 inch thick by 3 feet wide, meeting ANSI/ASTM D-178-01 Type 2 Class 3, Wearwell 702 or equal, and extending the full length of the equipment lineup. B. Provide the following spare parts: 1. One dozen each of cover bolts, nuts and special hardware. 2. One refinishing kit for field touch-up of paint. 3. Three replacement power fuses or refills for each switch. FrWH1101 16380-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR Contract No.01632 4. One arc chute assembly. S. One main interrupter blade assembly. 6. Two switch insulators and connector links. C. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage and clearly marked on the exterior of the package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part number. 2.05 FACTORY TESTING A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment furnished under this Section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's engineer to assist the Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this section for a period of not less than 2 wo rking days. The manufacturer's field engineer shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and _ components contained therein. B. The Contractor shall provide, for approval, three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report. 3.02 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer shall be specialized in installing medium voltage switchgear with minimum 5 years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the switchgear. - B. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. C. Verify that the medium voltage load interrupter switchgear is ready to be installed. D. Verify field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Anchor the equipment to the pad with 316 stainless steel anchors. _ FfWH1101 16380-10 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR Contract No.01632 C. Install required safety labels. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall inspect installed switchgear for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. The Contractor shall check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. Return `'odd" Kirk keys to the Owner after final acceptance. 3.07 FIELD ELECTRICAL TESTING A. Field testing shall be performed under the direction of the manufacturer's field engineer. B. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. Disconnect all connections to solid-state equipment prior to testing. C. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground on the closed switch and across each open pole for one minute. Minimum insulation resistance shall be not less than 5,000 megohms at 20 degrees C, or in accordance with the-manufacturer's published data. Variations between poles or switches shall not vary more than 25 percent. D. Perform an overpotential test on each pole with the switch closed. Test each pole-to- ground with all other poles grounded. Test voltage shall be not less than 2500 VDC or in accordance with the manufacturer's published data. E. Measure fuse resistances. Values shall not deviate more than 15 percent. F. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning. 3.08 CLEANING A. Clean interiors of switchgear, switchboards, panels, separate enclosures to remove construction debris, dirt, shipping materials, etc. 3.09 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the ` manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. FTWH1101 16380-11 SEPTEMBER 2011 �+ SOUTH HOLLY HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR Contract No.01632 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall personally inspect the equipment at the jobsite and shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including all settings designated in the Power System Study. B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.11 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment furnished under this Section. - B. The training shall be for a period of not less than one (1) eight hour day. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, switches, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner's use. END OF SECTION FfWH1101 16380-12 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD R MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR Contract No.01632 SECTION 16445 PANELBOARDS- DISTRIBUTION AND BRANCH CIRCUIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install distribution and branch circuit panel boards. 1.02 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. The following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes. 2. UL 67 - Electric Panelboards. 3. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 4. NEMA AB 2 - Procedures for Verifying the Performance of Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 5. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. ' 6. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Breaker layout drawing with dimensions indicated and nameplate designation. 2. Component list. 3. Conduit entry/exit locations. 4. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 5. Cable terminal sizes. B. Submittal shall be clearly marked showing only equipment provided. Mark through equipment option not provided. C. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. D. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. FfWH1101 16445-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 - SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION PANELBOARDS-DISTRIBUTION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS AND BRANCH CIRCUIT Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSURE A. Cabinet: 1. Construct cabinets in accordance with UL 50. Use painted galvanized sheet steel 16-gauge or more. 2. Provide a minimum 4-inch gutter wiring space on each side. 3. Reinforce cabinets and securely support bus bars and over-current devices to . prevent vibration and breakage in handling. 4. Provide standard conduit knockouts in cabinet ends. 5. Finish cabinets of surface-mounted panelboards to match doors and trim as specified below. 6. Panelboards mounted outdoors shall be weatherproof, and shall have a door behind door type construction. 7. Panelboards mounted outdoor in wet or corrosive areas shall have NEMA 4X stainless steel 316 enclosures. 8. Panelboards mounted indoor shall be NEMA 12 enclosures for areas classified as NEMA 12. B. Doors and Trim: - 1. Fabricate doors and trim from cold-rolled sheet steel. 2. Equip doors with flush-type combination catch and key lock. 3. Key all locks alike. Fasten trim for flush-mounted panelboards to cabinets by an approved means which permits both horizontal and vertical adjustment. 4. Trim for surface-mounted panelboards must fit the cabinet with no overhang. 5. Apply a finish to trim and doors consisting of two coats of enamel over a rust- inhibiting prime coat. 2.02 BUS �. A. Material: 1. Provide tin plated, copper bus bars, 98 percent IACS conductivity, full-sized throughout their length. 2. Use buses with tin-plated contact surfaces. 3. Include a tin plated copper bus bar ground bus in panelboard rated. 4. Full size (100% rated) insulated neutral bus shall be included in the panel board, shown with neutral. 200% rated neutral bus shall be supplied for panels designated on the drawings. 5. The ground and neutral bus shall be at least one terminal screw for each circuit. 6. Provide through feed or sub feed lugs where indicated. 7. Provide lugs and connection points on phase, neutral and ground bus suitable for copper conductors. 8. Spaces for future circuit breakers shall be bussed for the maximum devices that can be fitted. FTWH1101 16445-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION PANELBOARDS-DISTRIBUTION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS AND BRANCH CIRCUIT Contract No.01632 B. Size bars as indicated and brace them to withstand the available symmetrical short circuit current. C. Installation: 1. Install buses in allotted spaces so that devices can be added without additional machining, drilling or tapping. 2. Mount neutral bars, as required, on the opposite end of the main lugs. 2.03 PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Circuit Breakers: Provide circuit breakers for the specified service with the number of poles and ampere ratings indicated. All breakers 250A and above shall be 100% rated. 1. Provide breakers which are quick-make and quick-break on both manual and automatic operation. 2. Use a trip-free trip indicating breaker. 3. Incorporate inverse time characteristic by bimetallic overload elements and instantaneous characteristic by magnetic trip. Where indicated, provide ground fault circuit breakers (GFCB). 4. For 2-pole and 3-pole breakers, use the common-trip type so that an overload or fault on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Handle ties are not acceptable. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, provide circuit breakers with the following interrupting ratings: a. Each circuit breaker used in 120/208 Volt panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than 22,000 Amps, RMS symmetrical. b. Each circuit breaker used in 277/480 Volt and 480 Volt panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than 22,000 Amps, RMS symmetrical. c. GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter) shall be provided for circuits where shown on the drawings. GFCI units shall be 1 Pole, 120 Volt, molded case, bolt-on breakers, incorporating a solid state ground fault interrupter circuit insulated and isolated from the breaker mechanism. The unit shall be UL listed Class A Group I device (5 milliamp sensitivity, 25 millisecond trip time) and an interrupting capacity of 22,000 Amps, RMS. d. Circuit breakers shall be as manufactured by the panelboard manufacturer. 6. Connect breakers to the main bus by means of a solidly bolted connection. 7. Use breakers which are interchangeable, capable of being operated in any position within the panel. 8. Independently mount breakers so that a single unit can be removed from the front of the panel without disturbing or removing main bus, other units or other branch circuit connections. 9. Provide individual breaker handle lock for all circuits that supply exit signs, -- emergency lights, and fire alarm panels. 10. Provide GFI circuit breakers for heat trace circuit. The rating shall be as per NEC. FfWH1101 16445-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 i+ SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION PANELBOARDS-DISTRIBUTION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS AND BRANCH CIRCUIT Contract No.01632 = B. Surge Suppressor 1. All the 480V panelboard shall be provided with Surge Protective Device in accordance with Specification 16289. C. Service Entrance 1. The panelboard shall have a connection for housing and grounding neutral - conductor. 2. Provide a UL label for the panelboard. 2.04 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION Y A. Directory: 1. For each panelboard, provide a directory frame mounted inside the door with a heat-resistant transparent face and a directory card for identifying the load served. 2. Type directory as specified in Section 16010. B. Nameplate: 1. Provide a black on white nameplate on the face of the panelboard using the following as an example: Panel HA 277/480V, 30, 4W - Feeder from MCC-B/Section 2. The nameplate shall have a minimum thickness of 1/8". 2.05 LISTING A. UL 67 - Electric Panelboards. -- 2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are General Electric, Siemens, Square D and Cutler Hammer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in the locations as shown and as recommended in NEMA PB1.1. B. In wet and corrosive areas, including outdoor locations, install stainless steel 316 panelboard enclosures on Type 316 stainless steel unistrut support to provide - clearance behind the mounting surface. C. In wet and corrosive areas, including outdoor locations, connect conduits to the �- bottom of the enclosure and to the lower 30 percent of the sides. D. All conduit connections shall be by use of Myers hub. FTWH1101 16445-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION PANELBOARDS-DISTRIBUTION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS AND BRANCH CIRCUIT Contract No.01632 3.02 MOUNTING HEIGHT A. Install the panelboards such that the center of the switch or circuit breaker in the highest position will not be more than 6-1/2 feet above the floor or working platform. 3.03 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. All copper items, including wiring, terminal blocks, lugs, connectors, bus, etc., shall be tin plated copper. B. All steel shall be primed and painted as specified. Galvanized items shall also be painted. .� C. All hardware, including nuts, bolts, washers, screws, anchor bolts, door hinges, etc., shall be made of 316 stainless steel. D. The panelboard steel parts shall be cleaned and sprayed in control cleaning solutions by a multi-stage spray washer. The operation shall produce a coating of a minimum of 150 milligrams per square foot to meet MIL Specification TT-C490. The primed metal parts shall be electrostatically coated with power paint to a thickness of 2.5mils. The paint finish shall withstand a minimum of 1000 hours salt spray test. END OF SECTION .r FfWH1101 16445-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 �r SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION PANELBOARDS-DISTRIBUTION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS AND BRANCH CIRCUIT Contract No.01632 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install grounding and bonding equipment for the electrical system. It is the intention of this specification that all electrical equipment be grounded. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete grounding system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. ANSI/IEEE Standard 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 2. ANSI/UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal shall be in accordance with Division 1 and shall include: 1. Grounding materials, equipment and processes. 2. Product Data: For each type of product supplied. 3. Field quality-control test reports. B. Submittal shall be clearly marked showing only equipment provided. Mark through equipment option not provided. C. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. D. Submit a I etter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. FfWH1101 16450-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUNDING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Measure the ground grid resistance with the earth test megger and install additional ground rods and conductors as required until the resistance to the ground conforms to National Electrical Code requirements. Ground resistance measurement shall not exceed 5 ohms. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUND RODS A. Material: GROUND RODS: Copper-clad, having a diameter of 3/4" and a mi nimum length of 10'. B. Listing: UL 467. 2.02 GROUND CABLES A. Stranded, bare tinned copper of 98% conductivity and as specified in Section 16120 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLES. 2.03 CONDUIT GROUND FITTINGS A. Fittings for bonding ground cable to the conduit shall be FCI Bumdy Corp., type NE or -- Thomas & Betts No. 3951 series. 2.04 GROUND ROD BOXES R A. Precast Box with cast iron lid. Lid shall read "ground rod" on lid. Brooks Precast Model "3-RT" or approved equal. Ground rod boxes located in driveway areas shall have an AASHO H-20 rating. 2.05 GROUND PLATE ELECTRODES A. 20 gauge copper with terminated two (2) foot welded pigtail connection. 2.06 CONNECTIONS A. Type: 1. Unless otherwise noted, provide exothermic weld type for all non-accessible and below-grade connections. 2. For above grade connections provide bonds and clamps of a nonferrous material which will not cause electrolytic action between the conductor and the connector. B. Listing: UL 467 C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Below grade: Cadweld, Thermoweld 2. Above grade: a. Burndy b. Ilsco FTWH1101 16450-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUNDING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS F Contract No.01632 c. OZ/Gedney d. T& B 2.07 CERTIFICATION A. Contractor shall receive from the manufacturer proper training prior to execute the exhotermic weld connection. 2.08 WIRING A. Provide copper insulated conductors for bonding jumpers. All insulated grounding conductors shall be copper, stranded. 1. Provide 600-volt insulated conductors having a green-colored XHHW insulation for equipment grounding conductors. 2. Ground conductors shall be protected in conduit where subject to physical damage. 3. All exposed ground conductors shall be installed in conduits. Ground conductor attached to cable trays shall not be considered exposed. 2.09 GROUND BUS A. Round-edge tin plated copper bar with 98 percent International Annealed Copper Standard (IACS) conductivity. B. Size the bus for not less than 25 percent of the cross-sectional area of the related feeder. C. A minimum ground bus size of 3-inch by 2 inches is required. 2.10 GROUNDING FOR INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM w A. Ground Loop for instrumentation system shall be grounded at only one point to the building ground system. 2.11 GROUND LOOP A. All ground loop conductor shall be bare copper minimum wire size shall be #4/0 unless otherwise noted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SYSTEM GROUND A. System Neutral: 1. Where a system neutral is used, ground the system neutral conductor as required by NEC Article 250. 2. Ground the system neutral only at the point of service and isolate it from ground at all other points in the system. 0.0 B. Separately Derived Systems: Ground neutrals of separately derived systems such as generators, transformers, etc., in accordance with NEC 250-30. FTWH1101 16450-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 w SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUNDING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS w Contract No.01632 4 C. Size: Size the system grounding conductors to comply with NEC Table 250-66, unless shown larger. 3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUND A. Raceway Systems and Equipment Enclosures: 1. Ground cabinets, junction boxes, outlet boxes, motors, controllers, raceways, fittings, switchgear, transformer enclosures, handrail, stair, steel pipe and other equipment and metallic enclosures. 2. Ground equipment and enclosures to the continuous-grounded, metallic raceway _ system in addition to any other specific grounding shown. 3. Provide bonding jumpers and ground wire throughout to ensure electrical continuity of the grounding system. 4. Provide grounding-type insulated bushings for metal conduits terminating in equipment enclosures containing a ground bus and connect the bushing to the ground bus. 5. Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor for each feeder, power ` branch circuit, receptacle branch circuit and lighting branch circuit. 6. Raceways shall not be used for equipment ground. Provide individual equipment ground wires for all equipment even if not shown on plans. - 7. Provide bonding jumper and bonding bushing on each metallic conduit entering or leaving the enclosure of the service equipment. 8. Where grounding conductors are shown, bond the wires to metallic enclosures at each end and to intermediate metallic enclosures. Connect grounding conductors to grounding bushings on raceway. Where any equipment contains a ground bus, extend and connect grounding conductors to that bus. Run ground conductor inside conduits enclosing the power conductors. 9. Make connections of any grounding conductors to motors 1/2 HP and above, or circuits 20 amps or above, by solderless terminal and a 5/16-inch minimum bolt tapped to the motor frame or equipment housing. Grounding clips mounted directly on the box, or with 3/8-inch machine screws. Completely remove all paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at grounding conductor to connection points so that good metal-to-metal contact is made. 10. Ground metal sheathing and any exposed metal vertical structural elements of buildings. Ground metal fences enclosing electrical equipment. Bond any metal equipment platforms which support electrical equipment to that equipment. + Provide good electrical contact between metal frames and railings supporting pushbutton stations, receptacles, instrument cabinets, etc., and raceways carrying circuits to these devices. - 11. Bond neutrals of transformers to the system ground network, and to any additional indicated grounding electrodes. B. Size: 1. When grounding and bonding conductors are not sized on drawings, size the grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-122. - 2. Size bonding jumper so that minimum cross-sectional area is greater than or equal to that of the equivalent grounding conductor as determined from NEC Table 250-122. r FTWH1101 16450-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUNDING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 C. Install sufficient ground rods in addition to those shown, or code required grounding so that resistance to ground as tested by standard methods does not exceed 1 ohm. Where more than one rod is required, install rods at least 6 feet apart. 3.03 GROUND CONNECTIONS A. Unless shown otherwise, make connections of grounding conductors to ground rods at the upper end of the rod with the end of the rod and the connection point below finished grade. B. Make connections of sections of outdoor ground mats (counterpoise) for substations or other equipment underground. Make connections of other grounding conductors generally accessible. C. When making thermite welds, wire blush or file the point of contact to a bare metal surface. Use thermite welding cartridges and molds in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. After welds have been made and cooled, brush slag from the weld area and thoroughly clean the joint. For compression connectors, use homogeneous copper, anti-corrosion, surface treatment compound at connectors in accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations. Use connectors of proper size for conductors and ground rods specified. Use connector manufacturer's compression tool. Notify Engineer prior to backfilling any ground connections. 3.04 FIELD TEST A. The testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 16060. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 16450-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 M+ SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- GROUNDING MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16460 ENERGY EFFICIENT LIGHTING AND DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS, MEDIUM VOLTAGE PRIMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dry-type energy efficient transformers with primary and secondary voltages of 5000V and less and capacity ratings 15kVA through 750kVA. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. NEMA ST20— Dry Type Transformers for General Applications. C. UL 1561 — Dry Type General Purpose and Power Transformers. D. NEMA TP1 —Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers. E. NEMA TP2 — Standard Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Distribution Transformers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ■ A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Dimension drawing and weight 2. Technical certification sheet ` 3. Conduit entry/exit locations 4. Transformer ratings including: a. Primary and secondary kVA b. Voltage c. Taps d. Primary and secondary continuous current e. Basic Impulse level for equipment over 600-volts f. Impedance g. Insulation class and temperature rise h. Sound level B. Submittal shall be clearly marked showing only equipment provided. Mark through equipment option not provided. C. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. FTWH1101 16460-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ENERGY EFFICIENT LIGHTING AND DISTRIBUTION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS TRANSFORMERS,MEDIUM VOLTAGE PRIMARY Contract No.01632 D. Submit a letter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Transformers 750kVA and smaller shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Conform to the requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. v C. Transformers are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA ST20. D. Transformers losses shall conform to NEMA TP1 requirements E. Transformers losses shall be tested in accord with NEMA TP2 procedures _ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - A. Square D Company. B. ABB. 4 C. Hammond. 2.02 RATINGS INFORMATION A. All insulating materials are to exceed NEMA ST20 standards and be rated for 2200C UL _ component recognized insulation system. B. Transformers 15kVA and larger shall be 1500C temperature rise above 400C ambient. Transformers 25kVA and larger shall have a minimum of 4 - 2.5% full capacity primary taps. Exact voltages and taps to be as designated on the plans or the transformer schedule. C. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 500C rise above a 400C ambient. D. Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiences per NEMA TP1 when operated at 50% of full load capacity. Transformer design shall be energy efficient type compliant to Department of Energy Standard DOE 10 CFR Part 431 Energy Conservation program for Commercial Equipment. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Transformer coils shall be copper wound, of continuous wound construction, and shall be impregnated with non-hygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. FTWH1101 16460-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ENERGY EFFICIENT LIGHTING AND DISTRIBUTION ` MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS TRANSFORMERS,MEDIUM VOLTAGE PRIMARY Contract No.01632 B. All cores to be constructed with low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point to prevent core overheating. Cores for transformers greater than 500kVA shall be clamped utilizing insulated bolts through the core laminations to ensure proper pressure throughout the length of the core. The completed core and coil shall be bolted to the base of the enclosure but isolated by means of rubber vibration-absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal-to- metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure except for a flexible safety ground strap. Sound isolation systems requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable. C. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable UL and NEC 4 standards. D. The transformer enclosures shall be ventilated and be fabricated of heavy gauge, sheet steel construction. The entire enclosure shall be finished utilizing a continuous process consisting of degeasing, cleaning and phosphatizing, followed by electrostatic deposition of polymer polyester powder coating and baking cycle to provide uniform coating of all edges and surfaces. The coating shall be UL recognized for outdoor use. The coating color shall be ANSI 49. E. Primary winding BIL shall be 20kV. Secondary winding BIL shall be 10kV. 2.04 SOUND LEVELS A. Sound levels shall be warranted by the manufacturer not to exceed the following: 15 to 300kVA - 58dB; 301 to 500kVA - 60dB; 501 to 700kVA - 64dB; 701 to 1000kVA- 64dB; 1001 to 1500kVA - 65dB; 1501 to 2000kVA- 66dB 2.05 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES A. Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FLOOR MOUNTING A. Construct concrete pad for floor-mounted transformers in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Provisions. B. Maintain a minimum of 6 inches free air space between enclosure and walls. `I 3.02 CABLE CONNECTIONS A. Make transformer cable connections with compression-type lugs suitable for termination of 750C rated conductors. Position lugs so that field connections and wiring will not be exposed to temperature above 75°C. END OF SECTION FTWH1101 16460-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 �+ SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- ENERGY EFFICIENT LIGHTING AND DISTRIBUTION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS TRANSFORMERS,MEDIUM VOLTAGE PRIMARY w Contract No.01632 SECTION 16481 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor and materials necessary for the installation of 480 volts, 3 phase, 3 wire, class IIB motor control center(s) indicated in the Plans and Specifications. B. Any motor control center(s) implied as being provided by a system supplier shall conform in every respect to this section of the Specification unless otherwise specifically indicated in other sections of these Specifications. C. All new section added to the existing MCCs shall be supplied by one of the acceptable manufacturers listed in 2.14. D. New equipment to be installed in the existing MCC shall match the existing MCC make and model and shall follow this specification. E. The manufacturer of the MCC shall also be the manufacturer of the across the line motor starters. The use of third party supply and assembly is not acceptable and will be rejected. F. The wiring diagrams and compartment designations shown on the Plans shall be used in drawing submittal to the extent that the same numbering shall be used for compartment locations and same terminal numbers shall be used. G. No reduction in control center size shall be permitted because a particular manufacturer has ultra miniature components. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: TESTING A. Acceptance testing shall be performed per Section 16060 Acceptance Testing and Calibration. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. ANSI/NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code 3. NEMA ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements 4. NEMA ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC 9W 5. NEMA ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures NEMA ST 20, Dry Type Transformers for General Applications 6. NEMA ICS 18, Motor Control Center(s) 7. UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment (only for devices included in specification) 8. UL 845, Motor Control Centers FfWH1101 16481-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS w Contract No.01632 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in compliance with Division 1. B. Shop Drawings 1. MCC elevations showing dimensional information 2. Structure Descriptions showing - a. Bus ratings b. Enclosure ratings c. Short circuit withstand ratings d. Equipment Weight e. Other information as required for approval 3. Conduit locations 4. Required bus splices 5. Anchor Bolts location Drawings 6. Unit descriptions including starter sizes, circuit breaker frame sizes, circuit breaker continuous ampere ratings, pilot devices, etc. 7. Nameplate information - 8. Schematic wiring diagrams 9. One-Line Diagram C. Product Data 1. Motor Control Center(s) Publications 2. Data sheets and publications on all major components including but not limited to the following a. Motor starters b. Circuit breaker and fuse information including time current characteristics c. Current, potential and power transformer curves d. Pilot devices e. Relays D. Specification Response 1. Detailed response to this specification showing where in the literature each requirement is satisfied. 2. All clarifications and exceptions must be clearly identified. E. Test Reports 1. A copy of the test reports shall be provided as part of the final documentation. F. Installation Instructions 1. Provide a copy of the manufacturer's installation instructions that includes the following a. General description for reading nameplate data, serial numbers, UL markings and short circuit ratings b. Installation procedures including splicing procedures FrWH1101 16481-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 c. Conduit and cable installation d. Installing and removing plug-in units e. Operation of operator handles and unit interlocks f. Checklist before energizing g. Procedure for energizing equipment h. Maintenance procedures G. 0&M manual submittals a, 1. Submittals shall be in compliance with Division 1. 2. The contractor shall provide certification that the MCC has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3. The contractor shall provide certification that all circuit breaker settings have been adjusted per field requirements. 4. The contractor shall provide certification that all power fuses have been selected and installed per field requirements. 5. The contractor shall provide certification that all solid state motor overload settings have been adjusted per installed motor characteristics. 6. The contractor shall provide certification that any timing devices required in the starting circuitry have been properly adjusted. 7. Final Drawings. The manufacturer shall provide final drawings reflecting the "As- Shipped" status of the MCC. The contractor shall be responsible for making any changes to the "As-Shipped" drawings from the manufacturer to reflect any field modifications. 8. Maintenance Data a. MCC installation instructions b. Installation / Operation instructions for major components such as automatic transfer switch, circuit breakers, etc. c. MCC spare parts listing and pricing d. Name and phone number for a local distributor for the spare parts. H. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. 1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The contractor shall coordinate the shipping splits with the MCC manufacturer for entry into the building. B. The contractor shall store the MCCs in a clean, dry and heated space. C. The contractor shall protect the units from dirt, water, construction debris and traffic. D. During storage the contractor shall connect internal space heaters (if specified) with temporary power. E. The MCC shall have weatherproof nonporous extra heavy duty plastic covers at all times, until it is ready for test and start-up. FfWH1101 16481-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 F. MCCs are to be shipped with external lifting angles at the top and running continuously for each shipping split. Lifting eyelets are not acceptable. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of acceptance or 2 1/2 years from shipment _ of motors whichever happens first. Cost for the removal, shipment, repair, and installation by Contractor shall be included in warranty, as well as correction of defective work. C. The Manufacturer shall confirm this warranty as part of the submittal. 1.07 SPARE MATERIALS A. Provide three of each size power fuse utilized. B. Provide spare fuses equal to 10% of the installed quantity for primary and secondary control power transformer protection. C. Provide one spare starter for each NEMA size provided on the project.D. Provide one can of spray touch-up paint. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The MCC shall be of the latest design of the manufacturer. 1. Eaton / Cutler Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Siemens. 4. Schneider Electric/ Square D. 2.02 ENCLOSURE A. Indoor MCC Construction: - 1. The enclosure of one or more rigid, freestanding sheet metal vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid NEMA 12 assembly. Use not less than No. 14 gauge, cold-rolled metal. 2. Grind smooth any imperfections, such as welding splatter, sharp edges, burrs, etc., before finishing. 3. Make each vertical section nominally 20 inches wide, 20 inches deep and 90 inches high, unless noted otherwise. 4, Provide doors with substantial vertical hinges, permitting them to swing out. FFWH1101 16481-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 S. Provide a defeatable mechanical interlock that prevents doors from being opened when disconnecting means is in closed position. 6. Provide a hinged wireway the full height of each vertical section for component wiring installation. 7. Construct the enclosure according to NEMA 12, gasketed dust tight requirements. 8. Structural steel base channels and lifting angles shall be provided, to facilitate handling of the motor control center(s). B. Component Isolation: Mount each component, such as a circuit breaker, combination starter, dry-type transformer or branch circuit panel in a separate compartment and effectively isolate from adjacent units, including buses. Make each component readily accessible and removable from the front of the cubicle. 4 C. Cable Entrance: Make provisions for top and bottom cable entrances for all motor control centers. 2.03 INCOMING LINE SECTION MAIN MCC A. One Main Circuit Breaker 1. Electronic trip, full function 100% rated, motor operated circuit breaker. a. Individually fixed mounted. (i) Motor operated circuit breakers shall have power terminals to accommodate either cable or bolted bus connections. (ii) Provide the following time/current curve shaping adjustments to maximize system selective coordination. Each adjustment shall have discrete settings and each function is independent from all other adjustments. (a) LSIG: (1) Adjustable Long Time Ampere Rating and Delay. (2) Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay with I2t"IN" ramp. (3) Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup. (4) Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup and Delay. (5) High Level Override (iii) Circuit breaker shall display phase current of A, B, and C phases and ground fault (when applicable) in real time. Circuit breaker shall contain trip indicators which shall indicate that the circuit breaker has tripped as a result of overcurrent, short circuit, or ground fault. (iv) Terminations (a) All lugs shall be UL listed to accept stranded copper conductors. Lugs shall be suitable for 750C rated wire, temperature rating tables in the NEC. (b) All circuit breakers shall be UL listed to accept field installable/removable mechanical type lugs. (c) All circuit breakers shall be suitable for bus connection. t 2. Provide MCC configuration as shown on contract drawings. FfWH1101 16481-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 W6J SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3. Provide a Power Quality Meter, GE Multilin PQM II, Square D PM870 or approved - equal by the following manufacturers: Schweitzer, Basler, Siemens and Eaton. a. The information displayed by the Power Meter shall include the following quantities: ! (i) Current, per phase. (ii) Volts, phase-to-phase and phase-neutral. (iii) Real Power (kW), three-phase total. (iv) Reactive Power(kVAR), three-phase total. (v) Apparent Power (kVA), three-phase total. �. (vi) Power Factor, true, per-phase &three-phase total. (vii) Frequency. (viii) Current Demand, per- phase and neutral, present and peak. (ix) Real Power Demand (kWd), three- phase total, preset and peak. (x) Reactive Power Demand (kVARd), three- phase total, preset and peak. (xi) Apparent Power Demand (kVAd), three- phase total, preset and peak. - (xii) Real Energy (kVah), three- phase total. (xiii) Reactive Energy (kVARh), three- phase total. (xiv) Apparent Energy (kVAh), three- phase total. (xv) Energy Accumulation Modes signed absolute, energy in, energy out. (xvi) Watt-hour KYZ Pulse Initiator Output. -- (xvii) Total Harmonic Distortion, Voltage. (xviii) Total Harmonic Distortion, Current. (xix) Date/Time Stamping. (xx) Communications port for Power Monitoring Systems communications and Modbus RTU communications. b. The Power Meter shall be accurate to .25% for voltage and current sensing, .50% for power, energy, & demand sensing, and 1% for power factor sensing. c. All information stored in the Power Meter shall be remotely accessible v through data communications. d. The Power Meter shall be UL listed, rated for an operating temperature range of 0°C to 550C and have an overcurrent withstand rating of 500 amps for 1 second. e. The Power Meter metering inputs shall utilize industry standard current - transformers (5A secondary CT's), have VT inputs for direct connection of VT leads to up to 600V, and adhere to UL standard 508 for dielectric voltage withstand. 2.04 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) A. Shall be internal to the MCC as shown on contract drawing. - B. Refer to section 16289. FrWH1101 16481-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.05 BUS STRUCTURE A. Materials: • 1. Bar: a. Fabricate buses from 98 percent IACS conductive copper. b. Tin plated. c. Use full lap construction and make main bus connections using a minimum of two bolts. 2. Cable: Tinned copper, sized according to the NEC. 3. Bracing: Adequate to withstand mechanical forces exerted during a short circuit directly from a source with an available fault current greater than the value indicated on drawings, or 65,000 rms amperes symmetrical, minimum. B. Main Bus: 1. Located at top. Extended full length of MCC. 2. Rated at 600 amperes unless otherwise indicated. 3. Arranged to allow future extensions. 4. Tin plated copper with insulated bus barriers. C. Vertical Buses: Tin plated copper sized as required but not less than 300 amperes. Provide insulated bus barriers to reduce hazard of accidental contact. Small separate openings in the barriers shall permit unit stab-in contacts to pass through to engage the vertical bus bars. D. Ground Bus: 1. Provide a continuous tin plated copper ground bus for entire length of the enclosure. 2. Arranged to allow future extensions. 3. Ground motor control center(s) parts which do not carry current. 4. Terminations must be of an approved pressure connector type. E. Neutral Bus: Where shown on drawings, provide fully rated tin plated copper vertical bus continuous throughout the MCC. 2.06 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Type: 1. Provide thermal magnetic type (motor circuit protectors not acceptable) circuit breakers, which are quick-make and quick-break on both manual and automatic operation. All breakers 250A and above shall be 100% rated, solid state trip type with adjustable long type pickup and delay, short time pickup and delay and instantaneous pickup. 2. Provide a trip-free trip indicating breaker. 3. Incorporate inverse time characteristics by bimetallic overload elements and instantaneous characteristic by magnetic trip. 4. For 2-pole and 3-pole breakers, provide the common-trip type so that an overload or fault on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. FfWH1101 16481-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 5. Handle ties are not acceptable. 6. All breakers shall have 42,000 amperes interrupting rating, unless indicated higher on plans. B. Operators: Provide breaker operators mounted through the panel door and permitting operation of the breaker with the door closed. 2.07 STARTERS A. T pe: _ 1 Provide magnetic, full voltage, nonreversing starters unless otherwise indicated. Starter units shall be completely drawout so that units may be withdrawn without disconnecting any wiring. A positive guidance system shall be provided to assure proper alignment of power stabs through vertical bus barriers. 2. Full voltage starter units through NEMA Size 5 shall be the draw up type. Size 6 and larger shall be fixed mounted. B. Overload Relays: Include three ambient-compensated adjustable thermal overload relays, one per phase. C. Contactors: 1. Size contactors according to drawings. Sizes below NEMA 1 are not acceptable. 2. Provide three main poles, the number and type of auxiliary contacts to perform the required functions and two spare auxiliary contacts, one normally open and one normally closed, rated 10 amperes (NEMA contact rating designation A600). 30 Use double break contacts of silver-cadmium oxide or similar material to minimize R sticking or welding. 4 Provide contactor coils suitable for continuous operation at 120 volts, 60 hertz. D. Unless otherwise indicated larger on the drawings, use the following minimum starter sized for motor horsepower and voltage. Under no circumstances shall smaller sizes be used even if mistakenly shown on the drawings; IEC starters shall not be acceptable. _ NEMA Size Starter Horsepower 480 volt _ 1 Up to 7.5 2 20 3 40 4 75 5 100 6 200 2.08 CONTROL POWER SOURCE A. 120 volts for control power shall be obtained with the use of a control power .. transformer. Each starter cubicle shall be equipped with two primary power leads connected to power phases 1 and 2 on the load side of the circuit breaker. Fuse both primary leads using fused pull-out type terminal blocks, appropriately identified. Fuse _ FfWH1101 16481-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) �- MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 the secondary line leading from the transformer terminal X1. Ground the line leaving terminal X2. B. The control power transformer shall be mounted in the respective cubicle and shall be easily accessible. Transformers mounted behind panels shall not be acceptable. 2.09 CONTROL DEVICES A. Provide MCC with control devices as shown on drawings and as indicated below. Miniature type devices shall not be acceptable. 1. Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oil-tight, maintained contact with marked nameplate. 2. Pushbutton Units: Heavy-duty, oil-tight, momentary contact, spring retum, NO or NC, as shown, with marked nameplate. 3. Indicating Lights: a. Pilot light assemblies shall be heavy-duty, LED type with rated life of 20,000 hours. b. Neon lamps are not acceptable. c. Provide red (running) and green (stopped) lenses, plus additional lights as shown. d. Pilot lights shall be push to test type. e. Colored lenses shall be screwed on type and the bulbs shall be replaceable from the outside. 4. Timer Control Relays: Industrial timer control relays having 120-volt, 60-hertz • coils, 10 ampere, 600-volt contacts and an adjustable timing range of approximately 0.3 to 30 seconds, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. S. Control Relays: Industrial control relays having 120-volt, 60-hertz coils, 10 ampere, 600-volt contact. 2.10 OVERLOAD RELAYS A. Provide a normally open contact for motor overload relays which closes when the motor overloads. 2.11 CONTROL WIRING A. Wiring 1. Install and test control and small wiring inside each MCC at the factory, including control wiring, instrument and relay wiring, secondary leads from instrument transformers, etc. 2. Neatly and carefully install wiring in suitable wiring gutters or conduits, using standard 600-volt switchboard type, SIS wire No. 14 AWG or larger. 3. Identify each wire at terminals by means of permanent, sleeve-type wire markers. 4. Secure wiring from hinged doors and panels to enclosure in a manner to allow ample flexibility in bending. S. Make wiring continuous from terminal to terminal, without splices. FTWH1101 16481-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No. 01632 6. NEMA type wiring shall be NEMA 2 B unless otherwise specified on plans. All T wiring shall be done at the factory. Provide terminal blocks for all external wiring. B. Terminals: - 1. Terminate wire on instrument, devices, transformers and terminal blocks by means of fork-tongue connectors under screws, marked in accordance with the manufacturer's wiring diagram. 2, Locate terminal blocks in readily accessible places. 3. Termination blocks and screws shall be tin plated. C. Spare Contacts: Wire spare contacts to suitably identified terminals for external connections and clearly show these connections on shop drawings. D. Spare Terminals: In addition to specified spare contact terminals, provide six spare terminals on each terminal block provided. E. Spare field wiring: Furnish sufficient terminals to terminate all field wires including space wire inside the MCC 2.12 ELAPSED TIME METERS rt A. If indicated on the drawings, provide 5 digit, non-resettable elapsed time meter, which begin keeping time in hours, whenever the motor is running. Miniature type meter shall not be acceptable. 2.13 NAMEPLATES: A. Main Nameplate: Provide MCC nameplate prominently displayed on the front, indicating manufacturer's name, address and shop order number, year manufactured, and the following ratings: - 1. Nominal voltage rating and frequency. 2. Main bus continuous current rating. 3. Maximum 3-phase rms symmetrical short circuit current rating. ! B. Unit Nameplates: 1. Provide each unit with a black-white-black lamacoid name-plate with 3/16-inch high white lettering secured to front of unit by means of oval-head Type 316 stainless steel immediately below switch handle. 2. Actual nameplate legend, which may consist of up to three lines, will be provided by the Owner on shop drawings as approved. 3. Provide a preliminary list of nameplate with samples for approval by Owner. C. Caution Signs: Provide caution signs in accordance with OSHA requirements. FTWH1101 16481-10 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HOUSEKEEPING PAD A. Construct a concrete pad in accordance with Section 16010, Electrical General Provisions. ` 3.02 EQUIPMENT ADJUSTMENT A. Overload Settings: Set overload relays at maximum values permitted by NEC 430-32, -� based on actual installed motor nameplate full load amperes. B. Touch-up Painting: Restore damaged surfaces to factory finish. Deliver to Owner all _* leftover paint in suitably labeled, sealed containers. C. Inspection: Thoroughly inspect motor control center(s) for items such as loose connections and presence of foreign material, and remedy prior to energizing. 3.03 SPECIAL REQUIREMENT A. All copper items, including wiring, cubicle bus stabs, wiring from stabs to breaker, terminal blocks, lugs, connectors, bus, etc., shall be tin plated copper. B. All steel shall be primed and painted as specified. Galvanized items shall also be painted. C. All hardware, including nuts, bolts, washers, screws, anchor bolts, door hinges, etc., shall be made of 316 stainless steel. Screws for mounting nameplate shall be 316 stainless steel. D. The Motor Control Center(s) steel parts shall be cleaned and sprayed in controlled cleaning solutions by a multi-stage spray washer. The operation shall produce a coating of a minimum of 150 milligrams per square foot to meet MIL Specification TT- C-490. The primed metal parts shall be electrostatically coated with powder paint to a thickness of 2.5 mils. The paint finish shall withstand a minimum of 1000 hours salt spray test." E. Every cubicle shall have an as built, Owner approved circuit diagram (schematic) attached to the cubicle door. The wiring diagram shall be protected by clear laminated plastic sealer. 3.04 ACCEPTANCE TESTS A A. Factory Tests: Equipment shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted, and tested at the factory. After complete assembly, each unit shall be tested for operating sequence to assure accuracy of wiring, correctness of control scheme, and functioning of the equipment. B. Tests shall include electrical tests as described by ANSI C 37.20. C. Field acceptance testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 16060. FrWH1101 16481-11 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3.05 MOISTURE PROOFING A. After all connections have been made, spray all terminals, terminal blocks, and starter (with contact closed) with moisture repelling chemical such as manufactured by CHC Corporation or equal. Notify the owner 24 hours prior to spraying each motor control center(s). END OF SECTION FIWH1101 16481-12 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH r3LLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) MOTOR AND S%%;ITCIGEAF� REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16482 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES All A. Medium Voltage Motor Control Center(s) *- 1.02 REFERENCES The medium voltage motor controllers and protection devices in this specification are designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted). A. ANSI C19.3 B. NEMA ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements C. NEMA ICS , Standards for industrial control devices, controllers and assemblies D. NEMA ICS 324 ` E. NEMA ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures F. UL 347, High Voltage Industrial Control Equipment 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Controllers shall be for medium voltage motor and feeder applications specified in this document. 1.04 SUBMITTALS IL A. Submittals shall be in compliance with Division 1. B. Shop Drawings 1. MCC elevations showing dimensional information 2. Structure Descriptions showing a. Bus ratings b. Enclosure ratings c. Short circuit withstand ratings d. Equipment Weight e. Other information as required for approval 3. Conduit locations 4. Required bus splices 5. Anchor Bolts location Drawings 6. Unit descriptions including starter sizes, circuit breaker frame sizes, circuit breaker FfWH1101 16482-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENT CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) Contract No.01632 ,. 7 Continuous ampere ratings, pilot devices, etc. ! 8 Nameplate information 9 Schematic wiring diagrams _ 1 . One-Line Diagram 11. Product Data a. Motor Control Center(s) Publications _ b. Data sheets and publications on all major components including but not limited to the following (i) Motor starters n (ii) Circuit breaker and fuse information including time current characteristics (ill) Current, potential and power transformer curves (iv) Pilot devices - (v) Relays 12. Clearly identify components provided and cross out equipment not part of the submittal. 13. Specification Response a. Detailed response to this specification showing where in the literature each requirement is satisfied. b. All clarifications and exceptions must be clearly identified. C. Test Reports ` 1. A copy of the test reports shall be provided as part of the final documentation. D. Installation Instructions - 1. Provide a copy of the manufacturer's installation instructions that includes the following a. General description for reading nameplate data, serial numbers, UL markings and short circuit ratings b. Installation procedures including splicing procedures c. Conduit and cable installation d. Installing and removing plug-in units e. Operation of operator handles and unit interlocks f. Checklist before energizing g. Procedure for energizing equipment h. Maintenance procedures E. 0&M manual submittals 1. The contractor shall provide certification that the MCC has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. The contractor shall provide certification that all circuit breaker settings have been adjusted per field requirements. 3. The contractor shall provide certification that all power fuses have been selected and installed per field requirements. FrWH1101 16482-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR — MOTOR AND$WITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENT CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) Contract No.01632 4. The contractor shall provide certification that all solid state motor overload settings have adjusted per installed motor characteristics. 5. The contractor shall provide certification that any timing devices required in the starting circuitry have been properly adjusted. 6. Final Drawings. The manufacturer shall provide final drawings reflecting the "As- Shipped" status of the MCC. The contractor shall be responsible for making any changes to the "As-Shipped" drawings from the manufacturer to reflect any field modifications. 7. Maintenance Data a. MCC installation instructions b. Installation / Operation instructions for major components such as automatic transfer switch, circuit breakers, etc. c. MCC spare parts listing and pricing d. Name and phone number for a local distributor for the spare parts. F. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. G. Submit a letter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Drawings and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Contractor to maintain an up-to-date set of Contract documents. Note any and all revisions and deviations that are made during the course of the project. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (QUALIFICATIONS) A. Manufacturer shall have specialized in the manufacture and assembly of medium voltage motor controllers for 15 years. B. Medium voltage motor controllers shall be listed and/or classified by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with standards listed in Article 1.03 of this specification. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The installer shall store, protect, and handle products in accordance with recommended practices listed in manufacturer's Installation and Maintenance Manuals. - B. Deliver each shipping split mounted on shipping skids and wrapped for protection. C. Installer shall inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within specified time. D. Installer shall store motor controller in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory protection or cover with heavy canvas or plastic to keep out dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. (Heat enclosures to prevent condensation.) FIWH1101 16482-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENT CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) Contract No.01632 E. Installer shall handle motor controller in accordance with NEMA ICS and manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damaging equipment, installed devices, and finish. Lift only by installed lifting eyes. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS (SITE ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS) A. The Contractor shall follow (standards) service conditions before, during and after _ motor controller installation. B. Medium voltage motor controllers shall be located in well-ventilated areas, free from excess humidity, dust and dirt and away from hazardous materials. Ambient temperature of area will be between zero and plus 40 degrees C. Indoor locations shall be protected to prevent moisture from entering enclosure. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of acceptance or 2 1/2 years from shipment - of motors whichever happens first. Cost for the removal, shipment, repair, and installation by CONTRACTOR shall be included in warranty, as well as correction of defective work. C. The manufacturer shall confirm this warranty as part of the submittal. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. The Installer shall make all necessary field measurements to verify that equipment _ shall fit in allocated space in full compliance with minimum required clearances specified in National Electrical Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS Y 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. General Electric. 4 B. Siemens. C. Schneider Electric/ Square D. D. Eaton / Cutler Hammer 2.02 EQUIPMENT Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components; ! current ratings of devices, bus bars, and components; voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. FTWH1101 16482-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENT CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) Contract No.01632 A. Controllers shall be NEMA Class E2 high-voltage with ratings as indicated in drawings. B. Enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1, gasketed. C. For personnel safety, enclosure(s) shall have: low-voltage control compartment with separate door; high voltage compartment with separate interlocked door; ac bus compartment with protective barriers; and cable entrance compartment. D. Arrange load terminations for cable connections as indicated. E. Incoming cables shall enter enclosure via bus connection. Cables shall be separated from high and low voltage compartments by barriers unless in a dedicated incoming section. F. Motor Control Center(s) manufacturer shall be responsible for providing transition section between switchgear and MCC. MCC manufacturer shall be the same 4 manufacturer as the switchgear. Transition between switchgear and MCC shall be bus connection. Lineups to be rear aligned with switchgear. G. Motor cables shall enter enclosure at the bottom. Cables shall be separated from high and low voltage compartments by barriers. H. Provide fused disconnect switches with latch contactor sized as recommended by the power system study for connection to a station service transformer. I. Enclosure: 1-high line-up of NEMA type 1 enclosure(s) with 3-phase horizontal ac power bus rated as indicated in drawings in back to back configuration. E J. Bus bars shall be full sized and rated as indicated in drawings. K. Provide only one starter contactor per section. • 2.03 CONTROLS A. General 1. Control power at 120 volts shall be provided from a control power transformer in each controller. Transformer shall be protected by current-limiting fuses. 2. Controls shall provide instantaneous undervoltage protection when a momentary contact push-button is used and provide undervoltage release when a maintained contact switch is used. Push-button and Switch shall be mounted on door. 3. Each control shall be protected against single-phasing due to blown fuses and shall have blown fuse indication. Blown fuse indicator shall be mounted on controller door. 4. Controls shall be drawout vacuum break. �A 5. Motor starter types shall be: Full Voltage Non-Reversing (FVNR). FfWH1101 16482-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENT CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) Contract No.01632 Y B. Vacuum Contactor Controllers 1. Controllers shall be 400 ampere, 2400 Volts for the 900 HP Pump starter and the future pump starter and 800 ampere, 2400 Volts for the 2000 Hp pumps. -- 21 Controller(s) shall be fused type with current-limiting power fuses that provide an interrupting rating of 31.5Kaic minimum. 3. Starter(s) shall use vacuum contactor(s) rated as recommended per power system study. 4. Power bus shall be braced for 50 KA RMS symmetrical. 5 Vacuum contactor shall have drawout connections or shall be easily removable from the rest of the assembly. 6 Controller shall be isolated by a non-load-break quick-make quick-break isolation switch operated by an externally mounted handle. Isolation switch shall open { control power transformer secondary before opening main circuit. Mechanical interlocks shall be provided to prevent: a. Inadvertent operation of isolation switch under load; b. Opening high voltage compartment door when isolation switch is ON; c. Closing isolation switch with high voltage compartment door open; d. Operating contactor with isolation switch in intermediate position; e. Closing line contactor with door open. 7. Controllers rated 400 amperes up to 7.2 KV and 800 amperes up to 5 KV shall be — rated 60 KV Basic Impulse Level (BIL). Control power transformer and autotransformer may be rated 25 KV BIL. C. Options: Solid state OL relay. 2.04 DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAYS A. GE Multilin SR469 or approved equal by the following manufacturers: Schweitzer, Basler, Siemens, Square D and Eaton. B. GE Multilin SR750 or approved equal by the following manufacturers: Schweitzer, Basler, Siemens, Square D and Eaton.C. Protection relay shall have Ethernet Module with Modbus TCP IP. 2.05 BUS STRUCTURE A. Materials: 1. Bar: a. Fabricate buses from 98 percent IACS conductive copper. b. Tin plated c. Use full lap construction and make main bus connections using a minimum of two bolts. 2. Cable: Tinned copper, sized according to the NEC. FfWH1101 16482-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENT CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) Contract No.01632 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. UL listed current limiting power fuses B. Hand-Off-Auto selector switch for automatic starting from pilot devices. C. Furnish nameplates for each starter device as indicated in drawings and specified in Section 16012. D. Furnish accessory as required per control diagram. E. All relays, indicating lights, push buttons shall be industrial rated oil tight, minimum size shall be 30 mm. 2.07 FINISH A. The motor controller steel parts shall be cleaned and sprayed in controlled cleaning solutions by a 7-stage spray washer. The operation shall produce an iron phosphate coating of a minimum of 150 milligrams per square foot to meet MIL Specification 17- C-490. The primed metal parts shall be electrostatically coated with powder paint consisting of 670-011 ANSI-61 Acrylic Paint (Light Gray) with a gloss of 60 plus or minus 5 and thickness of 2.5 mils. The paint finish shall withstand a minimum of 1000 hours salt spray test. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install motor control centers. B. Check concrete pads for uniformity and level surface. ., C. Verify that medium voltage motor controllers are ready to install. D. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings. E. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location and ready for use. F. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install per manufacturer's instructions. Install required safety labels. B. Contractor shall furnish and completely install all motor control centers as shown on drawings and described in these specifications and in NEC. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed medium voltage motor controllers for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. FTWH1101 16482-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENT CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) Contract No.01632 B. Test the MCC in accordance with Section 16060. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust all switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and / or electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. Adjust relay trip and time delay settings to values determined by coordination study. ! 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean interiors of motor controller sections to remove construction debris, dirt, and shipping materials. B. Repaint scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION FIWH1101 16482-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR —• MOTOR AND$WITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENT CONTROL CENTERS(MCC) Contract No.01632 SECTION 16600 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install complete lighting system, including lighting fixtures, switches, and all accessories and appurtenances as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. The following standard shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. ANSI C78— Fluorescent Lamps. 2. ANSI C78 — High-Intensity-Discharge Lamps. 3. ANSI C78 — Incandescent Lamps. 4. ANSI C82— Lamp Ballasts. 5. ANSI/UL 844 — Safety Standard for Electrical Lighting Fixtures for Use in hazardous Locations. 6. ANSI/UL 935 —Safety Standard for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. 7. ANSI/UL 1029 — High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts. 8. NEMA FA 1 —Outdoor Floodlighting Equipment. 9. NEMA LE 1 — Fluorescent Luminaires. 10. NEMA LE 3 — Manual for High-Intensity-Discharge (H-I-D) Lamps. 11. UL 57 — Electric Lighting Fixtures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings showing complete construction details for all equipment in compliance with Division 1 - General Provisions. B. Provide bill of material for equipment being provided. C. Provide shop drawings on the light fixtures clearly identifying the make and model number being provided. D. Provide project specific wiring control schematic for lighting contactor. See plans for more information. A generic control schematic is not acceptable. E. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lighting fixtures shall be in compliance with the National Electrical Code, and shall be constructed in compliance with the Underwriters' Laboratories "Standards for Safety, Electric Lighting Fixtures". Lighting fixtures shall be Underwriters' Laboratories labeled. FTWH1101 16600-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION LIGHTING ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lighting Fixtures: Lighting fixture types shall be as shown in the "Lighting Fixture Schedule" on the drawings. The catalog numbers listed are given as a guide to the design and quality of fixtures desired. Equivalent designs and equal quality fixtures of _ other approved manufacturers shall be acceptable. B. Lamps: 1, Fluorescent lamps shall be T8 bi-pin and program start, standard cool white with wattage rating as indicated in the "Fixture Schedule". 2. Fluorescent ballasts shall be Class P, electronic programmed-start, high power factor, have a minimum ballast factor of 0.85, CBM certified by E.T.L., and listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. for operation on 60Hz and voltage indicated in the "Fixture Schedule". 3. Emergency ballasts for fluorescent fixtures shall consist of a battery, charger, and electronic circuitry contained in a single, compact enclosure, and shall be as indicated in the "Fixture Schedule". Test switch and charging indicator light shall be externally mounted on fixture housing. 4. High intensity discharge (H.I.D.) lamps shall be deluxe white, or clear, of the size and type as specified in the "Lighting Fixture Schedule" on the drawings. S. High intensity discharge (H.I.D.) ballasts shall be of the constant wattage auto- transformer type, high power factor for Metal Halide lamps. All ballasts shall be of the correct size and voltage for the fixture it is to serve as specified in the "Lighting Fixture Schedule" on the drawings. ` 6. HID fixtures ballast noise under loaded conditions shall not exceed 55 dbA at three feet from each ballast. 7. All HID lamp sockets shall be mogul base, porcelain screw shell. C. Lighting Contactor 1. Lighting contactor below 60A shall be of the electrically operated, electrically held type mounted in NEMA 1, enclosures (except where noted otherwise on the Drawings) with number of poles as noted on the Drawings. Operating coils shall be rated for 120 Volts unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings and shall be for ` momentary operation. Provide with "Hand-Off-Auto" switch on cover where shown on the Drawings. 2. Contactors shall be rated for 30 Amps, 600 VAC and shall be Automatic Switch Co., Bulletin 917 RC, similar by Square D Co.; or approved equal. 3. See control schematic in plans for more details. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Verify that the lighting fixtures are compatible with the specified ceiling systems as indicated on the architectural drawings. _ FfWH1101 16600-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLL WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION LIGHTING ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 B. Advise the Engineer of any discrepancies before placing the lighting fixture order. 3.02 LIGHTING INSTALLATION A. Fixtures must be completely wired and lamps installed. B. Lighting fixtures must be operating properly at final completion. C. Provide hangers and support members for fixtures as required for proper installation. D. Provide appurtenances which include stud supports, stems, mounting brackets, frames, and plaster rings. E. Support fixtures from the building structure, or from furring channels. Furring channels must be a minimum of 1-1/2 inches wide. F. Flexible metal conduit from junction box to lighting fixture shall not touch the ceiling as finally installed. END OF SECTION .R FfWH1101 16600-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 = SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION LIGHTING ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 16700 COMMON CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install a functional control panel to operate the control system as specified in the detailed mechanical equipment requirements of this Section. B. Obtain all required control descriptions and data from the detailed mechanical equipment requirements to this Section, the System Description and the control schematic diagrams on the Electrical Contract Drawings. C. Provide control system engineering to produce custom elementary drawings showing interwiring and interlocking with remote devices. D. All control devices, unless specified otherwise, shall be mounted in the control panel. E. This section includes control panels supported by equipment manufacturers to manually or automatically operate the mechanical equipment. *_ 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, shop drawings and product data for the following: 1. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation, plan and interior views, front panel arrangement, dimensions, weight, shipping splits, conduit entrances and anchor bolt pattern. Indicate all options, special features, ratings and deviations from this Section. F urnish complete Bill of Materials indicating manufacturer's part numbers. 2. Power and control schematics including external connections. Sh ow wire and terminal numbers and color coding. 3. Instruction and replacement parts books. 4. Certified shop test reports. 5. As-built final drawings. 6. Field tests and inspection reports. B. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. FfWH1101 16700-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- COMMON CONTROL PANEL MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT Contract No.01632 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A factory authorized service and parts organization shall be able to respond to any service call for the project within 8 h ours. Provide the name and address of the } factory authorized service and parts organization nearest to the project location at the time of the bid. B. Equipment components and devices shall be UL labeled to the extent possible wherever UL standards exist for such equipment. C. The control panel manufacturer shall demonstrate at least three years of continuous " field operating experience in control panel design and fabrication. Submit customer/user list with telephone numbers, addresses and names of customer/user representatives. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Refer to the detailed mechanical equipment specifications for description of system } operation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Package the control panel for maximum protection during delivery and storage. B. Store the control panel indoors in a clean, dry, heated storage facility until ready for installation. Do not install the control panel in its final location until the facilities are permanently weather tight. Protect the control panel at all times from exposure to } moisture, chemicals, hydrogen sulfide and chlorine gas. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. The control panel shall consist of a main circuit breaker, a combination motor circuit protector (MCP), magnetic starter and overload relay for each motor, a 120 volt control power transformer with two fuses on the primary and one fuse on the secondary. All control components shall be mounted in one common enclosure. Control switches shall be provided to operate each motor either manually or automatically. - 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period no less than the controlled equipment warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RATING A. The control panel shall operate on a power supply as indicated on drawings. B. The overall withstand and interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall not _ be less than 42,000 amperes R.M.S, symmetrical at 480 Volts. All circuit breakers and FTWH1101 16700-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- COMMON CONTROL PANEL MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT Contract No.01632 combination motor starters shall be fully rated for the above fault current interrupting capacity. Series connected short circuit ratings will not be acceptable. C. The complete control panel assembly shall be UL certified or carry a UL listing for "Industrial Control Panels. D. The control panel shall meet all applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code. E. The control panel enclosure shall be in accordance with the electrical area classification indicated on the Electrical Contract Drawings. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. The main circuit breaker shall be a thermal-magnetic molded case breaker, Type FCL. Provide a flange mounted main power disconnect operating handle with mechanical interlock having a bypass that will allow the panel door to open only when the switch is in the OFF position. B. A mechanical disconnect mechanism, with bypass, shall be installed on each motor circuit protector, capable of being locked in the "OFF" position to provide a means of disconnecting power to the motor. C. Motor starters shall be provided with motor circuit protectors and equipped to provide under-voltage release and overload protection on all three phases. 1. Motor starters shall be 2 or 3 Pole, 1 or 3-phase as required, 60 Hz, 600 Volt, �+ magnetically operated, full voltage non-reversing except as shown on the drawings. NEMA sizes shall be as required for the horse power shown on the drawings. 2. Each motor starter shall have a 120 Volt operating coil and control power transformer. Starters shall have motor overload protection in each phase. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as shown on the drawings. A minimum of one N.O. and N.C. auxiliary contacts shall be provided in addition to the contacts shown on the drawings. 3. Overload relays shall be adjustable ambient compensated and manually reset. 4. Control power transformers shall be sized for additional load where required. Transformer primaries shall be equipped with time-delay fuses. D. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as specified herein, as required by the detailed mechanical equipment requirements, Division 16, Division 17 and as shown on the Drawings. E. All operating control devices and instruments shall be securely mounted on the exterior door. All controls shall be clearly labeled to indicate function and shall be in accordance with the electrical area classification indicated on the Electrical Drawings. 1. Indicator lamps shall be heavy duty, 30 mm industrial type oil light, NEMA 4X, high-visibility LED, full voltage type. Units shall have screw on plastic lenses and shall have factory engraved legend plates as required. Unless otherwise specified FTWH1101 16700-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- COMMON CONTROL PANEL MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT Contract No.01632 Y in each equipment specification lens color shall be green for equipment OFF, red for equipment operating, blue for FAIL or ALARM and amber for power ON/Equipment Stand-by. For all control applications, indicator lamps shall incorporate a push-to-test feature. 2. Mode selector switches (HAND-OFF-AUTO, LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE, MOTOR SELECTOR, LEAD-LAG, etc) shall be heavy-duty 30 mm, NEMA 4X, oil tight, industrial type with contacts rated for 120 VAC at 10 Amps continuous. Units shall have standard size, white field, and legend plates with black markings, as indicated. Operators shall be black knob type. Units shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements, as required. Units shall be single-hole mounting, accommodating panel thicknesses from 1/16-in minimum to 1/4-in maximum. 3. Push-button, shall be heavy-duty, 30 mm, NEMA 4X, oil tight industrial type with momentary or maintained contacts as required, rated for 120 VAC at 10 Amps continuous. Units shall have standard size, white field, and legend plates with black markings, as indicated. Button color shall be red for EMERGENCY STOP or START and green for STOP. Contact arrangement shall be as required. F. A six digit, non-resetable elapsed time meter shall be connected to each motor starter. G. A failure alarm with horn and beacon light shall be provided as required by contract document. Silence and reset buttons shall be furnished. H. The control panel shall be provided with a Surge Protective Device Unit on the load side of the main circuit breaker. Surge Protective Device shall be rated 651(a per mode for all unit rated for 480V located outdoor. Provide a surge capacitor for all the 120 panels located outdoor. I. All interfaces between control panel and remote devices shall be isolated via an Y interposing relay. Interposing relays shall have contacts rated for 250 VAC and 10 Amps continuous. J. An alternator shall be provided to sequence motors as required by contract document. K. Intrinsically safe relays shall be solid state type with 5 Amp output contacts, suitable for use on a 120 Volt, 60 Hz power supply and shall be Factory Mutual approved for pilot devices in Class I, Division I, Group D hazardous atmospheres. L. Control relays and timers shall be 300 Volt, industrial rated, plug-in socket type, housed in a transparent polycarbonate dust cover, designed in accordance with UL Standard 508 for motor controller duty. Continuous contact rating shall be 10 Amps resistive, 1/4 Hp, at 120 VAC, with an operating temperature of minus 10 to plus 55 _ degrees C. M. Panel mounted timers shall be flush mounted, plug-in type with ranges as shown on the Drawings, or as required by the detailed mechanical equipment specifications and Division 17. FTWHI101 16700-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- COMMON CONTROL PANEL MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT Contract No.01632 N. Specific control devices, control descriptions and other data are specified under the detailed specification for the mechanical equipment with which the control panel is supplied. 2.03 ENCLOSURE TYPES A. The control panel specified herein shall be rated NEMA 4X enclosures and shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel or aluminum. B. Enclosures shall be 14 gauge and constructed with continuously welded seams. The panel door(s) shall have continuous hinge and neoprene gasket. Door clamps shall be provided. C. The enclosure shall incorporate a removable back panel on which control components shall be mounted. Back panel shall be secured to the enclosure with collar studs. The enclosure door shall be interlocked with the main circuit breaker by a door mounted operating mechanism. Back panel shall be tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self-tapping screws shall not be used to mount any components. D. Print storage pockets shall be provided on the inside of the panel. E. Overload tables shall be laminated and adhered to the inside of the door. F. Enclosures located outdoors shall be painted white in the factory. 2.04 NAMEPLATES MARKINGS AND IDENTIFICATION A. Provide 2-in by 5-in, nominal, engraved phenolic master nameplate on the control panel fastened with stainless steel type 316 screws or rivets. Nameplate shall be black with white core, 3/8-in high lettering and shall indicate equipment designation as shown on the Drawing. B. Provide legend plates or 1-in by 3-in engraved nameplates with 1/4-in lettering for identification of door mounted control devices, pilot lights and meters. C. Provide permanent warning signs as follows: 1. "Danger- High Voltage- Keep Out" on all doors. 2. "Warning- Hazard of Electric Shock - Disconnect Power Before Opening or Working On This Unit" on main power disconnect. 2.05 CONDENSATION HEATERS A. A strip heater shall be mounted inside the control panel. 1. Heater shall be rated 240V, but operated at 120V, single phase, 150 watts, with rust resisting iron sheath. 2. A control thermostat mounted inside the control Panel. 3. The strip heater terminals shall be guarded by a protective terminal cover. 4. High temperature connecting lead wire shall be used between the thermostat and -- the heater terminals. Wire shall be No. 12 AWG stranded, nickel-plated copper with Teflon glass insulation. FTWH1101 16700-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- COMMON CONTROL PANEL MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT Contract No.01632 .. 2.06 WIRING A. Power and control wire shall be 600 Volt class, Type XHHW-2 insulated stranded copper and shall be of the sizes required for the current to be carried, but not smaller �. than No. 14 AWG. All wiring shall be enclosed in PVC wire trough with slotted side openings and removable cover. B. All interconnecting wires between panel mounted equipment and external equipment shall be terminated at numbered terminal blocks. C. All control panel wiring shall be numbered at both ends with type written heat shrinkable wire markers. 2.07 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Terminal blocks shall be one-piece molded plastic blocks with screw type terminals and barriers rated for 600 volts. Terminals shall be double sided and supplied with } removable covers to prevent accidental contact with live circuits. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, clearly visible with the protective cover removed. Each terminal block shall have 20 percent spare terminals, but not less than two spare terminals. B. Wires shall be terminated to the terminal blocks with crimp type, pre-insulated, ring- tongue lugs. Lugs shall be of the appropriate size for the terminal block screws and for the number and size of the wires terminated. C. Provide an AC ground bar bonded to the panel enclosure (if metal) with 20 percent spare terminals. D. Provide an intrinsically safe ground terminal bar isolated from the control panel enclosure. Provide 20 percent spare terminals but not less than two spare terminals. E. 'terminal points for current transformer leads shall be provided with a shorting bar. 2.08 SHOP TEST A. Perform manufacturer's standard production testing and inspection in accordance with NEMA and ANSI standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Repaint any damage to factory applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by the control panel manufacturer. B. Any work not installed according to the Drawings and this Specification shall be subject to change as directed by the Engineer. No extra compensation will be allowed for making these changes. FTWH1101 16700-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- COMMON CONTROL PANEL -- MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT Contract No.01632 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. Check mechanical interlocks for proper operation. Make any adjustments required. B. Adjust motor circuit protectors and voltage trip devices to their correct settings. C. Install overload heaters per actual motor nameplate currents. D. Adjust motor circuit protectors for actual motor nameplate currents. E. In the event of an equipment fault, notify the Engineer immediately. After the cause of the fault has been identified and corrected, a joint inspection of the equipment shall be conducted by the Contractor, the Engineer and the control panel manufacturer's factory service technician. Repair or replace the equipment as directed by the Engineer prior to placing the equipment back into service. END OF SECTION r FTWHI101 16700-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- COMMON CONTROL PANEL MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT Contract No.01632 SECTION 17000 INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section specifies the requirements for the South Holly WTP High Service Pump Station Motor and Switchgear replacement project for the City of Fort Worth. The requirements outlined in this section address general hardware, software, and services necessary to provide the control functions specified. More detailed requirements of specific functions and components are presented in other Division 17 sections that follow. This Contract is mainly an equipment supply and installation contract, with the City of Fort Worth performing the necessary programming. The City of Fort Worth owns a copy of the programming software for the Modicon Quantum PLC and for the Operator Interface Panel. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. The definitions of terminology used in the Division 17 specifications or in any Section referencing Division 17, shall be as defined in ISA Standard S51.1 unless otherwise specified. Where terms used are not defined in ISA 51.1 or in these specifications, ANSI/IEEE Standard 100-1984, ANSI/ISA S50.1 or other ISA standards shall apply. 1. Signal Circuit: Any circuit operating at less than 80 volts AC or DC. 2. Control Circuit: Any circuit operating at 24 volts AC or DC or more, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of information and not the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device. 3. Power Circuit: Any circuit operating at 12 volts (AC or DC) or more, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device. 4. Two-Wire Transmitter: A transmitter which derives its operating power supply from the signal transmission circuit and therefore requires no separate power supply connections. As used in this specification, two-wire transmitter refers to a transmitter which provides a 4 to 20 milliampere current regulation of signal in a series circuit with an external 24 volt direct current driving potential and a maximum external circuit resistance of 600 ohms. 5. Electrical Isolation: Pertaining to an electrical node having no direct current path to another electrical node. As used in this specification, electrical isolation refers to a device with electrical inputs and/or outputs which are galvanically isolated from ground, the device case, the process fluid, and any separate power supply terminals, but such inputs and/or outputs are capable of being externally grounded without affecting the characteristics of the device or providing a path for circulation of ground currents. T he terms "galvanic isolation," "electrical isolation", "isolation", or similar terms shall mean electrical isolation whenever used in Division 17, or whenever used in specifications for electrical control and instrumentation equipment in any other Divisions of these contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, electrical isolation for analog signal devices shall be FTWH1101 17000-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 �. rated 250 volts AC continuous; and 1500 volts AC for one minute, in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C39.5-1974. 6, Panel: An instrument support system which may be a flat surface, a partial enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in process control systems. Unless otherwise specified or clearly indicated by the context, the term "panel' in these contract documents shall be interpreted as a general term which includes flat panels, enclosures, cabinets and consoles. 7 Data Sheets: Data sheets as used in this specification shall comply with the requirements of ISA S20. 8 Field: When used to refer to locations at the treatment facility or in the transmission system, shall mean all outdoor locations, as well as all process and equipment areas. Unless otherwise specified, all areas shall be considered "field" locations except for: administration and other office areas; control rooms; motor control centers and other electrical equipment rooms; dedicated HVAC rooms; and maintenance buildings. 9. Control Room: An environmentally controlled room intended for housing digital -- control equipment, computers, large control panels, etc., and generally intended to be regularly occupied by operators. 10. Division 17 Work: Whenever the terms "Division 17 work", "specified under Division 17" or "provided under Division 17" are used, they shall be interpreted as referring to all materials, labor, products, services, systems, etc., specified in Sections 17000 through 17999, inclusive, unless equipment shown or specified is 4 clearly labeled as being provided under other parts of the contract. 11. UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply. 12. HMI: Human-Machine-Interface. The control system hardware and software associated with providing the CRT-based interface between system users and the control system. 13. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. Field installed unit which monitors and T controls devices, located within the plant. The PLCs contain all logic necessary to monitor and control the system process located at the PLC location. 14. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition. 15. RTU: Remote Terminal Unit. Field installed unit which monitors and controls devices, located away from the plant at remote locations. The RTUs contain all logic necessary to monitor and control the system process located at the remote location. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. This subsection references the latest revisions of the following standards. They are a part of Division 17 as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the _ requirements of this section and those of the listed standards, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Standard Title ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems API RP550 Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments FTWH1101 17000-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 and Control Systems Part I— Process Instrumentation and Control ISA S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instrumentation, Primary Elements, and Control Valves ISA S50.1 Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Industrial Process Instruments ISA S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology 1.04 WARRANTIES, MAINTENANCE, AND SUPPORT SERVICES A. Corrective Maintenance 1. The Contractor shall provide the services of factory-trained service technicians for the purpose of performing corrective maintenance on all system hardware and software. The period of coverage for each piece of equipment shall begin upon initial equipment purchase or manufacture and shall continue for two years after final acceptance or until expiration of the manufacturer's warranty, whichever period is longer. 2. The Contractor shall provide a 24-hour, 7-day/week service hotline for telephone notification of system malfunctions. Within 2 hours from notification by the Owner of defective Control System operation, the Contractor shall have a qualified service representative establish telephone contact with the Owner's maintenance personnel to discuss short-term corrective measures. If it is not possible to correct the defective operation as a result of the telephone contact, the Contractor shall have a qualified service representative at the location of the installed Control System within 24 hours from initial notification. The service representative shall perform all necessary inspections and diagnostic tests to determine the source of the defect and to establish a corrective action plan. The corrective action plan shall be developed such that the defect is corrected as quickly as possible and with the least impact on the operation of the Owner's facilities. Prior to beginning any repair or replacement procedure, the Contractor shall review the corrective action plan with the Owner in order to inform him of the planned course of action and to allow assessment of any impact that course of action might have on the operation of the Owner's facilities. At Owner's option, Owner maintenance personnel may participate in any corrective maintenance procedures. 3. If possible, the service representative shall effect replacement or repair of the defective component before leaving the site using replacement parts from the spare parts inventory delivered with the system. Otherwise, the corrective action plan shall include a detailed schedule for the planned course of action. Once the defect has been corrected, the corrective action plan shall be updated indicating the source of the defect and specific corrective action taken. A copy of the updated corrective action plan shall be delivered to the Owner on the day the FTWH1101 17000-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 work is performed. Any spares from the onsite supply of spares used by the ! Contractor in correcting the system malfunction shall be replaced within 15 days. 4, If 24-hour response time is not provided, or other corrective maintenance requirements are not met by the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to obtain corrective maintenance from other sources and charge the Contractor reasonable costs of the alternative maintenance services, including parts, labor, travel, and subsistence. - 5j The Owner, at the Owner's option, may elect to employ its own maintenance staff to locate and remove a defective component. In this case the Owner will return the defective component to a repair location as instructed by the Contractor. The - Contractor shall repair or replace the defective component and return the properly working unit to the Owner within 15 days. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to select, furnish, configure, customize, debug, install, connect, calibrate, and place into operation all hardware and - software specified within this section and in other sections as listed in Article 1.02, Related Work. B. The Contractor shall be a "systems house," regularly engaged in the design and the installation of computer systems and their associated subsystems as they are applied to the municipal water or wastewater industry. For the purposes of this specification R section, a "systems house" shall be interpreted to mean an organization that complies with all of the following criteria: 1. Employs a registered professional Control Systems Engineer or Electrical Engineer - to supervise or perform the work required by this specification section. 2. Employs personnel on this project who have successfully completed a manufacturer's training course on the configuration and implementation of the - specific programmable controllers, computers and software proposed for this project. 3. Has performed work of similar or greater complexity on at least three (3) projects - within the last five (5) years and has implemented and completed at least one of these three projects with the proposed HMI software. 4. Has been in the water/wastewater industry performing the type of work specified in this specification section for the past five (5) continuous years. C. The following Instrumentation/Controls Contractors, listed in no particular order, have been pre-approved for this work. Other company interested in bidding this work please submit qualifications statement to Engineer 10 days prior to bidding: 1. Prime Controls, 972-221-4849 2. Tegron, 972-929-4700 D. The Contractor shall maintain a fully equipped office/production facility with full-time employees capable of fabricating, configuring, installing, calibrating, troubleshooting, and testing the system specified herein. Qualified repair personnel shall be available and capable of reaching the facility within 24 hours. FfWH1101 17000-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 E. Actual installation of the system need not be performed by the Contractor's employees; however, the Contractor shall provide the on-site technical supervision of the installation. F. The Contractor shall furnish equipment which is the product of one manufacturer to the maximum practical extent. Where this is not practical, all equipment of a given type shall be the product of one manufacturer. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of this section, the requirements of Section 01300, and the requirements of individual Division 17 Sections. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner technical data and drawings for all equipment, materials, software, assemblies, and installations prior to fabrication and installation. All submittals shall be made in accordance with the submittal procedures and requirements in Section 01300 - Project Submittals and Review. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of all submittals, including information and drawings provided by other suppliers or subcontractors providing equipment, materials, software or services to the Contractor. 2. In all instances in which submittals are required by the Specifications, the Contractor shall not proceed with the associated work until the submittal has been Successfully Reviewed. 3. Each submittal shall be complete, with all required information provided together at one time, and submitted in a sequence that allows the Owner to have all of the information necessary for checking and approving a particular document at the time of the submittal. The specified timing requirements for each submittal are minimum requirements. The Contractor Supplier shall be responsible for planning and making all submittals as necessary to avoid delays or conflicts in the work. 4. See Section 01300 for requirements on quantities of documents to be submitted for review. Once documents have been successfully reviewed, the Contractor shall issue them in the quantities shown in the table labeled "Documentation Requirements". B. Submittal Categories: Project submittals are divided into the following general categories: 1. Hardware Submittal a. Product information shall include, but not be limited to: catalog cuts, data sheets, performance surveys, test reports, equipment lists, material list, diagrams, pictures, and descriptive material. The product information shall cover all items including mechanical devices, mounting components, wiring, terminal strips, connectors, accessories, and spare parts. The submittal information shall show the standard and optional product features, as well as all performance data and specifications. b. Prior to commencement of manufacture (or shipment for stock items), the Contractor shall submit for review product information for all equipment and material specified in Division 17, or required to support equipment, or FTWH1101 17000-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 systems specified in Division 17. Specific requirements for the form and content of product information submittals are included in the individual section that defines the equipment requirements. 2} Connection Diagrams a. Connection diagrams shall show the placement, labeling and wiring of components within panels, cabinets and consoles. Components shall be shown arranged in the physical layout (not necessarily to scale) as it would appear to a person servicing the equipment. Connection diagrams shall include all internal wiring of the panel; this shall include AC and DC power wiring and multi-conductor cables from PLC card to rewired termination blocks. Wires shall be shown as a continuous line between their termination points. Each wire label designation shall be shown. The wire label designations on each end of a single wire must be identical. All wire termination point numbers shall be shown. Each wire color shall be shown. Signal and DC circuit polarities shall be shown. All jumpers, shielding and grounding details shall be shown. b. The Contractor shall submit connection diagrams for all new panels, cabinets and consoles. Connection diagrams shall be Successfully Reviewed prior to the start of panel assembly. _ 3. Panel Fabrication and Layout Drawings a. Panel fabrication drawings are scaled drawings that shall show the physical dimensions, materials, and construction of panels, cabinets, terminal boards, consoles, or other electrical or mechanical equipment enclosures. These drawings show the physical arrangement and mounting of all components in or on a p anel, terminal board, cabinet, console, or enclosure. T hese drawings show the physical dimensions, and the space and mounting requirements of mechanical, electrical, control and instrumentation devices or pieces of equipment. Other information provided may include ventilation requirements, locations of connections, weight, and paint color, material and dry film thickness. b. As a minimum, panel fabrication and layout drawings shall include a bill of materials; front, back, and section views; the locations of all components to be mounted in or on the panel, cabinet, console, enclosure or assembly; drawing scale; nameplate engraving schedule; and structural materials and supports. All drawings shall be scaled. Overall dimensions and minimum clearances shall be shown. Sufficient detail shall be included to demonstrate material choices, outward appearance, construction methods, and seismic _ force resistance. c. Complete shop drawings shall be prepared and submitted for all panels, cabinets, and consoles which are custom fabricated or modified for this project. The Owner shall have the right to make modifications to the interior and exterior layouts of panels as part of the shop drawing review. No additional compensation will be provided to the Contractor for changes that result. The Contractor shall include in his bid price one redesign of the panel layout to incorporate the Owner's modifications to the locations of specified components in or on each panel, cabinet, console, or enclosure. FTWH1101 17000-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS -- MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 4. Interface Cables: The Contractor shall submit for review interface cable pin- out/cable makeup diagrams. This includes all network cables, radio to PLC/RTIJ cables, computer to PLC cables and printer cables. Submittal shall include copies of the actual hardware documentation. All cables shall either be standard cables from the manufacturer or custom-made, without the use of gender changers, 9- 25 pin converters, null modem adapters, etc. 5. Interconnection Diagrams: Interconnection diagrams shall include typical wiring diagrams for each type of product. Wires shall be shown as a continuous line between their termination points. Each wire label designation shall be shown. The wire label designations on each end of a single wire must be identical. All wire termination point numbers shall be shown. Each wire color shall be shown. Signal and DC circuit polarities shall be shown. All jumpers, shielding and grounding details shall be shown. 6. Installation Drawings: Installation drawings shall show installation arrangements for all provided equipment, mounting and anchoring details, conduit entries into cabinets, and Control System electrical power supply distribution conduit and wiring. Data sheets and/or catalog cuts for mounting devices, anchors, wire and other incidental installation materials shall be included. C. System Documentation Submittals 1. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: The Contractor shall supply O&M manuals for all the equipment and software provided. The O&M manuals shall be developed for personnel at the level of electronic technician. The O&M manuals shall describe the detailed preventive and restorative procedures required to keep the equipment in good operating condition. An O&M manual or a set of manuals shall be furnished for all deliverable hardware, including OEM equipment. O&M manuals for OEM equipment shall contain original printed materials, not copies, and may be provided in the manufacturer's original format. Manuals shall be provided in electronic format. The O&M manuals shall contain the following information: 2. Instruction Manual a. The manual shall be written in English and illustrated in detail to the component level, including assemblies, subassemblies, and components. It shall contain a detailed analysis of each major component so that maintenance personnel can effectively service, inspect, maintain, adjust, troubleshoot, and repair the equipment. b. Each manual shall include a Table of Contents, arranged in systematic order, and shall be divided into the following sections: (i) Introduction: The purpose of the manual, special tools and equipment, and safety precautions. (ii) General Information and Specifications: A general description of the equipment item, and specifications of its major.components. (iii) Listings: Supplier's name, address, and telephone number. Each product shall include name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor, or installer, recommended maintenance contractor, local source for replacement parts. FfWH1101 17000-7 SEPTEMBER 2011 r` SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 (iv) Theory of Operation: The relationship of assemblies, subassemblies, } components and interchangeability of components, and explanation and analysis of their functions to the smallest board replaceable components. (v) Software: Listing and explanatory text for any software or firmware. (vi) Operation Procedures: The locations and functional descriptions of all controller indicators, or CRT displays. (vii) Troubleshooting: A list in tabular format of all symptoms, probable causes of malfunction or improper operation, and probable remedies to the smallest board replaceable components. 3. Preventive Maintenance Instructions: These instructions shall include all applicable visual examinations, hardware testing, and diagnostic hardware/software routines. Instructions on how to load and use any test and diagnostic programs and any special or standard test equipment shall be an integral part of these procedures. 4, Corrective Maintenance Instructions a. These instructions shall include guides for locating malfunctions down to the card-replacement level. These guides shall include adequate details for quickly and efficiently locating the cause of an equipment malfunction and shall state the probable source(s) of trouble, the symptoms, probable cause, and instructions for remedying the malfunction. These guides shall explain how to use on-line test and diagnostic programs for all devices and any special test equipment, if applicable. b. The corrective maintenance instructions shall include: (i) Explanations for the repair, adjustment, or replacement of all items, including printed circuit cards. Schematic diagrams of electrical, mechanical, and parts location, illustrations, photographs, and sectional views giving details of mechanical assemblies shall be provided as necessary to repair or replace equipment. Typical signal waveforms, logic levels, bit patterns, etc., shall be included. For mechanical items requiring field repair, information on tolerances, clearances, wear limits, and maximum bolt-down torques shall be supplied. Information on the loading and use of special off-line diagnostic programs, tools, and test equipment as well as any cautions or warnings which must be observed to protect personnel and equipment shall be included. (ii) A list of test equipment and special tools required. (iii) A list of all abbreviations and circuit symbols used. (iv) Warranties, bonds and maintenance records, including proper procedures in the event of failures and instances which might affect the validity of warranties, bonds, or contracts. (v) A parts catalog enumerating every part to the lowest of card replaceable components. The description shall include component symbol, description, ratings, accuracy, manufacturer's name and address, manufacturer's part number, commercial equivalents, and quantity per y assembly or subassembly. The parts catalog shall identify the appropriate locations of the parts and shall group each component by assemblies or FTWH1101 17000-8 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 subassemblies within each subsystem so that each component can be identified as being part of the next larger assembly. (vi) A list of recommended spare parts that includes all parts necessary to maintain and repair control system components. The list shall identify the specific part or model number, description, manufacturer's name and address, commercial equivalents, unit price, lead time for delivery, and recommended quantity. T he spare parts list shall indicate which components (by model and serial number) have been provided with the delivered system as part of the spares inventory. 5. Drawings a. O&M Manual drawings (with the exception of those provided by third-party manufacturers) shall not be larger than 11-inches by 17-inches and shall be clearly legible when reproduced using conventional office copying machines. Originals shall be provided for all third-party O&M Manual materials. One reproducible of the O&M Manual drawing original must be supplied for each O&M Manual drawing larger than 11 inches by 17 inches, and must satisfy all drawing requirements specified herein. Those preprinted O&M Manual drawings which are not acceptable, or which must be modified or corrected to show the actual as-built design, shall be redrawn as new specially- prepared shop drawings. Acceptable equipment manufacturer's drawings incorporated into equipment operating and maintenance manuals need not be duplicated or removed from the manuals. b. The Contractor shall furnish drawings in paper and latest AutoCAD electronic format. c. Each O&M Manual shall be bound in 8 1/2" x 11 inch 3-ring side binders with commercial quality hardback, cleanable plastic covers. Maximum of 3"binder size. O&M Manuals shall be submitted in electronic format per Specifications Section 01250 Paragraph 1.05, Part H. d. Binder covers shall contain the printed title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions", "City Of Fort Worth", "South Holly WTP High Service Pump Station — Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements ". e. The manuals shall be internally subdivided with permanent page dividers with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. f. Each volume shall have a Table of Contents, with each product or system description identified. D. Software Manuals: The Contractor shall supply Original OEM O&M Manuals in lieu of developing specific O&M Manuals. Only that equipment which lacks proper O&M Manuals would the Contractor be responsible for supplementing the product literature. E. Record Documents 1. After successful Site Demonstration Test, the Contractor shall submit for review the Record Documents (as-built) for all equipment and software installed by the Contractor. All documents which have changed because of the engineering changes, contract changes, or error or omission shall be updated and the revised documentation provided. 2. The Contractor shall furnish complete as-built sets of: FTWH1101 17000-9 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 a. Source tapes, disk pack(s) or other storage media for all custom programs b. Loadable and executable object disk pack(s) of the software systems c. All previously delivered documents, with as-built updates _ d. OEM standard documentation. 3� These media shall include the operating systems, all programs necessary for the operation as well as maintenance of the System, and all programs supplied by the - CPU/Microprocessor manufacturers, such as assembler, loaders, editors, compilers and diagnostics. 4. The documentation as outlined in this portion of the document, in conjunction with other documentation specified elsewhere in this document, shall be sufficient to allow the Owner to reconfigure or make additions or deletions to the System without assistance from the Contractor. F. Testing Documentation Submittals 1 System test plan requirements are included in Section 17000 part 3. 2 Test procedures requirements are included in Section 17000 part 3. 3 Test reports requirements are included in Section 17000 part 3. PART 2 PRODUCTS ` 2.01 INFORMATION ON DRAWINGS A. The following information is indicated on the drawings: 1. Loop diagram on flow sheet for each control loop. Diagrams are schematic in nature and intended only as a guide to work to be performed. 2. Approximate location of primary elements, instrument panels and final control elements. 3. Approximate location of instrumentation power junction boxes for instrument electrical power connection. 4. Location of electrical distribution panel boards for instrument electrical power. 5. Location of equipment having alarms and equipment status contacts. 6. Location of equipment being controlled by system. 7. General layout of instrument cabinets. 8. Instrument installation details. B. The following information is not shown on drawings but shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine, furnish and coordinate with other divisions, based upon �- systems specified. Show this information on project record drawings. 1. Instrument loop drawings per ISA S5.4 minimum, desired and optional items. 2. Location of electrical distribution panel boards supplying power to any device supplied under this contract. 3. Detailed enclosure and instrument panel layouts, fabrication details and wiring diagrams. 4. Detailed system configuration. 5. Raceway and cable routing for instrumentation wiring. - FFWH1101 17000-10 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS ;— MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 2.02 OPERATING CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Provide equipment suitable for ambient conditions specified. Provide system elements to operate properly in the presence of radio frequency fields produced by portable RF transmitters with output of five watts operated at 24 inches from instruments; in the presence of plant telephone lines, power lines and electrical equipment; and in the presence of digital data transmission systems. B. Field Locations: Field equipment may be subjected to ambient temperatures from -5 to 50°C with direct radiation, relative humidity from 0 to 100 percent with condensation. C. Power Supply: Power supply will be 117 volts AC, single- phase, 60-hertz commercial power. Voltage variations will be at least plus or minus 8 percent. Certain loops shall 4 have integral power supply as indicated on the drawings. 2.03 TRANSIENT AND SURGE ISOLATION A. Protect all power and communication and transmission/ receiving circuitry from any surge, including spikes up 1,000 volts peak and surges with a rise time of less than one microsecond. Use a combination of current limiting resistors, zener diodes, gas tube surge arresters and a fusible link which melts and shorts the surge to ground before the device circuitry is affected. Provide protection adequate for personnel safety, which will prevent an erroneous output, change in calibration or failure of component other than fuse or fusible link. 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. During the system warranty period, the Contractor is expected to make system repairs by initially replacing the defective component with one from the spares inventory. The Contractor shall then replace the spare component 2.05 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Contractor shall supply one of each type of special hand tool required to open or operate equipment, to remove or replace replaceable parts, remove or replace cable connectors, or to make required operational or maintenance adjustments. A special hand tool is any tool not readily available from local retail hardware stores. 2.06 TEST EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall provide a complete list of all tools, test equipment, and commercial software programs necessary for the proper maintenance of the system. This list shall contain the quantity recommended, model number, description, cost, and name and address of supplier. 2.07 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials: Material shall be new, free from defects, and of the quality specified. All instruments with the same specification shall be from the same manufacturer. FTWH1101 17000-11 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 1. Provide equipment of solid-state construction utilizing second source semiconductors, unless otherwise specified. Derate components to assure dependability and long-term stability. Provide printed or etched circuit boards of glass epoxy, hand or wave soldered, of sufficient thickness to prevent warping. — Coat printed circuit boards in field-mounted equipment with plasite 7122, or approved equal, to protect against corrosion. Alignment and adjustments shall be non-critical, stable with temperature changes or aging and accomplished with -- premium grade potentiometers. Do not insert components of specially selected values into standard electronic assemblies to meet performance requirements. Use parts indicated in instruction manuals, replaceable with standard commercial r components of the same description without degrading performance of completed assembly. Do not use silver edge connectors or pins. 2. Use test equipment and instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs suitable for purpose intended and rated to an accuracy of at least five times greater than the required accuracy of device being calibrated. Such test equipment shall have accuracies traceable to the National Bureau of Standards as applicable. _ 3_ Make equipment located in hazardous areas suitable for applicable classification by use of explosion-proof housings or equipment and barriers approved as "intrinsically safe" by either UL or FM. Locate barriers in cabinets at hazardous R area boundaries. Use dual barriers in loops in order to prevent a grounding loop at the barrier. 4. Provide all special tools necessary for operation, maintenance and calibration of all t (instruments) devices, subsystems, and systems supplied. 2.08 SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. As a part of this contract, the instrumentation systems contractor shall coordinate with all the sub-systems suppliers and manufacturers, during bidding, construction, testing, installation and start-up phases of the project. The coordination is to assure that the — instruments, and sub-systems are in compliance with the specifications and the central controls, and that the tie-ins and the interface signals are provided as required. B. The calibration, testing and start-up of all the instruments shall be done by the manufacturer's field technician/engineer in the presence of the Owner. The Contractor shall provide a list of all manufacturers whose technician will perform this work. The Contractor shall also provide a certified calibration report stating that each instrument has been installed per manufacturer's recommendations and per these specifications.C. As part of this contract, PLC 14 is needed to be expended base on spare, and I/O list requirement provided. Contractor shall provide additional I/O modules as needed to fulfill I/O requirement. Existing un-audited panel drawing is available upon request. — Contractor shall provide necessary panel modification and verify all functionality of PLC 14 panel. Contractor shall re-certify each I/O on PLC 14 panel regardless of new or existing I/0. All field instruments associated with PLC 14 panel shall be re-calibrated and loop check regardless or new or existing instruments. D. For this project, contractor shall provide up-to-date as-build drawing based on existing un-audited panel drawing. FTWH1101 17000-12 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 OVERVIEW A. This contract is primarily an equipment supply and installation contract. The Contractor and City Engineer share in the responsibility to provide a completely operational system. In this arrangement, each party has certain responsibilities. B. The Contractor is responsible for the following areas: 1. Acquisition and installation of all the hardware, software and instrumentation as defined in this specification and drawings. 2. Provide the Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) equipment as specified in section. C. The City Engineer is responsible for the following areas: 1. Build new HMI screens. 2. Re-program existing PLC at the High Service Pump Station for the new I/Os. 3. OIT programming. 3.02 SYSTEM TEST REQUIREMENTS A. General Requirements: 1. The Control System shall undergo a comprehensive system test process to demonstrate that the system performs as an integrated unit to meet the requirements of this specification. The Contractor, as a normal course of system development, shall conduct all element, subsystem, and system tests necessary to ensure the proper operation of the control system at various stages of system development. This type of testing will normally be not witnessed; however, the Owner and Engineer reserve the right to witness these tests if concerns arise about the progress of system implementation. B. I/O Point Checkout 1. An I/O point checkout shall be performed after all equipment is shipped and installed in the field. The tests shall be performed to verify that the equipment has been installed correctly. The tests shall be performed to verify that the software and hardware will meet the functional and performance requirements of this document. 2. The Owner and the Engineer will witness these tests. 3. The I/O point checkout shall demonstrate the proper operation of all the field points affected by the installation of the equipment provided by this contract. 4. The Contractor shall provide an I/O list for each PLC and RTU provided, and a test plan that indicates how the verification will occur. 5. The I/O Point Checkout shall include, but not limited to, the following: a. Exercise each discrete input. E ach state shall be verified at an Operator •� Workstation. b. Exercise each analog input. Each input shall be verified at 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100% range of the instrument. Linearity of the signal shall be verified. Each value shall be verified at the Operator Workstation. FTWH1101 17000-13 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 Y c. Exercise each discrete output. Each state shall be initiated from the Operator Workstation. If necessary, the associated equipment shall be placed into a "safe" state such that the activation of the output will not damage the equipment or cause a safety hazard. d. Exercise each analog output. Each output shall be verified at 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100% range of the instrument. Linearity of the signal shall be verified. Each value shall be initiated and verified at the Operator Workstation. e. Unless constrained by the operation of the plant, or due to safety reasons, all testing should include the actual equipment, and not use simulates signals. 3.03 INSTALLATION AND STARTUP A. Field Testing: Field testing and start-up shall consist of a sequence of activities and tests conducted as the control system components are installed and integrated at the job site. Following is a description of the individual steps that are involved with field testing and cut-over. 1. Top-End Equipment checkout. a. Once the top-end equipment is installed and operational at the Control Room, checkout of the network will begin. b. Demonstrate the capability of each piece of equipment to communicate with each other. c. Demonstrate the ability of the equipment to operate in the manner defined for each across the network, i.e. Operator Workstations providing HMI screens accessing data from the HMI servers. 2. PLC Checkout - a. Once the PLC network is operational to each PLC location, field installation and checkout of the PLCs will begin. b. The field devices will be exercised by the Contractor to demonstrate the field wiring has been terminated properly. c. The next step of PLC checkout shall be an end-to-end (Operator Workstation to field termination) checks of every physical I/O point connected to the PLC. d. Next, any control software associated with the PLC shall be activated and tested one-function at a time by the Contractor, Owner programmer and witness by the Engineer. When problems are found, the software configuration shall be "debugged" and the problem fixed by the Contractor and the Owner. When a problem is found, the appropriate tests shall be repeated after the problem is corrected by the Contractor to verify proper operation. Once the control software in the PLC has been tested and debugged, that PLC shall remain online on the new control system. e. Each PLC in the system shall be installed and tested using the procedure described above. A specific installation and start up plan shall be developed by the Contractor prior to Site Demonstration Test. The Owner/Engineer will provide assistance as necessary in developing the start-up plan. - f. During the start-up phase, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of 2 people on site full-time. Owner will provide one person full-time in the control room (dedicated to testing activities), and one person in the field to - FfWH1101 17000-14 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 support installation and testing activities. Engineer will provide testing support and inspection as required. END OF SECTION s FfWH1101 17000-15 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 17300 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC) REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide the upgrade for the existing PLC systems at the South Holly WTP High Service Pump Station. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete and operational system for the upgrade of the PLCs specified on the drawings. This PLC upgrade shall include hardware supply and installation. B. The Contractor shall provide the PLC hardware for the locations and requirements identified on the drawings. This shall include all PLC equipment, programming software, cables, connectors, PLC/PC network interface cards, rewired termination blocks, fiber optic cable, PLC data highway cable, PLC Ethernet equipment, and any other hardware and/or software to ensure a fully operational system. C. The Contractor shall provide installation services for the new PLCs. This service shall include removing the existing PLCs, installing the new PLC hardware, panel rewiring, I/O points check, and PLC testing. D. The Contractor shall provide two complete sets of as-built drawings for each PLC panel. These drawings shall be complete and accurate. All existing PLC improvement changes or modifications shall be shown on the as-built drawings. Each set of drawings shall be provided in both paper and electronic copy. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit vendor specification information along with a corrected copy of applicable specification form for each scheduled device specified in this section. 2. Submit vendor specification information for each material and unscheduled device specified in this section. B. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. 1.03 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall provide an all-inclusive two (2)-year warranty. 1.04 TRAINING A. The manufacturer shall provide operating training and maintenance training. The Manufacturer's representative for inspection, supervision of installation, and training must be an experienced and competent technical (not sales) representative of the Manufacturer or Supplier. FTWH1101 17300-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLC REQUIREMENTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All new PLCs shall be from one PLC manufacturer. PLC I/O modules shall be selected within one I/O product family. B. The panel layouts are for reference purposes only. In all cases, the Contractor shall verify that their PLC supplied will fit and operate properly in the space provided. C. The PLCs provided shall be self-contained units capable of collecting data through electrically dry relay contacts, 4 to 20 mA DC analog, high level AC input signals. The PLCs shall also be capable of providing AC and DC control outputs, both momentary and latching, the contacts of which will be used by Owner for remote control. The -- Contractor shall provide all interposing relays that may be required to interface with the field AC signals. D. The PLCs shall be fully programmable in high level language and shall not require burning or etching of an EPROM for applications programs. E. The PLCs shall have stand alone calculation and control capability to perform the control logic functions using software and setpoints downloaded from the HMI. F. The Contractor shall provide a new control power supply for the upgraded PLC system, if necessary. The new control power unit shall be installed in that PLC panel. The power unit shall be properly sized, installed, wired, checked and tested by the Contractor.G. The Contractor shall upgrade to the latest firmware version available from the equipment manufacture. Some example of the equipment needed firmware upgrade included but not limited to, PLC CPU modules, communication modules, Ethernet switches, I/O modules, communication gateway. 2.02 PLC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General ]. Approved PLC manufacturers are as follows: a. In-plant PLC Modicon Quantum (www.modicon.com) 2. The PLCs shall be solid-state electronic units of programmable design. The PLCs shall have a stand-alone restarting capability, i.e., no reloading of software programs for common logic, communications, and I/O processing at the PLC shall be required to resume operation following a I oss of power. Therefore, all PLC basic programs shall be resident in battery backed up RAM with at least a five- year battery life. 3. The PLCs shall be from one family of the manufacturer's product line. The product line used shall have an expected product life of over ten (10) years. Products nearing the end of their life cycle are not acceptable. Contractor shall submit statement from manufacturer as part of the submittal. FTWH1101 17300-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLC REQUIREMENTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 4. Solid state RAM shall be utilized for data buffering, change of state information, calculation parameters, and local control algorithms. A power failure indication shall be reported to the HMI after recovery from a power failure so that status initializing may be initiated by the HMI. 5. All electronic components shall be mounted on plug-in printed circuit cards or modular subassemblies. Each printed circuit card and subassembly shall be model and serial numbered to uniquely identify it. Printed circuit cards shall be plug-in with quick disconnect field terminations. 6. As a minimum the PLC CPU board shall have LED's for run, CPU fail, and low battery. The I/O modules shall have a power present LED. 7. Equipment shall be sufficiently sturdy to withstand handling during shipment, placement, and start-up without damage or distortion. 8. All switches and breakers and other current interrupting devices shall be non- arcing or hermetically sealed. B. PLC Common Logic: Logic functions shall be implemented to receive data from and transmit data to the network, perform address decoding and error checks, and transfer data to and from the point input/output logic. In conjunction with the other PLC logic elements, the following functions shall be performed: 1. Respond to commands for retrieving data 2. Prevent selection of more than one control point in a command sequence 3. Protect against single component failures causing a malfunction 4. Inhibit relays from being energized erroneously during the initial power-up period of the PLC 5. Provide a "power fail bit" which will be set upon commercial power loss or failure of the AC/DC power supply 6. Protect against a missing or failed logic card causing a malfunction, damage to other logic, or false transmission to the HMI 7. Protect against over/under voltage conditions from the Owner's power source and/or the Contractor's power subsystem from causing malfunction, damage to logic, or false transmissions to the HMI 8. Provide a "Change Summary" bit in the returned message to report status point changes on an exception basis (if all status is not returned on each scan) 9. Provide a real-time clock function 10. Each PLC shall continually monitor its operation and shall shut down in case of failure that would cause faulty solution of logic. A running PLC shall identify communication failures, I/O assembly errors, I/O module errors, and CPU battery failure and shall report such faults to the HMI. Faults shall also be reported to the PLC test set whenever it is connected to a PLC. In addition, a PLC trouble alarm shall activate a discrete output if any diagnostic detects a failure or upon CPU failure. 11. Provide empty I/O modules with a door cover for all PLC empty slots. C. PLC (MODICON Quantum) Hardware Requirements: 1. Provide one (1) 140DDI35300 - PLC 32 Point 24VDC DI Module to PLC 14 and panel modification to accommodate 16 additional DI points. FTWH1101 17300-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLC REQUIREMENTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 Provide one (1) Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) as shown in the contract drawing. OIT shall be Magelis XBT GT 6330, and OIT compatible 1 GB compact flash card. 3. Provide one (1) Vijeo Designer, Single license OIT development software and cable. Provide custom RS-232 communication cable between PLC CPU and OIT, with suitable connector and cable pin-out, include cable pin-out diagram in the panel drawing package. 2.03 PROGRAMMING CABLES A. Contractor shall furnish two serial or USB programming cables for each type of PLC/RTU to be programmed. B. Provide two USB to Serial Adapter Tripp-Lite Model U209-000R. PART 3 EXECUTION — 3.01 TEST REQUIREMENTS A. Site Acceptance Test (SAT) 1. The PLCs shall be integrated with the other components of the PLC system and tested as part of the system SAT specified in Section 17000 In addition to the general system test requirements, each PLC shall be subjected to the tests described in this section with a written confirmation of the test results. END OF SECTION - FfWH1101 17300-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- PLC REQUIREMENTS MOTOR AND 5WITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 SECTION 17520 INSTRUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section of instrumentation covers the following field instruments: 1. Pressure switch 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. The submittals shall be as defined in Section 17000 - Instrumentation General Provisions. B. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: The equipment shall operate in ambient temperature 0-130°F, relative humidity 30-100%. B. Project power 120 volts, 60 hertz single-phase. Appropriate isolation shall be provided. C. Standard Signal: 1. Output Signal. Each instrument, which outputs a signal, shall output the standard 4-20 mA signal. The signal shall be constant over a load range of 0 to 600 ohms. 2. Input Signal. a. Electronic devices, such as controllers, match function devices etc., shall have an input impedance of one mega-ohm minimum for an input signal of 1 to 5 VDC. b. The 1 to 5 VDC signal shall be developed by the standard 4 to 20 mA transmitted signal through a precision 250 ohm, one-watt resistor. c. These requirements allow several receiving units to monitor the same transmitting unit without causing any perturbation of the received signal. d. Receiving devices shall not be wired in parallel. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRESSURE SWITCH A. Type: Diaphragm actuated. B. Function/Performance: 1. Repeatability: Greater than 1.0 percent of pressure. 2. Set point: Field adjustable and set between 30 and 70 percent of the adjustable range. FTWH1101 17520-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 3. Dead Band: Adjustable. ` 4. Reset: Unit shall be of the automatic reset type unless noted otherwise on the Instrument Device Schedules. 5. Over Range Protection: Over range protection to maximum process line pressure. 6. Switch Rating: 250V AC at 10 amps; and 30V DC at 5 amps. C. Physical: 1. Housing: NEMA 4X. 2, Switching Arrangement: Single pole double throw (SPDT) unless double pole double throw(DPDT) switches are shown on the instrument device schedule. 3. Wetted Parts: Teflon coated diaphragm, Viton seals, stainless steel connection port. 4. Connection Size: 2-in NPT. D. Accessories/Options Required: 1. Shutoff Valve: Provide process shutoff valve which can be used as an adjustable pressure snubber. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: - 1. Ashcroft. 2. Mercoid. 3. Static-O-Ring (SOR). 4. United Electric. PART 3 EXECUTION - 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: - 1�. Install control panel as shown on the drawings. Install instruments in various locations in the field and on panels as shown on the - drawings. 3. Coordinate the outage with Owner representative through the Engineer. Starting or stopping of any existing pump; opening any existing breaker, or disconnecting any instrument; shall be approved in advance through the Engineer. 4. All installations shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 5. All the necessary mounting accessories shall be provided. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. The instruments shall be supplied of the range and type as described in the data Sheet, loop diagram, and PID as shown on the drawings. SEE FOLLOWING ATTACHED SHEETS FfWH1101 17520-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- INSTRUMENTS MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PRESSURE SWITCH DESCRIPTION Power Output Signal H120 VAC/60 Hz BRelay SPDT 250 VAC 8A Other Other Enclosure Display _ BNEMA4X ROther LCD Indicator Other Material R 16SS. ther Manufacturer Model Number NSOR Inc QX 4BA Other TAGNUMBER SERVICE RANGE UNIT PSL-01 PRIMER LINE PRESSURE SWITCH LOW psi + PSL-02 PRIMER LINE PRESSURE SWITCH LOW psi PSL-03 PRIMER LINE PRESSURE SWITCH LOW si PSL-04 PRIMER LINE PRESSURE SWITCH LOW psi PSL-05 PRIMER LINE PRESSURE SWITCH LOW psi Note: FTWH1101 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- 17520-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INSTRUMENTS LIST Contract No.01632 SECTION 17910 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide and install the required hardware to monitor and control the input/output subsystem. The preliminarily input/output lists are attached at the end of this section. - Contractor shall coordinate with Owner and Engineer to verify all I/O physically at each site. LA B. The Contractor shall identify and document at the minimum the following: 1. All existing cable termination points at the existing panel (ensure the length is adequate without excessive butt splices for the new control panel). - 2. Functionality as well as electrical characteristic of each cable. 3. Label each cable in preparation for the final panel transfer with understanding that any given site cannot be down for more than an 8 hour period. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit an Input/Output list in Excel format, that includes PLC panel number, card and point location, configuration information, point description, point function and tag name. B. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCT 2.01 GENERAL A. The Input/Output list shall contain all items to be configuration items of the point and shall be capable of being imported and exported into the system via an Excel spread sheet. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INPUT/OUTPUT LISTS A. Refer to the Input/Output sheets at the end of the specification. SEE FOLLOWING ATTACHED SHEETS FTWH1101 17910-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 aL SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION INPUT/OUTPUT LIST MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No. 01632 Type 106i6dlption Lbbp PLC 14` CbndMon dumber IMOLIBU$In J Address Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal DI High Service Pump 1 Running 100-01 100001 blocks, loop check needed High Service Pump 1 Discharge New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Valve Open 100-01 100008 loop check needed High Service Pump 1 Discharge New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, l DI Valve Closed 100-01 100009 loop check needed New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI High Service Pump 1 MPR Failure 100-01 100010 loop check needed ►• New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI High Service Pump 1 Remote Enable 100-01 100011 loop check needed New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DO High Service Pump 1 Run Command 100-01 000001 loop check needed New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DO High Service Pump 1 Stop Command 100-01 000002 loop check needed High Service Pump 1 Pump Start New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Sequence Failure 100-01 100012 loop check needed Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal DI High Service Pump 2 Running 100-02 100002 blocks, loop check needed High Service Pump 2 Discharge New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Valve Open 100-02 100013 loop check needed High Service Pump 2 Discharge New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Valve Closed 100-02 100014 loop check needed New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI High Service Pump 2 MPR Failure 100-02 100015 loop check needed New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI High Service Pump 2 Remote Enable 100-02 100016 loop check needed New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DO High Service Pump 2 Run Command 100-02 000003 loop check needed New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DO High Service Pump 2 Stop Command 100-02 000004 loop check needed High Service Pump 2 Pump Start New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Sequence Failure 100-02 100017 loop check needed Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal DI High Service Pump 3 Running 100-03 100003 blocks, loop check needed High Service Pump 3 Discharge New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Valve Open 100-03 100018 loop check needed High Service Pump 3 Discharge New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Valve Closed 100-03 100019 loop check needed New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI IHigh Service Pump 3 MPR Failure 100-03 100020 loop check needed New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI High Service Pump 3 Remote Enable 100-03 100021 loop check needed New I/O,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DO High Service Pump 3 Run Command 100-03 000005 loop check needed New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, _ DO High Service Pump 3 Stop Command 100-03 000006 loop check needed High Service Pump 3 Pump Start New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Sequence Failure 100-03 100022 loop check needed Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal DI High Service Pump 4 Running 100-04 1 100004 Iblocks, loop check needed Ff W H 1101 17910-2 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SEPTEMBER 2011 — MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INPUT/OUTPUT LIST Contract No. 01632 Type Il+escnption a Loop PI.0 f 4' Cond�t�on .- XZ S High Service Pump 4 Discharge New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Valve Open 100-04 100023 loop check needed High Service Pump 4 Discharge New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Valve Closed 100-04 100024 loop check needed New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI High Service Pump 4 MPR Failure 100-04 100025 loop check needed New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI High Service Pump 4 Remote Enable 100-04 100026 loop check needed New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DO High Service Pump 4 Run Command 100-04 000007 loop check needed New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, -J DO High Service Pump 4 Stop Command 100-04 000008 loop check needed High Service Pump 4 Pump Start New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Sequence Failure 100-04 100027 loop check needed Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal DI High Service Pump 5 Running 100-05 100005 blocks, loop check needed High Service Pump 5 Discharge New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Valve Open 100-05 100028 loop check needed High Service Pump 5 Discharge New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Valve Closed 100-05 100029 loop check needed New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI High Service Pump 5 MPR Failure 100-05 100030 loop check needed New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI High Service Pump 5 Remote Enable 100-05 100031 loop check needed New 1/0,terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DO High Service Pump 5 Run Command 100-05 000009 loop check needed New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DO High Service Pump 5 Stop Command 100-05 000010 loop check needed High Service Pump 5 Pump Start New 1/0, terminate to exsiting terminal blocks, DI Sequence Failure 100-05 100032 loop check needed High Service Pump 1 Flow(0-20 Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal Al MGD) 102-01 300001 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument High Service Pump 2 Flow(0-40 Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal Al MGD) 102-02 300002 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument High Service Pump 3 Flow(0-40 Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal Al MGD) 102-03 300003 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument High Service Pump 4 Flow(0-40 Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal Al MGD) 102-04 300004 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument High Service Pump 5 Flow(0-40 Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal Al MGD) 102-05 300006 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument High Service Water Temperature (0- Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal AI 100 deg F) Existing 300007 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument FrWH1101 17910-3 .. SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SEPTEMBER 2011 MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INPUT/OUTPUT LIST Contract No. 01632 'Y t3es iptloq� Loop PLC 14 Condition •• ^Number M+pOBUS r wr Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal Al Service Water Flow(0-3 MGD) Existing 300008 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument Al lSouth Holly Tap Water Chlorine Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal Resudual (0-5 ml/L) Existing 300010 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal AI South Holly Clearwell Level (0-25 ft) 103 300011 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument South Holly Tap Water Turbidity(0-1 Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal Al NTU) Existing 300012 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument High Service Discharge Pressure(0- Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal Al 1200 PSI) 104 300005 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument - Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal Al Control Power Voltage (0-150 Volts) Existing 300013 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal Al lControl Power Current(0-30 Amp) Existing 300014 blocks, loop check needed, recalibrate instrument Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal DI High Water Level alarm Existing 100006 blocks, loop check needed Existing 1/0, re-terminate to existing terminal DI Pulse Meter Existing 1 100007 Iblocks, loop check needed FfWH1101 17910-4 SOUTH HOLLY WIP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- SEPTEMBER 2011 MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS INPUT/OUTPUT LIST Contract No.01632 SECTION 17920 CONTROL NARRATIVE TABLE OF CONTENTS: A. South Holly Clearwell Level Transmitter: Loop 103..........................................................2 B. High Service Discharge Pressure Transmitter: Loop 104..................................................3 C. Flow Meter: Loop 102-01, 102-02, 102-03, 102-04, 102-05.............................................3 D. High Service Pumps: Loop 100........................................................................................4 E. Operator Interface Panel: Loop 105.................................................................................5 F. Prime Pump Control Panel: Loop 101...............................................................................6 FTWH1101 17920-1 SEPTEMBER 2011 - SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONTROL NARRATIVE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this section. - B. Specification 17910—Input Output List 1.02 SUMMARY A. Configure, design, program and test the required process control logics that are defined in the provided Control Narrative. - B. The developed programs and configuration shall completely meet the required Plant operation and process control. C. All the developed programs, including PLC programs and configuration, HMI system configuration and screens, shall be completely tested before the system field startup and commissioning. D. The following paragraphs are a general outline of the process control and plant operation for the City of Fort Worth South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit the PLC program design submittal prior to the Factory Acceptance Test. The submittals shall include: 1. One copy of PLC program print-out in electronic PDF format. 2. Tag name convention. 3. Control strategy narrative. 4. PLC I/O List. B. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCT 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.02 GENERAL A. The Input/Output list shall contain all items (Field, HMI, and Peer-to-Peer) to be configured for the point and shall be capable of being imported and exported into the system via an Excel spread sheet. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL NARRATIVES A. South Holly Clearwell Level Transmitter: Loop 103 FTWH1101 17920-2 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONTROL NARRATIVE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 I. Controller: High Service Pump Station PLC(HSPS PLC) 2. Description: The instrument provides the Clearwell level. 3. Associated Equipments and Instruments ® N/A 4. Controller Programming and Configuration Reauired Programming and Calculated Alarms ® N/A (reconnected inputs) Associated Process Control ® N/A 5. HMI Required Programming and Configuration HMI Screens ® N/A(reconnected inputs) HMI System Configuration ® N/A (reconnected inputs) 6. Associated I/O Reference Specification 17910—Input Output List B. High Service Discharge Pressure Transmitter: Loop 104 1. Controller: High Service Pump Station PLC(HSPS PLC) 2. Description: The instrument provides the current pressure reading on the discharge header of the high service pump station. 3. Controller Programming and Configuration Reguired Programming and Calculated Alarms ® N/A(reconnected inputs) Associated Process Control ® N/A 4. HMI Required Programming and Configuration HMI Screens ® N/A (reconnected inputs) HMI Ststem Configuration ® N/A (reconnected inputs) 5. Associated I/O Reference Specification 17910—Input Output List C. Flow Meter: Loop 102-01, 102-02, 102-03, 102-04, 102-05 FfWH1101 17920-3 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONTROL NARRATIVE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 ]. Controller: High Service Pump Station PLC(HSPS PLC) 2. Description: The differential pressure flow meter instrument provides the current flow reading. The Controller continuously monitors the flow rates and provides the current rates for the SCADA HMI screens and the OIT. 3. Associated Equipments and Instruments ® N/A 4. Controller Programming and Configuration — Reauired Programming and Calculated Alarms ® N/A(reconnected inputs) ` Associated Process Control ® N/A HMI Required Programming and Configuration HMI Screens ® N/A(reconnected inputs) HMI System Configuration -� ® N/A(reconnected inputs) Associated I/O Reference Specification 17910—Input Output List D. High Service Pumps: Loop 100 1. Controller: High Service Pump Station PLC (HSPS PLC) 2. Description: _ The following paragraphs will discuss the High Service Pumps Control. 3. Control Modes - Provide following operation mode for the pump controls: SCADA Manual Mode Each high service pump shall be programmed to be controlled manually from SCADA HMI operator's console. SCADA Automatic Mode N/A 4. Controller Programming and Configuration Rye uired Programming and Calculated Alarms ® SCADA Manual/Auto Selection ® Start Command FfWH1101 17920-4 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONTROL NARRATIVE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS + Contract No.01632 ® Stop Command ® Monitor LOR Remote Position ® Running Status ® MPR Fault Status ® Discharge Valve Open Status ® Discharge Valve Closed Status Associated Process Control ® Prime Pump Control Panel, Loop 101 S. HMI Required Programming and Configuration NMI Screens ® LOR Switch Position Indication ® RUNNING/STOPPED Indication ® MPR Fault Indication ® Display Pump Runtime/Starts ® Pump Runtime/Starts Reset ® Pump Runtime/Starts Reset Date/Time Display HMI System Configuration ® Pump Fail Alarm and Event Log 6. Associated I/O Reference Specification 17910—Input Output List E. Operator Interface Panel: Loop 105 1. Controller: High Service Pump Station PLC (HSPS PLC) 2. Description: The Operator Interface Panel will display information provided by the high service pump station PLC. 3. Associated Equipments and Instruments ® High Service Pump 1 Flow Meter, Loop 102-01 ® High Service Pump 2 Flow Meter, Loop 102-02 ® High Service Pump 3 Flow Meter, Loop 102-03 ® High Service Pump 4 Flow Meter, Loop 102-04 ® High Service Pump 5 Flow Meter, Loop 102-05 ® South Holly Clearwell Level Transmitter, Loop 103 ® High Service Discharge Pressure Transmitter, Loop 104 4. Controller Programming and Configuration Rye uired Programming and Calculated Alarms ® High Service Pump 1 Flow ® High Service Pump 2 Flow High Service Pump 3 Flow ® High Service Pump 4 Flow ® High Service Pump 5 Flow ® Totalized Flow ® South Holly Clearwell Level ® High Service Discharge Pressure FfWH1101 17920-5 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONTROL NARRATIVE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract No.01632 .r S. OIT Required Programming and Configuration OIT Screens ® High Service Pump 1 Flow _ ® High Service Pump 2 Flow ® High Service Pump 3 Flow ® High Service Pump 4 Flow ® High Service Pump 5 Flow — ® Totalized Flow ® South Holly Clearwell Level ® High Service Discharge Pressure 6. Associated I/O Reference Specification 17910—Input Output List F. Prime Pump Control Panel: Loop 101 I. Controller: Medium Voltage MCC starters 2. Description: The prime pump control panel handles the start and stop of the primer pumps based on start and stop commands received from the pump starters located in the MV MCCs. 3. Associated Equipments and Instruments ® High Service Pump 1 ® High Service Pump 2 ® High Service Pump 3 ® High Service Pump 4 ` ® High Service Pump 5 Controller Programming and Configuration Required Programming and Calculated Alarms ® N/A,wired logic Associated Process Control ® High Service Pumps, Loop 100 5. HMI Required Programming and Configuration HMI Screens ® N/A HMI System Configuration ® N/A — 6. Associated I/O Reference Specification 17910—Input Output List R_ END OF SECTION FfWH1101 17920-6 SEPTEMBER 2011 SOUTH HOLLY WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION- CONTROL NARRATIVE MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PART F Bond No: 105691426 PAYMENT BOND THE STATE OF TEXAS § § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF TARRANT § That we, (1), Archer Western Contractors,LLC as Principal herein, and (2) Travelers Casualty and Surety Company , a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of(3) Connecticut , as surety, are held and firmly bound _ unto the City of Fort Worth, a municipal corporation located in Tarrant and Denton Counties, Texas, Obligee herein, in the amount of Three Million Seven Hundred and Eighty Three Thousand _ Dollars($ 3,783,000 l for the payment whereof,the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, _ jointly and severally, firmly by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee dated the 10 day of_ January , 20 12, which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as if fully and to the same extent as if copied at length, for the following project: South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station— Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH,that if the said Principal shall faithfully make payment to each and every claimant (as defined in Chapter 2253, Texas Government Code, as amended supplying labor or materials in the prosecution of the work under the contract, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise, to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said statute, to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the duly authorized representatives of the Principal and the Surety have executed this instrument. SIGNED and SEALED this 10 day of January ,2012 . Archer Western Contract rs, LLC PRINCIP ATTEST: By: 1 c . Name: Matthew Walsh n ipal) Secretary Sean C. Walsh Title: president (S E A Q Address: 2121 Avenue J, Suite 600 ;\ Arlington, Texas 76006 Witness as16 Princi 1 Colleen Becker �• Travelers Casualty and Surety Company SURETY ATTE T � By: &VIV---- MR ( { Name: Kerry tecora Witness :81NMOM Kathleen C. O'Rourke Attorney In Fad (S E A Q Address: One Tower Square Hartford, CT 06183 s a to Surety Jodi Wallace Telephone Number. (630) 961-1037 NOTE: (1) Correct name of Principal (Contractor). (2) Correct name of Surety. (3) State of incorporation of Surety Telephone number of surety must be stated. In addition, an original copy of Power of Attomey shall be attached to Bond by the Attomey-in-Fact. The date of bond shall not be prior to date of Contract. w _ Bond No: 105691426 PERFORMANCE BOND THE STATE OF TEXAS § § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF TARRANT § That we, (1) Archer Western Contractors LLC as Principal herein, and(2) Travelers Casualty and Surety Company a corporation organized under the laws of the State of(3) Connecticut and who is authorized to issue surety bonds in the State of Texas, Surety herein, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a municipal corporation located in Tarrant and Denton Counties, Texas, Obligee herein, in the sum of_Three Million Seven Hundred and Eighty Three Thousand Dollars($ 3JU,000 )for the payment of which sum we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee dated the 10 day of January .2012 .,a copy of which is attached hereto and made a part hereof for all purposes, for the construction of South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station- Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such, if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications, and contract documents T and shall fully indemnify and hold harmless the Obligee from all costs and damages which Obligee may suffer by reason of Principal's default, and reimburse and repay Obligee for all outlay and expense that Obligee may incur in making good such default, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise,to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of such statute, to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the duly authorized representatives of the Principal and the Surety have executed this instrument. SIGNED and SEALED this 10 day of January 20 12. Archer Western Contractor , LLC PRINCIPAL " ATTEST: By: Name: Matthew Walsh ri al) Secretary Sean C. Walsh Title: President (S E A L) Address: 2121 Avenue J, Suite 600 Arlington,Texas 76006 ess as to Pri ipal Colleen Becker Travelers Casualty and Surety Company SURETY ATTEST: By: zPf%A1- A))" Name: Kerry Pecora Witness XJX00$ Kathleen C. O'Rourke Attorney In Fact (S E A L) Address: One Tower Square Hartford, CT `. 06183 W n s to Surety Jodi Wallace Telephone Number. (630)961-7037 �► NOTE: (1) Correct name of Principal (Contractor). (2) Correct name of Surety. (3) State of incorporation of Surety Telephone number of surety must be stated. In addition, an original copy of Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by the Attorney-in-Fact. The date of bond shall not be prior to date of Contract. Bond No: 105691426 Y MAINTENANCE BOND THE STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF TARRANT § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That Archer Western Contractors,LLC (`Contractor"), as principal, and,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut (`Surety"), do hereby acknowledge themselves to be held and bound to pay unto the City of Fort Worth, a Municipal Corporation chartered by virtue of Constitution and laws y of the State of Texas, ("City") in Tarrant County,Texas, the sum of Three Million Seven Hundred and Eighty Three Dollars ($ 3,783,000 ), lawful money of the United States, for payment of which sum well and truly be made unto said City and its successors, said Contractor and Surety do hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,assigns and successors,jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned, however, that: WHEREAS, said Contractor has this day entered Into a written Contract with the City of Fort Worth, dated the 10 of January . 2012 , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof,for the performance of the following described public improvements: South Holly Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station— Motor and Switchgear Replacement and Electrical Improvements the same being referred to herein and in said contract as the Work and being designated as project number(s) 01623 and said contract, including all of the specifications, conditions, addenda, change orders and written instruments referred to therein as Contract Documents being incorporated herein and being made a part hereof; and, WHEREAS, in said Contract, Contractor binds itself to use such materials and to so construct the work that it will remain in good repair and condition for and during a period of after the date of the final acceptance of the work by the City; and WHEREAS, said Contractor binds itself to maintain said work in good repair and condition for said term of Two (2)years; and WHEREAS, said Contractor binds itself to repair or reconstruct the Work in whole or in part at any time within said period, if in the opinion of the Director of the City of Fort Worth Department of V"°4 e"" , it be necessary; and, i WHEREAS, said Contractor binds itself, upon receiving notice of the need therefore to repair or reconstruct said Work as herein provided. `i NOW THEREFORE, if said Contractor shall keep and perform its said agreement to maintain, repair or reconstruct said Work in accordance with all the terms and conditions of said Contract, these presents shall be null and void, and have no force or effect. Otherwise, this Bond shall be and remain in full force and effect, and the City shall have and recover from •• Contractor and Surety damages in the premises as prescribed by said Contract. This obligation shall be a continuing one and successive recoveries may be had hereon for successive breaches until the full amount hereof is exhausted. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,this instrument is executed in 3 counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, this 10 day of January ,A.D.20 12 ATTEST: Archer Western Contractors, LLC (S E A Contractor kd G, By- Seanocrery Sean C. Walsh Name: Matthew Walsh Title: President ATTEST: Travelers Casualty and Surety Company (S E A L) Surety L '6� .� By: Witness 2 Jodi Wallace Nam: Kerry ecora Title: Attorney-in-Fact One Tower Square Hartford, CT 06183 Address i WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER �A POWER OF ATTORNEY TRAVELERS.1 Farmington Casualty Company St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company Attorney-In Fact No. 224347 Certificate No. 004633063 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota,that Farmington Casualty Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut,that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland,that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa,and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.,is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the"Companies"),and that the Companies do hereby make,constitute and appoint 1 Kathleen C.O'Rourke,Brian R.Walsh,J.William Ernstrom,Jodi Wallace,and Kerry Pecora of the City of Chicago State of Illinois their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above,to sign,execute,seal and acknowledge any and all bonds,recognizances,conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons,guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. M 9th VCWITNEkly-WHEREOF,the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed,this day of Pernber 2011 Farmington Casualty Company St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company G/.S U.� � F\0.E� 'M IMS J•ly IN3U l ,,�f\'ANO Y G n N�dM1'ORAitp n ��ORPORA)Fm (b::rppPORAT�;:^'� y 9� I 1 9 8 2 o Z 1.9/! i �' ? z E •».. .n s a IIARTFORD � �( R0. �' • S; XD 1951 �' �'•SEAU%ol �i• -� � CONN. n \ oa+w.` 4 Ng 1 < r .+ s� v'••.......%ark o•:'•... :'a° � e� � `V State of Connecticut By: City of Hartford ss. Georg Thompson,U., ice President 9th December 2011 On this the day of before me personally appeared George W.Thompson, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,and that he,as such,being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. G•T� n A, l' In Witness Whereof,I hereunto set my hand and official seal. ihR W w" My Commission expires the 30th day of June,2016. U� {¢ Mane C.Tetreault,Notary Public 58440-6-11 Printed in U.S.A. # INARNING:TO19 POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOLPT THE RED BORDER WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER + This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc., St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,which resolutions are now in full force and effect,reading as follows: RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,any Second Vice President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds,recognizances,contracts of indemnity,and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking,and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company,provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that any bond,recognizance,contract of indemnity,or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when(a)signed by the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President,any Second Vied President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secre'ary or Assistant Secretary;or(b)duly executed(under seal,if required)by one or more Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of each of the following officers:President,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President, T any Assistant Vice President,any Secretary,any Assistant Secretary,and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents,Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I,Kevin E.Hughes,the undersigned,Assistant Secretary,of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.,St.Pa Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. _ T IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this 10 day of J a n u aX y 20 1-2 Kevin E.Hughes,Assistant Sec tary G�SUA F\RE 6 �N.�Mg j 1NSU ,ltY ANO ",rt� ?�—yA�L ` +}• M ' �P rE011PORA��! P�Jp••POAANgi"F 0'J O`9 �IS•3Wf)/•� 4.,yy, "Y! 6 0 �diPCRATEo m o! Fim W:coa >c^\ � ]�• �i yLt� p 19� ` �. �• is —._ a HARTFCfID, Y WIR'fFCH0.fJ t • ! 1951 mot•SEAL 1L i CONN. �• R a � H ��W�E !Y.ANNa 1p........'N yi 'N�• t 4111 A!N To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney,call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com.Please refer to the Attorney-In-Fact number,the T above-named individuals mcd the details of the bond to which the power is attached. T T T T WAFtNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER INSURED Archer western Contractors, Ltd. 2121 Avenue Suite 103 Arlington Tx 76006 USA Attachment City of Fort worth water Department (owner), its officers, employees and servants CP & Y, Inc. (Engineer) are an Additional Insured pertaining to General Liability, Automobile Liability and Excess Liability with respects to liability arising out of the Named Insured's operations on the referenced project. Professional services for Architects, Engineers, Consultants, etc. are excluded. A waiver of Subrogation in favor of City of Fort worth water Department (owner), its officers, employees and servants; and CP & Y, Inc. (Engineer) is included on the workers compensation policy. This insurance will be Primary and Non-Contributory to the General Liability, Automobile Liability and Excess Liability policies with respect to any other available insurance to the Additional Insureds for the negligence of the insured on the referenced project. The General Liability policy includes the perils of (xCU) Explosion, Collapse and underground. Certificate No: 570044594496 POLICY NUMBER: 41 PKG2394805 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY .. CG 2010 07 04 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Or anfzation s : Locations Of Covered Operations ,a Any person or organization,you have agreed by means of a written contract or agreement, to add as an additional insured;such person or organization is an additional in- sured on this policy. When required by a written contract or agreement,cover- age afforded to these additional insured parties will be primary to and non-contributory with any other insurance available to that person or organization. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. A. Section 11 — Who Is An Insured is amended to B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these include as an additional insured the person(s) or additional insureds, the following additional exclu- organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only sions apply: with respect to liability for"bodily injury", "property This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury"or damage" or "personal and advertising injury" "property damage"occurring after: caused,in whole or in part, by: 1. All work, including materials, parts or equip- 1. Your acts or omissions;or ment furnished in connection with such work, 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your on the project (other than service, mainten- behalf; ante or repairs) to be performed by or on be- in the performance of your ongoing operations for half of the additional insured(s) at the location the additional insured(s) at the location(s) desig- of the covered operations has been completed; nated above. or 2. That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its in- tended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor en- gaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project.. CG 2010 07 04 ©ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 Page 1 of 1 0 c POLICY NUMBER: 41 PKG2394605 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 37 07 04 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE -i Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Location And Description Of Completed Opera- Or Or anization s : tions Any person or organization,you have agreed by means of a written contract or agreement,to add as an additional insured;such person or organization is an additional insured on this policy. When required by a written contract or agreement, coverage afforded to these additional insured parties will be primary to and non-contributory with any other insurance available to that person or organization. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above,will be shown in the Declarations. Section II — Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an additional insured the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to liability for 'bodily injury" or "property damage" caused, in whole or in part, by"your work" at the location designated and described in the ` schedule of this endorsement performed for that additional insured and included in the "products- completed operations hazard". CG 20 37 07 04 ©ISO Properties, Inc.,2004 Page 1 of 1 13 WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY WC 00 0313 POLICY NUMBER: 41WCI2282204 WAIVER OF OUR RIGHTTO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule.(This agreement applies only to the extent that you perform work under a written contract that requires you to obtain this agreement from us.) This agreement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. SCHEDULE ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION WHERE WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER IS REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT WITH SUCH PERSON OR ORGANIZATION This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached and is effective on the date issued unless otherwise stated. (The information below is required only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) Endorsement Effective 06/01/2011 Policy No. 41 WC12394705 Endorsement No. Insured THE WALSH GROUP, LTD. Premium $ INCL. Insurance Company ARCH INSURANCE COMPANY Countersigned By DATE OF ISSUE: f'1983 National Councii on Compensation Insurance. c . ow THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. NOTICE OF CANCELLATION - CERTIFICATE HOLDERS (SPECIFIED DAYS) n The person(s) or organization(s) listed or described in the Schedule below have requested that they receive written notice of cancellation when this policy is cancelled by us. We will mail or deliver to the Person(s) or Organization(s) listed or described in the Schedule a copy of the written notice of cancellation that we sent to you. If possible, such copies of the notice will be mailed at least 60 days, except for cancellation for non-payment of premium which will be mailed 10 days, prior to the effective date of the cancellation, to the address or addresses of certificate holders as provided by your broker or agent. Schedule Person(s) or Organization(s) including mailing address: All certificate holders where written notice of the cancellation of this policy is required by written contract, permit or agreement with the Named Insured and whose names and addresses will be provided by the broker or agent listed in the Declarations Page of this policy for the purposes of complying with such request. This notification of cancellation of the policy is intended as a courtesy only. Our failure to provide such notification to the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule will not extend any policy cancellation date nor impact or negate any cancellation of the policy. This endorsement does not entitle the person(s) or organization(s) listed or described in the Schedule above to any benefit, rights or protection under this policy. — Any provision of this endorsement that is in conflict with a statute or rule is hereby amended to conform to that statute or rule. All other terms and conditions of this policy remain unchanged. Endorsement Number: Policy Number:41 PKG2394805 Named Insured:THE WALSH GROUP, LTD. This endorsement is effective on the inception date of this Policy unless otherwise stated herein: Endorsement Effective Date: 00 ML0087 00 11 10 Page 1 of 1 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. NOTICE OF CANCELLATION-CERTIFICATE HOLDERS (SPECIFIED DAYS) The person(s) or organization(s) listed or described in the Schedule below have requested that they receive written notice of cancellation when this policy is cancelled by us. We will mail or deliver to the Person(s) or Organization(s) listed or described in the Schedule a copy of the written notice of cancellation that we sent to you, If possible, such copies of the notice will be mailed at least 60 days, except for cancellation for non-payment of premium which will be mailed 10 days, prior to the effective date of the cancellation, to the address or addresses of certificate holders as provided by your broker or agent. Schedule Person(s)or Organization(s)including mailing address: All certificate holders where written notice of the cancellation of this policy is requiied by written contract, permit or agreement with the Named insured and whose names and addresses will be .. provided by the broker or:agent listed in the Declarations Page of this policy for the purposes of complying with such request. This notification of cancellation of the policy is intended as a courtesy only. Our failure to.provide such notification to the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule will not extend any policy cancellation date nor impact or negate any cancellation of the policy. This endorsement does not entitle the person(s) or organization(s) listed or described in the Schedule above to any benefit, rights or protection under this policy. Any provision of this endorsemert that is in conflict with a statute or rule is hereby amended to conform to that statute or rule. All other terms and conditions of this policy remain unchanged. Endorsement Number:003 Policy Number:41 WC12394705 Named Insured:THE WALSH GROUP, LTD. This endorsement is effective on the inception date of this Policy unless otherwise stated herein: Endorsement Effective Date: 00 ML0087 00 11 10 Page 1 of 1 Endorsement No.:20 .. This Endorsement,effective:June 1,2011 (at 12:01 A.M.prevailing time at the address stated in Item 1.(b)of the Declarations) forms a part of Policy No.:030561 as Issued to:The Walsh Group Ltd By:Allied World National Assurance Company SCHEDULE OF ADDITIONAL CANCELLATION NOTICE Persons or Organization(s) Mailing Address " Should it become necessary to provide additional notice of cancellation,it is the responsibility of the broker listed on the Item 9(a)and(b)of the Declarations Page to provide a complete list of list of certificate holders at time of cancellation which must include the company name,mailing address and individual contact where the cancellation notice is to be sent All other terms and conditions of this policy remain unchanged. Allied World National Assurance Company By. t Todd Germano Title: President,U.S.Property and Casualty w Page 1 of 1 Page 1 of 1 Endorsement No.:19 This Endorsement,effective:June 1,2011 (at 12:01 A.M.prevailing time at the address stated in Item 1.(b)of the Declarations) fortes a part of Policy No.:03056149 Issued to:The Walsh Group Ltd By:Allied World National Assurance Company ILLINOIS AMENDATORY ENDORSEMENT A. It is agreed that Paragraph B.Cancellation of SECTION V—CONDITIONS is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following: B. Cancellation 1. The first Named Insured designated in item I. (a) of the Declarations may cancel this policy by mailing or delivering to the company,at the address stated in Item 8. (b)of the Declarations, advance written notice stating when such cancellation is to take effect. 2. The company may cancel this policy by mailing to the first Named Insured (by registered, certified,or other first class mail),the agent of record and any mortgagee or lien holder at the last addresses known by the company written notice stating the reason for cancellation, not less than thirty (30)days for ten (10) days in the event any premium is not paid when due], in advance of the cancellation date.A U.S.Post Office proof of mailing of such notice to the first Named Insured at the address stated in Item 1.(b)of the Declarations will be sufficient proof of notice. This proof of notice will be maintained by the company. The company shall also mail written notice of such cancellation not less than thirty (30) days [or ten (10) days in the event any premium is not paid when due] in advance of the cancellation date to the person(s) or organization(s) listed in any Schedule of Additional Cancellation Notice attached to this policy_ 3. If this policy has been in effect for sixty-one(61)days or more, the company may cancel this policy by mailing to the first Named Insured(by registered,certified,or other first class mail),the agent of record and any mortgagee or lien holder at the last known mailing addresses known to the company written notice stating the reason for .� cancellation,not less than sixty(60)days for ten(10)days in the event any premium is not paid when due], in advance of the cancellation date. However, the company may only cancel this policy for the following reasons: a) Nonpayment of premium; b) The policy was obtained through a material misrepresentation; c) Any insured has violated any of the terms and conditions of the policy; d) The risk originally accepted has measurably increased; h e) The company certifies to the Director of Insurance of the loss of reinsurance for all or a substantial part of the underlying risk;or f) The Director of Insurance determines that the continuation of the policy could place the insurer in violation of Illinois Insurance Laws. � 1 l Endorsement No.: 19 This Endorsement,effective:June 1,2011 (at 12:01 A.M.prevailing time at the address stated in Item I.(b)of the Declarations) forms a part of Policy No.:03056149 Issued to:The Walsh Group Ltd By:Allied World National Assurance Company A U.S.Post Office proof of mailing of such notice to the first Named Insured at the address stated in Item 1. (b)of the Declarations will be sufficient proof of notice. This proof of notice will be maintained by the company. 4. The Policy Period of this policy will end on the date and hour specified in the cancellation notice. 5. If the insured cancels this policy,the company will be due the greater of either: a) The sum of L The earned amount of the Minimum And Advance Premium stated in Item 7. (a)of the Declarations;plus ii. 10%of the unearned amount of the Minimum And Advance Premium stated in Item 7.(a)of the Declarations;or T b) The Minimum Earned Premium,if any,stated in Item 7.(b)of the Declarations. After deduction of the amount due the company as determined above,the remaining v amount of any unearned premium previously paid to the company will be returned to the first Named Insured. 6. If this policy is cancelled by the company,then the company shall return the pro rats r portion of any unearned premium,previously paid to the company,to the fast Named Insured. 7. Payment or tender of any unearned premium by the company will not be a condition precedent to the effectiveness of cancellation, but the company shall make such payment as soon as practicable. The company's check or its representative's check, mailed or delivered to the fast Named Insured,will be sufficient tender of any refund due any insured. S. Any of these provisions that conflict with a law that controls the cancellation of this policy is changed by this paragraph to comply with that law. B. It is agreed that the following are added to SECTION V—CONDITIONS Nonrenewal t The company may non renew this policy, by mailing to the first Named Insured (by registered, certified, or other first class mail),the agent of record and any mortgagee or lien holder at the last known addresses known to the company, written notice of nonrenewal,stating the reason for nonrenewal at least sixty(60)days before the end of the +� Policy Period.A U.S.Post Office proof of mailing of such notice will be sufficient proof of notice.This proof of notice will be maintained by the company. Bankruptcy The bankruptcy or insolvency of the Named Insured will not relieve the company from liability under this policy. .. 2 Endorsement No.: 19 This Endorsement,effective:June 1,2011 (at 12:01 A.M.prevailing time at the address stated in Item 1.(b)of the Declarations) forms a part of Policy No.:03056149 Issued to:The Walsh Group Ltd By:Allied World National Assurance Company All other terms and conditions of this policy remain unchanged. Allied World National Assurance Company By: s-� Todd Germano Title: President,U.S.Property and Casualty 3 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKERS' COMPENSATION LAW Pursuant to V.T.C.A. Labor Code §406.96 (2000), as amended, Contractor certifies that it provides workers' compensation insurance coverage for all of its employees employed on City of Fort Worth Project No. FIWI-1101 ; CONTRACTOR Archer Western Contractors,LLC. an izid �� Name: Matthew Walsh Title: President y Date: January 10, 2012 to STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF TARRANT § Before me, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared Matthew Walsh , known to me to be the person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged to me that he executed the same as the act and deed of Archer Western Contractors, LLC. for the purposes and consideration therein expressed and in the capacity therein stated. Given Under My Hand and Seal of Office this d of 20 `��•o��Y ue�,�.•• Notary Public in and or a State of •� - Texas Rev 4-15-10 PART G ClnrSECIMANY 4�808 cwmcT ao. CITY OF FORT WORTH,TEXAS CONTRACT THE STATE OF TEXAS KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS COUNTY OF TARRANT This Contract made and entered into this the 10 day of January ,2012 ,by and between the City of Fort Worth, a home-rule municipal corporation situated in Tarrant, Denton,Parker,and Wise Counties,Texas, by and through its duly authorized Assistant City Manager, ("Owner ), and Archer Westem Contractors LLC ("Contractor). Owner and Contractor may be referred to herein individually as a"Part`or collectively as the "Parties." WITNESSETH: That said Parties have agreed as follows: 1. That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned to be made and performed by the Owner, and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith,the said Contractor hereby agrees with the said Owner to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: FOR: SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION MOTOR AND SWITCHGEAR REPLACEMENT AND ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS -City of Fort Worth Water Project No. 01632 That the work herein contemplated shall consist of the Contractor furnishing as an independent contractor all labor,tools, appliances and materials,necessary for the construction and completion of said project in accordance with the Plans and Specifications and Contract Documents prepared by or on behalf of the City of Fort Worth for the Water Department of the City of Fort Worth adopted by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth,which Plans and Specifications and Contract Documents are hereto attached and made a part of this Contract the same as If written herein. 3. The Contractor hereby agrees and binds itself to commence the construction of said work within ten(10)days after being noted in writing to do.so by the Water Department of the City of Fort Worth. - 4. The Contractor hereby agrees to prosecute said wont with reasonable diligence after the commencement thereof and to fully complete and finish the same ready for the inspection and approval of the Water Department of the City of Fort Worth and City Council of the City of Fort Worth within a period of 520 Calendar days. OFFICIAL RECORD 6/17/09 C-1 CITY SECRETARY FT. WORTH, TX If the Contractor should fail to complete the work as set forth in the Plans and Specifications and Contract Documents within the time so stipulated, plus any additional time allowed as provided in the General Conditions,there shall be deducted from any monies due or which may thereafter become due him,the sum of$1 0. 00.00 per working day, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages, the Contractor and its Surety shall be liable to the Owner for such deficiency. 5. Should the Contractor fail to begin the work herein provided for within the time herein fixed or to carry on and complete the same according to the true meaning of the intent and terms of said Plans,Specifications and Contract Documents,then the Owner shall have the right to either demand the Surety to take over the work and complete same in accordance with the Contract Documents or to take charge of and complete the work in such manner as it may deem proper, and if in the completion thereof,the cost to the Owner shall exceed the contract price or prices set forth in the Plans and Specifications made a part hereof,the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay Owner on demand in writing,setting forth and specifying an itemized statement of the total cost thereof, said excess cost. 6. Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify the Owner, Owner's Engineer and Architect, and their personnel at the project site for Contractor's sole negligence. In addition, Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify,hold harmless and defend, at its own expense, the Owner, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all claims or suits for property loss, property damage, personal injury, including death, arising out of, or alleged to arise , out of,the work and services to be performed hereunder by Contractor, its officers, agents, employees,subcontractors, licensees or invitees,whether or not any such Injury, damage or ■ death Is caused, In whole or In Part by the negllgence or aligged negiigance of Owner,Its officers,servants, or employees. Contractor likewise covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from and against any and all injuries to Owner's officers,servants and .. employees and any damage, loss or destruction to property of the Owner arising from the performance.of any of the terms and conditions of this Contract,whether or not any such injury or damage is caused In whole or in part by the negligence or altered negligence of Owner, its officers,servants or employees. In the event Owner receives a written claim for damages against the Contractor or its subcontractors prior to final payment,final payment shall not be made until Contractor either(a) submits to Owner satisfactory evidence that the claim has been settled and/or a release from the F' claimant involved, or(b)provides Owner with a letter from Contractor's liability insurance carrier that the claim has been referred to the insurance carrier. Jr, The Director may, if deemed appropriate, refuse to accept bids on other City of Fort Worth public work from a Contractor against whom a claim for damages is outstanding as a result of work performed under a City of Fort Worth contract. .. OFFICIAL RECORD CITY SECRETARY 6/17/09 C-2 FT. WORTH,TX as P 7. The Contractor agrees, upon the execution of this Contract,and before beginning work, to make,execute and deliver to City of Fort Worth the following bonds in the name of the City of Fort Worth in a sum equal to the amount of the Contract. The form of the bond shall be as herein provided and the surety must first be acceptable to the City of Fort Worth. All bonds furnished hereunder shall meet the requirements of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code,as amended. A. If the total contract price is$25,000 or less,payment to the contractor shall be made in one lump sum. Payment shall not be made for a period of 45 calendar days from the date the work has been completed and accepted by the Owner. B. if the contract amount is in excess of$25,000, a Payment Bond shall be — executed, in the amount of the Contract, solely for the protection of all claimants supplying labor and material in the prosecution of the work. C. If the Contract amount is in excess of$100,000, a Performance Bond shall be executed,in the amount of the Contract conditioned on the faithful performance of the work in accordance with the Plans, Specifications, and Contract Documents. Said bond shall solely be for the protection of the Owner. D. A Two-year Maintenance Bond in the name of the Owner is required for all projects to insure the prompt,full and faithful performance of the general guarantee contained in the Contract Documents. 8. t The Owner agrees and binds itself to pay, and the Contractor agrees to receive,for all of the aforesaid work,and for all additions thereto or deductions therefrom,the price shown on the Proposal submitted by the successful bidder hereto attached and made a part hereof. Payment will be made in monthly installments upon actual work completed by Contractor and accepted by the Owner and receipt of invoice from the Contractor. The agreed upon total Contract amount (includinglexcluding)alternates N/A,shall D 3,703,000.00 Dollars,{$ l: 9. It is further agreed that the performance of this Contract,whether in whole or in part, shall not be sublet or assigned to anyone else by said Contractor without the written consent of the Owner. Any request for any sublease or assignment shall be made in writing and submitted to the Director of the Water Department. 10. The Contractor agrees to pay at least the minimum wage per hour for all labor as the same is classified, promulgated and set out by the City of Fort Worth, Texas,a copy of which is attached hereto and made a part hereof the same as if it were copied verbatim herein. 11. It is mutually agreed and understood that this Contract is made and entered into by the Parties hereto with references to the existing Charter and Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth { OFFICIAL RECORD 6/17/09 c-3 CITY SECRETARY FT. (NORTH, TX and the laws of the State of Texas with references to and governing all matters affecting this Contract,and the Contractor agrees to fully comply with all the provisions of the same. IN WITNESS THEREOF,the City of Fort Worth has caused this instrument to be signed in counterparts in its name and on its behalf by the City Manager and attested by its Secretary,with the corporate seal of the City of Fort Worth attached. The Contractor has executed this instrument through its duly authorized officers in counterparts with its corporate seal attached. Done in Fort Worth,Texas,this the 10 day of.January .. .A.D.,20 1 2 :APPROV L RECOMMENDED: CITY OF FORT WORTH BY: DIRECTOR,WATER DEPARTMENT ASSISTANT CITY MANAGER - ATTEST: Archer Western Contractors, LLC. �G��F Ana CONTRACTOR // °®0°°0000000 �' jj� �s° % J /�' ITY SECRETARY Vo °��d (SEAL) (� °o 0-f p Acy Frr��i�ent a� j�,°°°°°°°°°qd TITLE A,:� ;#103 Arlington, TX 76006 ZPAS O FORM AND LEGALITY; _ ADDRESS A8&STANT CITY ATTORNEY C " ZS � D -3 �" � . lD• I Z FOFFICIALRECORD RETARY FT. TH, TX 6/17/09 C-4